specs

PROJECT MANUAL 

1807 Ross Avenue 

Suite 500 

Dallas, Texas 75201-8006 

214.303.6200 

Fax: 214.303.6300 

beckgroup.com 

NAPA CENTURY CENTER XD 12 

Napa, California 

KIP # 165582 

Issue for Bid: 07.07.11

A CENTURY THEATER FOR 

Cinemark USA 

3900 Dallas, Parkway, Suite 500 

Plano, Texas 75093 

Napa Century Center XD12 

Napa, CA 

PROJECT NO. 165582 

DATES: 

Issue for Bid : 07.07.11 

Architect: 

Kip E. Daniel Architect 

1807 Ross Avenue, Suite 500 

Dallas, Texas 75201 

TEL (214) 303-6200 

FAX (214) 303-6300 

CONSULTING ENGINEERS 

SITE 

CIVIL 

ARCHITECT 

ENGINEERS 

LPAS Architecture & Design 

Foulk, Gomez & Associates, Inc. 

2482 Natomas Park Drive, Suite 100 4777 Mangels Blvd. 

Sacramento, CA 95833 Fairfield, CA 94534 

Tel. (916) 443-0335 Tel. (707) 864-0784 

Fax. (916) 441-2823 Fax. (707) 864-0793 

Michael Millett 

Brad Foulk 

mmillett@lpasdesign.com 

brad@foulkgomez.com 

LANDSCAPE 

STRUCTURAL 

ARCHITECT 

ENGINEERS 

vanderToolen Associates 

L.A. Fuess Partners 

855 Bordeaux Way, Suite 240 3333 Lee Parkway, Suite 300 

Napa, CA 94558 Dallas, Texas 75219 

Tel. (707) 224-2299 Tel. (214) 871-7010 

Fax. (707) 224-6821 Fax. (214) 969-0065 

Stephanie Bersch 

Jeff Truly 

Stephanie@vadertoolen.com 

jtruly@lafp.com 

MEP 

LEED 

ENGINEERS 

CONSULTANT 

EnviroDesign 

900 RR 620 South, Suite C101-301 215 Yale Ave 

Austin, TX 78734 Swarthmore, PA 19081 

Tel. (512) 693-9015 Tel. (267) 303-1142 

Fax. (512) 692-9030 

Sam Patton 

Nilo Regojo 

spatton@envirodesign.biz 

nilo@greenriver-deisgn.com

Napa Century Centter XD 12 – Napa, CA #165582 

Issue for Bid : 07.07.2011 

SEALS/STAMP & INDEX PAGE 

Kip E. Daniel Architect – Kip E. Daniel, FAIA 

Dallas, TX 

ARCHITECTURAL RESPONSIBILITY 

SPEC. SECTIONS: 

00100 Instructions to Bidders 

00220 Geotechnical Information 

00300 Bid Form 

00600 Bonds and Contract Forms 

00700 General Conditions 

00800 Supplementary Conditions 

01010 Summary of Work 

01020 Allowances 

01340 Submittals 

01351 Construction Waste Management 

01352 Indoor Air Quality Management 

01410 Testing Laboratory Services 

01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 

01600 Materials and Equipment 

01701 Contract Closeout 

01710 Cleaning 

01720 Project Record Documents 

01730 Operations and Maintenance Data 

01740 Warranties and Bondst 

01750 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials 

01810 General Commissioning Requirements 

01811 Building Envelope Commissioning 

02200 Earthwork 

02362 Termite Control 

04100 Mortar and Grout 

04210 Concrete Masonry Units 

05400 Light Gauge Metal Framing 

05500 Miscellaneous Metals 

05510 Steel Stairs and Railings 

05520 Metal Fabrications 

05721 Pre-Finished Steel Railing 

05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 

06100 Rough Carpentry 

06200 Finish Carpentry and Millwork 

07110 Membrane Waterproofing 

07210 Building Insulation 

07535 Fully Adhered Single Ply Membrane Roofing 

07610 Metal Roof Panels 

07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 

07920 Sealants and Caulking 

08100 Metal Doors and Frames 

08212 Plastic Faced and Flush Wood Doors 

08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 

08625 Translucent Wall Systems 

08710 Finish Hardware and Hardware Schedule 

08810 Glass and Glazing 

08920 Glazed Aluminum Curtainwall 

09220 Lath and Portland Cement Plaster 

STAMP/SEAL BELOW: 

06.30.13

09250 Gypsum Wallboard 

09310 Ceramic Tile 

09510 Acoustical Ceilings 

09650 Resilient Flooring and Base 

09680 Carpet 

09800 Special Coatings 

09900 Painting 

09950 Wall Covering 

09960 High Performance Coatings 

09985 Pre-finished Panels 

10150 Toilet Partitions 

10200 Louvers 

10260 Protective Wallcoverings 

10520 Fire Extinguishers 

10800 Toilet Accessories 

11400 Concession Equipment 

12494 Roller Shades 

12484 Foot Grid Entrance Systems 

14240 Hydraulic Elevators 

Appendix A 

Geotechnical Report 

Appendix B 

Storm Water Management & Hydraulics Report 

Appendix C 

LEED Checklist 

END OF SECTION 

Page 2 of 2

Napa Century Center XD 12 – Napa, CA #165582 

Issue for Bid: 07.07.2011 

SEALS/STAMP & INDEX PAGE 

L.A. FUESS PARTNERS 

DALLAS, TEXAS 

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER 

STRUCTURAL RESPONSIBILITY 

SPEC. SECTIONS: 

STAMP/SEAL BELOW: 

Section 02351 

Section 03100 

Section 03200 

Section 03250 

Section 03300 

Section 03411 

Section 03600 

Section 05100 

Section 05200 

Section 05300 

Section 05320 

Section 05330 

Concrete Footings 

Structural Concrete Formwork 

Concrete Reinforcing 

Embedded Metal Assemblies and Inserts 

Structural Concrete 

Concrete Wall Panels 

Grouting Steel Base Plates 

Structural Steel 

Steel Joists 

Metal Roof Deck 

Metal Floor Deck 

Composite Metal Floor Deck and Field Welded Shear Studs

Issue for Bid: 07.07.11

Section 15000 

Section 15034 

Section 15300 

Section 15400 

Section 15500 

Section 15995 

Section 16000 

Section 16050 

Section 16400 

Section 16900 

Section 16995 

Mechanical General Conditions 

HVAC Testing and Balancing 

Fire Protection 

Plumbing 

Heating, Venting and Air Conditioning 

Mechanical Systems Commissioning 

General Conditions for Electrical Work 

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 

Auxiliary Electrical Systems 

Automatic Temp0erature Control Systems (ATCS) 

Electrical Systems Commissioning

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

JOB NO. 165582 

Issue for Bid: 07.07.2011 

Napa Century Center XD 12 

Napa, CA 

Architect: Kip E. Daniel Architect 

DIVISION 0 

CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 

00100 Instructions to Bidders 

00220 Geotechnical Information 

00300 Bid Form 

00600 Bonds and Contract Forms 

00700 General Conditions 

00800 Supplementary Conditions 

DIVISION 1 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

01010 Summary of Work 

01020 Allowances 

01340 Submittals 

01351 Construction Waste Management 

01352 Indoor Air Quality Management 

01410 Testing Laboratory Services 

01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 

01600 Materials and Equipment 

01701 Contract Closeout Procedures 

01710 Cleaning 

01720 Project Record Documents 

01730 Operations and Maintenance Data 

01740 Warranties and Bonds 

01750 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials 

01810 General Commissioning Requirements 

01811 Building Envelope Commissioning 

DIVISION 2 

SITE WORK 

02200 Earthwork 

02362 Termite Control 

02351 S. Concrete Footings 

02810 Landscape Irrigation 

02825 Site Arch Stainless Steel Cable Plant Support System 

02900 Landscape Planting 

DIVISION 3 

CONCRETE 

03100 S. Structural Concrete Formwork 

03200 S. Concrete Reinforcing 

03250 S. Embedded Metal Assemblies and Insets 

03300 S. Structural Concrete 

03411 S. Concrete Wall Panels 

03600 S. Grouting Steel Baseplates 


#165582


Page 2 

DIVISION 4 

MASONRY 

04100 Mortar and Grout 

04210 Concrete Masonry Units 

DIVISION 5 

METALS 

05100 S. Structural Steel 

05200 S. Steel Joists 

05300 S. Metal Roof Deck 

05320 S. Metal Floor Deck 

05330 S. Composite Metal Floor Deck and Field Welded Shear Studs 

05400 Light Gauge Metal Framing 

05500 Miscellaneous Metals 

05510 Steel Stairs and Railings 

05520 Site Arch Metal Fabrications 

05721 Pre-finished Steel Railings 

05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 

DIVISION 6 

WOOD AND PLASTIC 

06100 Rough Carpentry 

06200 Finish Carpentry and Millwork 

DIVISION 7 

THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

07110 Membrane Waterproofing 

07210 Building Insulation 

07410 Performed Metal Siding 

07420 Composite Metal Building Panels 

07535 Fully Adhered Single Ply Membrane Roofing 

07610 Site Arch Metal Roof Panels 

07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 

07920 Sealants and Caulking 

DIVISION 8 

DOORS AND WINDOWS 

08100 Metal Doors and Frames 

08212 Plastic Faced and Flush Wood Doors 

08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 

08625 Translucent Wall Systems 

08710 Finish Hardware and Hardware Schedule 

08810 Glass and Glazing 

08920 Glazed Aluminum Curtainwall 

DIVISION 9 

FINISHES 

09220 Lath and Portland Cement Plaster 

09250 Gypsum Wallboard 

09310 Ceramic Tile 

09510 Acoustical Ceilings 

09650 Resilient Flooring and Base 

09680 Carpet 

09800 Special Coatings 

09900 Painting 

09950 Wallcovering 

09960 High Performance Coatings 

09985 Prefinished Panels 


#165582


Page 3 

DIVISION 10 

SPECIALTIES 

10150 Toilet Partitions 

10200 Louvers 

10260 Protective Wallcoverings 

10520 Fire Extinguishers 

10800 Toilet Accessories 

DIVISION 11 

EQUIPMENT 

11201 Rainwater Harvesting 

11202 Water Reuse 

11400 Concession Equipment 

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 

12484 Foot Grid Entrance Systems 

12494 Roller Shades 

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 

13600 PV Electrical Power Equipment 

DIVISION 14 ELEVATORS 

14240 Hydraulic Elevators 

DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 

15000 MEP Mechanical General Conditions 

15034 MEP HVAC Testing and Balancing 

15300 MEP Fire Protection 

15400 MEP Plumbing 

15500 MEP Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 

15995 MEP Mechanical Systems Commissioning 

DIVISION 16 

ELECTRICAL 

16000 MEP General Conditions for Electrical Work 

16050 MEP Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 

16051 Site Arch Site Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 

16060 Site Arch Site Grounding and Bonding 

16075 Site Arch Site Electrical Identification 

16120 Site Arch Site Conductors and Cables 

16130 Site Arch Site Raceways and Boxes 

16140 Site Arch Site Wiring Devices 

16400 MEP Auxiliary Electrical Systems 

16442 Site Arch Site Panel Boards 

16900 MEP Automatic Temperature Control System (ATCS) 

16995 MEP Electrical Systems Commissioning 

Appendix A 

Appendix B 

Appendix C 

Geotechnical Report 

Storm Water Management & Hydraulics Report 

LEED Checklist 

END OF CONTENTS 


#165582

1.01 PROJECT 


NAPA, CA 

1.02 ARCHITECT/CONSULTANTS OWNER 


#165582 

DOCUMENT 00100 

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

KIP E. DANIEL ARCHITECT 

CINEMARK, USA 

1807 ROSS AVENUE, SUITE 500 3900 DALLAS PARKWAY, SUITE 500 

DALLAS, TEXAS 75201 PLANO, TEXAS 75093 

TEL. (214) 303-6827 TEL. (972) 665-1000 

FAX (214) 303-6927 

EMAIL: MENRIQUEZ@CINEMARK.COM 

ATTN: MATTHEW MONTGOMERY 

DHARTON@CINMARK.COM 

EMAIL: MATTHEWMONTGOMERY@BECKGROUP.COM LGIBBONS@CINMARK.COM 

ATTN: MARIA ENRIQUEZ, DON HARTON, 

& LOYD GIBBONS 

1.03 BIDS 

A. Bids to be considered must be made in accordance with the instructions contained herein. 

B. Bids shall be submitted to the Owner and the Architect simultaneously, on forms as supplied in the Project 

Manual. The working of the Bid Form shall not be changed or supplemented except in accordance with the 

instructions. All spaces shall be filled in with typewriter or ink. Where amounts are given both in words and 

figures, the words will govern in the event of conflict. Any erasures or corrections in the bid Form must be 

initialed by the signer. 

C. If bidder is a corporation, the Bid shall bear the legal name of the corporation and the corporation seal. The 

Bid shall be signed by an officer authorized to bind the corporation to a contract and the signature shall be 

attested to by another officer of the corporation. 

D. Refer all questions of interpreting drawings, specifications and bidding procedure to the Architect, Kip 

E. Daniel Architect, in writing, BY FACSIMILE (214) 303-6927 or e-mail to 

. Questions should be addressed to Matthew Montgomery. 

Answers will be issued to all Bidders. 

1.04 DOCUMENTS 

A. Selected General Contractors will receive one set of reproducible plans and specifications from the Architect. 

Each contractor will be responsible for furnishing copies of the Documents to subcontractors. Documents will 

not be issued by the Architect directly to subcontractors. No partial sets will be issued. 

B. Documents will be available in the office of the Architect. 

1.05 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS 

A. Upon submitting a bid, it is presumed that the bidder has visited the site of the Work, has acquainted himself 

with the conditions as they exist, has thoroughly examined the Drawings and Specifications prepared by the 

Architect, including other parts of the proposed Contract Documents and fully understands the conditions, 

difficulties and restrictions attending the execution of the Work. It is understood that omissions from the bid 

due to the failure of the bidder to fully acquaint himself with the site conditions and the requirements of the 

Documents will not entitle the bidder to additional consideration or compensation if awarded the contract. 

Investigation of the site is mandatory. 

1.06 INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS 

A. Interpretations of the meaning of the Bidding Requirements, or of the proposed Contract Documents will be 

valid only if issued in writing by the Architect as Addenda. Such addenda will be issued no later than three 

days prior to the date for receiving bids. Each Addendum will be numbered and dated and issued to all 

prospective bidders of record at the time of issuance. The interpretations or clarifications made other than by 

such addenda will not be binding upon the Owner or the Architect. Each bidder submitting a bid must 

acknowledge receipt of Addendum received in the blanks provided for this purpose in the Bid Form. 

B. Should a bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from the Documents, or should he be in doubt as to the 

meaning of any requirements on the Documents, he shall at once notify the Architect in writing, but in no event 

later than five days prior to the date for receiving bids. Conflicting requirements brought to the Architect's 

attention subsequent to five days prior to the date for receiving bids will be subject to the Architect's decisions


#165582 

Document 00100 

Page 2 

and at no additional cost to the Owner. See Article I paragraph B of the Supplementary Conditions, Section 

00800. 

1.07 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 

A. Lump Sum will be received, via email, at the office of the Owner until 2:00 o'clock post meridiem 

Central Standard Time on Augugst 2, 2011. Bid breakdown will be received, via email, at the offices of 

the Owner until 5:00 o'clock post meridiem Central Standard Time on the same day. Lump sum must 

agree with total of bid breakdown. Hard copies shall be mailed overnight to the Owner attention Maria 

Enriquez, Don Harton & Loyd Gibbons. 

B. Submit bid in an opaque, sealed envelope. Identify the envelope with: (1) project name, (2) name of bidder. 

C. Bids received after the initial time set for receiving bids will not be considered except for variances due to fax 

transmissions. 

1.08 CONTRACTOR'S PROPOSED ALTERNATES 

A. The drawings and specifications indicate the type of materials, equipment and systems intended and the Base 

Bid shall reflect only the cost of such items. 

B. Should the bidder elect to propose alternates, the bidder shall identify the proposed alternate and state the 

additive or deductive costs on sheets attached to the Bid Form. All proposed alternates shall be fully 

documented and supporting information furnished with the Bid Form. 

C. Should the Owner decide to accept any of such proposed alternates, the written contract or agreement will be 

so drawn as to include and define such accepted alternate, after which no alternates will be permitted without 

formal Change Order. 

1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. In specifying materials, three general procedures are used. The three classifications are as follows: 

Group 1: 

Materials or equipment without the phrase "or equal." When material or equipment is specified by one or 

more brand names, the Contractor shall base his proposal on the cost of the brand name, or of one of the 

brand names listed. No substitutions for that item will be considered during the bidding period, but the 

Architect may, after the Contractor has been selected, accept a substitution at his discretion on the basis of 

further consideration of all factors, including a different cost to the Owner, if any. 

Group 2: 

When the material or equipment is specified with the phrase "...or equal..." after a brand name and with 

other identifying information, it is intended that the brand name is used for the quality and performance 

and the Contractor may base his bid proposal on any item which is in all respects equal to that specified 

and presents essentially the same appearance and functional performance. 

Group 3: 

When material is specified as complying with the requirements of published "Standard Specifications" of 

trade associations, ASTM, government specifications, etc., the Contractor shall base his proposal on any 

item which can be shown to comply in all respects to the referenced "Standard Specifications". 

B. For materials or equipment in any of the above described three groups, it is the responsibility of the Contractor 

to furnish evidence of compliance with required standards in the form of engineering data or calculation; 

results of tests conducted by independent testing laboratories; experience records of the material or equipment 

used under conditions similar to that proposed in the project; or any other means required by the Architect to 

establish the fact that proposed item is equal to that specified. The furnishing of all such data will be at the 

expense of the Contractor and without additional cost to Owner. 

C. It is distinctly understood: (1) that the Architect will use his own judgment in determining whether or not any 

materials, equipment or methods offered in substitution are equal to those specified; (2) that the decision of the 

Architect on all such questions of equality is final; (3) that all substitutions will be made at no increase in cost 

to the Owner; and (4) that Contractor shall state any decrease in contract amount of any proposed substitution 

where applicable. 

D. Upon receipt of written approval from Architect, Contractor may proceed with substitution providing 

Contractor assumes full responsibility for and makes, at his own expense, any change or adjustment in 

construction or connection with other work that may be required by the substitution of such materials, 

equipment or methods. In the event of any adverse decision by the Architect, no claim of any sort shall be 

made or allowed against Architect or Owner.

E. See also Section 01600 paragraph 1.06 for substitution procedures after the Contract is awarded. 


Page 3 

1.10 AWARD OF CONTRACT 

A. Bids shall be privately opened. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to award a contract, 

or contracts, in accordance with his best interests. 

1.11 ADMINISTRATION 

A. AIA Documents will be utilized for the job administration, including Owner-Contractor Agreement Form 

A101. All forms will be provided by the Contractor. 



#165582


GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.01 INVESTIGATION 

A. An investigation of subsurface soil conditions at the site was authorized by the Owner, and these investigations 

were made by KC Engineering Company; 865 Cotting Lane: Vacaville, California 95688; tel: 707.447.4025; 

fax: 707.447.4143 

1.02 REPORTS 

A. A copy of this report is bound herein as Appendix A. 

B. The geotechnical report is to be considered as a part of the Contract Documents. 

C. Report and log of borings is not a warranty of subsurface conditions. 

1.03 INTERPRETATION 

A. Contractor is expected to examine the site and the subsurface investigation reports and then decide for himself 

the character of the materials to be encountered. 

B. The Owner and Architect disclaim any responsibility for the accuracy, true location and extent of the soils 

investigation that has been prepared by others. They further disclaim responsibility for interpretation of that 

data by the Contractor, as in projecting soil-bearing values, rock profiles, soil stability and the presence, level 

and extent of underground water. 



#165582

BID FORM 

FROM: 

___________________________________________ 

____________________________________________ 

____________________________________________ 


BID FORM 

TO: Kip E. Daniel Architect Cinemark U.S.A. 

1807 Ross Avenue, Suite 500 3900 Dallas Parkway, Suite 500 

Dallas, TX 75201 Plano, TX 75093 

Tel: (214) 303-6827 Tel: (972) 665-1000 

Fax: (214) 303-6927 Fax: (972) 665-1400 

Attn: Matthew Montgomery Attn: Maria Enriquez 

matthewmontgomery@beckgroup.com Email: menriquez@cinemark.com 

FOR: Napa Century Center XD12 


The undersigned, having visited the site of the Work and having familiarized himself with local conditions affecting 

the cost of his work and with all requirements of the proposed Contract Documents as prepared by the Architects, and 

duly issued Addenda to said Documents, as acknowledged herein, proposes to furnish all things as required by said 

Documents and addenda thereto for Base Bid stated below. 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

If required by Owner, Contractor agrees to immediately submit its current financial statement. 

CHANGES IN THE WORK 

For parts of the Work not included in the Base Bid and not covered by unit prices, the undersigned agrees to charge 

for additional work and credit for deleted work as Contractor's overhead and profit the following percentages of the 

cost of said work (subcontractors shall be held to the same percentages in addition to the general contractor): 

Extra Ten percent 10% Credit Five percent 5% 

ADDENDUM RECEIPT 

Receipt of the following Addenda to the Bidding Requirements and Contract Documents is acknowledged: 

Addendum No. 

Dated 

Addendum No. 

Addendum No. 

Addendum No. 

Dated 

Dated 

Dated 

BID SCHEDULE (See the Matrices on the Architectural and MEP drawings for Responsibility): 

DIV. 00 FEES - this Division to be prorated to each Contract by Dollar Amount 

a. Fee, Overhead & Profit $ 

b. Insurance $ 

c. Bonds $ 

DIV. 01 GENERAL CONDITIONS – this Division to be prorated to each Contract by Dollar Amount 

a. Taxes $__________________________ 

b. Temporary Facilities including Utilities and Access $__________________________ 

c. Supervision $__________________________ 


#165582


Page 2 

Napa Century Center XD12 

CONTRACTOR: 

TELEPHONE: 

SCOPE 2.00 GENERAL CONTRACT – OFF SITE 

DIV. 02 Off Site Utility Work $ 

DIV. 03 Paving, Curbs and Walks at Gasser and New Hartle $___________________________ 

SCOPE 3.00 GENERAL CONTRACT – SITE NON-THEATRE 

DIV. 02 SITE WORK 

a. All Work at Water Quality Pond incl Tanks and Pump $ 

b. Utility Work including Joint Trench $___________________________ 

c. All Paving and Striping South of LEED Boundary $___________________________ 

DIV. 03 Curbs, Walks, Ramps, Dumpster Pads at non-Theatre Bldngs $___________________________ 

DIV. 04 Trash Dumpster Enclosures $___________________________ 

DIV. 05 Metals – Roofing at Dumpster Enclosures, Handrails $___________________________ 

DIV. 16 Transformers and Primary for non-theatre buildings $___________________________ 

SCOPE 4.00 GENERAL CONTRACT – SITE THEATRE 

DIV. 02 SITE WORK 

a. Landscaping and Irrigation $__________________________ 

b. Utility Work including Joint Trench $__________________________ 

c. Demolition and Re-processing of Old Hartle $__________________________ 

d. All Paving and Striping North of the LEED Boundary $__________________________ 

e. Theatre Pad Prep incl Overexcavation and Fill $__________________________ 

f. Exterior Storm Drainage $__________________________ 

g. SITE - SWPPP (Storm Water Protection Plan Proposal) $ 

h. Testing Laboratory Services for the Building $ 

DIV. 03 Curbs, Walks, Ramps, Dumpster Pads at Theatre Pad $__________________________ 

DIV. 04 Compactor and Recycling Enclosure $__________________________ 

DIV. 05 Metals – Roofing at Dumpster Enclosures, Handrails $__________________________ 

DIV. 16 ELECTRICAL 

a. Transformers and Primary for Theatre $__________________________ 

b. Secondary from Transformer to Theatre Main Switch $__________________________ 

c. Site Electrical for Signs, Lighting, etc, incl Pole Bases $__________________________ 


#165582


Page 3 

CONTRACTOR: 

TELEPHONE: 

SCOPE 5.00 GENERAL CONTRACT – BUILDING THEATRE 

DIV. 01 GENERAL CONDITIONS – Building Specific 


#165582 

a. Construction Waste Management $___________________________ 

b. Building Commissioning – General requirements $___________________________ 

c. Building Envelope Commissioning $___________________________ 

d. Indoor Air Quality Management $___________________________ 

DIV. 02 a. Stainless Steel Cable Plant Support System $___________________________ 

b. Testing Laboratory Services for the Building $ 

c. Other Division 02 $ 

DIV. 03 Building Concrete $ 

DIV. 04 Masonry $___N/A____________________ 

DIV. 05 Structural Steel, Misc Metals and Interior Handrails $ 

DIV. 06 Blocking and Trim $ 

DIV. 07 a. Membrane Waterproofing $ 

b. Building Insulation $ 

c. Roofing System and Deck Insulation $ 

d. Performed Metal Siding $ 

e. Composite Metal Building Panels $ 

f. Other Division 07 $ 

DIV. 08 a. Storefront & Glazing $ 

b. Curtainwall & Spandrel Glazing $ 

c. Doors & Hardware $ 

e. Polycarbonate Panels including Framing System $____________________________ 

d. Other Division 8 $ 

DIV. 09 a. Drywall $ 

b. Lath & Portland Cement Plaster $ 

c. Wallcoverings, Paint $ 

d. Ceramic Tile $ 

e. Carpet and Resilient Flooring $ 

f. Ceilings $ 

g. Other Division 09 $ 

DIV. 10 Specialties $ 

DIV. 11 a. Rainwater Harvesting $____________________________


Page 4 

b. Water Reuse $____________________________ 

c. Other Division 11 $ 

DIV. 12 a. Unloading Owner Furnished Items $____________________________ 

b. Rolling Shades $____________________________ 

c. Foot Grid Entrance Systems $____________________________ 

DIV. 13 PV Electrical Power Equipment $____________________________ 

DIV. 14 Elevator $____________________________ 

DIV. 15 a. HVAC $ 

b. Plumbing $ 

c. Fire Sprinkler $ 

d. Subsoil drainage system $ 

DIV. 16 a. Lighting Fixtures (Labor, receipt & storage ) $ 

b. Electrical $ 

c. Fire Alarm System $ 

DIV. 17 Energy Management System $ 

GRAND TOTAL FOR CONTRACT: $ 

BID ALTERNATES 

Alternate 01: Deduct cost for added corrugated exterior columns 

$___________________________ 

Alternate 02: 

$___________________________ 

Alternate 03: 

$___________________________ 

CONTRACTOR PROPOSED ALTERNATES 

Voluntary alternates proposed by the contractor should be submitted on a separate sheet attached to this form. 

TIME OF COMPLETION 

A. If awarded the Contract, the undersigned will complete the shell and interior work as bid within 240 

calendar days from notice to proceed. 

B. Cinemark USA will jointly occupy the building for equipping beginning 60 days prior to scheduled 

completion date. The following schedule lists the key milestone dates that must occur in order for the 

Contractor to have the building ready for Cinemark USA to begin work 

C. Schedule of Milestones: 

MILESTONE DESCRIPTION 

CONTRACT CALENDAR DAYS 

240 

Approx. weeks prior to completion 

* Notice to proceed, site mobilization 34 

Start site clearing/excavation and building pad 33 

* Start underground utilities and foundations 31 

Complete site grading, start paving 29 

* Start masonry / tilt walls 28 


#165582


Page 5 

Start plumbing/electrical underground rough in 27 

Submittal deadline to architect (60 days from N.T.P.) 25 

Complete foundations 25 

* Start steel erection 23 

Start mezzanine concrete pours and framing 20 

* Start roof installation 19 

Start HVAC ducts in auditoriums and mezzanine 19 

Set roof top unit curbs 20 

Start exterior building painting 17 

* Complete all masonry work 16 

Start auditorium ceilings 16 

* Complete roof installation 16 

Complete all slab on grade concrete 15 

Set roof top HVAC units 15 

EMS vendor installs communication wire to roof top units 15 

* Permanent power 10 

Complete mezzanine mech./elec. (incl. proj. exhaust) 9 

Complete mezzanine ceilings and wall finishes 9 

Complete mezzanine doors and hardware 9 

Complete mezzanine floor vct (wax and seal) 9 

* Telephone service to building 8 

Start ceramic tile install (restrooms are first priority) 9 

Complete wall carpet at auditorium pilasters 8 

* Mezzanine 100% complete 8 

Telephone and security vendors pull lines at mezzanine 8 

Start auditorium wall carpet 8 

* 1/2 auditoriums complete 8 

* Auditorium drape/screen installation window opens 7 

* Projection consoles deliver 7 

Measure for millwork install (concessions drywalled) 8 

Complete steel erection 8 

Complete exterior building painting 8 

Start corridor wall vinyl and wall carpet 7 

* Balance of auditoriums complete 7 

Complete pouring auditorium risers 7 

Start rubber base in auditoriums 6 

Start auditorium floor light system 6 

Start installation of auditorium handrails 6 

Ceilings and tile complete at concession areas 6 

Scullery wall, floor, ceiling finishes complete 5 

Install CO2 tanks and run flex lines 5 

* Install millwork 5 

Start drink tower and scullery drink equipment 5 

Layout and predrill for auditorium seats 4.5 

Start floor carpet (auditoriums and lower level) 4 

Scullery food service equipment installs 4 

Complete auditorium vct at risers 4 

* Seats deliver and install 4 

Start exterior and interior signage install 4 

EMS panel installs 4 

Menu signs, int. postercases, and aud. entrances install 3 

Install exterior postercases 3 

SLV install begins 3 

Complete auditorium floor lights and handrails 2 

Final cleaning begins 2 


#165582


Page 6 

Telephone and security systems complete 2 

Final inspections 1 

* Substantial completion and certificate of occupancy 1 

ATM and payphones install 1 

Trash compactor installs 1 

Cinemark computer system installs 1 

EMS computer and Square D lighting controls install 1 

Complete landscaping and parking lot striping 1 

Complete floor carpeting 1 

Air balance by vendor 1 

* Construction completion 0 

* Key milestone dates in bold 


#165582

BID GUARANTEE 


Page 7 

The undersigned agrees that the Owner shall have the right to retain this bid for a period of sixty (60) days from the 

date of receiving bids and guarantee the amounts set forth herein to be firm for the same sixty (60) day period. 

BID ACCEPTANCE 

If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to the undersigned within the time 

noted herein, after the date of the opening of bids, or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the 

undersigned agrees that he will execute a construction contract (AIA Doc. A101, 1987 edition) in accordance with the 

Bid as accepted, and, if required, will furnish contract security in the form of Performance and Payment bonds with 

such surety or sureties as the Owner may approve, the bonds to be paid for by the Owner, all within 10 days (unless a 

longer period is agreed) from date of such written notice. 

It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to award the contract to his best interest, to reject any or 

all bids, to waive any information in bidding, and to hold all bids for the bid guarantee period. 

Signed and sealed this ______ day of ___________________, 20______. 

Business Name 

Business Address 

Telephone 

By: 

Printed Name of Signer 

Signature 

Title 

(SEAL) 

ATTEST (if a Corporation) 


Title 


#165582

SECTION 00600 

BONDS AND CONTRACT FORMS 


1.01 FORM OF AGREEMENT 

A. The Form of Agreement will be the modified version AIA Document A101 - Standard Form of 

Agreement Between Owner and Contractor - Stipulated Sum, 2007 edition (“Agreement”). 

1.02 BOND FORMS 

A. The Performance Bond Form will be AIA Document A311 - Performance Bond, latest edition. 

B. The Labor and Material Payment Bond Form will be AIA Document A311 - Labor and Material Bond, 

latest edition. 



#165582

SECTION 00700 

GENERAL CONDITIONS 


1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS 

A. The American Institute of Architects Standard Form (AIA Document A201), 2007 Edition, 

“General Conditions of the Contract for Construction” (as modified by the Supplementary 

General Conditions) is hereby made a part of this Specification and the Agreement. 

B. This Document (as modified by the Supplementary General Conditions) is referred to hereafter 

as the General Conditions. 

C. The General Conditions apply to each and every Section of these Specifications the same as 

though included herein. 

D. Persons or firms performing work under this Agreement are required to comply with the 

requirements of the General Conditions, and it shall be their responsibility to make themselves 

familiar with the terms of the General Conditions. 

E. Being unfamiliar with the terms of the General Conditions shall not relieve persons or firm 

performing work under this Agreement from being bound to the requirements of the General 

Conditions. 



#165582


SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 

MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 

These SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION supplement, modify, 

change delete from, or add to the “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,” AIA Document A201, 2007 

Edition. Where any article of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction is modified or any paragraph, 

subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for 

Construction, the unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect. 

ARTICLE 1 

GENERAL PROVISIONS 

1.1.2 Add the following sentence at the end of the paragraph; 

“Nothing herein shall relieve the Contractor from including all material, labor, equipment, and services necessary to 

complete the Work as indicated on the drawings and/or the specifications unless specifically noted on the drawings or in 

the specifications as ‘Not In Contract (NIC),’ or ‘Furnished By Owner (FBO)’.” 

1.5.1 Delete this paragraph in its entirety and replace with: 

“The Instruments of Service, including without limitation the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents are, and 

shall remain, the joint property of Owner and Architect, and Owner and Architect shall each retain all common law, 

statutory, and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright (including, without limitation, the right to create 

derivative works therefrom). Neither the Contractor nor any subcontractor, sub-subcontractor, or material or equipment 

supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official 

regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project shall not be construed as publication in 

derogation of Owner’s or Architect’s copyright or other reserved rights. ” 

ARTICLE 2 

OWNER 

2.1.1 In the fourth line delete “Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the…” and replace with “The...” 

2.2.1 Delete this Paragraph in its entirety and replace with: 

"Owner has furnished reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill Owners obligations 

under this Contract. Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to Contractor." 

2.3 In the second line after the word “…or…” delete “…repeatedly…” 

2.4 In the seventh and eighth lines delete the sentence “Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the 

Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect.” 

ARTICLE 3 

CONTRACTOR 

3.1.3 Add the following three sentences at the end of the paragraph: 


#165582


Page 2 

“Contractor recognizes the relationship of trust and confidence required by the Owner, and Contractor covenants with 

the Owner to furnish its best skill and judgment and to cooperate with the Architect, the Owner, and the Owner’s 

consultants in promoting the interest of the Owner. Contractor agrees to furnish efficient business administration and 

superintendence and to use every effort to keep upon the Work at all times an adequate supply of workmen and materials 

and to secure execution of the Work in an expeditious and efficient manner. Contractor agrees to coordinate and 

cooperate with all other contractors performing work on the site.” 

3.2.1 Add the following three sentences at the end of the paragraph: 

“Contractor represents that in visiting the site it has thoroughly inspected and satisfied itself as to any existing 

conditions, which might in any manner affect the Work. Contractor represents that it has brought all such concerns to the 

attention of the Owner and Architect prior to execution of the Contract Documents. 

No allowance in Contract cost or time will be made after the Work is commenced for any alleged circumstances, 

including verification of quantities, which proper and reasonable examination and investigation would have disclosed. 

Contractor represents that it has reviewed the Contract Documents and existing field conditions and has based the 

Contract Sum on said information.” 

3.2.2 In the seventh line after the word “…Architect…” add the words “….and Owner…” and in the eighth line after 

the word “…Architect…” add the words “…and Owner…” 

3.2.3 In the third line after the work “…Architect…” add the words “…and Owner…” and in the fourth line after the 

word “…Architect…” add the words “…and Owner.” 

3.3.2 In the second line after the word “…Subcontractors,…” insert the following: “…vendors and materials 

suppliers…” 

3.3.3 Add the following sentence at the end of the paragraph: 

“Where portions of the Project are designated to receive work by other contractors outside the scope of this Agreement, 

Contractor shall provide written notice to the Owner that the applicable portion of the Project is complete and ready to 

receive subsequent work provided by others. The Owner shall accept the applicable portion of the Project in accordance 

with the provisions of the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor.” 

Add Paragraph 3.3.4 as follows: 

3.3.4 The Contractor shall not be relieved of any obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract 

Documents either by activities or duties of the Owner or Architect in their administration of the Contract, or by 

tests, inspections, or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 

3.4.2 Delete "Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with 

Sections 3.12.8 or 7.4, the" and replace it with "The". 

3.7.2 Add the following sentence to the end of the paragraph: 

"Contractor is responsible for becoming familiar with all applicable governmental laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, 

standards, rules and regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work and 

inspection procedures and shall schedule inspections as required." 

3.7.3 In the first line after the word “…contrary…” add the parenthetical phrase “….(or that it should know to be 

contrary) …” 

3.7.4 Add the following sentence to the end of the paragraph: 


#165582


Page 3 

"All such claims for concealed conditions encountered must be made within twenty-one (21) days of the first observance 

of the concealed condition; otherwise, such claims shall be deemed to be waived. Such claims shall be limited by the 

Contractor’s representations in Section 3.2.1." 

3.7.5 In the fourth line after the word "any" add the words "commercially reasonable". 

3.9.2 Delete this paragraph and replace with: 

"Contractor will be required to maintain the same on-site superintendent/project manager throughout the performance of 

the Work. Any change in on-site superintendent or project manager will require prior written approval of the Owner. 

Owner reserves the right to cause the Contractor to remove and replace any persons in a superintendent or project 

manager position whose performance is found to be lacking or objectionable to Owner." 

3.9.3 Delete this paragraph. 

3.10.2 In the second and third lines before the word “…Architect's…” insert the words “Owner and”. In the fourth 

line before the word “Architect” insert the words “…Owner and…” 


3.10.4 Contractor agrees to incorporate into Contractor’s Construction Schedule any scheduling information furnished 

by Owner with respect to the requirements of Work as performed on the site by other contractors, vendors, and 

material suppliers under separate contract with Owner for the purpose of coordination between Contractor and 

Owner’s forces. 

Add Paragraph 3.11.1 as follows 

3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site and shall turn over to the Owner upon completion of the Work the 

Building Department-stamped permit set of documents. 


3.12.11 Shop drawings, product data, and samples shall be furnished with adequate lead time to allow the Contractor to 

process and Architect to approve said documents prior to the time that return of the submittal is required by 

subcontractor. Contractor / Architect will require a minimum of ten (10) working days to approve submittals. 

Shop drawings not furnished with sufficient lead time for processing and approval shall constitute a Contractorcaused 

delay. 


3.13.1 Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with the Owner relative to portions of the site or structures needed to 

be utilized by other contractors, vendors, and material suppliers employed by Owner. 

3.14.1 Add the following sentence at the end of this paragraph: "Finished surfaces which appear as damaged, altered, 

retrofitted, or otherwise do not appear as “new” construction may be grounds for rejection by the Owner or Architect." 

Add Paragraphs 3.15.3 and 3.15.4 as follows: 

3.15.3 Contractor shall cause its subcontractors/vendors/material suppliers to clean up all debris created by their work 

as the job progresses. Should Contractor, subcontractors, vendors, or material suppliers fail to remove debris 

and/or material created or left by their work after forty-eight (48) hours’ written notice to do so, the Owner 

reserves the right to remove debris and/or material, clean the premises, and charge the Contractor accordingly. 

3.15.4 Contractor shall assume responsibility for dust control during the performance of its Work. The Contractor 

shall assume liability for all claims related to dust attributable to its work. 


#165582


Page 4 

3.18.1 In the sixth line, after the word “…negligent…” add the words “…or intentional…” In the eighth line, after the 

word “…hereunder...” add the following: “…including liability which is attributable to the violation of any law 

or regulation with which compliance is the responsibility of the Contractor under the provisions of this 

Agreement.” Add the following sentence at the end of Paragraph 3.18.1: 

“Contractor shall, at its own cost, expense and risk, defend any and all actions, suits, or other legal proceedings to which 

this indemnity paragraph applies that may be brought or instituted against the Owner and/or the Architect and their 

officers, agents, and employees, and consultants and any such action, suit, or other legal proceedings.” 

ARTICLE 4 

ADMINSTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 

4.2.1 Delete this paragraph in its entirety and replace with the following: 

“The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents. However, unless 

noted otherwise in writing, the Owner’s Representative will be an employee of the Owner. The Architect will be 

responsible for timely communication of all questions and decisions to the Owner and the General Contractor. 

Decisions made solely by Architect will not bind the Owner to increases in Contract Sum or increases in Contract Time 

without Owner’s prior written consent.” 

4.2.4 In the second and third lines delete “…shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect…” 

and insert “…may communicate with each other directly or through the Architect…” 

4.2.8 In the first and second lines delete " …, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 

7.4". In the second line, after the word "make", delete the words: "determinations and". 

4.2.13 Delete this paragraph in its entirety. 

ARTICLE 6 

CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 

6.2.2 In the third line after the word “…Architect…” insert the words “…and Owner...” 

6.3 In the third line delete the word “…allocate…” and insert the words “…recommend an allocation of...” 

Add Paragraph 6.4 as follows: 

6.4 COORDINATION OF WORK 

6.4.1 Contractor shall coordinate its construction activity with Work furnished and/or installed by Owner’s forces 

which may be performed concurrently with Contractor’s Work. Contractor and Owner shall confer periodically 

and exchange information on scheduling, and Contractor shall incorporate in its Critical Path Schedule the 

Owner’s forces’ Work schedule as prepared by Owner. Contractor represents that coordination of all work with 

all other contractors, suppliers and vendors, consultants, City-representatives, testing engineers, and others is 

included in the Contract Sum. 

ARTICLE 7 

CHANGES IN THE WORK 

7.1.2 In the third line delete the word “…Architect…” and insert the word “…Owner…” 



#165582


#165582 


Page 5 

7.1.4 At any time, the Owner may, through its Architect, without invalidating the Contract, order extra Work or make 

scope changes by altering, adding, or deduction from the Work. However, no extra Work or scope change shall 

be made unless pursuant to a written Change Order or Construction Change Directive singed by Owner and 

Contractor. Furthermore, if the Contractor, without obtaining prior written authorization of the Owner, 

performs any additions, deletions, or changes in the Work, the Contractor shall be liable for the entire cost 

thereof, or for the removal thereof and restoration to the before-change condition, and shall further be liable for 

any expense incurred by other contractors, agencies, or the Owner in adjusting their Work due to changes 

initiated by the Contractor. 


7.2.2 The fee agreed upon for scope changes in the Work shall constitute the full overhead and profit charged for 

said change in the Work. Change Orders for scope changes shall not include any claim for extended general 

conditions or indirect costs such as additional supervision, temporary facilities, field overhead, or any impacted or 

consequential damages caused by, or in any way the consequence of, said change in the Work, unless Contractor can 

clearly demonstrate that the change has caused an impact on the general conditions cost or the Critical Path 

Schedule for the Project. Furthermore, Contractor agrees to make no additional claim for extra costs or extensions of 

Contract time within the scope of an agreed Change Order once a Change Order is signed. 

Add Paragraphs 7.2.2.1 and 7.2.2.2 as follows: 

7.2.2.1 Should Contractor claim any additional costs or delays for any other reason other than for a Scope Change, 

such additional cost or delay shall be deemed a claim and will be agreed upon by Change Order or Construction 

Change Directive in accordance with Article 15, Claims and Disputes of the General Conditions and 

Supplementary Conditions of the Agreement as modified herein. All claims for costs for extended general 

conditions, and/or indirect costs such as supervision, temporary facilities, and field overhead, plus any costs for 

impacted damages, whether real or consequential, shall be included therein. All such claims for additional costs 

or delays must be made within twenty-one (21) days of the cause of the claim for additional costs or delays; 

otherwise, such claims shall be deemed to be waived. No additional claims for extra costs or extension of 

Contract time within the scope of a specific claim will be allowed once a Change Order for the claim is signed. 

7.2.2.2 Change Order Work for claims pursuant to subparagraphs 7.2.2.1 preceding will be performed at cost; 

and no increase to the Contract Sum for the Work shall be allowed for increased or extended general conditions, and/or 

indirect costs such as supervision, temporary facilities, and field overhead, nor any costs for impacted damages 

whether real or consequential; nor any cost for Contractor’s overhead and profit (fee) unless specifically authorized 

in writing by the Owner. 

Add Subparagraph 7.3.3.5 as follows: 

7.3.3.5 Determination by the above methods shall not include any costs for any extended or impacted general 

conditions; and/or indirect costs such as supervision, temporary facilities, and field overhead, nor any costs for 

impacted damages whether real or consequential unless it is demonstrated by Contractor that Contractor’s 

general conditions and indirect costs or construction schedule is so impacted, and then only upon submittal of 

supporting costs with sufficient detail to allow analysis by the Owner. 

7.3.5 In the second line after the word “…Architect…” insert the words “…and Owner…” 

7.3.7 In the second line delete the word “…determine…” and insert the word “…recommend…” In the sixth line 

delete the word “…prescribe…” and insert the word “…recommend…” 


7.3.7.6 Costs for items 7.3.7.1 through 7.3.7.5 above shall only be allowed if Contractor can clearly demonstrate to the 

Owner that the change impacts Contractor’s costs accordingly. 

7.3.8 In the second line delete the word “…Architect…” and insert the word “…Owner…”


Page 6 

7.4 In the fist line delete the word “…Architect…” and insert the word “…Owner…” In the third line delete the 

word "Architect" and insert the word "Owner". 

ARTICLE 8 

TIME 

8.1.3 After the word “…Architect…’ and insert the words “…and approved by Owner…” 

8.3.1 In the fifth line delete the word “…Architect…” and insert the word “…Owner….” In the sixth line delete the 

word “…Architect…” and insert the word “…Owner…” 

Add the following at the end of Paragraph 8.3.1: 

“Such extension shall only be given for such time in which a material part of the Work on the Critical Path of the Project 

Schedule cannot be performed, and during which time Contractor utilizes its best efforts to perform all other Work able 

to be performed so as to mitigate any delays in the overall completion of the Project. Extensions of time for inclement 

weather will not be granted unless such inclement weather causes a delay in the Critical Path of the Project Schedule in 

accordance with Paragraph 15.1.5.2." 


8.3.1.1 It is expressly understood and agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner that the Contract Time as 

contained in the Agreement is a reasonable time for the completion of the Work under this Agreement, taking 

into consideration recent climatic conditions, and the usual industrial conditions prevailing in the location of 

the Project. The Contract Time includes the assumption that there will be at least _____________ (__) days 

during which Work on the Critical Path of the Project Schedule cannot be performed because of inclement 

weather (the “Assumed Inclement Weather Days”). No Claim in accordance with Paragraph 8.3.1 for an 

increase in the Contract Time due to inclement weather (including, without limitation any extension in the 

Contract Time for purposes of calculating liquidated damages under Paragraph 3.3 of the Standard Form of 

Agreement Between Owner and Contractor) may be made until _______________ (__) days have occurred in 

which a material part of the Work on the Critical Path of the Project Schedule could not be performed because 

of inclement weather. Provided however, within thirty (30) days of execution of this Agreement, Contractor 

shall provide for Owner’s reasonable approval a month-by-month allocation of the Assumed Inclement 

Weather Days. Owner and Contractor shall make good faith efforts to reach an agreement on such allocation 

and in the event of such agreement, extensions of time in accordance with Paragraph 8.3.1 for inclement 

weather will be allowed only if, during any month, inclement weather causes a delay in the Critical Path of the 

Project Schedule in excess of the number of days allocated for that month. 

ARTICLE 9 

PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 

9.2 In the second line after the word “…Architect…” insert the words “…and Owner...” In the fourth line after the 

word “…Architect…” when it first appears insert the words “…and Owner...” and after the word "Architect" when it 

second appears insert the words "…or Owner." 

9.3.1.1 Add the following at the end of Subparagraph 9.3.1.1: 

“Contractor shall submit sufficient line item detail to allow the Owner to accurately determine completion for changes in 

the Work which has been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives.” 

9.3.4 Add Paragraph 9.3.4 as follows: 


#165582


Page 7 

“With each Application for Payment, Contractor shall submit a Conditional Upon Progress Lien Waiver for each 

subcontractor, vendor, or material supplier who has furnished a Preliminary Lien Notice. Furthermore, Contractor shall 

provide an Unconditional Upon Progress Lien Waiver prior to submitting subsequent Applications for Payment for 

additional disbursements. All Conditional and Unconditional Upon Progress Lien Waivers shall be provided in 

accordance with the laws governing the State in which the Work is being performed.” 

9.5.1 Delete Paragraphs 9.5.1.1 though 9.5.1.7 and replace with the following 9.5.1.1 through 9.5.1.9: 

9.5.1.1 The omission of any Work required by the Contract Documents, or defective Work which has not been 

remedied, in which case the Owner may, with notice to the Contractor, withhold one hundred and fifty percent 

(150%) of the estimated cost or expense as a reasonable value to correct such omission or defective Work and 

any damage suffered or expense incurred to remedy the omission or defect on account thereof; 

9.5.1.2 Third-party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, including but not 

limited to mechanic’s liens or stop notices, in which case Owner may withhold one hundred fifty percent 

(150%) thereof as a reasonable value to protect Owner against such third-party claims and legal costs incurred 

on account thereof; 

9.5.1.3 Failure of Contractor to make payments properly to subcontractors, material men, laborers, or other persons 

entitled to payment, in which case the Owner may withhold the amount of such failure to pay and any amount 

of damage suffered or expense incurred on account thereof; 

9.5.1.4 Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed with the unpaid balance of the Contract Price, in 

which case the Owner may withhold the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; 

9.5.1.5 Failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, Supplementary Instructions, or 

Project Schedule, which failure must be communicated to Contractor in writing for each cause or incident. If 

Contractor fails or refuses to correct or remedy failure or deficiency, then the Owner may withhold an amount 

sufficient to discharge the damage and any expenses suffered or incurred on account thereof; 

9.5.1.6 Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, in which case the Owner 

may withhold an amount sufficient to discharge the damage or expense anticipated to be suffered or incurred; 

9.5.1.7 Any damage to Owner, another Contractor, or to another subcontractor performing Work on the Project to the 

extent that such damage suffered and the expense incurred on account thereof is not covered by insurance, in 

which case the Owner may withhold sufficient funds to discharge said damage and any expenses suffered or 

incurred on account thereof; 

9.5.1.8 The breach of any provisions in the Agreement or Contract Documents by Contractor to the extent of the 

damage or expense suffered or incurred or the amount that can be reasonably anticipated to be suffered or 

incurred on account thereof, in which case the Owner may withhold an amount sufficient to discharge the 

damage and any expenses suffered or incurred on account thereof; 

9.5.1.9 Failure to maintain Record Drawings updated to the “as-built” condition, or the failure to perform the Work in 

accordance with approved Shop Drawings and Submittals, or the failure to perform the Work in accordance 

with duly-authorized Supplementary Instructions, Change Orders or Construction Change Directives, in which 

case the Owner may withhold one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of the estimated cost and related 

expenses as a reasonable value to correct such failure or reasonable expenses incurred thereof. 


“Whenever the grounds giving rise to the above withholding (Subparagraphs 9.5.1.1 through 9.5.1.9) have been 

removed, Owner shall pay to Contractor the amount withheld because of such grounds, less any damages in resulting 

expenses actually sustained by Owner as a result of the grounds for the withholding, the cost of the withholding, or 

removal of the cause of the withholding.” 


#165582


Page 8 


9.5.4 In the event of any controversy concerning the duties and rights of the parties under the Agreement, Contract 

Documents, Supplementary Instructions, or under any Change Order or Construction Change Directive for additional 

Work issued by the Owner, or in the event of any withholding as described above, Contractor shall continue to perform 

the Work without an extension in Contract Time on account of the controversy, provided that the Owner deposits the 

amount of the withholding in an interest-bearing account, and such amount, including the interest thereon, shall be 

promptly released and payable in accordance with the terms of the Agreement. Contractor may obtain any release to 

which it is entitled through an action, negotiation with Owner, or through Dispute Resolution of the issues pursuant to 

Article 15 as contained herein. 

9.6.7 Add the following to the end of Paragraph 9.6.7: 

“Nothing contained herein shall make any subcontractor or supplier a third party beneficiary of this contract.” 


“When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall 

prepare for the Owner and Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected, including a list of all 

subcontractors or materialmen who have provided labor, equipment, and/or material to the Work, filed a notice and/or 

have notified the Contractor of a Claim or Lien or Stop Notice. Acceptance of the Work or a portion thereof will be at 

the Owner’s sole discretion. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to 

complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents.” 

9.8.4 In the second line after the word “…that…” insert the words “…when approved by Owner…” 

9.9.1 In the last line delete the words “…or if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect...” 


9.10.6 Upon the satisfaction of all conditions stipulated in the previous Paragraph 9.10.2, Owner shall pay to 

Contractor within thirty (30) days such funds, including the retained percentage and including any previouslyagreed 

withholds for defective or uncompleted Work, provided, however, that: 

9.10.6.1 If any mechanic’s or materialman’s lien or stop notice has, at that time, been recorded, Owner may withhold 

one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the amount thereof until the lien or stop notice is removed or until the 

Owner is indemnified against such claim by lien release bond or other means satisfactory to Owner unless such 

claim is due to the Owner’s breach of its obligation to pay the Contractor in accordance with the Contract 

Documents. 

9.10.6.2 As a condition precedent to payment to Contractor under this paragraph, Contractor shall, and on a form 

acceptable to Owner, furnish Conditional Upon Final Mechanics' Lien Waivers and Releases from Contractor 

and from all subcontractors, pursuant to the laws governing the State in which the Work is being performed. 

9.10.6.3 So long as any defective, corrective or “punch list” work remains uncompleted hereunder, Owner shall retain 

one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the value of such uncompleted work which shall be paid only when such 

work is completed to the reasonable satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner. 

9.10.6.4 So long as any guarantees or warranties have not been provided or executed as required hereunder, Owner shall 

retain ten percent (10%) of the value of the Work to be covered by said guarantee or warranty, which shall be 

paid upon receipt of the fully executed guarantee/warranty. 

9.10.6.5 So long as any as-built drawings, complete shop drawings, submittals, extra stock materials, operating 

instructions, and maintenance manuals are not satisfactorily provided, Owner shall retain ten percent (10%) of 

the value of the Work covered by said as-built drawings, incomplete shop drawings, submittals, extra stock 


#165582


Page 9 

materials, operating instructions, and maintenance manuals, which shall be paid upon receipt of all said 

documents or materials satisfactorily submitted. 

9.10.6.6 Any portion of the final payment not paid when due shall be a late payment and shall bear interest as in the 

Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. 

9.10.6.7 The amount withheld under Paragraphs 9.10.6.3 through 9.10.6.5 preceding shall not exceed one hundred fifty 

percent (150%) of the amount of the defective, corrective, or disputed work. 

Delete Paragraph 10.1 and substitute: 

ARTICLE 10 

PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 

10.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and 

programs in connection with the Work, in compliance with the current governing legislation, including the care and 

protection of all persons, facilities, underground improvements, and adjacent property, until the Work is completed and 

accepted by Owner. Contractor further covenants to use proper care and precaution in the performance of its Work 

hereunder so as not to cause damage to Owner’s property, adjoining property, or the property of others, and it shall be 

liable for claims, losses, liabilities, or damages to others on account of injury, or damage to trees, shrubs, lawns walks, 

roads, driveways, structures, utilities, drainage, and facilities, whether on Owner’s property or on the property of others, 

whether caused by Contractor, a subcontractor, or middleman, or anyone hired by, engaged by, or working under, 

Contractor. The Contractor shall submit the Contractor’s safety program to the Owner for review and coordination with 

the safety program of other contractors. 

10.2.8 Add the following at the end of Paragraph 10.2.8: 

“Claims for injury or damage to persons or property which are not made within the time limits specified in Paragraph 

15.1.2 herein shall be deemed to be waived.” 


10.2.9 Contractor shall, at all times, efficiently cover and protect the Work and all materials and equipment which are 

to be incorporated into the Work from damage, loss, or destruction by the elements or from any other cause. During 

inclement weather or whenever the Architect or the Owner shall direct, Contractor will and/or will cause its 

subcontractors to protect its and their Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion 

of the Architect or the Owner, any Work or material shall have been damaged or injured by any reason of failure on the 

part of Contractor and/or any of its subcontractors to protect its or their Work, such Work or materials shall be removed 

and replaced at the expense of Contractor, provided such damage is not insured. 

Delete Paragraphs 11.1 through 11.3.10 and substitute: 

11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE 

ARTICLE 11 

INSURANCE 

11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business 

in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect him from claims set forth below 

which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the contract, whether such operations be 

by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone 

for whose acts any of them may be liable to cover: 


#165582

A. Workers Compensation Insurance insuring the Contractor's full liability under the Workers 

Compensation and Occupational Disease Laws of the State where the Work is performed and 

Employer's Liability with limits of liability of: 

1. $500,000. Each accident for bodily injury by accident. 


Page 10 

2. $500,000. Each employee for bodily injury by disease, subject to a policy limit of $500,000 

for bodily injury by disease. 

B. Commercial liability insurance. Coverage shall be on an "occurrence" basis and shall insure 

Contractor for Work performed under the contract against: 

1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person 

other than his employees; 

2. Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained 

(1) by any person as a result of any offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of 

such person by the Contractor or (2) by any other person; 

3. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of 

tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 

4. The Commercial Liability policy shall contain the Personal Injury and Broad Form Property 

Damage Endorsements modified as set forth below, and the policy shall not contain any 

Property Damage Liability exclusions pertaining to loss by explosion, collapse or 

underground damage. The policy shall include coverage for: 

a. Completed Operations Liability. With respect to Completed Operations Liability, 

when the entire Work has been determined complete by the Architect and Contractor 

and accepted by the Owner, Contractor agrees to furnish evidence of such insurance 

coverage for twenty-four (24) months following date of acceptance by the Owner. 

b. Contractor's Protective Liability to cover Contractor's Liability arising out of Work 

performed by its Subcontractors. 

c. Blanket Contractual Liability, including insurance for the Indemnification 

Agreement as set forth in the applicable Article. 

d. Personal Injury Liability with Exclusions (a) 4 contractual deleted. 

e. Broad Form Property Damage extended to apply to Completed Operations. 

f. Limits of Liability shall not be less than: Bodily Injury, Personal Injury and 

Property Damage combined. 

$1,000,000. Each occurrence 

$1,000,000. Aggregate 

C. Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of 

the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. 

1. Coverage shall be for all owned, hired and non-owned vehicles. 

2. Limits of liability shall not be less than: Bodily injury and property damage combined, 


#165582


Page 11 

$1,000,000. Each occurrence. 

D. "Umbrella" Excess Liability Policy shall insure the Contractor for an amount of not less than 

$20,000,000 combined single limit Bodily Injury/Property Damage excess of Primary Employers' 

Liability and Commercial General Liability and Automobile insurance as set forth in paragraphs 

11.1.1A, 11.1.1B and 11.1.1C. 

E. The Contractor shall maintain a Professional Errors and Omissions policy. The policy shall have 

limits of $1,000,000 per occurrence with a $2,000,000 aggregate. 

11.1.2 The Insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability required by 

law. 

11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the 

Work and during the term of the Project. These Certificates shall contain a provision that coverage afforded 

under the policies will not be canceled until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. 

11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 

11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. 

Optionally, the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance for self protection against claims which may 

arise from operations under the Contract. The Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing and 

maintaining this optional Owner's liability insurance unless specifically required by the Contract Documents. 

11.2.2 Subject to the Contractor providing insurance as described in Subparagraphs 11.1.1.B and 11.1.1.D, the Owner 

shall be included as an additional insured. 

11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 

11.3.1 Prior to commencement of the Work, the Owner shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies 

lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located Property Insurance upon 

the entire Work, (1) at the site, (2) portions of the Work stored off the site, or (3) in transit, to the full insurable 

value thereof. 

This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor and its Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors 

in the Work and shall insure against the perils of Fire and Extended Coverage and shall include 

"All Risk" insurance for physical loss or damage including without duplication of coverage, Collapse, Theft, 

Vandalism, Malicious Mischief, Debris Removal, Flood, Earthquake, Land Movement and Consequential 

Loss. 

Such insurance shall be in force until substantial completion and acceptance of the Work by Owner, and the 

insurable interests of the Contractor and Subcontractors has ceased, unless alternate and equivalent coverage, as 

described in paragraph 11.5, is provided by Owner, for the benefit of Owner, Contractor and all tiers of 

Subcontractors. Coverage will include all materials that are intended for specific installation in the Project 

while such materials are located at the project site and while in transit or temporarily located away from the 

Project Site for the purpose of repair, adjustment or storage at the risk of one of the insured parties. 

This insurance will not include any tools or clothing of workmen or any tools, equipment, protective fencing, 

scaffolding, temporary structures, temporary forms and equipment owned, rented or used by the Contractor or 

any Subcontractor and used in the performance of the Work, unless the value of such items is included in the 

cost of the Work. 

If it is the Owners responsibility to purchase the insurance required by Paragraph 11.3 and the Owner does not 

intend to purchase such insurance for the full insurable value of the entire Work, Owner shall inform the 


#165582


Page 12 

Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then at its sole option effect 

insurance which will protect its interest and the interest of Subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate 

Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by failure of the 

Owner to purchase or maintain such insurance and to so notify the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all 

reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 

11.3.1.1 Should Owner elect to provide any materials, furniture, fixtures and/or equipment, to be installed by 

Contractor, its Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors, the cost of which is not included in the Contract Price, the 

value of such materials, furniture, fixtures and/or equipment will be included in the amount of Builder's Risk 

limit of liability if the Policy is to be purchased and maintained by the Owner. If the Policy is to be purchased 

by the Contractor, Owner shall notify Contractor in writing prior to their delivery at the job site, the value of 

such materials, furniture, fixtures and/or equipment, and same will be included in the amount of Builder's Risk 

limit of liability as shown on the policy to be purchased and maintained by the Contractor. Premiums for such 

insurance provided under this subparagraph shall be borne by the Owner. 

11.3.1.2 Should Owner elect to have separate Contractor or Contractors install Owner furnished materials, furniture, 

fixtures and/or equipment, the value of same plus installation will be covered under a policy written for this 

Project, and such insurance policy shall contain an endorsement waiving the carrier's right of subrogation 

against all parties to this contract, including but not limited to, Owner, Contractor, its Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors, 

in accordance with Subparagraph 11.3.5 herein. (This Insurance is to cover the insurable value 

of all separate contracts not included in the property insurance policy(s) purchased in accordance with Article 

11.3.1 herein.) The Owner shall file a copy of the Waiver of Subrogation Endorsement, as set forth in this 

Subparagraph 11.3.1.2, with the Contractor before an exposure to loss may occur. Owner, their separate 

Contractor, and all sub-tier subcontractors and suppliers will be required to provide appropriate 

indemnification, insurance, and waivers of subrogation as may be required by Contractor. 

11.3.2 The Owner shall purchase and maintain such Boiler and Machinery (Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning 

Equipment and other Machinery) insurance as may be required by the Contract Documents or by law. This 

insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the 

Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. 

11.3.3 Any loss insured under Subparagraph 11.3.1is to be adjusted by the Owner and or Contractor and made payable 

to the Owner or Contractor, as trustee for the insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgagee 

clause. The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the 

Contractor, and by appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, shall require each 

Subcontractor to make payments to his Subcontractors in similar manner. 

11.3.4 Notwithstanding any other contract provisions, any deductibles shall be the responsibility of the Owner. 

11.3.4.1 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner or Contractor as appropriate shall file with the other party a 

copy of each policy that includes insurance coverage required by this Paragraph 11.3. Each policy shall 

contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. 

Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 

days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. 

11.3.5 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and the Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, 

agents and employees each of the other, and separate contractors, if any, and their Subcontractors, Subsubcontractors, 

agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by 

insurance obtained pursuant to Paragraph 11.3 or any other property insurance applicable to the site where the 

Work is performed, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as 

the trustee. The Owner or the Contractor as appropriate shall require of the separate Contractors, 

Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, 

similar waivers each in favor of all other parties enumerated in this Subparagraph 11.3.5. The policies shall 

provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as 

to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, 


#165582


Page 13 

contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the 

person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 

11.3.6 The Owner as trustee shall provide information or otherwise comply with reasonable requests in writing by any 

party in interest regarding an accounting of the payment and distribution of insurance proceeds. 

11.3.7 If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of damaged Work shall be covered by an 

appropriate Change Order. 

11.3.8 If the Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial 

Completion thereof, such occupancy shall not commence prior to the time mutually agreed to by the Owner and 

Contractor and to which the insurance company or companies providing the property insurance have consented 

by endorsement to the policy or policies. This insurance shall not be canceled or be allowed to lapse on account 

of such partial occupancy. Consent of the Contractor and of the insurance company or companies to such 

occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. 

11.3.8.1 Upon occupation of a portion of the Work by Owner or any tenant of Owner, Owner shall indemnify and hold 

harmless the Contractor, its Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors for any claims for bodily injury and/or 

property arising out of or in any way connected to such occupancy. 

11.3.9 Owner and Contractor shall define any Risks other than those described in Subparagraph 11.3.1, 11.3.1.1, 

11.3.1.2 and 11.3.2 or other special hazards, and shall, if possible, include such coverage in the Property 

Insurance Policy provided per Subparagraph 11.3.1, or purchase and maintain available insurance. Such 

insurance shall include, but not be limited to Ocean Open Cargo coverage. All such policies shall insure the 

interests of the Owner, Contractor and its Subcontractors in the Work, and shall insure for physical loss or 

damage. 

Add Paragraphs 11.5, 11.6, 11.7, 11.8 and the associated subparagraphs and sub-subparagraphs as follows: 

11.5 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE 

11.5.1 The Owner, at his option, may purchase and maintain, such insurance as will insure Owner against loss of use 

of his property including, but not limited to, loss of income, additional interim interest expense, insurance 

premiums, or expenses pursuant to any agreement with tenants. 

The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of his property including 

consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused and shall cause all existing insurance policies 

covering such loss(s) to be endorsed as follows: 

"It is understood and agreed that the policy is hereby amended to include as additional insureds 

Contractor, its Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors, during the term of construction. It is further 

understood and agreed that this Company waives all rights it may have acquired by payment of loss 

hereunder against Contractor, and all tiers of Subcontractors, their agents and employees." 

11.6 SUBCONTRACTORS INSURANCE 

11.6.1 The following forms of insurance are required to be furnished by all Subcontractors: 

A. Workers Compensation Insurance - to cover full liability under Workers Compensation Laws of the 

State where the Work is performed and Employer's Liability coverage with limits of liability of: 

$500,000. Each accident for bodily injury by accident 

$500,000. Each employee for bodily injury by disease, subject to a policy limit of $500,000 for bodily 

injury by disease. 


#165582


Page 14 

B. Commercial General Liability Insurance. Coverage shall be on an "Occurrence" basis and shall insure 

Subcontractor for Work performed under the Contract against claims for Bodily Injury, including 

death of any person other than Subcontractor's employees, and Property Damage for injury to or 

destruction of tangible property, other than the Work itself. The policy shall contain the Personal 

Injury and Broad Form Property Damage Endorsements modified as set forth below, and the policy 

shall not contain any Property Damage Liability exclusions pertaining to loss by Explosion, Collapse 

or Underground Damage. The policy shall include coverage for: 

1. Completed Operations Liability 

2. Contractor’s Protective Liability to cover Subcontractor's liability arising out of Work 

performed by its Subcontractors. 

3. Blanket Contractual Liability insuring the Indemnification Agreement contained in the 

Subcontract. 

4. Personal Injury Liability with exclusion (a) 4 contractual deleted. 

5. Broad Form Property Damage Extended to apply to Completed Operations. 

6. Automobile Liability insuring Subcontractor for operations of all owned, hired and nonowned 

vehicles. 

7. Limits of Liability shall not be less than: 

a. Bodily Injury, Personal Injury and Property Damage combined, except Automobile 

$1,000,000. Each Occurrence 

$1,000,000. Aggregate 

b. Bodily Injury and Property Damage combined, Automobile 

$1,000,000. Each Occurrence 

However, Contractor has the option to require modified Limits of Liability from designated 

Subcontractors. 

C. Certificates/Proof of Insurance and coverages shall be filed with the Contractor prior to 

commencement of Subcontractor's work. 

D. Contractor is to be added as additional named insured to all subcontractor liability policies pertaining 

to this project. Subcontractor liability insurance is to be primary. Any insurance of Contractor is to be 

secondary. 

11.7` TRANSITION INSURANCE 

11.7.1 When Owner, Contractor and Architect have certified that the Work is substantially complete, Owner, shall 

purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure him against loss of the Work due to fire or other hazards, 

however caused. 

11.7.2 Until such time as Contractor has received final payment from Owner, said insurance purchased and maintained 

by Owner under subparagraph 11.7.1, shall insure the interests of the Contractor, its Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors. 

The carrier providing this insurance shall endorse the policy waiving the carrier's right of 


#165582


Page 15 

recovery from the Owner, the Contractor, its Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors until such time as the 

Contractor and all Subcontractors have been paid in full. 

11.8 EXPANSION/RENOVATION WORK ON EXISTING STRUCTURES 

11.8.1 In recognition of any Work to be performed by Contractor, its Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors within or 

adjacent to existing structure(s) for the purpose of renovation and/or expansion, Owner shall waive any right of 

subrogation and cause all existing permanent property insurance policies covering said structure(s) to be 

endorsed as follows: 

"It is understood and agreed that the policy is hereby amended to include as additional insureds Contractor, its 

Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors, during the term of construction. It is further understood and agreed that 

this Company waives all rights it may have acquired by payment of loss hereunder against Contractor, and all 

tiers of Subcontractors, their agents and employees regardless of whether the damage was to work or to 

property damage which was not included in the work." 

11.8.2 This Paragraph 11.8 shall continue in full force and effect until all Work to be performed by the Contractor and 

all tiers of Subcontractors is determined to be one hundred (100%) complete, accepted by the property owner, 

and the Contractor has been paid in full for Work performed under The Construction Agreement. 

11.8.3 Owner’s separate or assigned contractors shall be required to provide appropriate indemnification, insurance 

and waivers of subrogation as may be required by Contractor. 

ARTICLE 12 

UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 

12.1.1 In the first line after the word “…Architect’s…” insert the words “…or Owner’s...” In the second line after the 

word “…Architect…” insert the words “…or Owner…” In the third line after the word “…Architect’s…” insert the 

words “…or Owner’s…” 

12.1.2 In the first line after the word “…Architect…” insert the words “…or Owner…” In the second line after the 

word “…Architect…” insert the words “…or Owner…” 

12.2.1 In the first line after the word “…Architect…” insert the words “…or Owner…” 

ARTICLE 13 

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 


13.1.2 During the performance of this Contract, Contractor agrees to fully comply with, observe and be bound by all 

applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations, including without limitation, all state and local codes and 

ordinances, Uniform Building Code, National Electric Code, local fire marshal, The National Fire Protection 

Agency Publication, and all rules and regulations of all agencies or governmental bodies having jurisdiction 

over the Work. 

13.5.2 In the fourth line after the word “…Architect…” insert the words “…and Owner…” In the fifth 

line after the word “…Architect…” insert the words “…and Owner…” 

13.5.5 In the first line after the word “…Architect…” insert the words “…or Owner…” In the second line after the 

word “…Architect…” insert the words “…or Owner…” 

Add Paragraph 13.8 as follows: 


#165582


Page 16 

13.8 NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES 

Add Paragraphs 13.8.1 as follows: 

13.8.1 This Contract is not intended and shall not be deemed or construed to confer any rights, powers, or privileges to 

any person, firm, partnership, corporation, or other entity not a party hereto, unless otherwise specified herein. 

ARTICLE 14 

TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 

14.2.1 Add the following to the end of Subparagraph 14.2.1.2: 

“…, or fails to provide the Owner with Conditional or Unconditional Upon Payment Lien Waivers or Final Lien 

Waivers for all contractors, vendors, and material suppliers who have furnished labor, equipment, and/or material to the 

Work.” 

Add the following Subparagraphs 14.2.1.5, 14.2.1.6, 14.2.1.7 as follows: 

14.2.1.5 Repeatedly refuses to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner’s written 

instructions, Requests for Information, Architect’s Supplementary Instructions, Construction Change 

Directives, or approved Change Orders. 

14.2.1.6 Repeatedly performs the Work in a non-conforming or deficient manner, or provides sub-standard materials 

and/or equipment, or provides sub-standard or unskilled subcontractors or workers. 

14.2.1.7 Becomes the subject of a voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy, receivership, or if the Contractor’s payments 

from this Contract become subject to an IRS tax lien. 

Add the following Paragraphs 14.3.3 through 14.3.4 as follows: 

14.3.3 At any time subsequent to suspension by Owner for convenience, the Owner may, without cause, terminate the 

Contract after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven (7) days written notice to 

terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: 

14.3.3.1 Take possession of the site and of all materials 

14.3.3.2 Accept assignment of subcontractors pursuant to Paragraph 5.4; and 

14.3.3.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. 

14.3.4 When the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment 

as follows: 

14.3.4.1 Contractor shall submit a final statement showing all materials, equipment, labor, general conditions, overhead, 

profit and services expended to date and incorporated into the work through the date of termination. 

14.3.4.2 Contractor shall receive a percentage of its fee equal to the ratio of the cost of the Work as completed to the 

date of termination divided by the total Contract Sum at the Time of termination, including all approved scope 

changes and all reasonable costs incurred to date including costs to demobilize the project, cancellation charges 

and out of pocket expenses as out lined in Schedule A of this Agreement. 

Delete 14.4.3 and substitute: 


#165582


Page 17 

14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive a percentage 

of its fee equal to the ratio of the cost of the Work as completed to the date of termination divided by the total 

Contract Sum at the Time of termination, including all approved scope changes and all reasonable costs incurred 

to date including costs to demobilize the project, cancellation charges and out of pocket expenses as out lined in 

Schedule A of this Agreement. 

15.1.4 Add the following at the end of Paragraph 15.1.4: 

“Claims for additional costs which are not made within the time limits specified in Paragraph 15.1.2 herein shall be 

deemed to be waived.” 

15.1.5.1 Add the following at the end of Paragraph 15.1.5.1: 

“Claims for additional time which are not made within the time limits specified in Paragraph 15.1.2 herein shall be 

deemed to be waived.” 

15.1.5.2 In the third line delete the words “…scheduled construction…” and insert the words “…critical path of the 

construction schedule…” 

15.1.6 Delete this paragraph. 

End of Supplementary Conditions 

Of the Contract for Construction 


#165582


Page 18 

EXHIBIT "C' 

Additional Pay Application Requirements 

With each Application for Payment submitted under Article 5.1, Contractor shall submit the following documents: 

a) Invoice. Invoice evidencing actual Construction Costs pertaining to the applicable 

portion of the Construction Costs. 

b) Lien Waivers. (i) Conditional releases of liens (in substantially the form attached 

hereto as Schedule "A-1") executed by all applicable suppliers, 

materialmen, contractors and 

subcontractors which have not been paid in 

full for work completed thus far and (ii) final 

unconditional releases of 

liens (in substantially the form attached hereto as Schedule "A-2") executed 

by all applicable suppliers, materialmen, contractors and subcontractors 

who have paid in full for work completed thus far. 

c) Affidavit of Payment. An affidavit, certified as correct by Contractor, listing (i) the names of all 

contractors, subcontractors, suppliers and materialmen who 

provided or supplied labor, services, goods and 

materials to the premises 

and the amount due and the amount previously paid for each listed 

contractor, subcontractor and materialmen, and (ii) that all listed contractors, subcontractors, 

suppliers and materialmen, have been paid in full (or upon payment of the amounts set forth in such 

affidavit will be paid in full) for the labor, services, goods and materials provided or supplied to the premises as of the 

date of the 

affidavit. 


#165582


Page 19 

EXHIBIT “C” 

SCHEDULE “A-1” 

RECEIPT, GUARANTEE AND PARTIAL LIEN WAIVER 

TO: 

(Owner if other than Cinemark) 

Cinemark, and 

(Contractor) : 

The undersigned, having been employed by in accordance with your 

SUBCONTRACT AGREEMENT # ____________ in the amount of $______________dated ____________ for 

construction of___________, 

Does hereby certify and warrant that Progress Payment(s) to date in the net aggregate amount of $ _______________ 

is/are correct and complete to and including the date hereof except for $ ___________ retention presently properly 

withheld and that all charges and amounts now due to the undersigned and all charges and costs heretofore incurred by 

or for the undersigned for labor and materials in connection with said work have been paid in full upon receipt of check; 

this lien waiver is valid after receipt of a check in the amount of $ _____________. 

And 

Now, for and in consideration of One Dollar and other good and valuable considerations, receipt of which is hereby 

acknowledged, any and all presently existing liens and claims and rights of lien with respect to said construction are 

hereby expressly waived and released by the undersigned, and the undersigned hereby guarantees for a period of one 

year from date of final completion of the general contract all materials and workmanship supplied or performed on said 

job by or for the undersigned, and hereby covenants and agrees to save and hold harmless you and each of you from any 

and all liability and expenses on account of any charges of claims for labor or materials furnished to or by the 

undersigned on or for said job prior to the date hereof. 

CHECK #____________________ 

CURRENT CHECK AMOUNT: $_______________________ 

COMPANY 

SIGNATURE 

DATE 


#165582


Page 20 

EXHIBIT "C" 

SCHEDULE "A-2" 

FINAL RELEASE OF LIENS AND CLAIMS 

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that with reference to Contract (the “Contract”) No. 

______________________ dated ______________________between 

________________________________________________________ (“Owner”), and 

the undersigned for _______________________________ work at Owner’s project at 

____________________________________(the “Project”), the undersigned hereby 

Certifies that all bills and claims of every nature incurred or asserted in connection with the Contract and any 

amendments thereto or otherwise incurred or asserted in connection with the Project have been fully paid and/or 

satisfied. Upon receipt of $______________________ as FINAL payment, the undersigned hereby remises, releases 

and forever discharges Owner, from any and all claims, demands and other rights of action arising out of the Contract 

and any amendments thereto or otherwise in connection with the Project, and the undersigned hereby agrees to 

indemnify Owner and hold them harmless from and against any claim, demand, lien or right of lien which may now or 

hereafter be asserted in connection therewith, by the undersigned or any other party allegedly entitled to such claim, 

demand or lien, and to defend all actions arising therefrom, paying all costs, expenses and fees incident thereto, 

including, but not limited to, attorney’s fees. The undersigned further agrees to arrange for the immediate release of any 

such lien by payment or by posting a bond satisfactory in form, substance and amount with Owner. This Release shall 

insure to the benefit of Owner and their respective successors and assigns and shall be binding upon the undersigned and 

its successors and assigns. 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned, intending to be legally bound hereby, has set its (his) hand and 

seal this __________day of _____________, 2006. 

Attest/Witness: 

_______________________________ 

(Individual Signature of Name of Corp.) 

By:__________________________ 

Print Name:____________________ 

Title:_________________________ 

By:______________________________ 

Print Name:_______________________ 

Title:_____________________________ 


#165582


SECTION 01010 

SUMMARY OF WORK 

1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. Work covers the new construction of the XD 12 screen movie theater with a ground floor area of 45,222 

square feet. The projection level is 4,960 square feet. The project is located in Napa, California. 

B. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: 

1. Testing Laboratory Service - Section 01410 

2. Temporary Facilities - Section 01500 

C. Contractor's duties: 

1. Except as specifically noted, provide and pay for: 

a. Labor, materials and equipment. 

b. Tools, construction equipment and machinery. 

c. Water, heat, and utilities required for construction. 

d. Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of Work. 

2. Pay legally required sales, consumer, and use taxes. 

3. Secure and pay for, as necessary for proper execution and completion of Work, and as applicable at 

time of receipt of bids: 

a. Permits 

b. Government Fees, Impact Fees 

c. Licenses 

4. Give required notices. 

5. Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders and other legal requirements of public 

authorities which bear on performance of work. 

6. Promptly submit written notice to Architect of observed variance of Contract Documents from legal 

requirements. It is not Contractor's responsibility to make certain that drawings and specifications 

comply with codes and regulations. Contractor shall assume responsibility for Work known to be 

contrary to such requirements without notice. 

7. Enforce strict discipline and good order among employees. Do not employ on Work: 

a. Unfit person 

b. Persons not skilled in assigned task. 

8. Maintain on site at least one set of construction documents, including specifications, addenda, 

supplemental instructions and other such instructional information from the Architect, Owner, and 

Cinemark USA. 

9. Site reports shall be filled out every two weeks and transmitted by e-mail to Cinemark USA and the 

Architect. 

1.02 CONTRACTS 

A. Construct work under a single lump-sum contract. Work of the various subcontractors will be executed 

under subcontract agreements or purchase orders issued by the Contractor. 

1.03 COORDINATION 

A. This Contractor shall coordinate this work with separate Prime Contractors and subcontractors to see that 

all work is done properly and work is sequenced to avoid delays in the work. 

B. This Contractor shall see that all items fit properly and work is sequenced to avoid delays in the work. 

C. Electrical contractor shall be responsible for final connection of power to signage. 

D. Contractor’s Environmental Manager: Designate an on-site party responsible for overseeing the 

Contractor’s conformance to environmental goals for the project and implementing procedures for 

environmental protection. 

1. Responsibilities: Responsibilities shall include: 

a. Implementation and documentation of the Waste Management Plan. 

b. Implementation and documentation of the IAQ Management Plan. 

d. Compilation of LEED submittal documentation and completion of construction 

phase LEED Online credit forms assigned to the Contractor. 


#165582

e. Training for Contractor personnel in accordance with their position 

requirements. 

f. Monitoring and documentation of environmental procedures. 

Section 01010 

Page 2 

1.04 WORK TO BE FURNISHED BY OTHERS 

A. Work to be furnished by others shall be according to the Responsibility Matrix in the Drawings: 

B. All references to items furnished by Cinemark in individual sections of the specifications shall be 

superseded by the Responsibility Matrices in the Drawings. 

C. Contractor shall receive and handle for on site storage all equipment furnished by Cinemark USA. In 

addition Contractor shall assist Cinemark USA in setting equipment so furnished. 

1.05 PERSONNEL 

A. General Contractor shall provide, for the duration of the project, the following qualified and experienced 

personnel: 

1. Project Manager on ½ time basis. 

2. Field Engineer on site. 

3. Field Superintendent. 

4. Assistant Superintendent for Building Construction. 

5. Assistant Superintendent for Site (if site is over 14 acres). 

6. Work performed by the General Contractor’s own crew shall have one foreman for supervision of 

each trade. 

7. Sub-contracted crews shall have one foreman for each trade. 

B. Personnel should be able to document experience of at least 5 projects of similar type, size and scope. 

C. The General Contractor shall furnish subcontractor list with names, addresses, phone and fax numbers 

along with contact names within 14 days of award. 

1.06 ELECTRICIAN 

A. Electrician to receive and review light fixtures provided by Cinemark upon delivery and notify Cinemark 

of any damages or discrepancies within 24 hours of receiving material. Electrician will be responsible for 

any damage or discrepancy after initial 24 hour review period. 



#165582


1.01 GENERAL 

A. Designate in Construction Schedule delivery rates for products under each allowance. 

B. Designate in Schedule of Values quantities of materials specified under unit cost allowances. 

SECTION 01020 

ALLOWANCES 

1.02 ALLOWANCES FOR PRODUCTS 

A. Purchase products under each allowance as directed by Architect. 

B. Include following amount in Bid, for inclusion in Contract Sum only for those materials not specified on 

the drawings: 

C. Amount of each allowance includes the following, unless otherwise indicated above: 

1. Net cost of product. 

2. Delivery and unloading at site. 

3. Applicable taxes. 

D. In addition to amounts of allowances, include in Proposal, for inclusion in Contract Sum, Contractor's costs 

for: 

1. Handling at site, including crating and storage. 

2. Protection from elements, from damage. 

3. Labor, installation, and finishing. 

4. Other expenses required to complete installation. 

5. Overhead and profit. 

1.03 SELECTION OF PRODUCTS 

A. Architect's duties: 

1. Consult with Contractor in consideration of products and suppliers. 

2. Make selection, designate products to be used. 

3. Notify Contractor, in writing, designating: 

a. Product, model and finish. 

b. Accessories and attachments. 

c. Cost, delivered at site. 

B. Contractor's Duties: 

1. Assist Architect in determining qualified suppliers. 

2. Obtain proposals from suppliers when requested by Architect. 

3. Make appropriate recommendations for consideration of Architect. 

4. Notify Architect of any effect anticipated by selection of product or supplier under consideration on: 

a. Construction Schedule 

Contract Sum 

5. On notification of selection, enter into purchase agreement with designated suppliers. 

1.04 DELIVERY 

A. Contractor's Responsibility: 

1. Arrange for delivery and unloading. 

2. Promptly inspect products for damage or defects. 

3. Submit claims for transportation damage. 


#165582

Section 01020 

Page 2 

1.05 ADJUSTMENT OF COST 

A. Should actual purchase cost be more or less than specified amount of allowance, Contract Sum will be adjusted 

by a Change Order equal to the actual amount of the difference between the allowances and the Subcontract 

Amount. Neither General Conditions nor the General Contractors Profit and overhead will be included in this 

Change Order. 

B. For products specified under unit cost allowance: 

1. Should quantity used be more or less than that listed in Schedule of Values, unit cost applies to quantity 

actually used. 

2. Submit invoices or other data to substantiate quantity actually used. 

3. Submit request for other costs, claimed additional work caused by increase over amount of allowance, 

prior to execution of work. 



#165582


SECTION 01340 

SUBMITTALS 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Submit, to the Owner, shop drawings, product data and samples required by specification sections, and as 

listed herein. 

B. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: 

1. Project Record Documents - Section 01720 

C. Prepare and submit, with Construction Schedule, a separate schedule listing dates for submission and dates 

reviewed submittals will be needed for each product. 

1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS 

A. Original drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and performance charts, prepared by Contractor, 

subcontractor, supplier or distributor which illustrates or describes some portion of the Work; showing 

fabrication, layout, setting or erection details. 

B. Prepared by a qualified detailer. 

C. Identify detail by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on Contract Drawings. 

D. Reproductions for Submittals: All architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical shop drawings, 

submittals are to be electronic. 

E. All submittals shall be issued to the attention of the architect. Where then architect will distribute to the 

other consultants. 

F. All submittals that are electronic shall be issued and returned by posting them on the FTP site. Information for 

FTP project site will be provided by the architect. 

1.03 PRODUCT DATA 

A. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings: 

1. Modify drawings to delete information which is not applicable to project. 

2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to project. 

B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other 

standard descriptive data. 

1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models. 

2. Show dimensions and clearances required. 

3. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 

4. Show wiring diagrams and controls. 

1.04 SAMPLES 

A. Physical examples to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which 

completed work is judged. 

B. Office Samples: Of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 

1. Functional characteristics of product or material, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 

2. Full range of color samples. 

3. After review, samples may be used in construction of Project. 

C. Field Samples and Mock-ups: 

1. Erect at Project site at location acceptable to Architect and Owner. 

2. Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including Work of all trades required in finished Work. 

1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Review Submittals, prior to submission, for compliance with Construction Documents. The Contractors 

review of each Submittal shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person. 

B. Verify: 

1. Field measurements. 

2. Field Construction criteria. 

3. Catalog numbers and similar data. 

C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. 

D. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by Architect's review of 

submittals. 

E. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not 

relieved by Architect's review of submittals, unless Architect gives written acceptance of specific deviations. 


#165582

Section 01340 

Page 2 

F. Notify Architect, in writing at time of submission, of deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract 

Documents. 

G. Begin no work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect stamp and initials or 

signature indicating review. 

H. After Architect's review, distribute copies. 

1.06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Schedule Submission at least 14 days before dates reviewed submittals will be needed. All submittals must be 

into the Architect's office within 90-days of Contract award. All finish items are to be submitted in a 

box at the same time within 60-days of Contract award. 

B. Submit number of copies of Shop Drawings, and Product Data which Contractor requires for distribution. 

C. Submit number of Samples specified in each specification section. If Contractor wants a sample(s) for the job 

trailer, then enough samples should be submitted so they can be returned to the trailer. 

D. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter containing: 

1. Date 

2. Project title and number 

3. Contractor's name and address 

4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Product Data and Sample submitted. 

5. Notification of deviations from Contract Documents. 

6. Document recycled content on Recycled Content Information Form in Appendix A of this Section, or 

similar form as approved by Owner. Include pre- and post-consumer recycled content. 

7. Document raw material acquisition and manufacture location on Regional Material Information Form in 

Appendix B of this Section. 

8. Document VOC emissions in grams/liter (g/L) on form in Appendix C of this Section, or similar form as 

approved by Owner. 

9. Document FSC Chain of Custody information in Appendix D of this Section, or similar form as approved 

by Owner.Other pertinent data. 

E. Submittals shall include: 

1. Date and revision dates. 

2. Project title and number. 

3. The names of: 

a. Architect 

b. Contractor 

c. Subcontractor 

d. Supplier 

e. Manufacturer 

f. Separate detailer; when pertinent 

4. Identification of product or material. 

5. Identification of product material cost without labor. 

6. Product environmental data 

a. Pre-consumer and post-consumer ecycled content 

b. Location of raw material extraction, collection or harvest and distance from project. 

c. Location of material manufacture and distance from project. 

d. Chain of custody information for FSC Certified Wood Products. 

e. Invoices for all wood products. 

f. VOC levels for all interior adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings in grams/liter (g/L). 

7. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 

8. Specification section and number. 

9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 

10. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of field measurements 

and compliance with Contract Documents. 

1.07 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES 

A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness. 

B. Review for: 

1. Design concept of project. 

2. Information given in Contract Documents. 


#165582

C. Review of separate item does not constitute review of an assembly. 

D. Affix stamp and initials or signature certifying to review of submittal. 

E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution. 

Section 01340 

Page 3 

1.08 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS 

A. Shop Drawings to be returned within 90 days from Contract Award. (also refer to specification section for 

submittal requirements). Provide submittals applicable to commissioned systems with Ownder’s 

Commissioning Agent. 

1. LEED Checklist 

2. Construction Waste Management 

3. Indoor Air Quality Management 

4. General Commissioning Requirements 

5. Building Envelope Commissioning 

6. Irrigation 

7. Planting 

8. Earthwork 

9. Termite Control 

10. Concrete Foundation and Reinforcement 

11. Concrete Wall Panels 

12. Mortar and Grout 

13. Concrete Masonry Units 

14. Structural Steel 

15. Steel Joists and Joist Girders 

16. Metal Decking 

17. Metal Fabrications 

18. Steel Stairs & Railing 

19. Miscellaneous Metals 

20. Pre-finished Steel Railings 

21. Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 

22. Rough Carpentry 

23. Finish Carpentry & Millwork 

24. Membrane Waterproofing 

25. Building Insulation 

26. Exterior Insulation and Finish System 

27. Roofing Membrane and Accessories – (also see section for FM Global review requirements) 

28. Composite Metal Building Panels 

29. Preformed Metal Siding 

30. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 

31. Metal Roof Panels 

32. Metal Fabrications 

33. Sealants and Caulking 

34. Metal Doors and Frames 

35. Plastic Faced and Flush Wood Doors 

36. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 

37. Finish Hardware and Hardware Schedule - NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

38. Glass and Glazing 

39. Glazed Aluminum Curtainwall 

40. Lath and Portland Cement Plaster 

41. Ceramic Tile - NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

42. Acoustical Ceiling - NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

43. Vinyl Wallcovering - NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

44. Wall Carpets - NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

45. Prefinished Panels 

46. Resilient Flooring & Base - NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

47. Carpet – (By CUSA) 

48. Carpet Tile – (By CUSA) 

49. Special Coatings 


#165582

Section 01340 

Page 4 

50. Painting 

51. Corner Guards - NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

52. Fire Extinguisher 

53. Toliet Accessories - (By CUSA) 

54. Toliet Partitions – (By CUAS) 

55. Rainwater Harvesting 

56. Water Reuse 

57. Concession Equipment – (By CUSA) 

58. Foot Grid Entrance Systems 

59. Roller Shades 

60. PV Electrical Power Equipment 

61. Elevators 

62. Water Heater 

63. Sprinkler System - Include completed Hydraulic Calculations. At end of this section – (also see section 

for FM Global review requirements) 

64. Roof Top A.C. Units and Curbs (By CUSA) 

65. Diffusers Registers, Grilles (By CUSA) 

66. Fire Dampers 

67. Mechanical 

68. Plumbing 

69. Electrical 

70. Site Ligthing 



#165582

Appendix A 

RECYCLED CONTENT INFORMATION FORM 

Date_____________ SUBMITTAL NUMBER_______________ 

Project Name: 

The undersigned Contractor certifies to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information, and belief the information contained herein is true 

and accurate. 

Contractor Name / Address Legibly Printed Name 

Contact Email Title 

Telephone Fax Date 

Signature 

Product Description 

CSI Section Number 

(Required for all 

Products) 

Manufacturer and 

Product Trade Name 

Total Product 

Cost ($) 

% Virgin Content 

% Post- 

Consumer 

% Pre- 

Consumer 

Total% 

100 

Document 

indicating 

recycled 

content 

included 

(Y/N) 

100 

100 

100

Appendix B 

REGIONALLY MANUFACTURED INFORMATION FORM 

Date_____________ SUBMITTAL NUMBER_______________ 

Project Name: 


and accurate. 




Signature 



(Required for all 

Products) 

Manufacturer and 

Product Trade Name 

Total Product 

Cost ($) 

Distance Between 

project and 

Manufacturer 

(in miles) 

Percentage Of 

Material 

Manufactured 

Regionally 

Distance 

between 

Project and 

Extraction 

Site (in 

Miles) 

Percentage 

of Material 

Extracted / 

Harvested 

Regionally 

Regional 

Content / 

Extracted 

Content 

Information 

Source

Appendix C 

LOW-EMITTING INDOOR MATERIAL INFORMATION FORM 

Date_____________ LEED SUBMITTAL NUMBER_______________ 

Project Name: 


and accurate. 




Signature 



(Required for all Products) 

Manufacturer Product Trade Name 

VOC Limits (Per 

SCAQMC / Bay Area 

QMD or Green Seal) 

Actual Product VOC 

Levels 

MSDS or Other Provided 

Stating VOC Content of 

Product (Y / N)

Appendix D 

CERTIFIED WOOD INFORMATION FORM 

Date_____________ LEED SUBMITTAL NUMBER_______________ 

Project Name: 


and accurate. 

Notes: 

Make multiple copies of this form as needed. 

1. All new wood to be listed line-by-line and include the following information, 

2. Must include original manufacturer’s invoice which indicates FSC chain of custody # 

3. Identify FSC-certified products (FSC Pure, FSC Mixed Credit, FSC Mixed [NN]%) 

4. Furnish invoices for all wood products 

5. Provide a letter from supplier stating that wood products provided are FSC certified. 




Total Construction Cost or, 

Total material cost (exclude labor and equipment) 

Signature 

Total Cost of all wood based products 

Product Name 

Vendor Product Cost % Certified Wood 

Forest Stewardship Council Chain-of-custody 

certificate number

SECTION 01351 

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 

PART 1 

GENERAL 

1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes: 

1. Special requirements for waste management during construction operations. 

a. Protect the environment, both on-site and off-site, during construction operations. 

b. Prevent environmental pollution and damage. 

c. Maximize source reduction, reuse and recycling of solid waste. 

B. Related Sections: 

1. 01340 – Submittals. 

2. 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 

3. 01701 – Contract Closeout Procedures. 

1.02 DEFINITIONS 

A. Definitions pertaining to sustainable development: As defined in ASTM E2114. 

B. Deconstruction: Disassembly of buildings for the purpose of recovering materials. 

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Maximize use of source reduction and recycling procedures. 

B. Diversion Goals: A minimum 75% percent by weight of total project solid waste to be diverted from 

landfill. 

1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING 

A. After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work, schedule and conduct meeting 

with Owner and Architect to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan and to develop mutual 

understanding relative to details of environmental protection. 

1.05 SUBMITTALS 

A. Solid Waste Management Plan: Not less than 10 days before the Pre-construction meeting, prepare and 

submit a Solid Waste Management Plan including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. List of the recycling facilities, reuse facilities, municipal solid waste landfills and other disposal 

area(s) to be used. Include: 

a. Name, location, and phone number. 

b. Copy of permit or license for each facility. 

2. Identify materials that cannot be recycled or reused. Provide explanation or justification. 

3. Revise and resubmit Plan as required by Owner. 

a. Approval of Contractor’s Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for 

compliance with applicable environmental regulations. 

B. Progress Documentation: Document solid waste disposal and diversion. Include the quantity by weight 

of waste generated; waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and waste disposed by landfill or 

incineration. Identify landfills, recycling centers, waste processors, and other organizations that process 

or receive the solid waste. 

1. Document on form in Appendix A of this Section, or similar form as approved by Owner. 

2. With each Application for Payment, submit updated Documentation for solid waste disposal 

and diversion. 

3. With each Application for Payment, submit manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices 

specifically identifying the Project and waste material. 

C. Record Submittals: With Record Submittals as specified in Section 01 78 53 (01780), submit the 

following: 

1. Summary of solid waste disposal and diversion. Submit on form in Appendix A of this 

Section, or similar form as approved by Owner. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 


#165582

PART 3 EXECUTION 

Section 01351 

Page 2 

3.01 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 

A. Develop and implement a waste management program in accordance with ASTM E1609 and as 

specified herein. 

B. Collection: Implement a recycling/reuse program that includes separate collection of waste materials of 

the following types as appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse programs 

in the project area: 

1. Land clearing debris. 

2. Asphalt. 

3. Concrete and Masonry. 

4. Metal. 

a. Ferrous. 

b. Non-ferrous. 

5. Wood, nails and staples allowed. 

6. Debris. 

7. Glass, colored glass allowed. 

8. Paper. 

a. Bond. 

b. Newsprint. 

c. Cardboard and paper packaging materials. 

9. Plastic. 

a. Type 1: Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE). 

b. Type 2: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE). 

c. Type 3: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC). 

d. Type 4: Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE). 

e. Type 5: Polypropylene (PP). 

f. Type 6: Polystyrene (PS). 

g. Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made with a 

resin other than the six listed above, or is made of more than one resin listed above, 

and used in a multi-layer combination. 

10. Gypsum. 

11. Non-hazardous paint and paint cans. 

12. Carpet. 

13. Insulation. 

14. Others as appropriate. 

C. Recycling/Reuse: Maximize recycling and reuse of materials. 

1. Recycling/Reuse off project site: The following is a partial list for Contractor's information 

only. For more information, contact the State Department of Environmental Quality and the 

local Integrated Solid Waste Management Office. 

a. Habitat for Humanity, a non-profit housing organization that rehabilitates and builds 

housing for low-income families. Sites requiring donated materials vary. Contact the 

national hotline (800) HABITAT. 

b. California Materials Exchange (CAL-MAX) Program sponsored by the California 

Integrated Waste Management Board; (916) 255-2369. 

D. Handling: 

1. Clean materials that are contaminated prior to placing in collection containers. Deliver 

materials in accordance with recycling or reuse facility requirements (e.g., free of dirt, 

adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to recycling 

process). 

2. Arrange for collection by or delivery to the appropriate recycling or reuse facility. 

3. Hazardous Waste and Hazardous Materials: Handle in accordance with applicable regulations. 



#165582

Section 01351 

Page 3 

Appendix A 

SAMPLE SUMMARY OF SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL AND DIVERSION 

Project Name: 

Contractor Name: 

Contractor Address: 

Project Number: 

License Number: 

Solid Waste 

Material 

Appliances 

Asphalt 

Cardboard 

Carpet 

Concrete 

Gypsum Drywall 

Land 

Clearing/Soil 

Masonry 

Metals: Ferrous 

Metals: Nonferrous 

Mixed/Comingled 

Waste 

Plastic 

Roofing: 

Asphalt-based 

Roofing: EPDM 

Salvaged/Surplus 

Materials for 

Reuse 

Wood: 

Landclearing 

Debris 

Wood: Scrap 

Lumber 

Other: 

Date Material 

Disposed/ 

Diverted 

Amount 

Disposed/ 

Diverted (ton or 

cubic yard) 

Municipal Solid 

Waste Facility 

(name, address, 

& phone 

number) 

Recycling/ 

Reuse Facility 

(name, address, 

& phone 

number) 

Comments (if 

disposed, state 

why not 

diverted) 

Signature: 

Date: 


#165582


#165582 

Section 01351 

Page 4

SECTION 01352 

INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN 

PART 1 

GENERAL 

1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Special requirements for Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) management during construction 

operations. 

a. Control of emissions during construction. 


A. Definitions pertaining to sustainable development: As defined in ASTM E2114. 

B. Adequate ventilation: Ventilation, including air circulation and air changes, required to cure materials, 

dissipate humidity, and prevent accumulation of particulates, dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 

C. Hazardous Materials: Any material that is regulated as a hazardous material in accordance with 49 CFR 

173, requires a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200, or which 

during end use, treatment, handling, storage, transportation or disposal meets or has components which 

meet or have the potential to meet the definition of a Hazardous Waste in accordance with 40 CFR 261. 

Throughout this specification, hazardous material includes hazardous chemicals. 

1. Hazardous materials include: pesticides, biocides, and carcinogens as listed by recognized 

authorities, such as the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the International Agency 

for Research on Cancer (IARC). 

D. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ): The composition and characteristics of the air in an enclosed space that affect 

the occupants of that space. The indoor air quality of a space refers to the relative quality of air in a 

building with respect to contaminants and hazards and is determined by the level of indoor air pollution 

and other characteristics of the air, including those that impact thermal comfort such as air temperature, 

relative humidity and air speed. 

E. Interior final finishes: Materials and products that will be exposed at interior, occupied spaces; including 

flooring, wallcovering, finish carpentry, and ceilings. 

F. Packaged dry products: Materials and products that are installed in dry form and are delivered to the site 

in manufacturer's packaging; including carpets, resilient flooring, ceiling tiles, and insulation. 

G. Wet products: Materials and products installed in wet form, including paints, sealants, adhesives, special 

coatings, and other materials which require curing. 


A. Inspection and Testing Lab Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience in performing the types of 

testing specified herein. 

1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING 

A. After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work, schedule and conduct meeting 

with Owner and Architect to discuss the proposed IAQ Management Plan and to develop mutual 

understanding relative to details of environmental protection. 


A. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan: Not less than 10 days before the Pre-construction meeting, 

prepare and submit an IAQ Management Plan including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Procedures for control of emissions during construction. 

a. Identify schedule for application of interior finishes. 

2. Procedures for moisture control during construction. 


#165582

Section 01352 

Page 2 

a. Identify porous materials and absorptive materials. 

b. Identify schedule for inspection of stored and installed absorptive materials. 

3. Revise and resubmit Plan as required by Owner. 

a. Approval of Contractor’s Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for 

compliance with applicable environmental regulations. 

B. Product Data: 

1. Submit product data for filtration media used during construction and during operation. 

Include Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV). 

3. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit MSDSs for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance 

Manual for the following products. Coordinate with Section 01 78 23 (01830). 

a. Adhesives. 

b. Floor and wall patching/leveling materials. 

c. Caulking and sealants. 

d. Insulating materials. 

e. Fireproofing and firestopping. 

f. Carpet. 

g. Paint. 

h. Clear finish for wood surfaces. 

i. Lubricants. 

C. Photographs: 

1. Submit photographs illustrating IAQ control practices based on SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for 

Occupied Buildings Under Construction. Photographs must be dated, taken through all phases 

of construction and contain captions identifying the SMACNA guideline illustrated. 

PART 2 

PRODUCTS 

2.01 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS – Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) 

A. All adhesives and sealants within the building envelope shall meet emission standards below. Reference 

Appendix A in this section for emission tables. 

1. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 effective July 1, 2005 and amendment 

date of January 7, 2005. http://www.aqmd.gov/rules/siprules/sr1168.pdf 

2. Green Seal standard GS-36 for spray adhesives in effect October 19, 2000. 

B. All paints and coatings within the building envelope shall meet emission standards below. Reference 

Appendix A in this section for emission tables. 

1. SCAQMD Rule 1113 for Architectural Coatings effective January 1, 2004. 

http://www.aqmd.gov/rules/siprules/sr1113.pdf 

2. Green Seal standard GC-03 for anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints 2 nd Edition, January 7, 1997. 

3. Green Seal standard GS-11, 1 st Edition, May 20 1993 for paints and coatings applied to interior 

walls and ceilings 

C. All flooring and flooring adhesives within the building envelope shall meet emission standards below. 

Reference Appendix A in this section for emission tables. 

1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 for sealers, stains and finished effective January 1, 2004. 

2. SCAQMD Rule 1168 for tile setting adhesives and grout effective July 1, 2005. 

D. All composite woods must contain no added urea-formaldehyde. 

PART 3 

EXECUTION 

3.01 IAQ MANAGEMENT - EMISSIONS CONTROL 

A. During construction operations, follow the recommendations in SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for 

Occupied Buildings under Construction. 

B. HVAC Protection: 

1. Seal return registers during construction operations. 

2. Provide temporary exhaust during construction operations 

3. To the greatest extent possible, isolate and/or shut down the return side of the HVAC system 

during construction. When ventilation system must be operational during construction 

activities, provide temporary filters. 

4. Protect all return air grills with MERV 8 filters if running mechanical system throughout 

construction. 


#165582

Section 01352 

Page 3 

C. Source Control: Provide low and zero VOC materials as specified. 

D. Pathway Interruption: Isolate areas of work as necessary to prevent contamination of clean or occupied 

spaces. Provide pressure differentials and/or physical barriers to protect clean or occupied spaces. 

E. Housekeeping: During construction, maintain project and building products and systems to prevent 

contamination of building spaces. 

1. Keep materials dry. Protect stored on-site and installed absorptive materials from moisture 

damage. 

2. Verify that installed materials and products are dry prior to sealing and weatherproofing the 

building envelope. 

3. Install interior absorptive materials only after building envelope is sealed and weatherproofed. 

G. Scheduling: Schedule construction operations involving wet products prior to packaged dry products to 

the greatest extent possible. Schedule work such that absorptive materials, including but not limited to 

porous insulations, paper-faced gypsum board, ceiling tile, and finish flooring, are not installed until 

they can be protected from rain and construction-related water. 

H. Flush-Out: After construction ends, prior to occupancy and with all interior finishes installed, perform a 

building flush-out by supplying a total air volume of 14,000 cu.ft. of outdoor air per sq.ft. of floor area 

while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60 degrees F and relative humidity no higher than 

60%. Replace HVAC system filters after flush with minimum MERV 13 filtration media. 



#165582

Section 01352 

Page 4 

Appendix A 

SAMPLE RECYCLED CONTENT AND REGIONAL MATERIALS FORM 

South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule # 1168 and the Green Seal Standard GS-36. 

Adhesives 

VOC Limit (g/L) 

Indoor Carpet Adhesives 50 

Carpet Pad Adhesives 50 

Wood Flooring Adhesives 100 

Rubber Floor Adhesives 60 

Subfloor Adhesives 50 

Ceramic Tile Adhesives 65 

VCT & Asphalt Adhesives 50 

Drywall & Panel Adhesives 50 

Cove Base Adhesives 50 

Multipurpose Construction Adhesive 70 

Structural Glazing Adhesive 100 

Adhesive Primer for Plastic 550 

Contact Adhesive 80 

Special Purpose Contact Adhesive 250 

Structural Wood Member Adhesive 140 

Top & Trim Adhesive 250 

Metal to Metal Adhesive 30 

Plastic Foam Adhesive 50 

Porous Material Adhesive 50 

Wood Adhesive 30 

Fiberglass Adhesive 80 

Architectural Sealant 250 

Nonmembrane Roof Sealant 300 

Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealant 450 

Other Sealants 420 

Architectural Non Porous Sealant 

Primer 

250 

Architectural Porous Sealant Primer 775 

Other Sealant Primer 750 

Aerosol Adhesive 

General Purpose Mist Spray 

General Purpose Web Spray 

Special Purpose (All Types) 

VOC Weight 

65% max 

55% max 

70% max 


#165582

Section 01352 

Page 5 

Green Seal Standard GS-11, Green Seal Standard GC-03, and South Coast Air Quality Management (SCAQMD) District 

Rule # 1113. 

Paints, Coatings, & Primers 


Flat 50 

Non Flat 150 

Anti-corrosive/ Anti-rust Paints 


Applied to ferrous metal substrates 250 

Anti-corrosive/ Anti-rust Paints 


Applied to ferrous metal substrates 250 

Wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, 

sealers, and shellacs 


Clear Wood Varnish 350 

Clear Wood Lacquer 550 

Floor Coating 100 

Waterproof Sealer 250 

Sanding Sealer 275 

Other Sealers 200 

Shellac, clear 730 

Shellac, pigmented 550 

Stains 250 


#165582


SECTION 01410 

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: 

1. Refer to paragraphs 2.2.13, 4.3.3 and 7.7 of the General Conditions. 

2. In the event of conflict between requirements of the General Conditions and this Section concerning 

testing laboratory services, for the specific items of construction listed in Section 01410, the requirements 

of Section 01410 shall govern. 

1.02 DESCRIPTION 

A. An Independent Testing Laboratory, employed and paid for by the Contractor, shall perform the specified 

testing and laboratory services. 

B. Materials and workmanship not meeting the required standards or performance obligations are to be removed 

and replaced at the Contractor's expense, including all subsequent testing. 

C. Where the terms "Inspector" and "Testing Laboratory" are used, they mean and refer respectively to an 

officially designated and accredited inspector of the testing laboratory and the testing laboratory engaged by 

the Contractor. 

1.03 WORK INCLUDED 

A. Inspection and testing of soil compaction and soil density. 

B. Inspection and testing of concrete work including design mixes, placement and reinforcing steel. 

C. Inspection and testing of mortar, grout and concrete masonry units, including design mixes and placement of 

reinforcing. 

D. Inspection and testing of structural steel. 

E. Keeping inspection and test logs of all inspections and tests. 

F. Submitting to Architect, Engineer, Contractor, and Owner certifications, records and reports of all inspections 

and tests. 

1.04 SUBMITTALS (CERTIFICATION) 

A. Submit one copy each to Architect, Consulting Engineer, Contractor, Tenant and Owner of certification of each 

inspection and test required. 

B. In each certificate state details of each inspection and test to indicate satisfactory compliance with requirements 

of the specifications and/or drawings or unsatisfactory conditions or failure to comply with requirements. 

1.05 RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR REGARDING TESTING LABORATORY 

A. Selection of the laboratory in no way relieves the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and 

construction in full compliance with the Contract Documents. 

B. Notify the laboratory of material sources and furnish without cost, necessary quantities of representative 

samples to laboratory of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested. 

C. Give timely notice to the laboratory when the various construction operations requiring testing or inspection 

are to be performed. 

D. Advise laboratory to complete any required check-tests and assign personnel for field inspection and testing as 

specified. 

E. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage of test samples on project site. 

F. Furnish such nominal labor as is required to assist laboratory personnel in obtaining and handling samples at 

site. 

1.06 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF LABORATORY PERSONNEL 

A. Laboratory personnel shall inspect and/or test materials, assemblies, specimens, and work performed including 

design mixes, methods and techniques as specified and report results to Architect, Structural Engineer, Owner 

and Contractor. 

B. Should it appear that the material furnished or work performed fails to meet requirements of Contract 

Documents, laboratory shall direct the attention of the Contractor and the Owner's Representative to such 

failure or infringement. 


#165582

Section 01410 

Page 2 

C. The laboratories are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirements of the Contract 

Documents, or to approve or accept any portion of the work. The duty of the laboratories is to test and/or 

sample and report on a timely basis. 


2.01 MATERIALS 

A. Materials in conjunction with the work of this Section shall be as required for the various tests. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.01 SUBGRADE DENSITY TEST 

A. Establish moisture density relationship of subgrade and select fill in accordance with ASTM D-698. 

B. Perform in-place density test of completed select fill subgrade beneath building slabs-on-grade and stabilized 

sub-grade beneath paving in accordance with ASTM D-2167 as follows: 

1. Building Subgrade: one test per lift for each 5,000 s.f. area. 

3.02 TESTING OF CONCRETE 

A. Refer to Section 03300 for specific requirements. These apply to all concrete placed for Section 03300 and 

Section 02514. 

3.03 MORTAR, GROUT AND CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 

A. Refer to Section 4100 and Section 4200 for specific requirements. 

3.04 STRUCTURAL STEEL 

A. Refer to Section 05100 for specific requirements. 



#165582


SECTION 01500 

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 

1.01 ACCESS TO SITE AND PARKING AREAS 

A. Contractor shall use the streets and areas assigned to him by the Owner for the purposes of access to the job 

site. 

B. Parking areas for cars of Contractor's employees shall be only as directed and/or allowed by the Owner. 

1.02 STAGING AREAS 

A. Contractor shall use only those areas assigned to him by the Owner for material storage, subcontractors’ sheds 

and staging areas. 

1.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES 

A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain ample sanitary facilities for the use of his workmen and those 

of the subcontractors. 

B. Temporary toilets shall be installed at the time the Work is commenced and shall be maintained in compliance 

with all applicable health laws and regulations and the use of such facilities shall be enforced. 

C. Toilets shall be of the chemical type unless directed otherwise. 

D. Remove the temporary toilets and all traces thereof from the premises upon completion of the work. 

1.04 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 

A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for temporary water, gas, electricity and other services as may be 

required until premises are accepted by the Owner. 

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of the maintenance of these services and pay for all fuel and 

electricity consumed during the period of construction for whatever purpose it may be required. 

C. Permanent power costs shall also be borne by the Contractor until date of Substantial Completion as accepted 

by the Architect and Owner. 

1.05 TEMPORARY OFFICES AND SHEDS 

A. The Contractor shall provide, where directed by the Owner on the premises, such temporary offices and sheds 

as may be required for his Work and shall maintain same and remove from the premises when directed. 

1.06 TELEPHONE 

A. The Contractor shall provide, in his temporary offices, a straight line telephone with speaker phone capability 

for use of the Contractor from the commencement of operations until final acceptance. The Contractor shall 

pay all charges for telephone installation, service and removal. 

B. Provide one (1) facsimile machine at the field office building. 

1.07 COMPUTER COMMUNICATIONS 

A. The Contractor shall have the capability of sending and receiving e-mail in his temporary offices. 

1.08 TEMPORARY WIRING 

A. The Contractor shall provide all preliminary wiring necessary under this contract. The Contractor shall furnish 

and install a temporary wiring system adequate to furnish power and lighting for construction needed. 

B. Each subcontractor shall be responsible for extending service to their own temporary office. 

1.09 CONTRACTOR SAFETY 

A. The General Contractor shall at all times maintain a safe construction site which complies with all aspects of 

the OSHA Construction Safety Standard (29 CFR 1926). 

B. The General Contractor shall ensure that all subcontractors work safely and comply with the OSHA Standard. 

C. The General Contractor shall designate in writing a Site Safety Officer, and submit a written safety plan which 

details how safety will be managed throughout the project. A professional safety resource should also be 

identified for the project whether in-house or contract. 

D. Require the General Contractor to obtain written safety programs from subcontractors. 

E. The General Contractor should hold safety orientation meetings for each subcontractor. A review of safety 

issues should be a routine agenda item on weekly project meeting. The General Contractor should document 

all safety meetings and training sessions. 


#165582

Section 01500 

Page 2 

F. The General Contractor and any subcontractors directly retained by Cinemark should provide Certificates of 

Insurance which list appropriate types and limits of coverage. Certificates should name Cinemark as a 

Certificate Holder and additional insured. 

1.10 PROJECT SAFETY AND SECURITY 

A. Safety lights, barricades, and protective devices shall be placed in locations acceptable to maintain security of 

the property throughout the period of the contract. 

B. The contractor will provide one hard hat each for the exclusive use of the Tenant and the Architect, to be kept 

in the temporary office at all times. 

1.11 PROJECT SIGN 

A. Fabricate and erect one project sign as shown on the drawings where instructed by the Architect within 30 days 

of the start of construction. 

B. Contractor may erect one sign with the Construction Company’s Logo and information. Except as otherwise 

specifically instructed by the Owner or required by local ordinance, do not permit other signs or advertising on 

the job site. 

C. Remove from the premises within 3 days of the placement of the permanent Building Identification sign or 

upon instruction from the Architect. 

1.12 SWPPP - (Storm Water Protection Plan Proposal) 

A. Contractor must follow all EPA guidelines, and is responsible for filing a NOI, if one is required. 

1.13 Indoor Air Quality Management Plan 

A. Contractor must follow Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for 

Occupied Buildings Under Constrction, 2 nd Edition 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008 (Chapter 3). 

1.14 Construction Waste Management 

A. Contractor must provide collection location for construction waste recycling including but not limited to 

material outlined in Section 01351 Construction Waste Management. 



#165582


SECTION 01600 

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 


A. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work: 

1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 

2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the Architect. 

3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: 

a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and shop practices. 

b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be interchangeable. 

c. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. 

d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. 

e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations 

are specifically approved in writing. 

4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified. 

B. Related requirements Specified in Other Sections: 

1. Submittals: Section 01340. 

1.02 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS 

A. When Contract Documents require the installation of work in compliance with the manufacturer's printed 

instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including 

two copies to Architect. 

1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion. 

2. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in 

conformity with specified requirements. 

B. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with 

Architect for further instructions. Do not proceed with Work without clear instructions. 

C. Perform Work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation 

procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. 

1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING 

A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work 

and conditions at the site. 

1. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original packaging or containers, with 

identifying labels intact and legible. 

2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract 

Documents and approved submittals, and that Products are properly protected and undamaged. 

B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to Products or 

packaging. 

1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 

A. Store Products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 

1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures. 

2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Exterior Storage. 

1. Store Fabricated products above the ground on blocking or skids, prevent soiling or staining. Cover 

products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet overings, provide adequate ventilation to 

avoid condensation. 

2. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign 

matter. 


#165582

Section 01600 

Page 2 

C. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored 

products to assure that Products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or 

deterioration. 

D. Protection After Installation: 

1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and 

subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed. 

1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTION 

A. Products List. 

1. Within 30 days after Contract Date, submit to Architect a complete list of major products proposed to be 

used, with the name of the manufacturer and the installing subcontractor. 

B. Contractor's Options. 

1. For Products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard. 

2. For Products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of the products or 

manufacturers named which complies with the specifications. 

3. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and "or equal", Contractor must 

submit a request for substitution for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. 

4. For products specified by naming only one Product and manufacturer, there is no option. 

C. Substitutions. 

1. For a period of 30 days after Contract date, Architect will consider written requests from Contractor for 

substitution of Products. 

2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete data, with drawings and samples as 

appropriate, including: 

a. Completed copy of Architect's Substitution Request Form. 

b. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that specified. 

c. Changes required in other elements of the Work because of the substitution. 

d. Effect on the construction schedule. 

e. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product specified. 

f. Any required license fees or royalties. 

g. Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement materials. 

3. Architect shall be judge of the acceptability of the proposed substitution. 

D. Contractor's Representation: 

1. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor: 

a. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to 

that specified. 

b. Will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified. 

c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and make such other 

changes as may be required to make the Work complete in all respects. 

d. Waives all claims for additional cost, under his responsibility, which may subsequently become 

apparent. 

e. Will replace proposed product with specified product including labor should the proposed product fail 

within the first year after issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall also 

be responsible for repair of consequential damage resulting from failure of proposed product. 

E. Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and notify Contractor, in writing, 

of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution. 

F. See Substitution Request Form following. 



#165582

Section 01600 

Page 3 

PROJECT: CENTURY XD12 – NAPA, CALIFORNIA #165582 

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 

Architect: Kip E. Daniel Architect cc: 

1807 Ross Ave., Ste. 500 

Dallas, TX 75201 

For your consideration in lieu of: 

Section # Paragraph Specified Product 

We hereby submit the following proposed substitution: 

Reason for proposed substitution: 

Product history: New Product 2-5 Years Old 5-10 Years Old More than 10 years old 

Manufacturer: 

Phone: 

Years in Business: 

Address: 

List at least three similar installations with the following information: 

1. Project 

2. Address 

3. Owner (Name, Address, Phone) 

4. Architect (Name, Address, Phone) 

5. Date Installed 

We have attached to this form: 

1. Technical Data for the specified product. 

2. Technical Data for the proposed substitution. 

3. Complete information on changes to Contract Documents required for the proper installation of the 

proposed substitution. 

Samples: ( are enclosed / will be furnished upon request.) 

List of other attachments: 


#165582

Section 01600 

Page 4 

We have reviewed the proposed substitution and note the following: 

1. Dimensions ( will / will not ) be affected (as shown on the attached drawings). 

2. The manufacturer's warranty for the proposed substitution ( is the same as / differs from) the specified 

product (as described in the attached literature). 

3. The Contract Time will be ( unchanged / increased by days / decreased by days) if the 

substitution is accepted ( by ). 

4. Other trades ( will / will not ) be affected (as indicated in the attached information). 

5. Maintenance, service and spare parts for the proposed substitution are available from: 

a. 

b. 

6. If the proposed substitution is accepted, we will execute a Change Order ( increasing / decreasing) the 

Contract Sum by : dollars ($ ) not 

including charges or credits for Contractor's Overhead and Profit identified in the Owner-Contractor 

Agreement. 

By this submission we certify that: 

1. We have reviewed, and agree to, the provisions of section 01600 of the specifications. 

2. The proposed substitution has been fully reviewed and determined to be equal or superior to the product 

specified. 

3. The cost data stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may 

subsequently become apparent will be waived. 

4. Dimensions and clearances for all affected work will not change other than as noted above. 

5. Coordination, installation, and changes in the work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete 

in all respects. 

6. If the product is accepted for substitution and installed, the Contractor hereby agrees that should the 

product fail within one year of Owner's occupancy of the building, the substituted product will be removed 

and replaced with the product originally specified, at no cost to the owner. 

Signature: 

Contractor's Name, Address and Phone: 

ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION 

Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Section 01340 

Substitution approved as noted- Make submittals in accordance with Section 01340 

Substitution rejected - Use specified materials 

Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials 

Substitution Request incomplete - Resubmit with all requested information. 

Signed by: 

Date: 

END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 


#165582


1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 

A. Administrative provisions for Substantial Completion and for final acceptance. 

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 

A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Owner occupancy. 

B. Section 01710 - Final Cleaning. 

C. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents 

D. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data 

E. Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds 

F. Section 01750 - Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials 

G. Appendix C – LEED Checklist 

SECTION 01701 

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 

1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. When Contractor considers Work or designated portion of Work is substantially complete, he should submit 

written notice with a list of items to be completed or corrected. 

B. Should Architect inspection find Work is not substantially complete, he will promptly notify Contractor in 

writing, listing observed deficiencies not listed by Contractor. 

C. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial completion. 

D. When Architect finds Work is substantially complete he will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion in 

accordance with provisions of the General Conditions. 

E. Before delivery of Project or designated portion of Project to Owner, Contractor shall: 

1. Coordinate Owner and Tenant supplied materials and work and complete all work in his Contract 

necessary to obtain certificate of occupancy. 

2. Perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01710. Owner will occupy Project under provisions 

stated in Certificate of Substantial Completion. 

1.04 FINAL COMPLETION 

A. When Contractor considers Work is complete, submit written certification: 

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 

2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 

3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents, and deficiencies listed with Certificate 

of Substantial Completion have been corrected. 

4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced and are fully operational. 

5. Operation of systems has been demonstrated to Owner's personnel. 

6. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. 

B. Should Architect inspection find Work incomplete, he will promptly notify Contractor in writing listing 

observed deficiencies. 

C. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of final completion. 

D. When Architect finds work is complete, he will consider closeout submittals. 

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities: 

1. Certificate of Occupancy. 

2. Certificates of Inspections required mechanical and electrical systems. 

B. Project Record Documents: Under provisions of Section 01720. 

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Under provisions of Section 01730. 

D. Warranties and Bonds: Under provisions of Section 01740. 

E. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials: Under provisions of Section 01750. 

F. Keys and Keying Schedule: Under provisions of Section 08710. 

G. Evidence of Compliance with requirements of Appendix C – LEED Checklist. 

H. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with Conditions of the Contract. 

I. Consent of Surety to Final Payment. 


#165582

Section 01701 

Page 2 

J. Certificates of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations: In accordance with Supplementary 

Conditions. 

K. IAQ Management Plan: As specified in Section 01352 – Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management. 

L. Product Data for filtration media: As specified in Section 01352 – Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management. 

M. Product Data for recycled content and regional materials 

N. MSDS Data: As specified in As specified in Section 01352 – Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management and 

Section 01340 – Submittals. 

O. Recycled Content Data: As specified in Section 01340 – Submittals 

P. Raw material acquisition and manufacture location - As specified in Section 01340 – Submittals 

Q. Chain-of-Custody Data: As specified in Section 01340 - Submittals 

R. Final Summary Of Solid Waste Disposal And Diversion: As specified in Section 01351 – Construction Waste 

Management. 

S. Erosion and sedimentation control plan including dated photographs illustrating BMPs through all phases of 

construction. 

1.06 STATEMENT OF ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS 

A. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to Contract Sum indicating: 

1. Original Contract Sum. 

2. Previous Change Orders. 

3. Changes under Allowances. 

4. Deductions for Uncorrected Work. 

5. Deductions for liquidated damages. 

6. Other adjustments to Contract Sum. 

7. Total Contract Sum as adjusted. 

8. Previous Payments. 

9. Sum remaining due. 

B. Architect will issue a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not previously 

made by change orders. 

1.07 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT 

A. Submit application for final payment in accordance with provisions of Conditions of the Contract. 



#165582


1.01 RELATED WORK 

A. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: 

1. Submittals: Section 01340 

1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS 

A. Maintain at job site, one copy of: 

1. Contract Drawings 

2. Specifications 

3. Addenda 

4. Reviewed Shop Drawings 

5. Change Orders 

6. Other Modifications in Contract 

B. Store documents in approved location, apart from documents used for construction. 

C. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 

D. Maintain documents in clean, dry legible condition. 

E. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. 

F. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Architect and Owner. 

1.03 MARKING DEVICES 

A. Provide colored pencil for all marking. 

SECTION 01720 

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

1.04 RECORDING 

A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in 2 in. high printed letters. 

B. Keep record documents current. 

C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. 

D. Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction: 

1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to first floor level. 

2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent 

surface improvements. 

3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and 

accessible features of structure. 

4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 

5. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. 

6. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 

1.05 SUBMITTAL 

A. At completion of project, deliver record documents to Architect. 

B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 

1. Date 

2. Project title and number 

3. Contractor's name and address 

4. Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate. 

5. Signature of Contractor, or his authorized representative. 



#165582



A. Format and content of manuals. 

B. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 

C. Schedule of submittals. 


A. Section 01340 - Submittals 

B. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment 

C. Section 01701 - Contract Closeout Procedures 

D. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents 

E. Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds 


#165582 

SECTION 01730 

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 


A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 

1.04 FORMAT 

A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. 

B. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2" x 11" three ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers; 1" 

maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. 

C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 

INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Project (and separate building) identify subject matter of contents. 

D. Arrange contents by systems process flow under section numbers and sequence of Tables of Contents of this 

Project Manual. 

E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major 

component parts of equipment. 

F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. 

G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text 

pages. 

1.05 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME 

A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer 

and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the 

volume. 

B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, 

including local source of supplies and replacement parts. 

C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable 

to installation; delete inapplicable information. 

D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to 

show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. 

E. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. 

F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each. 

1.06 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES 

A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, 

composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for reordering custom manufactured 

products. 

B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and 

methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and 

maintenance. 

C. Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference 

standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, 

maintenance, and repair. 

D. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Specifications sections. 

E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.

Section 01730 

Page 2 

1.07 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS 

A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Give 

function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with 

engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 

B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications. 

C. Include as-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 

D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. 

Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any 

special operating instructions. 

E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routing procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, 

and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. 

F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. 

G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. 

H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 

I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for 

maintenance. 

J. Provide as-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 

K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with as-installed color coded piping diagrams. 

L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control 

diagrams. 

M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained 

in storage. 

N. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 

1.08 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL 

A. Before final inspection, instruct Owner's and Tenant's designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and 

maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. For equipment requiring seasonal 

operation, perform instructions for other seasons within six months. 

B. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in 

detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 

C. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when need for such data becomes 

apparent during instruction. 


A. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner 

or Tenant, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 

B. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. Copy will be returned 

(after final inspection), with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of document as required prior to 

final submittal. 

C. Submit two copies of revised volumes of data in final form within ten days after final inspection. 

D. Coordinate O&M manual and training documentation with Owner’s Commissioing Agent. 



#165582


SECTION 01740 

WARRANTIES AND BONDS 

1.01 GENERAL 

A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. 

B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. 

C. Co-execute submittals when so specified. 

D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. 

E. Submit to Architect for review and transmittal to Owner. 

F. Related requirements in other parts of the Project Manual: 

1. General Warranty of Construction: Conditions of the Contract. 

G. Related Requirements Specified in other sections: 

1. Warranties and bonds required for specific products: each respective section of the Specifications listed 

below. 

2. Provisions of warranties and bonds, duration: The respective section of specifications which specifies 

product. 

1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective 

manufacturers, suppliers and sub-contractors. 

B. Number of original signed copies required: Two each. 

C. Table of Contents: neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information on each item. 

1. Product or work item. 

2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 

3. Scope. 

4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 

5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract. 

6. Provide information for Owner's Personnel: 

a. Proper procedures in case of failure. 

b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 

7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 

1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS 

A. Prepare in duplicate packets. 

B. Format: 

1. Size 8 1/2" x 11" punched sheets for three ring binders. 

a. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders. 

2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS". List: 

a. Title of project Section 01740 

b. Name of Contractor 

C. Binders: Commercial quality, three ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 

1.04 TIME OF SUBMITTALS 

A. For equipment or components parts of equipment put into service during progress of construction, submit 

documents within ten days after inspection and acceptance. 

B. Other wise, make submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial completion, prior to final request for 

payment. 

C. For items or work where acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide 

updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty 

period. 


#165582

1.05 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED 

A. Submit warranties, bonds, service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of 

Specifications; including but not limited to: 

1. Section 07110 Membrane Waterproofing 

2. Section 07535 Membrane Roofing 

3. Section 07620 Sheet Metal Siding, Flashing and Trim 

4. Section 07650 Flexible Flashings 

5. Section 07910 Sealants and Caulking 

6. Section 08100 Metal Doors and Frames 

7. Section 08212 Plastic Faced and Flush Wood Doors 

8. Section 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 

9. Section 08625 Translucent Wall Systems 

10. Section 08810 Glass and Glazing 

11. Section 08920 Glazed Aluminum Curtainwall 

12. Section 09220 Lath and Portland Cement Plaster 

13. Section 09650 Resilient Flooring and Base 

14. Section 09800 Special Coatings 

15. Section 09950 Wallcoverings 

16. Section 10150 Toilet Partitions 

17. Section 11201 Rainwater Harvesting 

18. Section 11202 Water Reuse 

19. Section 12484 Foot Grid Entrance Systems 

20. Section 12494 Roller Shades 

21. Section 13600 PV Electrical Power Equipment 

22. Section 14240 Hydraulic Elevators 

23. Division 15 HVAC Units 

24. Division 16 Electrical Equipment 

Section 01740 

Page 2 



#165582



A. Products required. 

B. Storage and delivery of products. 


A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment 

B. Section 01701 - Contract Closeout Procedures 

C. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data 

SECTION 01750 

SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 

1.03 PRODUCTS REQUIRED 

A. Provide, to the Tenant, quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance materials 

specified in the individual sections, in addition to that required for completion of Work. 

B. Products: Identical to those installed in the Work. Include quantities in original purchase from supplier 

manufacturer to avoid variations in manufacturer. 

1.04 STORAGE, MAINTENANCE 

A. Store products with products to be installed in the Work, under provisions of Section 01600. 

B. After delivery of products to site, maintain spare products in same space and condition as products to be 

installed in the work. 

C. When adequate, secure storage facilities are available at site, capable of maintaining conditions required for 

storage and not required for Contract work or storage (or for Tenant's needs), spare products may be stored in 

available space. 

D. Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible, until delivery to Tenant. 

1.05 DELIVERY 

A. Coordinate with Tenant’s Project Manager: Deliver and unload spare products to Tenant at Project site and 

obtain receipt prior to final payment. Tenant will handle and store products. 

B. For portions of Project accepted and occupied by Tenant prior to Substantial Completion, deliver a 

proportional part of spare products to Tenant; obtain receipt. 



#165582

Section 01810 

Page 1 

SECTION 01810 

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 


1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 

and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 

B. OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning without regard to 

specific systems, assemblies or components. 

B. Commissioned Systems: 

1. Heating, ventilating, air conditioning and refrigeration (HVAC&R) systems (mechanical and 

passive) and associated controls. 

2. Lighting and daylighting systems. 

3. Domestic hot water systems. 

4. Renewable energy systems. 

5. Building envelope. 

C. Related Sections: 

1. Division 1 – “Building Envelope Commissioning” 

2. Division 15 – “Mechanical Systems Commissioning” 

3. Division 16 – “Electrical Systems Commissioning” 


A. BoD: Basis of Design: A document that records concepts, calculations, decision and product selections 

used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards and guidelines. The 

document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process. 

B. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources and 

documentation requirements of the commissioning process. 

C. CxA: Commissioning Authority 

D. OPR: Owner’s Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements of a project 

and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals, measurable 

performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria and supporting information. 

E. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment and Components: Where these terms are sued together or separately, 

they shall mean “as-built” systems, subsystems, equipment and components. 

1.04 COMMISSIONING TEAM 

A. Members Appointed by Contractor: Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entity 

he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process through coordinated 

action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to, representatives of Contractor, 

including Project superintendent and subcontractors, installers, suppliers and specialists deemed appropriate 

by the CxA. 

B. Members Appointed by Owner: 

1. CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules and coordinates the 

commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Owner will engage the CxA under a 

separate contract. 

2. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel. 

3. Architect and engineering design professionals. 

1.05 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and Contractor for information and use. 


#165582

Section 01810 

Page 2 

B. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning team 

activities. 

C. Provide the BoD documentation, prepared by Architect and approved by Owner, to the CxA and 

Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual and operation and maintenance 

training plan. 

1.06 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule 

them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to, the 

following: 

1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with entity 

responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action. 

2. Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log. 

3. Attend commissioning team meetings held on a monthly basis or as required by the CxA. 

4. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule. 

5. Create construction checklists (equipment start-up) and submit to the CxA for review, comment. 

Contractor is to document and sign each piece of equipment as start-up of equipment is performed. 

6. Complete paper as well as electronic checklists as Work is completed and provide to the 

Commissioning Authority on a two week basis. 

7. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures (functional testing) provided by the 

Commissioning Authority. 

8. Complete commissioning process test procedures. 

1.07 CXA’S RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Organize and lead the commissioning team. 

B. Provide commissioning plan. 

C. Review OPR & BoD. 

D. Convene commissioning team meetings. 

E. Provide project specific commissioning process test procedures. Contractor to submit start-up checklists 

and manufacturer’s start-up documents and assist in the creation of all test procedures. 

F. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. The sampling rate may 

vary from 1 to 100 percent. Verification will include, but is not limited to, equipment submittals, 

construction checklists, training, operating and maintenance data, tests and test reports to verify compliance 

with the OPR. When a random sample does not meet the requirement, the CxA will report the failure in the 

Issues Log. 

G. Prepare and maintain the Issues Log. 

H. Witness systems, assemblies, equipment and random component startup. 

I. Compile test data (with contractor assistance), commissioning inspection reports and include them in the 

Cx Report. 



#165582

Section 01811 

Page 1 

SECTION 01811 

BUILDING ENVELOPE COMMISSIONING 

PART 1 

GENERAL 


A. This section is only a portion of the Contract Documents. All of the Contract Documents, 

including Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this section. 

Refer to Divisions 03 through 14 for requirements specific to each Section. 

B. Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR) and Basis of Design (BOD) documentation are included 

for information only. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

This Section includes building envelope commissioning procedures, including substructure, superstructure, 

exterior enclosure, and roofing construction that protects climate controlled interior space from unconditioned 

spaces and the exterior environment. 

A. Commissioning 

1. A systematic process of ensuring that all building enclosure systems perform interactively 

according to the Architect’s BOD and the OPR. This is to be achieved through actual 

verification of systems performance during the construction period. 

2. The commissioning process does not take away from, or reduce the responsibility of, the 

General Contractor and installing subcontractors to provide a finished and fully functioning 

product. 

3. Whole building commissioning includes both MEP commissioning agents and building 

enclosure commissioning agents. This specification only addresses building enclosure 

commissioning. 

B. Building Envelope/Enclosure Commissioning Service Procurement: The Owner shall or 

Mechanical Commissioning Agent shall retain a Building Envelope/Enclosure Commissioning Agent 

(BECA) for the Project to provide building enclosure coordination and to oversee the commissioning 

of all building enclosure components. 

C. Systems to be Commissioned: Sections of Work to be commissioned include, but are not 

limited to, the sections of the building that include materials and assemblies that are responsible for 

creating environmental separation. All performance values shall be as described within each 

individual section. 

1.3 COMMISSIONING TEAM MEMBERS 

A. Commissioning Team 

1. Owner (PM) and his/her consultants 

2. General Contractor (GC or Contractor) 

3. Designer and design engineers (particularly the Architect and Engineers – A/E) 

4. Building Envelope/Enclosure Commissioning Authority (BECA) 

5. Specialty subcontractors 

6. Building Enclosure Testing Agency (BETA) 

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Provide complete set of Coordination Drawings (see 1.9 Building Enclosure Coordination 

Drawings) showing the complete coordination and integration of all Work of commissioned systems to 

the BECA. 

B. Provide cut sheets and shop drawing submittals of commissioned systems to the BECA. 

C. Attend pre-construction, design, and construction phase building enclosure coordination 

meetings. 

D. Provide test data, letters of compatibility, and certificates to BECA. 


#165582

Section 01811 

Page 2 

E. Coordinate trades in accordance with the requirements in The General Conditions and General 

Requirements of the construction contract. 

F. Permit and provide access to locations of installed systems, subsystems, and components for 

testing and inspection. 

G. Review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and equipment protection and provide 

necessary written limits to be used during tests. 

H. Address current Designer and Owner punch list items before functional testing. 

I. Provide schedule and perform field quality control tests and inspections required by the Contract 

Documents and product manufacturers to BECA. 

1. Update schedule biweekly throughout the construction period. 

J. Provide field quality control testing and inspections on exterior enclosure construction (including 

filling out commissioning checklists) and submit reports to the BECA. 

K. Participate in testing/inspection procedures meetings. 

l. Correct deficiencies as interpreted by the BECA, Designer, and Owner. 

M. Reimburse Owner for non-compliant and/or failed tests and inspections as outlined in Divisions 01 

through 14. 

N. Address current BECA, Owner, and Designer punch list items. 

O. During construction, maintain as-built red line drawings for all drawings and final CAD as-builts. 

P. Coordinate with manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity of the 

warranty. 

Q. Provide input for final commissioning documentation to the BECA. 

R. Submit operation and maintenance data for systems, subsystems, and components to the BECA. 

S. Participate in maintenance orientation, training, and inspection. 

1.5 DESIGNER RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Provide paper and electronic copies of Project drawings and specifications to the BECA. 

B. Provide written responses to design review comments from the BECA or other parties as 

requested. 

C. Attend design, pre-construction, and construction phase coordination meetings. 

D. Participate in testing/inspection procedures meetings. 

E. Provide resolution for items for which the BECA and Contractor may be in disagreement. 

1.6 BUILDING ENVELOPE COMMISSIONING AUTHORITIES RESPONSIBILITIES 

The BECA shall begin Work in the Pre-Design or Design Phases and continue until all building enclosure 

systems have been accepted by both the Designer and the Owner. The specific tasks/responsibilities of the 

BECA include the following: 

A. Attend initial team meeting. 

B. Evaluate design concepts against OPR and Architect’s BOD. 

C. Incorporate commissioning requirements into the construction documents via a commissioning 

specification. 

D. Initial review of preliminary construction documents against OPR and BOD. 

E. Perform back check review of construction documents against OPR and BOD. 

F. Develop functional test plan for exterior enclosure. 

G. Develop quality control checklists. 

H. Review of Project drawings and specifications at 50%, and 100% completion for constructability, 

durability, and performance of exterior enclosure conformance. 

I. Review of pertinent building enclosure shop drawings/submittals for compliance with Contract 

Documents. 

J. Observe the construction and testing of mock-up(s). 

K. Document construction of commissioned components at the completion of mock-up testing. 

L. Design the exterior enclosure Commissioning Plan. 

M. Attend preconstruction conferences. 

N. Finalize Commissioning Plan. 

O. Attend pertinent progress meetings (as needed). 


#165582

Section 01811 

Page 3 

P. Perform field observations of exterior enclosure installations. 

Q. Maintain a log of deficient conditions. 

R. Observe functional field performance testing. 

S. Evaluate substitution requests for compliance with Contract Documents and for compatibility with 

Work of other subcontractors. 

T. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates and include them in the systems manual and 

commissioning process report. 

U. Resolve conflicts in the installation of materials and assemblies specific to the building enclosure 

trades. 

V. Finalize commissioning record with warranties and close-out documentation. 

W. Verify applicable training procedures of building maintenance personnel. 

1.7 BUILDING ENVELOPE TESTING AGENCY (BETA) RESPONSIBILITIES 

The building enclosure testing agency may be the same entity as the BECA or a separate agency that is hired by 

the Owner. The specific tasks/responsibilities of the BETA include the following: 

A. Develop testing forms for functional performance testing. 

1. Maintain the following records: 

a. Name of Inspector. 

b. Subcontractor. 

c. Manufacturer’s representative present. 

d. Type of product or assembly. 

e. Type of test and reporting. 

f. Retesting required. 

B. Perform functional testing as outlined in Commissioning Plan. 

C. Perform additional testing if failed test results occur. 

D. Submit test reports to the BECA. 

1.8 BUILDING ENVELOPE COORDINATION DRAWINGS 

A. Sequence of Coordination Drawings preparation shall be as follows: 

1. Coordination Drawings: The General Contractor shall be fully responsible for 

coordinating all trades, coordinating construction sequences and schedules, and 

coordinating the actual installed location and interface of all Work that impacts upon the 

building enclosure. Before materials are fabricated or the Work begun, the General 

Contractor shall supervise and direct the creation of one complete set of Coordination 

Drawings showing the complete coordination and integration of all Work of this Project 

relating to the thermal, drainage, air barrier, vapor barrier, and structural systems of the 

enclosure. Coordination Drawings are intended to assist the Contractor during 

construction and shall not be used for “shop drawings”, “record drawings”, or any other 

required submittal. 

a. Base Sheets: The General Contractor shall prepare and provide one accurately 

scaled set of building coordination drawing “base sheets” on reproducible 

transparencies showing all architectural and structural Work. Base sheets shall be at 

1/4-inch scale, except congested areas and sections through vertical shafts shall be at 

3/8-inch scale. 

b. Building Envelope Subcontractors: The General Contractor shall circulate the 

Coordination Drawings to other subcontractors and trades whose Work might 

conflict with other Work and require these subcontractors to accurately and neatly 

show the actual size and location of all their Work. These subcontractors shall note 

any apparent conflicts, suggest alternate solutions, and return the Coordination 

Drawings to the General Contractor. 

c. After each trade completes its drawings, a meeting will be held to resolve conflicts 

between the trades. 

1. Trades Coordination Drawings shall be prepared at not less 

than 1/4-inch scale, and electronic AutoCAD files of same. 

2. Trades Coordination Drawings shall be submitted to the 

Contractor for Designer’s review prior to starting any installations. 


#165582

Section 01811 

Page 4 

3. Items of impossibility or requests for variance shall be called 

to the Contractor’s attention for the Designer’s resolution. 

4. Contractor Review and Submission: The General Contractor 

shall carefully review, modify, and approve Coordination Drawings 

in cooperation with the subcontractors to assure that conflicts, if any, 

are resolved before Work in the field is begun and to ensure that the 

location of Work exposed to view is as indicated or as approved by 

the Designer and the Owner. 

1.10 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING 

A. Objectives and Scope: The objective of functional performance testing is to demonstrate that each 

building enclosure/assembly system is operating according to the documented design intent of the 

Contract Documents and in accordance with the OPR. Functional testing facilitates bringing the 

material assembly from a state of substantial completion to full operation. Additionally, during 

the testing process, areas of non-compliant performance are identified and corrected, improving 

the operation and functioning of the building enclosure/assemblies. 

B. Development of Test Procedures: Before test procedures are written, the BECA shall obtain all 

requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting building 

enclosure/assemblies. The BECA shall develop specific test procedures for each building 

enclosure/assembly and provide a written Commissioning Plan. Prior to execution, the BECA 

shall provide a copy of the test procedures to the subcontractor(s) who will review the tests for 

feasibility, building enclosure/assemblies warranty protection. 

1. The BECA shall oversee or perform Owner-contracted performance testing. 

2. The purpose of any given specific test is to verify and document compliance with the stated 

criteria of acceptance given on the Commissioning Plan. 

C. Test Methods 

1. Functional performance testing and verification will typically follow industry standards. The 

BECA will determine which method is most appropriate for tests and modify test methods 

when an existing industry method is not available or applicable. 

2. Simulated Conditions: Simulating conditions may be allowed at the direction of the BECA, 

though testing actual conditions is encouraged wherever practical. 

D. Coordination and Scheduling: The Contractors and their subcontractors shall provide sufficient 

notice to the BECA regarding their completion schedule for the functional checklists and 

construction of the assemblies or building enclosure systems. The BECA will schedule functional 

tests through the GC and affected subcontractors. All functional testing of all building enclosure 

assemblies or building enclosure systems shall be performed by the BECA or a qualified BETA. 

E. In general, functional testing is conducted after mock-up testing has been satisfactorily completed. 

F. Problem Solving: The BECA may recommend solutions to problems found; however, the burden 

of responsibility to solve, correct, and retest problems is with the GC, subcontractors and their 

sub-subcontractors, and A/E. 

G. Failed tests will typically result in additional testing of the failed specimen and an additional 

specimen at the cost of the GC. Test will be concluded only when satisfactory results are 

achieved. 

H. Non-conformance 

1. The BECA will record the results of the functional tests in a written report. All deficiencies 

or non-conformance issues shall be noted and reported. 

2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the discretion of 

the BECA. In such cases, the deficiency and resolution will be documented in the written 

report. 

3. If at any point frequent failures are occurring and testing is becoming more troubleshooting 

than verification, the BECA may stop the testing and require the responsible subcontractor to 

perform and document a checkout of the remaining units prior to continuing with functionally 

testing the remaining units. 

4. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, 

while not compromising the integrity of the procedures; however, the BECA will not be 


#165582


Section 01811 

Page 5 

pressured into overlooking deficient Work or loosening acceptance criteria to satisfy 

scheduling or cost issues. 

5. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified, the BECA discusses the issue with the 

executing Contractor. 

a) When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the subcontractor accepts responsibility to 

correct it: 

1. The BECA documents the deficiency and the subcontractor’s response and 

intentions and they go onto another test. 

2. The BECA will coordinate the rescheduled test with the affected Contractor, and 

the test is repeated. 

b) If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is 

responsible: 

1. The deficiency shall be documented on the non-compliance form with the 

subcontractor’s response and a copy given to the Contractor and to the 

subcontractor’s representative assumed to be responsible. 

2. Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties are 

brought into the discussions as needed. Interpretive authority is with the A/E. 

Final acceptance authority is with the PM. 

3. The BECA documents the resolution process. 

4. Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party 

corrects the deficiency, signs the statement of correction on the non-compliance 

form, and provides it to the BECA. The BECA reschedules the test (and any 

additional population to be tested) with the affected Contractors, and the test(s) are 

repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved. 

5. Any required retesting that is a result of deficient installation shall not be 

considered a justified reason for a claim of delay or for a time extension by the 

Contractor. 


#165582


SECTION 02200 

EARTHWORK 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Earthwork as indicated by the Contract Documents including the following: 

1. Layout of building lines. 

2. Grading for building pad preparation. 

3. Excavating for structures 

4. Trenching for utilities 

5. Filling, backfilling and compacting 

6. All work shall follow requirements listed in the geo-technical report included herein as Appendix A. 

B. Work, items and requirements specified elsewhere that apply and/or relate to this Section 

include: 

1. Geotechnical Information – Appendix A 

2. Summary of Work - Section 01010 

3. Testing - Section 01410 

4. Structural Concrete - Section 03300 

1.02 STANDARDS 

A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of Standards listed. 

1. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM 

2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AASHTO 

1.03 PRECAUTIONS 

A. Cover holes and trenches when work is not in progress. 

B. Work shall be done by experienced operators trained to do this type of work. 

C. Avoid damage to underground utilities such as water mains, sanitary sewers, buried cables, etc. which might 

extend across or adjoin site. 

D. Take special precautions to avoid extending any operations onto adjacent property. 

E. If it is necessary to gain access to adjacent property, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining right of 

access from the adjacent property owners. 

F. If there is any damage to the adjacent property caused by these operations, the Contractor shall do all that is 

necessary to correct the damages to the adjacent property Owner's satisfaction. 

1.04 TESTING 

A. All testing of work included in this section will be done by an independent soils testing laboratory to be 

selected and paid for by the Contractor. Refer to Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. 

B. All test results will be forwarded to the Architect, Structural Engineer, Civil Engineer, Owner, Tenant and 

Contractor as soon as practicable, and any work not complying with the Specifications shall be reworked or 

replaced until it does comply with specified requirements. 

1.05 LAYING OUT 

A. Engage a qualified surveyor approved by the Owner to locate the work. 

B. Locate bench marks, monuments, and other reference marks for elevation and location of buildings. Notify 

Architect of apparent discrepancies in indicated locations. 

C. Protect reference points from dislocation or damage. Replace or repair immediately any points damaged, 

destroyed or dislocated. 

D. Verify location of vertical and horizontal reference points, and verify that the existing grades are as indicated 

on the Drawings. 

E. Notify the Architect by letter if the existing grades are not as indicated. Any claims for extras for filling and 

cutting operations that are not brought to the attention of the Architect by this letter will not be considered and 

will have to be corrected at the Contractor's expense. 

F. Accurately locate buildings and building limit lines on site according to Contract Documents and coordinate 

this work with other contractors on the site. 


#165582

Section 02200 

Page 2 

G. Erect batter boards and set grade stakes securely to remain in place until corners and heights are permanently 

established. 

H. Denote areas allocated for storage of various materials. Coordinate the location of storage and working areas 

with others to avoid interference with subsequent operations. 


A. Local/Regional Materials: 

1. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance between 

extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site. 

2. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between 

manufacturing facility and the project site. 

3. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials; include materials cost 

only. 

4. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or manufactured in separate 

locations, provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage by weight of each 

component per unit of product. 



A. Fill and backfill materials: 

1. Structrual fill material shall be select, free of sod, rubbish, construction debris, frozen soil, and any other 

deleterious materials. 

2. Fill material is subject to the approval of the construction Soil Engineer. 

3. Fill material shall not contain rocks or lumps over 6 inches in greatest dimension and not more than 15% 

larger than 2 ½”. 

4. On-site soils are acceptable for use as engineered fill when meeting the above requirements. On-site soils 

to be placed and compacted as noted below. 

5. Imported select fill to meet above requirements and the following; R-Value not less than 25, plasticity 

index not higher than 20, not more than 15% passing the No. 200 sieve. 

B. Vapor Barrier: 

1. Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier. Refer to section 03300. 

2.02 WEED KILLER 

A. Provide a dry, free-flowing, dust-free chemical compound, soluble in water, capable of inhibiting growth of 

vegetation, and approved for use on this work by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 


3.01 GENERAL PREPARATION 

A. Obtain Owner's concurrence for proposed methods of operations and procedure prior to starting work. 

Execute work in manner to prevent damage, from any cause, to adjacent streets, buildings, utilities and similar 

properties. Full responsibility for repairs and replacement rests with Contractor. Extra payment will not be 

authorized for work that could have been foreseen by a careful examination of the site. 

B. Notify respective utility companies of any damage caused to active utilities and protect active utilities pending 

instruction for disposition. 

C. During geotechnical investigation borings, groundwater was encountered at elevations -6.0 to +11.0 feet. 

Grading near or below these levels and any utilities below these elevations could encounter groundwater and/or 

localized seepage zones. Mass grading and underground contractor to be made aware of these conditions so 

that appropriate dewatering methods can be employed. 

3.02 EXCAVATION 

A. Excavation consists of the removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing the required grade 

elevations under and adjacent to structures. In areas where deciduous trees are present, major root bulbs to be 

removed. 


#165582

Section 02200 

Page 3 

B. In areas where buildings are proposed the existing fill soils to be over-excavated to undisturbed native ground 

as observed and approved by the construction Soil Engineer. It is expected that excavations to elevations 

ranging from +1 to +5 feet should be expected resulting in over-excavation depths of 5 to 11 feet (not 

including existing stockpiles). 

C. Excavations to extend a minimum of 5 feet laterally beyond the building footprint and the area replaced with 

engineered fill as noted below. 

D. In other areas (non-building or parking lots), the upper 3 feet (minimum) of the subgrade to consist of 

engineered fill. Where over-excavation is required (north half of the site), the area should be excavated to a 

depth of 2 feet, the bottom 12 inches scarified and compacted in-place, and replaced with engineered fill. The 

south half of the site will require more than 3 feet of fill to achieve the design grades and over-excavation is 

not expected to be needed. 

E. The existing stockpiles which cover a portion of the site must be removed. After removal of existing 

stockpiles, the surface of the areas to be graded will require stripping to remove vegetation and/or other 

deleterious materials. It is estimated that stripping depths of about 1 to 2 inches may be necessary; however, 

the actual depth of stripping to be determined in the field by the construction Soil Engineer. Stripped material 

from the site may not be used as engineered fill, but may be stockpiled and used later for landscaping purposes. 

F. As part of this project, the roadway Hartle Court (old) is to be demolished. Road improvements (including 

curb/gutter/sidewalk) and any utilities which will not remain in service must be demolished and removed from 

the site. The exception is that the aggregate base, asphalt concrete and Portland cement concrete may be 

crushed and used on the site as general fill. 

G. Any conflicting utilities which run through the site must be abandoned and/or relocated. 

H. Satisfactory materials acceptable for filling and backfilling work may be temporarily stockpiled on site. 

I. Make excavations large enough to permit placing and removal of shoring, forms, and for inspection of the 

work. 

J. Excavation for Structures: 

1. Level bottoms of trenches reasonably level. Change elevation at right-angled steps with forms or 

bulkheads. Step trenches in 8-inch maximum depth and 24-inch minimum length increments. 

2. Fill excess depth in trench excavations with concrete. Form excess width in size, or fill with concrete. 

3. Surfaces of excavations shall be within one inch per foot and any excessive depth in excavations shall be 

filled with lean concrete. 

K. Remove all excess excavated material from the job site. 

3.03 BACKFILLING 

A. Backfilling includes filling and compaction beneath slabs and structural concrete; against and around concrete 

foundation walls after forms have been removed and foundation inspection completed. 

B. Native clay soil subgrade may be soft, wet and unstable making placement of fill with conventional 

earthmoving equipment difficult. A stabilization layer of fill maybe required at the bottom of the excavations. 

Stabilization layer to consist of Tensar BX1200 (or approved equivalent) geogrid overlain by an 18 inch thick 

layer of 6 inch minus crushed rock overlain by Mirafi 600x (or approved equivalent) geotextile followed by 

engineering fill placement. The requirement for stabilization and the method may be modified in the field by 

the construction Soil Engineer. 

C. Do not start backfilling operations until foundation drainage system and waterproofing have been reviewed and 

tested. 

D. After stripping and over-excavation of existing firm and loose fills, and prior to any additional fill placement, 

the upper 12 inches should be scarified, moisture conditioned as necessary and compacted to a minimum 

degree of relative compaction of 90% at 2 or more percent above optimum moisture content as determined by 

ASTM D1557 Laboratory Test Procedure. Mitigation of wet/unstable soils is discussed above. 

E. Just prior to placement of select fill, all traces of organic, loose or obviously compressible material must be 

removed. 

F. Ensure areas are free from debris, snow, ice and water, and that ground surfaces are not in frozen condition. 

G. Backfill areas to grades, contours, levels, and elevations indicated. 

H. Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement and compaction. 


#165582

Section 02200 

Page 4 

I. Place engineered fill materials in loose lifts of 8 inches and uniformly compact. Use a method so as not to 

disturb or damage building drainage systems and waterproofing systems. 

J. Engineered fill to be compacted to a minimum relative compation of 90% at 2 or more percent above optimum 

moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557 Laboratory Test Procedure. 

K. Prior to compaction, each layer to be spread evenly and thoroughly blade mixed during the spreading to obtain 

uniformity of material in each layer. Fill to be brought to a water content that will permit proper compaction 

by either (a) aerating the material if it is too wet, or (b) spraying the material with water if it is too dry. 

Compaction to be performed by footed rollers or other types of approved compaction equipment and methods. 

Compaction equipment to be of such deisng that they will be able to compact the fill to specified density. 

Rolling of each layer to be continuous over its entire area and the equipment to make sufficient trips to ensure 

the required density has been obtained. No ponding or jetting is permitted. When footed rollers are used for 

compaction, the density and moisture tests shall be taken in the compacted material below the surface disturded 

by the roller. 

L. Where temporary unbalanced pressures are liable to develop on walls before floor slabs are placed, erect 

necessary shoring to counteract imbalance. 

M. At below grade concrete walls, a drainage filter blanket should be placed behind the wall. See geotechnical 

report for additional information regarding specifications for drainage filter blanket. 

N. Utility trenches extending underneath all traffic areas must be backfilled with native or approved import 

material and compacted to relative compaction of 90% to within 6 inches of the subgrade. The upper 6 inches 

to be compacted to 95% relative compaction in accordance with Laboratory Test Procedure ASTM D1557. 

Backfilling and compaction of utility trenches to meet the requirements set forth by the City of Napa, 

Department of Public Works. Utility trenches to be sealed with a compacted impervious cohesive soil material 

or lean concrete where the trench enters/exits the building perimeter. Impervious seal to extend a minimum of 

2 feet away from the building perimeter. 

3.04 GRADING 

A. General: 

1. Grade under slabs on fill to the elevations shown on the Drawings. 

2. Soft and unstable materials which will not readily compact when rolled or tamped shall be removed and 

the resulting depression filled with stable material, rolled until firm. 

3. Fine grade to the elevations shown on the Drawings. 

4. At intermediate points for which finish grades are not indicated, the finish grade shall be of uniform level 

or slope between points for which elevations are given. 

5. Any abrupt changes in level shall be rounded. 

6. Finish points shall slope away from buildings in all directions to assure positive drainage. 

7. General grading shall be done with a road or motor grader in such a manner as to result in a generally 

smooth surface free of rocks, trash, and other debris required to be removed from the site. 

B. Grading outside building lines: 

1. Grade areas adjacent to buildings to achieve drainage away from the structures, and to prevent ponding. 

2. Finish the surfaces to be free from irregular surface changes and shape the surface of areas under walks to 

line grade and cross-section, with finished surface not more than 0.10 ft. above or below the required 

subgrade elevation. 

C. Grading under building slab: 

1. All areas to receive slabs to be wetted to seal any desiccation or shrinkage cracks prior to placing the 

underslab components. This work to be done under the observation of the construction Soil Engineer. 

2. Grade areas under the building to allow for a 4” layer of ¾” Caltrans Class II aggregate base under the 

slabs on grade. 

3.05 WATER CONTROL 

A. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture-conditioned before compacting, uniformly apply 

water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to prevent free water appearing on surface during or 

subsequent to compacting operations. 


#165582

Section 02200 

Page 5 

B. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compacting to the specified 

density. 

C. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compacting may be stockpiled or spread 

and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a 

satisfactory value as determined by moisture-density relation tests approved by the construction soil engineer. 

3.06 MAINTENANCE 

A. The contractor shall be required to maintain a stable-dewatered subgrade for the building foundation and other 

concerned areas during construction. 

B. Take necessary precautions to reduce subgrade disturbance including, but not limited to: 

1. Diverting storm run-off away from construction areas. 

2. Reducing traffic in sensitive areas. 

3. Minimizing the extent of exposed subgrade to weather. 

4. Backfilling footings as soon as practicable. 

5. Maintaining an effective dewatering program. 

C. Excess materials as may be obtained from excavations and earthwork operations shall become the property of 

the Contractor and shall be promptly removed from the site at the Contractor's expense. 

3.07 SURPLUS MATERIALS 

A. Remove excavated and excess materials from site. Legally dispose of off construction site. 

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing of compacted fill materials will be performed by testing laboratory. Refer to Section 01410. Testing 

will be performed to least encumber performance or work. 

B. Coordinate provisions for and sequence of testing with testing laboratory. Notify testing laboratory and allow 

sufficient time to perform density tests. 

C. Testing laboratory will establish moisture density relationships of soils in accordance with ASTM D 698, D 

3017, or D 3017. 

D. Testing laboratory will perform in-place density test in accordance with ASTM D 1556, D 2167, D 2922, or 

other acceptable density tests. 

E. If, during progress or work, tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove 

defective work, replace and retest. 

F. Ensure compacted fills are tested before proceeding with placement of surface materials. 



#165582

SECTION 02362 

TERMITE CONTROL 

PART 1 GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Related Documents: General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General 

Requirements, and Drawings are applicable to this Section. 

B. Section Includes: 

1. Soil treatment below slabs-on-grade and at foundation perimeter for subterranean insects. 


A. Applicator: Company specializing in soil treatment for termite control with 5 years documented 

experience. 

B. Materials: Provide certification that toxicants conform to specified requirements. 

C. Material Packaging: Manufacturer's labels and seals identifying content. 

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Conform to applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for application licensing and 

authority to use toxicant chemicals. 


A. Submit product data and manufacturer's installation instruction under provisions of Section 01340. 

B. Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, and intended application 

rate. 

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 01720. 

B. Accurately record moisture content of soil before treatment, date and rate of application, areas of 

application, diary of meter readings and corresponding soil coverage. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Provide 5 year warranty for material and installation under provisions of Section 01720. 

B. Warranty: Cover against invasion or propagation of subterranean termites, damage to building or 

building contents caused by termites, and repairs to building or building contents so caused. 

C. Inspect work annually and report in writing to Owner. 

D. Owner reserves right to renew warranty for an additional 5 years after the initial 5 year period. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Toxicant Chemical: Water based emulsion, uniform composition, synthetic dye to permit visual 

identification of treated soil, of chemical element and concentrations as approved by authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

2.2 MIX DILUTION 

A. Dilute toxicant chemical as recommended by manufacturer. 


3.1 INSPECTION/PREPARATION 

A. Verify the soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, ready to receive treatment. 

B. Beginning of application means acceptance of soil conditions. 

C. Notify Architect and Owner/PM at least 12 hours prior to beginning work. 


#165582

SECTION 02362 

PAGE 2 

3.2 APPLICATION 

A. Apply toxicant no more than 12 hours prior to installation of vapor barrier under slab-on-grade or 

finish grading outside foundation walls. 

B. Apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Apply extra treatment to structure penetrations, pipe, ducts, expansion joints and other soil 

penetrations. 

D. Apply as a coarse spray to ensure uniform distribution. 

E. Coordinate soil treatment at foundation perimeter with finish grading and landscaping work to avoid 

disturbance of treated soil. Retreat disturbed treated soil. 

F. Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are completed, 

except as otherwise required in construction operations. To insure penetration, do not apply soil 

treatment to excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. 

G. Post signs in the areas of application, warning workers that soil poisoning has been applied. Remove 

signs when areas are covered by other construction. 

3.3 PRE-TREATMENT 

A. If inspection identifies the presence of termites, retreat soil and retest. 

B. Use same toxicant as for original treatment. 



#165582

SECTION 02351 

CONCRETE FOOTINGS 


1.01. SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Excavating and cleaning. 

2. Placing concrete and reinforcing steel. 

3. Furnish templates and place anchor bolts and dowels. 

B. Products Installed, not Furnished Under This Section: 

1. Reinforcing Steel 

2. Structural Concrete 

1.02. SUBMITTALS 

A. Submit shop drawings of reinforcement, dowels and anchor bolts. 

B. Submit a log of footings installed indicating the following: 

1. Identification mark. 

2. Footing size. 

3. Top of footing elevation. 

4. Top of bearing strata elevation (if applicable). 

5. Bottom of footing elevation. 

6. Concrete quantity. 

7. Concrete fill placed under footing. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not applicable (see related sections) 


3.01. INSTALLATION 

A. Excavating: 

1. Excavate for footings of required size and depth (minimum). 

2. Excavate to required minimum depth below finish grade or finish floor, or to required bearing strata. 

3. Clean bottom of excavations of loose dirt, debris and loose material. 

4. Where soft material is encountered, excavate to firm bearing. 

5. Fill over-excavations with concrete. 

B. Tolerances: 

1. Maximum lateral variation off of centerlines: 2 inches 

2. Footing size: not smaller than required sizes 

3. Top elevation: plus one inch, minus 2 inches 

4. Bottom (bearing) surface: level to within one vertical to ten horizontal. 

5. Placement of anchor bolts: within 1/4 inch any direction 

C. Drainage and Pumping: 

1. Maintain bearing surface of footing excavations dry. 

2. Remove accumulated water and ice and excavate to firm, dry surface. 

D. Reinforcing and Anchor Bolts: 

1. Tie reinforcing securely into cages or mats. 

2. Support reinforcing above ground with special chairs or precast bolsters. 

3. Secure reinforcing and anchor bolts in place, prevent shifting during placement of concrete. 

4. Use templates to position anchor bolts accurately. 

E. Concreting: 

1. Do not place concrete into or through standing water or mud. 

2. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade. 

3. Place concrete within 8 hours of excavating. 

4. Place concrete in one continuous operation for each footing. 

5. Consolidate concrete by vibrating. 


#165582

SECTION 02351 

Page 2 

3.02. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing Laboratory Services: 

1. Identify bearing strata 

2. Inspect condition of bearing surface prior to placing concrete. 

3. Check sizes and quantity of reinforcing bars, tieing and securement. 

4. Monitor placement and consolidation of concrete. 

5. Maintain logs of footing installation to verify Contractor's log. 

3.03. CLEAN-UP 

A. Remove spoilage from footing excavations and legally dispose off site. 



#165582

SECTION 02810 

PLANTING IRRIGATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes: 

1. Landscape irrigation systems. 

2. Irrigation controllers and accessories. 


1. 02900 - Planting 


A. Definitions pertaining to sustainable development: As defined in ASTM E2114 and as specified herein. 

B. Controllers, Climate-based: Weather-based irrigation controls that use real-time or historical weather 

information along with landscape parameters entered by the vendor to schedule or allow for irrigation 

when plants need water. 

C. Rain Sensors: A rain shut-off device designed to interrupt a scheduled cycle of an automatic irrigation 

system controller (i.e. timer) when a certain amount of rainfall has occurred. 


A. Product data. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under 

work of this Section: 

1. Recycled Content: 

a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer 

recycled content per unit of product. 

b. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of 

product included in project. 

c. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled 

content product in the assembly by weight. 

d. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar value of 

recycled content product to total dollar value of assembly. 

2. Local/Regional Materials: 

a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; 

indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site. 

b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate 

distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. 

c. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials; 

include materials cost only. 

d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or 

manufactured in separate locations, provide location information for each component. 

Indicate the percentage by weight of each component per unit of product. 

3. Water efficiency: 

a. Indicate water consumption rates in gallons per day (gpd) per unit for the following: 

1) Irrigation Systems. 

b. Water Budget: Landsape Irrigation design and installation shall conform to State of 

Califronina water budget requirments as noted in AB 1881. 

B. Submit environmental data in accordance with Table 1 of ASTM E2129 for products provided under 

work of this Section. 

C. Submit evidence of installer certification as a WaterSense Certified Irrigation Contractor. 


A. Water flow and consumption rates: 

1. Water Budget: Provide irrigation system in accordance with approved water budget for 

landscape. 

a. Water schedule: Provide two irrigation watering schedules consistent with overall 

project Water Budget. One schedule shall address the initial establishment phase of 

the landscape and the second schedule shall be designed to address an established 


#165582

Section 02810 

Page 2 

landscape. Both schedules shall be seasonal in nature. Post both schedules on 

controller. 

2. Provide WaterSense labeled products for: 

a. Irrigation controls. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer with minimum 3 years experience with work 

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and certified as a Certified Irrigation 

Contractor (CIC) through a WaterSense labeled program. 

C. Pre-Installation Meetings: 

1. Convene a pre-installation meeting minimum one week prior to commencing work of this 

Section. 

2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting Work of this Section. 

a. Coordinate with installation of planting materials. 

3. Review conditions of operations, procedures and coordination with related Work. 

4. Agenda: 

a. Tour, inspect, and discuss conditions of planting materials. 

b. Review planting schedule and maintenance. 

c. Review required inspections. 

d. Review environmental procedures. 

D. Post-Installation Audit: Conduct an audit of the irrigation system immediately after installation, after 

one year of operation, and three years thereafter by a WaterSense Irrigation Partner. 

1. Performance: Assess system performance; verify proper scheduling; identify deficiencies 

including deficiencies due to damage or modification of system, growth of landscape, or an 

aging system; identify opportunities to employ new technologies 

2. Review maintenance documentation. 

3. Leaks: Check for leaks during the post-installation audit. 

4. Runoff/overspray: Irrigation systems shall be designed to sustain the landscape without 

creating runoff or direct overspray during a minimum operating duration. Verify that there is no 

runoff or overspray during the post-installation audit. Determine the minimum operating 

duration based on landscape conditions and irrigation system design. 

5. Distribution uniformity: Irrigation systems shall achieve a lower quarter distribution 

uniformity (DULQ) of 70 % or greater. Measure distribution uniformity during the postinstallation 

audit. 

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Submittals: 

1. Instructions indicating procedures for routine operation and maintenance of the irrigation 

system, including controllers: 

a. During first year of plant establishment. 

b. During one typical year including variations of maintenance for climatic conditions 

throughout the year. 


A. Provide regular maintenance for minimum 90 days from date of Substantial Completion. 

1. Monitor system monthly to assess effectiveness. Verify water consumption is consistent with 

water budget. Verify components are adjusted and functioning properly. Verify that irrigation 

system pressure is within manufacturer specifications. 

2. Document all irrigation water use. 

3. Make and document minor adjustments, if any, as necessary. 

4. Provide recommendations for improvements to the system. 


2.1 WATER 

A. Water: Potable. 

2.2 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 

A. Micro-irrigation system: Equip with pressure regulators, filters, and flush end assemblies. Provide one 

of the following: 

1. Drip irrigation. 

2. Micro-spray jets 


#165582

3. Micro-sprinklers. 

4. Bubbler-style watering system. 

Section 02810 

Page 3 

2.3 CONTROLLERS 

A. Irrigation systems shall be equipped with irrigation controllers that contain the following features: 

1. Multiple programming capabilities – shall be capable of storing a minimum of three different 

programs to allow for separate schedules. 

2. Multiple start times (cycling, cycle/soak, stackable start times) – shall be capable of a minimum 

of three different start times to allow for multiple irrigation cycles on the same zone for areas 

prone to runoff. 

3. Variable run times – shall be capable of varying run times, for example one minute to a 

minimum of one hour. 

4. Variable scheduling – shall be capable of interval scheduling (minimum of 14 days) to allow 

for watering on even day scheduling, odd day scheduling, calendar day scheduling, and interval 

scheduling. 

5. Percent adjust (water budget) feature – shall include a “Percent Up/Down Adjust” feature (or 

“Water Budget” feature) such as a button or dial that permits the user to increase or decrease 

the run-times or application rates for each zone by a prescribed percentage, by means of one 

adjustment without modifying the settings for that individual zone. 

6. Capability to accept external soil moisture and/or rain sensors. 

7. Non-volatile memory or self-charging battery circuit. 

8. Complete shutoff capability for total cessation of outdoor irrigation. 

B. Smart Water Application Technologies (SWAT): Provide controllers that comply with the most current 

definitions and testing protocols published by SWAT for: 

1. Controllers, Climate-based 

C. Rain Sensors: Equip irrigation systems with rain sensors. 

2.4 METERS 

A. Provide an irrigation meter to measure the amount of water applied to the landscape. 


3.1 PREPARATION 


A. Water: Coordinate with work specified in Section 01 57 19.13 (01354) – Environmental Management 

to provide water monitoring for surface and groundwater. 

1. Assess potential effects of soil management practices on soil loss in accordance with ASTM 

D6629. Assess erodibility of soil with dominant soil structure less than 7 to 8 cm in 

accordance with ASTM D5852. 



#165582

Section 02825 

Page 1 

SECTION 02825 

STAINLESS STEEL CABLE PLANT SUPPORT SYSTEM 


1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Stainless Steel Wire Rope Assemblies 

2. Stainless Steel Fittings, Anchors, Hardware, and Accessories 


1. Division 32 Section “Plants” 

1.02 REFERENCES 

A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this 

specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority 

abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards 

subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation. 

B. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM International) 

1. ASTM A492 - Specification for Stainless Steel Rope Wire. 

2. ASTM A554 – Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing. 

3. ASTM A554 – Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing 

4. ASTM F1145 - Specification for Turnbuckles, Swaged, Welded, Forged. 

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Performance Requirements: Provide Stainless Steel Cable Railing System and mounting hardware which 

have been manufactured and installed to meet or exceed manufacturer’s and project performance criteria. 


B. Submit submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures 

Section. 

C. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s product data sheet for specified products. 


a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled 

content per unit of product. 

b. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of product 

included in project. 

c. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled content 

product in the assembly by weight. 

d. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar value of recycled 

content product to total dollar value of assembly. 


a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance 

between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site. 

b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance 

between manufacturing facility and the project site. 

c. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials; include 

materials cost only. 

d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or manufactured in 

separate locations, provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage 

by weight of each component per unit of product. 


#165582


#165582 

Section 02825 

Page 2 

D. Shop Drawings: Show layout, sizes, dimensions, details, and installation of components. Include Details of 

rope attachment, tensioning methods, hardware, and tensioning and mounting methodology. 

E. Samples: Submit samples of rope and/or hardware. 

F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the Following: 

1. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty documents 

2. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer’s standard cleaning and maintenance instructions to avoid 

detrimental actions to finishes and performance. 


A. Qualifications: 

1. Installer Qualifications: Installer should be experienced in performing work of this section and 

should have specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. 

2. Mock-Ups: Mock-Ups: Install at project site or appropriate location a job mock-up using acceptable 

products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Owner’s and Architect’s approval of 

product, application, and workmanship standards. 

3. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct with Contractor, Architect, Fabricator, Installer and any other 

subcontractors whose work involves cable railing system to verify project requirements, framing and 

support conditions, mounting surfaces, manufacturer's installation instructions, and warranty 

requirements. Comply with Division 1 requirements. 

1.06 WARRANTY 

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document 

executed by authorized company official. 


2.01 STAINLESS STEEL CABLE PLANT SUPPORT SYSTEM 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that 

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Carl Stahl-DécorCable Innovations LLC; I-SYS; Tel: 800-444-6271, E: sales@decorcable.com, 

Web: www.decorcable.com * 

2. Jakob Inc., Rope System Tel: 1-561-330-6502, E: info@jakob-usa.com, Web: www.jakob-usa.com 

3. Approved Equal. 

Asterisk (*) indicates manufacturer and product used as Basis of Design 

B. Stainless Steel Cable Plant Support System Products: 

1. Cable Rope: Product #820-0400 ASTM A492 Type 316 4mm Ø 4mm stainless steel 7x7 wire rope. 

2. Spacer Bar: Product #919-120-12 AISI 304, 316 or 316L stainless steel 

3. Clamp Screw for spacer: Product #923-0800 AISI 304, 316 or 316L stainless steel 

4. Cover Disk w/ internal threads: Product #836-1200-80 AISI 304, 361 or 316L stainless steel 

5. External Thread Swageless Connection: Product #826-0400-060 AISI 304, 361 or 316L stainless steel 

a) Provide optimum adjustment in both directions by calculating final tendon lengths with 

allowance for tensioning fittings with 2/3 open and with 1/3 of thread length engaged. 

6. Cross Clamp Adjustable: Product #858-0400-01 AISI 304, 361 or 316L stainless steel 

7. Rod for vine support: Product #922-0400 AISI 304, 361 or 316L stainless steel 

8. All Fittings, Anchors, Hardware, and Accessories: AISI 304, 316 or 316L stainless steel. 

C. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available. 

2.02 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Accessories: Provide grommet, bushings, nuts, washers, turnbuckles, anchors, fittings and other 

components as required for system installation including but not limited to 

1. Rope End Fittings, Terminals, and Tensioners 

2. Support Components 

3. Clamps and Plant Supports 

4. Anchors and Hardware

Section 02825 

Page 3 

B. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available. 

2.03 FABRICATION 

2.04 FINISHES 

A. Stainless Steel Cables and Fittings shall be dimensioned and fabricated to specified size and labeled 

according to shop drawings and installer’s specifications. 

B. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent practicable to minimize assembly at project site. 

Disassemble units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Mark units for 

reassembly. 

A. Clean and/or descale cables and fittings in accordance with ASTM A380. 

B. Passivate in accord with ASTM B912, to provide the following finish: Exterior and Interior: 330 grain satin 

finish (equiv. to #4 satin finish). 


3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, product 

catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation. 

3.02 EXAMINATION 

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify mounting condition of previously installed surfaces to ensure it is 

acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Do not begin installation 

until backup surfaces are in satisfactory condition. 


A. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, to appropriate 

sections. 

B. Take field measurements after permanent end terminations are in place and prior to preparation of shop 

drawings and fabrication, to ensure fitting of work. 

3.04 INSTALLATION 

A. Install cable plant support system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the approved shop 

drawings. 

B. Provide anchorage devices and fittings to secure to in-place construction; including threaded fittings for 

concrete inserts, toggle bolts and through-bolts. Install all rope assemblies plumb, level, square, and taut. 

C. Anchor system to mounting surfaces as indicated on the drawings. 

D. Separate dissimilar materials with bushings, grommets or washers to prevent electrolytic corrosion. 

E. Use manufacturer’s supplied mounting hardware. 

F. Terminate and tension cable system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

G. Ensure ropes are clean, and without kinks or sags. 

H. After final adjustment provide tamper resistant locktight materials on all fittings. 

3.05 CLEANING 

A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. 

B. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before owner's acceptance. Do not 

use chlorine-based or abrasive cleaners. 

C. Remove from project site and legally dispose of construction debris associated with this work. 


#165582

Section 02825 

Page 4 

3.06 PROTECTION 

A. Protection: Protect installed product from damage during subsequent construction activities. 



#165582


SECTION 02810 

PLANTING 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes: 

1. Planting materials, including: trees, plants, shrubs, ground covers and grasses. 

2. Topsoil and soil amendments. 

3. Accessories. 


1. 02810 – Planting Irrigation. 























3. Compost: 

a. Evidence of certification under the U.S. Composting Council (USCC) Seal of Testing 

Assurance (STA) Program. 

B. Planting schedule indicating anticipated dates and locations for each type of planting. 

C. Landscape Commissioning Submittals: 

1. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported topsoil. 

2. Plant list: Documenting soil, nutrients, amendments, and plants installed. 

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Submittals: 

1. Instructions indicating procedures during one typical year including variations of maintenance 

for climatic conditions throughout the year. Provide instructions and procedures including: 

a. Promotion of growth, including fertilizing, pruning, and mowing. 

b. Integrated pest management. 

2. Pictures of planting materials cross referenced to botanical and common names. Describe 

normal appearance in each season. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer with minimum 3 years experience with 

landscaping work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a 

record of successful landscape establishment. 

B. Pre-Installation Meetings: 


Section. 




#165582

Section 02810 

Page 2 

4. Agenda: 

a. Tour, inspect, and discuss conditions of planting materials. 

b. Review planting schedule and maintenance. 

c. Review required inspections. 

d. Review environmental procedures. 

C. Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant 

material required. 

D. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical 

and common name. Do not remove tag unless approved in writing by Architect. 

E. Certification: Provide compost products that are certified to specified product parameters in accordance 

with the U.S. Composting Council (USCC) Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) Program. 

F. Landscape Commissioning: 

1. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating 

percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange 

capacity; sodium absorption ratio’ deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient 

content of topsoil. 

a. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the 

State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the 

testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. 

b. Perform the soil analysis within 10 calendar days of planting. If planting is delayed, 

re-perform tests. 

2. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported topsoil, report suitability of 

topsoil for plant growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash 

nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory topsoil as appropriate to 

each plant type and location. 

3. Verify soil conditions are appropriate for plants indicated; provide recommended nutrients and 

amendments as necessary. 

4. Plant list: Submit list of plants in alphabetical order. Indicate type, size, location, and number 

of plants installed. Indicate the nutrients and amendments recommended form soil analysis and 

the nutrients and amendments provided. 


A. Minimum one year from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Promotion of growth: Weed, water, and perform other operations necessary to promote growth and as 

approved by Architect and consistent with approved Integrated Pest Management Plan. 

1. Inspection: Inspect plants at least once a week and perform needed maintenance promptly. 

2. Herbicides and pesticides are not permitted; use organic/natural matter for pest and disease 

control. 

3. Remove noxious weeds common to the area from planting areas by mechanical means. 

C. Mowing of groundcover and grass areas: 

1. Wildflowers: Mow three times per season above height of the wildflowers (approximately 12 

to 15 inches). 

2. Native Grasses: Mow above height of native grass seedlings (approximately 3-1/2 to 4 inches). 

Mow during spring or early summer. Do not mow after early summer during the second 

growing season. 

D. Chemical controls: 

1. Wildflowers, groundcover, and grasses: Do not fertilize. 

2. Trees, plants, and shrubs: Fertilize exterior planting materials to promote healthy plant growth 

without encouraging excessive top foliar growth. 

E. At end of maintenance period, request End of Maintenance Period Inspection by landscape contractor. 

1. Final acceptance of wildflower and grass areas will be based upon a satisfactory stand of 

groundcover and grasses. Stand of groundcover and grass is 95 percent ground cover of 

established species. Replant areas which do not have a satisfactory stand of groundcover and 

grasses. 

2. Final acceptance of exterior plants will be based upon satisfactory health and growth of plants. 

3. Complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals submittals for planting materials. 


#165582

Section 02810 

Page 3 

F. When work is found to be unsatisfactory, maintenance period will be extended at no additional cost to 

Owner until work has been completed, inspected and accepted by Landscape Architect. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Warranty: Warrant the following living planting materials for 90 days after date of Substantial 

Completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from 

lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, abnormal weather conditions unusual for 

warranty period. 

1. Shrubs. 

2. Ground covers. 

3. Plants. 

4. Grasses. 

B. Warranty: Warrant the following living planting materials for on year after date of Substantial 

Completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from 

lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, abnormal weather conditions unusual for 


1. Trees. 

C. Remove and replace dead planting materials immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding 

planting season. 

D. Replace planting materials that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of 



2.1 PLANTING MATERIALS 

A. As indicated on the Drawings and as follows: 

1. Renewable Resources: Plants specified are [indigenous,] [slow-growing,] low maintenance 

varieties, tolerant of site's existing soils and climate without supplemental irrigation or 

fertilization once established. 

2.2 MULCHES 

A. Free from noxious weeds, mold, or other deleterious materials. 

B. Organic Mulch Materials: 

1. Mulch from recycled site debris: Refer to plans and notes information 

2.3 TOPSOIL 

A. Topsoil: Evaluate soil for use as topsoil in accordance with ASTM D 5268. 

1. Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil 

meeting requirements and amend as necessary. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay 

lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Coordinate with Section 31 1 0 

00 (02230) – Site Clearing. 

2. Supplement with imported topsoil when quantities of stockpiled soil are insufficient. 

3. Composted topsoil used for erosion control: As specified in Section 31 25 73 (02635) - 

Stormwater Management By Compost. 

2.4 WATER 

A. Water: Potable 

B. Irrigation Systems: Provide high efficiency irrigation systems as specified in Section 32 84 00 (02810) 

– Planting Irrigation. 

2.5 PESTICIDES AND HERBICIDES 

A. Pesticides: Not permitted. 

B. Herbicides: Not permitted. 


#165582

2.6 SOIL CONDITIONERS 

Section 02810 

Page 4 

A. Soil Conditioners: Nontoxic. Use singly or in combinations required to meet requirements for topsoil. 

B. Compost: Well decomposed, stable, weed free organic matter source; derived from: agricultural, food, 

or industrial residuals; yard trimmings; source-separated or mixed solid waste. The product shall 

contain no substances toxic to plants and shall be reasonably free (< 1% by dry weight) of man-made 

foreign matter. The compost shall possess no objectionable odors and shall not resemble the raw 

material from which it was derived. Coordinate with Section 31 10 00 (02230) – Site Clearing, Section 

01 74 19 (01351) – Construction Waste Management. 

1. Product Parameters: Provide compost products with the following product parameters; certified in 

accordance with the U.S. Composting Council (USCC) Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) Program: 

Parameters Reported as (units of measure) Allowable Range 

pH pH units 6.0 - 8.5 

Soluble Salt Concentration dS/m (mmhos/cm) Maximum 10 

(electrical conductivity) 

Moisture Content %, wet weight basis 30 – 60 

Organic Matter Content %, dry weight basis 30 – 65 

Particle Size 

% passing a selected mesh size, dry 98% pass through 3/4” screen or smaller 

weight basis 

Stability 

mg CO 2 

-C per g OM per day < 8 

Carbon Dioxide 

Evolution Rate 

Maturity (Bioassay) 

Seed Emergence and 

Seedling Vigor 

%, relative to positive control 

%, relative to positive control 

Minimum 80% 

Minimum 80% 

Physical Contaminants (inerts) %, dry weight basis < 1 

Chemical Contaminants 4 mg/kg (ppm) Meet or exceed US EPA Class A standard, 40 

CFR § 503.13, Tables 1 and 3 levels 

Biological Contaminants 

Select Pathogens 

Fecal Coliform Bacteria, 

or Salmonella 

MPN per gram per dry weight 

MPN per 4 grams per dry weight 

Meet or exceed US EPA Class A standard, 40 

CFR § 503.32(a) levels 

2.7 FERTILIZER 

A. Fertilizer for groundcover, wildflowers and grasses: Not permitted. 

B. Fertilizer for trees, plants, shrubs: As recommended by plant supplier and as follows: 

1. No synthetic chemical fertilizers. 

2. Biobased content: 

a. Fertilizers: Products formulated or processed to provide nutrients for plant growth 

and/or beneficial bacteria to convert nutrients into plant usable forms. Provide 

minimum 71% biobased content. 

2.8 ACCESSORIES 

A. Edging: Refer to plan for information 

B. Plastic Fabrications: As specified in Section 06 60 00 (06600) – Plastic Fabrications. 

1. Site Furnishings: [tree grates] [benches] [xxxx]. 

2. Temporary compostable plastic accessories: [ties] [markers] [xxxx]. 


#165582


Section 02810 

Page 5 


A. Soil Conditioners: 

1. Compost: Verify that compost does not include invasive species, including seeds. Coordinate 

with Section 31 25 73 (02635) 



#165582

SECTION 03100 

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK 


1.01. DESCRIPTION 


1. Shoring formwork and re-shoring of structure 

2. Furnish, install and remove formwork for concrete. 

1.02. REFERENCES 

A. Codes and Specifications 

1. American Concrete Institute: 

a. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 

b. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 

c. ACI 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. 

d. ACI 117, Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 

2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice. 

3. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 

a. ASTM D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving 

and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 


A. Construction Joints: Submit diagrams of construction joints. 

B. Product Data: 

1. Form oil 

2. Form release agent 

3. Form sealer 

C. Samples: 

1. Rustication forms 

2. Reglet 

D. Recycled Content: 

1. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per 

unit of product. 

2. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 

3. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled content product in 

the assembly by weight. 

E. Local / Regional Materials: 





3. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials; include materials 

cost only. 




F. Letter of Certification(s) for Sustainable Forestry: 

1. Forest Stewardship council (FSC): Provide letter of certification signed by lumber supplier. Indicate 

compliance with FSC “Principles for Natural Forest Management” and identify certifying organization. 

a. Submit FSC certification numbers; identify each certified product on a line-item basis. 

b. Submit copies of invoices bearing the FSC certification numbers. 

2. American Forest & Paper Association (AF&PA): Provide letter of certification signed by lumber 

supplier. Indicate compliance with AF&PA “Sustainable Forestry Initiative” and identify certifying 

organization. 

3. Indicate percentage of Certified Wood material used. 

4. Submit information on EPA Waste Minimization Priority Chemicals associated with products provided 

under work of this Section. For each Priority Chemical, indicate whether the Priority Chemical is 


#165582


#165582 

Section 03100 

Page 2 

produced as a by-product during manufacture and whether it is contained in the final product. Indicate 

amount produced during manufacture and the amount contained in final product in terms of percentage 

by weight per unit of product. 

1.04. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Store materials off of the ground and protected from weather. 

1. Prevent warpage, twisting and excessive moisture gain of wood materials. 

2. Discard damaged or deformed materials. 

B. Protect smooth faces of form liner materials from abrasion, denting or scarring during handling. 


2.01. GENERAL 

A. Design and construct forms to withstand stresses due to weight of fresh concrete, vibration during 

consolidation and loads of equipment and workmen. 

B. Limit deflections of forms to provide smooth, straight surfaces without unsightly bulges and deformations. 

C. Limit deformations of forms for architecturally exposed surfaces to 0.0025 times the span of each component 

(facing material, studs and walers). 

2.02. ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS 

A. To the greatest extent possible, provide products and materials that promote stewardship of the earth's 

resources, promote good indoor environmental quality (IEQ), and promote efficiencies in operational 

performance. 

B. Provide products listed on the EPA Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines to the greatest extent practicable. 

C. Provide products listed on the USGBC Directory of Products and Services to the greatest extent possible. 

2.03. RECYCLED CONTENT 

A. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance requirements 

of this Section. 

2.04. REGIONAL MATERIALS 

A. Provide material with maximum amount of regional (within 500 miles) material feasible that achieves 

performance requirements of this Section. 

2.05. MATERIALS 

A. Wood forms for unexposed concrete surfaces: No. 2 Southern Yellow Pine or Douglas Fir dressed to uniform 

and smooth contact surfaces. 

B. Wood forms for concrete surfaces exposed to view: Commercial Standard Douglas Fir concrete form 

plywood, moisture resistant, not less than 5 plies, minimum thickness of 9/16 inch with one smooth face. Line 

forms with one of the following: 

1. Plywood: Commercial Standard Douglas Fir, concrete form, exterior, 3 ply, not less 1/4 inch thick with 

one smooth face. 

2. Fiberboard: Treated, hard pressed fiberboard having low degree of water absorbability, not less than 

3/16 inch thick with one smooth side. 

C. Forms for sidewalks and paving: nominal 2 inch thick wood or steel secured in place by stakes or pins. 

2.06. COMPONENTS 

A. Rustications and bevels: steel, polyvinyl chloride or milled and sealed white pine. 

B. Corner chamfers: 3/4 inch white pine or pvc. 

2.07. CERTIFIED WOOD 

A. Provide Forest Stewardship Council Certified Wood to the greatest extent possible. 

1. Use a minimum of 50% of wood-based materials and products, certified in accordance with the Forest 

Stewardship council’s Principles and Criteria, for wood building components including, but not limited 

to, structural framing and general dimensional framing, flooring, finishes, furnishings, and non-rented 

temporary construction applications such as bracing, concrete form work and pedestrian barriers. 

a. Forest Stewardship council’s Principles and Criteria: www.fscus.org (877-372-5646)

2.08. MANUFACTURED UNITS 

A. Round column forms: waterproof fiber forms constructed of spiral laminated plies of fiber. 

1. Inside of forms shall be lined to prevent spiral markings on concrete. 

Section 03100 

Page 3 

2.09. ACCESSORIES 

A. Form ties: bolt rods or patented devices of sufficient strength to withstand pressure due to wet concrete (3000 

lbs. minimum tensile strength); adjustable in length, and removable to a depth of at least 1 inch from the face 

of the concrete. 

1. Ties for exposed concrete surfaces shall be equipped with plastic cones 5/8 inch in diameter. 

2. Do not use wire ties, or makeshift ties that leave unsightly marks or depressions on the face of the 

concrete. 

B. Form oil: non-staining, paraffin-base oil having specific gravity of between 0.8 and 0.9; shall not prevent 

bonding of finish materials; shall not stain surface of concrete. 

C. Form release agent: non-staining, chemically inert, biobased 

1. Biobased Content: Minimum 85 percent soy-based oil or other biobased material. 

2. Toxicity/IEQ: Zero or Low VOC. 

3. Example product: Synthex by Industrial Synthetics Corp. 

D. Form sealer 

1. Toxicity/IEQ: Zero or Low VOC. 

2. Example product: Formfilm by W.R. Grace Co. 


3.01. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 

A. Design forms to withstand pressure and weight of wet concrete without bulging or excessive deflection. 

Comply with ACI 318. 

B. Construct forms to required shapes, lines and dimensions; provide necessary studs, walers, ties, centering, 

molds and supports. 

1. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. 

2. Construct forms to be easily removable without damage to finished surfaces. 

3. Forms shall not have unsightly marks or deformations on exposed faces. 

4. Thoroughly clean forms of concrete laitance before re-use. 

5. Provide clean-outs at the base of vertical forms for removal of foreign materials before placement of 

concrete. 

C. Support of forms: provide adequate shoring under forms to support loads imposed by wet concrete, 

equipment and workmen. 

1. Shores shall be sufficiently strong and closely spaced to prevent excessive deflections or distortion 

during placement of concrete. 

2. Comply with ACI 347. 

D. Tying of forms: provide sufficient form ties to prevent bulging or collapse of forms under weight of wet 

concrete. 

1. Place ties in a uniform and orderly pattern. 

2. Lubricate ties to prevent bonding with concrete. 

E. Special features: place in forms any wood strips, blocking, molding, and liners necessary to produce required 

shapes. 

1. Attach feature strips to forms in a manner that will not leave unsightly marks on exposed concrete 

surfaces. 

2. Coat wood strips, blocking and molding with form sealer. 

3. Provide chamfer strips in corners of formwork. 

F. Coatings: 

1. Coat contact surfaces of wood forms for un-exposed concrete surfaces with form oil. 

2. Coat contact surfaces of wood forms for exposed surfaces with form release agent before each use. 

G. Construction joints: 

1. Locate construction joints only where required as shown on submittals. 

a. Do not locate construction joints between lateral bracing elements of walls and columns. 

b. Locate construction joints in slabs approximately at midspan between supports. 

c. Construction joints shall be plumb and level. In order to avoid irregular lines at horizontal 


#165582

Section 03100 

Page 4 

construction joints in exposed concrete faces, tack a continuous strip of dressed lumber, one inch 

thick, to inside of wall or grade beam form, with its lower edge at line of construction joint. About 

one hour after placing concrete in lower part of wall remove strip, level off irregularities which 

appear in joint line with wood float and remove any laitance present. 

d. Provide shear keys as required in construction joints. 

3.02. REMOVAL OF FORMS 

A. Remove forms completely, unless specifically required otherwise. 

B. Remove forms carefully to avoid damage to concrete surfaces. 

C. Do not remove forms until concrete has adequately set. 

1. Clamps and tie rods may be loosened after 24 hours following placement of concrete. 

a. Maintain sufficient ties to hold forms in place. 

b. Withdraw through-wall ties toward the inside (or unexposed) face of walls. 

c. Prevent spalling during removal of ties. 

2. Concrete strength tests may be used as evidence that concrete has adequately set for form removal. 

a. Minimum strength shall be 75% of design strength. 

D. Remove forms sequentially and in small units to prevent shock, overload or undue eccentricity in the 

structure. Do not store materials or place heavy equipment on structures for which forms have been removed 

unless concrete strength is equal to design strength, or re-shores have been installed. Remove forms in a 

manner that does not require a large portion of the structure to be self-supporting (i.e. a full bay of framing), 

and install shores immediately as form removal progresses. 

E. Do not remove forms until supporting structures (columns, foundation or hangers) are permanently in place 

and full strength. 



#165582

SECTION 03200 

CONCRETE REINFORCING 


1.01. SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes 

1. Preparation of shop drawings 

2. Fabrication and placement of reinforcing 


A. Codes and Specifications 

1. American Concrete Institute: 

a. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 

b. ACI 315, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. 

2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice. 

3. American Welding Society, AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel" 

4. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 

a. ASTM A185, Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 

b. ASTM A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete 

Reinforcement. 

c. ASTM A706, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete 



A. Shop Drawings 

1. Submit shop and installation drawings for review by Architect, including: 

a. Sizes and quantities of reinforcing 

b. Reinforcing lengths and details of bending 

c. Placement instructions 

d. Details and spacing of supports for reinforcing 

e. Reference Engineer's reinforcing designations 

f. Reproduce Engineer's notes regarding placement of reinforcing. 

2. Review of Shop Drawings will be for reinforcing sizes, spacings, and general detail only, excluding 

quantities, lengths and fit of materials. 

3. Reproductions of Contract Drawings shall not be used for shop drawings. 

B. Quality Control Submittals 

1. Submit certified copies of mill reports, evidencing compliance with requirements of Specifications. 

2. Submit copies of laboratory testing and inspection reports. 

C. Recycled Content: 






D. Local / Regional Materials: 






only. 




E. Submit information on EPA Waste Minimization Priority Chemicals associated with products provided under 

work of this Section. For each Priority Chemical, indicate whether the Priority Chemical is produced as a byproduct 

during manufacture and whether it is contained in the final product. Indicate amount produced during 


#165582

Section 03200 

Page 2 

manufacture and the amount contained in final product in terms of percentage by weight per unit of product. 


A. Deliver materials in tagged bundles grouped as to reinforcing size and length. 

B. Store reinforcing on skids off of the ground and stacked to permit drainage. Prevent build-up of rust and dirt 

on reinforcing. Protect reinforcing from contamination that would prevent bonding of concrete. 

C. Do not bend, twist or warp reinforcing during handling. 



A. Reinforcing Steel 

1. Deformed bars: new billet steel conforming to ASTM A615 of required grades. 

2. Welded wire mesh: conform to ASTM A185. 

3. Spirals: smooth bars conforming to ASTM A615 Grade 60. 

4. Reinforcing bars to be welded: conform to ASTM A706 Grade 60. 




performance. 










A. Reinforcing supports: comply with ACI 315, Chapter 5. 

1. Provide concrete bricks or chairs with bearing plates where supports are in contact with soil. 

2. Provide plastic-tipped chairs of suitable color where concrete will be exposed to view. 

3. Provide continuous supports with spacers for slab reinforcing. 

2.06. FABRICATION 

A. Shop Fabrication 

1. Cut reinforcing to required lengths 

2. Bend reinforcing cold with suitable equipment. Do not heat or stretch material. Bend radii and 

extensions shall comply with ACI 318. 

3. Do not use reinforcing with kinks or un-required bends. 

4. Do not re-straighten reinforcing bent more than 30 degrees. 

B. Tolerances: comply with ACI 318. 

C. Marking: mark reinforcing to correspond with shop drawings. 

2.07. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing Laboratory Services 

1. Inspect fabricated materials 


3.01. PREPARATION 

A. Clean reinforcing of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil and grease. 


#165582

3.02. PLACEMENT 

Section 03200 

Page 3 

A. Place reinforcing of required sizes and quantities in proper position. Use sufficient supports and spacers to 

maintain position during placement of concrete. 

1. Do not place reinforcing supports against exposed faces of precast panels, beams, walls or copings. 

B. Secure reinforcing in position with wire ties complying with ACI 318. 

1. Clip or bend tails of tie wire away from exposed faces, do not leave tie wire within 1 1/2" of any exposed 

surface. 

C. Maintain position of reinforcing mats in walls with metal spacers between the mats. 

D. Tolerances 

1. Top reinforcing in slabs and beams 

a. Members 8 inches deep or less: + 1/4 inch 

b. Members more then 8 inches but not over 2 feet deep: + 1/2 inch 

c. Members more than 2 feet deep: + one inch 

2. Lengthwise of members: + 2 inches 

3. Concrete cover to formed surfaces: + 1/4 inch 

4. Minimum spacing between reinforcing bars: 1/4 inch 

E. Support reinforcing in slabs-on-grade and slabs-on-deck on bolsters or blocks. Do not lift reinforcing during 

concrete placement. 

3.03. COLD BENDING OF BARS IN THE FIELD 

A. Dowels connecting concrete of different pour sequences may be bent in the field to facilitate form placement 

and removal with the following conditions: 

1. Maximum bar size is #4, 

2. Maximum angle of bend is 90 degrees, and 

3. Bars may be bent and straightened one time only. 


A. Testing Laboratory Services 

1. Inspect reinforcing sizes, quantities and placement. 

2. Inspect support and securement of reinforcing. 

3. Inspect condition of reinforcing. 

3.05. PROTECTION 

A. Place reinforcing to provide required coverage of concrete. 

B. Comply with minimum requirements ACI 318. 



#165582

SECTION 03250 

EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES AND INSERTS 


1.01. SUMMARY 


1. Steel assemblies to be embedded into concrete 

2. Anchors 

3. Inserts 


A. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice. 

B. American Institute of Steel Construction 

1. AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. 

C. American Welding Society, AWS: 

1. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. 

2. D1.4, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. 

D. American Concrete Institute: 

1. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 

2. ACI 315, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. 

E. American Society for Testing and Materials: 

1. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 

2. ASTM A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality. 

3. ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 

4. ASTM A185, Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 

5. ASTM A284, Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon-Silicon Steel 

Plates for Machine Parts and General Construction. 

6. ASTM A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 

7. ASTM A325, Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 

8. ASTM A496, Standard Specification for Deformed Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. 

9. ASTM A570, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality. 

10. ASTM A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete 


11. ASTM A706, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 


A. Product Data: submit manufacturer's data indicating product compliance for the following: 

1. Headed stud anchors 

2. Deformed bar anchors 

3. Rust inhibitor coating 

4. Zinc coating 

5. Lifting inserts 

6. Threaded inserts 

7. Anchor slots 

B. Shop Drawings: submit shop and installation drawings showing shop and field connection details, including 

material grades, material sizes, and details of fabrication. 

1. Do not begin fabrication of materials prior to review of shop drawings. 

2. Review of shop drawings is for member sizes, spacings, detail, and general compliance with Contract 

Documents only. 

3. Material quantities, lengths, fit, verification of job conditions, and coordination with other trades are 

responsibility of Contractor. 








#165582

Section 03250 

Page 2 







only. 




E. When requested by Owner or Architect, submit welders' certifications. 

1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Qualifications 

1. Fabricator: minimum of 3 years experience in related or similar work. 

2. Welders: certified for type of welding required within previous 6 months. 


A. Store fabricated assemblies and inserts under cover and off of the ground to protect against corrosion prior to 

placement. 



A. Steel 

1. Shapes, plates, angles and rods: ASTM A36. 

2. Steel straps: ASTM A570 or A284. 

3. Bolts: ASTM A307, with regular hexagon nuts and carbon steel washers. 

4. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325. 

B. Reinforcing Bars 

1. Deformed Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. 

2. Welded Wire Mesh: ASTM A185. 

3. Bars to be welded: ASTM A706, Grade 60. 

C. Fusion Welded Anchors 

1. Headed Stud Anchors: comply with ASTM A108, Grades 1010 through 1020, with sizes and lengths as 

shown on Drawings, and complying with ASW D1.1, Section 7. 

2. Deformed Bar Anchors: Low carbon steel, comply with ASTM A496, with sizes and lengths as shown on 

Drawings. Acceptable product: Type DA, as manufactured by Blue Arc Stud Welding Division of Erico 

Industries. 

D. Welding Electrodes: E70. 

E. Coatings 

1. Rust Inhibitor: Hi-Build Epoxoline as manufactured by the Tnemec Co. 

2. Hot-dip Galvanizing: ASTM A153. 

3. Zinc Coating: Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound as manufactured by ZRC Chemical Products Co. 

F. Inserts 

1. Lifting inserts: Richmond Lifting Inserts of appropriate type and size recommended by Richmond Co. in 

"Richmond Product Bulletin No. 8." Use minimum safety factor of 4:1 (ultimate : actual load) for lifting 

inserts. Use an impact factor of 50 percent applied to calculated lifting loads. 

2. Threaded Inserts: rated for tensile strength of bolt size given on Drawings (ultimate strength). 

3. Anchor Slots to receive inserts for anchoring masonry units, cast stone, and marble to concrete: one inch 

wide, 7/8 inch deep, continuous No. 24 gauge, galvanized sheet steel, dovetailed slots, complete with felt 

lining. Acceptable manufacturer: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., New York, N.Y. 

4. Miscellaneous: PVC pipes, or other special inserts as shown on Drawings, or as required by other trades. 





#165582

Section 03250 

Page 3 

performance. 










A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel items in shop. Carefully and accurately shear, flame cut, and chip 

materials as required. Cut, drill, or punch holes at right angles to surface of metal. Do not enlarge holes by 

burning. Cut holes cleanly without torn or ragged edges. Weld in accordance with AISC Specifications and 

with AWS D1.1 and D1.4. Permit only AWS certified welders to perform welds. 

B. Weld deformed bar anchors and headed stud anchors by full-fusion process. Weld in accordance with 

manufacturer's recommendations regarding equipment, conditions of material, and temperature. Acceptable 

processes: Nelson Stud Welding Company, and KSM Welding Services Division, Omark Industries. 

C. Hot-dip galvanize confinement assemblies and accessories exposed to weather or soil. 

D. Plainly mark and match-mark assemblies and inserts to correspond to placement drawings and diagrams. 



A. Clean assemblies and inserts of corrosion, dirt, oil, grease and laitance before placing in forms. 

B. Place assemblies and inserts in forms and securely anchor in required positions with correct orientations. Use 

templates, diagrams and instructions provided by the Fabricator for proper alignment and positioning. 


A. Laboratory Testing: provide independent testing laboratory services as follows: 

1. Inspect steel fabrications for sizes, spacings and general quality of fabrication. 

2. Inspect welding of steel fabrications for size, length and quality. 

3. Inspect positioning of assemblies and inserts in the forms. 

4. Visually inspect welds at anchors and shear stud connectors. Test studs which do not appear to have full 

sound 360 degree fillet weld at base. Test by bending 15 degrees. Replace studs which fail this test. 

B. Afford full cooperation and access to Work to testing laboratory and provide adequate notice to laboratory of 

when Work is ready for testing and inspection so that services can be carried out in full, allowing sufficient 

time for making corrections without delaying progress of Work. 

3.03. ADJUSTING 

A. Field Touch Up 

1. Use cold galvanizing compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for field touch-up. 



#165582

SECTION 03300 

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 


1.01. SUMMARY 


1. Design of concrete mixes 

2. Furnish and place cast-in-place concrete 

3. Curing and finishing of concrete 

4. Non-shrink grout for structural steel 


A. American Concrete Institute: 

1. ACI 117, Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 

2. ACI 211.1, Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete. 

3. ACI 211.2, Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete. 

4. ACI 214, Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete. 

5. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 

6. ACI 304, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 

7. ACI 305, Hot Weather Concreting. 

8. ACI 306, Cold Weather Concreting. 

9. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 

10. SP15, Field Reference Manual, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings with Selected ACI 

and ASTM References. 

B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 

1. ASTM C31, Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 

2. ASTM C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 

3. ASTM C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 

4. ASTM C42, Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 

5. ASTM C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 

6. ASTM C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. 

7. ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 

8. ASTM C156, Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials. 

9. ASTM C171, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 

10. ASTM C172, Standard Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete. 

11. ASTM C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 

12. ASTM C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 

13. ASTM C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 

14. ASTM C330, Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. 

15. ASTM C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 

16. ASTM C567, Test for Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete. 

17. ASTM C618, Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a 

Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 

18. ASTM C1017, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 

19. ASTM C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink). 

20. ASTM C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special 

Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. 

21. ASTM E1155, Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the "F 

Number" System (Inch-Pound) Units. 

22. ASTM E1745, Standard Specification for Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill 

Under Concrete Slabs. 

C. Corps of Engineers: 

1. CRD-C13, Standard Specification for Air- Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 

2. CRD-C572, Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Water Stops. 

3. CRD-C621, Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout. 

D. Field Reference Manual: Contractor shall have available in field office a copy of ACI SP-15. 


#165582


Section 03300 

Page 2 

A. Product Data: submit manufacturers’ data indicating product compliance for the following: 

1. Admixtures 

2. Floor hardener 

3. Curing compound 

4. Curing and Sealing Compound 

5. Vapor Retarder 

6. Non-shrink grout 

7. Waterstops 

B. Material Certifications: submit certifications showing compliance for the following: 

1. Fly ash. 

2. Sieve analyses for structural concrete aggregates: 

a. Coarse aggregate. 

b. Fine aggregate. 

C. Structural Concrete Mix Designs for each class of concrete 

D. Concrete Delivery Tickets: Submit sample ready-mixed concrete delivery tickets in accordance with ASTM 

C94 for each class of concrete. 

E. Construction Joints: submit drawings indicating proposed locations of construction joints. 

F. Recycled Content: 






G. Local / Regional Materials: 






only. 




H. Submit information on EPA Waste Minimization Priority Chemicals associated with products provided under 





A. Batch Plant Qualifications - conform to the "Check List for Certification of Ready-Mixed Concrete Production 

Facilities" of the National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association. 


A. Transporting: Ready-mixed concrete supplier shall have sufficient capacity and adequate facilities to provide 

continuous delivery at the rate required for continuous placement throughout any sequence of placement. 

B. Storage of Materials 

1. Store cement in weathertight buildings or bins which prevent intrusion of moisture or contaminants. Store 

different types of cement in separate facilities. 

2. Stockpile aggregates to prevent segregation and contamination with other materials. Thaw frozen 

aggregates before use. 

3. Sand shall be drained to a uniform moisture content before use. 

4. Store admixtures securely to prevent contamination, evaporation, damage or temperature variation in 

excess of the range recommended by the manufacturer. 

C. Delivery: Truck mixers, agitators and non-agitating units shall conform to the applicable requirements of 

ASTM C94, "Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete". 


#165582


Section 03300 

Page 3 




performance. 










A. Portland cement: shall be Type I, II or III Portland Cement and meet the requirements of ASTM C150. 

B. Fine aggregate: conform to applicable requirements of ASTM C33, natural bank or river sand, washed and 

screened, consisting of hard, durable, uncoated particles free of deleterious matter, and graded from coarse to 

fine to produce a minimum percentage of voids. 

C. Coarse aggregate: conform to applicable requirements of ASTM C33, gravel or crushed stone, suitably 

processed, washed and screened; consisting of hard, durable particles without adherent coatings. 

D. Coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete: conform to ASTM C330, expanded clay or shale, producing a 

minimum split cylinder ratio of 5.0. 

E. Water: shall be clear, potable, city water free of all substances which would be harmful to the concrete. 

2.05. ADMIXTURES 

A. Air-entraining agent: conform to ASTM C260 and CRD C-13. 

B. Water-reducing, set-controlling admixture: conform to ASTM C494, Type A (water-reducing), Type D (waterreducing 

and retarding) and Type E (water-reducing, accelerating); conform to ASTM C1017 for concrete to 

be pumped. 

C. Calcium chloride thiocyanates or admixture containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions shall not be 

permitted in concrete mixtures. 

D. Fly Ash: conform to ASTM C618, carbon content not greater than 3% by volume. 

E. Superplasticizer: Daracem 100, as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Co. 

F. Admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used in concrete to be poured on metal floor deck. 

2.06. CURING AND FINISHING PRODUCTS 

A. Liquid Curing Compound 

1. Conform to ASTM C309, Types 1 and 1D, Class B, water based. 

2. Meet federal and state AIM regulations. 

3. Zero or Low VOC. 

4. Shall be dissipating resin type, which chemically breaks down after approximately eight (8) weeks. 

5. Shall not inhibit bonding of flooring adhesives. 

6. Shall not inhibit bond breaker, where applicable. 

7. Sodium silicates prohibited. 

8. Use on all interior slabs to receive subsequent floor coverings. 

B. Curing and Sealing Compounds: 

1. Conform to ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class B. 

2. Minimum 25 percent solids by volume. 

3. Moisture loss shall be not more than 0.30 Kg/M 2 when applied at 300 square feet per gallon. 

4. Meet federal and state AIM regulations. 

5. Zero or Low VOC. 

C. Evaporation Retardant: 

1. Shall be a thin, continuous film which prevents rapid moisture loss from the concrete surface. 


#165582

Section 03300 

Page 4 

2. Use when concrete operations must be performed in direct sun, wind, or high temperatures. 

D. Waterproof Paper: 

1. Waterproof paper for curing concrete - 2 ply fiber-reinforced, asphaltic kraft paper, conform to ASTM 

C171. 

E. Abrasive Aggregate: aluminum oxide aggregate. 

F. Floor Hardener: 

1. Penetrating liquid for subsequent application. 

2. Non-staining. 

3. Combination curing compound and hardener shall not be used. 

4. Do not apply to concrete until at least 28 days after concrete is placed. 

G. Cement Floor Leveling Compound: cementitious, flowable, specially formulated for feather-edge application. 

H. Sealer: 

1. Shall be siliconate based sealer that penetrates concrete surfaces, increases abrasion resistance, and 

provides a “low sheen” surface. 

2. Clear, non-yellowing, fast curing, chemically neutral, without oils, fillers, extenders and stabilizers. 

3. Shall not inhibit bonding of flooring adhesives. 

4. Shall not inhibit bond breaker, where applicable. 

I. Curing and finishing products and their application shall comply with applicable air-quality and environmental 

regulations. 

2.07. MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS 

A. Waterstops: polyvinyl chloride, bulb type with minimum 3 inch ribbed extension into concrete each side of 

joint. One side shall be split for anchoring to formwork. 

1. Representative products: Sealtight No. 6316, W.R. Meadows Co. 

2. Alternate Product: "Synko-flex Waterstop", Synko-Flex Products 

B. Non-Shrink Grout: pre-mixed, non-shrinking, minimum compressive strength 5000 psi in 28 days, conform to 

U.S. Army Corp of Engineers Specification No. CRD-C621. 

1. Grout exposed to view shall be non-oxiding 

C. Vapor Barrier membrane must have the following properties. 

1. Permeance of less than 0.022 Perms [grains/(ft2 *hr * in.Hg)] per ASTM F 1249 or ASTM E 96 

2. Maintain permeance of less than 0.022 Perms [grains/(ft2 *hr * in.Hg)] after mandatory conditioning tests 

per ASTM E 154 Sections 8, 11, 12, and 13. 

3. ASTM E 1745 Class A 

4. Thickness: 10mils 

5. Stego Wrap 10-mil Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com 

6. No Substitutions 

7. Install per ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's instructions 

2.08. CONCRETE MIXES 

A. General: Concrete shall be composed of portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and 

admixtures where applicable. Design concrete mixes to be workable and appropriate for each application, to 

bond readily to reinforcement, without segregation or the formation of excessive free water on surfaces. 

B. Selection of Proportions 

1. Determine proportions of ingredients in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5 to provide required strength, 

slump, resistance to weathering, placeability, durability and surface hardness for each class of concrete. 

2. Provide admixtures as required or appropriate to enhance workability, control set or improve strength. 

C. Required Average Strength for Mix Design: 

1. Where suitable strength test records for the concrete production facility are available, design strength may 

be based on the standard deviation in accordance with ACI 318. 

2. Where strength test records are not available, design strength shall be based on the following: 


#165582 

Specified Strength Required Average Strength 

F'c - psi 

F'cr – psi 

F'c

Section 03300 

Page 5 

D. Documentation of Average Strength: provide evidence of average strength for each class of concrete in 

accordance with ACI 318 by field strength tests, strength test records or trial mixtures. 

E. Concrete Mix Designs: submit mix designs for each class of concrete. 

1. Indicate the following for each mix design: 

a. Class designation. 

b. Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates, and water. 

c. Water-cement ratio, design strength, slump, and air content. 

d. Type of cement and aggregates. 

e. Type and dosage of admixtures. 

2. Mix designs shall be adjusted as required by weather and jobsite conditions to maintain specified 

strengths throughout the course of the work without additional cost to the Owner. 

3. As strength data becomes available during the progress of the work, mix designs may be adjusted in 

accordance with ACI 318. 

4. Minimum Cement Content: Cement content shall not be less than 320 pounds per cubic yard. 

5. Fly ash shall not be used in concrete mixtures exposed to view. Fly ash content shall be limited to 30 

percent of weight of Type I Portland cement used. 

F. Strength Gain: design concrete mixes to obtain required strengths in 28 days or less from date of placement. 

2.09. PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE 

A. Do not mix concrete for placement in the work until mix designs and corresponding strength tests reflect that 

each proposed mix will develop strengths required and mix designs have been reviewed for compliance. 

B. Batching and Mixing: 

1. Batch and mix ready-mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. 

2. Batch site-mixed concrete with scales accurate to within 0.4 percent of their total capacities. Operation of 

batching equipment shall consistently measure ingredients within 1 percent for concrete and water, 2 

percent for aggregates and 3 percent for admixtures. Mixing of site-batched concrete shall be in 

accordance ACI 301. 

C. Admixtures: Air-entraining admixtures and other chemical admixtures shall be charged into mixer as solutions 

and shall be accurately measured by means of a mechanical dispenser. The liquid shall be considered as part 

of mixing water. 


A. Laboratory Inspection 

1. Verify required plant certifications 

2. Inspect batching equipment periodically 

3. Inspect batching and loading of transit-mix trucks at the start of each day of production. 

B. Materials Testing 

1. Sieve analysis of aggregates 



A. Do not begin delivery of concrete materials until formwork, reinforcement, and all items required to be 

embedded in the concrete are complete, properly positioned and secured in place. 

1. Remove snow, ice, debris and excessive water from forms. 

2. Pre-wet soil and sand subgrades and surfaces of precast concrete to receive fresh concrete. 

3. Position and secure expansion joint materials, anchors, waterstops, screeds, control joint forms, and 

expansion caps on slip-dowels. 

4. Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from the inner surfaces of conveying equipment, 

formwork and reinforcing. 

B. Prepare and have ready in good working condition chutes, tremies, pumps, buggies, vibrators and all other 

equipment necessary for the orderly and continuous placement of concrete. 

C. Place vapor barrier beneath all interior slabs. Inspect and repair vapor barrier prior to placing concrete. 


A. Lack of Slope: Confirm with architect before proceeding when the Drawings show exterior flatwork without a 

specific slope. 


#165582

Section 03300 

Page 6 

B. Conveying: 

1. Prevent separation, segregation and loss of ingredients. 

2. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as possible. 

3. Take special precautions with belt conveyors to prevent segregation of ingredients, drying and rise in 

temperature during conveying. 

4. Pumps or pneumatic equipment shall have adequate pumping capacity. Slump loss due to pumping shall 

not exceed 2 inches. Do not convey concrete through pipes made of aluminum or aluminum alloy. 

5. Thoroughly clean conveying equipment at the end of each placement sequence. 

C. Depositing: 

1. Place concrete continuously in horizontal layers not more than 12 inches deep. Exercise care to avoid 

seams or weakened planes within the concrete. Deposit concrete into (not away from) previously 

deposited concrete. 

2. Do not place fresh concrete on partially hardened or contaminated concrete. 

3. Do not place concrete which has partially set. 

4. Exercise care to avoid splashing forms and reinforcing with concrete. 

5. Place concrete in forms as near as possible to its final position, do not transport in the forms with vibrators 

or screeds. 

6. Do not drop concrete directly into standing water, use a tremie with the outlet near the bottom of the place 

of deposit. 

7. Use tremies, chutes or hoppers to place concrete where a vertical drop greater than 5 feet is required. 

8. Do not place concrete when slump tests indicate plasticity that is greater than required limits. 

D. Consolidating: 

1. As soon as concrete is deposited, thoroughly agitate by means of mechanical vibrators and suitable hand 

tools, to work the mixture well into all parts and corners of the forms, and entirely around the 

reinforcement and inserts. Consolidation of concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 309. 

2. Mechanical vibrators shall have minimum frequency of 7000 revolutions per minute. 

3. Do not over-vibrate concrete or use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Insert vibrators 

vertically at frequent intervals, do not drag vibrators through concrete. 

4. Do not insert vibrators into lower courses that have begun to set. 

5. Maintain spare vibrators on the job site during all concrete placing operations. 

E. Bonding: 

1. Before depositing new concrete on or against previously deposited concrete which has partially or entirely 

set, thoroughly clean and roughen surfaces to receive fresh concrete. 

2. Re-tighten and thoroughly clean forms and reinforcement. 

3. Apply 1 to 2 inches of grout to concrete surfaces. Grout shall be of identical mix to concrete without 

coarse aggregate. 

4. Deposit new concrete before grout attains initial set. 

3.03. APPLICATION 

A. Construction Joints 

1. Each unit of structure (footing, slab or wall) shall be monolithic in construction except where specifically 

required to be otherwise. 

2. Slabs-on-grade in auditoriums shall be placed in a checker-board fashion as shown on the plans. 

3. Where required, construction joints shall be located near the midspan of slabs. 

4. Construction joints shall be located only where required or shown on accepted submittals. 

B. Weather Conditions: 

1. Cold Weather: Temperature of concrete delivered at job site shall conform to the following: 

Air Temperature 

Concrete Temperature 

30 to 45 degrees F. 55 to 90 degrees F. 

0 to 30 degrees F. 60 to 90 degrees F. 

Below 0 degrees F. 65 to 90 degrees F. 

a. Water heated to above 100 degrees F shall be combined with aggregates before cement is added. Do 

not add cement to water or aggregates having a temperature greater than 100 F. 

b. Conform to ACI 306. 

c. When the outdoor temperature is less than 40 degrees F, maintain temperature of concrete at not less 

than 50 degrees F for required curing time. 

2. Hot Weather: Temperature of concrete delivered at job site shall not exceed 95 degrees F. Add ice to 


#165582

Section 03300 

Page 7 

mixing water as required to control temperature of mixture. 

a. Conform to ACI 305. 

b. Make provisions for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling or wet cover when necessary. 

c. Use evaporation retarders, and finishing aids when necessary to achieve sound, durable surfaces. 

C. Composite Concrete / Steel Construction 

1. Do not place concrete until inspection and measuring requirements of the structural steel and composite 

metal floor deck and field welded shear stud specifications are complete. 

2. Where concrete is to be placed on unshored steel beams, take special care to prevent excessive deflection 

of beams during construction. 

3. For beam spans greater than forty feet, place concrete from the center of the beams, working towards both 

ends simultaneously. 

4. Concrete slabs placed on unshored steel beams shall be screeded to the required slab thickness above 

metal deck (i.e. shall not be leveled). 

D. Floor Flatness and Levelness Tolerances: 

1. Unshored suspended slabs: floor slab thickness shall not vary by more than 1/4 inch from design 

thickness. See Division 5 sections for steel frame tolerances. Laser leveling of floor slab surface shall not 

be used. 

3.04. FINISHING EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES 

A. General 

1. Comply with ACI 302. 

2. Double screed slabs at required elevations. 

3. Provide camber as required. 

4. Apply finishing products and cure in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. 

B. Slab Surfaces 

1. Float Finish 

a. Locations 

(1) Initial finish for all horizontal surfaces 

(2) Method - after concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off and leveled begin first float. 

Check levelness and correct as required during first float. Second float shall produce a uniform 

and true surface with a sandy texture. 

2. Smooth Trowel Finish 

a. Locations - all floor slabs except where specifically required otherwise. 

b. Method - Jitterbug or tamp surfaces, screed to proper elevation, then float with metal or wood floats. 

After concrete has set sufficiently to support weight, use mechanical floats to refinish leveling. After 

water sheen has disappeared from surfaces, trowel with steel trowel to smooth surface free from 

blemishes and trowel marks. Perform final troweling after concrete is so hard that no mortar 

accumulates on trowel and a ringing sound is produced as trowels are drawn over surfaces. 

3. Broom Finish 

a. Locations - Exterior flatwork surfaces. 

b. Method: After float finish, power-trowel and provide coarse striations with a stiff fiber brush. Orient 

grain across the width of walks and as directed in other areas. After brushing, provide indentations 

perpendicular to the slope of the ramp approximately 1/4th inch wide and deep and at 6 inch intervals 

with a metal grooving tool. Match texture of approved mock-up. 

4. Non-Slip Finish: 

a. Locations: Interior steel pan type stair treads and platforms, exterior concrete stair and ramps. 

b. Method: After floating, but before troweling, apply abrasive aggregate to surface in accordance with 

manufacturer's recommendations, then steel trowel to a smooth, even finish. Rub finished surfaces 

with abrasive stone or sandblast to remove laitance or cement coating in order to expose abrasive 

aggregate. 

C. Saw-Cutting Concrete Slabs-on-Grade 

1. Saw joints as soon as possible after finishing, but only after concrete is hard enough. Concrete is hard 

enough when saw blade does not dislodge aggregate and when edges of sawcut do not ravel. 

2. Joints shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch wide and 1/4 of the slab thickness deep. 

3. Formed strips may be used in lieu of saw-cutting in the same locations and to equal depth as sawn joints. 

D. Formed Surfaces 

1. General: Holes resulting from the removal of bolts or tie rods shall be solidly filled with cement grout. 


#165582

Section 03300 

Page 8 

Fill holes passing entirely through concrete members from the inside face with a plunger-type grease gun 

or other device that will force the mortar through to the outside face. 

2. Rough Form Finish: for surfaces not exposed to view 

a. Remove fins exceeding 1/4th inch in height, and grind bulges that interfere with other trades. 

b. Fill holes and honeycombs. 

3. Smooth Form Finish: for surfaces exposed to view 

a. Remove all fins, bulges and unsightly form marks. 

b. Fill holes and honeycombs to match surrounding concrete surfaces. 

c. Provide rubbed finish where satisfactory form finish cannot be achieved. 

4. Rubbed Finish 

a. Apply finish as soon as possible after casting concrete, no later than the day following form removal. 

b. Wet surface and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive to produce uniform color and texture. 

c. Form tie holes and honeycombs shall be patched and dressed to match color and texture of 

surrounding concrete. 

5. Grout Cleaned Finish 

a. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be finished. 

b. Mix 1 part Portland cement and 1 1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to produce a grout with the 

consistency of thick paint. Use white cement as necessary to match color of surrounding concrete. 

Wet concrete surfaces to prevent absorption of water from the grout. Apply grout uniformly, filling 

all holes and air bubbles. Remove excess grout. After initial set, rub surface with burlap. Wet cure 

for minimum 36 hours after final rubbing. 

3.05. CURING AND PROTECTION 

A. General: Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or 

cold temperatures and mechanical damage. 

B. Preservation of Moisture: protect surfaces not in contact with forms from moisture loss with one of the 

following methods immediately after finishing and continuing for a period of at least 7 days: 

1. Ponding or continuous sprinkling 

2. Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously wet. 

3. Application of sand kept continuously wet. 

4. Continuous application of steam or mist. 

5. Application of waterproof sheet materials. 

6. Application of curing compound in conformance with ASTM C309, "Specification for Liquid Membrane- 

Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete". Apply curing compounds in accordance with manufacturer's 

recommendations. Do not use curing compound on any surface against which additional concrete is to be 

placed or other material is to be bonded unless it is proven that the compound will not inhibit bonding, or 

positive measures are taken to completely remove the compound from areas to received bonded materials. 

C. Protect surfaces cast against forms from moisture loss by keeping forms wet until removed. After form 

removal, protect exposed surfaces by one of the methods specified. 

D. Curing shall be continued for a period of 7 days for Type I cement, or 3 days for Type III cement, or until tests 

indicate that the concrete has attained 70 percent of required strength. 


A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection 

1. Concrete Compression Testing: Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C172. Make one 

strength test for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof of each mix design of concrete placed in any 

single day. A single strength test shall consist of 4 cylinders: one to be tested at 7 days age; two to be 

tested at 28 days age; and one reserved for future test if requested. Mold and cure specimens from each 

sample in accordance with ASTM C31. Test concrete specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. 

2. Determine slump for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, in 

accordance with ASTM C143. 

3. Determine total air content of normal-weight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with 

ASTM C231. 

4. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test. 

5. Inspection and Monitoring: 

a. Inspect concrete mixing and loading of transit-mix trucks at plant. 

b. Monitor addition of water to concrete at job site and length of time concrete is allowed to remain in 


#165582

Section 03300 

Page 9 

truck during pour. 

c. Certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered (or poured), amount of water added 

and time at which cement and aggregate were discharged into truck, and time at which concrete was 

discharged from truck. 

B. Contractor's Responsibilities 

1. Furnish necessary labor to assist testing agency in obtaining and handling samples at job-site. 

2. Advise testing agency in advance of operations to allow for assignment of testing personnel and testing. 

3. Provide and maintain for use of testing agency adequate facilities for proper curing of concrete test 

specimens on project site in accordance with ASTM C31. 

C. Evaluation and Acceptance 

1. Strength level of a given class of concrete will be considered satisfactory if each of the three following 

requirements is met for that class of concrete: 

a. Average of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified strength. 

b. No individual strength test result (average of two cylinders) falls below specified strength by more 

than 500 psi. 

c. 90 percent of strength test results equal or exceed specified strength. 

2. Concrete strength tests made and tested by testing laboratory shall be sole criteria of concrete strength 

unless in-situ tests are made in accordance with Building Code by a qualified independent testing 

laboratory. Concrete for which strength tests do not meet criteria for acceptance shall be considered 

inadequate until proven otherwise. 

3. Completed concrete work will be accepted when the requirements of ACI 301, Chapter 18, have been 

complied with. 

4. In any case, where strength tests of concrete fail to meet criteria specified herein, Architect shall be sole 

judge of structural adequacy of concrete. In such case, burden of proof of structural adequacy shall be 

responsibility of Contractor. Strength evaluation shall conform to requirements of ACI 318, Chapters 5 

and 20. If strength evaluation testing indicates that structure is of inadequate strength; portions of structure 

in question shall be repaired or removed and replaced as directed by Architect at no additional expense to 

Owner. If strength tests fall below specified strength, but not so low as to cause concern for structural 

adequacy, Architect may request improved conditions of curing or modification of design mixes to 

improve strength. 

3.07. CLEANING 

A. Upon completion of the work, remove forms, equipment, protective coverings and any rubbish resulting 

therefrom from the premises. Finished concrete surfaces shall be left in a clean condition, satisfactory to the 

Owner. After sweeping with an ordinary broom and removing mortar, concrete droppings, loose dirt, and 

mud, wash concrete floors and platforms with soap suds and scrub with a steel fiber brush. Mop up the suds 

and flush the surfaces with clean water. Provide adequate measures during scrubbing, mopping, and flushing 

operations to keep excessive or injurious amounts of water off resilient tile floors. Any damage occasioned to 

such floors by or on account of such operations shall be promptly, effectively and satisfactorily repaired. 

B. Remove all concrete not required by the Drawings caused by overpour, bulging or collapse of forms or error in 

form construction. 

1. Remove bulges from sides of walls. 



#165582

SECTION 03411 

CONCRETE WALL PANELS 


1.01. SUMMARY 

A. This section covers the fabrication and erection of precast concrete panels and related items complete 

including inserts, reinforcing steel and installation in precast concrete panels of items of work furnished under 

other sections of the Specifications; including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Prepare test panels of concrete mix and finish. 

2. Construct forms, place all embeds, inserts, etc. 

3. Place concrete, consolidate and cure. 

4. Finish panels and repair defects. 

5. Erect panels and connect to structure. 

1.02. GENERAL 

A. Precast concrete panels shall be cast at the job site on a suitable casting bed, or they may be purchased from a 

panel supplier. It is the intent of these Specifications to obtain precast concrete panels produced in a neat and 

workmanlike manner in the sizes and shapes as shown without deformations, bulges, honeycombs, etc., with a 

finish to match the accepted test panels, and as described on the Drawings. 

B. Qualifications: Panels shall be constructed by a Contractor having a minimum of 5 years' experience in related 

construction, and shall be erected by an erector with a minimum of 5 years' experience in the erection of 

precast concrete. 

1.03. DESIGN 

A. Design panels for handling and erection stresses, including locating pick-up points, design of lifting inserts, 

temporary bearing points, and bracing. Determine number and location of lifting inserts and panel stiffeners 

required to lift panels without surface cracking. Provide auxiliary reinforcement where required at points of 

stress concentration. Design of crane rigging and lifting inserts shall be in accordance with insert 

manufacturer's recommendations regarding impact factor to be applied to panel weight and factor of safety 

against insert failure. Include in the analysis the effects of openings and any architectural shapes and recesses. 


A. Before commencing any precast concrete panel work, submit one (1) sepia and one print of shop and 

installation drawings for each different wall panel including reinforcing steel, metal inserts, lifting inserts, 

proposed bracing details and form layouts for the review of the Architect. Show the location of the center of 

gravity of each panel and give the calculated panel weight and lifting insert capacity. Panels for which such 

drawings have not yet been reviewed shall not be fabricated. Such review will cover the general locations, 

spacing and details of design only. Quantities of materials, tolerances, locations of embedded items and fit of 

panels are the responsibility of the Contractor. 

B. Submit manufacturer's data for the following: 

1. Bond breaker. 

2. Form release agent. 

3. Retarder. 

4. Integral coloring compounds. 

C. Submit samples of reglets, bevels, chamfers and all other items embedded or part of the formwork which affect 

the final appearance or detail of the panels. 

1.05. QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Laboratory Testing: Refer to Section 01410. 

B. Acceptance of Panels: The accepted sample panels and/or mock-up shall be the standard of acceptance for 

color, texture, finish and detail. Panels which are damaged during handling and erection beyond reasonable 

repair shall be replaced without additional cost. 

1.06. SAMPLE PANELS 

A. Construct 24 inch x 24 inch x 2 inch thick sample panels of each type of aggregate and finish required on the 

Project for review by Architect. Sample panels shall be finished in the manner proposed for the finished 

product. Furnish additional samples until acceptance is obtained for each type of finish and aggregate required. 


#165582

Section 03411 

Page 2 

Accepted samples shall remain on the job for comparison to the finished product throughout the course of the 

work. 


2.01. REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS: 

A. Structural Concrete: Section 03300. 

B. Concrete Reinforcing: Section 03200. 

C. Embedded Metal Assemblies and Inserts: Section 03250. 

2.02. MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS: 

A. Bond Breaker: Silcoseal 2000F as manufactured by the Nox-Crete Company, Omaha, Nebraska. 

2.03. FINISHES AND EXPOSED AGGREGATE: 

A. Special aggregates and finishes on faces of panels shall be as shown on Drawings. 


3.01. FORMWORK 

A. The design layout and engineering of formwork, as well as its construction, shall be the responsibility of the 

Contractor. Panels must be square and plumb and conform to the shapes shown on the Drawings. 

B. All necessary forms and molds shall be built to conform to the shapes, lines and dimensions of the different 

wall panels. Forms shall be set to line and grade, so braced and secured to withstand the placing of the 

concrete and maintain their shapes and positions. Under no circumstances shall the floor slab be broken or 

drilled to fasten the forms. Forms shall be sufficiently tight and substantially assembled to prevent bulging or 

leakage of mortar. Forms shall be assembled in such manner to facilitate their removal without damage to the 

concrete. 

C. Construct forms with such care to produce concrete surfaces which will not leave unsightly or objectionable 

form marks in exposed concrete surfaces. Lumber once used as forms shall have all nails withdrawn therefrom 

and the contact surfaces thoroughly cleaned and coated before reuse. 

D. Accurately and securely place wood strips, weld plates, steel angles, blocking, molding, nailers, etc. in forms 

as required to produce finished profiles, and surfaces shown on the Drawings. Coat wood strips, blocking and 

moldings with form sealer. Special care shall be exercised in placing of concrete to avoid moving of inserts or 

embedded items and to keep from scouring the bond breaker from the casting surfaces. 

E. The Contractor shall furnish the bond breaker solution, and it shall be applied on the casting surface and on the 

side forms in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

3.02. REINFORCING STEEL 

A. Shall be of sizes, shapes, length, spacing and other dimensions shown, shall be placed where and as detailed 

on the Drawings, or as reasonably required to fulfill the intent and meaning of the Drawings and 

Specifications. Before being placed in the work, reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, mill scale 

or other coatings which might tend to reduce or destroy the bond. 

B. Concrete wall surfaces shall be free of rust stains. Clip tie wires to prevent contact with forms and casting 

surface. Concrete cover over reinforcing steel shall not be less in any direction than 2 inches for exterior faces 

and one inch for interior faces. 

3.03. MIXING AND PLACING CONCRETE 

A. Concrete shall be mixed and placed in conformance with the requirements of Section 03300. Concrete shall 

be vibrated continuously during the process of pouring until the full thickness is reached and all water is 

brought to the surface. 

3.04. FINISHING CONCRETE WALL SURFACES 

A. Refer to Section 03300. 

3.05. TOLERANCES 

A. Precast concrete panels, after curing and aging, shall be true to size within the following tolerances: 


#165582

Section 03411 

Page 3 

1. Warpage: Not to exceed one-eighth (1/8) inch per six (6) feet of length. 

2. Linear Shrinkage: Shrinkage in any dimension shall not exceed plus or minus one-eighth (1/8) inch. 

3. Squareness: No unit shall be more than one-eighth (1/8) inch in six (6) feet out of square. 

4. Location of Inserts: In locations shown on drawings without any deviations. 

5. Reinforcing: Within plus or minus one-fourth (1/4) inch of the position given on shop drawings. 

3.06. CURING AND PROTECTION 

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from washing by rain, flowing water, etc. Do not allow the concrete to dry out 

from the time it is deposited in the forms until the expiration of the curing period. Finished surfaces shall be 

cured with black polyethylene film secured tightly to the form to prevent evaporation of moisture. In no case 

shall the covering be removed before a period of at least seven (7) days has elapsed after the placing and 

finishing of the concrete. Curing liquid, if used, shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of 

the manufacturer of the material approved for use, and to sufficient extent to effectively hold the moisture in 

the concrete. 

3.07. LIFTING AND ERECTION OF PANELS 

A. The Contractor shall not lift panels out of forms until the panels have gained a compressive strength of 2500 

psi. Panels shall be stored and cured in a flat position to prevent warpage. 

B. The panels shall be sufficiently braced until attached to the floor and roof structural assemblies. Panels shall 

be accurately positioned and plumbed before welding connection plates and expansion joint material shall be 

cemented to the end face of an erected panel before the adjacent panel is set. All lifting and erection shall be 

accomplished in a neat and workmanlike manner to prevent cracking, breaking or damaging panels or other 

work in any way. 

1. Damaged Panels: Any panels showing defects of any kind shall be set only at the risk of the Contractor. 

All defects shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect, or shall be replaced; to the end that all 

panels, upon completion of the work, be acceptable in every detail. 

2. Setting: Set panels and anchor to the structure as detailed on the Drawings. 

3.08. TEMPORARY BRACING OF PANELS 

A. Provide temporary bracing for panels to resist lateral wind pressures required by the Building Code. Bracing 

shall remain in place until permanent structural bracing system is installed and connections are complete. 



#165582

SECTION 03600 

GROUTING STEEL BASE PLATES 


1.01. SUMMARY 


1. Grout for steel baseplates 

1.02. REFERENCE STANDARDS 

A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 

1. ASTM C1090, Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens from 

Hydraulic Cement Grout 

2. ASTM C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrinkable) 

B. Corps of Engineers: 

1. CRD-C621, Specification for Non-Shrink Grout. 


A. Product Data: submit manufacturer's data indicating product compliance for the following: 

1. Non-shrink grout. 

B. Recycled Content: 






C. Local / Regional Materials: 






only. 




D. Submit information on EPA Waste Minimization Priority Chemicals associated with products provided under 





A. Store grout materials in dry condition above ground. 



A. Non-Shrink Grout: 

1. Pre-mixed non-shrinking, high strength grout. 

2. Compressive strength in 28 days: 5000 psi minimum, but not less than specified strength of base 

concrete. 

3. Comply with ASTM C1107, and CRD-C621. 

4. Non-oxidizing, if grout will be permanently exposed to view. 

5. Exhibits positive expansion when testing in accordance with ASTM C1090. 

6. Acceptable products: 

a. Euco N-S Grout, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Co. 

b. Masterflow 713, manufactured by Master Builders Co. 


#165582

c. SikaGrout 212, manufactured by Sika Corporation. 

Section 03600 

Page 2 




performance. 











A. Surface preparation: 

1. Clean slab or foundation of dirt and loose material down to sound concrete. 

2. Remove oil, grease, and paint from areas of base plates or foundations to be grouted. 

3. Roughen adjacent concrete surfaces where possible. 

4. Thoroughly wet concrete contact area at least 4 hours prior to grout placement, or as instructed by grout 

manufacturer. Keep wet, and remove excess water prior to placement. 

B. Mixing 

1. Use mechanical mortar mixer. 

2. Use the minimum amount of mixing water needed for placement. 

3. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for: 

a. Quantity of water used in mix. 

b. Length of mixing time. 

c. Pot life. 

d. Retempering. 

C. Forms 

1. Use side forms if grout space is thicker than 1-1/2 inches. 

2. When forms are required, use strong, securely anchored forms, sealed to prevent grout leakage. 

3. Remove forms only after grout is completely self-supporting. 

3.02. APPLICATION 

A. Placement and Consolidation 

1. Bearing plates shall be fully grouted, without cavities, pockets, or air bubbles. 

2. Place grout continuously, and from one side to avoid entrapment of air pockets and to ensure good 

consolidation. 

3. Remove voids by rodding and vibrating during placement. 

4. Do not overwork grout. 

5. Use grout holes for baseplates larger than 24 inches in width. 

B. Curing 

1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for curing. 

2. Do not vibrate or disturb grout during curing period. 



#165582

Section 04100 

Page 1 

SECTION 04100 

MORTAR AND GROUT 


1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. The requirements of Division 1 apply to all Work of this Section. 

1.2 SCOPE 

A. Provide all materials, labor and accessories as required and specified for complete mortar and grout 

installation in masonry walls. 

1.3 RELATED WORK (See also Table of Contents): 

A. Structural Concrete: Section 03300. 

B. Concrete Unit Masonry: Section 04210. 

C. Concrete Reinforcing: Section 03200. 


A. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted) 

1. ASTM C144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 

2. ASTM C150, Portland Cement. 

3. ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 

4. ASTM C270, Standard Specification for Mortar For Unit Masonry 

5. ASTM C404, Aggregates for Grout 

6. ASTM C476, Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry 

7. ASTM C1019, Method of Sampling and Testing Grout 

8. CBC Section 2103A 

9. 2010 California Building Code(CBC), with State of California Amendments 

10. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) 

B. Tests and Inspections: 

1. A testing program is required prior to start of construction. Testing program to be done in 

Compliance with the 2010 CBC requirements and in collaboration with Testing Laboratory, 

Design team, contractor, owner and submitted for review by the agency in charge of building 

enforcement. Requirements below are minimum requirements; additional requirements may be 

required in final testing program. 

2. All tests and inspections herein are to be performed by an independent testing laboratory approved 

by the building official. 

3. Mortar and Grout Tests: At the beginning of Masonry Work, at least 1 test sample each of mortar 

and grout shall be taken on 3 successive working days, then once per week with at least one sample 

taken for each 5000 square feet of wall area, or fraction thereof. 

a. Test specimens shall be made in accordance with ASTM C1019 for grout and ASTM C780 

for mortar. 

b. Test specimens shall be continuously stored in moist air until tested. 

c. Mortar shall show a compressive strength of not less than 1800 psi at 28 days. Grout shall 

show a compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi at 28 days. 

4. A special inspector shall be employed per CBC Section 1704A during the placement of all units, 

placement of all reinforcing steel, during all grouting operations and during taking of all test 

specimens. 

C. Submittals: 

1. Mix design for mortar and grout shall be submitted for review. 

2. Supplier’s certificates indicating materials comply with the specifications below. They shall 

include but are not necessarily limited to: 

a. Aggregates 

b. Cement 

c. Admixtures 


#165582

Section 04100 

Page 2 

2. Product data. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided 

under work of this Section: 











a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate 

distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site. 





d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or manufactured 

in separate locations, provide location information for each component. Indicate the 

percentage by weight of each component per unit of product. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, low alkali; natural gray. 

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 

C. Quicklime: ASTM C 5. 

D. Lime Putty: Made from hydrated lime or quicklime. 

1. If made from quicklime, other than processed pulverized quicklime, slake lime and then screen 

through a No. 16 mesh sieve. Before using, store and protect slaked and screened lime putty for 

not less than 10 days. 

2. Processed pulverized quicklime shall be slaked for not less than 48 hours, and shall be cool when 

used. 

3. Lime putty prepared from hydrated lime may be used immediately after mixing. 

4. Lime putty prepared from quicklime or pulverized quicklime shall have a plasticity figure, after 

slaking and screening, of not less than 200, and shall weigh not less than 83 lbs. per cubic foot. 

Lime putty prepared from hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C 207, Type S. 

E. Aggregate: 

1. For Mortar: ASTM C144. 

2. For Grout: ASTM C404. 

F. Admixture: “Sika Grout Aid” 

G. Water: Suitable for domestic consumption. 

2.2 MORTAR 

A. Mortar shall be Type S having a 28 day compressive strength of not less than 1800 psi, and shall 

conform to CBC Section 2103A.8. 

B. Mortar shall be made with admixtures that are proportioned, added and mixed in strict accordance with 

manufacturer's directions. 

C. Mortar mix shall be proportioned by volume; one part portland cement, not less than 1/4 part nor more 

than ½ part lime putty, and sand totaling not less than 2¼ nor more than 3 times sum of volumes of 

cement and lime used. 

1. Total clay content shall not exceed 2% of sand content or 6% of cement content. 


#165582

Section 04100 

Page 3 

D. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance 

requirements of this Section, Part 2.2, A. 

2.3 GROUT 

A. Grout shall have a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi. Proportion by volume, and 

with sufficient water to produce consistency for pouring without segregation so that grout will flow into 

masonry joints. Grout shall conform to CBC Section 2103A.12. 

B. Fine Grout: 1 part portland cement, to which may be added not more than 1/10 part lime putty, and 3 

parts sand. 

1. Fine grout shall be used for all grout spaces less than 3" wide. 

C. Coarse Grout: 1 part portland cement, to which may be added not more than 1/10 part lime putty, 3 

parts sand and not less than 1 part nor more than 2 parts pea gravel (3/8” maximum aggregate size). 

1. Coarse grout shall be used in grout spaces 3" wide or more. 

D. Add “Sika Grout Aid” admixture to grout at the rate of 1 pound per 100 pounds cementititous material. 

E. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance 

requirements of this Section, Part 2.3, A. 


3.1 MIXING MORTAR AND GROUT 

A. Accurately measure materials in suitably calibrated devices; shovel measurements are not acceptable. 

Each 94lb. sack of portland cement will be considered as 1 cubic foot. 

B. Place sand, cement and water in mixer in that order and mix for at least 2 minutes; then add lime putty 

and continue mixing as long as necessary to secure a uniform mass, but in no case less than 10 minutes. 

C. Use mixers of at least 1 sack capacity; batches requiring fractional sacks will not be permitted unless 

cement is weighed for each batch. 

3.2 GROUTING PROCEDURES 

A. Specified under Sections 04210. 

3.3 RETEMPERING 

A. When necessary to re-temper mortar, add water and remix; retempering by dashing water over mortar 

will not be permitted. 

B. Any mortar which is unused within 30 minutes after initial mixing and any mortar that has begun to set 

shall not be used. 

3.4 DEFECTIVE MORTAR OR GROUT 

A. Should the strength of mortar or grout fall below that specified, remainder of Work shall be adjusted to 

reach required strength. Work in place representing inferior grout and mortar and indicating a strength 

less than the minimum specified shall be tested by taking and testing core samples. Number and 

location of cores shall be determined by Structural Engineer. 

B. Should compression tests of cores fail to meet required strength, masonry shall be deemed to be 

defective and shall be removed and replaced at no cost to Owner. 

C. Costs relative to taking and testing of core samples shall be paid by Owner and will be deducted from 

Contract Amount. Cost of patching core holes shall be borne by Contractor. 



#165582

Section 04210 

Page 1 

SECTION 04210 

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 



A. The requirements of Division 1 apply to all Work of this Section. 

1.2 SCOPE 

A. Furnish and install all concrete unit masonry, reinforcement, and all required accessories and materials 

as shown on the Drawings and specified here. 

1. Cooperate with other trades for embedded items, furnished under those sections and installed here. 

2. Supervise setting of dowels for masonry furnished and installed under Section 03200, Concrete 

Reinforcing. 

1.3 RELATED WORK (See also Table of Contents): 

A. Concrete Reinforcing: Section 03200. 

B. Structural Concrete: Section 03300. 

C. Mortar and Grout: Section 04100. 

D. Structural Steel: Section 05100. 

E. Miscellaneous Metal: Section 05500. 


A. Allowable Tolerances: Maximum deviation from indicated line or plane of installed concrete masonry 

units shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 

B. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted): 

1. 2010 California Building Code (CBC) with State of California Amendments. 

2. ASTM C90 - Hollow and Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units 

3. ASTM C140 - Sampling and Testing of Concrete Masonry Units 

4. ASTM C426 - Standard Test Method for Drying Shrinkage Concrete Block. 

5. CBC Section 2103A.1, 2103A.2, 2103A.13. 

6. Concrete Masonry Design Manual published for the Concrete Masonry Association of California 

and Nevada, current Edition. 

7. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC). 

C. Submittals: Refer to Section 01340 for submitting the following items: 

1. Suppliers certificate indicating units comply with material standards indicated below: 




















#165582

Section 04210 

Page 2 




4. See Section 03200 for concrete reinforcing submittals. 

D. Tests and Inspections: 

1. A testing program is required prior to start of construction. Testing program to be done in 

Compliance with the 2010 CBC requirements and in collaboration with Testing Laboratory, 

Design team, contractor, owner and submitted for review by the agency in charge of building 

enforcement. Requirements below are minimum requirements; additional requirements may be 

required in final testing program. 

2. All tests and inspections herein are to be performed by an independent testing laboratory approved 

by local jurisdiction. 

3. Test three sample units prior to construction. Test also three sample units during construction for 

every 5,000 square feet of wall area. 

a. Units will be tested for compressive strength on both the net and gross area per ASTM C140. 

b. Units will be tested for linear drying shrinkage per ASTM C426. 

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING 

A. Scaffolding, runways and ladders required for work under this Section shall be provided by masonry 

contractor, and shall be heavy trades type substantially built and in compliance with State labor laws, 

safety codes and other regulatory agencies as applicable to this project. 

B. Environmental Requirements: Install concrete unit masonry when temperature in area surrounding work 

is 40° F or above. Maintain temperature of work above 40° F for at least 48 hours after installation. 

Grout shall not be placed when air temperatures fall below 20° F. 

C. Store masonry units off the ground in a dry location, covered and protected from absorbing moisture. 


2.1 MASONRY UNITS 

A. Masonry units shall be hollow load bearing masonry units conforming to ASTM C90 and CBC Section 

2102A.3.1. 

1. Weight: Light weight. 

2. Maximum lineal shrinkage from saturated to oven dry condition of not more than 0.065 percent. 

3. Twenty-eight day compressive strength of 1000 psi on gross area and 1900 psi on net area. 

B. Unit Type 

1. 8" wide by 8" high x 16" long unless specified otherwise. 

C. Unit Finish 

1. Ground Face (outside) 

2. Color: D113 D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of 

the following: 

1. Basalite* 

2. Greystone 

3. Approved equal 

Asterisk (*) indicates manufacturer used for selection of colors and texture. 

E. Provide bond beam units, open end units and other special units as indicated. Use open end units at 

cells containing vertical reinforcement wherever possible. 

F.. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance 

requirements of this Section, Part 2,, A. 

2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT 

A. Specified under Section 04100. 

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 40 or 60, as indicated in Section 03 21 00, deformed bars. 


#165582

Section 04210 

Page 3 

1. Tie Wire: Black annealed steel wire not lighter than 16 gage. 

B. Provide spacers to firmly hold reinforcement in place. 

C. Anchor Bolts: All anchor bolts cast in masonry shall be headed bolts with cut threads conforming to 

ASTM A307 or ASTM A36 or ASTM A572.50 as indicated on drawings. 

D. Expansion Anchors: All expansion bolts installed in masonry shall be Hilti Kwik Bolt 3 as 

manufactured by Hilti Inc. See Structural Drawings for installation requirements and tension testing 

requirements as applicable. See Drawings for special head requirements as needed. Substitution of 

other brands or anchors shall proceed only after written approval from the Structural Engineer has been 

obtained. 

2.4 JOINTS 

A. All joints shall be 3/8” thick joints for concrete block, Tool exposed interior and exterior joints and 

concealed exterior joints to produce a dense slightly concave surface that is well bonded to unit at 

edges. 

2.5 SEALER 

A. Contractor shall provide and install minimum two coats, Thoroseal masonry sealer at all CMU walls. 

Thoroseal product shall meet all state vapor requirements. Sealer shall be clear and non-gloss product. 



A. Examine areas to receive masonry and verify following: 

1. That foundation surface is level to permit bed joint with range of 1/4 to 3/4 inch. 

2. That edge is true to line to permit projection of masonry to less than 1/4-inch. 

3. That projecting dowels are free from loose scale, dirt, concrete, or other bond-inhibiting 

substances and properly located. 

B. Do not begin work before unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Clean concrete surfaces to receive masonry. Remove latence or other foreign material lodged in 

surfaces by sandblasting or other means as required. Joints between concrete and masonry shall be 

considered construction joints. See Concrete specifications. 

B. Ensure masonry units are clean and free from dust, dirt, or other foreign materials before laying. 

C. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbances. 

D. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until masonry has set to 

provide permanent bracing. 

3.3 COURSING 

A. Erect masonry in accordance with CBC Section 2104A.1.2. 

B. Place masonry to lines and levels indicated to the following tolerances: 

1. Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32-inch max. 

2. Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4-inch in 10 feet. 

3. Variation from Plumb: 1/4-inch. 

4. Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8-inch in 3 feet; 1/4-inch in 10 feet; ½-inch maximum. 

5. Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8-inch in 3 feet. 

C. Bond: Unless noted otherwise, lay concrete masonry units in stacked bond. 

D. Maintain masonry courses to uniform width. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform 

thickness. 

E. Preserve the vertical continuity of cells in concrete unit masonry. The minimum clear horizontal 

dimensions of vertical cores shall be 3 x 3 inches for 8-inch wide block. 

3.4 PLACING AND BONDING 

A. Do not install cracked, broken or chipped masonry units. 


#165582

Section 04210 

Page 4 

B. Lay only dry concrete masonry units. 

C. Lay masonry in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. Deep or excessive furrowing of 

mortar joints is not permitted. 

1. Block Cap: Lay with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints. 

D. Fully bond intersections and external and internal corners. 

E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, 

remove mortar and replace. 

F. Remove excess mortar. 

G. Perform job-site cutting with proper tools to provide straight unchipped edges. Take care to prevent 

breaking masonry unit corners or edges. 

H. Step back unfinished work for joining with new work. Do not use toothing. 

3.5 JOINTS 

A. Horizontal and vertical joints at masonry units shall be 3/8-inch wide and as follows: 

1. Point joint tight in unpurged masonry below ground. 

2. All end joints shall be fully filled with mortar and joints squeezed in bed joints shall be held back 

approximately ½-inch from cell to provide positive bond with grout. 

3. Joints shall be struck flush at all areas to receive plaster finish. 

3.6 MASONRY REINFORCEMENT 

A. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315, to a tolerance of +/- ½-inch from specified location. 

B. Reinforcing steel shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. Bars with 

kinks or bends not shown on the plans shall not be used. Heating of bars for bending will not be 

permitted. 

1. Bars shall conform accurately to the sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown on drawings and 

with hooks and beds made as detailed. Bars shall be placed as indicated on the drawings and 

centered on grout space. 

2. At the time grout is place around it, reinforcing steel shall be clean of mill scale or other coatings 

that will destroy or reduce bond. 

3. All vertical reinforcing steel shall be installed in one piece, full height of wall, and braced 

throughout its height in a manner that will retain the steel in proper position and provide the proper 

clearance. 

C. Reinforcing steel shall be secured to all foundation dowels and held in place at spacings not to exceed 

192 bar diameters. 

3.7 GROUTING 

A. General Requirements: 

1. All cells shall be grouted solid. 

2. Use low lift or high lift grouting at Contractor's option. 

3. Use grout pump, hopper or bucket to place grout. 

4. Place grout in final position within 1-1/2 hours after introduction of mixing water. 

5. Place grout and rod with a 3/4-inch flexible cable vibrator sufficiently to case it to flow into all 

voids between the cells and around the reinforcing steel. Slushing with mortar will not be 

permitted. 

6. Stop grout approximately 1½ inches below top of last course, except at top course bring grout to 

top of wall. 

B. Low Lift Grouting: 

1. Do not lay units higher than 24 inches before grouting. 

2. If mortar has been allowed to set prior to grouting, remove all fins protruding more than ½-inch 

into grout space. 

3. Conform to requirements of CBC Section 2104.6.1.1.3. 

4. Consolidate each lift twice. Once while placing grout and once more after initial absorption of 

water but before set. 


#165582


#165582 

Section 04210 

Page 5 

C. High Lift Grouting: 

1. Conform to requirements of CBC Section 2104.6.1.1.3 

2. Lay up walls, subject to maximum height limitations of Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 

Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures Table 1.16.1. 

3. Provide clean out holes at the bottom of every pour in cells containing vertical reinforcement. 

Construct clean out courses with open-bottom bond beam units inverted to permit cleaning of all 

cells by flushing. Cleanouts shall be not less than 3x4inch openings cut from one face shell. Do not 

plug clean out holes until masonry work, reinforcement, and final cleaning of the grout spaces have 

been completed and inspected. 

4. Clean mortar droppings from the bottom of the grout space and from reinforcing steel. Remove 

mortar fins protruding more than ½-inch into the grout space by dislodging the projections with a 

rod as the work progresses or by washing the grout space at least twice a day during erection using 

a high pressure stream of water. 

5. Do not place grout in hollow unit masonry until mortar joints have set for at least 72 hours and 

clean out plugs have cured 48 hours. 

6. Place grout in lifts not to exceed 4 feet in height, with a waiting period between lifts, dependent on 

weather and absorption rate of the masonry, in order to place the succeeding lift after the preceding 

lift becomes plastic but prior to initial set. The first lift shall be consolidated using mechanical 

vibrators. After the required waiting period, place the second lift and consolidate with the vibrator, 

reconsolidating the lift below to a depth of 12 to 18 inches. Repeat the waiting, placing and 

consolidating process until the top of the grout pour is reached. Reconsolidate the top lift after the 

required waiting period. The high-lift grouting of any section of wall between lateral flow barriers 

shall be completed to the top of a pour in one working day unless a new series of clean out holes is 

established and the resulting horizontal construction joint cleaned. 

3.8 WEATHER PROVISIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 

A. Cold Weather Construction to be in accordance with CBC section 2104.3. 

B. Hot Weather Construction to be in accordance with CBC section 2104.4 

3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. See drawings for type and location of expansion joints. 

3.10 BOND BEAMS 

A. Bond beams shall be located where shown and detailed on the drawings, and shall be reinforced as 

indicated and as herein after specified. 

3.11 BUILT-IN WORK 

A. Miscellaneous Embedded Items: All items indicated to be embedded in masonry shall be carefully 

located and anchored to prevent movement during grouting operations. Avoid cutting and patching. 

1. Install all anchor bolts and anchors furnished under other sections for wood nailers, ledgers, etc. 

3.12 CUTTING AND FITTING 

A. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or strength of 

masonry work may be impaired. 

3.13 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING 

A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damage, or 

if units do not match adjoining units. 

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes and completely fill with mortar. 

C. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set, at each day's work and after final pointing. 

D. Leave work and surrounding surface clean and free of mortar spots and droppings. 

E. Cleaning: Upon completion of masonry installation, repair all holes. Defective joints shall be cut out 

and rejointed. Exposed masonry surfaces shall be cleaned free of mortar, green stain and efflorescence. 

3.14 SEALER

Section 04210 

Page 6 

A. Contractor shall install sealer as directed by the manufacturer. Coverage and installation rates shall be 

as per manufacturer’s recommendations. Install sealer in minimum two coats at the rates required. 

3.15 DEFECTIVE MASONRY 

A. Materials or workmanship not conforming to appearance or strength specified, will be deemed 

defective and shall be removed and replaced at no cost to Owner. 

B. Defective mortar and grout, as defined under Section 04 05 00; “Mortar and Grout” shall constitute 

defective masonry. 



#165582

SECTION 05100 

STRUCTURAL STEEL 


1.01. SUMMARY 


1. Steel columns 

2. Steel beams 

3. Fusion welded anchors 

4. Miscellaneous angles and plates 

5. Bolts 

6. Steel assemblies to be embedded in concrete 

7. Laboratory testing and inspection 

8. Shop painting 

9. Supplementary parts and members necessary to complete and erect structural steel frame 

1.02. REFERENCE STANDARDS (LATEST EDITION) 

A. American Institute of Steel Construction, AISC: 

1. AISC Manual of Steel Construction. 

2. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. 

3. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 

4. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. 



2. ASTM A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and 

Seamless. 

3. ASTM A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality. 

4. ASTM A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot- Galvanizing) Coatings on Products Fabricated from 

Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, bars and strip. 

5. ASTM A143, Recommended Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized 

Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement. 

6. ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 

7. ASTM A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High- 

Temperature Service. 


9. ASTM A325, Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 

10. ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural 

Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 

11. ASTM A501, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural 

Tubing. 

12. ASTM A572, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of 

Structural Quality. 

13. ASTM A786, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low Alloy, High Strength Low Alloy, and 

Alloy Steel Floor Plates 

14. ASTM A992, Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing. 

15. ASTM F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts 

16. ASTM B117, Standard Salt Spray (Fog) Testing. 

C. American Welding Society: 

1. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. 

2. AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 

D. Industrial Fasteners Institute: 

1. Handbook on Bolt, Nut and Rivet Standards. 

E. American National Standards Institute: 

1. ANSI B18.2, Fasteners. 

2. ANSI B27.2, Plain Washers. 

F. Steel Structures Painting Council, SSPC: 

1. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 1, Good Painting Practice. 


#165582

2. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications. 

Section 05100 

Page 2 


A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop and installation drawings showing shop and erection details including 

member sizes, grades of materials, details of fabrication and erection, and end connections. 

1. Do not begin fabrication of materials prior to review of shop drawings. 

2. Review of shop drawings is for member sizes, spacings, detail, and general compliance with Contract 

Documents only. 

3. Material quantities, lengths, fit, verification of job conditions and coordination with other trades are 

responsibility of Contractor. 


B. Erection Procedure: Submit descriptive data illustrating general procedure for erection of structural steel 

including sequence of work, proposed schedule and details of temporary staying and bracing. 

C. Submit Mill Certifications showing compliance of materials with ASTM and AISC Specifications. 

D. Submit Mill Certifications (Manufacturer's Inspection Certificates) for bolts, nuts and washers. 

E. Submit manufacturer’s data sheets or certified test results indicating compliance with requirements for 

manufactured components. 







G. Local / Regional Materials: 






only. 




H. Submit information on EPA Waste Minimization Priority Chemicals associated with products provided under 




1.04. QUALIFICATIONS 

A. Arc-Welding: Welding procedures and techniques, welders and tackers shall be qualified in accordance with 

AWS D1.1. 

1. Welders to be employed on Work shall maintain current AWS certification throughout duration of 

Project. 

2. If requested by Architect, submit identifying stenciled test coupons made by operator whose workmanship 

is subject to question, and if reasonable doubt of proficiency exists, welder shall be re-qualified and 

certified by independent testing laboratory at no additional expense to Owner. 

3. Work suspected of deficient quality may be subject to removal of coupons from any location on any joint 

for testing. Remove sections of welds found defective and properly rewelded before proceeding with 

work. 

B. Steel Fabricator: not less than 5 years of experience in fabrication of structural steel. 

C. Steel Erector: not less than 5 years of experience in erection of structural steel. 

1.05. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Coordinate delivery of anchor bolts and other anchorage assemblies to be embedded in concrete or masonry 

construction. Provide setting drawings, instructions and templates required for proper placement of anchor 

bolts and embeds. 

B. Sequence shipments of fabricated steel to expedite erection and minimize field handling of material. 


#165582

Section 05100 

Page 3 

C. Store structural steel above ground on skids or platforms, and protect from corrosion. Store packaged 

materials in unbroken containers. 

D. Do not bend or damage materials during shipment, handling and erection. 

E. Take precautions in the removal of packaging or bundling devices to prevent damage to materials. 

F. Certification numbers for fasteners shall appear on product containers and shall correspond to identification 

numbers on mill test reports. 



A. Structural Steel, normal grade: ASTM A36. 

B. High Strength Structural Steel: ASTM A992 - Grade 50. 

C. Steel Pipes: ASTM A501 (36,000 psi yield). 

D. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS) – Round or Rectangular: ASTM A500 - Grade B. 

E. Erection Bolts and Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, ANSI B18.2.1, and ANSI B18.2.2. 

F. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325N, ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.2.2. 

1. Manufacturer's symbol and grade markings shall appear on bolts and nuts. 

G. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 36 

H. High Strength Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 105. 

I. Washers: ANSI B27.2 Type A. 

J. Welding Electrodes: 

1. Welding electrodes shall conform to AISC Specifications. Use E70 electrodes. 

2. Coatings of low-hydrogen electrodes shall be thoroughly dry when used. Electrodes taken from 

hermetically sealed packages shall be used within 4 hours, or shall be dried in accordance with AWS D1.1 

before use. 

3. Do not use electrodes of any type that have been wet. 

K. Paint for structural steel: 

1. Shop Primer: 

a. Rust-inhibiting primer conforming to Federal Specification TT-P-86g, Type I or III. 

b. Paint and methods of paint application shall comply with applicable air-quality and environmental 

regulations. 

c. Paint shall be compatible with welding procedures and shall produce no significant difference in 

strength of weld material. 

d. Paint shall meet or exceed requirements for abrasion - Fed. Test No. 141; elongation - ASTM D522; 

and salt spray - ASTM B117. 

2. Primer for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel 

a. Acceptable Products: 

Tnemec 10-09 

Valspar 13-R-29 

Carboline Phenoline 818 

Sherwin-Williams Kem Kromik Universal B50 Series 

3. Zinc-Coating: Where galvanizing steel is required, zinc coating shall conform to ASTM A123 and A143. 

Zinc coating for threaded products shall conform to ASTM A153. Do not galvanize ASTM A490 bolts. 

4. Cold Galvanizing: Galvilite as manufactured by ZRC WORLDWIDE, Marshfield, MA (phone 

800.831.3275; web site www.zrcworldwide.com), and used for repair only. 

L. Shear Studs 

1. Headed fusion welded shear connectors with proper ferrules and accessories especially designed to create 

composite deck action by mating of shear connectors, concrete deck, and supporting beam. 

2. Steel shall conform to ASTM A108 grades C1010-1020, minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi. 

3. Studs shall be of uniform diameter, heads concentric and normal to shaft, and weld end chamfered and 

solid flux. 




performance. 



#165582

Section 05100 

Page 4 








2.05. DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS 

A. For those connections not detailed, Fabricator to design connections to resist required forces. 

B. Design connections for simple beams (except where end reactions are otherwise noted) for 55 percent of total 

uniform load capacity shown in Allowable Uniform Load Tables, Part 2, of AISC Manual, for given beam, 

span and grade of steel specified. 

C. Complete penetration butt weld moment connections to develop 100% of flexural capacity of member. 

D. Except as specifically noted otherwise, detail bolted connections using bolts conforming to ASTM A325N, 

Bearing Type Connections with threads allowed in shear plane. Details shall be in accordance with Section 7 

of the AISC Specification for Structural Joints. 

E. Weld connections for diagonal bracing to develop full strength of member in tension. 

F. Do not use welds in combination with bolts in the same face of any connection. 


A. Fabricate materials in accordance with applicable AISC Specifications and Standards. 

B. Pre-assemble work as much as possible and deliver to site ready for erection. Mark and match-mark pieces 

where field assembly is required. 

C. Prior to fabrication; straighten materials, remove twists and bends and clean faying surfaces of scale and rust. 

D. Clean members to be painted with power tools in accordance with SSPC standards. 

E. Provide required camber in beams to within 1/8th inch per 10 feet of beam length. Mark all beams indicating 

direction of fabricated camber or natural camber due to rolling tolerance. 

F. Provide members of required sizes, weights, shapes and lengths. Do not splice members to achieve required 

lengths except where specifically allowed by the Architect. Do not alter member shapes or lengths or enlarge 

bolt holes in the field for proper fit; return materials to the fabrication shop for correction where required. 

Member splices allowed for the convenience of the fabricator or erector shall not result in additional cost to 

the Owner. 

G. Punch or drill holes for bolts. Hole sizes shall conform to AISC Specifications. 

H. Compression joints shall have both contact surfaces milled for precision fit. Other joints shall be cut or 

dressed straight and true, and prepared as required for welding. Components of assemblies and built-up 

members shall be pinned and rigidly maintained in accurate position during final assembly. 

2.07. WELDED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Comply with AWS D1.1. 

B. Clean surfaces of loose scale, rust, paint, grease and dirt. Remove oil with benzine. Wire brush welds after 

depositing for visual inspection. Welds shall be smooth and uniform in cross section, shall be free of porosity 

and clinkers, and shall have required fusion and penetration into base metal. 

C. Secure members in proper position for welding. 

D. Take proper precautions to minimize residual stresses and distortions in members being welded. 

E. Preheat and interpass temperatures shall conform to Table 4.2, AWS D1.1. continuous fillet with minimum 

sizes specified by AWS D1.1 

F. Prepare members to be butt-welded in accordance with AISC recommendations for pre-qualified welds, and 

provide required clearances and back-up bars. Remove back-up bars after completing welds. 

G. Lay fillet welds of required sizes in proper position and with gaps not exceeding AISC recommendations. 

H. Tack welding shall not affect quality of finished welds. 

2.08. BOLTED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Provide holes at right angles to members of sizes recommended by AISC Specifications. Short-slotted holes 

shall not be used for primary frame connections (members connecting to columns), trusses and wind bracing 


#165582

Section 05100 

Page 5 

unless specifically allowed by the Architect. Where used, short-slotted holes shall be oriented normal to the 

direction of load. 

B. Provide beveled washers for surfaces out of parallel more than 1:20. 

C. Provide bolts of sufficient length to extend entirely through nuts. 

D. Protect fasteners from dirt and moisture at job site. Only as many fasteners as are anticipated to be installed 

and tightened during a work shift shall be taken from protective storage. Fasteners not used shall be returned 

to protected storage at end of shift. Fasteners shall not be cleaned of lubricant that is present in as-delivered 

condition. 

E. Anchor bolts and erection bolts: tighten with a suitable wrench not less than 15 inches long. Tap bolt heads 

with a hammer while tightening. 

F. High Strength Bolts (typical, except as noted otherwise): install bolts in properly aligned holes, and tighten to 

snug tight condition. Snug tight condition is defined as the tightness that exists when all plies in a joint are in 

firm contact. 

G. Hand tighten and tack weld (nut-to-bolt shank) bolts required to be "finger-tight". 

H. Holes for anchor bolts in base plates may be oversized in accordance with AISC Specifications. Provide 

washers as indicated on Drawings. 

2.09. SHOP PAINTING 

A. Apply one coat of rust-inhibitive primer to exposed surfaces of structural steel members except: surfaces 

required to be field welded, to be encased in concrete, to be spray fireproofed, and top flanges of beams with 

shear connectors to support metal deck. 

B. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be painted of all loose mill scale, dirt, rust, and other foreign matter with steel 

scrapers, wire brushes, or sandblasting in accordance with SSPC SP-3. Remove oil and grease with solvents. 

C. Mix paint in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, continuously stir during application, and do 

not add thinner after initial mixing. 

D. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, thoroughly work over surfaces and into 

corners. Minimum dry thickness of coating shall be 2 mils. 

E. Repair damage to coating prior to delivery. 

2.010. FUSION WELDED ANCHORS 

A. Comply with AWS D1.1, Section 7. 

B. Clean surfaces to be welded of rust, oil, grease, paint and dirt. Remove mill scale by scraping or sandblasting. 

C. Weld headed studs with appropriate equipment properly adjusted for climactic conditions. 

D. Remove ceramic ferrules after welding. 


A. Testing of Shear Studs: 

1. When temperature is below 32 degrees F, one stud in each 100 shall be tested. 

2. Minimum of 2 shear studs shall be tested at start of each production period in order to determine proper 

generator, control unit and stud welder setting. Studs shall be capable of being bent 45 degrees from 

vertical without weld failure. If, after welding, visual inspection reveals that sound weld or full 360 

degree fillet has not been obtained for a particular stud, stud shall be struck with hammer and bent 15 

degrees off perpendicular toward nearest end of beam. Studs failing this test shall be replaced. 

B. Pre-Erection Testing of High Strength Bolts 

1. Test at least three bolt, nut and washer assemblies from each lot of bolts supplied to job site. 

2. Test assemblies in a tension measuring device at site to verify that assemblies can develop tension listed in 

Table 4 of AISC Specification for Structural Joints. 

3. Bolt tension shall be developed by tightening of nut. 

C. Inspection of Structural Steel: 

1. Provide access to materials in fabrication and full cooperation to testing laboratory. 

2. Following testing services shall be performed: 

a. Check temporary bracing of steel frame. 

b. Check location and condition of anchor bolts. 

c. Check plumbness and tolerance of steel frame. 

d. Qualification of welders and welding techniques. 

e. Visually inspect erection bolts. 

f. Inspection of high-strength bolting: 


#165582

Section 05100 

Page 6 

(1) In accordance with Section 9 of AISC Specifications for Structural Joints. 

(2) Confirm that fasteners meet project specification and are properly stored and handled. 

(3) Confirm that faying surfaces have been properly prepared before connections are assembled. 

(4) Observe testing and calibration and confirm that procedures used result in the required fastener 

tension. 

(5) Visually inspect connections. 

g. Visually inspect field and shop welds. 

h. Complete-penetration welds. 

(1) Ultrasonic or X-ray testing per AWS Standards. 

(2) Testing shall be performed on 100% of shop and field complete-penetration welds. 

i. Re-inspect corrective measures required at expense of Contractor. 

D. Remove and replace Connections found to be faulty at no additional cost to the contract. 


3.01. EXAMINATION 

A. Verify condition and position of anchor bolts and embeds in concrete prior to commencing erection. 

B. Correct misaligned or missing components required for connections to steel framework before commencing 

erection. 

C. Measure camber of erected steel beams and report deviations from required camber before placing concrete 

slabs. Do not place concrete on beams that have inadequate or negative camber. 

3.02. ERECTION AND FIELD ASSEMBLY 

A. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications. Work shall be plumb, square, true to line, level 

and in proper position and orientation. 

B. Provide temporary bracing and guys to maintain stability of framework during erection for stresses and loads 

due to erection equipment and its operation, weight of structure, wind, and temporary loads imposed during 

erection. Check and adjust bracing frequently during progress of erection and assembly. Maintain temporary 

bracing until all components of the structure required for lateral stability are in place and final connections 

made. 

C. Do not stack materials on partially completed framework, or in a manner to cause damage or overloading of 

the structure. 

D. Tolerances shall be in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice and as follows: 

1. Displacement of columns adjacent to elevator shafts not to exceed 1 inch at any point. 

2. Individual members plumb or level to within 1:750. 

3. Vertical dimensions: 1/4 inch per story, exclusive of elastic shortening of columns. 

4. Floor framing members: +-1/4 inch from column splice next above. 

5. Horizontal dimensions: +- 1:2000 for overall length or width. 

E. Field Assembly: 

1. Assemble steel framework accurately to lines and elevations indicated and within specified tolerances. 

Align and adjust members forming parts of a completed frame before fastening. 

2. Erect structural steel in proper sequence with work of other trades. 

3. Tie anchor bolts securely in position before concrete is placed. 

4. Thoroughly clean bearing surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent contact before assembly. 

5. Adjust bolt holes requiring enlargement only by reaming, not by drifting or burning. 

6. Erection bolts may be tightened and left in place, except in architecturally exposed work. Fill holes left 

from removed bolts by plug welding. Grind welds smooth where architecturally exposed. 

7. Straighten and correct members damaged during handling, or replace without additional cost to the 

Owner. 

8. Install slide bearing assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

F. Field Connections: 

1. After frame is aligned and plumb, make final welded and bolted connections in accordance with AISC 

Specifications. 

2. Properly sequence welding to prevent distortion, and misalignment of the framework. 

3. Maintain temporary bracing of the structure until connections are complete and other required 

components of the structure (e.g. floor slabs and metal roof decks) are in place. 


#165582


Section 05100 

Page 7 

A. Touch-up field welds, abrasions and scarred areas of structural steel with same paint used for shop coating 

after erection of frame and final connections are completed. 



#165582

SECTION 05200 

STEEL JOISTS 


1.01. SUMMARY 


1. Pre-engineered steel joists 

2. Bridging 

3. Ceiling extensions 

4. Bearing plates 

5. Side wall anchors 

6. Extended ends 


A. Steel Joist Institute, SJI: 

1. Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series; and Standard Load Table, Open Web Steel 

Joists, K-Series. 

2. Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists LH Series; and Standard Load Table, Longspan Steel 

Joists, LH Series. 

3. Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders. 





1. AWS A5.5, Specification for Steel, Low-Alloy, Covered Arc Welding Electrodes. 

2. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. 


A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and erection drawings to include member marks, number, type, location, and 

spacing of members; details of bridging, extended ends and attachment at supports. 


B. Design: Indicate on shop drawings where special designs have been provided, including a detailed written 

description of magnitudes and locations of loads for each special design loading condition. 

C. Submit Certified mill test reports showing compliance with requirements of ASTM and SJI Specifications. 







E. Local / Regional Materials: 






only. 




F. Submit information on EPA Waste Minimization Priority Chemicals associated with products provided under 





A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 


#165582

Section 05200 

Page 2 

1. Member of Steel Joist Institute 

2. Fabrications, handling, erection and connections of steel joists shall be in accordance with latest editions 

of SJI Specifications. 

B. Welding Operator Qualifications: 

1. Certified within 6 months previous 


A. Mark pieces for identification during erection. 

B. Deliver to site in proper sequence for erection. 

C. Store materials above ground; prevent corrosion, warpage and twisting. 

D. Do not bend or damage members during handling. 

E. Take precautions breaking bundles to prevent damage to materials and injury to workmen. 

1.06. DESIGN 

A. Joists shall be designed by the fabricator in accordance with the specifications of the Steel Joist Institute. 

B. Where loads are shown or specified, members shall be designed for the specific loading conditions required. 

C. Where loadings are not shown, members shall be designed for the maximum allowable load indicated in the 

standard load tables published by the Steel Joist Institute for the member designation and spans required. 

D. Fabricator shall determine and include in the work any and all special bridging or temporary bracing required 

for proper erection or final assembly of the work. 



A. Steel bridging, bearing plates and wall anchors: comply with ASTM A36. 

B. Bolts: comply with ASTM A307. 

C. Welding Electrodes: comply with AWS A5.5, E70 or submerged arc Grade SAW-2. 

D. Steel Joists: comply with SJI Specifications. 

1. Provide double angle bottom chords. 

2. Provide extended ends where required. 

E. Paint: rust-inhibiting primer; comply with SJI Specifications; Paint and methods of paint application shall 

comply with applicable air-quality and environmental regulations. 




performance. 










A. Design and fabricate joists in accordance with SJI Specifications. 

B. Accessories: Provide required sag rods, bridging, extended bottom chords and top chords, side wall anchors, 

wall connectors, headers, and ceiling extensions. 

C. Shop Paint: After fabrication, clean joists, bridging, and anchors of rust, mill scale, dirt and other foreign 

material. Remove grease and oil with solvents. Apply one coat of paint, minimum thickness of 2 mils. 

D. Extended Ends: Design to cantilever from the main span of the joist, provide load capacity at least equal to 

that of joist. 

E. Provide horizontal and X-bridging as required, minimum bridging requirements per SJI Specifications. 


#165582


Section 05200 

Page 3 

3.01. ERECTION 

A. Replace joists damaged by bending or warping during handling and erection. 

B. Bridging shall comply with SJI Specifications and with details on Drawings. 

C. Minimum bearing and anchorage shall comply with SJI Specifications and Drawings as related to particular 

type of support. 

D. Provide erection bolts for joists located on column centerlines. 

E. Set joists to lines, levels, and spacing as indicated. Provide bearing plates as indicated or required to carry out 

structural requirements. Execute general handling and erection in accordance with SJI Specifications. 

F. Joists shall be permanently fastened to supports, and bridging and anchorage installed before any construction 

loads, other than workmen, are placed on joists. 

G. Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1. 

H. Electrodes shall be properly stored and protected to prevent deterioration or damage by moisture and climate. 

I. After erection, field connections and abraded places of shop paint shall be touched up with same kind of paint 

as shop coat. 

J. Bottom chords of joists shall not be welded to supports until full dead load of roof is applied. Joists and 

supporting structure shall be braced for safety and stability until permanent bracing structures are in place. 

K. Bridging shall not be used to support conduit, piping, duct work, or other equipment. 

L. Hangers supporting loads in excess of 100 pounds shall not be attached directly to joist chords. See details on 

Structural Drawings for methods of supporting loads in excess of 100 pounds on joists. 


A. Touch-up abrasions and welds with shop paint. 

B. Correct or replace damaged materials at no additional cost to the Owner. 


A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection 

1. Inspect condition of materials after erection. 

2. Inspect connections to supporting structure. 



#165582

SECTION 05300 

METAL ROOF DECK 


1.01. SUMMARY 


1. Metal Roof Deck 

2. Sheet Metal Accessories 

1.02. REFERENCES (LATEST EDITION AVAILABLE) 

A. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck. 

B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural 

Members. 


1. AWS A5.1, Specification for Steel, Carbon, Covered Arc Welding Electrodes. 


D. American Society for Testing and Materials: 

1. ASTM A90, Standard Tests for Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. 

2. ASTM A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- 

Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 

3. ASTM A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the 

Hot-Dip Process 

4. ASTM A1008, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Carbon, Structural. 

5. ASTM B117, Standard Salt Spray (Fog) Test. 

6. ASTM D714, Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints. 

7. ASTM D1654, Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments. 

E. Factory Mutual Global: 

1. FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28, Wind Design 

2. FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof 

Components 


A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for review prior to fabrication or installation of materials. 

1. Indicate erection layouts, details, steel deck dimensions and section properties, and installation 

instructions. Show supporting framing, lengths and markings of deck to correspond with sequence and 

procedure to be followed in installing and fastening deck. Show methods of fastening deck and installing 

accessories. Show locations, types and sequence of welded connections for deck units. 

2. Indicate welds using standard AWS welding symbols. Show size and number of holes to be cut in deck. 

3. Indicate allowable diaphragm shear capacity corresponding to pattern and type of connections provided. 













only. 





work of this Section. For each Priority Chemical, indicate whether the Priority Chemical is produced as a by- 


#165582

Section 05300 

Page 2 

product during manufacture and whether it is contained in the final product. Indicate amount produced during 



A. Manufacturer Qualifications 

1. Member Steel Deck Institute. 

2. Minimum 5 year's experience. 

B. Erector Qualifications 

1. Minimum 5 year's experience. 

2. Welders certified within previous 6 months. 


A. Deliver deck in bundles and store on pallets above the ground, protect from corrosion and damage. Rusted, 

crimped or bent deck shall not be installed in the work. 

B. Do not store materials on installed deck before connecting to supporting structure. 

C. Do not overload deck during construction by workmen or storage of materials. 



A. Steel Grades: 

1. ASTM A1008, Grade C for painted deck. 

2. ASTM A653, Grade A for galvanized deck. 

B. Miscellaneous steel plates at vents, sump pans, and closures: 20 gage material. 

C. Welding Rods: AWS A5.1, E70 

D. Paint: 

1. Resistant to solvents used to clean deck. 

2. Resistant to corrosion and blistering in accordance with ASTM B117, D714 and D1654. 

3. Compatible with spray-on fireproofing required. Refer to UL assemblies given. 




performance. 










A. Metal deck units shall comply with the Specifications of the Steel Deck Institute. 

B. Design units for required spans and conditions of continuity, generally for 3 continuous spans, except as 

required by layout. 

C. Stresses under construction loads, gravity loads and wind loading shall not exceed recommendations of the 

Steel Deck Institute. 


A. Fabricate in lengths as long as practical and piece-mark bundles for identification during erection. 

B. Painting: 

1. Thoroughly clean deck and coat both sides with phosphate prior to painting. 

2. Apply paint .30 mils minimum thickness to both sides of deck and heat cure for tough, abrasion-resistant 


#165582

finish. 

Section 05300 

Page 3 



A. Do not lay deck units in place until supporting structure is secured in place and final connections are complete. 

B. Layout deck units in accordance with shop drawings, do not stretch or bend units. 

C. Overlap ends a minimum of 2 inches. Interlock side laps as shown on shop drawings. 

D. Connections: 

1. Anchor deck to supporting steel with full-fusion puddle welds. Use weld washers where required. 

2. Connect side laps as noted on Drawings. 

3. Side lap connections of interlocking edges shall be made by button-punching with a specially designed 

crimping tool. 

E. Weld metal fillers and closure pieces in place. 


A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection: 

1. Inspect condition of deck units for damage and corrosion. 

2. Inspect connections of deck to structure and at side laps. 


A. Touch-up scarred areas on both sides of deck including welds, rust spots and abrasions by wire-brushing and 

painting with shop paint. 

B. Repair blow-holes at welds with 18 gage plates welded in place. Replace entire sections of deck where holes 

cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 

3.04. HANGERS FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 

A. Do not attach hangers for ceiling grids, ductwork, and mechanical piping directly to metal roof deck. 



#165582

SECTION 05320 

METAL FLOOR DECK 


1.01. SUMMARY 

A. Section includes 

1. Non-composite metal form deck. 


A. Steel Deck Institute, SDI, Specifications and Commentaries for Non-Composite Steel Form Deck. 

B. American Iron and Steel Institute, AISI, Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural 

Members. 


1. AWS A5.1, Specification for Steel Carbon, Covered Arc Welding Electrodes. 


D. American Society for Testing and Materials. 

1. ASTM A1008, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled,Carbon, Structural. 




Hot-Dip Process. 


A. Shop Drawings: Submit installation drawings of metal floor deck showing layout and connections to 

supporting structure. 













only. 










A. Permanent Steel Forms: rib pattern high tensile steel forms capable of withstanding wet concrete weight plus 

20 pounds per square foot with a maximum deflection of Span/120; uncoated, complying with Federal 

Specification QQ-S-00640, full hard. 

B. Welding Electrodes: AWS E60. 




#165582

Section 05320 

Page 2 


performance. 










1.01. ERECTION OF METAL FLOOR DECK 

A. Place metal floor deck with corrugation edges up and with corrugations perpendicular to supports and 

continuous over 3 spans. 

B. Lap ends 2 inches minimum. 

C. Weld sheets to supports with 5/8 inch diameter puddle welds: 

1. End Laps: Weld top sheet in valley of side lap (through four sheet thicknesses) and again at middle of 

sheet. 

2. Intermediate Supports: Weld in X pattern. Weld in valley of side lap on every other joist and in valley of 

center corrugation on remaining joists. 



#165582

SECTION 05330 

COMPOSITE METAL FLOOR DECK AND FIELD WELDED SHEAR STUDS 


1.01. SUMMARY 


1. Composite metal floor deck 

2. Shear studs 


A. American Institute of Steel Construction: 

1. AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. 


1. ASTM A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality. 




Hot-Dip Process 


1. AWS A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination. 

2. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code, Steel. 

3. AWS D9.1, Specification for Welding of Sheet Metal. 

D. Steel Deck Institute: 

1. SDI Specifications for Composite Steel Floor Deck. 


A. Product Data: submit manufacturers data indicating product compliance for the following: 

1. Composite Metal Floor Deck 

a. Submit certification that decking meets requirements for working platform and form for concrete 

placement. 

b. Submit certification that slab and deck system meets requirements for superimposed load capacity. 

2. Shear Studs 

B. Shop Drawings: submit shop and installation drawings for review, including: 

1. Composite Metal Form Deck drawings 

a. Metal deck erection layouts, details, dimensions, and installation instructions. Indicate which areas of 

deck are to be shored. 

b. Show framing, locations, lengths, and markings of deck to correspond with sequence and procedure 

to be followed in installing and fastening steel deck. 

c. Show methods of fastening deck and installing accessories. 

d. Show locations, types, and sequence of welded connections for deck units, including standard AWS 

weld symbols. 

e. Show size and number of holes to be cut in deck. 

2. Shear studs: show size, locations, and weld symbols for shear studs to be field welded to top flanges of 

steel beams. 













only. 


#165582

Section 05330 

Page 2 




E. Submit information on EPA Waste Minimization Priority Chemicals associated with products provided under 





A. Welding: 

1. Use welding procedures and techniques, welders, and tackers which are qualified in accordance with 

AWS D1.1. 

2. Maintain current AWS certification throughout duration of Project for welders employed on Work. 


A. Deck: 

1. Deliver, store, handle and install steel deck and accessories so as not to damage or deform. 

2. Stack deck, stored at site before erection, on platforms or pallets and cover with tarpaulins or other 

suitable covering to provide weathertight enclosure and to afford proper air circulation. 

3. Do not use deck for storage or as a working platform until sheets have been securely fastened in position. 

Do not damage or overload deck during construction period. 

4. Do not use damaged deck. Replace damaged deck with new material at no additional cost to Owner. 

5. Wirebrush and re-coat rusted areas on deck within 24 hours of detection. 

B. Shear Studs: 

1. Store in dry condition, above ground. 



A. Shear Studs: 

1. Provide shear stud connectors with proper ferrules and accessories especially designed to create 

composite deck action by mating of shear connectors, concrete deck and supporting beam, and capable of 

providing shear forces shown on Drawings when welded through deck used on Project. 

2. Comply with ASTM A108, Grades C1010-1020, with minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi. 

3. Diameter: uniform. 

4. Head: concentric with and normal to shaft. 

5. Weld Ends: chamfered and solid flux. 

6. Height: at least 1-1/2 inches above top of deck after installation, with at least 1/2 inch clear concrete 

cover above top of stud. 

B. Cold Galvanizing Compound: ZRC, as manufactured by ZRC Chemical Products Co., Quincy, Mass. 




performance. 











#165582

Section 05330 

Page 3 

A. Composite Metal Deck 

1. Sheet metal for deck: ASTM A653, Grade A. 

2. Coating on deck and accessories: ASTM A924, G60. 

3. Provide deck having integral locking lugs or embossments which provide mechanical lock between deck 

and concrete slab. Minimum lug depth: 0.005 inches. 

4. Deck units: 

a. Capable of supporting weight of wet concrete, plus 20 psf uniform live load or 150 pound 

concentrated load per foot of deck width without intermediate shoring on all span conditions, and 

without exceeding SDI Specifications limits on deck stress and deflection. 

b. Classified by U.L. Building Materials Directory. 

c. Each unit or bundle labeled and marked in accordance with U.L. requirements, indicating 

manufacturer, testing, and inspection. 

5. Deck ribs: spaced no more than 12 inches on center, and designed to provide efficiency factor of 1.0 for 

development of headed shear studs in concrete in accordance with AISC Specifications. 

6. Provide deck in 36” widths. 


A. Sheet metal closures and fillers: ASTM A446. 



A. Do not undertake laying of deck units until supporting members are in place. 

B. Clean rust, oil, grease, paint, and debris away from areas to which anchors are to be welded. Remove mill 

scale by grinding or by sandblasting. 

3.02. DECK INSTALLATION 

A. Lay and align units as follows: 

1. Maintain required number of units shown on shop drawings. 

2. Prevent stretching or contracting of sidelaps. 

3. Abut ends of units. Do not lap ends of units. 

4. Align flutes in deck at butt joints. 

5. Do not use deck units that are bent or kinked or otherwise damaged such as to prevent proper interlocking 

and connection of edges to adjacent units. 

B. Openings in deck: 

1. Deck erector: cut framed openings indicated on Drawings. 

2. Holes 12 inches in diameter or less may be cut by trades requiring holes. 

3. Where openings greater than 12 inches in diameter not shown on Drawings are required, notify Architect. 

Do not proceed to cut deck until Architect accepts proposed openings. 

C. Weld deck to supporting steel using 5/8" diameter puddle welds or headed shear studs at not more than 12 

inches on center. 

D. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of units. 

E. Fasten side laps and connect perimeter edges to supports at spacing not to exceed three feet. 

1. Fasten side laps using welds, screws or button punching as indicated on approved shop drawings. 

F. Weld metal fillers and closure pieces in place. 

G. Replace defective deck connections before concrete slab is placed. 

3.03. SHEAR STUD INSTALLATION 

A. Automatically end weld shear studs in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 7. 

B. Remove ceramic ferrules from anchors after welding. 

C. Do not weld studs when temperature is below zero degrees F. 

D. Do not weld studs when surface is wet with rain or snow. 


A. Deck: Inspect deck at welded connections. Reject connections where deck is not intact after welding and 

where blow holes occurred. 

B. Shear Studs: 


#165582

Section 05330 

Page 4 

1. Weld at least 2 shear studs at start of each work period to determine proper generator, control unit, and 

stud welder settings. Bend studs 45 degrees from vertical by striking with hammer. Inspect weld. Do not 

include these 2 studs in required total number of studs on Project. 

2. Visually inspect welds at shear studs. Test studs which do not appear to have full sound 360 degree fillet 

weld at base. Test by bending 15 degrees from vertical toward nearest end of beam by striking with 

hammer. Replace studs which fail this test. 

3. When temperature is below 32 degrees F, test one stud in each 100 studs after weld cools. If stud fails in 

weld, test 2 additional studs. Do not resume welding unless 2 additional studs pass test. 


A. Field Touch Up of Deck: After erection, use cold galvanizing compound to touch up both sides of deck at 

welds, weld scars, bruises, and rust spots. 



#165582

PART 1 – GENERAL 


#165582 

SECTION 05400 

LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING 

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 

A. Furnish a complete Lightgauge Metal Framing installation including, but not limited to: welded connections, 

clip angles, fasteners, diagonal wall bracing, stiffeners, diagonal wall bracing straps, tracks, metal studs, 

horizontal lateral bracing and all miscellaneous accessories which may be required for a complete installation 

in accordance with the manufacturer's installation standards, without any additional cost to the Owner. 

B. Work will include: 

1. Exterior non-load bearing wall studs. 

a. Deflection limits: L/600 for masonry veneer, L/360 for EIFS. 

2. Interior non-load bearing wall studs. 

a. Deflection limits: L/240 

3. Any other lightgage framing system noted on the Drawings. 


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, standards and specifications, except 

as otherwise shown and specified. 

1. ASTM A653/A653m - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron 

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 

2. ASTM A924/A924m - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic- 

Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 

3. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel 

4. AWS D19.0 - Welding Zinc Coated Steel 

5. ANSI Z49.1 - Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes 

6. AISI Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members 

B. Manufacturer's Standard: Lightgauge framing shall be equivalent to Steel Stud Manufacturers Association 

(SSMA) published standards and installation recommendations, which will be used as a quality standard 

reference in the event the Contractor furnishes materials in which the submitted manufacturer does not have a 

published installation manual. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, 

installation instructions for products to be used in lightgage framing work, and type and location of fasteners. 

Describe materials and finish, product criteria, and limitations. 

B. Structural Calculations: Submit structural calculations for review by Engineer of Record. 

1. Description of design criteria. 

2. Engineering analysis depicting stress and deflection (stiffness) requirements for each framing 

application. 

3. Selection of framing components and accessories. 

4. Verification of attachments to structure and adjacent framing components. 

5. Sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state where the project is located. 

6. Engineer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience with projects of similar scope. 

C. Shop Drawings: Drawings shall incorporate fabrication and erection details. 







E. Local/Regional Materials: 

1. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance 





cost only.


#165582 

Section 05400 

Page 2 




1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 

A. Protect metal members from rusting and damage. Deliver to project site in manufacturer's containers or 

bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off the ground in a dry, ventilated space. 


2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 

A. Products of the following manufacturers are considered to be of the quality required. 

1. ClarkWestern Building Systems 

2. Dietrich Metal Framing 

3. Marino\Ware 


A. Lightgauge Steel Framing includes track, bridging and bracing members shown, scheduled, and required for 

a complete installation. 

B. Studs, runner track, clips, stiffeners, and accessories shall be formed from hot dipped galvanized steel 

corresponding to the requirements of ASTM A653/A653m, with a minimum G-60 coating per ASTM 

A924/A924m. Minimum yield strength shall be 33 ksi (33,000 psi) for 18 gauge and lighter; and 50 ksi 

(50,000 psi) for 16 gauge and heavier. 

C. Deflection Track (slotted): Manufacturer’s single, 2 ½ inch deep-leg, U-shaped steel track: punched with 

vertical slots in both legs. 

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, suggested product: Dietrich Metal Framing SLP-TRK Slotted 

Deflection Track by Brady Innovations. 

D. Channel Bridging and Bracing: 

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, suggested product equivalent to one of the following: 

a. Dietrich Metal Framing: Spazzer 5400 Bridging and Bracing Bar and Spazzer Bar Guard. 

b. Dietrich Metal Framing U-Channel Assembly: Size as required with Dietrich Metal Framing; EasyClip 

U-Series Clip Angle or equivalent. 

E. Structural properties of sections shall be computed in accordance with AISI. 

F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Zinc-Rich coating containing 95% metallic zinc, by weight in the dried film; 

recognized under the Component Program of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. as an equivalent to hot-dip 

galvanizing; conforming to Federal Specification DOD P-21035A for repair of hot-dip galvanizing; as 

manufactured by ZRC Worldwide. Provide ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound. 

G. CT Cavity Shaftwall Studs: Hot-dipped galvanized steel C-channel, meeting requirements of ASTM C645; 

complying with ASTM A1003 and ASTM A653 G40 or equivalent corrosion resistance coating; Dietrich 6” 

CT Cavity Shaftwall studs. Designation, UL rating and size as indicated on the drawings. Install with J- 

tabbed tracks and per manufactures recommendations. 

H. Unistrut: for Translucent Wall System, refer to drawings. 

H. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance 

requirements of this Section. 

I. Provide material with maximum amount of regional (within 500 miles) material feasible that achieves 



A. Fabricate per manufacturer's current printed instructions. 

B. Shop Fabrication: Fabricate items in shop to greatest extent possible so as to minimize field splicing and 

assembly of units at project site. Clearly mark units for assembly and coordinated installation. 

C. Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. 

D. Framing components shall be cut squarely or at an angle to fit squarely against abutting members. Member 

shall be held firmly in position until properly fastened. 

E. Dissimilar structural components shall be attached by welding, screw attachment, or bolting. Wire tying of 

framing components in structural applications shall not be permitted. Provide for structural movement per 

manufacturer's requirements if not specifically noted or detailed.

Section 05400 

Page 3 

F. Protective Finishing: Paint abraded surfaces and welds after fabrication, using galvanizing repair paint for 

galvanized surfaces. 



A. General: Install metal framing systems, steel studs and accessories in accordance with Drawings and 

approved shop drawings. Spacing of studs shall not exceed 16" o.c. 

B. Securely anchor track to floor and overhead structure or members. Seat studs squarely in the track with the 

stud web and flange securely attached to the flanges or web of both the upper and lower tracks. 

C. Allow for structural movement by providing connections designed specifically for that purpose including 

vertical slide clips, space between studs and top track braced with bridging in accordance with approved shop 

drawings. 

D. No splices in studs, joists, or other load carrying members shall be made without prior engineering review 

and specific details for any such splices. Welds shall be fillet, plug, butt or seam. 

E. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud at wall opening, door and window jambs. 

F. Provide rows of horizontal bridging at spacing in accordance with approved shop drawings to resist lateral 

forces and stud rotation. 

G. Touch-up Painting: Paint abraded surfaces and welds after installation, using galvanizing repair paint for 

galvanized surfaces. 

3.02 TOLERANCES 

A. Maximum variation from true position: +/- 1/8" from plan location. 

B. Maximum variation of any member from plane: 1/8" in 10 feet. 



#165582


SECTION 05500 

MISCELLANEOUS METAL 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Miscellaneous Metal work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 

B. Work, items and requirements specified elsewhere that apply and/or relate to this Section include: 

1. Structural Steel – Section 05100 

2. Steel Stairs - Section 05510 

3. Painting - Section 09900 


A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of the Standards listed: 

1. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Assoc. AAMA 


3. American National Standards Institute ANSI 

4. American Welding Society AWS 

5. National Association of Architectural Metal Mfrs. NAAMM 

6. American Institute of Steel Construction AISC 

7. American Hot Dip Galvanizers Assoc. AHDGA 


A. Meet requirements of applicable portions of "Structural Shop Drafting" by AISC. 

B. Provide drawing profiles, sections, and views of items especially manufactured for this work at a scale large 

enough to permit checking for design conformity. 

C. Show locations, markings, quantities, materials, sizes and shapes. 

D. Note and mark sufficiently to indicate compliance with requirements of these Specifications. 

E. Submit samples of materials involved showing actual colors and finishes. 

F. Refer to Section 01340 - Submittals. 

G. Recycled Content: 






H. Local/Regional Materials: 






only. 



component per unit of product 



A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36m-94 and A588/A588m-94, Grade 46 

B. Welding Materials: AWS Code A5.1-69, Series E60 or E70 as required. 

C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653m Coating G90. 

D. Prime Paint: Zinc Chromate iron oxide. 

E. Bituminous Paint: ASTM A123-89a. 

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53-95, Grade B. 

G. Galvanizing: ASTM A123-89a. 

H. Aluminum Pipe: Alloy 6063 Schedule 40. 


#165582

Section 05500 

Page 2 

I. Bilco: LU-1 (or similar) 

J. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance requirements 

of this Section, 

K. Provide material with maximum amount of regional (within 500 miles) material feasible that achieves 

performance requirements of this Section, 



A. Form materials to shapes indicated with straight lines, sharp angles, and smooth curves. Drill or punch holes 

and smooth edges. 

B. Weld permanent shop connections. Grind smooth, welds that will be exposed. Conceal fastenings where 

practicable. 

C. Punch or drill for temporary field connections and for attachment of work by other trades. 

D. Fabricate work in shop in as large assemblies as practicable. 

E. Prevent any contact of dissimilar metals. Where contact is unavoidable, provide neoprene or other appropriate 

separation material. 

F. Meet requirements specified under Structural Steel for fabricating items of a structural nature or use. 

3.02 ITEMS 

A. Furnish bolts, nuts, clip angles, etc. as shown on Drawings and as required to complete the work. Items of this 

section used in or attached to exterior walls to be galvanized or zinc-coated. 

B. Vanity Supports: 

1. Supply and install angle and tube frame fabricated to support the vanities. 

C. Pipe Rails/Wall Rails: 

1. Fabricate rails of standard weight black steel for painting; pipe sizes as indicated on drawings. 

2. Form bends smooth without wrinkles, kinks, or flat spots. Minimum radius to inside face of pipe shall be 

equal to pipe diameter. 

3. Weld joints and grind smooth. 

4. Fabricate wall rails of one continuous piece in each run with no joints and with 1/2 turns at end to walls. 

5. Support wall rails on fabricated pipe supports as shown on drawings. 

6. Provide flush type flanges with exposed countersunk fasteners at wall returns. Finish to be primed and 

ready for paint at interior locations 

D. Metal Ladder: 

1. Fabricate of steel stock. Stringers – flat bar, 2 1/2” x ¼” thick; Rungs – ¾” diameter at 12” o.c. Ladder 

shall be 1’-6” wide with centerline of rung 12” from face of wall. 

2. Where terminating at roof hatch, extend stringers within 4” of roof hatch cover and rung within 6”. 

3. Support on wall with steel clip angles secured to structural substrate at 3’-6” o.c. maximum and attach to 

floor with clip angles. 


A. Set metalwork level, true to a line, plumb, or as indicated. 

B. Weld field connections and grind smooth, where practicable. Conceal fastenings where practicable. 

C. Secure metal to wood with lag screws, of adequate size, with appropriate washers. 

D. Secure metal to masonry with embedded anchors, setting compound, lead caulking and sleeves, or cement-sand 

grouting. 

E. Use corrosion-resistant anchorage devices in areas subjected to corrosive conditions. Avoid dissimilar metal 

contact. 

F. Expansion bolts, toggle bolts, and screws permitted for light duty service only. Meet requirements specified 

for structural steel for erecting items of structural nature or use. 

G. Metal work, in place, shall be approved before being covered. 

H. Do work in accordance with the approved shop drawings and as indicated on the details. 

3.04 PAINTING 

A. Clean ferrous metal of scale, rust, oil, moisture and dirt before applying paint. 


#165582

Section 05500 

Page 3 

B. Apply one shop coat to ferrous metals after fabrication except metals that will be encased in concrete, and 

except surfaces that will be adjacent to field welds. Use asphalt paint on metals anchored into masonry, and 

concrete. 

C. Apply two shop coats to ferrous metals that will be inaccessible after erection. 

D. Retouch, in field, all scraped, abraded and unpainted surfaces. Paint as specified for shop coats. 

E. Painting specified here does not count as a coat for finish painting. 

F. Shop painting will not be required for galvanized metal, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, brass, bronze and 

metals to receive special coatings unless specifically mentioned. 

3.05 CLEANING 

A. Refer to Section 01710 - Cleaning. 

B. Clean items prior to final inspection in accordance with the recommendations of the fabricator. 



#165582


SECTION 05510 

STEEL STAIRS AND RAILINGS 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Design, fabricate and install interior and exterior steel stairs, ramps, intermediate landings, steel landing 

trimmers, hanger rods and railings in conjunction with steel stairs and landings. Stairs shall be as shown in the 

Drawings. 

B. Work, items and requirements specified elsewhere that apply and/or relate to this section include: 


2. Structural Steel - Section 05100 

3. Miscellaneous Metal - Section 05500 

4. Finish Painting - Section 09900 


A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of the Standards listed. 




4. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NAAMM 

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Strucutral Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs and support connections capable of withstanding the 

effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 

1. Uniform Load: 100 psf 

2. Concentrated Live Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 

3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified 

above. 

5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. 

B. Strucutral Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the 

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 

1. Handrails and guards: 

a. Uniform load of 50 plf applied in any direction. 

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. 

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

2. Intermediate rails (infill components): 

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. 

b. Component loads and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 


A. Materials list of items to be provided under this section. 

B. Submit electronic shop drawings, showing in detail fabrication, materials, fastenings, anchoring, welds, supports, 

hangers, sizes of members and thicknesses. 

C. Show proposed methods of anchoring and supporting stairway and location and lengths of welds. 

D. Indicate on shop drawing sizes of sections intended to be delivered. 

E. Submit structural calculations for review by Engineer of Record. 

1. Description of design criteria. 

2. Engineering analysis depicting stress and deflection (stiffness) requirements for each framing application. 

3. Selection of framing components and accessories. 

4. Verification of attachments to structure and adjacent framing components. 

5. Sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state where the project is located. 

6. Engineer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience with projects of similar scope. 


1. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit 

of product. 



#165582

Section 05510 

Page 2 

3. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled content product in the 

assembly by weight. 

G. Local/Regional Materials: 






only. 





A. Use only workmen skilled in this section of the Work. Do Work to best standard practices and in accordance 

with laws, by-laws and regulations that govern. Conform to the requirements of the authorities. 



A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36mand A588/588m, Grade 46. 

B. Welding materials: AWS Code A5.1, Series E60 or E70 as required. 

C. Metal Pans: Hot-rolled steel, ASTM A653/A653m. 

D. Sheet steel: Cold-rolled steel ASTM A1008/1008m 

E. Primer paint: Zinc Chromate iron oxide. 

F. Handrail Bracket: malleable iron bracket with screw fastenings. 

G. Steel Deck Landings: Conform to ASTM A-653/A653m; deck to be galvanized. 

H. Metal Stair Treads and Plank Grating: Grip Strut grating 

I. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance requirements of 

this Section, 

J. Provide material with maximum amount of regional (within 500 miles) material feasible that achieves 




A. Design, fabrication and erection of stairs shall conform to the applicable portions of NAAMM standards for 

"Conventional Type Steel Stairs", local building codes and state laws. 

B. Where possible fit and shop assemble sections of the work and deliver to site in largest practicable sections. 

Execute work according to details and approved shop drawings. Where shop fabrication is not possible, make 

the trial assemblies in shop. Take field dimensions and fabricate and install to suit field conditions and field 

openings. Comply with structural steel tolerances, ASTM A36/A36m. 

C. Welding: AWS Code A5.1, Series E60-E70 as required. File or grind exposed welds smooth and flush, so as to 

be invisible after painting. Leave ready for prime painting and field touch-up. 

D. Make workmanship of best grade of modern shop and field practice known to recognized manufacturers 

specializing in this work. Fit joints and intersection members accurately. Make work in true planes with 

adequate fastening. Build and erect work plumb, true, square, straight, level and accurate to sizes and shapes 

detailed, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 

E. Insulate metals where necessary to prevent corrosion due to contact between dissimilar metals and between 

metals and masonry or concrete. Use bituminous paint, butyl tape, building paper or other approved means. 

F. Supply fastenings, anchors and accessories required for fabrication and erection of this section of the Work. 

Make exposed metal fastenings and accessories of same materials, texture, color and finish as base metal on 

which they occur unless otherwise shown or specified. Utilize concealed fasteners where shown on the 

drawings. Keep exposed fastenings to an absolute minimum and inconspicuous, spacing them evenly and setting 

them out neatly. Make fastenings of permanent type. 

G. Draw mechanical joints to hairline tightness and seal countersunk screws and access holes for locking screws 

with metal filler where these occur on exposed surfaces. 


#165582

Section 05510 

Page 3 

H. Dimensions and thicknesses of framing, supports landings, treads and risers, balustrades and railings are 

minimums. Do not decrease. Increase as necessary to support design loads. 

I. Fabricate work complete with components required for anchoring and supporting. 

J. Stringers shall be structural steel shapes with 3/8 in. steel end plates on exposed ends of walls strings and outer 

strings as indicated. 

K. Weld stair stringers to structural steel landing trimmer. 

L. Interior Stairs: 

1. Form treads and risers of 12 ga. steel to profiles indicated to receive concrete tread fill. 

2. Construct intermediate landings of galvanized steel deck as specified to receive concrete fill. 

3. Fabricate wall rails with malleable steel brackets of design similar to that indicated, spaced as shown. 

(Refer to Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals.) 

M. Exterior Stairs: 

1. Treads and landings to be 1 ½” Grip Strut grating. 

2. Fabricate wall rails with malleable steel brackets of design similar to that indicated, spaced as shown. 

(Refer to Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals.) 


A. Install metal expansion shields and fastenings, anchors and supports in stair well walls as required to stabilize the 

stairs and landings under stipulated loading conditions and to the satisfaction of the Authorities. Secure bottom 

riser to concrete slab mechanically. 

B. Provide temporary supports and bracing required to position stairs. 

C. Do drilling, cutting and fitting necessary to attach this work to adjoining work and make it complete. 

D. Make joints tight, smooth and leave completed work straight, true, clean and smooth. 

E. Where fastenings or anchors have to be built in by other trades supply necessary templates, instruction and 

supervision to ensure satisfactory installation. 

F. Wood plugs for fixing to walls will not be permitted. Use metal anchoring devices. 

G. Clean work thoroughly and brush on prime paint and touch up shop coat where omitted or damaged during 

erection. Paint field welds. Work paint well into joints, crevices, interstices and open spaces. 

3.03 FINISHING 

A. Prime Painting: 

1. Thoroughly clean ferrous metals, by methods suitable to remove burrs, weld spatter, rust, loose mill scale, 

oil, grease, dirt and other foreign matter. 

2. Shop apply one coat of prime paint to surfaces except those requiring field welding. Brush on thoroughly 

and work well into crevices and interstices. 

3. After erection and installation, clean the work and apply field touch-up of same formulas as shop coat to 

damaged or unpainted surfaces. Work paint well into joints, crevices, interstices and open spaces. 



#165582

Section 05520 

Page 1 

SECTION 05520 

METAL FABRICATIONS 



A. Requirements of Division 1 apply to all Work of this Section. 

1.2 SCOPE 

A. Shop fabricated metal items and miscellaneous metal work. 

B. Refer to Schedule at end of this Section. 

1.3 RELATED WORK (See also Table of Contents) 

A. Structural Steel: Section 05100. 


A. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted) 

1. 2007 California Building Code (CBC), with State of California Amendments 

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Specifications as listed in the Section. 

B. Submittals: (Submit under provisions of Section 01340) 

1. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating profiles, sizes, connection attachments, 

reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, 

elevation, and details where applicable. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding 

symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 

2. Manufacturer's descriptive data: Submit for manufacturer's items. 






















1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver all parts ready for erection; store in close proximity to final locations. 


#165582

Section 05520 

Page 2 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. 

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. 

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade. B. 

D. Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307. 

E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 

F. Galvanizing: Hot-dip process ASTM A123 typical and ASTM A153 for threaded fasteners performed 

after fabrication into largest practical section. Weight of coating not less than 2 oz. per sq. ft. of 

surface. Where damaged, repair surface with one coat of hot process galvanizing repair compound, 

"Galvalloy", Galvweldalloy", or approved equal. 

G. Primer: Tnemec Company "Series V10 Red Primer", Sherwin-Williams "Kern Primer"; or approved 

equal. 

H. Dissimilar Materials: Separate dissimilar surfaces in contact with or in close proximity to noncompatible 

metals, concrete masonry, or plaster with neoprene gasket; or other approved means. 

I. Expansion Bolts: Hilti "Kwik Bolt TZ" Anchors, galvanized unless otherwise indicated. 

J. Non-shrink Grout: Master builders 928 or equal. 

K. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance 



A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 

C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to jobsite. 

D. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth adjacent finished surfaces. Ease exposed edges to small uniform 

radius. 

E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent 

with design of structure, except where specifically noted otherwise. 

F. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush and hairline. 

G. Supply components required for anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related 

components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 

2.3 FINISH 

A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. 

B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete or where field welding is required. 

C. Prime paint interior items with one coat unless scheduled to be galvanized. 

D. Galvanize exterior items and scheduled interior items to minimum 2.00 oz/sq ft zinc coating. 



A. Obtain Architect's approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 

B. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is scheduled. 

C. Make provision for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment. 

D. Supply items required to be cast into concrete with setting templates, for installation under appropriate 

Sections. 


A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 

B. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. 

C. After installation, touch-up field welds, scratched or damaged surfaces with primer, except repair 

exposed galvanized work (not to be painted) with hot process field galvanizing, in accord with 


#165582

Section 05520 

Page 3 

manufacturer's published directions. 

3.3 SCHEDULE 

A. Provide and install items listed in Schedule and shown on Drawings with anchorage and attachment 

necessary for installation. The following Schedule lists principal items only. Refer to drawing details 

for items not specifically scheduled. 

1. Miscellaneous plates or angles not attached to structural steel; complete with anchorage for 

embedment. 

2. Exterior mounted ladders. 

3. Handrails and guardrails. 

4. Bollards. 

5. Gates for trash enclosure. 

6. Light pole bases. 



#165582


SECTION 05721 

PRE-FINISHED HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Fabricate and install steel stairs, ramps, intermediate landings, steel landing trimmers, and hanger rods, in 

conjunction with steel stairs and landings. Stairs shall be as shown in the drawings. 

B. Work, items and requirements specified elsewhere that apply and/or relate to this section include: 

1. Miscellaneous Metal – Section 05500 

2. Finish Painting – Section 09900 








A. Materials list of items to be provided under this section. 

B. Submit electronic shop drawings, showing in detail fabrication, materials, fastenings, anchoring, welds, 

supports, hangers, sizes of members and thicknesses. 

C. Show proposed methods of anchoring and supporting stairway and location and lengths of welds. 

D. Indicate on shop drawings sizes of sections intended to be delivered. 

E. Provide small mock up sample from the subcontractor for the finish color of the rail. 













only. 





A. Use only workmen skilled in this section of work. Do work to best standard practices and in accordance with 

laws, by-laws and regulations, which govern. Conform to the requirements of the authorities. 



A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36m-94 and A588/588m-94, Grade 46. 

B. Welding Materials: AWS Code A5.1-69, Series E60 or E70 as required. 

C. Metal Pans: Hot-rolled steel, ASTM 653/A653m. 

D. Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled steel ASTM A366/A366m-91. 

E. Primer Paint: Zinc Chromate iron oxide. 

F. Handrail Bracket: Malleable iron bracket with screw fastenings. 


#165582

Section 05721 

Page 2 

G. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance requirements 


H. Provide material with maximum amount of regional (within 500 miles) material feasible that achieves 




A. Fabricate steel pipe railings and handrails to design, dimensions and details indicated. Provide railing and 

handrail members formed of pipe sizes and wall thickness indicated, or if not shown, as required to support 

design load. 

B. Auditorium rails shall be dry polyester powdercoated at minimum 350 degrees. 

C. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt-welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricators 

option, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. At tee and cross intersections provide coped joints. 

E. At bends, interconnect pipes by means of prefabricated elbow fittings or flush radius bends, as applicable, of 

radii indicated. 

F. At elbow bends provide mitered joints. 

G. Form bends by use of prefabricated elbow fittings and radius bends or by bending pipe, at fabricator’s option. 

H. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive 

configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, 

twisting or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. 

I. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, except where otherwise indicated. 

J. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16 inch thick steel plate in place or by use of prefabricated fittings. 

K. Keep exposed fastenings to an absolute minimum and inconspicuous, spacing them evenly and setting them out 

neatly. Make fastenings of permanent type. 

L. Construct railings to support safely a horizontal thrust of 250 lb/ft applied at top of rail. Should the codes or 

authorities require greater loading, design and construct for it. 

M. Fabricate work complete with components required for anchoring and supporting. 

N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings 

and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment railings and handrails to work. Furnish inserts and 

other anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work. 


A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and handrails to in-place 

construction: including, threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag 

bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. 

B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting as required for installation of railings. 

C. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level true and free of rack, measured from 

established lines and levels. 

D. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing 

indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and 

railing ends to building construction in one of the following ways: 

1. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts 

have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with non-shrink nonmetallic 

grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer’s directions. 

2. Anchor posts in concrete by core drilling holes not less than 4 inches deep and ¾” greater than outside 

diameter of post. Clean holes of all loose material, insert posts and fill annular space between post 

and sleeve solid with non-shrink non-metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout 

manufacturer’s directions. 

E. Cover anchorage joint with round steel flange welded to post. 

F. Secure handrails to wall with brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with no less than 1 ½ inch clearance 

from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at 

spacing required for design loading. Secure brackets as required for different wall conditions. 


#165582

Section 05721 

Page 3 

3.03 FINISHING 

A. Powdercoat Painting: 

1. Thoroughly clean ferrous metals, by methods suitable to remove burrs, weld spatter, rust, loose mill 

scale, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign matter. 

2. Shop apply dry polyester powdercoat at a minimum temperature of 350 degrees. 

3. Color shall be Cardinal Powder Coatings, T375 BK-10, Gold Vein Semi-gloss. 



#165582

SECTION 05810 

EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Related Documents: General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General 

Requirements, and Drawings are applicable to this Section. 

B. Section Includes: 

1. Section Includes: Expansion joint assemblies for floor, wall and ceiling surfaces. 


A. Design Requirements: 

1. Manufacturer: Responsible for designing units, including anchorage to structural system, transitions, 

direction changes, and necessary modifications to meet specified requirements and maintain visual 

design concepts. 

2. Provide concealed fastening wherever possible. 

B. Performance Requirements: Permit unrestrained movement of joint without disengagement of cover. 

1. Provide seal assembly for joint width and expansion dimensions. 

2. Provide units to accommodate joints size, variations in adjacent surfaces, and dynamic movement 

without material degradation or fatigue when tested in accordance with ASTM E1399. 

C. Fire Resistance Requirements: Test fire rated cover assemblies or fire-rated barrier component of joint 

cover assembly at maximum joint width with field splice in accordance with ASTM 119-5a or E814-94b. 

1. Classify by UL, Warnock Hersey, or other fire testing agency acceptable to authority having 

jurisdiction. 

2. Fire Rating: Not less than rating of adjacent construction. 

3. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, ASTM E84-95. 

4. Smoke Generated Index: 0 to 450, ASTM E84-95. 


A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 

1. Include data to indicate nominal joint size, joint movement range, percentage of movement from 

nominal joint size, and quantity of axial dimensions through which joint can move. 

2. Include information for factory finishes, sealants, and other required components. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout including locations, dimensions, profiles, fabrication details, interface with 

adjacent construction, anchorage, frequency of attachment, finishes, splices, joints, miters, and accessories. 

Submit detail drawings of special accessory components not included in manufacturer's product data. 

C. Informational Submittals: Submit manufacturer's instructions 


1. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of 

product. 










only. 

4. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or manufactured in separate locations, 

provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage by weight of each component per 



#165582

Section 05810 

Page 2 


A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each product from one manufacturer for entire Project, unless 

otherwise acceptable to Architect. Provide each joint cover assembly as complete unit, including fire and 

moisture barriers, resilient inserts, anchors, and accessory items necessary for proper operation. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum: 

1. Extrusions: ASTM B221-95a. 

a. Alloy: 6061-T6 or 6063-T5. 

2. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209-95. 

a. Plate Alloy: 6061-T6 or 6061-T651. 

b. Sheet Alloy: 5052-H32. 

3. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance 

requirements of this Section, 

4. Provide material with maximum amount of regional (within 500 miles) material feasible that 

achieves performance requirements of this Section, 

B. Resilient Fillers, Inserts, and Border Strips: Neoprene, Santoprene, or extruded polyvinyl chloride, 

exhibiting Shore A hardness of 40 to 75 Durometer. 

C. Fire Barrier: Manufacturer's standard type required for indicated fire resistance and fabricated of layers of 

ceramic fiber insulation, metallic insulation or silica fiber fabric. 

D. Flame Sealant: Manufacturer's intumescent sealant to remain resilient to permit joint movement and, upon 

exposure to heat, resist penetration of fire through voids in construction. 

E. Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and 

plasticizing additives. 

1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 5000 PSI. 

2. Acceptable Products: 

a. Masterflow 713, Master Builders, Cleveland, OH. 

b. Hi-Flow Grout, Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH. 

c. Kemset Grout, Chem-Masters, Madison, OH. 

d. 588 Grout, W.R. Meadows, Elgin, IL. 

e. Sonogrout 10K, Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN. 


A. Provide parts, devices, anchors, fasteners, spacers, flexible moisture barrier and filler, drain tubes, and other 

accessories required for complete, watertight installations. 

1. Bituminous Paint: SSPC Paint 12. 

2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC Paint 20, Type II (Organic). 


A. Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies: Prior to fabrication, field measure actual existing conditions to ensure 

proper fit. 

1. Fabricate and provide anchors for installation in formed block-outs or recesses without need for castin-place 

or pre-installed anchors. 

2. Factory drill anchor holes in extrusions spaced 12 inch centers. Miter cut extrusions in field to 

conform to directional changes. Ship extrusions in standard 10 foot or 20 foot lengths. 

3. Provide in longest units in longest practical lengths to minimize quantity of intermediate joints and 

field splicing. 

4. Fabricate with mitered and welded corners where joint changes direction or abuts other materials. 

5. Fabricate with end closures, transitions, tee-joints, corners, cross-connections, and other pieces to 

provide continuous assembly. 

B. Fire Rated Joint Covers: Provide with manufacturer's standard fire barrier and flame sealant to provide 

required fire rating. 

C. Shop-assemble components and package with anchors and fittings. 


#165582

2.4 FINISHES 

A. Refer to drawings for required finish. 

Section 05810 

Page 3 



A. Examine conditions and proceed with work in accordance with the following: 

1. Verify that deck, framing assemblies, and other items affecting work of this Section are in place and 

positioned correctly. 

2. Verify that field measurements and formed recess dimensions are as shown on shop drawings. 

3. Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable. 


A. Provide anchoring devices for installation and embedding. 

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements. 

C. Touch-up damaged galvanized steel surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780-93a using SSPC Paint 20. 


A. Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies: Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions. 

1. Install units plumb, level, square, and free from warp or twist while maintaining dimensional 

tolerances, and alignment with surrounding construction. 

2. Install floor joints with top surface flush with finish floor surface. 

3. Install wall and ceiling joints flush with adjacent finish surfaces. 

4. Rigidly anchor to substrate. Make allowances for change in joint size due to difference between 

installation and building operating temperatures. 

5. Non-Shrink Grout: Install to encase floor-mounted joint covers in formed blockouts and recesses. 

6. Install with minimum quantity of intermediate joints and splices. 

7. Install to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction to avoid buckling of metal. 

8. Install flexible filler materials to frames with adhesive to frames with adhesive or pressure-sensitive 

tape as required by manufacturer. 

9. Set joint systems to proper width for ambient temperature at time of setting. 

B. Fire Barriers and Flame Sealant: 

1. Install to comply with fire rating design requirements. 

2. Install at both faces of fire rated walls. 

C. Covers with Metal and Elastomeric Components: Install metal extrusions. 

1. Install elastomeric seal to form one continuous piece. 

2. Splicing Field Cuts/Miters of Cover Assembly Components: 

a. Metal Components: Use manufacturer-required sealant. 

b. Elastomeric Components: Use manufacturer's vulcanizing or welding procedures to provide 

watertight joints. 

3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust parts for smooth, uniform operation. 

1. Adjust joint cover to freely accommodate joint movement. 

3.5 CLEANING 

A. Clean as recommended by manufacturer. 

1. Do not use materials or methods which may damage finish or surrounding construction. 

2. Clean excess primer, adhesives, sealants, and other products from components and adjacent surfaces 

for proper operation of assembly. 


A. Protect finished work in accordance with the following: 

1. Protect installation from damage by work of other trades. Where required, remove and store cover 

plate and install temporary protection over joints. Reinstall cover plate before completion of Work. 

2. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor joint surfaces. 

3. Provide removable strippable coating or reinforced cloth tape to protect finish surfaces. 


#165582

Section 05810 

Page 4 

3.7 SCHEDULE 

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Construction Specialties. 

B. Provide fire rated devices where required to maintain fire rating of assembly through which device is 

penetrating. 

C. Provide widths as indicated on Drawings. 

1. Floor: 

a. SJ-400HD; Mill aluminum finish. Location floor to floor. 

b. SJW-400HD; Mill aluminum finish. Location floor to wall. 

2. Wall Interior Private: 

a. SFW-400 ; Mill aluminum finish. Location wall to wall. 

b. SCW-400 ; Mill aluminum finish. Location wall corner. 

c. Provide reflex fire barrier at rated walls. 

3. Wall Interior Public: 

a. SFW-400; #543 Medium bronze finish. Location wall to wall. 

b. SCW-400; #543 Medium bronze finish. Location wall corner. 

c. Provide reflex fire barrier at rated walls. 

4. Exterior Wall: Compression seal with backer rod and sealant. 

a. SC-400 (non-fire rated); black finish. 

b. SF-100. 

5. Ceiling: 

a. FCF-400; White Gasket Finish. Location ceiling to ceiling. 

b. FCFC-400; White Gasket Finish. Location ceiling to wall. 

c. FWF-500. 



#165582


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Rough Carpentry work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 


1. Miscellaneous Metals- Section 05500 

2. Painting- Section 09950 

3. Wallcoverings- Section 09950 



1. Product Standards PS 

2. American Plywood Association APA, DFPA 

3. Architectural Woodwork Institute AWI 

4. American Wood Preservers Institute APWI 

5. American Society for Testing & Materials ASTM 

6. National Forest Products Assoc. NFPA 

7. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SPIB 

8. Federal Specifications FedSpec. 

SECTION 06100 

ROUGH CARPENTRY 


A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been 

in satisfactory use in similar service. 

B. Lumber grading rules and species: 

1. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 

2. Southern Forest Products Association (SPFA). 

C. Plywood Grading Rules and Recommendations: 

1. American Plywood Association (APA). 

D. Standards for fire hazard classification for fire retardant treated material. 

1. Test method: ASTM E84-95b, NFPA 255, UL 723. 

E. Preservative and pressure treatment standards: American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA). 

F. VOC emissions: Provide low VOC products. 

1. Adhesives and sealants: Comply with California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District 

(SCAQMD) #1168 identified in Section 01352. 

2. Aerosol adhesives: Comply with Green Seal GS-36 identified in Section 01352 

3. Clear wood finishes: Comply with SCAQMD #1113 identified in Section 01352 

4. Engineered Wood Products: Provide products with no added urea formaldehyde. 








D. Local/Regional Materials: 






only. 


#165582

Section 06100 

Page 2 




E. Provide product data indicating VOC levels in gallons/liter (g/L) or no added urea-formaldehyde in 

compliance with Section 01352. Invoices for FSC certified products shall identify FSC chain of custody 

(COC) number. 

F. Submit copies of invoices for all wood materials identifying material costs not including labor. 

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Immediately upon delivery to job site, place materials in area protected from weather. 

B. Store materials a minimum of 6" above ground on framework or blocking and cover with protective waterproof 

covering providing for adequate air circulation or ventilation. 

C. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of building. 

D. Protect sheet materials from corners breaking and damaging surfaces, while unloading. 


2.01 MATERIALS - ROUGH CARPENTRY 

A. Lumber: (for framing, blocking, nailers, furring, cant strips, grounds, and similar members): Similar to dry 

size requirements of PS-20, Douglas Fir WWPA No. 2. 

1. Thoroughly seasoned, well fabricated materials of longest practical lengths and sizes. 

2. Free of non-correctable warp and knots. 

B. Plywood: PS1-83, exterior type, structural I c-c EXT-APA. 

1. Provide APA-MDO-EXT Plywood, where indicated. 

2. Provide products with no added urea formaldehyde. 

C. Preservative Treated Material: Provide preservative treated material for material used outside or in contact 

with the roof or exterior wall. 

D. Fire Retardant Treated Material: Provide fire retardant treated material inside building where used as part of a 

fire rated assembly. 

E. Combination Fire Retardant/Preservative Treated Material: 

1. Provide combination fire retardant/preservative treated material for material used at both conditions 

described above. 

2. Lumber: AWPA C-20 with exterior type decay resistance. 

3. Plywood: AWPA C-27 with exterior type decay resistance. 

4. Kiln dry treated material to 15 percent moisture content. 

F. VOC emissions: Provide low VOC products. 






2.02 ANCHORS, FASTENERS AND PLATES 

A. Bolts, Nuts, Studs, Rivets: FS FF-B-575, FF-S-1362 and FF-B-556. 

B. Expansion Shields: FS FF-S-325; group, type, class, and style best suited for the purpose. 

C. Lag Screw and Bolts: FS FF-B561; type and grade best suited for the purpose. 

D. Nails: FS FF-N-105; type and size best suited for the purpose. Hot dipped galvanized for exterior use. 

E. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588; type and class best suited for the purpose. 

F. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111; types best suited for the purpose. Hot dipped galvanized for exterior use. 

G. Steel Plates and Shapes: ASTM A36/A36m-94, galvanized for exterior use. 

H. Metal hangers, straps, ties, and clips will be of the model, and shape shown on the drawings as manufactured 

by Simpson Strong Tie Connectors or equivalent. 


3.01 INSTALLATION - ROUGH CARPENTRY 


#165582

Section 06100 

Page 3 

A. Attach work securely by anchoring and fastening as indicated or required to support applied loading. 

1. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts. 

2. Nail plywood in accordance with APA recommendations. 

B. Set work to required levels and lines, plumb, true. 

C. Cut and fit accurately. 

D. Provide wood grounds, nailers, or blocking where required for attachment of handrails, cabinets or other work 

and surface applied items as required to properly carry out work shown and reasonably inferred by the 

Drawings and Specifications. 

E. Form to shapes indicated. 

F. Provide wood blocking between studs at height of door stop, behind stop, at door openings. 

G. Grounds: Dressed, key beveled lumber minimum 1½" wide of thickness required to bring face of ground even 

with finish material. 

H. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 

I. Install wood furring plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. 

J. Shim as required. 

K. Field treat cuts and holes in the preservatives and fire retardant treated material in accordance with AWPA 

Standard M-4. 

L. Shoring - Furnish and place necessary shoring and bracing of types and sizes best suited for the conditions to 

be met. Shoring must comply with all governing requirements. 

M. Provide wood curbs, required blocking and cants around openings through the roof indicated on architectural, 

mechanical and electrical drawings. Check drawings for trades and furnish for openings indicated. 

N. Installation of wood nailers for roof flashings should be installed in accordance with FM Global Loss 

Prevention Data Sheet 1-49, Perimeter Flashing. 



#165582



#165582 

SECTION 06200 

FINISH CARPENTRY 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Finish Carpentry as indicated by the Contract Documents. 


1. Rough Carpentry - Section 06100 

2. Metal Doors & Frames - Section 08100 

3. Finish Hardware - Section 08710 






3. American Wood Preservers Institute AWPI 

4. National Forest Products Association NFPA 

5. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SPIB 

1.03 MATERIAL GRADING 

A. The grades of the material used shall be defined by the rules of the recognized associations of the lumber 

manufacturers producing the material specified, but the maximum defects permissible in the specific grade 

shall not exceed the limitations of the American Lumber Standards. 

B. Defects expressly prohibited by this Section shall not appear in the material used, even if permissible in the 

grade specification. 

C. The sizes specified are nominal board measure dimensions unless otherwise noted. 


A. Meet requirements of Section 01340 - Submittals. 







C. Local/Regional Materials: 






cost only. 




D. Certification for Sustainable Forestry: 

1. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC): Provide letter of certification signed by lumber supplier. Indicate 

compliance with FSC "Principles for Natural Forest Management" and identify certifying organization. 


E. Submit copies of invoices for all wood materials identifying material cost not including labor. Invoices for 

FSC certified products shall identify FSC chain of custody (COC) number. 

F. Provide product data or MSDS indicating VOC emissions in grams/liter (g/L) for the following products: 




3. Clear wood finishes: Comply with SCAQMD #1113 identified in Section 01352

Section 06200 

Page 2 

4. Engineered Wood Products: Provide product data indicating products have no added ureaformaldehyde. 


A. Schedule deliveries to avoid delays and to prevent greater accumulations than can be suitably stored at the 

site. 

B. Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer's original, unopened labeled containers. 

C. Store to prevent damage from moisture and construction work. 

D. Store materials to allow easy access to construction. 

E. Stack materials in neat stacks, well off ground, properly covered to protect from bad weather and high water. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 


A. Running trim: Hardwood Lumber: AWI Custom Grade, natural birch species, quarter sawn, moisture content 

of 8%; with plain sawn grain for painted finish, or ¾” MDF in width shown on drawings. 

B. Millwork Substrate: 

1. Provide Forest Stewardship Council certified product. 

2. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available 

C. VOC emissions: Provide low VOC products. 







3.01 TRIMWORK INSTALLATION 

A. Install moldings straight, level and true in alignment. Rigidly fasten in place. 

B. Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. 

C. Prepare work installed in this Section by filling, cleaning and sanding as required to receive finishes specified 

in Section 09900. 

D. Exposed fasteners are not acceptable. 

3.02 CLEANING 


B. Clean adjacent material which has been soiled after installation of this work. 

C. Leave in neat, clean, unsoiled condition. 



#165582


SECTION 07110 

MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Membrane Waterproofing Work on the outside surfaces of foundation walls below grade as indicated 

by the Contract Documents. 

B. Work, items and requirements specified elsewhere that relate and/or apply to this Section include: 

1. Earthwork - Section 02200 

2. Concrete - Section 03300 

1.02 STANDARDS AND QUALITY 

A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of Standards listed: 


2. Federal Construction Guide Specifications FCGS 

3. National Roofing Contractors Association NRCA 

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS 

A. Applicator shall produce evidence that he has had at least five (5) years previous experience in applying 

satisfactory waterproofing by the specified system. 


A. Refer to Section 01340 - Submittals. 

B. Manufacturer's Literature - Copies of literature for products furnished. 

C. Shop Drawings: Include termination details and interface with adjacent construction. 

D. Provide proof of experience 

E. Sample of warranty to be issued 

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE 

A. Deliver materials to job site in sealed, undamaged containers. Each container shall be identified with material 

name, date of manufacture and lot number. 

B. Materials shall be protected from rain and damage, and kept clear from sparks or flame. 

C. Store membrane where temperature be maintained between 40° and 90°F. 

D. If stored outdoors, place Membrane cartons on raised pallets and cover completely. Protection Board should 

be protected from the wind. 

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS 

A. Install membrane materials in strict accordance, with safety and weather conditions required by manufacturer's 

product literature as modified by applicable rules and regulations of Local, State and Federal authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

1.07 WARRANTY 

A. Completed installation shall have warranty jointly and severally, on a single document, by the material 

manufacturer and applicator, against defects of materials and workmanship, for a period of five (5) years, and 

against water penetration for a period of two (2) years, beginning with date of substantial completion of the 

waterproofing system. 



A. Grace Construction Products 

B. W.R. Meadows, Inc. 

C. Polyguard Products, Inc. 


A. Bituminous Sheet Membrane Waterproofing System: Preformed rubberized asphalt laminated to polyethylene 

film with release paper facing, self adhering, minimum 60 mils thick, 36 inch wide rolls, conforming to 

following: 


#165582

Section 07110 

Page 2 

PROPERTIES TEST METHOD RESULTS 

Tensile Strength, Film ASTM D 412 4,000 PSI minimum 

Tensile Strength, Membrane ASTM D 412 250 PSI minimum 

Elongation, Membrane ASTM D 412 300 percent minimum 

Moisture Vapor Permeance ASTM E 96, Method B 0.1 perms maximum 

Puncture Resistance, ASTM E 154 40 pounds minimum 

Membrane 

Water Absorption, ASTM D 570 0.1 maximum 

Membrane 

B. Drainage Board: Three-part prefabricated geocomposite drain consisting of a formed polystyrene core covered 

on one side with polypropylene filter fabric. Must be able to drain at a minimum rate of 16 gpm per foot of 

width covered. 

PART 3- EXECUTION 


A. Prepare substrate to receive waterproofing: 

1. Remove protrusions flush with adjacent surface. 

2. Remove loose and spalled concrete. 

3. Patch holes and depressions with patching compound. 

4. Clean surfaces to remove dust, loose aggregate, debris, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could 

impair adhesion. 

5. Prepare dynamic cracks and joints: 

a. Remove loose and spalled concrete. 

b. Patch holes and depressions with patching compound. 

c. Rout out crack or joint to minimum dimensions of ¼ inch deep x ½ inch wide. 

d. Apply sealant to prepared crack or joint as specified in Section 07920. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF WATERROOFING 

A. Install waterproofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and NRCA Manual. 

B. Surface Conditioner: 

1. Apply to coverage rate required by manufacturer. Allow to dry until tack free. 

2. Cover only that area that will be covered with membrane in same day. Re-apply if left uncovered over 

24 hours. 

C. Membrane: 

1. Form ¾ inch fillet with liquid membrane on inside corners; extend minimum 6 inches in each direction 

at 90 mils thick. 

2. Cracks and joints in substrate: 

a. Cover static cracks with 9 inch membrane strip. 

b. Prior to covering joints between tilt wall panels, provide sealant over backer rod at joint and 

allow 48 hours to cure. Provide 1 ½” backer rod over caulked joint and apply 18” wide 

membrane strip centered on the joint. Truncate top of backer rod at an angle below the 

sidewalk. 

3. Cover inside and outside corners with minimum 12 inch wide membrane centered over corner. 

4. Apply membrane with minimum 2 ½ inch side and end laps; roll surface to eliminate wrinkles and air 

spaces. 

5. Terminate top edge of membrane at grade with metal reglet. 

6. Terminate bottom edge of membrane within 1 inch of bottom of wall; seal edge with trowel bead of 

mastic. 

7. Provide double membrane layer minimum 6 inches around penetrations; seal with mastic. 


#165582

8. If application is not complete at end of work day, seal exposed edges with mastic. 

Section 07110 

Page 3 


A. Prior to applying protection course, inspect for voids, ruptures, or other damage; repair any encountered. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE BOARD 

A. Apply drainage board immediately following the successful water test. 

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

C. Cut pieces from roll to required length. Cut to fit around penetrations and at perimeter. 

D. Secure sheets to waterproofing membrane with adhesive. Place with filter fabric to earth. 

E. Overlap and secure filter fabric on adjacent sheets. 

B. Complete backfilling as soon as possible after application of drainage board; within 7 days maximum. 



#165582


SECTION 07210 

BUILDING INSULATION 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Building Insulation work as indicated by the Contract Documents and as described herein. 


1. Light Gage Metal Framing - Section 05400 

2. Gypsum Wallboard - Section 09250 

3. Mechanical - Division 15 




2. National Mineral Wool Insulation Association NMWIA 

3. Federal Specifications Fed. Spec. 



B. Submit two samples of each type of insulation required. 

C. Technical Data: Submit technical data indicating thermal conductance factors of furnished insulation. 













only. 





A. Schedule deliveries to avoid delays and to prevent greater accumulations than can be suitably stored at the site. 

B. Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. 


D. Protect rigid insulation from direct sunlight with a light-colored opaque polyethylene film and ventilated to 

prevent excessive temperature. 



A. Insulation in Auditoriums: 

1. Owens Corning: #701 unfaced semi-rigid insulation in 1"or 2", thicknesses as shown on Drawings, refer 

to Finish Schedule. Install at both side walls and projection wall of each auditorium at locations shown on 

the drawings. This acoustical insulation product will comply with ASTM C553, Mineral Fiber Blanket 

Thermal Insulation, Type III. Nominal Density per ASTM C 167 of 1.5 pcf. 

2. Owens Corning: #703 ASJ faced semi-rigid insulation in 2" thickness. Install at all exterior walls of each 

auditorium. This acoustical insulation product will comply with ASTM C 612 Mineral Fiber Block and 

Board Thermal Insulation, Types IA, IB. Nominal Density per ASTM C 303 of 3.0 pcf. 


#165582

Section 07210 

Page 2 

3. Black Matt Faced Insulation: Provide in 1”, 2” or 3” thickness as shown on the drawings. Install behind 

projection screens on end and side walls of each auditorium at locations shown on the drawings. Product 

must comply with ASTM E136-95 and ASTM C423-90a. It shall have a density of 1.5 percent and R- 

value of 8.0 per inch. 

a. Acceptable Products: 

1. Johns-Manville Insul-Sheild Black 

2. Knauf EM Duct-Liner M 



5. Provide material with maximum amount of regional (within 500 miles) material feasible that achieves 


B. Batt Thermal Insulation: 

1. 3½" or 6" unfaced batt insulation, as shown on Drawings; refer to Partition Types. 

2. 2½” or 3½" unfaced batt thermal insulation for use above the ceiling on exterior side walls of each 

auditorium and within the metal stud furring at all other exterior walls unless noted otherwise. Product 

must comply with ASTM C 665, Type II, Class A, with flame spread of 25 or less. 

C. Insulation Fasteners: 

1. Hilti-X-IE Insulation Fasteners on masonry. Use similar screw method for dry-wall. 

2. Stick Pins and Speed Clips. Use for semi-rigid insulation on exterior walls of auditoria. Clips shall be 

sized to stick out only ¼” past insulation clip. 



A. Thoroughly clean surfaces to receive insulation free of dirt, dust, grease, loose mortar, laitance and other 

substances detrimental to bond of adhesives. 

B. Application: 

1. Install insulation in strict accordance with the best practice and in accordance with manufacturer’s 

directions. 

2. Where shown on drawings on outside face of drywall or block, attach with adhesive and/or stick pins. 

C. Batt Insulation: 

1. Place blanket insulation so that joints butt closely and corners and irregular spaces are closely fitted. 

Secure insulation with noncombustible ties and fastenings as recommended by the manufacturer. 

2. Cut and fit snugly around pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. Do not install insulation against or within 3 inches of 

recessed light fixtures, unless the fixtures are approved for such use and are so noted on the fixture 

schedule. 

3. Where blanket insulation occurs in a vertical or horizontal surface which has no backing on which to 

attach it, install wire mesh by tying to surrounding structure; or, tape the attachment flanges to the face of 

the metal stud prior to applying the interior finish. 

4. Install facings in contact with the finish material with joints and penetrations sealed according to 

manufacturers instructions. 

5. Maintain integrity of insulation to be insulated. 

D. Semi-Rigid Insulation: 

1. Install semi-rigid insulation to wall substrate with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive and 

mechanically fasten with specified fasteners. 

2. Lay out insulation neatly, butt together to moderate contact, fix or support adequately and fit accurately 

around obstructions, level and true with straight edge in every direction. 

3. Install boards in as large sizes as practicable. Reject damaged boards. 

3.02 CLEAN-UP 

A. Repair, or replace, work damage after installation. 

B. Remove accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, excess insulation, and containers. 



#165582


1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 

A. Preformed, prefinished metal roofing and flashings. 

B. Miscellaneous trim, flashing, closures, drip flashing, and accessories. 

C. Fastening devices. 

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. Section 05100: Structural Steel. 

B. Section 05500: Miscellaneous Metal. 

C. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry. 

D. Section 07620: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 

SECTION 07410 

PREFORMED METAL SIDING 


A. American Iron & Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Coldformed Steel Structural Members. 

B. ASTM A-653 & ASTM A924 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized). 

C. ASTM E-283-84. 

D. ASTM E-331-86. 

E. Spec Data Sheet – Galvalume Sheet Metal by Bethlehem Corp. 

F. SMACNA – Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 

1.04 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION 

A. The assembly includes preformed sheet metal panels, related accessories, corners, miscellaneous flashing and 

attaching devices. 

1.05 SUMBITTALS 

A. Before material is ordered, submit for Architect’s approval complete specifications of the respective 

manufacturer’s materials and systems that are proposed to be used including recommended changes in method 

of application. This should include installation or layout and sample warranty that is project-specific. 

B. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of panels, anchoring details, joint details, trim, flashing, and 

accessories. 

C. Submit a sample of each type of roof panel, complete with factory finish. 

D. Submit results indication compliance with minimum requirements of the following performance tests: 

1. Air Infiltration ASTM E 283-84. 

2. Water Infiltration ASTM E 331-86. 

E. Samples should be a 24 inch x 24 inch sample panel in specified color, indicated on drawings. 

F. Shop Drawings: 

1. Vertical Panel Work: Subcontractor and/or panel manufacturer to submit small scale layouts of panels on 

walls and roofs, and large scale details of edge conditions, joints, corners, custom profiles, supports, 

anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory and field assembly 

work. 

2. Horizontal Panel Work: Panel manufacturer to provide shop drawings and work in concert with the 

customer for shop drawing approval. This is necessary to allow the manufacturer to make the 

determinations on panel lengths, type of panel joint, corner size, design, method of fastening and flashing 

design to ensure product acceptance. 













#165582

Section 07410 

Page 2 


cost only. 





A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in Architectural Sheet Metal Products with ten (10) years minimum 

experience. 

B. No product substitutions shall be permitted without meeting specifications. 

C. Field measurements: Where possible, prior to fabricating prefabricated panels, take field measurements of 

structure or substrates to receive panel units where final dimensions cannot be established prior to fabrication. 


A. Upon receipt of panels and other materials, installer shall examine the shipment for damage and completeness. 

B. Panels should be stored in a clean, dry place. One end should be elevated to allow moisture to run off. 

C. Panels with strippable film must not be stored in the open, exposed to the sun. 

D. Stack all materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate ventilation. 

1.08 WARRANTY 

A. Paint finish shall have a twenty (20) year guarantee against cracking, peeling and fade (not to exceed 5 N.B.S. 

units). 

B. Galvalume material shall have a twenty (20) year guarantee against failure due to corrosion, rupture or 

perforation. 



A. Berridge Manufacturing Company located in Houston Texas, or equal. 

B. Substitutions shall fully comply with specified requirements under provisions of Section 01600. 

2.02 SHEET MATERIALS 

A. Prefinished Metal shall be Hot-Dipped Galvanized – ASTM A446-85 Grade C G90 Coating, A525-86 

24 Gauge core steel or prefinished Galvalume – ASTM 792-86 AZ-55. 

B. Unfinished Metal shall be Grade C Galvalume ASTM 792-86, AZ 55, “Satin Finish.” 

C. Finish shall be full strength Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer coating, applied by the manufacturer on a continuous 

coil coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 to 0.35 mil prime coat, to 

provide a total dry thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. Bottom side shall be coated with primer with a dry film 

thickness of 0.25 mil. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility, and longevity as specified by 

the Kynar 500 finish supplier. 

D. Strippable film shall be applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect the finish during fabrication, 

shipping and field handling. This strippable film must be removed before installation. 

E. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance requirements 


F. Provide material with maximum amount of regional (within 500 miles) material feasible that achieves 


2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Fasteners: Type suited to application, stainless or corrosion resistant coated steel. 

B. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07920. 


A. Fabricate panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, using wet method of assembly. 

B. All exposed adjacent flashing shall be of the same material and finish as the panels. 

C. Hem all exposed edges of flashing on underside, ½ inch. 

2.05 BERRIDGE FW-12 PANEL 


#165582

Section 07410 

Page 3 

A. Panels shall have 12” exposure with smooth face, 1-1/2” deep, with concealed fasteners and interlocking 

sidelap. 

B. Panels should be factory formed, 40’ maximum length. 

C. Attachment to metal supports with #10 x ½” TEKS screws at maximum spacing of 5’-0” on center or per local 

code, whichever is greater. 

D. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance requirements 


E. Provide material with maximum amount of regional (within 500 miles) material feasible that achieves 




A. Comply with manufacturer’s standard instructions and conform to standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet 

Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in order to achieve a watertight installation. 

B. Install panels in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines are plumb. 

C. Install starter and edge trim before installing roof panels. 

D. Remove protective strippable film prior to installation of panels. 

E. Attach panels using manufacturer’s standard clips and fasteners, spaced in accordance with approved shop 

drawings. 

F. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials. 

G. Protect installed panels and trim from damage caused by adjacent construction until completion of installation. 

H. Remove and replace any panels or components which are damaged beyond successful repair. 

I. Install trim to maintain visual continuity of system. 

J. Install sealants to prevent water penetration. Apply sealers per manufacturer’s instructions and specified in 


3.02 CLEANING 

A. Clean any grease, finger marks or stains from the panels per manufacturer’s recommendations. 

B. Remove all scrap and construction debris from the site. 

3.03 FINAL INSPECTION 

A. Final inspection will be performed by the Architect of Record or designee. 



#165582


SECTION 07420 

COMPOSITE METAL BUILDING PANELS 

1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Composite metal wall panel system. 

2. Metal support components. 

3. Flashings, trim, and accessories. 


1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 

2. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers. 


A. American Architectural Manufacturers Associationi (AAMA) 2605 - Voluntary Specification, 

Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on 

Architectural Extrusions and Panels. 

B. ASTM International (ASTM): 

1. B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 

2. B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wires, Shapes 

and Tubes. 

3. E330 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain 

Walls, and Doors under the Influence of Wind Loads. 


A. Design Requirements: Design system to withstand: 

1. Positive and negative design wind loads acting normal to wall plane in accordance with Building 

Code with deflection of any member not to exceed L/175, tested to ASTM E330. 

2. Movement caused by an ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F and a surface 

temperature range of 160 degrees F. 


A. Submittals for Review: 

1. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and details, size and layout of panels, trim, 

accessories, supports, and attachments. 

2. Samples: 3 x 3 inch sample panel in specified color. 

B. Quality Control Submittals: 

1. Certification: Manufacturer’s certification that composite building panel system meets specified 

design and performance criteria. 


1. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled 



3. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled content 







3. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials; include 



#165582

Section 07420 

Page 2 

4. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or manufactured in 

separate locations, provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage by 

weight of each component per unit of product. 


A. Design Concept: 

1. Requirements of Contract Documents that relate to composite metal panel system are intended 

to establish overall design intent and standard of quality. 

2. Structural design of system and details and methods of construction are Contractor’s responsibility. 

Size and thickness of members, location and type of supports and attachments, and details of 

functional and concealed components that are not of an aesthetic nature may be modified 

from that shown if a more efficient method can be used. 

3. Maintain design concept shown, without materially increasing member sizes and without altering 

profiles, finishes, and alignments. Make modifications from what is shown as may be necessary to 

meet performance requirements and coordinate work. 

4. Show deviations from requirements of Contract Documents on Shop Drawings. 

B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Minimum 3 years experience in work of this Section. 


A. Provide coverings and spacers to prevent panel-to-panel contact. 


2.01 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 

1. Alcoa, Inc. 

2. Alcan Composites. 

3. Centria. 

4. Mitsubishi Chemical America, Inc. 

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. 


A. Composite Metal Panels: 

1. Type: Aluminum composite composed of two aluminum sheets with polypropylene core. 

2. Face sheets: Aluminum sheet, ASTM B209, minimum 0.020 inch thick, alloy and temper best 

suited to application. 

3. Thickness: 4 mm. 

4. Finish: 

a. Exterior face: AAMA 2605, fluropolymer coating containing minimum 70 percent 

PVDF resins applied to sheets in coil form, refer to Finish Schedule for color. 

b. Interior face: Manufacturer’s standard painted finish. 



6. Provide material with maximum amount of regional (within 500 miles) material feasible that 

achieves performance requirements of this Section. 

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 or T6 alloy and temper. 


A. Fasteners: Type suited to application, stainless or corrosion resistant coated steel. 

B. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 079200. 


#165582

Section 07420 

Page 3 


A. Fabricate panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, using wet method of assembly. 

B. Conceal support framing behind panel returns, bent to manufacturer’s suggested radius. 

C. Rout slots in backs and edges of panels to receive support framing. 

D. Provide weep drainage network to route entrapped condensation to exterior. 

E. Provide trim of same material and finish as exterior panel faces to conceal fasteners and to trim panels 

at corners, terminations, and other conditions where required. 

F. Fabrication Tolerances: 

1. Panel flatness: 

a. Convex or concave bow, across panel short dimension: 1/16 inch maximum. 

b. Convex or concave bow, across panel length: 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum. 

2. Dimension of openings within panels: 1/4 inch. 

3. Panel width and length: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 

4. Variation from flushness of adjoining panels: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 



A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings. 

B. Install aligned, level, and plumb. 

C. Permanently fasten panels and trim in concealed locations. 

D. Install trim to maintain visual continuity of system. 

E. Install sealants to prevent water penetration. Apply sealers as specified in Section 07920. 

F. Allowable Tolerances: 

1. Maximum offset from alignment of adjacent members in same plane: 1/16 inch. 

2. Maximum variation from plane: 1/8 inch. 

3. Maximum variation from indicated position: 1/4 inch. 

3.02 ADJUSTING 

A. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions on panels and trim as directed by manufacturer. 



#165582


SECTION 07535 

FULLY ADHERED SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Roofing Work to produce a weatherproof, watertight covering complying with FM I-90 requirements 

for the locality as indicated by the Contract Documents. 


1. Miscellaneous Metals - Section 05500 


3. Sheet Metal & Flashing - Section 07620 

4. Sealants and Caulking - Section 07920 


6. Electrical - Division 16 


A. Meet requirements and recommendations of the applicable portions of Standards listed. 

1. National roofing Contractors Association NRCA 


3. Underwriter's Laboratories UL 

1.03 SUBMITTAL 

A. Before material is ordered, submit for the Architect's approval complete specifications of the respective 

manufacturer's materials and systems that are proposed to be used including recommended changes in method 

of application. This should include insulation layout, fastening pattern and sample warranty that is project 

specific. 

B. There shall be no deviations made from this specification or the approved shop drawings without the prior 

written approval of the specifier. Any deviation from the manufacturer's installation procedures must be 

supported by written certification on manufacturer's letterhead and presented for the specifier's consideration. 

C. If no changes in methods or materials are recommended within 30 days prior to application, it shall be 

understood that the Contractor is in agreement with the terms of these Specifications, and he will guarantee the 

work as specified herein. 

D. Provide details per manufacture indicated matching roof details per architectural plans. 

E. Provide example of warranty with submittal. 

F. FM Global submittals shall be issued to the attention to the architect. Where then architect will 

distribute to FM Global for review & approval. 

1. Provide FM approved Roof Assembly Number from RoofNav (www.roofnav.com). If the number is not 

known, submit the following information for FM review and a number will be provided; 

2. Materials (Manufacturers, model and size of insulation boards, vapor barriers, adhesives, membranes and 

any other components of the system.) 

3. Roofing system specifications, if approved as a system. 

4. Fastneing specifications, including the manufacturere’s name, model, and the proposed fastening density. 

5. Drawings and details. 

6. A complete Application for Acceptance of Roofing System FM Global Form 2688 will capsulate the roof 

covering information. 

G. All information is not provided then submittal will be marked as revise and resubmit. 


A. Applicator of the roofing and insulation shall be approved applicator by the manufacturer of the material. 

B. Workmen trained and skilled in this type of work shall be used. 

C. Schedule and execute work to prevent leaks and excessive traffic on completed roof sections. Care should be 

exercised to provide protection for the interior of the building and to ensure water does not flow beneath or 

wick into any completed sections of the membrane system. 

D. Upon completion of the installation, the applicator shall arrange for an inspection to be made by a non-sales 

technical representative of the membrane manufacturer in order to determine whether or not corrective work 


#165582

Section 07535 

Page 2 

will be required before the warranty will be issued. Notify the building owner seventy-two (72) hours prior to 

the manufacturer's final inspection. 

E. General Contractor to coordinate roof Pre-Installation Conference. 

F. Design and installation must conform to FM Global Data Sheet 1-28, Wind Design and 1-29 Roof Deck 

Securement and Above- Deck Roof Components, using FM approved products. 

1.05 WARRANTY 

A. Furnish and assign to the Owner (verify whether Cinemark or the Landlord) through the Architect the 

Manufacturer's 20 year Total System Marranty and Overburden Warranty. The warranty shall cover both labor 

and material necessary to effect watertightness. 


A. Cooperate with other trades on the job to supply and install materials as they are required with relation to other 

work. 

B. Make connections at points where sheet metal work connects to or interlocks with other materials. 

1.07 EXTENT OF WORK 

A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation of the 

fully adhered single ply roofing system including flashings and insulation as specified herein and as indicated 

on the drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's most current specifications and details. 

B. The roofing contractor shall be fully knowledgeable of all requirements of the contract documents and shall 

make themselves aware of all job site conditions that will affect their work. 

C. The roofing contractor shall confirm all given information and advise the building owner, prior to bid, of any 

conflicts that will affect their cost proposal. 

D. Any contractor who intends to submit a bid using a roofing system other than the approved manufacturer must 

submit for pre-qualification in writing fourteen (14) days prior to the bid date. Any contractor who fails to 

submit all information as requested will be subject to rejection. Bids stating "as per plans and specs" will be 

unacceptable. 


A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened containers or wrappings with the 

manufacturer's name, brand name and installation instructions intact and legible. Deliver in sufficient quantity 

to permit work to continue without interruption. 

B. Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions for proper material storage. 

1. Membrane in a dry, cool, shaded area in the original undisturbed plastic. Membrane that has been 

exposed to the elements for approximately 7 days must be prepared with manufactures recommended 

cleaner prior to hot air welding. 

2. Store curable materials (adhesives and sealants) between 60°F and 80°F in dry areas protected from 

water and direct sunlight. If exposed to lower temperature, restore to 60°F minimum temperature before 

using. 

3. Store materials containing solvents in dry, well ventilated spaces with proper fire and safety precautions. 

Keep lids on tight. Use before expiration of their shelf life. 

C. Insulation must be on pallets, off the ground and tightly covered with waterproof materials. 

D. Any materials which are found to be damaged shall be removed and replaced at the applicator's expense. 



A. Products of the following manufacturers are considered to be of the quality required: 

1. Carlisle 

2. Firestone 

3. Johns Manville 

2.02 MEMBRANE SYSTEM 

A. General Requirements: Roofing materials shall be supplied by one manufacturer and must be the best of their 

respective kinds and fully equal in material and method of installation to the following. 


#165582

Section 07535 

Page 3 

B. Membrane system shall be one of the approved manufacturers fully adhered roofing systems using a reinforced 

72 mil (min.), white colored membrane, highly reflective with 20 year “overburden” warranty. 


A. Roof System Components shall be equal to the following components: 

1. Roofing Membrane - A prefabricated fully adhered installation meeting FM I-90 requirements, highly 

reflective white single-ply reinforced, 72 mils thick (minimum). Follow Manufacturer’s physical 

specifications and minimum performance criteria, as well as regional wind load requirements. Minimum 

Solar Reflective Index (SRI) value of 78, or better than. 

2. Membrane components: including pipe and curb flashings must be factory prefabricated from the same 

fabric reinforced material used for the deck membrane. 

3. Termination Sealant: Compatible with materials to which membrane is to be bonded, conforming to 

Federal Specifications TT-598 and TT-S-00230C as furnished by manufacturer. 

4. Distribution Plates: Factory Mutual approved stress distribution plates formed from a minimum 24 

gauge G-90 CQ steel with a galvalume coating, or high strength polyblend. 

5. Water Cut-Off Mastic: Compatible with materials with which it is used and furnished by the membrane 

manufacturer. 

6. Night Seal: Compatible with materials on which it is used. 

7. Pitch Pocket Sealant: A single component, self-leveling sealant furnished by membrane manufacturer. 

8. Fasteners: To meet FM I 90 requirements with roof deck as furnished by the membrane manufacturer 

9. OMITTED 

10. Terminations/Edge Details: Manufactured from rigid exterior vinyl with slotted holes for securement 

and furnished by membrane manufacturer. Other terminations/edge details must be approved and 

warranted by membrane manufacturer. 

B. Roof Deck Insulation: Roof insulation shall be R-38 value rigid polyisocyanurate insulation core bonded to 

glass fiber mat on both sides, approved by U.L. and roofing manufacturer, and meeting FM-I90 requirements. 

Submit evidence of roofing manufacturer approval to Architect prior to installation. Provide tapered insulation 

(identical to rigid insulation used) at counterslope, as indicated on drawings. 

C. Related Materials: 

Nailers: 

1. Wood Nailers shall be pressure treated for rot resistance, #2 or better lumber. 

2. Nailer height to match total thickness of insulation. 

3. Nailer shall be firmly fastened to the deck @ 16" o.c., so as to resist a force of 200 lbs. per lineal foot in 

any direction. 

D. Roof Accessories: 

1. Roof Hatch: Type "S-20" roof hatch, 2'-6" x 3'-0" as manufactured by Bilco Company, New Haven, CT. 

06505. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

a. Hatch shall be complete with hinges, springs, handle, hold-open, draft seal, padlock hasp and exterior 

skirting. 

b. Provide access ladder as specified in Section 05500-Miscellaneous metals. 

2. Ladder Extender: Provide Ladder Up Safety post model LU-2 as manufactured by The Bilco Company. 

NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 

a. Install on fixed ladder below hatch cover in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

3. Roof Walkways: Provide and install manufacturers approved roof walkway pads at locations shown on the 

drawings, and where traffic will be concentrated (i.e. access doors, roof hatches, ladders, etc.) whether 

shown or not. 


3.01 ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES 

A. Installation of roofing materials shall not be started until other trades have completed the installation and 

testing of materials or systems which will penetrate the roof surface, requisite blocking is in place, and the 

surface of the respective roof deck is dry. 

B. Roof deck surface shall be smooth, level, and free of moisture or frost. Sharp ridges or other projections above 

the surface shall be removed prior to membrane application. 


#165582

Section 07535 

Page 4 

C. The roofing contractor shall examine surfaces and conditions before starting work, and shall make certain that 

required corrective work has been properly done. 

D. When the application of roofing materials is commenced, it will be assumed that the installer acknowledges 

that conditions in that area are satisfactory for his work to proceed, and he shall be responsible for corrective 

work which may be occasioned by his having started over an unsatisfactory surface. 


A. General Requirements 

1. Do not lay out or expose insulation on the deck that cannot be covered by membrane on the same day. 

2. In making field heat welds, make sure edges are clean and free of tar, mastic or other foreign items. 

3. Do not expose membrane and accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180 degrees Fahrenheit. 

4. Sealants and adhesives should be applied according to the manufacturer’s specifications. 

5. Proceeding with work will be evidence that surface to be roofed and flashed is approved by manufacturer. 

B. Protection of Roofing Surfaces: 

1. Storing, wheeling, or trucking directly on roof insulation or membrane surface is not recommended. 

Smooth, clean plywood or plank walkways, runways and platforms will be provided as necessary. 

3.03 APPLICATION OF INSULATION 

A. Insulation shall be installed as recommended by manufacturer. 

B. Insulation shall be loosely laid on the roof not exceeding 1/8" 

C. Edges of insulation shall be brought closely together and not forced into place. Where insulation joins vertical 

surfaces the insulation shall be cut in a neat manner allowing approximately 1/4" clearance. 

D. Insulation shall be neatly fitted to roof penetrations, projections, and nailers. Tapered and feathered insulation 

shall be installed around roof drains in such a way as to provide proper slope for drainage. 

E. Under no circumstances will the membrane be left unsupported in an area greater than 1/4" wide. 

F. Mechanically fasten perimeter insulation boards in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation for 

geographical location and system type, and as needed to meet FM-I90 requirements.. 

G. Mechanically fasten field boards with a minimum 5 approved fasteners and insulation plates for each 4'x8' 

insulation board, or a minimum of 4 approved fasteners and insulation plates for each 4'x4' insulation board, 

meet FM I 90 requirements. 

H. Install only as much insulation as can be covered with roofing membrane and completed before the end of the 

work day, or before the onset of increment weather. 

3.04 APPLICATION OF ROOFING AND FLASHING 

A. Membrane roofing shall be applied in strict conformance with the published recommendations of the 

manufacturer of roofing materials approved for use. 

B. OMITTED 

C. Secure membrane at changes in roof slope and penetrations in accordance with manufacturers requirements 

and instructions. 

3.05 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Test welds for continuity by running a screw driver along joints after weld has cooled. 

B. Periodically check cross section cuts at seams. 

C. Reweld any discontinuities. 


#165582

Section 07535 

Page 5 

3.06 CLEANING 


B. Surfaces of membrane roofing shall be protected from damage occasioned by other construction operations. 

C. When other work on the project has been completed, and there is no possibility of finishes becoming further 

damaged or discolored, remove protective materials and clean surfaces with water and other suitable cleaning 

material. 

D. Remove from the project site debris and litter resulting from the roofing contractor's work, and equipment and 

unused materials. 



#165582

Section 07610 

Page 1 

SECTION 07610 

METAL ROOF PANELS 



A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 

1. Furnishing and installation of all preformed metal roofing and walls, and accessories as 

indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 


C. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 

1. Structural Steel: Section 05100 

2. Metal Roof Deck: Section 05300 

3. Miscellaneous Metals: Section 05500 


A. PRODUCT DATA 

1. Submit Manufacturer’s technical product data, installation instructions and recommendations for 

each type of roofing and wall panel required. Include data substantiating that materials comply 

with requirements. 








d. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar value of recycled 

content product to total dollar value of assembly. 











B. SAMPLES 

1. Prior to ordering products, submit Manufacturer’s standard color Samples for 

Architect’s/Engineer’s selection. 

2. Prior to starting work, submit two 12” long Panel Samples showing shape and a representative 

color chip for Architect’s/Engineer’s acceptance. 

C. SHOP DRAWINGS 


#165582

Section 07610 

Page 2 

1. Show panel layout, trim installation, and panel attachment. 

D. SITE CONDITIONS 

1. Provide completed site condition form for the specified finish to suit project condition 


A. INSTALLER’S QUALIFICATIONS 

1. Installation of panels and accessories by installers with a minimum of 5 years experience on panel 

projects of this nature. 

B. MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS 

1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience supplying metal roofing/siding to the 

region where the work is to be done. 

2. Manufacturer shall provide proof of $2,000,000 liability insurance for their metal roof system and 

comply with current independent testing and certification as specified. See specific product 

literature for testing information. 

3. Panel manufacturers without full supporting literature, Flashings & Details Guides, Guide 

Specifications and Technical Support shall not be considered equal to the specified product. 

C. REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS 

1. Comply with CBC and local Building Code requirements if more restrictive than those specified 

herein. 


A. Protect against damage and discoloration 

B. Handle panels with non-marring slings. 

C. Do not bend panels. 

D. Store panels above ground, with one end elevated for drainage. 

E. Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent surfaces. 

F. If panels become wet, immediately separate sheets, wipe dry with clean cloth, and allow to air dry. 

G. Remove any strippable film coating prior to installation and do not allow it to remain on the panels in 

extreme cold, heat or in direct sunlight. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. MANUFACTURER’S PRODUCT WARRANTY 

1. Manufacturer’s standard coating performance warranty, as available for specified installation and 

environmental conditions. (Contact an AEP Span representative to determine actual warranty 

criteria.) 

B. CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY 

1. Warrant panels, flashings, sealants, fasteners and accessories against defective materials and/or 

workmanship, to remain watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for two (2) years 

following Project Substantial Completion date. 


2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER 

A. AEP Span, A Division of ASC Profiles Inc, 2110 Enterprise Boulevard, West Sacramento, Calif 95691 

800-733-4955 

Fontana: 10905 Beech Avenue, Fontana, California 92337 

Tacoma: 2141 Milwaukee Way, Tacoma, Washington 98421 


#165582

Section 07610 

Page 3 

B. PANEL DESIGNATION: 

1. HR-36® Roof and Wall. Net coverage 36”, rib depth 1-1/2” @7.2” o.c. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. PANELS 

1. Base Metal: 

a. Material: 

1. Steel conforming to ASTM A792 Zincalume®/Galvalume®, minimum yield 50,000 

psi, thickness 24 gauge. 

b. Protective Coating: 

1. Conform to ASTM A792, AZ50 (Zincalume/Galvalume). 

2. Exterior Finish: 

a. Zincalume® Plus protective coating. 

3. Color: 

a. Bare Zincalume® . 

B. FABRICATION 

1. Unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified herein, panels shall be full length. Fabricate 

flashings and accessories in longest practical lengths. 

2. Roofing panels shall be factory formed. Field formed panels are not acceptable. 

C. RECYCLED CONTENT 



D. REGIONAL MATERIALS 

1. Provide material with maximum amount of locally sourced (within 500 miles) content available 

that achieves performance requirements of this Section. 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 


A. EXISTING CONDITIONS 

1. Inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to a point where this 

work may continue. 

2. Verify that installation may be made in accordance with approved shop drawings and 

manufacturer’s instructions. 


A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS 

1. Verify prior to fabrication. 

2. If field measurements differ from drawing dimensions, notify Architect/Engineer prior to 

fabrication. 

B. PROTECTION 

1. Treat, or isolate with protective material, and contacting surfaces of dissimilar materials to prevent 

electrolytic corrosion. 

2. Require workmen who will be walking on Roofing Panels to wear clean, soft-soled work shoes 

that will not pick up stones or other abrasive material, which could cause damage or discoloration. 

3. Protect work of other trades against damage and discoloration. 

C. SURFACE PREPARATION 


#165582

Section 07610 

Page 4 

1. Clean and dry surfaces prior to applying sealant. 


A. PANELS 

1. Follow roof panel manufacturer’s directions. 

2. Install panel seams (choose one) vertically or horizontally. 

3. Lap panels away from prevailing wind direction. 

4. Do not stretch or compress panel side-laps. 

5. Secure panels without warp or deflection. 

B. ALLOWABLE ERECTION TOLERANCE 

1. Maximum Alignment Variation: 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 

C. FLASHING 

2. Follow manufacturer’s directions and architect approved Shop Drawings. 

3. Overlap roof panels at least 6 inches. 

4. Install flashings to allow for thermal movement. 

5. Remove strippable protective film, if used, immediately preceding flashing installation. 

D. CUTTING AND FITTING 

1. Neat, square and true. Torch cutting is prohibited where cut is exposed to final view. 

2. Openings 6 inches and larger in any direction: Shop fabricate and reinforce to maintain original 

load capacity. 

3. Where necessary to saw-cut panels, debur cut edges. 

3.4 CLEAN UP AND CLOSE OUT 

A. PANEL DAMAGE AND FINISH SCRATCHES 

1. Do not apply touch-up paint to damaged paint areas that involve minor scratches. 

2. Panels or flashings that have severe paint and/or substrate damage shall be replaced as directed by 

the Architect’s or Owner’s representative. 

B. CLEANING AND REPAIRING 

1. At completion of each day’s work and at work completion, sweep panels, flashings and gutters 

clean. Do not allow fasteners, cuttings, filings or scraps to accumulate. 

2. Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed. 



#165582


SECTION 07620 

SHEET METAL, FLASHING AND TRIM 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Sheet Metal work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 


1. Submittals - Section 01340 



4. Roofing - Section 07535 




1. American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association AHDGA 


3. Sheet Metal Contractors National Association Inc. SMCNA 


A. The applicator of this work shall comply with the recommendations of the SMCNA Manual. 

B. Workmen shall be craftsmen trained and skilled to do this type of work. 


A. Refer to Section 01340: Submittals. 

B. Submit shop drawings for sheet metal, other than standard indicated shapes, that is fabricated especially for use 

on this project. 

C. Show locations, markings, quantities, sizes and shapes, gauges, fastenings, anchorages, and provisions 

necessary for thermal expansion and contraction. 

D. Draw profiles, sections, and views at a scale large enough to permit checking for design conformity. 

E. Provide information of product compliance with FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49, Perimeter 

Flashing. 


A. Use means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect 

installed work and materials of other trades. 


A. Upon completion and acceptance of the project, furnish to the Owner through the Architect, a written 

guarantee. 

B. OMITTED 

C. Make connections at points where sheet metal work connects to or interlocks with other materials, particularly 

when roofing gravel stops and flashing work to masonry. 

1.07 WARRANTY 

A. Upon completion and acceptance of the project, furnish to the Owner through the Architect, a written warranty. 

B. Warranty items of work included in this Section for a period of two (2) years from the date of acceptance, 

against defective workmanship and/or materials. 

C. Defects resulting from faulty materials and/or workmanship during the guarantee period shall be replaced by 

the Contractor at his expense. 

D. This warranty shall be issued jointly by the General Contractor, the sheet metal applicator and the roofing 

applicator for the full 2 years. 



A. Coping: Paint grip galvanized steel for paint, 26 gage. 


#165582

Section 07620 

Page 2 

B. Galvanized Iron: 

1. Iron: 26 gage, ASTM A653/A653m. 

2. Galvanizing: ASTM AA653/A653m, hot-dipped, min. 1.25 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. 

3. Finish: Bonderized treatment to hold paint; MIL-T-490A; Armco "paint grip" or approved equivalent 

meeting specification. 

C. Solder: ASTM B32-95b, half tin and half lead unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer of the sheet 

metal. 

D. Provide strainer units for rain drainage work at outlets of gutters, conductor heads and overflow pipes. 

Fabricate units of minimum 0.062" dra., non-corrosive compatible wire or wire mesh, with 3/8" max. spacing 

of wires. Unit should be of a removable beehive design. 

2.02 FABRICATED PRODUCTS 

A. Flashing, Counterflashing, Gutters, Downspouts, Gravel Stops, Scuppers and Similar Items; Shop fabricate 

from zinc coated steel sheet to profiles and sizes shown and comply with standard industry details shown in the 

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA. 


3.01 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION 

A. General 

1. Workmanship shall be in accordance with the best practice. 

2. Make sections uniform, rigid and accurately fitted. 

3. Solder bead, or hem exposed edges. 

4. Examine surfaces that are to receive insulation, roofing and sheet metal before starting work. 

5. Correct defects that would prevent proper installation of sheet metal. 

6. Proceeding with work shall be construed as evidence that surfaces to receive sheet metal are satisfactory. 

7. Make allowances for expansion and contraction of sheet metal members. 

8. Separate dissimilar metals with two full coats of zinc chromate or bituminous paint. 

9. Conceal separations upon completion of work. 

B. Factory coping: Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Install manufacturer's 

concealed coping chairs spaced as recommended by manufacturer and provide concealed joint covers at butt 

joints. 

C. Mechanical and electrical equipment flashing furnished under a separate contract. 

D. Overflow Scuppers: 

1. Fabricate 26 gage metal to detail shown on Drawings. 

2. Attach on wall as detailed. 

E. Installation to be inaccordance with FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49, Perimeter Flashing and using 

FM approved products 

3.02 CLEANING 


B. Clean adjacent surfaces from soil, stain, and adhered material. 

C. Remove and replace damaged work that cannot be restored to original condition. 

D. Protect sheet metal work from damage by work of trades and separate contractors. This Contractor shall 

furnish protection as may be required. 



#165582

A 


SECTION 07920 

SEALANTS AND CAULKING 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Sealant and Caulking work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 


1. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300 

2. Concrete Wall Panels - Section 03411. 

3. Exterior Insulation and Finish System – Section 07240. 

4. Sheet Metal Siding, Flashing and Trim - Section 07620 

5. Aluminum Entrances and Storefront - Section 08410 



C. The storefront installer is responsible for all interior and perimeter joint sealant installation. 

D. Interior latex caulking shall be performed by painting subcontractor. 


A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards listed. 


2. Federal Specifications FedSpec 


A. Before ordering material, submit for the Architect's approval complete manufacturer's specifications of 

materials specified in this Section in accordance with Section 01340 - Submittals. 

B. Product data sheet or MSDS indicating VOC emissions in grams/Liter (g/L). 


A. Deliver and store materials in their original unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's label. 

B. Deliver, store, and handle all materials so as to prevent the entrance of foreign materials and damage of 

materials by water or breakage. 

C. Store materials to allow free access to the work. 

D. Schedule deliveries to avoid delay in the work. 

E. Protect materials from damage during storage. 

1.05 GUARANTEE 

A. Upon completion and acceptance of the project, furnish to the Owner through the Architect a written 

guarantee. 

B. Guarantee items and work included in this Section for a period of two years from the date of acceptance 

against defective workmanship and/or materials. 

C. Defects resulting from faulty materials and/or workmanship during the guarantee period shall be 

repaired or replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 

D. This guarantee shall be issued by the General Contractor and the applicator for the full two years. 



A. Dow Corning 

B. Pecora Corp. 

C. Sika 

D. Sonneborn Building Product, Inc. 

E. Tremco Manufacturing Co. 

F. Sherwin Williams Co. 


#165582

Section 07920 

Page 2 


A. Sealants 

1. Type 1 – Two part, self-leveling, polyurethane sealant; FS TT-S-00227E, 

Class A, standard neutral color to be approved by Architect. 

2. Type 2 - One-part, non-sag, low-modulus, polyurethane joint sealant; FS TT-S- 

00227E, Class A, Type II, color as selected by the Architect. 

3. Type 3 – One part, neutral curing, silicone sealant; FS TT-S-00230C, FS TT-S- 

001543A, Class A, Use T, color to match floor. 

4. Type 4 – One part, non sag, neutral curing, silicone sealant, FS TT-S-001543A, 

FS TT-S-00230C, Class A. 

5. Acoustical Sealant: equivalent to USG acoustical sealant. 

6. Sealants within the building envelope shall comply with emission limits outlined in 

Section 01352 IAQ management. 

Firm Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 

Dow Corning N/A N/A 790 791 

Pecora NR-200 Dynatrol 1-XL N/A 864 NST 

or DynaTred 

Sika Sikaflex-2c SL Sikaflex-15 LM N/A N/A 

Sonneborn SL2 NP1 N/A N/A 

Tremco THC-900 Spectrem 2 Spectrem 1 

or 901 Dymeric 

Sherwin Williams Stampede 2SL Stampede 1 White Lightning Silicone Ultra 

SW Shermax 

B. Caulking Compound (Interior use) 

1. One part acrylic latex caulk capable of being painted with latex or oil base paints; ASTM C834-95. 

Provide between plumbing fixtures and adjacent surfaces. Color of caulk for this application is to be 

white. 

2. Caulking within the building envelope shall comply with emission limits outlined in Section 01352 

IAQ management. 

C. Related Materials 

1. Primer: As required by sealant manufacturer for each type of working surface, 

having been tested for staining and durability on samples of actual surfaces to be 

sealed. 

2. Vertical Joint Backing: Closed-cell polyethylene joint backer rod as required by 

sealant manufacturer in writing to Architect. Select size that will cause an 

approximate 30% compression in joint. 

3. Horizontal Joint Backing: Round solid neoprene or butyl rubber, Shore A 

hardness 70. 

4. Expansion Joint Filler: Recompressed bitumen impregnated foam sealant; size 

of uncompressed material to be 3 times joint width in which to be used. 

5. Bond Breakers: Polyethylene tape, pressure sensitive adhesive. 

6. Solvents, Cleaning Agents, and other Accessory Materials: Recommended by 

sealant manufacturer in writing to Architect. 



A. Fresh concrete shall be cured 28 days before sealants are applied. 

B. Application of sealants shall be performed when the substrate temperature is 40 o F and rising. 

C. Do sealing on the exterior before applying dampproofing. 


#165582

D. Test adhesion to materials in the field prior to application. 

Section 07920 

Page 3 


A. Building joints shall be examined prior to application and conditions detrimental to achieving a positive, 

weather-tight seal shall be reported to the Contractor and the Architect. 

B. Openings, joints, or channels to be sealed shall be thoroughly clean, dry and free from dust, oil, grease, 

loose mortar, or other foreign matter. Do not use an air compresser to clean the joints. 

C. Surfaces with protective coatings with which the sealant will come in contact, such as new aluminum or 

bronze, shall be wiped with xylol, or a methyl ethyl ketone solvent to remove the protective coating and 

oil deposit that may be left on the metal surfaces. 

D. Where joints are deeper than 1/2", joint backing shall be used and packed into the joint to within 1/2" of 

the surface. Where joints are 3/4" wide, place the backing so that the depth of joint to receive sealant is 

one half the width. 

E. Concrete or masonry joint surfaces shall be wire brushed. 

3.03 APPLICATION OF SEALANTS 

A. Location of different types of sealants shall be as follows: 

1. Type 1 Polyurethane Sealant - To be used at exterior joints in horizontal surfaces, 

subject to traffic. 

2. Type 2 Polyurethane Sealant - To be used for exterior joints in vertical surfaces points 

indicated on the Drawings, around window and door frames abutting masonry on both 

interior and exterior of frames, and other locations specified elsewhere. Install color 

exterior caulk at panel joints after building has been painted. Caulk shall change 

colors as required to match adjacent panel field color. Do not paint caulk. 

3. Type 3 Silicone Sealant - To be used at auditorium floor pour joints and saw-cut 

control joints. 

4. OMITTED 

5. Acrylic Latex Caulk - At interior joints except around exterior door and window 

frames. Use to caulk interior trim prior to painting. 

6. Expansion Joint Filler - To be used in exterior paving joints, and in vertical and 

horizontal building expansion joints, as shown on drawings. To be used with sealant at 

joint surface. 

B. Mix materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Insert joint backing materials in excessively deep joints to within 1/2 the joint width of the surface of the 

joint. 

D. Insert expansion joint filler in accordance with new manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. Prime surfaces to be sealed with sealant primer in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's 

instructions. 

F. Materials must not be changed and shall be used as they come from the manufacturer's containers. 

G. Apply materials with gun nozzle of sufficient size to render a neat, smooth joint. 

H. Apply compound with sufficient pressure to completely fill voids. Leave joint slightly convex. Seal 

joints to be weather tight. 

I. Finish joints in inside corners with finger, using soapy water. 

J. Remove excess sealant and clean sealant from adjacent surfaces. 

K. Prevent damage or discoloration to adjacent surfaces. 

L. Complete sealing before finish painting is started. 

3.04 CLEAN-UP 

A. Clean adjacent materials which have been soiled, immediately after sealing the joint, and leave in a neat, 

clean, unsoiled condition. 

B. Remove excess materials and debris from the job site. 

C. Refer to Section 01710 -Cleaning. 



#165582



#165582 

SECTION 08100 

METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 

1.01 SCOPE 

A Provide Metal Doors, and Metal Frame work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 


1. Submittals – Section 01340 


3. Aluminum Entrances & Storefront - Section 08410 






2. National Board of Fire Underwriters NBFU 

3. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. UL 

4. Steel Door Institute SDI 



A. Conform to SDI Standard 100 for Steel Doors and Frames. 

B. Construct door frame members of labeled fire doors as approved by UL. Ratings for frames shall match doors. 

Locate label on the frame on the jamb midway between the top hinge and the head of the door frame. 

C. Construct doors requiring fire rating as approved by UL. Provide appropriate UL labels. In case of conflict 

between these Specifications and the labeling or other requirements of the authorities, conform to requirements 

of the authorities. 



B. Show elevations, locations, jamb condition, and methods of assembling. 

C. Indicate hardware installation data, thickness of metal and methods of anchoring, and details of construction. 

D. Note and mark sufficiently to indicate compliance with requirements of these Specifications. 


A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that any scratches or disfigurement caused in shipping or 

handling are promptly cleaned and touched up with a rust-inhibitive primer, and that materials are properly 

stored on planks, or dunnage, out of water, and covered to protect them from damage due to any cause. 

B. Doors shall have their wrappings or coverings removed upon arrival at the building site and stored in a vertical 

position, spaced by blocking to permit air circulation between them. 



A. Doors shall be made of commercial quality, level, cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A366/A366m-91, 

free of scale, pitting or other surface defects. Interior door face sheets shall be not less than 18 gauge zinccoated. 

Exterior door face sheets shall be not less than 16 gauge zinc-coated. Vault door sheets shall not be 

less than 14 gauge zinc-coated. 

B. Door and Window Frames for interior openings shall be made of commercial grade cold rolled steel 

conforming to ASTM A366/A366m-91, not less than 14 gauge zinc-coated at interior. Frames at exterior shall 

be not less than 14 gauge zinc-coated. Frame at Vault door shall not be less than 12 gauge. 

C. Louvers: Sizes as scheduled on mechanical drawings, inverted "v" type, 50% free area, material to match 

door. Door shall be factory prepared for louver. 

D. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance requirements 


E. Provide material with maximum amount of regional (within 500 miles) material feasible that achieves 

performance requirements of this Section,

Section 08100 

Page 2 


3.01 FABRICATION AND ERECTION 

A. Work of this Section shall be best grade of modern shop and field hollow metal known to recognized 

manufacturers specializing therein, whose products have UL approval. 

B. Contractor for hollow metal work may use his standard construction details provided they conform with 

Specification and Drawing requirements. Architect may waive minor detail in profiles in order to accommodate 

Contractor's Standards where they are not too far at variance from profiles shown. 

C. Execute work in strict accordance with approved shop drawings. 

D. Notify the General Contractor, in writing, of requirements relative to templates for finish hardware. Send 

notice well in advance of actual requirements. General Contractor shall promptly furnish schedule of Finish 

hardware to this Contractor, upon which the template requirements may be based. 

E. Hardware locations shall conform with standards set forth by NAAMM. 

F. Door Frames: 

1. Assemble frames in shop with corner, molds, returns, etc., neatly accurately, notched, mitered and welded 

to present smooth and true surface. 

2. Door frames shall be supplied with factory installed rubber bumpers, three (3) per strike jamb and two (2) 

per head for pair of doors. 

3. Frame reinforcement for hinges shall be 9 gauge, closer and lock reinforcements - 12 gauge, and 

reinforcements for other surface applied hardware - 12 gauge. 

4. Blind dust boxes shall be provided for door frame reinforcement and shall be standard with manufacturer. 

Boxes shall be not less than 26 gauge. 

5. Anchors for frames shall be welded strip anchors or adjustable tee anchors for masonry and standard stud 

anchors for drywall partitions. Provide 3 jamb anchors for each jamb. One for each additional 2'-0" in 

height above 7'-0". 

6. Frames to be anchored to previously placed concrete, masonry or structural steel shall be provided with 

anchors and fasteners for suitable design as shown on approved shop drawings. 

7. Removable Angle Spreaders shall be provided for door frames for shipment. Remove spreader after frame 

is anchored to the floor slab. 

8. Floor anchors: 

a. Floor anchors of 14 gauge minimum thickness shall be securely welded inside each jamb, with two 

holes provided at each jamb for floor anchorage. 

9. Door frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for fully templated mortised 

hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware 

supplier. Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates; drilling 

and tapping shall be done in the field. 

G. Hollow Metal Doors 

1. Make doors of materials described in paragraph 2.01A with honeycomb core construction for Interior, and 

polyurethane foam cores with a thermal break for exterior doors. 

2. Door faces shall be joined at their vertical edges by a continuous weld extending the full height of the 

door. Welds shall be ground, filled, and dressed smooth to make them invisible and provide a smooth 

flush surface. 

3. Size and thickness: Doors shall be of sizes and design indicated and shall be 1-3/4" thick unless otherwise 

indicated. 

4. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be closed with a continuous recessed steel channel not less than 16 

gauge, extending the full width of the door and spot welded to both faces. Exterior doors shall have an 

additional flush closing channel at their top edges, and a flush closure also at their bottom edge where 

required for attachment of weather-stripping. Openings shall be provided in the bottom closure of exterior 

doors to permit the escape of entrapped moisture. 

5. Edge profiles shall be provided on both vertical edges of doors as follows: 

Single-acting swing doors - beveled 1/8" in 2" 

Double-action swing doors - rounded on 2-1/8" radius. 


#165582

Section 08100 

Page 3 

6. Hardware furnished by the hardware contractor for single- acting doors shall be designed for beveled 

edges as specified in sub-paragraph 5 above. 

7. Hardware reinforcements: 

a. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled, and tapped at the factory for fully templated hardware 

only, in accord with the approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware 

contractor. Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, doors shall have reinforcing plates; 

drilling and tapping shall be done in the field. 

b. Minimum gauges for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows: Hinge and pivot 

reinforcements - 9 gauge. Reinforcements for lock face, flush bolts, concealed holders, concealed or 

surface mounted closures - 12 gauge. Reinforcements for other surface-mounted hardware - 15 

gauge. 

8. Reinforce and frame openings required for glazing and louvers. Provide glazing stops with countersunk 

flat head screws. Place removable stops for glazing and louvers on "inner" or room side of doors. 

9. Design doors for 1/8" clearance at sills, unless greater undercut indicated, 1/8" at head and lock jamb. 

Contractor to coordinate undercut with specified thresholds where applicable. 

3.02 SHOP FINISH 

A. Clean inaccessible surfaces of ferrous metals and coat with rust-inhibitive paint. 

B. Surfaces of doors shall be thoroughly cleaned and exposed surfaces shall be filed and ground smooth. Surfaces 

shall be given as phosphate treatment conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-C-490 and then be given one coat of 

baked-on rust-inhibitive primer. 

C. Non-ferrous metals shall not be given prime coat. 

3.03 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION 

A. Refer to Section 01710 - Cleaning. Clean doors and frames from soil and stain that would interfere with finish 

painting. 

B. Protect doors and frames from damage after they have been installed. 



#165582



#165582 

SECTION 08212 

PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Wood Door work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 



2. Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100 


4. Glass and Glazing - Section 08810 





3. National Forest Products Association NFPA 

4. National Woodwork Manufacturers Assoc. NWPA 


A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Qualified to affix each door with National Woodwork Manufacturer's Assoc. 

(NWMA) Quality Certification Stamp. 

B. Identify as to construction and manufacturer with a stamp, dowel, label, or other readily recognized, permanent 

mark on door. 

C. Testing Requirements: 

1. Bonding NWMA I.S. 1-78 

D. Allowable Tolerances: 

1. Size + 1/16". 

2. Maximum Warp or Twist: 1/4" 

3. Squareness: 

a. Square corners 

b. Maximum difference in diagonals measured on the face of door from upper right corner to lower left 

corner and upper left corner to lower right corner: 1/8". 


A. Refer and comply with Section 01340 - Submittals. 

B. Certificates: Certificate of compliance with fabrication and test requirements of NWMA I.S. 1-78. 

C. Manufacturers Instructions: Furnish installation and hanging instructions for doors, including fire rated doors 

where scheduled. 

D. Submit (4) samples of each Plastic Laminate color and finish required for Wood Doors. 

E. Certification for Sustainable Forestry: 




F. Submit copies of invoices for all wood materials identifying material cost not including labor. Invoices for 


G. E. VOC emissions: Provide low VOC products. 






Note: The submittals for the Wood Doors will not be reviewed until all required Plastic Laminates have 

been received. 

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE 

A. Deliver material to project site in manufacturer's original unopened protective wrapper.

Section 08212 

Page 2 

B. Manufacturer's name, brand name, size, thickness, and identifying symbols shall be clearly indicated on each 

door or wrapper. 

C. Deliver doors to building site after partitions and concrete are dry. 

D. Handle with clean gloves and do not drag doors across one another or across other surfaces. 

E. Store flat on level surface in clean, dry, well ventilated structure and cover to keep clean, but allow air 

circulation. 

F. Seal top and bottom edges of doors to be stored at site more than 7 days. 

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 

A. Do not subject doors to abnormal heat, dryness or humidity, or extreme changes therein. 


A. Provide written guarantee in accordance with Section 01740. 

B. Doors shall be guaranteed to provide satisfactory performance for a period of five years from the date of 

acceptance against defective workmanship and/or materials. Doors that fails to perform in accordance with the 

guarantee will be repaired or replaced, installed, at the Contractor's expense. 



A. Anton Cabinetry (817-460-8681) 

B. Eggers Industries 

C. IPIK Door Company 

D. Marlite 

E. VTI Industries 

F. Weyerhauser Co. 


A. Flush Doors: 

1. Quality Grade: Interior doors shall be premium grade solid core, Type PC HPDL-5 with 1/10" hardboard 

crossbanding as defined in the AWI Quality Standards, Section 1300. 

2. XD Auditorium plastic laminate doors, hinges, kickplates, and pull is provided by Cinemark and installed 

by GC. GC is responsible for all other door hardware. 

3. Provide Forest Stewardship Council certified product. 

4. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available to meet performance requirements 



6. Faces and Finishes: 

a. High pressure laminate on faces and edges. Apply edges prior to face application. 

b. Laminate: high pressure with min. 1/20"(.050”) thickness; factory machine and finish edges. 

Laminate color and manufacturer shall be as shown on the drawings; NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 

Firm Non Rated Rated 

Algoma PC-5 Novodor PC-5 Novodor FD 1/3 Hour 

Eggers P.B. P.B.-20 

Marlite AWI PC-HPDL w/ HB Cross AWI FD 1/3 w/ HB Cross 

Banding 

Banding 

Weyerhaeuser DPC-1Timberstrand LSL DFP-20 Timberstrand LSL 20 

Anton Custom Custom 

B. Factory Clad Doors: 

1. Traffic/impact door as manufactured by the Eliason Corporation; NO SUBSTITUTIONS. Door shall 

be Model SCP-8, 3'-0" x 7'-0" with 3/4" exterior grade solid wood core. 

a. Stainless steel kick and edge trim. 

b. 9" x 14" clear acrylic window with black rubber molding 

c. Finish shall be as scheduled on drawings. Hold bottom of door & frame 1" above finished floor. 


#165582

Section 08212 

Page 3 

C. Accessories: 

1. Louvers: Sizes as scheduled on mechanical drawings, inverted "V" type, 50% free area; door shall be 

factory prepared for louver. Paint as directed by Architect. 

2. Glass openings: Size 4”x60”, Anemostat FGS-75 vision frame. Provide with black satin finish. Factory 

prepared for glazing installation. 

3. Glass: sizes and location as scheduled with 1/4" nom. thick tempered glass. 

4. Edge Trim: Similar to DON-JO U-Channel 1298, stainless steel finish, height to be 84”, with “A” depth of 

1”. U-channels are to be fully adhered with adhesive & to be flush with the laminate. NOT to be installed 

on top of the laminate or with screws. 







3.01 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION 

A. Install in accordance with requirements of manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Doors shall be drilled and fitted to leave equal width stiles on each side and equal headrail and fit snugly 

without binding. Allowance shall be made when fitted so doors will close without forcing and to prevent any 

rattling with hardware cuts true and neat. Immediately after hanging doors, remove them and coat top and 

bottom edges with materials specified in Painting Section. 

C. Bevel lock edges of single acting doors 1/8" in 2". 

D. Allow 1/8" at jambs and head. 

E. Over threshold, allow 3/16" clearance above finished floor material. 

F. For openings without threshold, allow 3/8" above finished floor material. 

G. Doors shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned herein above, but which are required to make 

complete installation, shall be furnished under this Section. The grade and type of door shall be in keeping with 

the surrounding or adjacent materials as required to make a consistent job. The General Contractor shall verify 

finishes prior to ordering materials. 

3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN 


B. Rehand and replace doors which do not swing or operate freely, as directed by the Architect. 

C. Refinish or replace doors damaged prior to acceptance of the work. 



#165582


SECTION 08410 

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Aluminum Entrances and Storefront Work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 





4. Glass and Glazing - Section 08810 

C. Work Included: 

1. Glazing of storefront and entrances shall be under this Section and shall be performed in accordance with 

Section 08810 - Glass and Glazing. 

2. Sealing of storefront, including joints between storefront and contiguous material, shall be under this 

Section and performed in accordance with Section 07920 - Sealants & Caulking. 

3. Furnish and install hardware less masterkeyed cylinders. Cylinders will be supplied by the Hardware 

Supplier under Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 


A. Meet requirements and recommendations of the applicable portions of standards listed: 


2. National Association of Architectural Metal NAAMM 



B. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the requirements of the Supplementary General Conditions. 

C. Shop drawings include: 

1. Metals - kind and gauge. 

2. Members - sizes and shape. 

3. Bracing, Framing and Anchors - method and type. 

4. Finishes - respective types. 

5. Structural elements of building - size and relation to the members. 

D. Submit samples of materials involved showing actual colors and finishes. 

E. Submit aluminum samples in duplicate, one to be returned to manufacturer for color control, one to be retained 

by Architect for comparison on job. 













only. 






#165582

A. Schedule deliveries to avoid delay in the work. 

B. Deliver and store materials in their original unopened containers bearing the manufacture's label. 

C. Protect materials. 

D. Store materials to allow easy access to the work. 


A. Upon completion and acceptance of the project, furnish to the Owner through the Architect a written guarantee. 

B. Guarantee items and work included in the Section for a period of two years from the date of acceptance against 

defects in materials and/or workmanship. 

C. Defects resulting from faulty materials and/or workmanship during the guarantee periods shall be repaired or 

replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 



A. Products of the following manufacturers are considered to be of the quality required. 

1. U.S. Aluminum 

2. Oldcastle 

3. Kawneer 

B. Product substitutions shall be in accordance with Section 01600. 


A. Entrances 

Firm Type Stile Top Rail Bottom Rail 

U.S. Aluminum Wide Style 550 5” 5 ½” 10” 

Oldcastle Wide Stile 500 5 ½” 4 ½” 10” 

Kawneer Wide Stile 500 5” 5” 10” 

1. Corner construction shall consist of both sigma deep penetration weld and mechanical fastening. 

2. Glazing stops shall be snap-in type with neoprene bulbtype glazing. No exposed screws shall be required 

to secure stops. Stops on exterior side shall be lock-in tamper proof type. 

3. Door leaf shall be equipped with adjustable mechanism located in top rail near lock stile which will 

provide for minor clearance adjustments after installation. 

4. Provide with nylon pad setting blocks for glazing bead with offset "Levelizer" to allow adjustment of 

glazing. 





B. Storefront - (If noted on drawings.) 

Firm Type Size 

U. S. Aluminum 450 Center Glaze System 1 ¾” x 4 ½” for Party Room 

Oldcastle Series 2000 1 ¾” x 4 ½” for Party Room 

U.S. Aluminum 451 Center Glaze 2” x 4 ½” 

Oldcastle Series 3000 2” x 4 ½” 

1 Framing members, transition member, mullions, adapters and mountings shall be extruded of aluminum 

with alloy and temper consistent with the method of manufacture. These members shall be of 6063-T5 

extruded aluminum alloy (ASTM B221/B221m-95a, alloy G.S. 10A-T5). 

2. Screws, miscellaneous fastening devices and internal components shall be of stainless steel, or plated with 

corrosion-resistant materials of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are used. 

3. Glass framing members shall provide for flush glazing on sides with through sight lines, and no projecting 

stops or face joints. 


#165582

4. The system shall provide fully resilient settings for glass and panels by use of E.P.D.M. elastomeric 

gaskets on both sides of the glass. 

7. Provide the necessary miscellaneous steel reinforcing and anchors to adequately secure the storefront to 

withstand wind loads as required by local building code. 

8. One piece tube construction shall be used to frame entrances. 





C. Aluminum Glazing Channels: 

1. Glazing channels shall be equivalent to Blumcraft's C-7500 Ceiling Glazing Channel for 1/2" glass on top 

and sides; no channel at base. Medium bronze anodized finish. 

2. Provide complete with necessary gaskets, setting blocks, fasteners and reinforcing. 

D. Aluminum Finish for Storefront and Channels: 

1. Material shall be free of scratches and other serious blemishes and chemically cleaned. 

2. Exposed Aluminum surfaces shall be finished medium bronze anodized. 

3. The minimum coating thickness shall be 0.70 mil when measured per ASTM B244-79, and the density 

shall be at least 32 mg. per square inch when measured per ASTM B137-95. 

E. Hardware: Refer to schedule of location 

1. Suspension: 

a. P1: Pivots/Offset, per manufacture: Kawneer Top/Bottom & Intermediate Standard; U.S. Aluminum 

OP400 for Top/Bottom, & DH010 for Intermediate; Vistawall OP-6/OP-7 for Top/Bottom, & OP-11 

for Intermediate. Finish to match storefront. 

2. Function/Trim: 

a. PA: Passage: Best Cylindrical Lockset #93K-0-N-15N-S3-694; lever always operable, L3/694 

Medium Bronze. (Party Room Storefront Door located on the public side) 

b. PULLS: Storefront Door Pull Bars: Bollen Resources Series 48RL doorpulls, black satin finish. 

Provided by Cinemark and installed by GC. 

c. ED1: Exit Device with dogging, per manufacture: Kawneer Mid-Panel Exit Device; U.S. Aluminum 

Mid-Panel Exit Device; Oldcastle VIP1390, with NO key access. 

d. ED2: Exit Device – Mid-Panel Exit Device with dummy push panel, per manufacture. 

e. ED3: Exit Device with dogging, per manufacture: Kawneer Mid-Panel Exit Device; U.S. Aluminum 

Mid-Panel Exit Device; Oldcastle VIP1390, with keyed Best cylinder. Key to retract latch bolt on 

one door,finish to match storefront. Provide Best cylinder for one of the double doors. 

3. Closer: 

a. E: LCN 4041-DEL-EDA: surface mount with extra duty parallel arm and delayed action; finish to 

match storefront for all doors. Mount closer on either PUSH or PULL side of door as noted in the 

hardware schedule. 

b. HCO1: Handicap Automatic Door Opener Button. Manufactured by Curran Engineering model#CE- 

635-FM, 4 ½” or Equal. No Wireless. Leaf to receive automatice door opener, opener to be record 

USA 8100 series. Refer to drawings for location and if exterior push button is to be wall or pole 

mounted. 

4. Stop: 

a. FS: Floor stop: Rockwood #481 with 1-3/8" stop height, Satin Chrome US26D/652 finish, furnish 

with 1 1/2” expansion anchors. 

5. Weatherstripping, etc: 

a. TH: Threshold equivalent to Reese 4” #S239A, bed in sealant, Typ. 

6. Keying: 

a. Reference Section 08710. 


#165582

2.03 FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE Furnish hardware sets in the amounts indicated on the Drawings. 

SET 

NO. 

16A 

16B 

17A 

17B 

18A 

LOCATION SUSP FUNC./ 

TRIM 

Front Lobby Egress, 

Front Exit Corridor 

(double doors) 

Front Lobby Egress, 


Front Lobby Vestibule 

Exterior (double doors) 

Front Lobby Vestibule 

Interior (double doors) 

Front Lobby Vestibule HC 

Accessible Exterior 


CLOSER 

THRESH 

. 

STOP W/S REMARKS 

2-P1 ED1 2-E-PUSH TH No Door 

Pulls & No 

Key Access 

2-P1 ED3 2-E-PUSH TH No Door 

Pulls 

2-P1 ED1 

with 2- 

Pulls 

2-P1 ED2 

with 2- 

Pulls 

2-P1 ED1 

with 2- 

Pulls 

2-E-PUSH TH No Key 

Access 

2-E-PUSH FS No Key 

Access 

HOC1 TH No Key 

Access 

18B Front Lobby Vestibule HC 2-P1 ED2 HOC1 FS No Key 

Accessible Interior 

with 2- 

Access 


Pulls 

19 Party Room P1 ED2 E-PUSH FS No Key 

Access 

20 Promenade Exit 


2-P1 ED3 2-E-PUSH TH FS Key Access on 

one set of 

double doors 

NOTE: Provide fire rated hardware at all rated doors (refer to Construction Documents for door schedule). 



A. Workmen shall be skilled craftsmen trained to do this type of work. 

B. Members - roll or extrude as detailed and in accordance with approved shop drawings. 

C. Field check dimensions and work of other trades which affect the installation. 

D. Installation of materials constitutes acceptance of others work, defects in the work shall be corrected at the 

Contractor's expense. 

E. Set members plumb, true and straight square, and level, use longest lengths possible. 

F. Joints - minimum amount, miter mouldings, cut extrusions square, free from burrs, clips, filings, or tool marks. 

G. Exposed screws or fastening - will not be accepted. 

H. Dissimilar metals - separate with heavy coat of bituminous paint. 

I. Coordinate burglar alarm in entrances, if required, with Owner. 

J. Provide necessary bracing and blocking to the structure to adequately secure the storefront in place. 

K. Seal joints between framing and the building structure in order to secure a water tight installation. 

L. Complete installation to be water and weather sealed. 

3.02 CLEAN-UP 


B. Following installation, clean and remove stains, finger prints, excess sealants, tape, stickers, etc. 

C. Clean with plain water or a solvent recommended by the manufacturer. 

D. Abrasives or cleaning agents harmful to the aluminum, glass, hardware or surrounding materials shall not be 

used. 



#165582


SECTION 08625 

TRANSLUCENT WALL SYSTEM 


A. The General Conditions of the Contract, including Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 – General 

Requirements, apply to the work of this Section. 

1.02 WORK INCLUDED 

A. Design, manufacture and installation of translucent insulating system. An assembly of extruded Nano-cell 

polycarbonate glazing panels incorporated into a complete aluminum framed system that has been tested and 

warranted by the manufacturer as a single source system. 

B. All anchors, brackets, and hardware attachments necessary to complete the specified structural assembly, 

weatherability and water-tightness performance requirements. All flashing up to but not penetrating adjoining 

work are also required as part of the system and shall be included. 

C. Trained factory and authorized labor with supervision to complete the entire panel installation. 

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 

A. Section 03300: Structural Concrete. 

B. Section 03411: Concrete Wall Panels. 

C. Section 05100: Structural Steel. 

D. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry. 

E. Section 07535: Roofing. 

F. Section 07620: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 

G. Section 07920: Sealants and Caulking. 


A. Translucent wall system must be evaluated and listed by recognized building code authorities: International 

Council Evaluation Service Inc. (ICC-ES) and SBCCI-Public Safety Testing and Evaluation Services, Inc. 

B. Material and Products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the 

manufacture of skylights using polycarbonate (not glass) panel systems for a period of at least ten (10) years. 

Manufactures shall provide a list of at least ten (10) projects having been in place a minimum of ten (10) years, 

with similar size, scope, climate and type. 

C. Erection shall be by a factory-approved installer which has been in the business of erecting similar material for 

at least five (5) consecutive years and can show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar 

scope, size and type. 

D. The manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and fabrication of the complete panel system, and 

will ensure that it fully meets the requirements of this specification. 

E. Approved manufacturers: All manufacturers acceptable for use on this project under this section must be 

approved prior to bid. Manufactures must submit evidence of compliance with all performance criteria 

specified herein. This evidence must include proof of conformance and test reports as specified below. Any 

exceptions taken from this specification must be noted on the approval request. If no exceptions are noted and 

approval is given, product performance will be as specified. Should non-compliance be subsequently 

discovered, the previously given approval will be invalidated and use of the product on the project will be 

disallowed. Requests for approval, with all appropriate submittal data and samples must be received no less 

than six (6) days prior to bid date. 

1.05 SUMBITTALS 

A. Submit shop drawings and color samples in accordance with Section 01340. 

B. The manufacturer shall submit written guarantee accompanied by substantiating data, stating that the products 

to be furnished are in accordance with or exceed these specifications. 

C. The manufacturer shall submit certified test reports made by an independent organization for each type and 

class of panel system. Reports shall verify that the material will meet all performance requirements of this 

specification. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if they are current and indicative of products 

used on this project. Test reports required are: 

1. Self Ignition Temperature (ASTM 1929-3) 

2. Smoke Density (ASTM D-2843) 

3. Burning Extent (ASTM D-635) 


#165582

Section 08625 

Page 2 

4. Interior Flame Spread (ASMT E-84) 

5. Color Difference (ASTM D-2244-85) 

6. Weathering (ASTM D-4364) 

7. Yellowing Index (ASTM D-1925) 

8. Weathering Evaluation before and after exposure to 300° F, 25 minutes include Light 

Transmission, Color Change, and Yellowing Index, per ASTM E-1175, ASTM D-2244 and ASTM- 

D1925 respectively. 

9. Shatter Resistance (ASTM D-3841/SPI Method B) 

10. Large Missile Test – Impact Resistance per SFBC PA 201-94 

11. Insulation “U” Factor per NFRC100 test methods and procedures 

12. Water Penetration (ASTM E-331) 

13. Load Bearing Capability (ASTM E-330-97) 

14. OSHA Life Safety Fall and Walk Through Protection for 300 lb. point load per STD 29 CFR 1910.23 

(e)(8) 

15. OSHA Life Safety STD 29 CFR – Impact loading by blunt object of 500 ft. lbs. per ASTM E-695-03 

16. Performance of exterior windows, curtain walls when impacted by wind-borne debris per ASTM E1996- 

02, Level D 

17. IES LM-44-90 Testing for Total and Diffused Reflectomerty (Diffused Light Transmission) 

D. Maintenance data: The manufacturer shall provide recommended maintenance procedures, schedule of 

maintenance and materials required or recommended for maintenance. 

E. Recycled Content: 






1.06 WARRANTY 

A. Provide a single source wall light system manufacturer warranty for glazing panels and framing system – third 

party warranty for glazing panels shall not be acceptable. 

B. Provide manufacturer ten (10) year warranty to include: 

1. Change in light transmission of no more than 6% per ASTM D-1003 

2. No delamination of panel affecting appearance, performance or structural integrity of the panel or the 

system. 

3. Thermal aging – the light transmission and the color shall not change after exposure to heat of 300° F 

for 25 minutes (when measured per ASTM D-1003 and ASTM-D2244 respectively). 


2.01 TRANSLUCENT INSULATING INTERLOCKING NANO-CELL GLAZING TECHNOLOGY 

A. The design and performance criteria of this job are based on products manufactured by CPI Daylighting, Inc. 

(phone 800-759-6985, fax 847-816-0425), website www.cpidaylighting.com. and as locally represented by 

Conner-Legrand, Inc. (phone 800-455-8810) or equal. 

B. Substitute products must be proven equal and approved by Architect prior to the published bid date per 

specification section 01600. Fiberglass skins and wide cell polycarbonate panels are unacceptable. 

2.02 TRANSLUCENT PANEL PERFORMANCE 

A. Nano-Cell panel technology – Longevity and Resistance to Buckling and Pressure: 

1. Translucent Panels must be of Nano-Cell technology. Wide Cell technology (cell size exceeding 0.18”) 

shall not be acceptable. 

2. The translucent panel shall include an integral extruded Nano-Cell structural core. The panel’s exterior 

skins shall be connected with supporting continuous ribs, perpendicular to the skins, at a spacing not to 

exceed 0.18” (truss-like construction). In addition, the space between the two exterior skins shall be 

divided by multiple parallel horizontal surfaces, at a spacing not to exceed 0.18”. 

B. Appearance: 

1. Panel assembly thickness shall be a minimum of 0.47” (12mm) single panel with exposed interlocking 


#165582

Section 08625 

Page 3 

2” extruded aluminum structural battens. 

2. Panel Width: Shall not exceed 2’ to ensure best performance for wind uplift, vibration, oil canning and 

visual appearance. Panels over 2’ wide will not be approved. 

3. The panels shall be uniform in color with an integral Nano-Cell core. In a cross section, the core shall 

be constructed of Nano-Cell honeycomb cells not to exceed 0.18” x 0.18”. The appearance should be 

equal to CPI’s Pentaglas 12 Panel. Wide cell panel configurations greater than 0.18” x 0.18” shall not 

be accepted. 

C. Thermal and solar performance: 

1. Insulation Value (“U”) per NFRC 100 test methods and procedures – 0.48 

2. Light Transmission (L.T. %) 64% per ASTM E972, E1175 or D-1003 

3. Solar Transmission (S.T) 0.78 per ASTM E1084 at “normal” (90°) incidence angle 

4. Color: Green 

D. Translucent Panel Joint System: 

1. Panel shall be extruded in one single formable length. Maximum panel width shall not exceed 2’. 

Transverse connections are not acceptable. 

2. The panels should be manufactured with grip-lock double tooth upstands that are integral to the unit. 

The upstands shall be 90° to the panel face (standing seam dry glazed concept). Welding or gluing of 

upstands or standing seam is not acceptable. 

3. The 2” battens shall have a grip-lock double tooth locking mechanism to ensure maximum uplift 

capability. Battens are to face the exterior side of the panel, for a raised batten exterior appearance. 

4. The metal retention clip shall be configured with a 0.4” wide top flange that extends continuously 

across the web from end to end and from side to side. To allow a safety factor, the clip must be tested to 

meet a wind uplift standard of 90 psf per ASTM E330-97. 

5. The panel system batten connection shall meet wind load performance requirements without 

deterioration after 100 months of local outdoor exposure. This performance must be demonstrated by 

providing independent lab comparison test reports for a weathered versus a new panel assembly. As a 

standard for all systems, provide test reports for a 16mm panel assembly, 6’ wide x 12’ long that have 

been exposed to local weather conditions for 100 months per ASTM E-330-97 for loading, ASTM E 

1886-97 for cycling and ASTM E-1996-02 for missile impact at design load of 70 psf. 

6. Water Penetration: No water penetration of the panel U/H joint connection length at test pressure of 

10.0 psf per ASTM E-331. 

7. Free movement of the panels shall be allowed to occur without damage to the weather tightness of the 

completed system. 

E. Flammability: 

1. The exterior and interior faces shall be an approved light transmitting panel with a CC1 fire rating 

classification per ASTM D-635. Flame spread no greater than 25 per ASTM E-84. Smoke density no 

greater than 75 per ASTM D2843 and a minimum self-ignition temperature of 1000°F per ASTM 1929. 

The panel shall be self-extinguishing. 

2. Interior flame spread classification of Class I per ASTM E84. 

F. Impact Resistance – the panels shall pass the following tests: 

1. ASTM D-3841/SPI – Impact and Shatter Resistance of 200 ft. lbs. 

2. SFBC – PA 201-94, impact resistance of 350 ft. lbs. 

3. ASTM E-1996-02 – Must comply with standard specification for performance of exterior windows or 

curtain walls when impacted by windborne debris at level D and after cyclic wind loading at the specified 

design load. 

G. OSHA Life Safety Standards 29 CFR 1926.502 (i)(2) and 29 CFR 1910.23(e)(8) 

1. Panel assembly shall withstand impact loading by blunt object of 500 ft. lbs. per ASTM E695-03 

2. Panel assembly shall withstand a 300 lb. point load at 5’ span per OSHA standard 29CFR 1910 23e8. 

H. [Hurricane Zone Panel System shall meet wind uplift resistance requirements per ASTM E1996 and/or local 

test protocols.] 

I. Cyclic Wind Load – Translucent Panels shall be tested for cyclic wind loads and impact resistance per ASTM 

E 1886-97 and ASTM E-1996-02 at test load to verify the positive and negative design loads and Level D 

impact. 

J. Weatherability: 

1. The light transmission as measured by ASTM D1103 shall not decrease more than 6% over ten (10) 


#165582

Section 08625 

Page 4 

years, or after exposure to temperature of 300°F for 25 minutes (thermal aging). 

2. The panel shall be tested by recognized laboratory for weathering evaluation per ASTM D4364-84 

(EMAQUA, UNBACKED), after exposure to minimum concentrated natural sunlight radiation of 56000 

MJ/M 2 (1540 MJ/M 2 of UV, 200-385 N.M). The panel shall not change in color more than 4.0 units 

Delta E, 4.0 units Delta L and Delta B. 

3. The panel shall not change color more than 4.0 units (Delta E by ASTM D2244) after 60 months outdoor 

weather in projection location determined by an average of at least two samples. 

4. Thermal Aging - the interior and exterior faces shall not change color in excess of 0.75 Delta E by 

ASTM D2244 and shall not darken more than 0.3 units (Delta L by ASTM D2244) and 0.2 units Delta Y 

(YI) by ASTM D1925 and shall not show cracking or crazing when exposed to 300°F for 25 minutes. 

5. The faces shall not become readily detached when exposed to temp of 300°F and 0°F for 25 minutes. 

6. Panels shall consist of a polycarbonate resin with a permanent, co-extruded, ultraviolet protective layer. 

Post-applied coating or films of dissimilar materials are unacceptable. Fiberglass skins are unacceptable. 

7. UV Maintenance – The system shall require no scheduled re-coating to maintain its performance or for 

UV protection. 

8. Panel shall be factory sealed at the sill to restrict dirt ingress. 

K. Diffused Light Transmission – As a reference for measuring the quality of the diffused light through the panel 

assembly, the IES (Illuminating Engineering Societies) LM-44-1190 Approved Method for Total and Diffuse 

Reflectometry procedure shall be used. Results for a Clear Pentaglas/Single Glazed panel assembly shall be 

provided as a base standard for comparison. For Pentaglas/Single Glazed systems with total illuminator flux 

output at 60 lumens, diffused light transmission requirements are: 

Zonal Zone % of transmittance from the max. total lumens transmitted through the panels 

0-30 66.0 

0-40 78.5 

0-60 94.0 

0-90 100.0 

L. The minimum ration of the panel weight to the panel thickness should be: For 0.47” thick Pentaglas 12 panel, 

0.54 lb. per sf. 

2.03 METAL FRAME STRUCTURE 

A. To meet ANSI/ASCE 7-95 building design load for design criteria of wind and snow load, refer to structural 

drawings. 

B. The Translucent wall system framing is designed to be self-supporting between the support constructions. The 

deflection of the Structural framing members in a direction normal to the plane of the glazing, when subjected 

to a uniform load deflection, shall not exceed L/60 for the unsupported span. The translucent wall system will 

impose reactions to the support construction. All adjacent and support construction must support the transfer of 

all loads including horizontal and vertical, exerted by the translucent wall system. Design or structural 

engineering services for the supporting structure or building components not included in the skylight scope are 

not included under this section. 

C. Water Penetration: The Metal Framed Skylight shall allow no water penetration at a minimum differential static 

pressure of 6.24 lbs. per sq. per AAMA 501-94 Pressure Difference Recommendations and as demonstrated by 

prior testing of typical framing sample per ASTM E-331. 

D. Water test of Metal Frame Structure shall be conducted according to procedures in AAMA 501.2. 

E. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance requirements 


2.04 METAL MATERIALS 

A. Extruded Aluminum shall be ANSI/ASTM B221; 6063-T6 or 6005-T5. 

B. Flashing: 

1. 5005 H34 aluminum 0.04” minimum thickness. 

2. Sheet metal flashings/closures/claddings are to be furnished shop formed to profile when lengths exceed 

10 ft. in nominal 10-ft. lengths. Field trimming of the flashing and field forming the ends is necessary to 

suit as-built conditions. Sheet metal ends are to overlap at least 6-in. to 8-in., set in a full bed of sealant 

and riveted if required. 


#165582

Section 08625 

Page 5 

C. All Fasteners for aluminum framing to be stainless steel or cadmium plated steel, excluding the final fasteners 

to the building. 

D. All exposed aluminum finish shall be standard color Bronze Anodize. 



A. General Contractor to verify when structural support is ready to receive all work in this section and to convene 

a Pre-Installation Conference at least one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Attendance required 

of General Contractor, skylight installer and all parties directly affecting and effected by the work of this 

section. 

B. All submitted opening sizes, dimensions and tolerances are to be field verified by General Contractor unless 

otherwise stipulated. 

C. Installer to examine area of installation to verify readiness of site conditions. Notify General Contractor about 

any defects requiring correction. Do not work until conditions are satisfactory. 


A. Install components in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop drawings. Use 

proper fasteners and hardware for material attachments as specified. 

B. Use methods of attachment to structure allowing sufficient adjustment to accommodate tolerances. 

C. Remove all protective coverings on panels immediately after installation. 

3.03 CLEANING 

A. Follow manufacturer’s instructions when washing down exposed panel surfaces using a solution of mild 

detergent in warm water that is applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. 

B. Follow strict panel manufacturer guidelines when removing foreign substances from panel surfaces requiring 

mineral spirits or any solvents that are acceptable for use. 

C. Installers shall leave panel system clan at completion of installation. Final cleaning is by other upon completion 

of project, following manufacturer’s cleaning instructions. 



#165582


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Finish Hardware work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 


1. Metal Doors & Frames - Section 08100 

2. Plastic Faced Wood Doors - Section 08212 

3. Aluminum Entrances & Storefront - Section 08410 



1. Builder's Hardware Manufacturer's Association BHMA 

2. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. UL 

3. National Board of Fire Underwriters NBFU 

4. National Fire Protection Association NFPA 

SECTION 08710 

FINISH HARDWARE 



B. Submit electronic hardware schedules with all information necessary to completely describe hardware for review 

and comments by the Architect. 

NO ALTERNATES WILL BE ACCEPTED FOR FINISH HARDWARE. 

C. Templates and schedules shall be furnished to manufacturers of items that will be fitted with finish hardware in 

ample time to avoid delays in the work. 

D. With the hardware submittal, identify the name and phone number of the local Best Lock Corporation Supplier. 

E. Recycled Content: 

1. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of 

product. 




F. Local/Regional Materials: 






only. 

4. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or manufactured in separate locations, 

provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage by weight of each component per 



A. Schedule deliveries to avoid delays in the work. 

B. Store hardware items to prevent damage. 


2.01 MATERIALS: Refer to schedule for location 

A. Suspension 

1. 3BB: 1 1/2 pairs Bommer BB5006 4½x4½, full mortise, coated black at auditorium entrance, exit and 

screen doors. Finish shall be stainless steel at all other doors. 

2. 3BB-N: same as Bommer BB5006, with non-removable pin, coated black at auditorium entrance doors. 

Finish shall be stainless steel at all other doors. 

3. 4BB: 3 pairs Bommer BB5006 4½x4½, full mortise, coated black at auditorium entrance, exits & screen 

doors. Finish shall be stainless steel at all other doors. 

4. CH: Half Surface Contious Hinge, Stanley 663HD, Aluminum clear coated finish, (for fire doors). 

B. Function/Trim 


#165582


#165582 

Section 08710 

Page 2 

1. MA: Maintenance: Best Cylindrical Lockset #93K-7-D-15L-S3-652 with wrought escutcheon; outside 

lever always rigid, US26D/652 Satin Chrome. 

2. PA: Passage: Best Cylindrical Lockset #93K-0-N-15N-S3-652; lever always operable, US26D/652 Satin 

Chrome. 

3. CL: Securitron “SABL” series keypad, part number SABL-10B-BEST (stand alone battery lock with 

US26D/652 Satin Chrome finish and an interchangeable Best keyway). 

4. PR: Privacy: Best Cylindrical Lockset 93K-0-L-15L-S3-652; lever locked by turn knob inside, 

US26D/652 Satin Chrome. 

5. PULLS/PUSH: Auditorium Door Pull Bars and push plates: Bollen Resources Series 48RL doorpulls, black 

finish, blank metal plate on push side, mounting with beauty rings for the thru bolts. Provided by 

Cinemark and installed by GC. 

6. PEEP: Door Viewers: Defender #U-9917; Stainless Steel finish. 

7. E1: Von Duprin 88 Series, Function 88L-F-BE. Rim Type with lever style #06, always operable, Satin 

Chrome US26D/652 finish. Fire rated. (Single Fire Rated Aud. Entrances). 

8. E2: Von Duprin 88 Series, Function 88L-F-BE at both leaves with 268 strike and 9954 removable 

mullion, with keyed Best cylinder. Rim type with lever style #06, always operable, Satin Chrome 

US26D/652 finish. Fire rated. (Dbl. Fire Rated Aud. Entrance). 

9. E3: Von Duprin 88 Series, Function 88EO. Rim Type with no outside trim, Satin Chrome US26D/652 

finish. (Single Aud. Exterior and Projection Level Single Exits). 

10. E4: Von Duprin 88 Series, Function 88EO at both leaves with 264 strike and 4954 removable mullion 

with keyed Best cylinder. Rim Type with no outside function, Satin Chrome US26D/652 finish. 

Provide Best cylinder for one of the double doors. (Dbl. Aud. Exterior Exits). 

11. E5: Von Duprin 88 Series, Function 88NL. Rim Type with lever style #17 and key to retract latch bolt, 

Satin Chrome US26D/652 finish. Provide Best Cylinder. (Single General Exit). 

12. E6: Von Duprin 88 Series, Function 88EOx88NL with 264 strike and 4954 removable mullion with 

keyed Best cylinder. Rim type with pull lever style #17 and key to retract latch bolt on one door, 

Satin Chrome US26D/652 finish. Provide Best cylinder for one of the double doors. (Dbl. General 

Exit). 

13. E7: Von Duprin – Firerated Push exit for both sides with positive latch, Satin Chrome US26D/652 finish. 

(for fire doors). 

C. Closer 

1. R: LCN 4041-DEL; provide with parallel arm where stop face mounting is required; Black L1/693 Finish for 

all doors. Door shall be operable with a maximum effort of 5 lbs. for interior doors and 8.5 lbs. for exterior 

doors. Mount closer on either PUSH or PULL side of door as noted in the hardware schedule. 

2. E: LCN 4041-DEL-EDA: provide with extra duty parallel arm and delayed action; black finish L1/693 for all 

doors. Door shall be operable with effort as described above. (This is required at all exterior doors.) 

3. F: LCN 4310ME Series; black L1/693 finish for all doors. (This is required for fire doors). When required 

to use on auditorium entry doors provide LCN 4310ME-B80 along with floor stop FS. 

D. Protection: 

1. KP1: Ives 8400 Series Kickplate (9” x 34”), Satin Chrome US26D/652 finish. 

2. KP2: Ives 8400 Series Kickplate (48” x 34”), Satin Chrome US26D/652 finish . 



5. KP5: Auditorium & Restroom Kick Plates & Pulls: Bollen Resources , black finish. Provided by Cinemark, 

installed by GC. 

6. KP6: Ives 8400 Series Kickplate (9”x34”), Black L1/693 finish. Auditorium Exit Doors. 

7. DC: Drip can Reese R201C, Anodized clear aluminum, to be painted same color as door frame. 

8. ET: Edge Trim: Similar to DON-JO U-Channel 1298, stainless steel finish, height to be 84”, with “A” depth 

of 1”. U-channels are to be fully adhered with adhesive & to be flush with the laminate. NOT to be installed 

on top of the laminate or with screws. 

E. Stop: 

1. FS: Floor stop: Rockwood #481 with 1-3/8" stop height, Satin Chrome US26D/652 finish, furnish with 1 1/2” 

expansion anchors. 

2. FSH: Floor Stop: Rockwood #491, Satin Chrome US26D/652 finish. For Auditorium Entries only. 

F. Weatherstripping, etc.:


#165582 

Section 08710 

Page 3 

1. SG: Smoke Gasket; Reese 775D: coordinate length of exit device to allow continuous gasket at both ends. For 

exterior doors only, auditorium entry doors, and if any doors are to be fire rated. 

2. SL: Silencers: Ives #SR64 Gray Rubber; provide on all doors without weatherstripping or smoke gaskets; 3 

per single door, 4 per double door. 

3. TH: Reese S483 AV with vinyl insert. Bed in sealant. 

4. SW: Reese 701C series polyurethane sweep type weatherstripping; Anodized clear aluminum finish.and ½” 

polyurethane sweep. Mount on exterior side of door so that sweep closes gap at threshold. 

G. Removeable Mullion: equal to Sargent 650A, with keyed Best cylinder. 

H. DB: Door Bottom, NGP 420NA, Annodized Aluminum finish. 

I. AST: Astragal, Reese ADG#95V, Anodized clear aluminum finish. 

2.02 KEYING 

A. Lock keys and knock-out construction keys shall be delivered directly to the Cinemark Project Manager by the 

Hardware Supplier, keyed in accordance with Owner's requirements. 

B. Coordinate temporary and final keyways and cores with Cinemark Project Manager. Cores shall be obtained from 

Best Lock Corporation - Dallas, Texas. 

C. Provide grand master and master system; three grand master keys, eight master keys and two keys for each core. 

Provide two change keys at time of re-keying and one construction master change key for construction cores. 


3.01 INSPECTION 

A. Inspect door frames and related items for conditions that would prevent proper application of finish hardware. 

B. Do not proceed until defects are corrected. 


A. Securely install finish hardware items in accordance with approved schedule and templates furnished with 

hardware. 

B. Install mortised items flush with adjacent surfaces. 

C. Install locksets, closers and trim after finish painting. 

D. Locate items in accordance with NBHA "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware," unless otherwise 

noted. 

E. Test and adjust hardware for quiet, smooth operation, free of sticking, binding or rattling. Adjust closers for 

proper, smooth operation. Adjust handicapped accessible closers to meet specified opening force criteria. 

F. At final completion, properly tag and identify keys and deliver to Owner. 

G. Install screws at mineral core fire doors only in 1/8" diameter pre-drilled pilot holes by manual or "Yankee" 

screwdriver. Pilot holes must be pre-drilled by manufacturer. 

H. For installation of door stops: provide 1 1/2” expansion anchors to extend through floor finish and into concrete 

slab and anchor securely. 

3.03 CLEANING 

A. Remove soil, stains, paint, prints, and adhered matter from exposed parts of hardware. 

B. Clean adjacent surfaces of soiling incurred during installation of hardware. 

C. Repair or replace defective materials. 

3.04 FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE Furnish hardware sets in the amounts indicated on the Drawings. 

SET 

NO. 

LOCATION SUSP FUNC./ 

TRIM 

01 Front main exit; corridor 

exits (single door) 

01A 

Front main exit; corridor 

exits (double doors) 

02 Projection Level exit. 

(single door) 

02A 

Projection Level exit. 


CLOSER 

THRESH 

. 

PROTECTION STOP W/S REMARKS 

3BB-N E5 E-PUSH TH KP1-PUSH, DC FS SL, SW 

2-3BB-N E6 2-E-PUSH TH 2-KP1-PUSH, DC 2-FS SL, SW 

3BB-N E3 E-PUSH TH KP1-PUSH, DC FS SL, SW 

2-3BB-N E4 2-E-PUSH TH 2-KP1-PUSH, DC 2-FS SL, SW If double 

egress door 

provide 

AST.

Section 08710 

Page 4 

03 Ext. auditorium exits 

w/drip cap (single door) 

03A 

Ext. auditorium exits 

w/drip cap (double) 

04 Exterior auditorium exits, 

recessed 

05 Public restrooms 3BB PAIR- 

PULLS 

06 Ticket Booth, Storage 

Rooms, Interview Room 

06A 

Manager's Office, 

Computer, Assistant 

Office 

3BB-N E3 E-PUSH TH KP6-PUSH- 

BLACK, DC 

2-3BB-N E4 E-PUSH TH 2-KP6-PUSH- 

BLACK, DC 

3BB-N E3 E-PUSH TH KP6-PUSH- 

BLACK 

R-PUSH 

KP5-PUSH & 

PUSH-BLACK 

3BB MA R-PULL KP1-PUSH FS SL 

FS 

FS 

FS 

FS 

SG, SW 

SG, SW 

SG, SW 

3BB MA R-PULL KP1-PUSH FS SL Provide 

Door Peep 

06B Concession Storage 4BB MA R-PUSH KP2-PUSH FS SL 

07 Stair (Lower level), 

Janitor, Breakroom 

3BB CL R-PUSH KP1-PUSH FS SG (only 

@ stair) , 

SL 

07A Stair (Mezzanine level) 3BB PA R-PUSH KP1-PUSH FS SG 

SW 

07B Genie, Scullery 4BB CL R-PUSH KP2-PUSH FS SL 

08 FR Auditorium Ent. 3BB E1 R-PUSH KP5-PUSH/PULL- 

BLACK 

08A Double FR Aud. Entrance 2-3BB E2 2R-PUSH 2-KP5- 

PUSH/PULL - 

BLACK 

09 Non-FR Aud. Entrances 3BB PAIR- 

PULLS 

09A 

Double non-FR 

Auditorium Entrances 

2-3BB 

2-PAIR- 

PULLS 

R-PUSH 

2R-PUSH 

KP5-PUSH/PULL- 

BLACK 

2-KP5- 

PUSH/PULL- 

BLACK 

10 Unisex Toilet 3BB PR R-PULL KP6-PUSH- 

BLACK 

11 Exterior Storage 3BB-N MA No closer is 

needed 

Unless door 

is Fire 

Rated 

SL 

FSH SG CP, ET 

2-FSH 2 SG ET 

FSH SG ET 

2-FSH 2 SG ET 

FS 

SL 

TH DC FS SG 

SW 

12 Eliason Doors REFER TO SECTION 08212 2-KP2-PUSH & 

PULL 

13 Exit from Service Area 

(single door) 

14 Fire Door 

(double door) 

3BB-N MA No closer is 

needed 

Unless door 

is Fire 

Rated 

TH DC FS SG, SW 

Provide 

black 

hardware if 

door is 

located 

behind aud. 

screen 

CH E7 2F-PUSH 2-KP4-PUSH FS SG DB, AST 

15 Fire Door 

(single door) 

CH E7 F-PUSH KP4-PUSH FS SG DB, AST 

16A Storefront Door – 

Refer to Section 

08410 

16B Storefront Door – 


08410 



08410 


#165582

Section 08710 

Page 5 



08410 



08410 



08410 

19 Storefront Door – 


08410 

20 Storefront Door – 


08410 

NOTE: Provide fire rated hardware at all rated doors (refer to Construction Documents for door schedule). 

XD Auditorium plastic laminate doors, hinges, kickplates, and pull is provided by Cinemark and 

installed by GC. GC is responsible for all other door hardware. 



#165582


SECTION 08810 

GLASS AND GLAZING 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Glass and Glazing work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 


1. Wood Doors - Section 08212 



4. Aluminum Entrance & Storefront - Section 08410 

5. Toilet Accessories - Section 10800 


A. Meet requirements and recommendations of the applicable portions of the Standards listed. 


2. Flat Glass Jobbers Association FGJA 


4. Consumer Products Safety Commission CPSC 

B. Conform to Fed-Spec. DD-G-451c. 

C. Float Glass shall be "Glazing" quality. Sheet glass shall be "A" quality. 



B. Samples - Two 12"x12" pieces of each type of glass. 

C. Shop Drawings - Section and details of glass installation at framing members such as head, mullions, transoms, 

jambs and sills. 

D. Manufacturer's Literature. 

1. Manufacturer's descriptive data of glass and glazing material. 

2. Recommended installation instructions. 

E. Certificates - manufacturer's certification that materials meet Specification requirements. 













only. 





A. Deliver glass with manufacturer's labels intact. 

B. Do not remove labels until glass has been installed. 

C. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of staining glass. 

D. Deliver glazing compounds and sealants in manufacturer's unopened, labeled containers. 

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Perform glazing when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F. 


#165582

B. Perform glazing on dry surfaces only. 


#165582 

Section 08810 

Page 2 


A. Guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. It is the intent of this Specification that exterior glazing shall be guaranteed to be weathertight. 



A. Glass: 

1. Storefront and Entrance Doors: Solar Control Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. “Solarban 60 (2)” 

“Solargray + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. 

Outdoor Lite: “Solargray” Glass by PPG Industries, Inc., Sputter Coated on second surface (2) 

Indoor Lite: Clear Float Glass 

Low-E Coating: “Solargray” 60 Solar Control (Sputtered) by PPG Industries, Inc. 

Location: Second Surface (2) 

Performance Values: Visible Light Transmission U-Value Winter U-Value Summer SHGC Shading 

Coefficient Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance 

35% 0.29 0.27 0.24 0.28 6% 

2. Mirrors: 1/4" thick clear float glass, size 24”x36”, with mill finish aluminum j-mold, at all edges. 

Provide as shown in all restrooms, quanity shown on drawings. 

3. Door Viewports: 1/4" nominal thickness tempered glass equal to that manufactured by PPG’s float glass. 

4. Decorative Glass: Spandral Panels, refer to drawings for layout. White Spandrel PPG Starphire Ultra- 

Clear with White Frit, ½” thick tempered glass. Apply ICD High Performance Coating Opaci-Coat 3000- 

0186 Light White silicone film to inside face of glazing. Glazing sample to be approved by architect. 

5. Curtainwall: Solar Control Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. “Solarban 60 (2)” “Solargray + Clear by 

PPG Industries, Inc. 

Low-E Coating: “Solargray” 60 Solar Control (Sputtered) by PPG Industries, Inc. 

Location: Second Surface (2) 

Performance Values: Visible Light Transmission U-Value Winter U-Value Summer SHGC Shading 

Coefficient Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance 

35% 0.29 0.27 0.24 0.28 6% 

Glazing sample to be approved by architect. 

B. Environmental Information 





C. Glass Accessories: 

1. General: 

a. Setting Blocks-Neoprene, 70-90 Shore "A" durometer hardness. 

b. Spacers-Neoprene, 40-50 Shore "A" durometer hardness. 

c. Glazing Points and Wire Spring Clips-Corrosion resistant, manufacturer's standard. 

d. Mirror Edge Sealant: PPG's Mirror Edge Sealant UC44554. 

e. Primer-Sealant-equal to GE's 1200 Silicone Sealant or Dow 781 clear, 25% max, movement. 

f. Mirror mastic: Mirror-Mastic by Palmer Products Corporation. 

g. Glass Clips and Fasteners: Knape and Vogt Nos. 277 and 278. 



A. Check that glazing channels are free of burrs, irregularities and debris. 

B. Check that glass is free of edge damage or face imperfections. 

C. Do not proceed with installation until conditions are satisfactory. 

D. Verify that glass is installed in accordance with original design, and in accordance with pertinent codes and 

regulations. 

3.02 PREPARATION

Section 08810 

Page 3 

A. Field Measurement: 

1. Measure size of frame to receive glass. 

2. Compute actual glass size, allowing for edge clearances. 

3. Coordinate locations of j-boxes, required openings, etc. Prior to fabrication. Size per lobby elevations. 

B. Preparation of Surfaces: 

1. Remove protective coatings from surfaces to be glazed. 

2. Clean glass and glazing surfaces, to remove dust, oil and contaminants, and wipe dry. 

C. Mirror Edge Preparation: 

1. Apply mirror edge sealant to mirror edges extending sealant 1” on the back of mirror. 

2. Allow to dry thoroughly before handling. 

3. Cut edges of mirrors should be ground smooth. 


A. Install glass in accordance with manufacturer's recommended instructions and comply with the procedures 

recommended in the "Glazing Manual" of the FGJA. 

B. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade tempered, heat strengthened, coated, or insulated glass. 

C. Be sure exterior light of glass is set toward the building exterior. 

D. Gasket Glazing: 

1. Cut gasket with mitered corners to length of channel without stretching. 

2. Apply gasket outside fixed edge of rabbet perimeter. 

3. Place setting blocks at quarter points of sill rabbet. 

4. Place glass on setting block and center horizontal. 

5. Apply gasket to inside stop, mitering corners. 

E. Do not force or spring glass into place. Provide adequate clearances at edges with shims and spacer blocks as 

required. 

F. Glass shall be properly sized so that it has correct bearing and concealment as per FGJA. 

G. If used on insulated glass, breather tubes must be closed within 30 days of manufacture and preferably within 

24 hours after reaching destination; tubes are not to be closed in direct sunlight or unusually hot or cold days. 

Do not install units prior to closing breather tubes. 

H. Mirrors: 

1. Wait until air conditioning is operating before installation. 

2. Support mirrors installed on walls from the bottom until mastic sets up. 

3. Follow Mirror Mastic manufacturer's installation guidelines to ensure proper installation of mirrors. 

I. Decorative Glass: 

1. Wait until air conditioning is operating before installation. 

2. Support mirrors installed on walls from the bottom until mastic sets up. 

3. Follow Mirror Mastic manufacturer's installation guidelines to ensure proper installation of mirrors. 

3.04 CLEANING 

A. Refer and comply with Section 01710-Cleaning. 

B. Remove excess compound from installed glass. 

C. Remove labels from glass surface as soon as installed. 

D. Wash and polish both faces of glass. 


A. Attach crossed streamers away from glass face. 

B. Do not apply markers to glass surfaces. 

C. Replace damaged glass. 



#165582

SECTION 08920 

GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALL 


1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Aluminum framed curtainwall system. 

2. Glass infill panels. 


1. Division 1: Administrative, procedural, and temporary requirements. 

2. Section 07920 – Sealants and Caulking. 

3. section 08410 – Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. 

4. Sections 08810 – Glass and Glazing. 


A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 

1. 501 – Methods of Test for Metal Curtain Walls. 

2. 607.1 – Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for 

Architectural Aluminum. 

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

1. B 209 – Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 

2. B 221 – Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wires, Shapes and tubes. 

3. E 283 – Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. 

4. E 330 – Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air 

Pressure Difference. 

5. E 331 – Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air 

Pressure Difference. 


A. Curtainwall System: Tubular aluminum sections with self supporting framing, factory prefinished, vision 

glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 

B. System Assembly: Site assembled. 

C. Glazing Method: Cap glazing; rectangular glazing caps mechanically secured to framing members with 

thermally broken glazing clips. 

D. Design Requirements: 

1. Design curtainwall system to withstand following: 

a. Positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane in accordance with Building Code. 

b. Concentrated 100 pound live load applied at any point on aluminum framing members. 

c. Movement caused by an ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F and a surface temperature range 

of 160 degrees F. 

d. Movement between curtainwall system and adjacent construction. 

e. Dynamic loading and release of loads. 

f. Deflection of supports. 

2. Not permitted: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, and damage, 

loosening, weakening, or opening of components of system. 

3. Design system under direction of Professional Structural Engineer licensed in the State in which the 

Project is located, with minimum 2 years experience in work of this Section. 

E. Deflection and Stress Limits: 

1. Normal to plane of glass, deflection of framing members shall not exceed L/360 or ¾ inch whichever is 

less. Where sealant joint occurs between framing members and building elements, deflection of framing 

members shall not exceed one half of joint width, or less if required by sealant manufacturer. 

2. In plane of glass, deflection of framing members shall not reduce glass bite below 75 percent of design 

dimension, and shall not reduce glass edge clearance below 25 percent of design dimension or 1/8 inch, 

whichever is greater. Restrict deflection further if required for assembly and fit of components. 


#165582

Section 08920 

Page 2 

3. At connection points of framing members to anchors, anchor deflection in any direction shall not exceed 

1/16 inch. 

4. When tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 at 1½ times maximum design wind pressure, positive and 

negative, net permanent deflections of framing members shall not exceed L/1000, components shall not 

experience failure, gross permanent distortion, or disengagement and glass shall not break. At connection 

points of framing members to anchors, anchor deflection in any direction shall not exceed 1/8 inch and 

permanent set shall not exceed 1/16 inch. 

F. Performance Requirements: 

1. Air infiltration: Maximum 0.06 CFM per square foot when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at 

pressure differential across assembly of 1.57 PSF. 

2. Water penetration: 

a. No water penetration as defined in AAMA 501 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at 

differential static pressure equal to 20 percent of positive design wind pressure with minimum 6.24 

PSF and maximum 12.0 PSF. 

b. Make provision in design to drain to exterior leakage of water occurring at joints and condensation 

taking place within construction. 

3. Probability of breakage of glass upon application of design wind pressures for 1 minute duration or due to 

thermal stress: Maximum 8 lites per 1000. 

4. Thermal break requirements: 

a. Provide system with demonstrated resistance to thermal conductance and condensation. 

b. Minimum temperature of any interior component shall be 45 degrees F when exterior ambient 

temperature is 14 degrees F and interior ambient temperature is 68 degrees F. 


A. Shop Drawings: Show: 

1. Joining techniques, provision for expansion and contraction, anchorage details, and framing member 

profiles, elevations, and details. 

2. Materials and finishes. 

3. Relative layout of adjacent and supporting construction. 

4. Glass, setting blocks, jamb blocking, and glazing seals. 

5. Weep drainage network. 

6. Sealants, backer rods, bond breakers, and primers. 

7. Loads applied to structure: Location, direction and magnitude. 

B. Samples: 12 inch long aluminum framing system samples for each profile required, showing cross section 

and finish. 2 of each. 

C. Test Reports: Submit certified test results issued by a recognized independent testing laboratory showing that 

proposed system has been tested in accordance with specified procedures and meets or exceeds specified 

design and performance requirements. 













cost only. 





#165582

Section 08920 

Page 3 


A. Installer Qualifications: 

1. Minimum 3 years experience in work of this Section. 

2. Provide single source responsibility for installation of all components of system, including curtainwall, 

glazing and sealants. 

1.06 WARRANTIES 

A. Provide 2 year warranty against water leakage through curtainwall system and reduction of performance. 


2.01 MANUFACTURES 

A. Contract Documents are based on “ 1600 Wall” system by Kawneer Company, Inc. 

B. Equivalent products by the following manufacturers are acceptable. 

1. Bruce Wall Systems Corp. 

2. EFCO Corporation. 

3. PPG Industries, Inc. 

4. Vistawall Architectural Products 

5. Wausau Metals Corporation. 

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 


A. Aluminum Components: Alloy and temper best suited to application. 

1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221. 

2. Sheet: ASTM B 209. 

3. J. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance 


B. Glass, Glazing Gaskets, and Accessories: Specified in Section 08800. 

C. Aluminum Finish for Curtainwall Components: 

1. Material shall be free from scratches and other serious blemishes and chemically cleaned. 

2. Exposed Aluminum surfaces shall be finished Medium Bronze Anodized. 

3. The minimum coating thickness shall be 0.70 mil when measured per ASTM B244-79, and the density 

shall be at least 32 mg. per square inch when measured per ASTM B137-95. 


A. Fasteners: 

1. Exposed: Series 300 stainless steel. 

2. Concealed: Stainless or plated steel. 

B. Sealants: 

1. Perimeter: Specified in Section 07900. 

2. Integral: Single component polyurethane or silicone. 

C. Anchors: Cast iron, malleable iron, or galvanized steel. 

D. Primer Paint: Zinc rich type. 


A. General: 

1. Fabricate with minimum clearances and shim spaces around perimeter, yet enabling installation and 

dynamic movement. 

2. Accurately fit and secure joints and intersections. Make joints flush, hairline, and weather tight. 

3. Fabricate in largest practical units. 

4. Conceal fasteners and attachments from view. 

5. Reinforce framing members with internal steel when required to support imposed loads. 

6. Fabricate sot that components will not be excessively strained under normal conditions of use. 

7. Provide slotted holes for erection adjustment. 

8. Furnish fascias, covers, closures, ad trim members which are attached to curtainwall. 


#165582

Section 08920 

Page 4 

9. Provide gutters at horizontals at bottom of glass; weep to exterior through baffles weep holes. 

B. Fabricate aluminum components with integral low conductance thermal barrier located between exterior and 

interior exposed components which eliminates metal-to-metal contact. 



A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings. 

B. Install components plumb and level, in proper plane, free from warp and twist. 

C. Provide alignment attachments and anchors to permanently attach components to building structure. 

D. Weld adjustable anchorage connections after curtainwall is properly positioned. 

E. Compensate for predictable conditions that could cause system to exceed allowable tolerances. 

F. Employ reinforcing members if required. If temporary braces or erection clips are used. Prevent damage to 

exposed surfaces. 

G. Install glass and accessories in accordance with Section 08810. 

H. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious materials or 

dissimilar metals. 

I. Installation Tolerances: 

1. Variation from plane or locations shown on Shop Drawings: Maximum 1/8 inch in 10 feet of length or ½ 

inch in any total length. 

2. Offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to end in line: Maximum 1/32 

inch. 

3. Sealant space between curtainwall and adjacent construction: Minimum ¼ inch. 


A. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions to match original finish. 



#165582

PART 1- GENERAL 

SECTION 09220 

LATH AND PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Lath and Plaster work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 

B. Work items, and requirements specified elsewhere that relate and/or apply to this Section include: 

1. Light gage Metal Framing - Section 05400 

2. Concrete Unit Masonry - Section 04200 

3. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07620. 

4. Special Coatings - Section 09800 



1. Metal Lath Association MLA 

2. National Lime Association NLA 

3. Plaster Information Bureau PIB 

4. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. UL 

5. ML/SFA (Metal Lath/ Steel Framing Association). 

6. PCA (Portland Cement Association) Plaster (Stucco) Manual. 

7. Lath & Plaster Systems Manual published by Texas Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association and 

Texas Bureau for Lath & Plaster. 


A. Fabricate vertical wall and furred space framing to limit finish surface deflection to L/180 under lateral point 

load of 100 lbs. 

B. Fabricate horizontal ceiling and soffit framing to limit finish surface to L/360 deflection under superimposed 

dead loads and wind uplifts. 


A. Prepare 2 samples, each approximately 2 feet square, at a location on the site as directed by the Architect. 

A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01340 – SUBMITTALS. 

B. Product Data: Submit product data with installation instructions. 

C. Shop Drawings: Submit a diagram of proposed control joint and expansion joint layout prior to starting work. 

D. Samples: Include color chips for color selection. 













only. 




B. Provide product data or MSDS indicating VOC emissions in grams/liter (g/L) for the following products: 

1. Plaster: Comply with California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) #1113 

identified in Section 01352. 



#165582

Section 09220 

Page 2 

A. Manufactured materials shall be delivered in the original packages, containers, and bundles bearing the name 

of the manufacturer and the brand. 

B. Plaster cement and like materials shall be stored off the ground under watertight cover until ready for use. 

C. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises. 

D. Environmental Requirements: In cold weather, maintain the temperature of the building reasonably constant at 

not less than 55 degrees F for an adequate period prior to, during, and after the plastering operation. Provide 

adequate ventilation to dry plaster. 

E. Protection: Provide protection during plastering for finished door and window frames and other designated 

areas which do not receive a plaster finish. 


A. Work herein specified requires coordination with trades whose work connects with, is affected, or concealed 

by lathing and plastering. 

B. Before proceeding, make certain required inspections have been made. 

C. Do acutting and patching required to accommodate work of other trades. 



A. Georgia Pacific/Bestwall 

B. National Gypsum Company 

C Thoro System Products 

D United States Gypsum Company 


A. Furring Channels: 16 gauge, cold rolled steel, coated with a rust inhibitive paint. In sizes as recommended by 

MLA and PIB. 

B. Tie Wire: Galvanized, annealed steel wire, 18 gauge for securing lath, 16 gauge for securing runner and 

furring channels in ceiling construction. 

C. Flat Expanded Lath: Diamond shaped mesh, cold rolled galvanized steel sheets, 3.4 lb./s.y. 

D. Water Barrier: DuPont Tyvek Stuco Wrap, a flash spunbonded olefin, non-woven, non-perforated weather 

resistant barrier. 

E. Accessories: shall be equivalent to USG and Keene as follows: 

1. Accessories shall be zinc except as noted. 

2. Plaster Stops - No. 66 

3. Bolts, Nuts, Washers - Galvanized Steel 

4. Control Joints - Keene No. 15. 

5. Corner Reinforcement - USG 1-A typical. 

F. Portland Cement: 

1. ASTM C150-95a, Type I or Type II. 

2. VOC emissions: Provide low VOC products in compliance with SCAQMD Rule 1113 as specified in 

Section 01352 IAQ Management. 

G. Hydrated Lime: Special finishing hydrated lime, ASTM C206-84, Type S. 

H. Finish System: 

1. Factory pre-mixed, polymer modified Portland Cement, aggregate and additives as applied over the EIFS 

specified in Section 07240. 

2. Provide low VOC products in compliance with SCAQMD Rule 1113 as specified in Section 01352 IAQ 

Management. 

I. Sand: Clean, sound, and free from loam, clay or vegetable matter, well graded from coarse to fine. 

J. Water: Potable 

K. Color: 

1. Integral color for coating as shown on Drawings. 

2. Provide low VOC products in compliance with SCAQMD Rule 1113 as specified in Section 01352 IAQ 

Management. 

L. Coating: refer to Section 09800. 

M. Hangers: No. 8 gage annealed, galvanized wire. 

N. Corner Mesh: Formed galvanized sheet steel, minimum 26 gage thick, expanded flanges shaped to permit 

complete embedding in plaster, minimum 2” size. 


#165582

O. Strip Mesh: Expanded galvanized metal lath, minimum 26 gage thick; 2” wide x 24” long. 

Section 09220 

Page 3 


A. Access Door: 16 gauge steel frame with 14 gauge door panel and 22 gauge galvanized casing beads, with 

primer coat, concealed spring hinges and cylinder lock. Equal to Milcor Model #3200-030 size 24" x 24" K. 

Paint to match color of stucco. 

B. Provide custom radiused collars at columns, custom curved casing and corner beads, and custom curved 

reveals as required. The following products are referenced by USG Nos. 

1. Corner Beads: No. 1 small-nose corner beads of 26 gage galvanized steel. 

2. Casings: No. 66 square expansion casing beads of 24 gage galvanized steel. 

3. Control Joints: No. 15 control joint of 26 gage galvanized steel or as shown on the drawings. 

4. Expansion Joints: No. 40 adjustable expansion joints of 26 gage galvanized steel. 

5. Corner Control Joints: No. 30 expansion joints of 26 gage galvanized steel. 

C. Reveal Molding: 

1. No. RS75-100V and RS75-50 vented vinyl reveal moldings as manufactured by Vinyl Corp., a Dietrich 

Metal Framing Co. 

2. ½ Keen #40. G90 galvanized coated as manufactured by Keene Products. 

D. Weep Screeds: No. 7 foundation weep screed, with sloped ground and minimum 3-1/2 inch vertical attachment 

flange, fabricated of 26 gage galvanized steel. 


3.01 ERECTION OF SUPPORTING SYSTEMS 

A. Framing: 

1. Members shall be connected by means of welding, screws or bolts. 

2. Connections shall be capable of withstanding superimposed dead and live loads, and shall be designed to 

transfer the full loads within the members at the connection with no movement in the joint or deflection in 

the members. 

3. Provide necessary bridging, blocking, and anchoring to secure the frame rigidly in place. 

4. Provide blocking required to provide for anchoring of items to be installed by other trades, and as required 

to support edges of lath. 

5. Erect members plumb, straight, true and level to the lines indicated on the drawings. 

6. Form metal stud framing members, spaced as indicated, to the required shapes to produce the profiles 

indicated, allowing for a minimum thickness of 3/4" for scratch, brown, and finish coats. See drawings for 

actual thickness. 

B. Supporting systems shall be in accordance with the recommendations of PIB, MLA specifications, and LBC 

requirements to adequately support the plaster work. 

C. Lathing: 

1. Apply lathing to form true, level, straight surfaces without sags or buckles, with long dimension of lath at 

right angles to supports, and tie to supports 6" o.c. over asphalt felt. 

2. Lap sides of lath at least 2", secure to supports and tie at 6" on center between supports. 

3. Neatly form lath to the required shapes to provide the profiles indicated allowing for a minimum of 3/4" of 

plaster, thickness to be as shown on drawings. 

4. Secure the lath to the studs with large head nails or screws. Heads shall be large enough to provide a seal 

to prevent water penetration and adequately hold the lath to framing member. 

5. Break lath behind the control joints in cement plaster surfaces. 

D. Accessories: 

1. Install plaster beads where shown on drawings and where plaster abuts other materials, miter, and cope 

corners, wire tied at 8" o.c. staggered in two wings. 

2. Control joints shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. 

3. Install reveal molding where detailed, at soffits and furrings. 

4. Install corner expansion joints at intersections of plastered interior partitions with plastered exterior walls. 

5. Install foundation weep screed at bottom of all vertical plaster surfaces. 

E. Coordinate the installation of anchors for items which are to be furnished and installed by others. 

F. Soffits: 


#165582

Section 09220 

Page 4 

1. Space hangers so that each hanger supports a maximum area of 16 sq. ft. Wrap or saddle-tie hangers 

around the runner channel to prevent twisting. 

a. Under steel construction, wrap hangers around or clip or bolt hangers to a structural steel member 

(not under steel deck). 

b. Under bar joists, suspend hangers from top chord or from bottom chord at panel points only. 

c. Under ductwork, employ trapeze system of hangers to support ceiling. Do not suspend hangers 

from ducts, piping, or conduit. 

2. Erect runner channels on 4’ centers or closer and locate a channel within 4” of each parallel wall. If 

runner channel spans between hangers are more than 4 ft. but less than 5 ft., use 1.12 lb. 1-1/2” runner 

channels. If spans between hangers are 5’ or more, used boxed 1-1/2” channels, 2” channels, or heavier as 

required. 

3. Erect furring channels at right angles to runner channels with joints lapped and made at hangers and 

crossings only. Provide a channel next to each wall. Space ¾” furring channels on 13-1/2” centers. 

Saddle-tie channels to runners with two strands of wire at each crossing. 

4. Brace vertical furring channels with horizontal channels on 4’ centers where possible. Provide additional 

bracing and cross-bracing to make all furring rigid and secure. 

5. No part of the suspended grillage (main runners and cross furring) shall be permitted to come in contact 

with abutting masonry walls and partitions. 

3.02 MIXING PLASTER 

A. General: 

1. Except where hand mixing of small batches is approved by the Architect, mechanical mixers of an 

approved type shall be used for the mixing of plaster. 

2. Frozen, caked, or lumped materials shall not be used. 

3. Mechanical mixers, mixing boxes, and tools shall be cleaned after mixing each batch and shall be kept free 

of plaster from previous mixes. 

4. Plaster shall be thoroughly mixed with the proper amount of water until uniform in color and consistency. 

5. Retempering will not be permitted, and plaster which has begun to stiffen shall be discarded. 

6. Plaster for scratch coats over metal lath shall be fibered. 

7. Mix and proportion cement plaster in accordance with PCA Plaster (Stucco) Manual and in accordance 

with manufacturer’s instructions. 

8. Do not use frozen, caked, or lumpy materials. Clean mixer or mixing boxes of set or hardened materials 

before materials for a new batch are loaded. Mix each batch separately. Thoroughly dry mix materials 

before adding water. 

9. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set. 

10. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water. 

11. Protect mixtures from frost, contamination, and evaporation. 

B. Portland Cement Plaster Proportions: 

1. Scratch Coat (by volume) - 1 part Portland Cement, 3 parts sand, and 1/4 part lime putty. 

2. Brown Coat (by volume) - 1 part Portland Cement, 3 parts sand, and 1/4 part lime putty. 

3. Finish Coat – Apply finish coat with a "sand finish".Mix in accordance with 

manufacturer's recommendations. 

3.03 APPLICATION OF PLASTER 

A. General: 

1. Do no plastering until temperature of 50 degrees, is rising, and is expected to stay 50 degrees until plaster 

is cured. Provide heat to avoid freezing to plaster work. 

2. The thickness of the plaster, from the face of the plaster base to the finished brown coat surface, shall be 

not less than 3/4", and as shown on drawings. 

3. Protect finished work surfaces over which work is to be performed. 

4. Staining of concrete surfaces caused by lack of proper precautions shall be removed. 

5. Protect existing work and equipment of others. 

6. Examine surfaces to be plastered and report to the superintendent surfaces that are not suitable for 

plastering. Plastering of a surface will be construed as acceptance of the substrate and defects will be 

repaired at the Contractor's expense. 


#165582

Section 09220 

Page 5 

7. Do plastering in brightly lighted areas to provide the maximum of visibility in order to obtain even, 

smooth finishes. 

8. Cut out openings with each coat of plaster while plaster is dry. 

9. Check grounds, screeds, corner beads and other accessory items and anchors for rigidity before applying 

plaster. 

10. Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C 926, PCA Plaster Manual, and manufacturer’s instructions. 

Utilize most stringent requirements if conflicts exit. 

11. Apply plaster by machine or hand. Interrupt plaster only at junctions of plaster planes, at openings, or at 

control joints. 

12. Layout to permit completion of an entire surface in one application. Maintain a wet edge. Work to 

corners and joints, and do not allow material to set up within a distinct wall area. 

13. Interrupt plaster at control joints. Tool through second and finish coat to produce “V” joint at intersection 

of frames and other items of metal or wood which act as plaster grounds. 

B. Cement Plaster and Stucco Application: 

1. Scratch Coat - Apply with sufficient material (min. thk. 3/8 in.) and pressure to form full keys with metal 

lath, cover well, cross scratch after setting. Cure and dry a minimum of 7 days before applying brown 

coat. Keep scratch coat moist for a minimum period of 48 hours after application. 

2. Brown Coat - Apply to a minimum thickness of 1/4" in two applications and bring to a true, even plane by 

rodding and floating. Leave rough to receive finish coat. Dampen scratch coat to provide suction before 

applying brown coat. Leave brown coat to dry a minimum of 7 days. 

3. Finish Coat - Apply Thorowall finish over plaster with smooth clean stainless steel trowel using sufficient 

manpower and equipment to insure a continuous operation without cold joints, scaffolding lines, etc. 

3.04 PATCHING 

A. Plaster with cracks, blisters, pits, checks or discoloration will not be acceptable. 

B. Such plaster shall be removed and replaced with plaster conforming to this Specification. 

C. Point around tile, steel, iron, fixtures, outlet boxes, switch plates, and other items abutting or extending into 

plaster. 

D. Upon completion give plaster work a final inspection and repair defects, cracks, and damaged spots. 

E. Patch defects in workmanship and materials. Patches in finished areas shall match adjacent surfaces. 

F. Existing Plaster Repair: 

1. Ensure existing substrate is sound. 

2. Remove plaster adjacent to repair area that is cracking, chipping, and spalling off, then remove old paint 

from adjacent area. 

3. Scarify adjacent old plaster area and apply bonding agent to prevent old plaster from extracting water from 

the new plaster before it cures. 

4. Patch holes with new plaster and blen the finish coat with adjacent scarified areas. 

G. Adjusting: 

1. Upon completion, point-up plaster around trim and other locations where plaster meets dissimilar 

materials. 

2. Apply fog coat to integral color plaster to ensure uniform color. 

3. Cut out and patch defective or damaged plaster. Cut out and patch stained or discolored finish plaster. 

4. Match patch of defective or damaged plaster to existing work in form, texture, and color. 

5. Obtain Architect’s acceptance of plaster color and texture prior to scaffold removal. 


A. Refer to Section 01710-Cleaning. 

B. Clean aluminum surfaces at the end of each days work since plaster stains and discolors aluminum. 

C. Protect finished work. 

D. Upon completion of the work, excess materials and debris shall be removed from the premises. 


A. Upon completion and acceptance of the project, furnish to the Owner through the Architect a written guarantee. 

B. Guarantee items and work included in the Section for a period five years from the date of acceptance against 

defective workmanship and/or materials. 


#165582

Section 09220 

Page 6 

C. Defects resulting from faulty materials and/or workmanship during the guarantee period shall be repaired or 

replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 



#165582


SECTION 09250 

GYPSUM WALLBOARD 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Gypsum Wallboard work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 


1. Light Gage Metal Framing - Section 05400 


3. Building Insulation - Section 07210 

4. Resilient Flooring and Base - Section 09650 

5. Ceramic Tile - Section 09310 




2. Gypsum Association GA 

3. Gypsum Drywall Contractors International GDCI 

4. Underwriter's Laboratories UL 


A. Schedule deliveries to avoid delays and to prevent greater accumulations than can be suitable stored at the site. 

B. Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer's original, unopened labeled containers. 


D. Distribute materials to avoid overloading the building structure. 

1.04 REQUIREMENTS 

A. Satisfy applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction in meeting required fire ratings. 

B. Follow manufacturer's specifications in the application of materials. 

C. Installation shall be done by experienced craftsmen trained to do this type of work. 






3. Coatings: Comply with California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) #1113 



2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES 

1. Flintkote 

2. Georgia - Pacific/Bestwall1. 

3. Gold Bond Building Products 

4. National Gypsum Company 

5. United States Gypsum Company 


A. Metal Furring: Dietrich Metal Framing Z-Furring Channels or equivalent 1" size. 

B. Resilient Channel: Detrich Metal Framing RCUR resilient channels, 16" o.c., suspending gypsum wallboard 

½” from the wall or equivalent. 

C. Wall Board for Partitions and Ceilings: 5/8" thick "Fire Code Type X" tapered sheet rock or equivalent. 

Install water resistant wall board equal to USG "WR" in restrooms, janitor closets and wherever interior 

partitions are to receive ceramic tile. Install Masonite in Genie Room as noted on the drawings. Seal cut edges 

of water resistant wall boards. 

D. Wall Board for Masonry Partitions to receive finish ½” thick tapered sheet rock panels. 

E. Acoustical Sealant: equivalent to USG acoustical sealant. 


#165582

Section 09250 

Page 2 

F. Adhesive: As recommended by the Gypsum Wallboard manufacturer. 

G. Suspended Gypsum Ceiling System: USG or approved equivalent as detailed on drawings. 

H. Fasteners: 

1. Wallboard to Framing: USG Hi-Lo type S Bugle Head Screws or equivalent. 

2. Stud to Door Frame 1/2" USG Type S-12 Pan Head Screws or equivalent. 

3. Wallboard to wallboard: 1 1/2" USG Type G bugle-head type 'S' point screws. 

I. Hanger Wire: 9 gauge, galvanized 

J. Tie Wire: 16 gauge, galvanized, or USG metal furring channel clip. 

K. Exterior Sheathing: ½” thick “Dens-glass gold” sheathing or equilavent. Manufacturered in accordance with 

ASTM C 1177 

L. Cement Board: USG Drywall, DUROCK Brand. ½” thick meeting ASTMC 1325, ANSI A118.9 or equal 

M. Shaft Liner: Georgia-Pacific, DensGlass Shaftliner, 1” thick water resistant, noncombustibule gypsum core 

per ASTM E136 or equal. Used with CT Cavity Shaftwall studs and tracks. 

N. Joint Treatment for Exterior Sheathing: 

1. Tape: 2” wide, 10x10 glass mesh tape. 

2. Compound: Georgia-Pacific setting-type joint compound. 

3. Comply with California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) #1168 identified in 


N. Joint Treatment for Wallboard: 

1. Prefiller - USG "Durabond 90" or equivalent. 

2. Tape - USG "Perf-a-tape" or equivalent. 

3. Filler - USG "Ready-Mixed Joint Compound" or equivalent. 



O. Metal Trim: 

1. Control Joints - USG Control Joint No. 093, roll-formed of zinc or equivalent. 

2. Corner Beads - USG "Durabead" corner reinforcement No. 103 or equivalent. 

3. Casing Beads - USG Metal trim No. 200-B. 

P. Metal Access Doors: 16 gauge steel in 13 gage frame, door recessed for drywall installation. Flush type 

screwdriver operated lock. Model RDW, 24"x24" as manufactured by Karp Associates, Inc. Provide firerated 

type when located in rated wall assembly. 


3.01 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR WALLBOARD 

A. General 

1. Coordinate interior partitioning with other trades before erection. 

2. When outdoor temperature is below 55º F., heat shall be maintained in the building continuously and 

uniformly at no less than 55º F., from one week prior to beginning of installation until the wallboard 

application and joint treatment is completed. 

3. Installation shall not be started until windows are glazed and doors are installed unless openings are 

temporarily closed. 

4. Ventilation, either natural or supplied by fans, circulators, or air conditioning system, shall be provided to 

remove excess moisture during joint treatment. 

5. Be aware of poster cases, marquees, signage, toilet accessories, toilet fixtures, special items, cabinet work, 

case work or any other items which are to attach to and/or hang from the drywall partitions. 

6. Coordinate the installation of anchors furnished by suppliers of the above mentioned items and provide 

necessary blocking, double studs or studs spaced at 1/2 normal spacing to adequately support the weight of 

items to be secured to or hung from the partitions. 

7. Provide necessary anchors for items mentioned above that are not normally furnished with those items and 

adequately secure anchors to two or more studs before applying board. 

8. The completed drywall partitions shall be constructed and adequately braced to withstand the weight of 

equipment to be hung on the partitions in addition to loads to be superimposed on that equipment. 

B. Partitions 

1. Align framing members accurately according to partition layouts and to conceal slabs with concrete stud 

nails or power driven anchors, spaced 24" o.c., and secure to the structure above the ceiling or to the 

ceiling, as indicated. 


#165582

Section 09250 

Page 3 

2. Erect studs vertically plumb not to exceed 16" o.c. unless noted otherwise. 

3. Attach furring channels vertically to the wall, spaced 24" o.c., and attach with hammer-set or poweractivated 

stud fasteners or concrete stud nails spaced 24" o.c. staggered on alternate wing flanges. 

4. Brace partitions that do not extend to structure at 8'-0" o.c. maximum, or just above ceiling. 

5. Grout metal door and borrowed light frames by spot grouting the jamb anchor clips, after the stud and 

before the gypsum wallboard is applied. 

6. Apply gypsum panels parallel to studs. Position edges over studs for parallel application. Use maximum 

practical lengths to minimize end joints. 

7. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partition. 

8. For single layer parallel application of gypsum panels, space screws 16" o.c. in field of panels and along 

vertical abutting edges. 

9. For double layer screw attachment space screws 16" o.c. for both layers. Offset joints in face layer with 

joints in base layer. 

10. Cut wallboard neatly around electrical outlets and scribe to abutting surfaces. 

11. Install corner beads on exterior corners, attached with suitable fasteners spaced 9" o.c., in single lengths 

unless application length exceeds standard stock lengths. 

12. Apply caulk at each control joint prior to paint application. Caulk to be flush with adjacent wall surfaces. 

13. Install water resistant gypsum wallboard in restroom sculleries and janitor closets. 

14. Install casing beads as indicated and at points where drywall abutts a different material. 

15. Install drywall control joints at maximum 30’-0” on center, and above each side of door frame. 

C. Ceilings 

1. Attach wall angles at ceiling height. Space 12 ga. hanger wires 48" o.c. along main beams, within 6" of 

beam ends and walls not having wall angles. Install main beams 48" o.c. and within 6" of walls. Align 

main beam slots for cross furring channel and splice ends to insure continuity in each row. 

2. Space cross furring channels 24" o.c. and within 6" of beam ends and walls not having wall angles. Install 

main beams 48" o.c. and within 6" of walls. Align main beam slots for cross furring channel and splice 

ends to insure continuity in each row. 

3. At light fixtures, place hangers at each corner and at mid span of cross beams. Install two cross beams to 

support lighting fixture and additional cross furring channels 8" from each side of fixture. 

4. Apply gypsum wallboard of maximum practical length with long dimensions perpendicular to cross furring 

channels. Center end joints under channels and stagger in adjacent rows. Fit ends and edges closely but 

not forced together. 

5. Fasten panels to beams and channels with 1" Type S-12 Screws spaced 12" o.c. in field of wallboard and 

along abutting ends and edges. 

6. Install drywall control joints at not more than 50'-0" each way. 

3.02 JOINT TREATMENT OF INTERIOR WALLBOARD 

A. Examine surfaces that are to receive gypsum wallboard before starting work. Correct defects that would 

prevent proper application of joint treatment. 

B. Mix joint compounds as instructed by the manufacturer. 

C. Pre-Filling 

1. Fill all "V" grooves formed by abutting eased radial edges of wallboard flush with the lane of the taper 

with prefill compound. 

2. Excess compound beyond "V" groove shall be wiped clean leaving a flat joint to receive the taping. 

D. Taping 

1. After the pre-fill has hardened, a thin, uniform layer of taping compound shall be applied to all joints and 

angles to be reinforced. 

2. Reinforcing tape shall be applied immediately, centered over the joint seated into the compound. 

3. A skim coat shall follow immediately, but shall not function as fill or second coat. 

4. Tape shall be properly folded and embedded in angles to provide a true angle. 

E. Filling 

1. After taping compound has hardened, topping compound shall be applied, filling the board taper flush 

with the surface. 

2. The fill coat shall cover the tape and shall be feathered out slightly beyond the tape. 

3. On joints with no taper, the fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out at least 4" on each side of the tape. 


#165582

Section 09250 

Page 4 

4. No fill coat is necessary on interior angles. 

F. Finishing 

1. After topping compound is set, a finished coat of topping compound shall be spread evenly over and extending 

slightly over the fill coat on joints and feathered to a smooth, uniform finish over tapered edges. 

2. The finished joint shall not protrude beyond the plane of the surface. 

3. Taped angles shall receive a finish coat to cover the tape and taping compound, and provide a true angle. 

4. Where necessary, sanding shall be done between coats and following the final applications of compound 

to provide a smooth surface, ready for decoration. 

G. Taping compound shall be applied to fastener depressions followed, when hardened, by at least two coats of 

topping compound, leaving depressions level with the plane of the surface. 

H. Taping compound shall be applied to bead and trim and shall be feathered out from the ground to the plane of 

the surface. When hardened, this shall be followed by two coats of topping compound each extending slightly 

beyond the previous coat. The finish coat shall be feathered from the ground to the plane of the surface and 

sanded as necessary to provide a flat, smooth surface ready for decoration. 

I. Sand finish work to a smooth surface, true and plane. 

3.03 SHEATHING 

A. Provide Dens-Glass Gold sheathing where indicated on drawings. Install sheathing in accordance with 

manufacturer’s instructions and applicable instructions in GA-253 and ASTM C 1280. 

B. Install Dens-Glass Gold sheathing with gold side out. 

C. Use maximum lengths possible to minimize number of joints. 

D. Wood framing: Attach Dens-Glass Gold sheathing to wood framing with nails spaced 4” o.c. at perimeter for 

racking shear resistance; 8” o.c. at perimeter where there are framing supports and where racking shear 

resistance is not required; and 8” o.c. along intermediate framing in field for both conditions. 

E. Metal framing: Attach Dens-Glass Gold sheathing to metal frmaing with screws spaced 8” o.c. at perimeter 

where there are framing supports; and 8” o.c. along intermediate framing in field. 

F. Drive fasteners to bear tight against and flush with surface of sheathing. Do not countersink. 

G. Locate fasteners minimum K’ from edges and ends of sheathing panels. 

H. Building paper: If required, install building paper or equal with flashing around openings. 

I. Finishing: 

1. Seal fasteners using Dow Corning 795 or Borden HPPG Elmers Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk or 

equilavent. 

2. Finish joints using Dow Corning 795 or Borden HPPG Elmers Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk or 

equilavent. Reinforce with 2” wide 10x10 glass mesh Quick Tape or equilavent. 

3.04 CLEANING AND PATCHING 


B. Clean exposed drywall surfaces free of soil and stain that would affect finish. 

C. Repair, or remove and replace defective work. 



#165582


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Ceramic Tile Work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 



2. Gypsum Drywall - Section 09250 





1. Tile Council of America TCA 

2. Ceramic Tile Institute CTI 



SECTION 09310 

CERAMIC TILE 


A. Quality, grade, and certificates - Tile shall be Standard Grade. Packages containing ceramic tile shall be 

opened and shall be accompanied with the Manufacturer's Grade Certificate or an affidavit stating that the tile 

provided to the project is equal or better than the Standard Grade tile, per TCA 137.1. 

1.04 SAMPLES 


B. Submit samples to the Architect for approval and color selection. 

C. Do not work until samples have been approved, and colors have been selected. 

D. Furnish manufacturer's instructions for use of mortars and grouts. 


A. Deliver and store materials in their original unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's label. 

B. Deliver dry-set mortar in sealed, moisture-proof containers. 

C. Store materials to allow easy access to the work. 

D. Protect materials from damage during storage. 


A. Only the manufacturers and sources for the tiles shown on the drawings. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

B. Manufacturers for related materials shall be open to those that meet the specification. 


2.01 TILE 

A. Refer to finish schedule and drawings for interior tile types, manufacturers and locations. 

2.02 RELATED MATERIALS 

A. Latex Portland Cement Mortar: meet ANSI A118.4. Additive is used to improve workability and to decrease 

water permeability of standard Portland cement mortar. 

B. Latex Portland Cement Grout: meet ANSI A118.6. This grout is required for tile work over metal studs; it 

provides improved crack and stain resistance relative to dry set and standard Portland cement grout. Color 

shall be as shown on the drawings. 

C. Epoxy grout for use with quarry tile used in wet areas. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

D. Water: potable. 

E. Sealant: meet ASTM C920 and refer to section 07920. 

1. Grade T for floors. 

2. Grade NS for walls. 

F. Backer Rod: flexible and compressible close-cell foam polyethylene or butyl rubber type; refer to section 

07920. 

G. Crack Isolation Membrane: Submit system of choice for approval by the architect. 


#165582

Section 09310 

Page 2 

H. Edge Protection: Schluter-Rondec-RO 100 ANI, bullnose type profile, finish to be satin nickel anodized 

aluminum, install at all exposed tile edges, included wall corner, unless noted otherwise. Manufactured by 

Schluter Systems L.P. and distributed by Interceramic. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

I. Floor Tranistion Strip: Schluter-ANITK 100 Reno-TK, profile with sloped exposed surface, finish to be satin 

nickel anodized aluminum, install at all floor tile transitions unless noted otherwise. Manufactured by Schluter 

Systems L.P. and distributed by Interceramic. To be used with Johnsonite Subfloor Leveler System, LS-40-D. 

Install with manufactures recommend adhesive. For all carpet to tile transistions including lobby to promenade 

and promenade exits. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

J. Tile Cove: Schluter-DILEX HK, finish to be anodized aluminum, install as a tile base per finish schedule. 

Manufactured by Schluter Systems L.P. and distributed by Interceramic. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

2.03 MIXES 

A. Thinset Mortar: Mix in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 

B. Grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 


3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE 

A. It is the responsibility of the tile installer to ensure that concrete joints will be placed or cut in locations 

compatible with the tile pattern, so that no tile will be cut to accommodate a joint. Refer to Section 03300 and 

Drawings. 

B. Grind or fill concrete substrates as required to comply with allowable variations. See applicable Sections of 

these Specifications for construction tolerances. 

C. Clean each substrate with 10% solution of muriatic acid as may be required to remove curing compounds or 

other substances that would interfere with proper bond of specified mortar for tile. 

D. Seal substrate with sealer as recommended by manufacturer of mortar. 

E. Inspect substrates to receive tile. Do not exceed the following deviations from level and plumb, and from 

elevations, locations, slopes and alignments shown: 

1. Floors: 1/8" in 10 ft. run, any direction; + 1/8" at any location; 1/32" offset at any location. 

2. Walls: 1/8" in 8 ft. run, any direction; + 1/8" at any location; 1/32" offset at any location. 

3. Joints: Joints shall be 1/8" wide with + 1/32" joint width variation at any location; 1/16" in 3 ft. run for 

deviation from plumb and true, and for other variations in alignment of joints. 


A. Layout tile work so that no tiles less than half size occur on the floor. Adjust ceiling height so that no cut tiles 

are required on walls. Align joints of cove bases and trim with adjacent tile joints. No cut tiles are to occur in 

the field of tile surface. 

B. Apply tile in strict accordance with recommendations of the manufacturers and the applicable requirements of 

reference standards of ANSI A108.5. 

1. Method #1 (for all floor tile including public toilets). 

a. Installation shall meet requirements of TCA #F113. 

b. Substrate shall be concrete subfloor. 

c. Install Latex Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat. Minimum thickness of coat shall be 3/32". 

d. Set tile, taking care to maintain a full mortar bed beneath entire tile body. Allow mortar bed to cure. 

completely before grouting. 

e. Install latex Portland Cement grout as described below. 

2. Method #2 (for interior wall tile on wallboard). 

a. Installation shall meet requirements of TCA #W243. 

b. Substrate shall be gypsum board on minimum 3 5/8" 20 gauge metal studs at 16" on center. 

c. Install latex Portland cement mortar bond coat (refer to method #1). 

d. Set tile (refer to method #1). 

e. Install latex Portland cement grout as described below. 

3. Method #3 (for wall tile on masonry or concrete): 


b. Substrate shall be interior or exterior concrete masonry units. 





#165582

Section 09310 

Page 3 

4. Method #4 (for exterior wall tile on cementitious backer units): 


b. Substrate shall be interior or exterior cementitious backer units.. 




5. Method #5 (for floor quarry tile): 

a. Installation shall meet requirements of TCA #F113. 

b. Substrate shall be concrete subfloor. 

c. Install recommended mortar. 

d. Metro Tread tiles must be installed in a grid-checkerboard pattern to achieve the stated coefficient of 

friction. 

e. Set tile, taking care to maintain a full mortar bed beneath entire tile body. Allow mortar bed to cure 

completely before grouting. 

C. Grouting: In accordance with ANSI standards. 

1. Force maximum grout into joints; tool joints before grout sets. 

2. Fill gaps and skips so that finished joint is uniform in color, smooth and without voids, pin holes, or low 

spots. 

3. Sponge and wash tile thoroughly, diagonally across joints and finally polish with clean, dry cloths. 

D. Expansion control: 

1. Interior: 1/4" every 24 to 36 feet or as shown on drawings. Joints shall align with concrete slab control 

joints. 

2. Provide a crack isolation membrane to cover existing cracks and sawcut control joints where the direction 

of the tile joints do not align with direction of substrate joints. 

3. Exterior: 3/8" to 1/2" every 12 to 16 feet or where abutting dissimilar material. 

4. Recess joint into substrate by sawcutting. Fill with backer rod and sealant 

E. Use the Schluter Rondec-Pro with wall tile that does not have trim pieces. 

3.03 CURING 

A. Damp cure grouts a minimum of 72 hours after grouting. Maintain minimum 40º temperature. 

B. Close areas to traffic until tile is firmly set. Provide adequate barricades. 



B. Remove grout and foreign matter from tile and leave in a polished condition. 

C. The protection of the finished work is made a part of this Section and material damaged shall become the 

responsibility of the Contractor and shall be replaced with new matching material. 

D. Replace ceramic tiles with broken corners, cracks, fractures, and minor breaks with materials to match the 

original installation. 

3.05 EXTRA STOCK 

A. Provide ten percent (10%) additional ceramic and marble tile material, of each type, identical to that installed 

for maintenance and replacement uses. 



#165582

SECTION 09510 

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Acoustical Ceiling work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 



2. Building Insulation - Section 07210 


4. Electrical - Division 16. 



1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL 

2. Acoustical and Insulation Materials Assoc. AIMA 

3. Suspended Ceiling Manufacturers Assoc. SCMA 


A. Applicator Qualifications: Applicator shall have satisfactorily installed accepted suspension system and 

acoustical units on at least three other projects of equal scope. 

B. Design Criteria: 

1. Deflection: Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices shall support light fixtures, 

ceiling grilles, and acoustical units without deflecting more than 1/360 of the span. 

2. Test for deflection in accordance with methods and procedures prescribed by ASTM C636-92 with latest 

revisions. 

3. Reduce hanger spacing as required to satisfy design criteria. 

4. Increase hanger sizes as required to satisfy design criteria. 

5. Increase members and components of system, as required, to satisfy design criteria. 

C. Fire Safety Requirements: 

1. Maximum flame spread index of acoustical materials: 25. 

2. Flame spread index shall be listed by UL Building Materials List or determined by ASTM E84-95b. 

D. Allowable tolerance of finished acoustical ceiling system: Level within 1/8" of 12'. 

E. To insure proper interface and color match, all acoustical panel units and grid components shall be produced or 

supplied by a single manufacturer. Materials supplied by more than one manufacturer are not permissible. 

F. Suspended Ceiling Requirements for Seismic Projects: 

1. Installation must confirm to CISCA recommendations for areas subject to severe seismic activity. 

2. Minimum 2” wall moulding 

3. Grid must be attached to two adjacent walls opposite walls must have ¾” clearance 

4. Ends of main beams and cross tees must be tired together to prevent their spreading 

5. Perimeter support wires 

6. Heavy-duty grid system 

7. Ceiling areas over 1,000 SF must have horizontal restraint wire or rigid bracing 

8. Ceiling areas over 2,000 SF must have seismic separation Joints or full height partitions 

9. Ceilings without rigid brace must have 2” oversized trim rings for sprinklers and other pentrations 

10. Chnaged in ceiling plane must have positive bracing 

11. Cable trays and electrical conduits must be independently supported and braced 

12. Suspended ceiling will be subject to special inspection. 


A. Refer and comply with Section 01340 - Submittals. 

B. Submit a sample of each color of ceiling tiles and each color of suspension systems that are being proposed for 

the installation to the Architect for approval. 


A. Schedule deliveries to avoid delays in the work. 

B. Deliver and store materials in their original unopened protective containers. 


#165582

Section 09510 

Page 2 

C. Deliver materials with manufacturer's labels indicating brand name, pattern, size, thickness, and fire rating, as 

applicable, legible and intact. 

D. Store materials off the floor to assure proper protection from water and cover if necessary. 

E. Handle material so as to prevent soiling of finished acoustical units. 

PART 2 – PRODUCT 

2.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEM 

A. Product/Manufacturer: Prelude XL 15/16" exposed tee grid; Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Note: For areas 

requiring one-hour ceiling assembly, provide XL Fireguard grid and Fireguard-type acoustical tile. 

B. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial-quality hot dipped galvanized steel with 

minimum G30 coating as per ASTM A653. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping prefinished in 

baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees are double web steel construction with 15/16" type exposed 

flange design. Light gage steel cross tees shall have rotary stitching to improve column strength and staked-on 

end detail allowing easy cross tee removal and remounting. 

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate duty. 

2. Main Beam and Cross Tees shall be manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Exposed bottom 

flange shall be continuous with unbroken roll-formed cap, made from steel, running the entire length of the 

member. 

a. Main Beam: Web height shall be 1½". 

b. Four Foot Cross Tee: Web height shall be minimum 1-3/8". 

c. Two Foot Cross Tee: Web height shall be minimum 1-3/8". 

3. Wall moldings shall be angle molding, Item #7800, manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., and 

have a nominal 7/8" exposed flange. 

4. Hanger wire shall be galvanized carbon steel per ASTM A641, soft temper, pre-stretched, with a yield stress 

load of at least 3 times design load, but not less than 12 gage (0.106") diameter. 

C. Color and finishes: All steel roll-formed parts, including cap, shall be chemically cleansed. Capping shall be 

prefinished in a baked polyester paint finish. 

1. Color shall be as described on the drawings and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless 

otherwise specified. 

2.02 ACOUSTICAL TILES - NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 

A. C1: Armstrong Fine Fissured, 2' x 2' – tegular edge, 5/8" thick, Cream (Item #1732CR). 

B. C2: Armstrong Fine Fissured, 2' x 2' – tegular edge, 5/8" thick, Cream (Item #1732CR). 

C. C3: Armstrong Fine Fissured with Humiguard Plus, 2' x 4', square edge, 5/8" thick, Black (Item #1729BL). 

D. C4: Armstrong Fine Fissured, 2' x 4' – square edge, 5/8" thick, White. (Item #1729WH). 

E. C5: Armstrong: Clean Room VL- Vinyl-Clad Gypsum Ceiling panel, Unperforated White, 2' x 4' square edge, 

5/8" thick (Item #871). 

F. C6: Armstrong Fine Fissured, 2' x 2' – square edge, 5/8" thick, Black. (Item #1728BL). 

G. C8: Armstrong: Clean Room VL - Vinyl-Clad Gypsum Ceiling panel, Unperforated White, 2' x 2' square edge, 

5/8" thick (Item #869). 


A. Hold Down Clips: Provide hold down clips at locations where 1 hour construction is required and elsewhere as 

noted on contract documents. Fire rated ceiling panels weighing one pound per square foot or more do not 

require hold down clips. 

B. Provide Armstrong Axiom Channel Profile, 8” face depth to form the cove in the Restrooms. Refer to Drawings 

for locations. 

2.05 CINEMARK STRATEGIC ACCOUNT PRICING 

A. Contact Armstrong’s Sherry Brunt at 1-800-442-4212 to secure details of the Armstrong-Cinemark Strategic 

pricing agreement. 



A. Examine spaces and correct defects that could interfere with proper installation. 

B. Lay out spaces and arrange suspension system in regular pattern as shown on the drawings. 


#165582

Section 09510 

Page 3 


A. Installation shall be by experienced craftsmen trained to do this type of work. Contractor shall use a laser device 

for installation of ceiling grid. 

B. Install acoustic treatment after moist materials have been installed. Maintain temperature of not less than 50° F 

in spaces having installation of acoustical materials. 

C. Perform installation according to the Code of Practices for Acoustical Ceiling System Installation as prepared by 

NACA, and Specifications for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceiling System as prepared by AMA. 

D. Install hanger wires not over 48" apart above the main beam, unless otherwise indicated or approved. 

E. Securely anchor hanger wires to structure above. 

F. Secure lower ends of hanger wires to main tees by three twists around itself. Space main tees 2'-0" on centers of 

2'x4' grid. Join cross tees to main tee with a positive interlock. At perimeter areas, columns, etc., secure angle 

molding to vertical surfaces. Rest tees on angle moldings at walls, columns, etc. Provide hanger wires at four 

corners of all light fixtures. 

G. Install main runner beams at 4'-0" on center in 2'x4' grid. 

H. Install cross tees perpendicular to the main runner beams on both sides of light fixtures and ceiling diffusers. 

I. Roll form angle moldings that must follow a curved wall, plane, radius or bend. Notching or cutting the exposed 

leg at angle molding to fit radius or bend will not be accepted. 

J. Install angle moldings at all points where ceiling abuts a dissimilar material. 

K. Unless indicated otherwise, lay out suspension system to the column center lines in areas where columns are free 

standing. Lay out system to center lines of rooms working in all four directions in areas that have no free 

standing columns. Cut units next to walls shall be more than 1/2 board width and/or length. 

L. Install acoustical treatment and suspension system according to instructions and recommendations of the 

manufacturer. 

M. Suspension system for ceilings shall be erected strong and rigid enough to carry the acoustical tile and support 

the light fixtures in a true and level plane. 

N. Erect suspension system level, straight, and parallel to walls. 

O. Cutting and splicing shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner. 

P. Expose no acoustic tile edges. 

Q. Cut holes in acoustic units as required for lighting fixtures, air conditioning outlets, sprinkler heads and speakers. 

Do not split into two pieces to accommodate fixtures. 

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 


B. Upon completion of the work, remove damaged and soiled acoustical boards and replace with new matching 

material. 

C. Protect materials and accessories from damage. 

D. Remove excess materials, packaging, and debris from the job site. 


A. Provide in accordance with Section 01750 - Spare Parts and Maintenance materials. 

B. Provide percent (6%) additional ceiling tile material, of each type, identical to that installed for maintenance and 

replacement use. 



#165582


SECTION 09650 

RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Resilient Flooring and Base Work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 



2. Carpet - Section 09680 




2. Resilient Tile Institute RTI 

3. Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute WFSI 

1.03 SAMPLES 


B. Provide standard manufacturer's samples to the Architect. 



B. Store materials to protect from damage. 


A. The Contractor shall guarantee that work executed under this Section will be free from defective materials 

and/or workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion. 

B. The Contractor further agrees that he will, at no expense to the Owner, repair and replace such defective 

work and other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the guarantee period. 


A. Provide product data or MSDS indicating VOC emissions in grams/liter (g/L) for the following products: 






B. Provide product data indicating FloorScore certification OR compliance with California Department of 

Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using 

Small-Scale Chambers, including 2004 Addenda. 



A. Armstrong 

B. Azrock 

C. Flexco 

D. Kentile 

E. Roppe 

F. VPI 


A. Vinyl Composition Tile: 

1. 12"x12"x1/8"; colors and patterns as shown in the finish schedule on the drawings; 

NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 

B. Rubber Base: 


#165582

Section 09650 

Page 2 

1. Coved base, 4"x .080 gage, (1/8" thick) Fed. Spec. SS-W4Da, Type I. Color and manufacturer 

equivalent to that listed in the finish schedule on the drawings. 

C. Primers and Adhesives: 

1. As recommended by tile and base manufacturers, and which will produce good and permanent bond 

between subfloor and tile, and between wall surfaces and base. 

2. Provide Armstrong S-515 Moisture-Resistant adhesive, must be compliant at 0 g/L VOC for VCT at all 

standared auditoriums. Provide Fritz FA-88, must be compliant at 0 g/L VOC adhesive with Fritz 

recommended primer for XD auditorium remodals/additions. OR if contractor does not allow for proper 

cure time of concrete subfloor then use Fritz-FA88 at ALL auditoriums. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 

3. All adhesives, sealants and primers much comply with Section 01352 Indoor Air Quality Management 

Plan 

D. Vinyl Reducer Strip: Standard 1" wide tapered vinyl edging. Color to be Black. 

E. Vinyl Snap-Down Divider: Color to be black and equal to: 

1. Flexco #62 Standard edge with #101 smooth aluminum track where carpet abuts a dissimilar floor finish 

of lesser thickness. 

2. Flexco #63 1-1/2" T with #101 smooth aluminum track where carpet abuts a dissimilar floor finish of 

equal thickness. 

F. Vinyl Stair Nosing: Johnsonite VCD-40 (Black) for auditoriums stages double undercut carpet vinyl 

stair nosing. Color to be Black. Use Tempo adhesive. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 



A. Inspect the substrates before starting work and notify the Contractor in writing with copies to the Architect of 

apparent conditions that will result in an inferior installation. Do not proceed with work until defects are 

entirely corrected. 

B. Installation of materials constitutes the acceptance of the substrates and defects in the finished installation 

shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. 


A. Resilient Flooring Installation: 

1. Layout tile work so that no tiles less than half size occur. 

2. Place resilient tile with approved adhesive in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 

3. Butt tiles tightly to vertical surfaces, nosings, edgings, and thresholds. 

4. Place tiles tightly laid, even, and in straight parallel lines. 

5. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, and in closets and similar spaces. 

6. Lay in “checkerboard” pattern with grain in adjacent units running 90º to each other. 

B. Rubber Base Installation: 

1. Install base and accessory items in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures. Use base 

adhesive as recommended by the base manufacturer. 

2. Cut base and fit evenly around projections and into trim strips. Fit closely and evenly at joints. 

3. Install in as long lengths as possible. Do not install pieces less than 1'-0" long; instead shorten preceding 

piece to allow extra length. 

4. Use premolded exterior corners at coved base. 

5. Neatly miter interior corners. Push down base to follow contours and irregularities in floor. 

6. Score back of rubber base at inside corner to fit tightly to wall. 

C. Spots and smears of adhesive shall be removed immediately. 

D. Perform initial cleaning of entire resilient flooring installation at completion and leave in perfect condition. 

3.03 CLEAN-UP 

A. Remove excess materials and debris from the premises. 

B. Replace resilient base or accessories that are damaged, stained, or marred to the satisfaction of the Owner. 


A. Provide in accordance with Section 01750 - Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. 


#165582

Section 09650 

Page 3 

B. Provide 6% additional tile and base, of each type, identical to that installed for maintenance and replacement 

use. 



#165582


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Carpet work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 







2. Carpet and Rug Institute CRI 

SECTION 09680 

CARPETING 



B. Provide manufacturer’s literature and product data for adhesive. 

C. Samples, seam diagram and cut chart will be provided by Tenant. 

D. Provide product data or MSDS indicating VOC emissions in grams/liter (g/L) for the following products: 








B. Store materials to protect from damage. 

C. Store materials to allow easy access to the work and to avoid interfering with the Owner's operations. 


A. Qualifications of Contractor: 

The contract will be awarded only to a responsible sub-contractor, qualified by experience and in a financial 

position to do the work specified. In order to facilitate prompt award of the contract, the bidder shall 

submit with his proposal: 

1. Experience record showing the bidder's training and experience in similar work. 

2. List and brief description of similar work satisfactorily completed with location, date of contracts, together 

with names and addresses of owners. 

3. List of facilities and equipment available to do the work. 

B. The contractor shall be experienced in the supervision of carpet installation with at least five years experience 

in this type of work. The actual work shall be done by qualified and experienced mechanics working under his 

supervision or under the supervision of an experienced workroom supervisor who has also been doing this type 

of work for five years. 



A. Carpet: 28 ounce cut pile supplied by Cinemark USA, and installed by General Contractor. Refer to Section 

01010. 

B. Carpet Tile: Supplied by Cinemark USA, and installed by General Contractor. Refer to Section 01010. 

C. Adhesive: Approved by manufacture, and commpliant at 0 g/L VOCs 

D. Vinyl edges and trim as specified in Section 09650. 

E. Carpet protection: VELCRO Brand Carpet Protection. 

F. Subfloor filler: white premix latex requiring only water to produce cementitious paste. 




#165582

Section 09680 

Page 2 



corrected. 

B. Installation of materials constitutes the acceptance of the substrates and defects in the finished installation shall 

be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. 

C. Carefully check dimensions and conditions in the field to provide for proper fitting of carpet in areas indicated. 

D. Coved resilient base shall be installed under Section 09650, before proceeding with carpet. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES 

A. Carpet shall be terminated at centerline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or color is dissimilar, 

unless shown otherwise in drawings. 

B. Vinyl caps shall be installed at the transition wherever carpet is adjacent to a dissimilar floor finish. Refer to 

Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring and Base. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CARPET 

A. Apply adhesive following manufacturer’s directions for preparation and application. 

B. Carpet shall be glued directly over prepared concrete subfloor in accordance with manufacturers directions. 

Seams and cross-joints shall be fully secured and constant pile direction shall be maintained. 

C. Carpet shall be pre-conditioned, stretched and installed following manufacturer's printed instructions. Carpet 

shall be fitted neatly around architectural, mechanical, electrical outlets and furniture around perimeter of 

rooms into recesses, and around projections. 

D. No seams will be allowed at auditorium entries or at peak circulation areas. 

E. Edges of cut-outs shall be sealed with latex. 

F. After installation, provide protective covering of the carpet in any areas of the promenade where additional wet 

work is scheduled. 

3.04 CLEAN-UP 

A. Remove excess materials and debris from the premises. 

B. Replace carpet that is damaged before acceptance of the project by the Owner. 

C. Neatly trim sprouting tufts with sharp scissors. 


A. The Contractor shall guarantee that work executed under this Division will be free from defective materials and 

workmanship for a period of one year from the date of the final Certificate of Approval. 

B. The Contractor further agrees that he will, at no expense to the Owner, repair and replace such defective work 

and other work damaged thereby, which become defective during the guarantee period. 



#165582


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Special Coatings work at locations listed and as described in the Contract Documents. 

1. Exposed exterior concrete wall panels. 

2. Stucco. 


1. Concrete Wall Panels – Section 03411 

2. Concrete Masonry Units – Section 04200 

3. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim – Section 07620 

4. Portland Cement Plaster/Stucco – Section 09220 



SECTION 09800 

SPECIAL COATINGS 


A. Materials shall be applied by skilled craftsmen trained to do this type work and employed by an approved 

applicator approved by the manufacturer of the materials. 

B. Applicator shall present proof of having had previous experience in doing this type of work. 



B. Submit samples of coating applied to a 6"x 6" substrate sample. Include on backside: project name, material 

identification, color, and provision for Architect's approval. 

C. Before commencing work, supply samples selected by Architect of adequate size, of each coating type for 

Architect's approval. 

D. Provide product data or MSDS indicating VOC emissions in grams/liter (g/L) for the following products: 




A. Deliver and store materials undamaged, in original containers, with manufacturer's labels and seals intact. 

B. A room will be designated for storage of coating materials and equipment. Keep room neat and clean, and 

surrounding surfaces protected against damage. 

C. Material temperature shall be minimum of 35 degrees F to 100 degrees F. 


A. Upon completion and acceptance of the project, the special coatings subcontractor and the General Contractor 

shall furnish a joint written guarantee on the special coatings. 

B. Provide limited warranty for materials and work included in this section for a period of five years from the date 

of acceptance, against the following: 

1. Bond and weathering. 

2. Waterproofing above grade 

C. Defects resulting from faulty materials and/or workmanship that are found during the guarantee period shall be 

replaced by the subcontractor at his expense. 


A. Minimum surface temperature of 50º F 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after application until cured. 

B. No precipitation for 24 hours preceding or predicted for 24 hours after application. 

C. The following conditions may require dampening the surface prior to and during application: 

1. Wind-caused rapid drying of surface. 

2. Excessive surface temperature. 

3. Excessive air temperature. 

4. Direct sun. 

5. Low humidity. 



#165582

Section 09800 

Page 2 

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage or overspray resulting from work of this trade. If necessary, mask 

and/or cover adjacent surfaces, masonry, walls, equipment, etc. by suitable means. Make good such damage at 

own expense, to Architect's satisfaction. 


2.01 MANUFACTURER 

A. Sherwin-Williams or equal 


A. Cementitious Blockfiller & Topcoat: For use on concrete masonry units; for exterior applications, and 

both sides of auditorium demising CMU wall. 

1. Sherwin-Williams: Cement Plex 875, B42W200/B42V200 (as required to fill voids and provide a 

continuous substrate) 

2. Surface must be clean, dry, sound, and offer sufficient profile to achieve adequate adhesion. 

3. Minimum substrate cure is 28 days at 75 degress F. 

4. Remove all form release agents, curing compounds, salts, efflorescence, laitance, and other foreign 

matter by sandblasting, shotblasting, mechanical scarification, or suitable chemical means. Rinse 

thoroughly with water to achive a final pH between 6.0 and 10.0. 

5. 2 Finish Coats: Sherwin-Williams Loxon Acrylic Coating, A24W300 Series. 

B. Decorative Acrylic Coating: 

100% acrylic aggregate-filled coating used to produce a textured finish on properly prepared interior or 

exterior sufaces. May be used on concrete, aggregate block, sheetrock, cement, primed steel, and primed 

wood. 

1. Sherwin-Williams Primers for decorative acrylic coating: For tilt wall applications use Loxon Concrete 

Masonry Primer, A24W8300. For steel applications use Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310 

series, Foor Wood or Composition Board use Exterior Oil-Based Wood Primer, Y24W8020. For Drywall 

Interior use ProMar 200 Int Latex Primer, B28W8200. For Drywall Exterior use Exterior Latex Wood 

Primer, B42W8041. 

2. Sherwin-Williams Topcoat: UltraCrete Texterure Coating Fine A44W801. 

Apply two coats 50-80 sq ft/gal per coat depending on substrate porosity and texture size. 


#165582 

Performance Characteristics: 

Wind-Driven Rain Test ASTM D6904-03 Passes 

Water Vapor Permeance ASTM D1653 17.0 Perms 

Flexibility ASTM D522-Method B Passes 

Alkali Resistance ASTM D1308 Passes 

Mildew Resistance ASTM D3273/3274 Passes 

Impact Resistance ASTM D2794 Passes 

Salt Spray ASTM B117, 300 hours No Damage 

Adhersion ASTM D3359 Method B Passes 

Freeze/Thaw Reistance ASTM D2243 Passes 

C. Elastomeric Paint: Sherwin-Williams, two coat system, elastomeric paint meeting the following performance 

requirements, in colors described on the Drawings. Provide finish coating over EIFS &/or Stucco building 

surfaces ONLY WHEN EIFS &/or STUCO IS NOT AN INTEGRAL COLOR. A minimum total dry film 

thickness of 13-15 mils per coat (excluding texture elastomeric coating) and a surface with 10 or less pinholes 

per square foot is required for a waterproofing system. 

1. Primer: for EIFS &/or Stucco application use Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300 by 

Sherwin- Williams.

Section 09800 

Page 3 

2. Sherwin-Williams: ConFlex XL Smooth Elastomeric High Build Coating, A5-400 Series (optional). 

3. ConFlex XL Texture High Build Elastomeric Coating, A5-800 Series. Smooth texture is A5W800. 

A minimum total dry film thickness of 9.4-11.0 mils of topcoat recommended per coat. 

Performance Characteristics: 

Wind-Driven Rain Test ASTM D6904-03 Passes 

Water Vapor Permeance ASTM D1653 22 Perms 

Elongation ASTM D2370 300% 

Tensile Strength ASTM D2370 300 psi 

Freeze/Thaw Reistance ASTM D2243 Passes 

Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D522-Method B Passes 

Mildew Resistant – containing agents which inhibit the growth of mildew on the sureface of the coating. 

D. Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy: Sherwin-Williams Topcoat: Hi-Build Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, 

B71-100 Series. This product is a high performance, interior/exterior, VOC compliant, low odor, high 

film build, two-component, water based acrylic epoxy. It dries to a tough, tile-like finish that exhibits 

excellent durability and performance properties. It is resistant to moisture, abrasion, select chemicals, 

impact, and yellowing. Apply two coats 110-170 sq ft/gal per coat depending on substrate porosity and texture 

size. A minimum total dry film thickness of 4.0-6.0 mils per coat is required. 

Sherwin-Williams Primers for waterbased catalyzed epoxy: For tilt wall applications use Loxon Concrete 

Masonry Primer, A24W8300. For steel applications use Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310 series. For 

Drywall Interior use ProMar 200 Int Latex Primer, B28W8200. For Drywall Exterior use Exterior Latex 

Wood Primer, B42W8041. 

E. VOC emissions: Provide low VOC products. 




3. Paints and coatings: Comply with SCAQMD #1113 identified in Section 01352 


3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 

A. Allow 28-30 days after completion of panel erection &/or concrete mansory wall for curing of concrete &/or 

mortar. 

B. Examination: 

1. Examine substrate to which finely textured coating is to be applied. Do not proceed if unsatisfactory 

conditions exist which hamper proper application. 

C. Preparation: 

1. Surface to receive system shall be free of defects such as honeycombs, form marks, tie holes, concrete 

droppings, laitance, dirt, grease form release treatments, efflorescence, curing compounds, paint and other 

foreign materials. 

2. Remove all oil, dust, grease, dirt, loose rust, and other foreign material to ensure adequate adhesion, per 

manufactures recommendations. Form release agents, hardeners, etc. must be removed by sandblasting, 

shot-blasting, mechanical scarification , or suitable chemical means. 

3. Fill all cracks, voids, holes in excess of 3/8 inch and bugholes. 

D. Beginning of application means acceptance of substrate. 

G. Tolerances: Finish coat must be pinhole free. 


A. Maintain schedule of application of system in field office for owners/architect's review. 


#165582

Section 09800 

Page 4 

3.04 CLEANING 

A. Refer to Section 01710-Cleaning. 

B. Remove splashed, dropped, splattered and spilled materials from other surfaces immediately as recommended 

by manufacture. 

C. Recoat or replace those surfaces that cannot be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Architect. 



#165582

SECTION 09900 

PAINTING 


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Painting work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 

B. Examine carefully the Specifications as a whole for work, and be familiar with their provisions for painting. 

C. Painting subcontractor shall be responsible for installation of latex caulking as specified in Section 07920. 

D. Work in this section includes but is not limited to the following items: 

1. Building exterior including mechanical and electrical items: 

a. Hollow metal doors and frames. 

b. Mechanical and electrical items on the exterior of the roof of the building that are exposed to the 

weather including ferrous metal pipe. 

c. Other exposed ferrous metal surfaces that are not included above. 

d. Other non-ferrous metal surfaces that are not included above that are exposed to public view. 

e. Exposed wood surfaces, such as blocking, trim, etc. 

f. Exterior concrete columns. 

2. Building interior including mechanical and electrical items: 

a. Hollow metal frames. 

b. Steel handrails, metal stairs and ladders. 

c. Drywall surfaces not scheduled for other finish. 

d. Ceiling grid where noted in the Drawings. 

e. Exposed ferrous metal surfaces that are not listed above. 

f. Exposed wood surfaces, such as blocking, doors and trim. 

g. Exposed finished concrete floors as indicated in the Drawings. 

h. Diffusers, registers and grilles shown on drawings to be painted to match the surrounding surface. 

E. Work specified elsewhere that relates to this Section includes: 

1. Miscellaneous Metals - Section 05500. 

2. Steel Stairs - Section 05510. 

3. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim - Section 07620. 

4. Sealants and Caulking - Section 07920. 

5. Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100. 

6. Gypsum Wallboard - Section 09250. 

7. Acoustical Ceilings - Section 09510. 


A. Schedule deliveries to avoid delays and to prevent greater accumulations than can be suitably stored at the site. 

B. Store and mix materials in the assigned spaces. Protect floor if it is a finished surface. 

C. Gasoline and kerosene shall be stored outside the building in suitable containers marked as to their contents. 

D. Oily rags and debris shall be removed from the building at the end of each work period. 

E. Assigned storage shall be kept neat and clean. Keep paints covered. 

F. Deliver materials in their original unopened containers showing the name of the manufacturer, the grade, and 

brand, which shall be subject to the Architect's inspection. 



B. Submit (2) 6"x6" samples of each paint color including texture to architect two weeks before ordering 

materials. 


1. Interior paints & coatings to comply with standards identified in Section 01352 IAQ Management. 



A. Paint materials and wood stain materials shall be best grade and appropriate type as manufactured by 

Benjamin-Moore Company, Sherwin-Williams, Pratt and Lambert, Pittsburg Paints, Glidden. 


#165582


#165582 

Section 09900 

Page 2 

1. All interior products shall comply with standards identified in Section 01352 IAQ Management. 

B. Thinners and solvents shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 

C. Concrete Sealer: To seal bare concrete. 

1. At interior concrete floors use P35 Super Spec HP® 100% Solids Epoxy Floor Sealer/Finish by 

Benjamin Moore & Co. Provide in Battleship Gray color by mixing with P35-75. NO EXCEPTIONS 

2.02 COLORS 

A. Colors shall be obtained from the Architect to establish the intent of the decoration. 

B. Match the colors scheduled and make intermixes as required with tinting colors of the same manufacturer of 

the paint. 

C. Apply a color sample of the finish coat of each color, to a large area of the surface to receive each color for 

Architect's approval of the finish color. Do not apply this finish coat to other surfaces until Architect has 

approved all of the finish coat colors. 



A. Do not apply paint under conditions that could affect drying or final finish. 

B. Do not apply paint when temperature is below 50º F. or when excessive humidity is present. 

C. Do not apply paint on surfaces that will be exposed to direct rays of sun before drying sufficiently to prevent 

damage. 

D. Protect or remove hardware, escutcheons, fixtures, plates, covers, and other items subject to damage or 

discoloration from painting. Remove doors for painting tops and bottoms. Replace items removed for 

painting. 

E. Maintain proper ventilation in areas while painting is being done. 

F. Protect finished surfaces, and repaint work that has been damaged during the execution of this work. 

G. Do not paint or varnish, or enamel until preceding coats are thoroughly dry and hard. 

H. Sandpaper and dust varnishes and enamels with fine sandpaper before applying succeeding coats. 

I. Do not paint interiors until building and surfaces to be painted have been properly dried and cured. 


A. Examine finished surfaces to receive painting before beginning work. 

B. Correct defects that could affect quality of finished work. 

C. Starting painting work shall be construed as evidence of acceptance of conditions under which work will be 

done. 

D. Clean surfaces to be painted, and spaces in which painting will be done, to broom-clean and dust-free. 

E. Remove soil, prints, stains, and adhered materials, that would effect finish painting. 

F. Retouch shop coats and prime coats as necessary. 

G. Fill voids between different materials by back putting with caulking compound. 

3.03 MIXING 

A. Do mixing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 

B. Apply paint of consistency recommended by manufacturer. Additional thinning is permitted with specific 

approval. 

C. Use factory mixed colors, shades and tints. Job mixing permitted with specific approval. 


A. Painting shall be done by experienced skilled craftsmen trained to do this type of work. 

B. Apply paint according to manufacturer's recommendations by brushing, spraying, or rolling. Other methods of 

application permitted with specific approval. 

C. Paint shall be spread evenly, flowed on smoothly, and brushed without sags, runs, wrinkles, shiners, streaks, or 

brush marks. 

D. Do not paint surfaces containing excessive moisture. 

E. Retouch scrapped, abraded, or omitted places in shop prime coats before applying first coat. 

F. Sand surfaces between each application of paint, enamel or varnish. 

G. The following exterior coating applications are to be in addition to those specified elsewhere. 

1. Ferrous Metal: (including mechanical and electrical items of ferrous metal not factory finish painted) 

1st coat Sherwin-Williams Kem Bond HS, B50Z series

Section 09900 

Page 3 

2nd coat Sherwin-Williams Industrial Enamel HS, B54 series (Note: omit first coat on materials already 

primed) 

2. Galvanized Steel and Iron: (including mechanical and electrical items of galvanized iron and steel not 

factory finish painted). 

1st coat Wash surfaces with Neilson's Galvaprep 

2nd coat Sherwin-Williams ProCryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310 series 

3rd coat Sherwin-Williams Industrial Enamel HS, B54 series 

4th coat Same as third coat 

H. The following interior coating applications are to be in addition to those specified elsewhere. 

1. Ferrous Metals including metal doors and frames 

1st coat Sherwin-Williams Kem Bond HS, B50Z series 

2nd coat Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss, B34-200 series 

3rd coat Same as second coat 

2. Drywall - Satin: 

Texture: USG Spray texture finish: “orange-peel” 

Primer: Apply manufacturer's recommended primer compatible with specified finish coat. 

Finish: 2 coats of Glidden premium line in finished described on drawings 

3. Wood Semi-Gloss: 

Primer: Sherwin-Williams Multi-Purpose Latex Primer/Sealer, B51W8020 

Finish: 3 coats of Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss, B35-200 series 

I. Other exposed surfaces and areas not specifically mentioned above and which are not covered in "Related 

Work", or items listed in "Do not paint" paragraph, shall be painted with not less than two coats of an 

appropriate type of paint as directed by the Architect unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 

J. Provide the following coatings where noted on the Drawings. Apply in strict accordance to manufacturer's 

preparation and application instructions. 

1. Benjamin Moore P35 Sealer at interior concrete floors not scheduled for other finishes: 

a. Finish: 2 coats. 

b. Surface Preparation: Remove all oil, grease and fats using Super-Spec HP Oil and Grease Emulsifier 

(P83) according to the directions. Concrete surfaces should be etched with Super Spec HP Concrete 

Pretreatment & Etch (P85). Allow new concrete to cure at least 30 days. 

c. Apply by squeegee and roller or brush at a spread rate of 325 sq. ft. per gallon. The best way to 

achieve this on a smooth etched surface is by initially preading the coating with a notched squeegee 

and then back rolling with a shed resistant ¼” to 3/8” roller to remove squeegee lines. Do not allow 

to puddle or pool on the floor. A second coat should be applied after first coat is dry to fill extraporous 

areas and produce a smooth surface. 

3.05 CLEANING 


B. Remove splashed, dropped, splattered and spilled paint from the hardware, fixtures, glass, ceramic tile, and 

building parts. 

C. Remove excess materials, containers, debris and equipment from the site. 

D. Protect concrete from heavy traffic for 5 days after sealant is applied. 



#165582


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Wall Covering Work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 



2. Tile - Section 09310 


4. Prefinished Panels - Section 09985 

5. Corner Guards - Section 10260 




2. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America PDCA 

3. National Fire Protection Association NPPA 


#165582 

SECTION 09950 

WALL COVERING 


A. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

B. Provide 12"x12" samples to the Architect. 

C. Provide Architect with electronic copies of maintenance instructions for each wall covering. 

D. Instructions to contain manufacturer's recommended cleaning and application methods, including precautions 

in use of cleaning materials which may be detrimental to surfaces if improperly applied. 







E. VOC emissions: Provide product data indicating VOC emissions in grams/liter (g/L). 




A. Wallcoverings require a minimum four weeks lead-time. 

B. Schedule deliveries to avoid any delay in the work. 

C. Store wall covering in clean and dry area where temperatures are maintained at minimum 45 F with normal 

humidity. Do not store in upright position. 


A. Maintain surfaces and materials at minimum 60°F three days before and during application period. 

B. Provide adequate and continuous ventilation during work and after installation of wall covering. 

C. Wallcoverings must be hung under sufficiently bright light. If existing lighting is not sufficient, installerwiall 

supply supplementary lighting. 


A. The Contractor shall guarantee that work executed under this Section will be free from defective materials 

and/or workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion. 

B. The Contractor further agrees that he will, at no expense to the Owner, repair and replace such defective work 

and other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the guarantee period. 

1.07 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVES 

A. Refer to drawings. 



A. Provide wallcovering types as shown in the finish schedule at locations described in the Drawings:

Section 09950 

Page 2 

B. Apply using approved Adhesives or Construction Mastic as recommended by manufacturer's of the specific 

products. 

1. Adhesives and sealants: Provide low VOC products in compliance with California’s South Coast Air 

Quality Management District (SCAQMD) #1168 identified in Section 01352. 





entirely corrected. 

B. Installation of materials constitutes the acceptance of the substrates and defects in the finished installation shall 

be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. 

C. Do not proceed with soundfold work until acoustical insulation is in place. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF VINYL WALLCOVERINGS 

A. Fill nicks, gauges and other minor imperfections of gypsum wallboard surfaces with latex filler, and smooth 

flush with surface. Follow with primer coat of flat alkyd or oil base sealer recommended by wall covering 

manufacturer. Color of sealer shall match color of wall covering. 

B. Be certain pattern and color are as ordered. 

C. Rolls are numbered. Hang in sequence starting with lowest number. 

D. Adhesive and wall covering should be at room temperature (not less than 65º) at least 24 hours prior to and 

during hanging. Temperature should be maintained until thoroughly dried. 

E. Thoroughly kneed recommended paste. One gallon covers approximately 10-12 linear yards 54" of Type II of 

III material and 20-25 yards of Type I. See detailed instructions on paste container. 

F. Before cutting, examine pattern of color, correctness and uniformity. 

G. Cut three strips to desired length and apply paste using roller or brush. Allow paste to soak into fabric backing 

by folding strip and setting aside five to ten minutes before hanging. 

H. Hang strips by reversing alternate strips (except on match patterns). The following methods seaming are 

acceptable. 

1. Pre trim and butt. 

2. Overlap and double cut. 

3. Overlap and cut using a seam cutter. 

I. After installing three cuts, inspect for shading. If satisfactory, proceed with work. If not, and you are unable to 

determine reason for shading, stop work and contact supplier. Each set of three cuts should be judged 

acceptable before proceeding with the next. 

J. Headers - Full widths of material should be applied for the most satisfactory installation. Headers can cause 

shading problems. 

K. Corners - Wrap wall covering 4" to 6" beyond inside or outside corners. 

L. Use a flexible broad knife or still bristled brush to eliminate air pockets and secure wall covering to substrate. 

M. Fill in over doors and windows with panels cut in consecutive order from the roll from which the original full 

adjacent strips were cut. 

N. Apply fabric secure, smooth, clean, and without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure 

full bond to wall surface. 

O. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. 

P. Remove excess adhesive from each seam before proceeding with any further work. Wipe seam clean with dry 

cloth towel. Wash seam (after wiping) with clear water until all adhesive is removed before proceeding to next 

seam. 

Q. Install wall covering before installation of casings, trim, bases, cabinets, hardware, etc. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF WALL CARPET 

A. Surface Preparation 

1. Remove all previous wallcovering 

2. Surface protrusions and low spots should be sanded and filled so that the surface is clean, smooth and dry. 

3. Wall previously painted with a high gloss enamel paint should be sanded so that the glossy finish is 

removed. 

4. Surface should be thoroughly sealed. 

5. Use a quality wallcovering primer-sealer per architect's specification. 


#165582

Section 09950 

Page 3 

6. Ribs run vertically (parallel to selvage) in auditoriums and vestibules. Joints run horizontally at corridors, 

lobbies and mezzanine stair. Joints run parallel to floor on ramps, following the slope and mitering at 

angles at top and bottom. Carpet edges are to be covered with tile or corner guards. 

B. Installation Procedure 

1. Trim edges so as to balance seam between ribs (a very sharp edge must be maintained) 

2. Position the striped selvage on left-hand side when cutting and installing. 

3. Trim fabric on flat table prior to installing on the wall. 

4. Apply heavy-duty pre-mixed vinyl adhesive to fabric with a notched trowel. 

5. Install fabric from top to bottom, between two plumb lines for absolute vertical alignment. 

6. Fabric should then be firmly pressed to wall using 1/4" nap roller to insure maximum contact between 

adhesive and wall. 

C. Adhesives 

1. Adhesives to be used should be of the heavy duty vinyl type, with low water content, which dry clear or 

translucent. If clay base is used cleanliness and workmanship must be maintained. 

3.04 COORDINATION OF DRAPERY 

A. Preparation: 

1. Install blocking at bottom of fabric and around openings as required by Drawings. 

2. Install all acoustical insulation prior to initiating sound fold work. 

B. Installation of soundfold drapery will be by Cinemark USA. 

C. Wood trim shall be furnished and installed by the contractor. 

3.05 CLEAN-UP 

A. Clean wall coverings of adhesives, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. 

B. Remove excess materials and debris from the premises. 

C. Replace wall plates and accessories. 


A. Provide in accordance with Section 01750 - Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. 

B. Provide ten percent (10%) additional wall covering material, of each type, identical to that installed for 

maintenance and replacement uses. 



#165582

SECTION 09960 

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 



A. Extent of painting work is shown on drawings and schedules and as herein 

specified. 

B. The work includes painting and finishing of exterior exposed 

items and surfaces throughout project except as otherwise indicated. 

1. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in 

addition to any shop priming and surface treatment specified under 

other sections of work. 

C. The work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and 

ducts (including color coding), and of hangers, exposed structure and roof 

deck, exposed steel and iron work and primed metal surfaces of equipment 

installed under mechanical and electrical work, including radiation covers, 

except as otherwise indicated. 

D. The work includes preparation of surfaces for refinishing, and refinishing 

with coatings designated. (Bennington) 

E. “Paint” as used herein means all coating systems materials, including 

primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers and other applied 

materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 

F. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in “schedules” except where natural finish of 

material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically 

mentioned, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Architect 

will select these from standard colors available for materials systems specified. 

*Following categories of work are not included as part of field applied finish 

work, or are included in other sections of these specifications: 

1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under 

various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work and similar items. Also, 

for fabricated components such as architectural woodwork, wood casework and shop fabricated or 

factory built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories. 

2. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory finishing or 

installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) prefinished doors, finished 

mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures and air diffusers, switchgear and 

distribution cabinets. 

3. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or 

ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility 

tunnels, pipe spaces, and duct shafts. 

4. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, 

copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting unless otherwise 

indicated. 

5. Operating Parts and Labels: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as 

valve and damper operations, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not 

require finish painting unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Do not paint over any code required labels such as Underwriters’ 

Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, 

performance rating, name or nomenclature plates. 


A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer’s technical information, including paint label analysis and 

application instructions, for each material proposed to use 

B. Samples - Submit full range of standard color samples for Architect’s review. 


#165582


#165582 

Section 09960 

Page 2 

C. Mockup - Provide minimum 4’ X 4’ sample of each color selected for final review applied to base 

material simulating field conditions. 


A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing 

manufacturer’s name and label. 

1.04 JOB CONDITIONS 

A. Apply water base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and 

surrounding air temperatures are between 50°F (10°C) and 90°F (32°C), unless 

otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s printed instructions. 

B. Apply solvent thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and 

surrounding air temperatures are between 45°F (7°C) and 95°F (34°C), unless 

otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s printed instructions. 

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 

85%, or to damp or wet surfaces unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s 

printed instructions. 

1. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if area and surfaces to 

be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by 

paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. 

D. Apply paint only with minimum 50 FC light provided at all surfaces. 

E. Provide barriers to occupied portions of the facility during painting and curing 

operations. 

F. At all interior applications, provide ventilation of at least 6 air changes per hour 

during painting and curing operations. 

PART 2 - PRODUCT 

2.01 COLORS AND FINISHES 

A. Surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the Finish Schedule of the contract 

documents. 

B. Prior to beginning work, Architect will make selection from manufacturer’s complete range of colors for 

surfaces to be painted. 

C. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, application types to suit substrates and service indicated. 

1. Lead content in pigment, if any, is limited to contain not more than 0.6% 

lead as lead metal based on the total non-volatile(dry film) or paint by 

weight. 

D. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paint used. Review other 

sections of these specifications in which prime paint are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings 

system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information in characteristics of finish 

materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. 

Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify Architect in 

writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. 

2.02 MATERIAL QUALITY 

A. Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured 

by approved paint materials manufacturer. 

1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are for the intended purpose of 

establishing a minimum standard of quality. 

2. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. 

Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within 

recommended limits. 

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 

1. Tnemec Company, Inc., Kansas City, MO, (866-317-3206) 

2. Architect-approved equivalent.

Section 09960 

Page 3 



A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied, and notify 

Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to 

proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have 

been corrected in a manner acceptable to Applicator. 

B. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator’s acceptance of surfaces and other conditions 

within any particular area. 

C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions 

otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION 

A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer’s 

instructions and as herein specified for each particular substrate condition. 

1. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, 

lighting fixtures and similar items in place and not to be finish painted, or 

provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting 

operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and 

adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, 

reinstall removed items. 

2. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. 

Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and 

painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, 

newly painted surfaces. 

3. Wash all existing surfaces with solution of trisodium phosphate or equal 

cleaner, followed by a wash with clear water. 

B. Cementitious Materials 

1. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete and concrete block to be painted by removing 

efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils and by roughening as required to remove glaze. 

2. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by 

performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently 

alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition 

before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture 

content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer’s printed directions. 

3. Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial 

solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean 

water to neutralize acid, and allow to dry before painting. Follow 

manufacturer’s preparation instructions for surfaces if different from above. 

C. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral 

spirits and sandpaper as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view and dust off. 

Scrape and clean small, dry seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot 

sealer before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finished surfaces 

with putty or plastic wood filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. 

1. Prime, stain or seal wood required to be job painted immediately upon 

delivery to job. Prime, stain or seal edges, ends, faces, undersides and 

backsides of such wood, including cabinets, counters, cases and paneling. 

2. When transparent finish is required, use finish similar to finish coat for 

backpriming. 

3. Backprime paneling on interior partitions only where masonry, plaster or 

other wet wall construction occurs on backside. 

4. Seal tops, bottoms and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat 

of varnish or equivalent sealed immediately upon delivery to job. 

5. Existing wood to be refinished shall be fully stripped of existing finishes. (Bennington) 


#165582

Section 09960 

Page 4 

D. Ferrous Metals - Clean ferrous surfaces which are not galvanized or shop coated of oil, grease, dirt, 

loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical clean. 

1. Touch-up shop applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other sections 

of these specifications. Clean and touch-up with same type shop primer. 

E. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean surfaces per ASTM D 6386-99 (2005) as a minimum. Follow manufacturer’s written 

recommendations. Remove all passivators. 

3.03 MATERIAL PREPARATION 

A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. 

B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers 

used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign 

materials and residue. Maintain limited storage quantities as acceptable to the Fire 

Department. 

C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as 

required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film, 

and if necessary, strain material before using. 


A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Use applicators and techniques best 

suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 

1. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show 

through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and 

appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, 

corners, crevices, weld and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness 

equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint 

surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final 

installation of equipment. 

3. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces unless otherwise 

indicated. 

4. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel coat. 

6. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop primed and 

touch-up painted unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise 

prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 

1. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. 

Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or 

feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat 

of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. 

C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer’s recommended spreading 

rate to establish a total dry film thickness as recommended by coating manufacturer. 

D. Structural Steel : Wash all surfaces with degreasing solution to remove oil and clean per SSPC-SP3. 

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to those items 

exposed in occupied spaces. 

F. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has 

not been prime coated by others. 

1. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first 

coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 

G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform 

finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or 

other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 


#165582

Section 09960 

Page 5 

H. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass smooth surface film of even luster. 

Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes or other 

surface imperfections. 

I. Refinishing Wood Surfaces: Sand all existing clear finish wood surfaces. Fill all holes with stainable 

wood putty. Stain all blemishes to match existing color. Apply two (2) coats satin urethane finish. 

J. Refinishing Plaster and GWB Surfaces: Clean all surfaces per ASTM D 4258. Fill all holes and 

blemishes; sand, prime and paint per new finishes. 


A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags 

at end of each work day. 

1. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint 

spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing 

and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished 

surfaces. 

B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and 

finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as acceptable to 

Architect. 

1. Provide “Wet Paint” signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. 

Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection 

of their work after completion of painting operations. 

2. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged 

or defaced painted surfaces. 

3.06 FINISH PAINTING SCHEDULE 

A. The following finish systems refer to products of Tnemec Company, Inc., unless indicated otherwise. 


#165582 

1. EXTERIOR MASONRY, PREVIOUSLY UNCOATED-Block, Brick, Precast, Cast in Place, 

Concrete (Water repellency, graffiti protection) 

Coat 1: Tnemec/Chemprobe Series V626 Dur A Pell GS at 75 to 150 sq ft. per gal. 

Coat 2: Same as Coat 1 

2. New EXTERIOR MASONRY PRECAST AND CONCRETE-Block, Brick, Cast in Place 

Concrete 

Coat 1: Tnemec Series 156 Enviro-Crete at 8-10 mils DFT (Dry Film Thickness) 

Coat 2: Same as Coat 1 

3. EXTERIOR PLASTER,GLAZED BRICK,AND PREVIOUSLY PAINTED 

MASONRY 

Coat 1: Tnemec Series 151 Elasto-grip 3.04 - 4.0 mils DFT 

Coat 2: Tnemec Series 180 W. B. Tneme Crete at 5.0 to 7.0 mils DFT 

4. Existing Exterior Ferrous Metal 

Coat 1: Tnemec135 Chembuild at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT 

Coat 2: Tnemec 1028 Enduratone at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT 

5. New EXTERIOR FERROUS METAL 

(Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP#6) Coordinate w/sections 05120, 05500 

Coat 1: Tnemec Series 90-97 Tneme-Zinc (shop applied) at 3.0 mils DFT 

Coat 2: Tnemec Series N69/V69 Epoxoline at 3.0 mils DFT 

Coat 3: Tnemec Series 1080 Endura-Shield at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT 

6. EXTERIOR NON-FERROUS METAL 

(Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP#1) Followed by SSPC-SP3 or SP7

Section 09960 

Page 6 

Coat 1: 

Coat 2: 

Tnemec Series N69/V69 Epoxoline at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT 

Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT 

7. EXTERIOR GALVANIZED METAL 

(Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP7 Brush-off Blast) 

Coat 1: Tnemec Series N69/V69 Epoxoline at 2.5 – 3.0 mils DFT 

Coat 2: Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield at 2.5 – 3.0 mils DF 

8. EXTERIOR ALUMINUM 

(Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP1 and sanding with Scotch Bright pads) 

Coat 1: Tnemec Series N69/V69 Epoxoline at 2.5 – 3.0 mils DFT 

Coat 2: Tnemec Series 1929 Enduratone at 2.5 – 3.0 mils DF 

9. INTERIOR CONCRETE AND CMU Walls (not receiving Series 158) 

(Surface Prep. Per ASTM D 4258 & 4259; Series 130 only used for CMU) 

Coat 1: Tnemec Series 130 Envirofill at 100 sq. ft. per gallon 

Coat 2: Tnemec Series 113/114 Tufcoat at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT 

Coat 3: Tnemec Series 113/114 Tufcoat at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT 

10. New INTERIOR CONCRETE FLOORS (Moderate Traffic, Clear Finish) 

(Surface Preparation: ASTM D 4260 & SSPC-SP13.) 

Coat 1: Tnemec Series 203 Epoxoprime LV at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT 

Coat 2: Tnemec Series 296 Enviro-Tread UR at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT 

11. INTERIOR Ferrous and non Ferrous METAL-Previously Painted 

(Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP2 orSP3) 

Coat 1: Tnemec Series 135 Chembuild at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT 

Coat 2: Tnemec Series 1028 Enduratone at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT 

Coat 3: Same as Coat 2 if required for proper hiding 

12. ANTI-MICROBIAL COATING SYSTEM (ceiling & upper walls) 

(Surface Preparation per primer product data sheet) 

Coat 1 for Wood and Concrete: Tnemec Series 151 Elasto-Grip at 200 to 

350 sq. ft./gal. 

Coat 1 for Metal: Tnemec Series 135 at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT 

Coat 2: Tnemec Series 158 Bio-Lastic at 6-7 mils DFT. 

Coat 3: Tnemec Series 158 Bio-Lastic at 6-7 mils DFT. 



#165582


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Prefinished Panels work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 

SECTION 09985 

PREFINISHED PANELS 


A. Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer's original, unopened labeled containers. Each container shall 

be identified with material name, date of manufacturer and color. 

B. Store materials off the floor assure proper protection from water and cover if necessary. 

C. Protect items from damage at times. 

D. Refer to Section 01340 - Submittals. 

E. Provide standard manufacturer’s samples and product literature to Architect. 



A. Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels: 

1. Shall be Class A flame spread rated Low Smoke/Fire-X Glasbord pebbled texture faced, as 

manufactured by Kemlite Corp. of Joliet, Illinois (or equal FRP fire-rated panels as manufactured by 

Marlite, Filan or others). 

2. Wall panels as scheduled on the drawings shall be floor to ceiling height in locations shown on 

drawings; 3/32" and/or .09" thick, of colors as scheduled. 

3. Provide moldings and fasteners recommended by manufacturer for a complete installation. 

2.02 CLEAR SEALANT 

A. Shall be acrylic as manufactured by Pecora or equivilant. 

2.03. VOC EMISSIONS: Provide low VOC products. 

1. Provide low VOC products: Comply with Section 01352 IAQ Management. 


3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION 

A. Walls must be thoroughly dry before panels are applied. 

B. Walls shall be plumb, without high or low spots. 

C. Backs of panels and walls shall be free from dirt, dust, and grease, and shall be cleaned with mineral 

spirits, using normal safety precautions. 


A. Panel installation shall always begin from the corners of a room or space. 

B. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for panel installation. 

3.03 CLEAN-UP 

A. Clean up work of other trades damaged and/or marred during the installation of fiberglas reinforced 

polyester panels. Panel surfaces shall be clean and uniform in appearance. Clean up debris caused by the 

work of this Section, keeping the premises clean and neat. 



#165582


#165582

SECTION 10150 

TOILET PARTITIONS 


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Install Toilet Partitions provided by Cinemark USA as indicated by the Contract Documents. 







A. Source quality control: 

1. Humidity 100% @ 100º F - 1000 hrs. 

2. Water Soak @ 105º F - 1000 hrs. 

3. Wear resistance: NEMA LP-2.01, 800 cycles. 

4. Scratch resistance: Gardner method, 400-600 GM. 


A. Meet requirements of Section 01340 - Submittals. 

B. Show methods of anchoring, details of construction, gauge of metal, and hardware. 

C. Furnish color samples for color selection by the Architect as shown on plans. 


A. Deliver material in manufacturer’s original unopened and undamaged packages. 

B. Store in original packaging under protective cover and protect from damage. Stack containers in 

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 

C. Handle materials in such a manner as to prevent damage to products or finishes. 


A. Coordinate size and location of partition mounted accessories cut-outs with toilet accessory work. 


A. Upon completion and acceptance of the project, furnish to the Owner through the Architect a 

written guarantee. 

B. Guarantee items and work included in this Section for a period of one (1) year from the date of 

acceptance against defects in materials and workmanship. 

C. Defects resulting from faulty materials and/or workmanship during the guarantee period shall be 

repaired or replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 



A. American Accessories Inc. - NO SUBSTITUTIONS - Furnished by Cinemark USA for 

installation by contractor. Contact Amy Babb, American Accessories Inc., 903.465.5005, 

National Sales Manager. 

B. Mills, Inc. – Bradley Manufacture - NO SUBSTITUTIONS - Furnished by Cinemark USA for 

installation by contractor. 

2.02 PARTITION TYPES 

A. Floor mounted overhead braced: Pennsylvania Series PA-4 by American Accessories or Sentinel 

by Bradley. 

B. Doors: 


#165582

Section 10150 

Page 2 

1. Toilet for handicapped: Out swinging. Door width 34” or 36”. 

2. Other toilets: In swinging 

3. Set hinges to hold doors open at 15 degrees. 

C. Furnish devices appropriate to properly anchor partitions to walls and floor. 

D. Urinal Screens – 12”x42” with 5” pilasters. 

2.03 CONSTRUCTION 

A. Finish: 1/16” thick high pressure plastic laminate phenolic; NO SUBSTITUTIONS for colors 

and manufacturers listed on the Drawings: 

1. Compartment doors: color (refer to drawings). 

2. Partitions: color (refer to drawings). 

3. Stiles: color (refer to drawings). 

2.04 REINFORCING FOR ACCESSORIES 

A. Provide reinforcement in each partition for anchoring toilet paper holder and grab bars specified in 

Toilet Accessories Section. Template will be supplied to the Toilet Compartment supplier for 

locating the reinforcement by the Toilet Accessories supplier. 



A. Erect enclosures in a rigid and substantial manner, straight, and plumb with horizontal lines level. 

Evidence of drilling, cutting and fitting on walls and floor finish shall be concealed by the finish 

work. 

B. Furnish and install blocking, bracing, or framing members within the walls that may be required in 

addition to that installed by other trades to adequately anchor and permanently secure items in such 

a manner to withstand loading to which the partitions and screens might be subjected. 

C. Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform from top to bottom and shall not exceed 

3/16”. Doors and hardware shall be carefully adjusted and left in perfect working order. 

3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING 


B. Upon completion of the installation, clean work thoroughly, including the work of others which 

has been soiled by a result of this work, and leave in a condition satisfactory to the Architect. 

C. Take proper precautions to protect the work of others as well as this work and be responsible for 

damage incurred as a result of work under this section. Damage to paint, drywall, tile, etc. must be 

repaired and restored to former finish by this Contractor at his own expense. 



#165582


SECTION 10200 

LOUVERS 

1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Furnish and install all louvers, bird screens, blank-off panels, structural supports and attachment brackets as 

shown on the drawings, as specified, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 

B. The louvers to be furnished include the following: 

1. Formed metal louvers. 

C. Related sections include: 

1. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealants installed in perimeter joints between louver frames and 

adjoining construction. 


A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. 

1. AMCA Standard 500-L-99 Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating 

2. AMCA Publication 501 Application Manual for Louvers 

B. The Aluminum Association Incorporated 

1. Aluminum Standards and Data 

2. Specifications and Guidelines for Aluminum Structures 

C. American Society of Civil Engineers 

1. Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 

D. American Society for Testing and Materials 

1. ASTM B209 

2. ASTM B211 

3. ASTM B221 

4. ASTM E90-90 

E. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association 

1. AAMA 800 Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants 

2. AAMA 605.2 Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions 

and Panels 

3. AAMA TIR Metal Curtain Fasteners 

4. AAMA 2605-98 Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels 

F. Canadian Standards Association 

1. CAN3-S157-M83 Strength Design in Aluminum 

2. S136 94 Cold Formed Steel Structural Members 


A. Product Data. 

1. Air flow and water entrainment performance test results. 

2. Material types and thicknesses. 


a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content 

per unit of product. 

b. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 

c. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled content product 

in the assembly by weight. 


a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance 


b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between 


c. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials; include materials 

cost only. 

d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or manufactured in separate 

locations, provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage by weight of 

each component per unit of product. 


#165582

Section 10200 

Page 2 

B. Shop Drawings. 

1. Include elevations, sections and specific details for each louver. 

2. Show anchorage details and connections for all component parts. 

3. Include signed and sealed structural calculations. 

C. Samples. 

D. Submit color chips for approval. 

E. Warranty: Manufacturer twenty year limited warranty against failure or excessive fading. 


A. Single subcontract responsibility: Subcontract the work to a single firm that has had not less than six (6) years’ 

experience in the design and manufacturing of work similar to that shown and required. 

B. Performance Requirements: Provide AMCA and BSRIA test data as required to confirm that the louvers have 

the specified air and water performance characteristics. 

C. Acoustical Performance: Where applicable, submit test reports to confirm that the louvers meet the specified 

STC and Noise Reduction requirements. 

D. Structural Requirements: Design all materials to withstand wind and snow loads as required by the applicable 

building code. Maximum allowable deflection for the louver structural member to be 1/180 or .075 inches, 

whichever is less. Maximum allowable deflection for the louver blades to be 1/120 or .50 inches across the 

weak axis, whichever is less. 

E. Professional Engineer Requirements: Drawings and structural calculations to be signed and sealed by a 

professional engineer licensed to practice in the state where the project is located. 

F. Warranty: Provide written warranty to the owner that all products will be free of defective materials or 

workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of installation. 


A. Delivery: At the time of delivery all materials shall be visually inspected for damage. Any damaged boxes, 

crates, louver sections, etc. shall be noted on the receiving ticket and immediately reported to the shipping 

company and the material manufacturer. 

B. Storage: 

1. Material may be stored flat, on end or on its side. 

2. Material may be stored either indoors or outdoors. 

3. If stored outdoors the material must be raised sufficiently off the ground to prevent it being flooded. 

4. If stored outdoors the material must be covered with a weather proof flame resistant sheeting or tarpaulin. 

C. Handling: 

1. Material shall be handled in accordance with sound material handling practices and in such a way to 

minimize racking. 

2. Louver sections may be hoisted by attaching straps to the jambs and lifting the section while it is in a 

vertical position. 

3. Louver sections should only be lifted and carried by the jambs. Heads, sills and blades are not to be used 

for lifting or hoisting louver sections. 



A. The louvers and related materials herein specified and indicated on the drawings shall be as manufactured by, 

or equal to: 

1. Construction Specialties, Inc. of Cranford, New Jersey (800-631-7379). 

2. Construction Specialties, LTD. of Mississauga, Ontario (888-895-8955). 

3. Nystrom of Brooklyn Park, MN (800.547.2635) 


A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B211, Alloy 6063-T5, 6063-T6 or 6061-T6. 

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B3209, Alloy 1100, 3003 or 5005. 

C. Provide material with maximum amount of recycled content available that achieves performance requirements 



#165582

D. Provide material with maximum amount of regional (within 500 miles) material feasible that achieves 


Section 10200 

Page 3 

2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Provide C/S louver models, bird screens, blank-off panels, structural supports and accessories as specified 

and/or as shown on the drawings. Materials, sizes, depths, arrangements and material thickness to be as 

indicated or as required for optimal performance with respect to strength, durability, and uniform appearance. 

B. Louvers to be mechanically assembled using stainless steel or aluminum fasteners. 

C. Include supports, anchorage, and accessories required for complete assembly. 

2.04 LOUVER MODELS 

A. LSA42: 

2.05 FINISHES 

A. General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and application 

recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory. Protect finishes on exposed 

surfaces prior to shipment. Remove scratches and blemishes from exposed surfaces that will be visible after 

completing finishing process. Provide color as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect. 

B. Powder Coating: 

1. All louvers shall be finished with C/S Powder Coat, a coating to be 1.5 to 3 mil. thick full strength 100% 

resin Fluoropolymer coating. Finish to allow zero VOCs to be emitted into facility of application. Finish 

to adhere to a 4H Hardness rating. 

2. All finishing procedures shall be one continuous operation in the plant of the manufacturer. The coating 

shall meet or exceed all requirements of AAMA specification 2605-5 “Voluntary Specification for High 

Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.” 

3. The louver manufacturer shall supply an industry standard twenty year limited warranty against failure 

or excessive fading of the Fluoropolymer Powder Coat finish. This limited warranty shall begin on the 

date of material shipment. 

2.06 BIRD SCREENS 

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all louvers to be furnished with mill finish bird or insect screens. 

B. Screens to be 5/8” (15.9mm) mesh, 0.050” (1.27mm) thick expanded and flattened aluminum bird screen 

secured within 0.055” (1.40mm) thick extruded aluminum frames. Frames to have mitered corners and corner 

locks. 



A. Examine openings to receive the work. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation of the work. 

B. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements so that the work will be 

accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure. 

C. Anchor louvers to the building substructure as indicated on architectural drawings. 

D. Erection tolerances: 

1. Maximum variation from plane or location shown on the approved shop drawings: 1/8” per 12 feet of 

length, but not exceeding ½” in any total building length or portion thereof (non-cumulative). 

2. Maximum offset from true alignment between two members abutting end to end, edge-to-edge in line or 

separated by less than 3”: 1/16” (shop or field joints). This limiting condition shall prevail under both 

load and no load conditions. 

E. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer or fabricator, and in 

accordance with his recommendations. Restore finish completely. Remove and replace members where cutting 

and trimming has impaired the strength or appearance of the assembly. 

F. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced members. Remove and replace any 

members damaged in the erection process as directed. 

G. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints. 


#165582


A. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed 

without leaving residue or permanent stains. 

Section 10200 

Page 4 

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Immediately clean exposed surfaces of the louvers to remove fingerprints and dirt accumulation during the 

installation process. Do not let soiling remain until the final cleaning. 

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to the 

material finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. 

C. Restore louvers and accessory components damaged during installation and construction so no evidence 

remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by the Architect, remove 

damaged materials and replace with new materials. 

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with a compatible air-dried coating that matches the color and gloss 

of the factory applied coating. 



#165582


SECTION 10260 

PROTECTIVE WALLCOVERINGS 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide Corner Guards where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete 

and proper installation. Corner guards should be in the scope of the Vinyl Wallcovering subcontractor. 



2. Wall coverings - Section 09950 


A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340 

B. Submit 2 - 12" long samples of each finish, color and style selected. 


1. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content 

per unit of product. 


3. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled content 



A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workman who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary 

crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper 

performance of the work of this Section. 


2.01 CORNER GUARDS 

A. Where called for on the Drawings, provide Korgard Wall Protection #G-815 (BLACK). 1 1/2”x 1 1/2" 

as corner guards in the arrangements shown on the Drawings, and as manufactured by Koroseal Wall 

Protection Systems. Install in 8’-0” & 12’-0” lengths, as shown on drawings. Contact Stacie Schueler 

with Koroseal Interior Products Group 214.284.6421 NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 

B. Where called on the Drawings, provide Koroseal Wall Protection Systems, Korogard standard 90 degree 

angle 16 gauge stainless steel with #4 satin finish, 1 ½” x 1 ½” as corner guards in the arrangements 

shown on the Drawings. Install in 8’-0” & 12’-0” lengths, as shown on drawings. Contact Stacie 

Schueler with Koroseal Interior Products Group 214.284.6421 NO SUBSTITUTIONS 

2.02 PREFINISHED WALL PANELS 

A. Where called for on Drawings provide Korgard Wall Protection by In Pro Corp. Vinyl sheets with 

transitions, Thickness to be .040” (1mm), color shall be “Black”. Contact Stacie Schueler with Koroseal 

Interior Products Group 214.284.6421. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 


3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS 

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct 

conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory 

conditions are corrected. 


A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those 

trades for the work of this Section. 

B. Install the work of the Section in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and the 

recommendations of the manufacturer as approved by the Architect, anchoring components firmly into 

position in true alignment within a tolerance of one in 1000 vertically and horizontally. 


#165582

C. Attach securely using black pan head sheet metal screws spaced as shown on the drawings for installation 

over wallcarpet. 

D. Attach securely using silicon adhesive when installing over vinyl, tile and paint. 

END OF SECTION



#165582 

SECTION 10520 

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS & CABINETS 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and related items required for the complete installation of Fire 

Extinguishers and Cabinet work as indicated by the Contract Documents. 


1. Rough Carpentry - Section 06100. 

2. Sealants and Caulking - Section 07920. 

3. Painting - Section 09900. 


A. Refer to Section -01340 - Submittals. 

B. Contractor shall provide copies of plan with fire extinguisher locations marked after coordination of 

locations with local authorities. 


A. Order items to avoid delays in the work. 

B. Store items in their original unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's label. 

C. Protect items from damage. 



A. J.L. Industries 

B. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 


A. Fire Extinguisher : equal to J.L. Industries' Cosmic 5E. 

B. CO2 type extinguisher: Provide one equal to J. L. Industries Sentinel 5 at projection room in addition to those 

normally required. 

C. Semi-Recessed Cabinet: Shall be "Ambassador" steel Series No. 1017 with locking V10 Door, semi-recessed. 

US10 bronze anodized finish. 

D. Fire Rated Cabinet: Shall be "Ambassador" steel Series No. 1013 with locking V10 Door. Provide when local 

codes prevent use of standard recessed model in rated partitions. US10 bronze anodized finish. 

E. Shall be used at not public areas; Storage, Mezzanine, Concession, etc. #817 or 1007, Larsen’s Manufacturing 

or equal. 



A. General 

1. Inspect areas, surfaces, rough-in, to make sure they are ready to receive the items. 

2. Verify location of items. 

3. Installation of items constitutes acceptance of the areas, surfaces and rough-ins and defects resulting 

therefrom shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. 

4. Coordinate work with other trades. 

B. Install items and required anchors, grounds, etc. in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and 

the approved shop drawings. 

C. After inspection of the installation is approved by the Architect, remove labels and clean items. 

D. Provide one extinguisher for each 75' of travel distance. Coordinate locations with tenant prior to installation. 

Position extinguishers to comply with local, state and federal codes, contractor to coordinate. 

3.02 CLEAN-UP 


B. Protect work of other trades and protect items after they are installed. 

C. Defective items shall be replaced with matching items at the Contractor's expense. 

END OF SECTION


#165582

SECTION 10800 

TOILET ACCESSORIES 


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Install Toilet Accessories work as indicated by the Contract Documents. Verify that mounting 

heights meet ADA guidelines. 




3. Toilet Partitions - Section 10150 


A. Accessories shall be delivered and stored in their original unopened containers. 

B. Accessories shall be furnished complete with appropriate anchor devices. 



B. Submit brochures and shop drawings of items showing sizes of members, methods of 

construction and mounting techniques. 


A. Deliver and store items in manufacturer’s original unopened protective packaging. 

B. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces 

C. Maintain protective covers on units until installation is complete. 



A. American Accessories Inc., 2605 N. State Hwy 91, Denison, Texas 75020 - NO 

SUBSTITUTIONS. Contact: Amy Babb, American Accessories, Inc., 903.465.5005. National 

Sales Manager. 

B. Bradley Corporation, W142 N9101 Fountain Blvd., Menomonee Falls, WI 53051 - NO 

SUBSTITUTIONS. Contact: Bradley Corporation, 1.800.272.3539. 

2.02 ACCESSORY ITEMS, PUBLIC TOILETS 

A. Mounting Devices: Manufacturer’s standard devices and concealed anchor plates, suitable for 

each mounting surface. 

B. Feminine Napkin Disposals: Furnished by Cinemark USA for installation by Contractor. 

1. Bradley #4781-15 Napkin Disposal: Standard Series – Stainless Steel finish, with hinged 

cover and bottom with lock. Surface mounted, provide one at every women’s stall. 

C. Grab Bars: Furnished by Cinemark USA for installation by Contractor. 

1. Bradley – 812 Series: 1-1/2” O.D. heavy duty stainless steel Grab Bar with mounting 

flanges concealed by snap-on escutcheons, architectural satin finish. Grab bars shall be of 

length required by ADA. 

D. Electric Hand Dryer: Furnished by Cinemark USA for installation by Contractor. 

1. Excel – Xlerator Model XL-SB: Recess Mount, Automatic, with Brushed Stainless Steel 

Cover (Include optional Xlerator Recess Kit #40502 for ADA applications). 

E. Mirror: American Accessories – At all restrooms, quanity shown on drawings. Refer to Glass and 

Glazing Section 08810. Furnished and install by Contractor. 

F. Roll Paper Towel Dispenser: For use at scullery hand sinks. Furnished by Cinemark USA for 

installation by Contractor. 

G. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Furnished by Cinemark USA for installation by Contractor. One 

provided for every restroom stall. 


#165582

Section 10800 

Page 2 

H. Soap Dispenser: Furnished by Cinemark USA for installation by Contractor. 

I. Waste Receptacle and Towel Despenser: Furnished by Cinemark USA for installation by 

Contractor. 

1. Bradley – Model 2277: Recessed Towel Dispenser/ Waste Receptacle, Stainless steel finish, 

one provide in every restroom. 

2. American Accessories, Inc – Texas Series: TX-14RT, Roll Paper Towel & Waste, heavy 

stainless steel with #4 satin finish. 

J. Seat Cover Dispenser: Furnished by Cinemark USA for installation by Contractor. 

1. Bradley – Model 5831: Surface mounted seat cover dispenser, one provided for every 

restroom stall. 

K. Baby Changing Station: Furnished by Cinemark USA for installation by Contractor. 



A. Locate accessories as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with mounting heights as 

recommended by the manufacturer and ADA Accessibility Guidelines. 

B. Install anchoring devices in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, after other work is 

finished. 

C. Securely install accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, after other work is 

finished. 

D. After inspection of the installation and approval, remove labels and clean accessories. Adjacent 

work of other trades soiled by work under this Section shall also be cleaned. 

E. Defective accessories shall be replaced with matching accessories at the expense of the Contractor. 

F. Coordinate location of sanitary napkin disposal with the location of plumbing fitting at this wall to 

avoid conflict in servicing this unit. 

G. Provide supplier of toilet partition with a template for toilet accessories which are to be anchored 

to his partitions in order for the toilet partition fabricator to make provisions for reinforcing 

partitions. 



#165582

PART 1 

GENERAL 

SECTION 11201 

RAINWATER HARVESTING 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes engineering, fabricating, furnishing, and installing: 

1. Rainwater Harvesting System[s]. 

a. Roof collection system. 


1. Divisions 31 – 33 (2) – landscaping and irrigation sections. 

2. Division 07 (7) – roofing section(s). 

3. Division 22 (15) – plumbing. 


A. Rainwater Harvesting System: An assembly that collects, stores, and distributes rain water for use in 

situ; including water treatment as appropriate to intended use. 


A. Product Data: Submit product data on all components of the rainwater harvesting system[s]. Unless 

otherwise indicated, include the following for each type of product provided under work of this Section: 

1. Manufacturer’s brochure indicating equipment model(s). 




















B. Shop Drawings: For roof collection system, include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other 

work, for the following: 

1. Pumps. 

2. Storage. 

3. Connection to roofing system. 

4. Connection to irrigation system. 

5. Connection to plumbing system. 

C. Calculations: For roof collection system, submit the following: 

1. Maximum water capacity. 

2. Collection data: Include the following: 

a. average rainfall rate (inches annually) 

b. total collection area (s.f.) 

c. potential collection (s.f.= gallons) 

d. peak gallons @ 5"/hour 

e. peak gallons @ 5 min. duration 

f. available gallons 

3. Water Demand: Include the following: 


#165582

Section 11201 

Page 2 

a. Landscaping: 

total estimated planted area (acres) 

application rate / week (high) gallons 

application rate /week (low) gallons 

gallons required 

b. Fixture Demand: 

Fixtures by type, water use per person/day 

Gallons potable water required 

Gallons non-potable water required 

D. Designer/Installer Qualifications. 

E. Regulatory Requirements Documentation: 

F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Submittals: Provide the following: 

1. Operation and maintenance procedures, including variations of procedures appropriate for 

normal climatic conditions anticipated throughout an annual cycle of operations. 

2. Water testing laboratory contact information. 

3. Water testing requirements, schedule, kits, and equipment. 

G. Reports for Field Quality Control: Submit test reports and inspection reports to Owner. 

1. System Inspections. 

2. Water Quality Tests. 

H. Closeout Submittals: 

1. Warranty. 


A. Designer/Installer Qualifications: For work of this Section, engage an experienced rainwater consultant 

who has specialized in systems similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful 

in-service performance. Consultant shall: 

1. be a member in good standing of The American Rainwater Catchment Systems Association. 

2. have a minimum 3 years experience designing and constructing rainwater catchment systems 

similar to requirements for this Project. 

3. for potable systems, comply with agencies having jurisdiction. 

B. Single-Source Responsibility: To the greatest extent possible, obtain the system components from one 

source and from a single manufacturer. 

C. Pre-Construction Meeting: After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work of this 

Section, schedule and conduct meeting to discuss the Work of this Section and to coordinate with 

related Work. Convene pre-construction meeting to comply with requirements of Division 01 (1) and as 

follows: 

1. Notify all attendees at least two weeks prior to the conference. 

2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting Work of this Section, including, but not limited 

to: 

a. Owner, 

b. Contractor, 

c. Architect, 

d. Civil Engineer 

e. System Designer/Installer, 

f. Landscape Architect and Irrigation Installer, 

g. Roofing Membrane Provider/Installer, 

h. Owner's insurer, and if applicable; testing and inspecting agency representative. 

3. Review methods and procedures related to installation and operation of Work of this Section, 

including coordination with related Work. 

4. Document proceedings, including corrective measures or actions required, and furnish copy of 

record to each participant. 

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 

A. Coordinate the Work with installation of associated roofing, waterproofing, flashings, and roof 

accessories specified under other sections as the Work of this Section proceeds. 

B. Coordinate the Work with installation of associated irrigation and plumbing systems specified under 

other sections as the Work of this Section proceeds. 


#165582

Section 11201 

Page 3 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Warranty: Warrant the system against defects including equipment failure and leakage, except for 

defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, abnormal weather 

conditions unusual for warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: One year after date of Substantial Completion, 

PART 2 

PRODUCTS 

2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS 

A. Catchment Area: 

1. Roofing as indicated. 

B. Conveyance: 

1. Pump(s), sized as appropriate to water demands of facility. 

a. Roof collection system: Electric. 

b. Site collection system: Electric. 

2. Piping. Overflow pipe shall empty into a non-flooding area. Include separate inlet for 

intermittent treatment as is deemed necessary on basis of regular inspection/testing. 

C. Storage: 

1. Tank(s), sized as appropriate to water demands of facility. Above ground design. System 

design shall indicate load requirements for tank foundation. Tanks shall be accessible for 

routine maintenance. 

a. Potable systems: Tank shall be fabricated from FDA-approved materials. 

b. Biobased content: 

1) Water Tank Coatings: Coatings formulated for use in potable water storage 

systems. Provide minimum 59% biobased content. 

2. Cisterns. Below ground design; accessible for cleaning and maintenance. Provide screens for 

all openings. 

3. Ponds. Provide soil liner or synthetic liner. 

a. Where on-site soils or clay provide an adequate seal, compaction of these materials 

may be sufficient to line the pond. 

1) On-site soils may be used if they can be compacted to permeability of

Section 11201 

Page 4 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which system will be installed, with Designer/Installer 

present, for compliance with requirements. 

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and applicable 

regulatory requirements. 


A. General: Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction and as specified herein. 

B. System Inspection: System Designer/Installer shall inspect system installation and submit reports to 

Architect. Notify Architect 48 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection. 

1. Provide site inspection of system two weeks prior to Occupanc]. 

2. Provide site inspection of system immediately after storm event that may be severe enough to 

affect the system; provide inspection services for minimum 12 months after Final Completion. 

3. Provide site inspection of system seasonally, and not less than once every three months; 

provide inspection services for minimum 12 months after Final Completion. 

C. Water Quality tests: Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction and as specified herein. 

Comply with ASTM D4840 for chain of custody of water samples. [Provide on-line monitoring 

consistent with ASTM D3864.] 

1. Provide data on the following immediately after plants are established and monthly thereafter 

for minimum 12 months: 

a. Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD5). 

b. 

c. 

Total Suspended Solids (TSS). 

Fecal coliform. 

d. [xxxx]. 

2. Establish baseline water quality for rainwater harvesting systems for both influent and effluent. 

3. Provide comparison of test results with municipal water quality, and maintenance of system. 

4. Water testing shall be performed by a laboratory in compliance with agencies having 

jurisdiction. 



#165582

SECTION 11202 

WATER REUSE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes water reuse systems for: 

1. municipal-supplied reclaimed water 

2. in situ water reclamation 

a. rain water 

b. gray water 

c. black water 


2. 11201 Rainwater Harvesting 


A. Definitions pertaining to sustainable development: As defined in ASTM E2114 and as specified herein. 

B. Definitions pertaining to water reuse: As defined in ASTM E2635 and as specified herein. 

C. Black water: untreated wastewater from urinals and water closets. 

D. Gray water: untreated wastewater from bathtubs, showers, bathroom wash basins, clothes washing 

machines, and laundry tubs. It may also include condensation pan water from refrigeration equipment 

and air-conditioners, hot tub drain water, pond and fountain drain water, and cistern drain water. 

E. Reclaimed water: Water that is used more than one time before it passes back into the natural water 

cycle. Reclaimed water is considered nonpotable but may be highly treated and used for approved 

purposes other than drinking water. 

F. Recycled water: See reclaimed water. 

G. Water reuse: cycling water one or more times for beneficial use as reclaimed water. 




1. Water efficiency: 

a. Indicate water reuse rates in gallons per day (gpd) per unit for the following: 

1) municipal-supplied reclaimed water 

2) in situ water reclamation 

b. Water Budget: Submit water budget statement; [include calculations used in 

development of water budget]. Indicate how approved water budget increases water 

efficiency over baseline; and, indicate how water reuse system(s) complies with 

approved water budget. 

1) Baseline: Calculate baseline water budget using occupancy rate and [EPAct 

1992 standards for water fixtures] [xxxxx]. 

B. Designer/Installer Qualifications. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to [the International Plumbing Code and] applicable codes, 

rules, and regulations. 

B. Designer/Installer Qualifications: For work of this Section, engage an experienced licensed plumbing 

contractor who has specialized in systems similar to those required for this Project and with a record of 

successful in-service performance. Contractor shall: 

1. have a minimum 3 years experience designing, constructing, and installing water reuse systems 

similar to requirements for this Project. 

C. Pre-Installation Meetings: 


Section. 


a. Coordinate with installation of plumbing fixtures, equipment, and piping. 

b. Coordinate with rainwater harvesting system. 

c. Coordinate with municipal supplier. 


#165582

Section 11202 

Page 2 


4. Agenda: 

a. Tour, inspect, and discuss conditions of work. 

b. Review installation schedule. 

c. Review required permits and inspections. 

d. Review monitoring and maintenance. 

e. Review environmental procedures. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Submittals: 

1. Instructions indicating procedures for routine operation and maintenance of the water reuse 

system(s) as appropriate to: 

a. municipal-supplied reclaimed water 

b. in situ water reclamation utilizing: 

1) rain water 

2) gray water 

3) black water 

2. Instructions indicating procedures for normal and peak loading conditions, and periods of 

shutdown. 

a. Peak loading conditions shall include peak hydraulic loading and pollutant loading 

conditions. 

b. Periods of shutdown shall include: power failures, equipment failure, and normal 

maintenance shutdowns. 

3. Instructions indicating procedures for emergency response in the event of a failure of the 

system. 

1.4 MONITORING AND MAINTENANCE 

A. Provide regular maintenance for minimum one year from date of Substantial Completion. 

1. Monitor system [daily] [weekly] [monthly] [quarterly] [xxxx] to assess performance. 

a. Verify components are adjusted and functioning properly. 

b. Verify water quality is satisfactory for intended use. If in situ water reuse systems are 

used, monitor and test water quality in accordance with ASTM E2635. 

c. Verify water reuse rate is consistent with water budget. 

2. Make minor adjustments, if any, as necessary. 

3. Document system performance including: 

a. Rate and amount of water reuse. 

b. Quality of reclaimed water. If in situ water reuse systems are used, document quality 

of reclaim water before and after treatment. 

c. Adjustments, if any, to system. 

4. Provide recommendations for improvements to the system. 


2.1 WATER REUSE SYSTEM 

A. General: 

1. Provide system design with easy access for effective monitoring program and for effective 

maintenance and process control program. 

2. Provide dual distribution systems to prevent cross-connections of reclaimed water and potable 

water lines and the misuse of reclaimed water. 

a. Marking: Clearly mark distribution piping and use lavender (light purple) pipes to 

distinguish it from potable water. Provide piping certified and labeled “NSF-rw” in 

accordance with NSF Pipe Certification for Reclaimed Water End Use protocols. 

[b. Dye gray water blue or green with a food-grade vegetable dye.] 

3. Provide backflow prevention devices on reclaimed water lines to preclude the likelihood of 

incidental human misuse. 

B. Municipal-supplied reclaimed water: 

1. Provide system design so that the pressure of reclaimed water 10 psi lower than potable water 

mains to prevent backflow and siphonage in case of accidental cross-connection. 


#165582

Section 11202 

Page 3 

2. Run reclaimed water mains at least 12 inches lower in elevation than potable water mains and 

horizontally at least five feet away. 

3. Review the quality of reclaimed water to ensure there will be no harmful effects, such as salt 

buildup, to piping or equipment from long-term use. Adjust design as necessary. 

C. In situ water reclamation: Comply with requirements of ASTM E2635 and as follows: 

1. Water reclamation system shall be designed and implemented to provide for reliability and 

redundancy. System design shall take into account operations and treatment during normal and 

peak loading conditions, and periods of shutdown. 

2. Source water: Water captured from one or more of the following: 

a. rain water, including snowmelt and stormwater runoff. 

b. gray water 

c. black water 



A. Water: Coordinate with work specified in Section 01 57 19.13 (01354) – Environmental Management 

to provide water monitoring for surface and groundwater. 

B. Field Inspection: Verify installation conforms with approved system design and applicable codes, rules, 

and regulations. 

1. Confirm the reclaim water is disinfected by an approved method that employs one or more 

disinfectants such as chlorine, iodine, or ozone. 

2. Confirm the distribution piping and reservoirs are identified as containing nonpotable water. 

[3. Confirm the gray water is dyed blue or green with a food-grade vegetable dye.] 



#165582


SECTION 11400 

CONCESSION EQUIPMENT 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Provide installation of Concession Equipment as indicated by the Contract Documents. 

1. Work of this Section will be supplied and installed by Cinemark USA unless otherwise noted on itemized 

list in the Drawings. Provide coordination of mechanical and electrical roughing in and related work. 

2. Work of this Section consists of, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 

a. Provision of labor, plant, tools, uncrating and set-in-place of equipment specified, ready for final 

connection of services by mechanical and electrical sections. 

b. Verification of site dimensions. 

c. Supervision of equipment installation, and monitoring of service connections. 


1. Finish Carpentry - Section 06200 




5. Electrical - Division 16 


A. For fabrication and installation of the Equipment use only personnel who are thoroughly familiar with the 

recommended methods and trained in the required skills. Provide a competent supervisor during the site 

installation period. 

B. Equipment shall comply with applicable Standards, and shall meet the requirements of local inspection by 

authorities having jurisdiction. 








A. Submit shop drawings required in accordance with Section 01340. 

B. Deliver the manufacturer's instructions, maintenance manuals, and data regarding guarantees to the Cinemark's 

Consultant for review and further transmittal to Cinemark. 













only. 




E. Provide product data indicating VOC levels in gallons/liter (g/L) or no added urea-formaldehyde as required in 


F. Certification for Sustainable Forestry: 


#165582

Section 11400 

Page 2 




G. Submit copies of invoices for all wood materials identifying material costs not including labor. Invoices for 


1.04 SITE DIMENSIONS 

A. Dimensions shown on drawings or listed in the specifications are to be considered as a guide. It is the 

responsibility of this Section to check dimensions on the job site and to coordinate adjustments that may be 

necessary. 

B. If such adjustments or changes appear to affect the initial contract intent or conditions, immediately notify the 

Cinemark's Consultant. 

1.05 DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT 

A. The General Contractor will coordinate the delivery and installation of the Equipment, and the related work of 

other Sections. 

1.06 COOPERATION 

A. Supply to other Sections in sufficient time services, articles or equipment which requires building-in or 

overlapping coordination. Also notify other Sections regarding exact locations for openings, chases, anchors 

and other fittings required for the Equipment. 

1.07 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL 

A. Electrical equipment must conform to the requirements of the local Electrical Code. If the item specified is not 

approved, or if components are not so approved, it is the responsibility of this Section to obtain, at no extra 

cost to the Cinemark USA, the necessary approval from local authorities. Attach to each item of equipment 

which requires it, a certificate or label of approval. 


A. Protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation, and protect the installed work and 

materials of others. 


2.01 GENERAL 

A. Equipment supplied under this Section shall be made of the best grade materials, and shall be in strict 

accordance with the drawings and specifications. 

B. It is the responsibility of this Section to reconcile electrical and mechanical services and check locations of 

roughed-in work. Deviations or inadequacies are to be brought to the attention of the Cinemark USA's 

Consultant so that corrective measures, if necessary, can be made prior to equipment installation. 


A. Unless otherwise specified in the itemized List of Equipment, materials to be used in the fabrication of 

equipment by this Section shall be as follows: 

1. Stainless Steel: type 304, No. 4 finish one side, free from pits and imperfections, Gauges refer to U.S. 

Standard. 

2. Laminated Plastic: 1/16" in. thick for face and edges of panels or surfaces being clad. Where plywood or 

MDF panels or surfaces are being clad, apply manufacturer's plastic backing sheet. Plywood shall be 

minimum 5-ply, with veneer or solid lumber core, S2S; particle board shall be AWI with smooth dense 

surface, 3/4 in. thick. Vertical surfaces exposed to public to be plastic laminate. Interior surfaces and 

other vertical external surfaces to be Melamine. 

3. Millwork panels or surfaces: 

a. Sustainably Harvested Wood: Material shall be accredited by the Forest Stewardship Council 

b. Provide products with no added urea formaldehyde. 


5. Sealant shall be Dow Silastic or GE #SCS-1600, clear or metallic gray. Meet VOC SCAQMD Rule 1168 

identified in Section 01352 


#165582

2.03 ITEMIZED LIST OF EQUIPMENT 

A. Refer to drawings. 


Section 11400 

Page 3 


A. Prior to installation of the Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify 

that such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 

B. Verify that the Equipment may be installed in complete accord with the manufacturer's recommendations and 

the intent of the original design. 

3.02 DISCREPANCIES 

A. In the event of a significant discrepancy, immediately notify the Cinemark USA's Consultant. 

B. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until related problems have been resolved. 


A. Coordinate interface requirements for electrical and mechanical connections in a timely manner to permit 

orderly progress of the Work. 


A. Locate, assemble, position and properly install items of equipment. 

B. Leave installed work neat, clean and polished, well fitted into position, level and in proper operating condition. 

C. After installation has been completed and items checked (and adjusted where necessary) for satisfactory 

operation, arrange for inspection of the equipment. If items are found deficient or unsatisfactory, make 

necessary corrections to the approval of the Cinemark USA's Consultant. 

D. Concession Equipment supplied must be approved by authorities having jurisdiction, and must have necessary 

labels of inspection or approval fixed. 

E. Refrigeration compressors shall carry a five year warranty. 

F. Ship, deliver and store materials and items of equipment in factory containers with seals and labels intact 

wherever practical. Package materials and equipment or components in a manner to prevent damage to and 

marring of finished surface. 

G. Provide protection for finished surfaces after installation to prevent damage, marring and soiling due to 

construction activities. Such protection shall consist of suitable paper, plastic, fiber board or other similar 

materials adequately held in place by adhesive, tape or other means which will not stain or mark the equipment 

or the surfaces to which it is applied. 

H. During installation, clean up daily and deposit rubbish and debris in bin or container supplied by the General 

Contractor, who will unpack equipment. 

I. Upon completion of installation clean exposed surfaces of dirt, dust and extraneous materials. 



#165582


SECTION 12484 

FOOT GRID ENTRANCE SYSTEMS 

1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes: Entrance matting systems, including recessed aluminum foot grids. 



2. Metal Doors and Frames – Section 08100 

3. Plastic Faced and Flush Wood Doors – Section 08212 

4. Finish Hardware and Hardware Schedule – Section 08710 


A. Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification 

section to extent indicated. The Standards listed here are identified with a designation number, title or 

other designation established by the issuing authority. 


A. Performance Requirements: Provide recessed aluminum entrance floor mat system, which has been 

manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, 

damage or failure. 


A. Before ordering material, submit for the Architect's approval complete manufacturer's specifications of 

materials specified in this Section in accordance with Section 01340 - Submittals. 

B. Product data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s specification sheet and installation 

instructions for specified products. Include methods of installation and substrate preparation for each 

type of substrate. 




b. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 













C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including 

anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. 

D. Samples: Submit samples for each type and color of exposed entrance mat, frames and accessories 

required. Provide sample of mat materials. 

E. Quality Assurance Submittals: (1) certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance 

characteristics and physical properties, and (2) Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions. 

F. Closeout Submittals: Cleaning & maintenance Data (Include methods for maintaining installed products 

and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance), and 

Warranty 


#165582

Section 12484 

Page 2 


A. Installer: Installer should be highly experienced in performing work of this section, having previouisly 

done work similar to that required for this project. 

1.06 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING 

A. Ordering: Comply with Manufacturer’s ordering instrcutions and lead-time requirements to avoid 

construction delays. 

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in Manufacturer’s orginal, unopened, undamaged packaging. 

C. Storage: Store materials at temperature and in humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer and 

protect from exposure to harmful weather conditions. 

D. Installtion: Except as otherwise indicated herein, sequencing or scheduling for performance of work or 

this section in relation with other work is Contractor’s option. Delay installation of mats until near time 

of substantial completion for the project. 

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Temperature: Maintain temperature where products will be installed before, during and after installation 

as recommended by Manufacturer. 

B. Field Measurements: Where possible, verify actual measurements by field measuring before fabrication 

and include measurements in shop drawings. To avoid construction delays, coordinate field 

measurements and fabrication schedule based upon construction progress. 



A. Provide Nuway ® foot grille by Forbo Flooring, Inc., P. O. Box 667, Hazleton, PA, 18202; telephone 

800-842-7839; fax 570-450-0258; www.forboflooringna.com. 


A. Recessed Aluminum Foot Grid: Nuway ® Tuftiguard with reversible extruded aluminum profiles. 

B. Options for Recessed Aluminum Foot Grid: 

1. Thichness 7/16”, linear mats, with “T” separator, 18” sqare tiles. 

2. Wiper Strip Colors: Coral Brush Activ 5846 Chocolate Lines. 

3. Scraper Bar Colors: Aluminum selected from manufacturer’s standard colors of buffed fibered 

reinforced rubber strip. 

4. Construction: Closed 

5. Frame type: Schluter frame – depths vary from 7/16” 



C. Fabrication fro Recessed Aluminum Foot Grids and framing will have the following characteristics: 

1. Size: Fabricate entrance mats as units, but do not exceed manufacturers size recommendation. 

2. Joints: Where joints in the entrance mats are necessary space them symmetrically and away from 

normal traffic ways. 

3. Mats Frames: Fabricate framaes in single lengths. Where frame dimensions exceed maximum 

available lengths, use minimum number of pieces possible wiith hairline joints equally spaced and 

spliced together with straight connecting pins. 

a. Corners: miter corners and join with corner gusset and plates to produce hairline joints. 

b. Protective Coating: Coat surface off frame, which will contact cementitious material 

with zinc chromate primer conforming to SAE AMS 3110F. 

4. Surface Mounted Frames: Forbo Flooring, Inc. matting systems standard ramp surface frame, 

drill and counter sunk to receive floor-fixing screws. 

2.03 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted. 


#165582


Section 12484 

Page 3 

3.01 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION 

A. Examine substrates and conditions where floor mats will be installted. Do not proceed with installation 

until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Sub floor shall be clean and dry, and within acceptable 

tolerances. 


A. Sizes: Shop-fabricate units of floor mat to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Where not 

indicated otherwise, provide single unit for each mat installation, but do not exceed manufacturer’s 

mazimum size recommendation for units intended for removal and cleaning. Where joints in mats are 

necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing 

elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. Where possible, verify 

sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication. 

B. Accessories: Where indicated for recessed or wall-to-wall applications, provide aluminum framework as 

recommended by manufacturer. Gneral: Strictly comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions 

and recommendations. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and to 

prevent tripping hazards. 

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. General Cleaning: Refer to Manufacturer’s Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions. 

B. Owner’s Personnel: Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper maintenance procedures. 

C. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction and until 

acceptance. 



#165582

Section 12494 

Page 1 

SECTION 12494 

ROLLER SHADES 



A. Electrically operated sunscreen roller shades. 

B. Local group and master control system for shade operation. 

C. Local group and master control system for shade operation with addressable motors. 

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and 

accessories. 

B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies for 

installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories. 

C. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: Coordination with acoustical ceiling systems for installation of 

shade pockets, closures and related accessories. 

D. Division 16 - Electrical: Electric service for motor controls. 


A. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to 

Fungi. 

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 

C. NFPA 701-99 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. 


A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. 

** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete paragraph below if EcoVeil is NOT being specified. 

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 

2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features, finishes 

and operating instructions. 

3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 

4. Mounting details and installation methods. 

5. Typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers with building management 

system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable. 

C. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational 

clearances, wiring diagrams and relationship to adjacent work. 

D. 

E. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as indicated on the 

Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details. 

F. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade cloth options and aluminum 

finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 

G. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials 

and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with 

a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in 

this section. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten 

years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section. 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical burn. 

Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. 


#165582

Section 12494 

Page 2 

D. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other testing 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a system. 

Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing. 

E. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 

9644, ATCC9645. 

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-testresponse 

characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on 

Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and 

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when 

occupied for its intended use. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth (except EcoVeil): Manufacturer's standard nondepreciating 

twenty-five year limited warranty. 

1. EcoVeil standard non-depreciating 10-year limited warranty. 

B. Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating five-year 

warranty. 

C. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, 

lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturer: MechoShade Systems, Inc.; 42-03 35th Street, Long Island City, NY 

11101. ASD. Tel: (718) 729-2020. Fax: (718) 729-2941. Email: info@mechoshade.com, 

www.mechoshade.com. 

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 

2.2 APPLICATIONS/SCOPE 

A. Roller Shade Schedule: 

1. Shade Type 4: Motorized interior solar roller shades in all exterior windows of rooms and 

spaces shown on Drawings, and related motor control systems. 

2.3 SHADE CLOTH 

A. Visually Transparent Single-Fabric Shadecloth: MechoShade Systems, Inc., ThermoVeil group, 

single thickness non-raveling 0.030-inch (0.762 mm) thick vinyl fabric, woven from 0.018-inch 

(0.457 mm) diameter extruded vinyl yarn comprising of 21 percent polyester and 79 percent 

reinforced vinyl, in colors selected from manufacturer's available range. 

1. Euroveil Basket Weave: "5300 series” 

2. Color: Bronze 5313 

2.4 SHADE BAND 

A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem-pocket, shade 

roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets 

are not acceptable. 


#165582

Section 12494 

Page 3 

1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams (including welded 

ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size and weight for 

shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket 

construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all shades within one room. 

2. Shade band and Shade Roller Attachment: 

a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to 

support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 1.55 inch 

(39.37 mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55 inches (64.77 mm) for 

motorize shades are not acceptable. 

b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism. 

c. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band 

shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" snap-off" spline mounting, 

without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets. 

d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or 

rivets. 

e. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of: adhesive, 

adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable. 

2.5 SHADE FABRICATION 

A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless 

specifically indicated otherwise. 

B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed 

edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and 

straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in either direction per 8 feet (2438 

mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as follows: 

1. Concealed hemtube. 

C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the 

shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H) ratios shall not 

exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing 

appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified 

standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required. 

D. For railroaded shadebands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required to meet 

size requirements and in accordance with seam alignment as acceptable to Architect. Seams shall be 

properly located. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width, height, or weight of the 

shade exceeds manufacturer's standards. In absence of such standards, assure proper use of seams or 

battens as required to, and assure the proper tracking of the railroaded multi-width shadebands. 

E. Provide battens for railroaded shades when width-to-height (W:H) ratios meet or exceed 

manufacturer's standards. In absence of manufacturer's standards, be responsible for proper use and 

placement of battens to assure proper tracking and roll of shadebands. 

2.6 COMPONENTS 

A. Access and Material Requirements: 

1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without 

removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed. 

2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without 

having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. 

3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. 

Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable. 

B. Motorized Shade Hardware and Shade Brackets: 

1. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel, or 

heavier, thicker, as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. 


#165582

Section 12494 

Page 4 

2. Provide shade hardware system that allows for field adjustment of motor or replacement of any 

operable hardware component without requiring removal of brackets, regardless of mounting 

position (inside, or outside mount). 

3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands offset by a 

maximum of 8-45 degrees from the motor axis between shade bands (4-22.5 degrees) on each 

side of the radial line, by a single shade motor (multi-banded shade, subject to manufacturer’s 

design criteria). 

C. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets: 

1. Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, 

rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for 

future change. 

2. Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or reverse 

roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind. 

3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll fascias to 

be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners 

of any kind. 

4. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multibanded 

shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer’s design criteria. 

Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band. 

5. Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to be 

capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of 

the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees total offset. 

6. Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit 

connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not acceptable 

7. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel or 

heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. 

8. Drive Bracket / Brake Assembly: 

a. MechoShade Drive Bracket model M5 shall be fully integrated with all MechoShade 

accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia, room darkening side / sill 

channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded shades. 

b. M5 drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8 

inch (9.525 mm) steel pin. 

c. The brake shall be an over -unning clutch design which disengages to 90 percent during 

the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50 lbs. 

(22 kg) in the stopped position. 

d. The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the 

brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an articulated brake 

assembly, which assures a smooth, non-jerky operation in raising and lowering the 

shades. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require externally 

applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable. 

e. The entire M5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully 

independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without 

effecting the roller shade limit adjustments. 

D. Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. (41 kg) minimum breaking strength. 

Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted. 

2.7 SHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM 

A. Shade Motors: 

1. Tubular, asynchronous (non-synchronous) motors, with built-in reversible capacitor operating 

at 110v AC (60hz), single phase, temperature Class A, thermally protected, totally enclosed, 


#165582

Section 12494 

Page 5 

maintenance free with line voltage power supply equipped with locking disconnect plug 

assembly furnished with each motor. 

2. Conceal motors inside shade roller tube. 

3. Maximum current draw for each shade motor of 2.3 amps. 

4. Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all shades in the same room. 

B. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity of the 

shade motor and tube assembly. 

2.8 MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEMS 

A. IQ/MLC: Specifications and design of shade motors and motor control system are based on the 

IQ/MLC motor logic control system manufactured by MechoShade Systems, Inc. Other systems may 

be acceptable provide that all of the following performance capabilities are provided. Motor logic 

control systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as 

equal systems. 

1. Motor Control System: 

a. Provide power to each shade motor via individual 3 conductor line voltage circuits 

connecting each motor to the relay based motor logic controllers (IQ/MLC). 

b. Control system components shall provide appropriate (spike and brown out) overcurrent 

protection (+/- 10 percent of line voltage) for each of the four individual motor 

circuits and shall be rated by UL or ETL as a recognized component of this system and 

tested as an integrated system. 

c. Motor control system shall allow each group of four shade motors in any combination 

to be controlled by each of four local switch ports, with up to fourteen possible "subgroup" 

combinations via local 3 button wall switches and all at once via a master 3 

button switch. System shall allow for overlapping switch combinations from two or 

more local switches. 

d. Multiple "sub-groups" from different IQ/MLC control components shall be capable of 

being combined to form "groups" operated by a single 3 button wall switch, from either 

the master port or in series from a local switch port. 

e. Each shade motor shall be accessible (for control purposes) from up to four local 

switches and one master switch. 

f. Control system shall allow for automatic alignment of shade hem bars in stopped 

position at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent of opening heights, and up to three 

user-defined intermediate stopping positions in addition to all up / all down, regardless 

of shade height, for a total of five positions. Control system shall allow shades to be 

stopped at any point in the opening height noting that shades may not be in alignment at 

these non-defined positions). 

g. Control system shall have two standard operating modes: Normal mode allowing the 

shades to be stopped anywhere in the window’s opening height and uniform mode, 

allowing the shades to only be stopped at the predefined intermediate stop positions. 

Both modes shall allow for all up / all down positioning. 

h. Control system components shall allow for interface with both audiovisual system 

components and building fire and life safety system via a dry contact terminal block. 

i. Reconfiguration of switch groups shall not require rewiring of the hardwired line 

voltage motor power supply wiring, or the low voltage control wiring. Reconfiguration 

of switch groups shall be accomplished within the motor control device (IQ/MLC). 

2. Wall Switches: 

a. Three-button architectural flush mounted switches with metal cover plate and no 

exposed fasteners. 

b. Connect local wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V DC) 4- 

conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-11 type connectors supplied, installed and 

certified under Division 16 - Electrical. 


#165582

Section 12494 

Page 6 

c. Connect master wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V DC) 

6-conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-12 type connectors supplied, installed and 

certified under Division 16 - Electrical. 

B. I . CON Control System (Software, two way communication): Specifications and design are based on 

the I . CON motor control system as manufactured by MechoShade Systems, Inc. Other systems may 

be acceptable provided that all of the following performance capabilities are provided. Motor control 

systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as equal 

systems. 

1. Upper and lower stopping points (operating limits) of shadebands shall be programmed into 

motors via a hand held removable program module / configurator. 

2. Intermediate stopping positions for shades shall be 4 predefined intermediate positions, for a 

total of 6 defined and aligned positions. All shades on the same switch circuit with the same 

opening height shall align at each intermediate stopping position. 

3. Motors shall be addressable through a 2 motor bus interface module via a hand-held removable 

program module and shall be capable of responding to a minimum of seven different user 

defined stored addresses including multiple overlapping sub groups and three reserved control 

input addresses for use by building management systems, life safety systems and other 

emergency inputs. 

4. The BI and I . CON controller system shall have the capability of two-way communication with 

the motors. Each I . CON controller, (bus Interface or BI) shall allow for a unique address 

message to be received from the hand held configurator and/or a PC controller or switch. 

a. Bus line shall consist of 2 twisted pair of 16 ga low voltage wire. 

b. Shade motor control components (bus interfaces, wall switches, bus supplies, auxiliary 

control input devices, and similar items) shall be connected in series via the low voltage 

(12VDC) two way digital communication bus line. 

c. Bus line shall be capable of being installed in a free topology to provide maximum 

flexibility for installation and future maintenance. 

d. Low voltage (12VDC) digital bus line shall be powered by a bus supply transformer, 

requiring 115VAC (220 - 230 VAC) input drawing a maximum current of 1 amp. A 

minimum of one bus supply shall be required for every 400 linear feet of bus line. 

Final bus supply spacing shall be reviewed with the system manufacturer after the 

number of nodes per 400 ft (120 meters) run of bus line has been determined. 

5. Wall Switches: 

a. Shades shall be operated by 4 button low voltage standard switches or programmable 

intelligent switches [IS]. Standard switch shall be wired to a bus interface and the bus 

interface will be programmed to transmit an address for the local switch. 

b. Intelligent switches may be installed anywhere on the busline. Each IS shall be capable 

of storing one control level address to be broadcast along the busline. 

c. An address that is transmitted by either a switch or central controller shall be responded 

to by those motors with the same address in their control table. 

d. IS shall provide for interface with other low voltage input devices via a set of dry 

contact terminals located on the switch. 

e. Standard switch or IS may control an individual, sub-group or group of motors in 

accordance with the address in each motor/BI unit. 


A. Roller Shade Pocket for recessed mounting in acoustical tile, or drywall ceilings as indicated on the 

Drawings. 

1. Provide either extruded aluminum and or formed steel shade pocket, sized to accommodate 

roller shades, with exposed extruded aluminum closure mount, tile support and removable 

closure panel to provide access to shades. 


#165582

Section 12494 

Page 7 


a. Provide "Vented Pocket" such that there will be a minimum of four 1 inch (25.4 mm) 

diameter holes per foot allowing the solar gain to flow above the ceiling line. 


A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory 

preparation before proceeding. 


A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result 

for the substrate under the project conditions. 


A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, 

and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow proper 

clearances for window operation hardware. 

B. Turn-Key Single-Source Responsibility for Motorized Interior Roller Shades: To control the 

responsibility for performance of motorized roller shade systems, assign the design, engineering, and 

installation of motorized roller shade systems, motors, controls, and low voltage electrical control 

wiring specified in this Section to a single manufacturer and their authorized installer/dealer. The 

Architect will not produce a set of electrical drawings for the installation of control wiring for the 

motors, or motor controllers of the motorized roller shades. Power wiring (line voltage), shall be 

provided by the roller shade installer/dealer, in accordance with the requirements provided by the 

manufacturer. Coordinate the following with the roller shade installer/dealer: 

1. Main Contractor shall provide power panels and circuits of sufficient size to accommodate 

roller shade manufacturer’s requirements, as indicated on the mechanical and electrical 

drawings. 

2. Main Contractor shall coordinate with requirements of roller shade installer/dealer, before 

inaccessible areas are constructed. 

3. Roller shade installer/dealer shall run line voltage as dedicated home runs (of sufficient 

quantity, in sufficient capacity as required) terminating in junction boxes in locations 

designated by roller shade dealer. 

4. Roller shade installer/dealer shall provide and run all line voltage (from the terminating points) 

to the motor controllers, wire all roller shade motors to the motor controllers, and provide and 

run low voltage control wiring from motor controllers to switch/ control locations designated 

by the Architect. All above-ceiling and concealed wiring shall be plenum-rated, or installed in 

conduit, as required by the electrical code having jurisdiction. 

5. Main Contractor shall provide conduit with pull wire in all areas, which might not be 

accessible to roller shade contractor due to building design, equipment location or schedule. 

C. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or 

malfunction throughout entire operational range. 

D. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade 

systems. 


A. Protect installed products until completion of project. 

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 


#165582

Section 12494 

Page 8 



#165582

PART 1 

GENERAL 

SECTION 13600 

PV ELECTRICAL POWER EQUIPMENT 

1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Solar Energy System(s). 














2. Renewable Energy: 

a. Submit manufacturer’s product data for system. 

b. Submit calculations indicating the energy produced by the system relative to the total 

energy demand for the building. 

c. Submit Letter of Certification from system provider indicating that energy produced 

by the system represents minimum [1] [3] [5] [7] [9] [11] [13] [xxxx] of the total 

energy demand for the building. 

B. Submit environmental data in accordance with Table 1 of ASTM E2129 for products provided under 

work of this Section. 


A. Solar Energy Systems: 

1. Photovoltaic Panels: Provide panels labeled with the PowerMark certification by PowerMark 

Corporation. 

a. Weathering: 

ASTM E1038-Standard Test Method for Determining Resistance of Photovoltaic 

Modules to Hail by Impact with Propelled Ice Balls 

ASTM E1171- Standard Test Method for Photovoltaic Modules in Cyclic 

Temperature and Humidity Environments 

ASTM E1597- Standard Test Method for Saltwater Pressure Immersion and 

Temperature Testing of Photovoltaic Modules for Marine Environments 

ASTM E1802-Standard Test Methods for Wet Insulation Integrity Testing of 

Photovoltaic Modules 

ASTM E2047- Standard Test Method for Wet Insulation Integrity Testing of 

Photovoltaic Arrays 

ASTM E1830- Standard Test Methods for Determining Mechanical Integrity of 

Photovoltaic Modules 

ASTM E781- Standard Practice for Evaluating Absorptive Solar Receiver Materials 

When Exposed to Conditions Simulating Stagnation in Solar Collectors With Cover 

Plates 

ASTM E782- Standard Practice for Exposure of Cover Materials for Solar Collectors 

to Natural Weathering Under Conditions Simulating Operational Mode 

ASTM E823- Standard Practice for Nonoperational Exposure and Inspection of a 

Solar Collector 

ASTM E881- Standard Practice for Exposure of Solar Collector Cover Materials to 

Natural Weathering Under Conditions Simulating Stagnation Mode 

b. Calibration: 


#165582

Section 13600 

Page 2 

ASTM E1362- Standard Test Method for Calibration of Non-Concentrator 

Photovoltaic Secondary Reference Cells 

c. Energy Performance: 

ASTM E948- Standard Test Method for Electrical Performance of Photovoltaic Cells 

Using Reference Cells Under Simulated Sunlight 

ASTM E1021- Standard Test Methods for Measuring Spectral Response of 

Photovoltaic Cells 

ASTM E1040- Standard Specification for Physical Characteristics of Nonconcentrator 

Terrestrial Photovoltaic Reference Cells 

ASTM E1462- Standard Test Methods for Insulation Integrity and Ground Path 

Continuity of Photovoltaic Modules 

2. Solar Water Heating collectors: Submit OG 100 rating by Solar Rating and Certification 

Corporation for collector performance characteristics, and for rated systems submit OG 300 

rating. 

PART 2 

PRODUCTS 

2.1 EQUIPMENT 


3.1 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES 

A. Resource Management: 

1. Energy Efficiency: Verify equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted. Verify 

that equipment is operating as specified. 

2. Renewable Energy: Verify proper operation in all modes of system operation by testing. 

Verify proper operation under a wide range of conditions to verify energy delivery as 

calculated for those conditions. 

a. Solar Energy Systems: Comply with ASTM E1799- Standard Practice for Visual 

Inspections of Photovoltaic Modules. 



#165582


SECTION 14240 

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Section includes: Hydraulic passenger elevators as shown and specified. Elevator work includes: 

1. Standard pre-engineered hydraulic passenger elevators. 

2. Elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances and signal equipment. 

3. Jack(s) 

4. Operation and control systems. 

5. Accessibility provisions for physically disabled persons. 

6. Equipments, machines, controls, systems and devices as required for safely operating the specified 

elevators a their rated speed and capacity. 

7. Materials and accessories as required to complete the elevator installation. 

8. Emergency power supply, transfer switch and auxiliary contacts. 

B. Work, items and requirements specified elsewhere that apply and/or relate to this Section 

include: 

1. Division 3 Concrete: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in concrete. 

2. Division 4 Masonry: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in masonry, if required for building type. 

3. Division 5 Metals: 

a. Provide hoist beams, pit ladders, steel framing, auxiliary support steel and divider beams for 

supporting guide-rail brackets. 

b. Providing steel angle sill supports and grouting hoistway entrance sills and frames. 

4. Division 9 Finishes: Providing elevator car finish flooring and field painting unfinished and shop primed 

ferrous materials. 

5. Division 15 Plumbing: 

a. Sump pit and oil interceptor. 

6. Division 15: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning 

a. Heating and ventilating hoistways and machine rooms. 

7. Division 16 Sections: 

a. Providing electrical service to elevators, including fused disconnect switches. 

b. Heat and smoke sensing devices. 

c. Convenience outlets and illumination in machine room, hoistway and pit. 

C. Work Not Included: General Contractor shall provide the following in accordance with the requirements of the 

Model Building Code and ANSI A17.1 Code. For specific rules, refer to ANSI A17.1, Section 300 for 

hydraulic elevators. State or local requirements must be used if more stringent. 

1. Elevator hoist beam to be provided at top of elevator shaft. Beam must be able to accommodate proper 

loads and clearances for elevator installation and operation. 

2. Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates, brackets, supports 

and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement. 

3. Hatch walls require a minimum two hours of fire rating. Hoistway should be clear and plumb with 

variations not to exceed ½” at any point. 

4. Elevator hoistways shall have barricades, as required. 

5. Install bevel guards at 75 degrees on all recesses, projections or setbacks over 2” (4” for A17.1 2000 

areas) except for loading or unloading. 

6. Provide rail bracket supports at pit, each floor and roof. For guide rail bracket supports, provide divider 

beams between hoistway at each floor or roof. 

7. Pit floor shall be level and free of debris. Reinforce dry pit to sustain normal vertical forces from rails 

and buffers. 

8. Where pit access is by means of the lowest hoistway entrance, a vertical ladder of non-combustible 

material extending 42” minimum, (48” minimum for A17.1-2000 areas) shall be provided at the same 

height, above sill of access door or handgrips. 

9. Machine room to be enclosed and protected. 


#165582

Section 14240 

Page 2 

10. Machine Room temperature must be maintained between 55 and 90 F. 

11. If machine room is remote from the elevator hoistway, clear access must be available above the ceiling or 

metal/concrete raceways in floor for oil line and wiring duct from machine room. 

12. Access to the machinery space and machine room must be in accordance with the governing authority or 

code. 

13. Provide a 8”x16” cutout through machine room wall, for oil line and wiring duct, coordinated with 

elevator contractor at the building site. 

14. All wire and conduit should run remote from either the hoistways or the machine room. 

15. When heat, smoke or combustion sensing devices are required, connect to elevator machine room 

terminals. Contacts on the sensors should be sided for 120 volt D.C. 

16. Install and furnish finished flooring in elevator cab. 

17. Finished floors and entrance walls are not to be constructed until after sills and door frames are in place. 

Consult elevator contractor for rough opening size. The general contractor shall supply the drywall 

framing so that the wall fire resistance rating is maintained, when drywall construction is used. 

18. Where sheet rock or drywall construction is used for front walls, it shall be of sufficient strength to 

maintain the doors in true lateral alignment. Drywall contractor to coordinate with elevator contractor. 

19. Before erection of rough walls and doors; erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames. After rough walls are 

finished; erect fascias and toe guards. Set sill level and slightly above finished floor at landings. 

20. To maintain legal fire rating (masonry construction), door frames are to be anchored to walls and properly 

grouted in place. 

21. The elevator wall shall interface with the hoistway entrance assembly and be in strict compliance with the 

elevator contractor’s requirements. 

22. General Contractor shall fill the grout around entrances, as required. 

23. Elevator sill supports shall be provided at each opening. 

24. All walls and sill supports must me plumb where openings occur. 

25. For applications with jack hole, free and clear access to the elevator pit area for the jack hole-drilling rig is 

required. 

26. Where jack hole is required, remove all spoils from jack hole drilling. 

27. Where not provided by Elevator Contractor, jack hole shall accommodate the jack unit. IF required the 

jack hole is to be provided in strict accordance with the elevator contractor’s shop drawings. 

28. Locate a light fixture and convenience outlet in pit with switch located adjacent to the access door. 

29. A light switch and fused disconnect switch for each elevator should be located inside the machine room 

adjacent to the door, where practical, per the National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70). 

30. As indicated by elevator contractor, provide a light outlet for each elevator, in center of hoistway (or in the 

machine room). 

31. For signal system and power operated door: provide ground and branch wiring circuits, including main 

line switch. For car light and fan: provide a feeder and branch wiring circuits, including main line switch. 

32. Wall thickness may increase when fixtures are mounted in drywall. These requirements must be 

coordinated between the general contractor and the elevator contractor. 

33. Provide supports, patching and recesses to accommodate hall button boxes, signal fixtures, etc. 

34. Locate telephone and convenience outlet on control panel. 


A. Product data: When requested, the elevator contractor will provide standard cab, entrance and signal fixture 

data to describe product for approval. 

B. Shop Drawings: in accordance with Section 01340 

1. Show equipment arrangement in the machine room/control space, pit and hoistway. Provide plans, 

elevations, sections and details of assembly, erection, anchorage, and equipment location. 

2. Indicate elevator system capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finishes and other pertinent 

information. 

3. Show floors served, travel distances, maximum loads imposed on the building structure at points of 

support and all similar considerations of the elevator work. 

4. Indicate electrical power requirements and branch circuit protection device recommendations. 


#165582

Section 14240 

Page 3 

5. Elevator Manufacture to size the breaker and to provide information on shops for review. 

C. Baked enamel selection: Submit manufacturer’s standard selection charts for exposed finishes and materials. 

D. Plastic laminate selection: Submit two manufacture’s standard selection charts for exposed finishes and 

materials. 

E. Metal Finishes: Submit two manufacture’s standard samples. 

F. As-built Drawings: Final locations, sizing and conditions of installed system components. 

G. Operation and maintenance data. Include the following: 

1. Owners Manual and Wiring Diagrams. 

2. Parts list, with recommended parts inventory. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: An approved manufacturer with minimum fifteen years experience in 

manufacturing installing, and servicing elevators of the type required for the project. 

1. Must be the manufacturer of the power unit, controller, signal fixtures, door operators cab, entrances, 

and all other major parts of the elevator operating equipment. 

a. The major parts of the elevator equipment shall be manufactured in the United States, and not 

be an assembled system. 

2. The manufacturer shall have a documented, on-going quality assurance program. 

3. ISO-9001:2000 Manufacturer Certified. 

B. Installer Qualifications: The manufacturer of an authorized agent of the manufacturer with not less than fifteen 

years of satisfactory experience installing elevators equal in character and performance to the project elevators. 

C. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. ASME/ANSI A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, latest edition or as required by the local 

building code. 

2. Building Code: National 

3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 

4. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows 

5. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 

6. American Society for Testing and Materials 

7. Uniform Building Code 

8. National Standards Institute 

D. Fire-rated Entrance Assemblies: Opening protect assemblies including frames, hardware, and operation shall 

comply with ASTM E2074, UL10(B), and NFPA 80. Provide entrance assembly units bearing Class B or 1 ½ 

hour label by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. 

E. Inspection and testing: Elevator Installer shall obtain and pay for all required inspections, test, permits and fees 

for elevator installation. 

1. Arrange for inspections and make required tests. 

2. Deliver to the Owner upon completion and acceptance of elevator work. 


A. Manufacturing will deliver elevator materials, components and equipment and the contractor is responsible to 

provide secure and safe storage on job site. 

B. Store materials in original protective package. Prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting. 

C. Protect equipment and exposed finishes during transportation and erection against damage and stains. 

1.05 TEMPORARY USE 

A. Do not permit use of elevator for construction purposes or during construction period without written 

permission from the Owner's Representative. 


A. Provide the hole for the jack unit (if required by the type of jack provided), based on excavation through 

normal soil or clay which can be removed by manual digging or by standard truck-mounted regular drilling 

unit. Provide a casing if required to retain the walls of the hole. General contractor shall remove excavation 

spoils deposited in the elevator pit. 


#165582

Section 14240 

Page 4 

1. If a physical obstruction or hindrance is encountered below the ground surface, including boulers, rock, 

gravel, wood, metal, piling, sand, water, quick sand, caves, public utilities or any other foreign material, 

obtain written authorization to proceed with excavating using special excavation equipment. 

1.07 WARRANTY 

A. Warranty: Submit elevator manufacturer’s standard written warranty agreeing to repair, restore or replace 

defects in elevator work materials and workmanship not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use or care 

for 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. 


A. This Contractor shall furnish regular maintenance service on the elevator for a period of twelve (12) months 

after satisfactory completion of the installation and acceptance by the Owner. 

B. This service shall include regular examination by trained employees, who shall do all necessary adjusting, 

greasing, oiling and supplying or parts (except parts made necessary by misuse, accidents or negligence) 

required to keep the elevator in operation. 

C. All such service shall be rendered without additional charge to the Owner. 

D. When work is required after regular working hours, the Owner will compensate the Contractor for any 

additional expense due to the payment of overtime wage rates. 



A. Manufacturer: ThyssenKrupp Elevator 

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 

1. Otis 

2. Schindler Elevator Corp. 

2.02 ELEVATOR REQUIREMENTS 

A. Description of Elevator equipment: (based on ThyssenKrupp model) 

Quantity (1) 

Type of Machine AMEE 35 Oildraulic Elevator (Holed, Conventional jack) 

Capacity 

3,500 pounds 

Speed 

100 F.P.M 

Operation TAC 20 

Control 

Microprocessor – Keyed Use 

Rise 

Per Plans 

Maintenance Twelve Months 

Power Supply 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz 

Lighting Supply 125 volts, 1 phase 60 hertz 

Car Enclosure DLP cab 

Clear Car Inside 6’-8” wide x 5’-5” deep 

Height Under Car - 

Top 

Height Under 8’-0” nominal 

Suspended Ceiling 

Type of Doors Side Opening Door 

Car Opening and 3’-6” wide x 7’-0” high 

Entrance Size 

Car Operating 2 at front 

Panel 

Machine Location Per Plans 


#165582

Section 14240 

Page 5 

B. Cab Interior/Exterior Finish: 

Walls 

Cab type TKLP, durable wood core finish on both sides with high 

pressure plastic laminate. Finish Windswept Bronze 4 794-60 

Ceiling 

Black grid with translucent panels. 

Floor 

Carpet (pindot) to be installed by Cinemark vendor. 

Paint Finishes Flax EN-1 

Main landing door #4 Stainless Steel panels, no.4 brushed finish 

& frame finish 

Typical Door & #4 Stainless Steel panels, no.4 brushed finish 

Frame Finish 

Cab Sills 

Aluminum, mill finish 

Cab Fronts Wrap around: Provide panels faced with brushed stainless steel 

C. Additional Devices: 

1. Illuminated Car Position Indicator (one) 

2. Car and Corridor Call Registered Lights 

3. Corridor Push Button Station. 

4. Hall lanterns with gongs at each entrance. 

5. Hall and car call buttons with raised numerals for the blind. 

6. Telephone compartments (one) and rail cables. 

7. Telephone instrument provided by Contractor and shall meet all ADA requirements. 

8. Any other items specifically required by the ADA. 

9. Security Features: Keyswitch feature 

10. Handrails: Provide 1.5” diameter cylindrical metal on side and rear walls on front opening cars and 

side walls only on front and rear opening cars. Handrails shall have a stainless steel brushed finish. 

11. Ventilation: Manufacturer’s standard exhaust fan, mounted on the car top. 

12. Car Top Inspection: Provide a car top inspection station with an “Auto-Inspection” switch, an 

“emergency stop” switch, and constant pressure “up and down” direction and safety buttons to make 

the normal operating devices inoperative. The station will give the inspector complete control of the 

elevator. The car top inspection station shall be mounted in the door operator assembly. 

D. Door Operation for Elevator: 

1. Door Operation: Provide a direct current motor driven heavy duty operator designed to operate the 

car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Door movements shall be electrically cushioned at both 

limits of travel and the door operating mechanism shall be arranged for manual operation in event of 

power failure. Doors shall automatically open when the car arrives at the landing and automatically 

close after an adjustable time interval or when the car is dispatched to another landing. Closed-loop, 

microprocessor controlled motor-driven linear door operator, with adjustable torque limits, also 

acceptable. AC controlled units with oil checks or other deviations are not acceptable. 

a. Door nudging operation to occur if doors are prevented from closing for an adjustable 

period of time. 

2. Door Protection Devices: Provide a door protection system using microprocessor controlled infrared 

light beams. The beams shall project across the car opening detecting the presence of a 

passenger or object. IF door movement is obstructed, the doors shall immediately reopen. 

3. Electric power for car and hoistway doors. Door operation shall conform to Handicapped 

Requirements. 

2.03 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT 

A. Platform: Fabricated frame of formed or structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly welded with a wood 

subfloor. Underside of the platform shall be fireproofed. 

B. Sling: Steel stiles affixed to steel crosshead and bolstered with bracing members to remove strain from the car 

enclosure. 

C. Guide Rails: Steel, omega shaped, fastened to the building structure with steel brackets. 

D. Guide Shoes: Slide guides shall be mounted on tip and bottom of the car. 


#165582

Section 14240 

Page 6 

E. Buffers: Provide substantial buffers in the elevator pit. Mount buffers on a steel template that is fastened to 

the pit floor or continuous channels fastened to the elevator guide rail or securely anchored to the pit floor. 

Provide extensions if required by project conditions. 

F. Jack: Jack unit shall be of sufficient size to lift the gross load the height specified. Factory test jack to insure 

adequate strength and freedom from leakage. Brittle material, such as gray cast iron, is prohibited in the jack 

construction. Provide the following jack type: Twin post holeless telescopic 2-stage. Two jacks piped 

together, mounted one on each side of the car with each having two telescopic sections designed to extend in 

asynchronized manner when oil is pumped into the Assembly. Each jack section will be guided from within 

the casing or the plunger assembly used to house the section. Each plunger shall have a high pressure sealing 

system which will not allow for seal movement or displacement during the course of operation. Each Jack 

Assembly shall have a check valve built into the assembly to allow for automatically re-syncing the two 

plunger sections by moving the jack to its fully contracted position. The jack shall be designed to be mounted 

on the pit floor or in a recess in the pit floor. Each jack section shall have a bleeder valve to discharge any air 

trapped in the section. 

G. Automatic Self-Leveling: Provide each elevator car with a self-leveling feature to automatically bring the car to 

the landings and correct for over travel or under travel. Self-leveling shall, within its zone, be automatic and 

independent of the operating device. The car shall be maintained approximately level with the landing 

irrespective of its load. 

H. Wiring, Piping, and Oil: Provide all necessary hoistway wiring in accordance with the National Electrical 

Code. All necessary code compliant pipe and fittings shall be provided to connect the power unit to the jack 

unit. Provide proper grade oil as specified by the manufacturer of the power unit. 

2.04 POWER UNIT 

A. Power Unit (Oil Pumping and Control Mechanism): A self-contained unit consisting of the following items: 

1. Oil reservoir with tank cover. 

2. An oil hydraulic pump. 

3. An electric motor. 

4. Oil control valve with the following components built into single housing; high pressure relief valve, 

check valve, automatic unloading up start valve, lowering and leveling valve, and electro-magnetic 

controlling solenoids. 

B. Pump: Positive displacement type pump specifically manufactured for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Pump 

shall be designed for steady discharge with minimum pulsation to give smooth and quiet operation. Output of 

pump shall not vary more than 10 percent between no load and full load on the elevator car. 

C. Motor: Standard manufacture motor specifically designed for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Duty rating shall 

be selected for specified speed and load. Motor Code to be ‘A’ for solid state (soft start) starting. 

Maximum motor size to be 25 HP. 

D. Control System: Shall be microprocessor based and protected from environmental extremes and excessive 

vibrations in a NEMA 1 enclosure. 

E. Oil Control Unit: The following components shall be built into a single housing. Welded manifolds with 

separate valves to accomplish each function are not acceptable. Adjustments shall be accessible and be made 

without removing the assembly from the oil line. 

1. Relief valve shall be externally adjustable and be capable of bypassing the total oil flow without 

increasing back pressure more than 10 percent above that required to barely open the valve. 

2. Up start and stop valve shall be adjustable and designed to bypass oil flow during start and stop of 

motor pump assembly. Valve shall close slowly, gradually diverting oil to or from the jack unit, 

ensuring smooth up starts and up stops. 

3. Check valve shall be designed to close quietly without permitting any perceptible reverse flow. 

4. Lowering valve and leveling valve shall be adjustable for down start speed, lowering speed, leveling 

speed and stopping speed to ensure smooth “down” starts and stops. The leveling valve shall be 

designed to level the car to the floor in the direction the car is traveling after slowdown is initiated. 

F. Solid State Starting: Provide an electronic starter featuring adjustable starting currents. 


#165582

Section 14240 

Page 7 

G. Emergency Power Unit: The elevator shall be equipemd with an emergency power unit (EPU) such that 

upon loss of normal power, the elevator lights shall remain on and the elevator cab shall return to the 

ground floor and the doors open. 

2.05 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES 

A. Doors and Frames: Provide complete hollow metal type hoistway entrances at each hoistway opening 

bolted/knock down construction. 

1. Manufacturer’s standard entrance design consisting of hangers, doors, hanger supports, hanger covers, 

fascia plates, sight guards, and necessary hardware. Refer to Elevator finish table above. 

B. Interlocks: Equip each hoistway entrance with an approved type interlock tested as required by code. Provide 

door restriction devices as required by code. 

C. Door Hanger and Tracks: Provide sheave type two point suspension hangers and tracks for each hoistway 

horizontal sliding door. 

1. Sheaves: Polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease. 

2. Hangers: Provide an adjustable device beneath the track to limit the up-thrust of the doors during 

operation. 

3. Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger sheaves. 

D. Hoistway Sills: Extruded metal, with groove(s) in top surface. Provide mill aluminum finish. 

2.06 CAR OPERATING STATION 

A. Car Operating Station, General: The main car control in each car shall contain the devices required for specific 

operation mounted in an integral swing return panel requiring no applied faceplate. Swing return shall have a 

brushed stainless steel finish. The main car operating panel shall be mounted in the return and complete with 

handicap requirements. Pushbuttons that illuminate using long lasting LED’s shall be included for each floor 

served, and emergency buttons and switches shall be provided per code. Switches for car light and accessories 

shall be provided. 

B. Emergency Communications System: Phone box provided. Instruments by others. 

C. Auxiliary Operating Panel: Not Required 

D. Column Mounted Car Riding Lantern: A car riding lantern shall be installed in the elevator cab and located in 

the entrance. The lantern, when illuminated, will indicate the intended direction of travel. The lantern will 

illuminate and a signal will sound when the car arrives at a floor where it will stop. The lantern shall remain 

illuminated until the door(s) begin to close. 

2.07 CONTROL SYSTEMS 

A. Controller: The elevator control system shall be microprocessor based and software oriented. Control of the 

elevator shall be automatic in operation by means of push buttons in the car numbered to correspond to floors 

served, for registering car stops, and by “up-down” push buttons at each intermediate landing and “call” push 

buttons at terminal landings. 

2.08 HALL STATIONS 

A. Hall Stations, General: 

Provide one pushbutton riser with faceplates having a brushed stainless steel finish. 

1. Phase 1 firefighter’s service key switch, with instructions, shall be incorporated into the hall station at 

the designated level. 

B. Floor Identification Pads: Provide door jamb pads at each floor. Jamb pads shall comply with Americans with 

Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. 

2.09 MISCELLANEOUS ELEVATOR COMPONENTS 

A. Oil Hydraulic Silencer: Install an oil hydraulic silencer (muffler device) at the power unit location. The 

silencer shall contain pulsation absorbing material inserted in a blowout proof housing arranged for inspecting 

interior parts without removing unit from oil line. 




#165582

Section 14240 

Page 8 

A. Before starting elevator installation, inspect hoistway, hoistway openings, pits and machine rooms/control 

space, as constructed and verify all critical dimensions, and examine supporting structures and all other 

conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Check that all sleeves are correctly located. Check 

that all electrical outlets are correctly located. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory 

conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. 


A. Install elevator systems components and coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction. 

1. Work shall be performed by competent elevator installation personnel in accordance with ASME A17.1, 

manufacturer’s installation instructions and approved shop drawings. 

2. Comply with the National Electrical Code for electrical work required during installation. 

B. Jack unit exaction: Drill or otherwise excavate below elevator pit construction as required to install the jack 

unit. 

1. Install casing for jack unit. 

2. Provide HDPE jack protection system for all in ground jacks. 

3. Set casing for jack unit assembly plumb, and partially fill with water-settled sand, eliminating voids. 

Back fill depth shall be sufficient to hold the bottom of the jack in place over time. 

C. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with the work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid 

construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by the Contractor, to ensure dimensional 

coordination of the work. 

D. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate 

alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable 

in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum safe, workable dimensions at each landing. 

E. Lubricate operating parts of system where recommended by manufacturer. 


A. Acceptance testing: Upon completion of the elevator installation and before permitting use of elevator, perform 

acceptance tests as required by A17.1 Code and local authorities having jurisdiction. Perform other tests, if 

any, as required by governing regulations or agencies. 

B. Advise Owner, Contractor, Architect, and governing authorities in advance of dates and times tests are to be 

performed on the elevator. 


A. Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator operates smoothly and 

accurately. 

3.05 TEST 

A. Before final acceptance of the elevator equipment, the Architect will order such tests of the equipment as 

necessary in his opinion to determine that the requirements of the Contract have been carried out. 

B. The Contractor shall supply all necessary material, instructions, skilled help, connections, labor and weights for 

the requirements of the tests. 

3.06 CLEANING 

A. Before final acceptance, remove protection from finished surfaces and clean and polish surfaces in accordance 

with manufacturer’s recommendations for type of material and finish provided. Stainless stall shall be cleaned 

with soap and water and dried with a non-abrasive surface; shall not be cleaned with bleached-based cleansers. 

B. At completion of elevator work, remove tools, equipment, and surplus materials from site. Clean equipment 

rooms and hoistway. Remove trash and debris. 


A. At time a Substantial Completion of elevator work, or portion thereof, provide suitable protection coverings, 

barriers, devices, signs, or other such methods or procedures to protect elevator work from damage or 

deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period. 

3.08 DEMONSTRATION 


#165582

Section 14240 

Page 9 

A. General Contractor to set up demonstration between elevator subcontractor and Owner’s personnel. 

Instructing them in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provision, 

including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building 

emergencies. Train Owner’s personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of 

operational failures or malfunctions. 

B. Make a final check of each elevator operation, with Owner’s personnel present, immediately before date of 

substantial completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly. 



#165582



SECTION 15000 

MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 

A. The General Conditions, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect are a part of these 

specifications and shall be complied with in every respect; certain paragraphs included in this section 

are supplemental to similar paragraphs in the above documents and are not intended to supersede 

those paragraphs. 

B. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for reading all sections of the specifications and reviewing all 

drawings in order to understand thoroughly the nature of the entire project, the requirements for 

coordination among the several trades, and items in other sections which apply to mechanical and 

electrical work. 

1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. All contract documents are on file in the Architect's office and shall be inspected by all bidders. 

B. The scale of each drawing is relatively accurate, but the Contractor is warned to obtain the necessary 

dimensions for any exact takeoffs from the Architect. No additional cost to the Owner will be 

considered for failure to obtain exact dimensions where not clear or in error on the drawings. Any 

device or fixture roughed in improperly and not positioned on implied centerlines or as required by 

good practice must be repositioned at no cost to the Owner. 

C. The mechanical and electrical drawings and specifications are intended to be used together as 

construction documents forming an integral part of the contract documents. They are intended to 

define, not limit the required construction and delivery to the Owner of complete systems, in perfect 

operating condition. Special items required may be shown or mentioned in either the drawings or the 

specifications, or both; however, it is the intent of the Contract that these systems shall be constructed 

completely and correctly and shall include all elements necessary to this end. 

D. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor shall coordinate the work so that any 

interference is avoided and the Codes are satisfied. Provide all necessary offsets in piping, fittings, 

etc., required to properly install the work. Exposed work must be kept as close as possible to walls, 

ceilings, columns, etc., so as to take up the minimum amount of space; all offsets, fittings, etc., 

required shall be provided without additional expense to the Owner. 

E. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipe and ducts shall be made as required to maintain 

proper headroom and pitch of graded lines. Provide all necessary traps, air vents, sanitary vents, 

etc., required as a result of these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. 

F. Symbols for various elements and systems are shown on the drawings. Should there be any doubt 

regarding the meaning or intent of the symbols used, an interpretation shall be obtained from the 

Architect. The decision of the Architect shall be final. 

G. It shall be the responsibility of each Contractor to examine the Contract Documents carefully before 

submitting his bid, with particular attention to errors, omissions, conflicts with provisions of laws and 

codes having jurisdiction, conflicts between drawings or drawings and specifications, and ambiguous 

definition of the extent of coverage between Contracts. Any such discrepancy shall be brought 

immediately to the attention of the Architect for correction. Change Orders will only be accepted for 

changes in scope. A “change in scope” is defined as work other than what was shown or intended. 

Costs for Change Orders will be reviewed and processed based on the standard labor rates for the 

area (either Union or non-Union) and these cost rates shall take precedence over any other 

contractual or agreed upon rates. All Change Order work shall be executed on a straight time basis 

(as opposed to overtime or premium time) unless specifically authorized in writing prior to the start of 

the work. 

H. Should any of these errors, omissions, conflicts, or ambiguities exist, the Contractor shall have them 

explained and adjusted in writing before signing the Contract or proceeding with the work; otherwise, 

he shall, at his own expense, supply the proper materials and labor to make good any damage or 

defects in his work or the results obtained therefrom, caused by such discrepancy. 

I. Wherever conflicts occur between different parts of the Contract Documents, the greater quantity, the 

better quality, or larger size shall prevail unless the Architect informs the Contractor otherwise in 

writing. 

Cinemark 15000 - 1 Mechanical General Conditions 

South Napa Century Center XD 12 EnviroDesign, Inc., Bid Issue 7-7-11

J. When drawing revisions are issued, a written description of the changes will be issued with the 

revisions. The contractor is to provide pricing on a line item basis (with backup) to match the 

description of the written changes. 

1.03 EXAMINATION OF THE SITE 

A. Prior to submitting bid, the contractor shall visit the site and thoroughly investigate locations, 

connections and details of all services and systems which would in any way affect or tie-in with work 

of these drawings. No extras will be allowed for work resulting from conditions that would have 

been evident upon a thorough examination of the site. Notify the engineer prior to bid closing 

date of any discrepancies or points of doubt or contention. Failing this action, include in the bid 

for the most expensive course of action. 

1.04 PERMITS AND FEES 

A. All necessary permits, licenses, and fees required to carry out the work shall be procured by the 

Contractor. Also, all necessary certificates of approval which must be delivered to the Architect 

before final acceptance of the work shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense. 

1.05 CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATIONS 

A. Each individual employed by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor or Contractor's Consultant shall 

be experienced, qualified and competent to correctly perform all work required of him on this project 

and to the satisfaction of the Architect. 

B. Technical, supervisory and administrative personnel shall have knowledge of the engineering 

principles involved in the design of the systems required by the Contract Documents and shall be 

experienced and qualified in the correct interpretation of the requirements of these Documents to the 

satisfaction of the Architect. 

C. Any firm or individual not having the necessary experience and/or qualifications shall not be used on 

this project. 

D. HVAC contractor must be certified by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) to handle 

refrigerant and maintain records of their certification throughout the duration of the project and during 

the subsequent one year warrantee period. 

1.06 CODES, ORDINANCES AND STANDARDS 

A. The Contractor is expected to know or to ascertain, in general and in detail, the requirements of all 

Codes and Ordinances applicable to the construction and operation of systems covered by his 

Contract. He shall know or ascertain the rulings and interpretations of Code requirements being 

made by all authorities having jurisdiction over the work to be performed by him. 

B. In preparing his bid, the Contractor shall include the cost of all items and procedures necessary to 

satisfy the requirements of all applicable Codes, Ordinances and Authorities, whether or not these are 

specifically covered by the drawings and specifications. All cases of serious conflict or omission 

between the drawings, specifications and codes shall be brought to the Architect's attention as 

hereinbefore specified. The Contractor shall carry-out his work and complete his construction as 

required by applicable Codes and Ordinances and in such manner as to obtain approval of all 

authorities whose approval is required without additional cost to the owner. 

C. The Contractor shall confine the storage of materials and the operation of his workmen to the limits 

provided by law, ordinances, permits or as directed by the Architect. 

D. Except as modified by this specification, all work shall conform to the applicable provisions and 

recommendations of the standards listed below. The following standards are incorporated into and 

made a part of these specifications: 

1. City of Napa and the State of California Mechanical, Plumbing and Fire Codes. 

2. NFPA- National Fire Protection Association. 

3. AGA - American Gas Association. 

4. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 

6. ASTM - American Society Test Materials. 

7. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. 

8. NSF - National Sanitary Foundation. 



9. PDI - Plumbing Drainage Institute. 

10. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories. 

11. NEC - 2008 National Electrical Code. 

12. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association. 

13. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractors National Association. 

14. OSHA- Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1990. 

15. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute. 

16. MSS- Manufacturers Std. Society of Valve and Fittings Ind. 

17. ANSI - American National Std. Institute. 

18. 2003 Life Safety Code. 

19. American Disability Act (ADA). 

20. Current Edition of California Building Codes 

1.07 SCOPE OF WORK 

A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools, machinery, equipment, accessories, hardware, 

fasteners, layout, supervision, hoisting, scaffolding, shop drawings, cleanup, detailing, packaging, 

trucking, freight, delivery, permits, insurance and all services necessary to complete the mechanical 

work under this contract in accordance with all codes. All work shall be coordinated with the work of 

other trades so as to resolve conflicts without impeding job progress. All out of sequence work shall 

be included. 

B. The work includes but is not limited to the following systems, equipment and services: 

1. Self contained air conditioning units consisting of components indicated on the drawings or 

specified herein, including: 

a. Rooftop Units. 

b. Temperature controls. 

2. Air distribution system consisting of components indicated on the drawings or specified 

herein, including: 

a. Sheet metal ductwork. 

b. Grilles, registers, duct insulation, control dampers and fire dampers, etc. 

3. Plumbing system consisting of components indicated on the drawings and specified herein, 

including: 

a. Plumbing fixtures. 

b. Domestic hot water supply piping. 

c. Domestic cold water supply metering and piping. 

d. Drinking water fountains with coolers. 

e. Sanitary waste piping. 

f. Vent piping. 

g. Domestic water heaters. 

h. Floor drains. 

I. Pipe Insulation 

j. Gas metering and piping 

k. Grease Traps. 

4. Furnishing of shop drawings and brochures. 

5. Furnishing of "as-built" drawings. 

6. Balancing and adjusting of mechanical systems. 

7. Furnishing operating and maintenance manuals. 

8. Miscellaneous items as required for complete and functioning systems as indicated on the 

drawings and specified herein. 

9. All systems, equipment, and services specified herein shall be furnished and installed 

complete and ready for use. 

10. Installation of a new and complete combination standpipe/sprinkler system. 

11. Installation of seismic restraints. 

C. The subcontractors understand and agrees that time is of the essence, and in the event overtime or 

premium is required to maintain pace with the construction schedule due to the subcontractor’s lack 

of progress, it will be performed at no additional cost. 

D. The work included herein may not be performed in a continuous cycle but in various stages as 

determined by the General Contractor, the Owner, or delivery of Owner furnished items or equipment. 

This contractor shall perform the work out of sequence as directed without any additional cost to the 

Owner or the General Contractor. The subcontractor shall include any required overtime expense at 

no additional cost to the Owner or General Contractor to meet the milestone dates and occupancy 



dates in accordance with the General Contractor's schedule. 

E. On union projects, the contractor is to be responsible for employing the proper tradesmen per union 

jurisdiction, past, present, and future. The subcontractor is also responsible for taking whatever 

measures that may be necessary, including composite crews, to settle any labor disputes and insure 

job continuity at no additional cost to the Owner. Should questions of union jurisdiction arise, the 

contractor shall immediately take steps to settle such disputes and will use such labor as may be 

determined to have jurisdiction, at no additional cost to the Owner or General Contractor. Should he 

fail to take expeditious action, he will be responsible for the time lost and monetary damages 

because of delays arising from such disputes. 

F. Provide one HVAC and one plumbing technicians for 24 hours (exact schedule to be 

determined by the Owner’s project managers) at the time of the theatre opening. 

G. Assist the Mechanical Commissioning agent as per Section 15995. 

1.08 COORDINATION OF WORK 

A. The Contractor shall coordinate work of this Division with that of other Divisions so that all systems, 

equipment and other components of the building will be installed at the proper time, will fit the 

available space, and will allow proper service access to those items requiring maintenance. This 

means adequate access to all equipment, not just that installed under this Division. 

B. Any components of the Mechanical Systems which are installed without regard to the above shall be 

removed and relocated as directed by the architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. 

C. Where various items of equipment and materials are specified and scheduled, the purpose is to 

define the general type and quality level, not to set forth the exact trim required to fit the various types 

of ceiling, wall or floor finishes. The Contractor shall provide materials which will fit (both 

dimensionally and color) properly the types of finishes actually installed. 

D. In the event of conflict with other trades or work, the following priority shall be followed: lighting, 

HVAC, plumbing, sprinklers. The HVAC, plumbing, and sprinkler contractors shall provide what ever 

materials, offsets, labor etc. required to provide the required coordination and the priorities listed 

above. 

E. Where the word verify is used on the documents, the contractor shall field verify the existing 

conditions and modify the scope of the installation as required to meet the verified conditions without 

additional cost to the Owner.. 


2.01 STANDARD PRODUCTS 

A. Each item of equipment furnished under this specification shall be essentially the standard product of 

the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same kind or type of equipment are required, these 

shall be the products of a single manufacturer. All equipment shall be U.L. approved (labeled) and 

shall be manufactured in the U.S.A. 

B. All material and equipment shall be new, and of the best quality used in good commercial practice 

and shall be the product of a reputable manufacturer. Each major component shall bear a name plate 

giving the name and address of the manufacturer and the catalogue number of designation. 

2.02 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS 

A. All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, 

used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturers, unless herein specified to the 

contrary. 

2.03 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

A. In general, no substitutions will be allowed. The Contractor shall submit with each request for 

approval of substitute material or equipment, sufficient data to show conclusively that it is equivalent 

to that specified. Acceptance or rejections of the substitutions when permitted shall be subject to the 

approval of the Engineer. Under no circumstances will the Engineer be required to prove that an 

item proposed for substitution is equal to the specified items. It is mandatory that the Contractor 



submit (email) prior to bid to the Engineer in writing all evidence required to support his contention 

that the item proposed for substitution is equal to the item indicated in the plans and specifications. 

All requests for substitution must be made at least 2 weeks prior to bid and shall be approved 

via email. 

B. Requests for substitution shall include the Contractor's reason for the request. 

C. If the Engineer does not consider the items equivalent to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish 

those specified. 

2.04 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 

A. When the Architect has reviewed equipment submittals it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor 

to install the equipment to operate properly and in accordance with the intent of the drawings, 

specifications, and codes. 

B. Work and equipment shall be supported plumb, rigid and true to line. The Contractor shall study the 

general, structural, mechanical and electrical drawings, shop drawings and catalog data to determine 

how equipment, fixtures, piping, ductwork, etc., are to be installed, and shall provide foundations, 

bolts, inserts, stands, hangers, brackets and accessories for proper support whether or not shown on 

the drawings. When directed, the Contractor shall submit for review drawings showing foundations 

and supports. 

C. DRIVES AND BELT GUARDS: The Contractor shall provide for each V-belt drive or rotating shaft a 

protective guard which shall be constructed around an angle iron frame, securely bolted to the floor or 

apparatus. The guard shall completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply with 

all safety requirements. Hinged access doors not less than 6" x 6" shall be provided for access to 

motors and fan shafts for test purposes. Guards shall not interfere with lubrication of equipment. 

D. All equipment shall be installed with adequate maintenance access. Any equipment installed without 

adequate access shall be relocated at the contractor’s expense. 

2.05 NAMEPLATES AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 

A. NAMEPLATES: Each major item of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, serial 

number and model number on a plate securely attached to the item. 

B. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION: Unless specified otherwise, all items of equipment, except those in 

finished areas shall be identified as to number, name, function, capacity and other pertinent data with 

securely attached laminated plastic name tags of an appropriate size with white letters and black 

background. Generally, the number and name shall be at least 1/4" high and other data at least 1/8" 

high. Rooftop equipment shall have the number neatly stenciled on the unit with black 5" high 

numerals. 

2.06 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. ELECTRICAL WIRING: Electrical wiring for mechanical equipment is separated into two main wiring 

divisions: "Power Wiring" and "Control Wiring". 

B. Power wiring shall be the energy source and includes circuit protective devices, motor starters or 

controllers, conduit, wiring and safety disconnects beginning at the Power Supply and terminating at 

the motor or terminals on equipment. 

C. Control wiring comprises conduit and wiring not included in "Power Wiring" including automatic 

temperature control wiring, interlock wiring, pilot light and signal wiring, energy management system 

wiring, etc., that is not included as part of prewired equipment but is necessary for the proper 

operation or safety of the equipment. Approved "point to point" wiring and interlock diagrams shall be 

furnished under Division 15 and by all equipment suppliers. 

D. Unless otherwise noted, "Power Wiring" and "Control Wiring" shall be furnished and installed under 

Division 16 of the specifications, under the advisement of the equipment supplier and mechanical 

contractor in accordance with Division 15 of these specifications. 

E. MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROL: Each motor, each item of electrically driven equipment and 

each manufactured combination of motors and equipment shall be provided with controllers and pilot 

devices that will perform the functions as specified. Controllers and pilot devices shall conform to 

NEMA Standard ICL and UL Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 



F. Starters: All starters shall be provided by the electrical contractor. 

G. Controllers shall have overload relays in all ungrounded conductors. Overload relays shall be sized to 

protect the motor, with consideration being given to the ambient temperature in which the motor and 

controllers are located. 

H. Starters, motor controls, push-button stations, selector switches, pilot lights, relays, automatic 

temperature controllers, safety devices, solenoids and similar devices that are normally included as 

an integral part of the equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor furnishing the equipment. 

Starters that are not provided as integral parts of the equipment shall be furnished under Division 16. 

All starters shall be installed under Division 16. 

I. Disconnect switches, except where furnished factory mounted, shall be supplied and installed under 

Division 16. 

J. Starters, pilot lights, controllers, push buttons, and similar devices located in finished spaces shall be 

flush mounted in a surface painted to match surrounding finish. 



A. The purpose of these submittals is to aid the Contractor in such a manner that improper or 

unacceptable materials are not delivered to or installed on the job, and that all materials and 

equipment are properly installed. 

B. Equipment, materials, layout, and fabrication submittals must show sufficient data to indicate 

complete compliance with Contract Documents as follows: 

1. Proper sizes and capacities. 

2. The item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service. 

3. Construction methods, materials and finishes. 

C. Catalog data must be clearly marked to indicate the items or mode. All information on a catalog sheet 

not pertaining to the item being submitted must be marked out. 

D. All submittals must be bound in one Adobe PDF file with a table of contents listing all items in that 

specific submittal. Loose catalog sheets or drawings will not be acceptable. A separate brochure will 

be required for each type of equipment. 

E. For any item to be installed in or on a finished surface (such as tee bar acoustical ceiling, plaster 

wall), the submittal certifies that the contractor has checked all applicable Contract Documents and 

that the item submitted is compatible with the surface finish and color on which it is to be installed. 

F. See the chart on sheet MEP0.1 for the list of submittals. 

G. All submittal drawings must be submitted electronically. All drawings must be submitted 

(emailed) in AutoCad DWG format. All cut sheets must be submitted in Adobe .PDF format (as 

one file per submittal) . Do not submit paper, binders or notebooks. Include the 

AutoCad STB file (pen weights) with the submittal. 

H. Submittals shall be provided to Commissioning Agent for review. 

3.02 CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS 

A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval prior to beginning this work one electronic 

copy in DWG format on the equipment proposed to be furnished and installed. Equipment cut 

sheets shall be submitted as one electronic copy in Adobe “.PDF” format (one PDF file per 

submittal). 

3.03 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. The Contractor shall obtain, at his expense, a set of white prints and keep these on the jobsite during 

construction. During the course of construction, the Contractor shall mark on these prints deviations 

from the contract documents, noting particularly locations of those items which will need to be located 

for servicing. 

B. Upon completion of the installation, obtain from the Engineer a complete set of vellum 



transparencies. Enter thereon, in a neat and accurate manner, a complete record of all revisions of 

the original drawings, as actually installed. All revisions are to be identified in a professional manner 

equal to the presentation of the original Contract Documents; however all deviations shall be clearly 

identified. Submit one (1) set of vellum transparencies and black and white prints of these revised 

transparencies to the Engineer for review. The cost for transparencies and for making required 

changes to be borne by the appropriate Subcontractor. 


A. The Contractor shall follow the manufacturer's directions completely in the delivery, storage and 

handling of equipment and materials. 

B. Equipment and materials shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or 

mechanical injury and theft. At the completion of the work, fixtures, equipment and materials shall be 

cleaned and polished thoroughly and shall be in a condition satisfactory to the Architect. 

C. Coordinate with Section 01352 IAQ Management" 

3.05 UTILITIES, REGULATIONS, METERS 

A. Locations and elevations of utilities have been obtained from shell building drawing or to other 

sources and are offered as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. The Contractor 

shall verify the exact location and elevation of utilities and their relation to the work before entering 

into a contract. 

B. The Contractor shall arrange with the landlord and utility companies for service connections, purchase 

of meters and vaults, verifying locations and patching pavements, sidewalks, and other surfaces, and 

restoring them to their original condition. 

C. The Division 15 contractor shall be responsible for final connection of domestic water service, storm 

system, sanitary system, and fire service to the building utilities. 

D, Meters shall be installed in coordination with the project Measurement & Verification 

Plan. 

3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY 

A. The Contractor shall take proper precautions to protect adjacent property, as provided by law and the 

Contract Documents, with which his work comes in contact, or over which he may have occasion to 

transport, hoist or move materials, equipment debris, etc., and shall satisfactorily repair and make 

good any damages caused by him during construction operations. 

B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable temporary sidewalks, fences or other structures as 

required by law, or as otherwise necessary for the protection of workmen and passersby and as 

necessary to prevent obstruction or interference with traffic in public streets or sidewalks, or private 

right-of-way. He shall leave access to all fire hydrants, provide temporary walkways around any 

obstructions made in any public place on account of his work and maintain sufficient lights and 

barricades to protect passersby at night. All streets, curbs and sidewalks shall be maintained in good 

condition and so left at the completion of the work. The Contractor shall make all necessary 

arrangements and perform all services required in connection with or as occasioned by his work for 

the care, protection and maintenance of all public utilities, including fire hydrants, pipe lines and 

electrical and/or telephone, telegraph and all other items of similar character on or adjacent to the 

site, assuming all responsibility and payment of all cost incidental to such care and protection or 

rectification of damage done for which the Owner might otherwise be liable. 

3.07 CLEANING UP AND REMOVAL OF RUBBISH 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the premises (including the outside area) free of all 

rubbish, debris and waste materials of every kind at all times during the Contract period. This 

requirement is mandatory and shall apply regardless of whether such rubbish, etc., accumulates in 

consequence of his work of his Subcontractors operations. 

3.08 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 



A. Exterior surfaces of pipes, ducts, louvers, hangers and other metal accessories run in or through 

concrete floor, underground or in crawl spaces, and surfaces in contact with masonry or mortar shall 

be painted two coats of acid resisting bituminous base paint. 

B. Exterior surfaces of pipes, ducts, hangers and other metal accessories exposed to the weather shall 

be painted with two coats of epoxy enamel paint of a color selected by the Architect in accordance 

with the Painting Section. 

c. All adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings within the building envelope must 

comply with emission limits outlined in Section 01352 IAQ Management." 

3.09 LUBRICATION 

A. The Contractor shall provide lubrication for the operation of all equipment until it has been accepted. 

The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to bearings while the equipment is being 

operated by him up to the date of acceptance of the equipment. The Contractor shall be required to 

protect all bearings during installation and shall grease steel shafts thoroughly to prevent corrosion. 

All motors and other equipment shall be provided with covers as required for proper protection during 

construction. 

3.10 VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION 

A. VALVES: Not Used 

B. PIPING: 

1. All visible piping located in accessible spaces such as equipment rooms, spaces, shall be 

identified with all temperature pipe markers as manufactured by W. H. Brady Company, 431 

West Rock Ave., New Haven, Connecticut, or approved equal. 

2. Generally, markers shall be located on each side of each partition, on each side of each tee, 

on each side of each valve and/or valve group, on each side of each piece of equipment, 

and, for straight runs, at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 75 feet. In congested areas, 

markers shall be placed on each pipe at the points where it enters and leaves the area and at 

the point of connection to each piece of equipment and automatic control valve. 

3. Markers shall be installed after final painting of all piping and equipment and in such a 

manner that they are visible from the normal maintenance position. Manufacturer's 

installation instructions shall be closely followed. The surface of all insulation shall be sealed 

with clear lacquer before applying markers. 

4. After the installation of the marker, the label and pipe shall be coated with clear lacquer. 

5. All piping must be identified in the manner required by the governing authorities. 

3.11 CATALOG DATA FOR OWNER 

A. The Contractor shall provide in loose-leaf binders a compilation of catalog data of each manufactured 

item of equipment used in the mechanical work and shall present this compilation to the Architect for 

transmittal to the owner before final payment is made. Descriptive data and printed installation, 

operation and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment shall be included. A complete 

double index shall be provided as follows: 

1. Listing the products alphabetically by name. 

2. Listing the names of manufacturers whose products have been incorporated in the work 

alphabetically together with their addresses and the names and addresses of the local sales 

representatives. 

3.12 CHARTS, DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS: Not Used 

3.13 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND TESTING 

A. The Contractor shall conduct start-up and operating tests of each major item of equipment in 

accordance with these specifications and the drawings. 




A. The Contractor shall and does hereby guarantee for a period of one year from date of final 

acceptance by the Architect all work as called for in the various Divisions of these specifications. 

When such work is performed by Subcontractors, and where special guarantees are required by 

Subcontractors, the Contractor shall secure warranties from said Subcontractors and deliver copies of 

same to the Owner upon completion of the work. 

B. The Contractor shall replace with new materials and/or equipment any material failing to give 

satisfactory service during the guarantee period and shall replace any refrigerant or oil lost during the 

guarantee period. Replacement of materials, equipment, oil or refrigerant, including all labor involved, 

shall be at no cost to the Owner. 

C. Nothing in the above intends or implies that this guarantee shall apply to work which has been abused 

or neglected by the Owner. 




SECTION 15034 

HVAC TESTING AND BALANCING 


l.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the 

work specified in this Section. 


A. All other Sections of Division 15. 

B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings 

for all requirements. 

1.03 SCOPE 

A. All air handling systems are to be balanced to accomplish flows and other conditions shown or 

indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein to the complete satisfaction of the Architect. 

B. The balance contractor shall provide all instruments, materials and labor to perform the balancing and 

to obtain and record all measurements. However, the preparation for and the corrections necessary 

for the testing, adjusting, balancing (including the replacement of sheaves) are the responsibility of 

the HVAC contractor. At the completion of the project, the theatre test and balance contractor 

shall furnish and install (replace) all of the RTU factory variable sheaves with new fixed 

sheaves. 

C. The balance contractor shall furnish one electronic copy of reports to the Engineer for all reports 

required for this project. 

D. Final values obtained from the test and balance shall meet ( 5%) the conditions shown or indicated 

on the drawings. Equipment not delivering values meeting or exceeding the stated values shall be 

corrected until such specified values are obtained. Note that the air flows shown on the plans, 

drawings, and schedules are actual air flows (non-standard CFM) which have been corrected 

for local conditions including altitude. The reported air flow values from the test and balance 

are also to be actual air flows (non-standard CFM). 

E. The Test and Balance (TAB) Contractor shall be independent of the installing HVAC Contractor and 

shall be contracted directly to the General Contractor. The TAB Contractor shall be certified by 

either National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). 

Qualifications, procedures and sample of forms shall be submitted for approval before beginning 

work. 

F. Air Balancing: All space conditioning and ventilation systems shall be balanced to the quantities 

specified in these plans, in accordance with the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) 

Procedural Standards (1983) or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) National Standards for 

Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems, fifth edition 1989. 

G. Assist the Mechanical Commissioning Agent as per Section 15995. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS : 

Not used. 


3.01 General 

A. Test all equipment and make all final adjustments and replacements necessary to place the system in 

proper operating condition, Operate the system under normal operating conditions for a minimum of 8 

hours, and instruct the owner's mechanic in the operation and maintenance of the system. 

B. Contractor shall provide for a second start-up of each unit at the beginning of the season opposite 

that in which the system is first operated and tested. Report initial and final values. 

C. Air Handling, Exhaust and Distribution: Balance the individual rooftop to equipment and adjust 

Cinemark 15034 - 1 HVAC Test & Balance 


dampers, registers, and diffusers so that air distribution will be uniform for the entire system, with 

tests showing air quantities indicated for each inlet, outlet; quantities shall not vary by more than -5 % 

from those indicated on the schedule. For smoke control fans, SEF in smoke zone 1 balance to 0.05 

inches water across smoke and non-smoke zone. 

a. Determine air velocity at outlets with a velometer or anemometer, or determine cubic 

feet per minute with a test hood. 

b. Obtain approval of the desired method of taking velocity readings before starting 

balancing or tests, 

c. All instruments shall be calibrated accurately before use. 

d. Submit report of final tests, giving fan RPM, CFM. at each outlet, instrument 

readings, voltage chips and other pertinent operating data as directed. Report shall 

be neatly bound. 

D. Projector exhaust fans: Balance to the CFM indicated on the drawings +5% or 95 degrees discharge 

temperature. Air flow shall be measured by duct traverse with all ducts and equipment connected and 

operating. The air temperatures in and out shall be reported. 

E. All other exhaust: All other exhaust grilles and registers shall be balanced to 5 percent of the valves 

indicated on the drawings. 

F. The methodology for properly adjusting the RTU fan speed and total air flow is as follows: 

1. Determine the proper diameter of the replacement sheave to achieve the specified air flow. 

2. Replace the variable sheave. 

3. With all volume dampers 100% open, slow the fan speed to the lowest possible RPM to achieve 

to total specified air flow or as close as possible. 

4. Proportionally balance the diffusers in the auditorium. 

G. Barometric Relief Dampers: 

1. Adjust the damper counter balance to allow the damper to open at .050" w.c. 

H. Coordinate pre-function checklist, startup and system functional testing with Commissioning 

Agent. Coordinate retesting as necessary until satisfactory performance is verified. 

3.02 CONTROLS: 

A. The ATCS Control vendor shall calibrate and adjust all thermostats (and sensors) and other 

controlling devices; he shall place control systems in satisfactory operating condition; he shall also 

instruct the Owner’s assigned operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of these 

controls. 

B. The ATCS Control vendor shall furnish diagrammatic layouts of automatic control systems and a set 

of printed instructions to the Owner, for both operation and maintenance. 

3.03 SYSTEM OPERATING TESTS 

A. After the successful completion of all equipment start-up and test requirements, the following formal 

testing and balancing shall be performed on the complete mechanical system: 

1. Testing and Balancing by the Contractor: The Contractor shall prove the operation of the 

mechanical system and of each individual item in the system. At least 10 days' notice shall be 

given to the Architect of such tests. Should any item of the system fail to perform in an 

approved manner, this test shall be repeated until the operating test is approved by the 

Architect. 

2. Checking by Owner and Architect: Following the successful completion of the first operating 

tests by the Contractor and Commissioning Agent and submission of the completed test 

and balance report, the Owner and the Architect shall have the privilege of making such tests 

as they may desire during a period of three weeks to ascertain in detail if any corrections are 

to be made to the system. At the end of testing by the Owner and Architect the Architect shall 

direct the Contractor in writing to make such corrections to the systems as are within the 

scope of the contract. 

3. Contractor's Corrections to System: The HVAC Contractor shall make all required corrections 

to the systems and shall notify the Architect in writing that he has completed the corrections 

outlined and shall give at least seven days' notice of a final operating test. Revised test and 

balance reports shall be submitted after the corrective action is completed. 

4. Final Operating Test: An operating test shall be performed by the Contractor to the 



satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner for a period of one day. Should any element of 

the system not perform properly, the Contractor shall make all required corrections, and the 

test shall be repeated until successfully performed. 

B. Instruments: The Contractor shall provide all instruments, materials and labor to perform the tests and 

to obtain and record the measurements specified herein, including the furnishing of all required record 

forms as approved by the Architect. 

C. The HVAC Contractor shall furnish to the TAB Contractor complete shop drawings and catalog data 

for all air moving equipment and apparatus, including fan curves. 

D. The HVAC contractor shall install new filters and filter media prior to the final air balance. Filters 

are to be MERV 13 filtration required for return and supply. Provide product 

data submission for filtration media. 

E. The test and balance contractor shall perform all tests and generate reports required by the governing 

authorities for all life safety and HVAC systems, including, but not limited to smoke detectors and 

combination fire/smoke dampers, etc. 

3.04 Final Test and Balance Report 

A. Proposed forms and the qualifications of the TAB contractor, including AABC/NEBB Certification 

proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Architect for approval at least four weeks prior to 

the start of testing. Approval for all of the above shall be obtained prior to the start of testing. 

B. Reported Measurements and Data: 

1. Electrical: Running amperes and voltage of each motor 3/4 horsepower or larger. 

2. Blower speed 

2. Static pressure gains or losses at entrance and exit of each filter, coil, fan and damper. 

3. Air temperatures in each heated or air conditioned space, at the entrance and exit of each 

coil, and unit, downstream from each pair of dampers where air of two different 

temperatures is mixed and outside the structure. 

4. Air flows at each fan. 

5. Air flows at each grille, register, and diffuser. 

6. Maximum and minimum air flows at each terminal box. 

7. V-Belt drive: driven sheave diameter and RPM; motor sheave diameter and RPM; belt size 

and quantity; and center to center distance, maximum, minimum and actual. 

C. Presentation of the report shall be four neatly bound copies of a typed report of the final operating test 

shall be submitted to the Architect for approval and subsequent transmittal to the Owner. 

D. The report shall include a title page stating the following information: TAB Company name, company 

address, company telephone and fax numbers, project name, project location, General Contractor 

Name, Certifying TAB Engineer. 

E. The report shall be sealed by an engineer registered in the state in which the project is 

constructed. 

3.04 FINAL JOB MEETING: 

A. At job completion, all Division 15 and 16 representatives shall meet at the job site and shall jointly 

inspect, check and test each control circuit, interlock circuit and power circuit to each piece of 

equipment. The Architect, Engineer and Owner shall be advised in writing of the time and date of this 

inspection in sufficient time to allow them to make arrangements to have a representative present if 

desired. 






SECTION 15300 

FIRE PROTECTION 

A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, apply to the work specified in 

this Section. 





1.03 SCOPE 

A. Design, furnish and install a new fire protection system for the building as specified, as shown on the 

drawings, and as required by all Authorities having jurisdiction over this project. Install new fire 

sprinkle system in all new or remodeled areas. Install a new fire entry, including all valves, fittings, 

test stations, headers and controls, Extend and connect the new fire sprinkler system to the site or 

the building main. 

B. The requirement that the entire fire protection installation shall be as required by and subject to the 

approval of the Authorities, shall govern the installation for this project. The design documents are 

intended as a guide for the installation; omission of specific indication of any item or apparently 

contradictory statements shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and 

installing that item if it is required by the Authorities. The design documents state the minimum 

requirements of the system. 

C. Upon completion of the work, this Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining from the Authorities a 

certificate of approval or other indication of such approval and acceptance by said Authorities. 

D. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ascertain exact and complete design and installation 

requirements, in compliance with all applicable codes and the requirements of the governing 

authorities, prior to submitting bid proposal. 

E. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ascertain the available water pressure and include in his bid 

the complete cost (including electrical) of the furnishing and installing of a fire pump system if required 

to meet the requirements of this specification. 

1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS 

A. All aspects of design, securing approval of design and construction, shall be in accordance with the 

current National Fire Protection Standards, City of Napa (or local fire marshal), Local Fire Protection 

District, Factory Mutual (FM) Global Loss Prevention Data Sheets, the State of California, and 

the International Building Codes. 

B. The officials listed above shall be, at a minimum, the relevant authorities. The contractor shall 

confirm the design criteria with all other authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. All materials and equipment provided under this section of the specifications shall be Factory Mutual 

(FM) Global Approved for the specific application. 

1.05 PERMITS 

A. The Contractor shall secure and pay for all necessary permits and fees required for the execution of 

his work. 

1.06 SCHEDULING 

A. The Contractor shall cooperate with all reasonable scheduling requests established both prior to 

commencing work and as the work progresses to the final completion date. 

Cinemark 15300 - 1 Fire Protection 


1.07 COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK 

A. The Contractor shall examine the architectural, structural, electrical and mechanical drawings and 

specifications, in order to become familiar with the general building and details as they apply to the 

work of fire protection. 

B. The accompanying drawings show the general run of plumbing air conditioning, pipe, ductwork and 

apparatus. The Contractor shall coordinate this work with all other construction to the end that there 

shall be no conflict as to space required. The ductwork and electrical work shall, in general, take 

precedence over sprinkler work, except where it is absolutely necessary to maintain required 

coverage. 

1.08 CONTRACTOR'S SHOP DRAWINGS 

A. Approval 

1. Before proceeding with the work, the Contractor shall make complete drawings of all 

services, piping, new sprinkler head locations and shall prepare hydraulic calculations and 

volumetric calculations. 

2. Drawings shall be made in such scope and detail as to receive approval of the local Fire 

Prevention Bureau (Fire Marshal), and the Landlord's insurance underwriter as well as to 

indicate all coordination with other work. 

3. The drawings shall be submitted to the engineer as DWG files for drawings and Adobe PDF 

files for hydraulic calcs and cut sheets for approval prior to submission to the governing 

authorities. 

B. Approved Drawings 

1. Upon obtaining preliminary approval from the Engineer, the Contractor shall make any 

corrections to the drawings which may be required by the Engineer. 

2. The corrected drawings shall then be submitted to the Fire Prevention Bureau, in the manner 

which they prescribe. 

C. The initial submittal to the Architect shall be made complete as one package and shall include: 

1. Cut sheets on all sprinkler heads, equipment and piping (electronic). 

2. Hydraulic calculations (electronic) 

3. Email with all of the submittal drawings in AutoCad DWG format and all cut-sheets and hydraulic 

calculations in Adobe .PDF format directly to the engineer prior to sending to the fire department. 

4. Incomplete submittals will be rejected. 

1.09 DESIGN CRITERIA 

A. Automatic Sprinklers 

1. Complete automatic sprinkler protection will be provided throughout the area in accordance 

with all sections of the current edition of NFPA as well as the local, state, and NFPA codes 

referenced above. 

2. Provide sprinklers between the screens and the wall in the auditoriums. Please note that the 

screen and associated valances are to be treated as obstructions (fixed partitions) to 

sprinklers. 

3. Except in the auditoriums and lobbies, extended coverage heads are not acceptable. 

4. All unprotected openings between floors shall be protected with a water curtain (heads six 

feet on center) and a draft stop. 

5. All rooms, enclosures, soffits, overhangs, canopies, etc. which are sprinkled and are subject 

to freezing shall be provided with a dry-pipe system (no anti-freeze) or freeze-proof sprinkler 

heads. 

B. Piping 

1. No piping shall penetrate the demising walls between two auditoriums. 

2. The sprinkler main serving the promenade shall include capped tees to allow for the future 

addition of sprinklers below the stadium seating. 

3. No flex piping shall be used. 

C. Zoning 

1. There shall be a minimum of two sprinkler zone with flow switches and isolation valves. 



2. The exact number and configuration of zones shall be as required by the authorities. 

3. The zones shall be split left and right, not vertically. 

D. Factory Mutual ( FM Global) Requirements: 

1. All fire sprinkler system components should be FM Approved and 

designed/installed in accordance to FM Global Loss Prevention Datasheets. 

Sprinkler system drawings, calculations, and component cut sheets (including 

SIN numbers) should be submitted for further review and comment prior to 

installation. The following design criteria is required for protection: 

a. Office and Light Hazard Areas: Provide 0.1 gpm/sq.ft. over the most 

remote 1500 sq.ft. This valid for areas with ceilings up to 30ft. Minimum 

sprinkler K factor: 5.6. Hose allowance: 250 gpm. 

b. Auditoriums: for Ceilings up to 60 ft, the design criteria should be: Wet 

system, 0.2 gpm/sq.ft. over the most remote 2500 sq.ft. Minimum 

sprinkler K-factor: 11.2 (it can be 8 if ceiling height is lower than 30 ft). 

250 gpm hose allowance. 

c. Projection booth, mechanical & electrical areas: Wet system, 0.2 

gpm/sq.ft. over the most remote 2500 sq.ft. Minimum sprinkler K-factor: 

8 (for a maximum ceiling height of 30 ft). 250 gpm hose allowance. 

2. FM Approved materials and equipment should be used, where applicable, and 

details of the installation should be in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

recommended guidelines and FM Global guidelines. All fire underground and 

above-ground sprinkler system components should be FM-Approved and 

designed/installed in accordance with FM Global Data Sheet requirements. FM- 

Approved materials and equipment should be used, where applicable, and 

details of the installation should be in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

recommended guidelines and FM Global guidelines. 

3. A water test shall be set up with local authorities to verify the available water 

supply at this location. The results of this water test should be used to design 

the sprinkler system piping arrangement. The FM Global Customer Service 

Desk, 888-606-4570, should be notified at least two weeks in advance so that a 

representative from FM Global can be present to witness the test. 

PART 2 – MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT 

2.01 PIPING 

A. Sprinkler Piping: 

1. Sprinkler piping may be welded, screwed, or grooved at contractor’s option. "Pulled Tees" 

are not acceptable. 

2. Piping weights, fittings, ratings and method of assembly shall be provided in accordance with 

NFPA-13, and the Authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Sprinkler piping shall be steel, no lighter than Schedule 10. 

4. All sprinkler piping shall be supported from the building steel. 

5. Flex piping is not allowed. 

6. Furnish and install seismic bracing and show all calculations on the shop drawing submittal. 

2.02 VALVES 

A. Except as hereinafter specified, furnish and install valves approved by NFPA and suitable for fire 

protection use where indicated on the Drawings or as required in accordance with the following: 

1. Interior gate valves 2" and smaller shall be approved indicating type with bronze bodies, for 

125 lbs. WWP, bronze trim, wedge discs, rising stems and screwed ends. 

2. Interior gate valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be approved indicating type of OS&Y pattern with 



iron bodies for 125 lbs. WWP, all bronze trim and flanged ends. 

3. Interior check valves 2" and smaller shall be all bronze swing check valves with screwed 

ends, for 125 lbs. WWP. 

4. Interior check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron or semi-steel bronze trim, swing check 

valves with flanged ends for 125 lbs. WWP. 

5. Drain and test valves shall be 125 lb. V.O.G., bronze threaded globe valves with renewable 

composition disc. 

2.03 SPRINKLERS 

A. Sprinklers shall be provided throughout the entire project except (when approved by the local 

authorities) in rooms containing electrical generators, electrical transformers, or electrical 

switchboards. The sprinklers shall be as specified below except when the governing authorities or 

FM require quick response sprinklers. In that case the sprinklers shall be as specified below, except 

135ºF rated. 

1. THEATER AUDITORIUMS: Recessed or exposed pendant,, 165F, flat black heads and flat 

black escutcheons. Note that these can be standard (recessed) or extended coverage 

(pendants) heads. 

2. THEATER LOBBY AREA WITHOUT CEILINGS: Pendant, 165F, with color as selected by 

the architect. 

3. THEATRE LOBBY AND PUBLIC AREAS WITH CEILINGS: Recessed 165F, white in white 

ceilings. Centered in tiles one way. 

4. PROJECTION BOOTH AND MEZZANINE AREAS: with Ceilings: Recessed, 165F, white 

heads and white escutcheons. Without ceilings: Upright, black brass pendants. 

5. NON-PUBLIC AREAS: Recessed pendants, 165F, white heads and white escutcheons 

6. ALL ELECTRIC ROOMS: When required by the local authorities, heads are to be located in 

the electric room and shall be 212F. 

7. Any special sprinklers required by UL shall be provided. 

8. Upright heads to be provided in rooms without ceilings. 

9. Piping in areas having a ceiling shall be concealed. 

10. Unless noted otherwise, sprinklers shall be centered in the tile in one direction, located no 

closer than 6" to the edge of tile in the other direction. 

11. No extended coverage sprinklers shall be used, except in the auditoriums and main lobby, 

and only upon permission of the authorities having jurisdiction. 

12. Sprinkler heads in the vestibule shall be the extended barrel, freeze-proof type, recessed. 

13. Trash alcoves and all other ceilings or soffits 8 ft and lower shall have concealed heads with 

cover plates to match the surrounding ceiling color. 

B. Hangers: Shall be installed as required and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories for use in 

a sprinkler system. Hangers shall be spaced in accordance with the requirements of the NFPA. 

C. Sprinkler Cabinet: 

1. One cabinet with a minimum of twelve (12) sprinklers and a head wrench shall be installed in 

the concession work room. 

2. Included in the cabinet shall be a minimum of two (2) sprinklers for each special temperature 

or configuration. 

3. The cabinet shall be so located that it will not be subject to an ambient temperature 

exceeding 100ºF. 

2.04 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 

A. Furnish and install fire department connections with check valve and approved automatic drip where 

indicated on the plans or as required by the authorities as follows: 

1. Wall siamese inlet shall be Allenco's No. 276, flush type with clapper valves, straight way 

body and caps with chains, ball drip piped to spill on grade thru wall and check valve. 

Threads shall match Local Fire Department. Exposed finish shall be polished brass. 



Lettering shall be as required. 

2. Sidewalk siamese shall be Allenco's No. 231-90o sidewalk siamese, cast brass body and 

escutcheon, 18" sleeve, body inlets with clapper valves, plugs and chains. Threads to match 

Local Fire Department requirements. Exposed finish shall be polished brass. Lettering shall 

be as required. 

2.05 STANDPIPES: Furnish and install as required by the authorities. 

A. Install as indicated on the drawings or required by the authorities at each floor level on each standpipe 

not more than 5'-0" from finished floor an indicating control valve, and a 2-1/2 inch fire department 

connection with 2-1/2" polished brass valve with cap and chain. Threads shall conform to the local 

fire protection district standards. 

B. Provide valve cabinet in finished areas. 

2.06 WATER FLOW SWITCHES 

A. Water Flow Detectors: 

1. Vane-Type Waterflow Detectors shall be installed on mains as one per zone. 

2. The detector shall be designed for mounting on either vertical or horizontal piping, but shall 

not be mounted in a fitting or within 12 inches of any fitting that changes the direction of water 

flow, and shall have a sensitivity setting to signal any flow of water that equals or exceeds 10 

gpm. 

3. Detector switch mechanisms shall incorporate an instantly recycling pneumatic retard 

element with an adjustable range of 0 to 60 seconds. 

4. Switches shall be suitable for operation on 24-volt, D.C., and shall be actuated by a vane 

extended into the waterway of the piping (Coordinate exact electrical characteristics with 

electrical contractor). 

5. Detectors shall be of dust tight construction. 

6. Detector switch enclosures shall be secured with a tamper proof bolt that requires the use of 

a special wrench for removal. 

7. Vane-Type Waterflow Detectors shall be Underwriters' Laboratories listed or Factory Mutual 

approved. 

8. The detector shall be furnished and installed under this section and wired completely under 

Division 16. 

B. Water flow detectors in non-conditioned areas or damp locations shall be suitable for damp conditions 

and shall not corrode. 

2.07 TAMPER SWITCHES 

A. Tamper switches shall be installed on each valve inside the building. 

1. Switches shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve 

control or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth (1/5) of the distance from its 

normal position. 

2. The mechanism shall be contained in a weather-proof die cast aluminum housing which shall 

provide a 3/4 inch tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for 

attachment to the valve. 

3. Switch housings; 

a. Red baked enamel. 

b. The switch mechanism shall have a minimum rated capacity of one amp, 125 volt 

A.C. - 0.25 amp, 24 volt D.C. (Coordinate exact electrical characteristics with electric 

al contractor). 

c. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause a switch 

operation if the housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting. 

4. Supervisory Switches and Gate Valve Switches shall be Underwriters' Laboratories listed and 

Factory Mutual approved. 

5. Supervisory Switches shall be furnished and installed under this section and wired completely 

under Division 16. 

B. Tamper switches located in non-conditioned or damp locations shall be suitable for damp conditions 

and shall not corrode. 



2.08 SIGNS 

A. Approved enameled metal signs shall be securely attached at all main drains, auxiliary drains, 

inspectors' test connections and control valves. 

2.09 DETECTOR CHECK VALVE 

A. Detector check valve shall consist of an automatic compound lever valve and an external bypass with 

disc type water meter, gate valve, check valve and necessary fittings. 

B. The detector check valve shall be installed in accordance with the Local Fire Department and Local 

Water Department rule and regulations. 

2.10 FIRE HOSE VALVE CABINET: Not Used 

2.11 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET: Not used, refer to the architectural specifications 


3.01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 

A. All trenches shall be dug to a line and the bottom cleaned and shaped to provide support of the pipe 

through its entire length. 

B. Bracing shall be provided as necessary to maintain excavations. 

C. As soon as underground work has been completely installed and tested, all excavations shall be 

backfilled with gravel to 1'-0" of finished grade and with clean earth (free from bricks, rocks, cinders, 

or any foreign matter) to grade. 

D. Minimum depth of the top of pipe shall be 5'-0" below grade. 

E. Backfill below concrete or asphaltic slabs shall be gravel to paving based. 

3.02 UNDERGROUND PIPING 

A. All bends and tees in underground piping shall be provided with concrete thrust blocks of sufficient 

size to prevent rupture of joints due to movement of pipe. 

B. All underground piping shall be installed in accordance with NFPA-24, 1987, Standard for Outside 

Protection. 

C. All underground piping shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA-24, 1987, Standard for Outside 

Protection. 

3.03 SPRINKLER PIPING 

A. It shall be a specific requirement that insofar as possible, all sprinkler system mains and branches 

shall be installed as close as possible to the structural members, not the ceiling. 

B. All piping for all systems shall be coordinated with lighting fixtures, air conditioning ducts, piping and 

air diffusers. The coordination shall be made with the sheet metal shop drawings and reflected on the 

sprinkler shop drawings prior to submission for approval. 

C. Pipe shall be protected from freezing where it might occur as determined by the final pipe routing. 

D. No piping shall penetrate the demising walls between auditoriums. 

E. A corrosive-resistant placard should be placed on each riser, stating the design criteria and resulting 

demand at the base of the riser, including hose stream allowance. 

F. All sprinkler piping with welded outlets or connections should be inspected prior to the installation to 

ensure that the pipe is free of welding slag and cutouts, and that the welded fittings do not protrude 

into the path of the water flow. 

G. All piping to be supported from structure, not deck or concrete slab. 



H. All plumbing adhesives, joint compound, and sealants within the building envelope 

must comply with emission limits outlined in Section 01352 IAQ Management." 

3.04 HANGERS AND SLEEVES 

A. All hangers shall be of approved materials and spaced in accordance with NFPA No. 13. 

B. Sleeves shall be set for all pipes passing through concrete floors and masonry walls. 

C. Provide primered escutcheon plates at all exposed wall penetrations. 

3.05 AUXILIARY DRAINS 

A. Trapped sections 

1. Auxiliary drains consisting of plugs, or globe valves and plugs where the capacity of a trapped 

pipe section exceeds 5 gallons, shall be provided to drain all points in the system that cannot 

be drained back to a main riser as shown on the plans. 

2. Field conditions may dictate additional drains which could be determined for bidding 

purposed which shall be provided as required by NFPA No.13. 

B. Drain Termination 

1. Drains are to be piped to a Code approved open-site sanitary drain. 

2. If no open-site drain is readily available, the fire protection contractor shall notify the Engineer 

in writing at least two weeks prior to bid, otherwise, the sprinkler contractor shall include all 

costs (labor, materials, excavation, etc.) for the installation of a suitable open site sanitary 

drain. 

3.06 INSPECTORS' TEST CONNECTIONS 

A. Furnish and install inspectors' test connections as required. 

3.07 CONCEALED WORK 

A. No work shall be concealed unless inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 

3.08 TESTING 

A. All systems: 

1. All systems including site piping shall be tested hydrostatically at not less than 200 pounds 

per square inch pressure for two hours or at 50 pounds per square inch in excess of 

maximum pressure when the maximum pressure to be maintained in the system is in excess 

of 150 PSI. 

2. The inside sprinkler and standpipe piping shall be installed in such a manner that there will be 

no visible leaks when the system is subject to hydrostatic tests. 

3. Submit a copy of contractor's material and test certificate signed by installer and Owner's 

representative after the installation is tested successfully and accepted by all authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

4. Following sprinkler installation, a Contractor's Material and Test Certificate per NFPA 13 

should be completed and submitted to FM Global to verify that proper hydrostatic testing (200 

psi for 2 hrs) has been performed. 

3.09 GUARANTY-WARRANTY 

A. The sub-contractor shall furnish a written warranty, counter-signed and guaranteed by the General 

Contractor, stating that all work executed under this section will be free from defects of materials and 

workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 

B. The above parties further agree that they will, at their own expense, repair and replace all such 

defective work and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the 

Guaranty-Warranty. 




SECTION 15400 

PLUMBING 


1.01 WORK DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION 

A. All material, labor and test systems. 

B. Complete plumbing system including soil waste and vent piping; floor drains; hot and cold water 

piping; gas piping, plumbing fixtures; water heater; pipe insulation; pipe; valves and hangers. 

C. Furnish manufacturer's submittal data for all major equipment including plumbing fixtures, water 

heater, drains, and clean-outs. 

D. No piping shall penetrate the demising walls of the auditoriums. 

1.02 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE 

A. Automatic fire protection sprinkler system - Section 15300 

B. Wiring and electrical connections to equipment - Division 16. 

C. Other Sections of 15000 

1.03 MATERIALS FURNISHED AS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION BUT INSTALLED AS DESCRIBED EL- 

SEWHERE 

A. Furnish and deliver complete to other trades as required in connection with Work of this section: Inserts, 

hangers, sleeves, and lead flashing for pipes passing through roof. 

1.04 MATERIALS INSTALLED AS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION FURNISHED BY OWNER 

A. Make final connections to and install complete: Concession and Work Room equipment. 

B. Refer to the drawings for additional scope. 

1.05 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 

A. Secure and pay for all permits and inspection by city, county and state authorities. 

B. Pay all fees and costs for connections. 

C. Perform work in accordance with all city, county and state regulations. 

1.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Cutting and patching shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. 

1.07 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 

A. Excavate and backfill for installation of pipes and equipment. 

1.08 DRAWINGS 

A. Plumbing work as shown on drawings. 

B. Supplementary drawings or details will be furnished if necessary. -Refer to Architectural interior - 

details, floor plans, elevations structural, and other sub contract drawings. 

C. Coordinate work to avoid interference. 

D. Do not scale plans; they are diagrammatic. 

E. Check all dimensions at buildings. 

PART 2 - MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION 

Cinemark 15400 - 1 Plumbing 


2.01 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION - GENERAL 

A. All materials new and of first grade. 

B. All materials and joints shall be in accordance with the Building and Plumbing Code requirements. 

C. In preparing his bid, the Contractor shall include the cost of all items and procedures necessary to 


specifically covered by the drawings and specifications. The Contractor shall carry-out his work and 

complete his construction as required by applicable Codes and Ordinances and in such manner as to 

obtain approval of all authorities whose approval is required without additional cost. The contractor 

shall include all fittings, vents,. traps, offsets, equipment, cleanouts, etc. as required to install the 

plumbing in a code approved manner. Any changes to the design shown on the drawings will be 

brought to the attention of the Engineer and reflected on the as-built drawings. 

D. All piping and equipment to be supported from structure – no “Sammies” allowed. 

E. All plumbing adhesives and sealants within the building envelope must comply 

with emission limits outlined in Section 01352 IAQ Management." 

2.02 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 

A. Install soil, waste and vent piping to collect drainage from all fixtures and floor drains as shown. 

B. Vent these pipe lines through roofs and extend and connect to site sewer mains as shown. 

C. Piping shall be PVC except where the governing authorities or code require cast iron with "no-hub" 

fittings. Piping located in return air plenums shall be cast iron. 

D. Vent piping shall be installed through a roof sleeve and flashed not less than 8" above the roof. 

Refer to architectural drawings for flashing details. 

E. PVC piping is allowed (except in return air plenums) if accepted by the local authorities, 

otherwise use cast iron. 

F. Vents shall be located a minimum of 10 feet away from building openings or outside air intakes. 

Vents through the roof shall be cast iron. 

G. Piping serving concession and scullery areas shall be cast iron with glass lining (or PVC 

below grade if allowed by code). 

H. Vents through the roof shall be cast iron. 

2.03 COOLING CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE 

A. Exterior cooling coil condensate drain lines are to be copper and to be installed in accordance with 

code, whether shown on the drawings or not. Drain lines shall be routed full size from the equipment 

(all connections) to the roof drain or sanitary sewer connection as required by the governing 

authorities. Terminate with an air gap fitting. 

B. Interior cooling coil condensate drain lines are to be copper (type M copper) with 1" insulation and is 

to be installed in accordance with code, whether shown on the drawings or not. Drain lines shall be 

routed full size from the equipment to a code approved indirect waste receptor with an air gap fitting. 

C. All fittings are to be sanitary type (DWV) with cleanouts every 50' or at a change in direction. Pipe 

shall be 1" minimum. 

D. Traps shall be vented and shall have a minimum 2" trap seal. 

E. Condensate drain piping shall be routed at 1/4" per foot or increased one pipe size and routed at 1/8" 

per foot. 

2.04 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 

A. Where shown on the drawings, install service weight cast iron pipe with "no-hub" fittings. 

B. Extend and connect to the building or site storm drain mains. 



C. Piping shall not penetrate demising walls and shall be run perpendicular to the building line. 

D. When allowed by local authorities, and installed in accordance with applicable codes, Schedule 40 

PVC may be used. PVC may not be used in return air plenums or in auditoriums. 

E. Minimum exterior depth shall be 18" below normal freeze depth. 

F. Furnish and install cleanouts as required by the local authorities. 

G. In the auditoriums, only cast iron piping may be used. 

2.05 HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING SYSTEM 

A. Copper type "L" hard drawn above floor on interior of the building. 

B. Copper type "K" soft temper under ground or under floor slabs. (No joints) 

C. Extend and connect to site or building water main. 

D. For each restroom group or bank of fixtures, provide ball cut-off valves above the layin 

ceiling of the corridor. 

E. The water line from the trap primer to the floor drain shall be PEX. 

F. Any copper or ductile iron piping below slab shall have a protective wrap. The surfaces of all 

be low slab or buried ductile iron or copper pipe and fittings shall be encased with two layers 

of 8-mil minimum thickness polyethylene, tube form. Both ends of the tube shall be 

thoroughly sealed with I 0-mil polyethylene tape to form a continuous and all-encompassing 

layer of polyethylene between the piping and surrounding earth or backfill material. 

Polyethylene material shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C105/A21 .5. Excess 

slack width in the polyethylene tube shall be taken up to make a snug, but not a tight fit, and 

secured with a adhesive tape wrapping around the pipe at the quarter points of each pipe 

length. Any rips, punctures or other damage to the polyethylene sleeve shall be repaired with I 

0-mil polyethylene tape or a short length of polyethylene tube cut open, wrapped around the 

pipe and secured in place with lO-mil polyethylene tape. 

2.06 PVC PLASTIC POLYVINYLCHLORIDE (PVC) (for storm and sanitary) 

A. Schedule 40 DWV, PVC, Type 1, Grade 1, NSF approved solid (no cellular core), pressure and 

temperature rated polyvinylchloride pipe conforming to ASTM D-1784 with solvent cement. ABS 

or cellular core PVC shall not be used. 

B 

PVC may be used, if allowed, by the Code Authorities and this specification. 

C. PVC may not be used in return air plenums or in auditoriums. 

2.07 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Soft copper tubing - Type K, soft temper. Fittings soldered, streamline type, wrought. 

B. Hard copper pipe - Type L, hard drawn. Fittings soldered, streamline type, wrought.-Fed. Spec. 

WE-T-799 or ASTM B-88. 

C. No mechanical fastening or joint systems are acceptable. 

2.08 VALVES 

A. Ball, globe and check: 125 psig working steam pressure. 

B. 2-1/2" and smaller, bronze body, soldered joints for copper shall be ball valves. 

C. Ball and globe with operating wheels, packing glands, stuffing boxes, union or bolted bonnets,rising 

stems; capable of being repacked while fully open and under pressure. 

D. Hammond, Stockham, Walworth,or Jenkins. 

E. 3" and larger shall be ball or butterfly valves.. 

F. Globe, straightway or angle pattern, renewable composition discs. 



F. GAS COCKS: 

1. Cocks on 2" lines and smaller shall be Jenkins 30A or Crane No. 324. 

2. Cocks on 2-1/2" line and larger shall be Emco-Nordstrom No. 143 flanged pattern. 

G. Flow Indicating Balance Valves: 

1. Equal to Taco Accu-Flo. 

2. Ball valve construction, all brass interior parts, venturi design, built-in drain port, blow-out 

proof stem. 

2.09 UNIONS 

A. Screwed pipe, up to and including 2" - Cast iron or malleable iron ground joint with brass inserts. 

B. In copper pipe - brass or bronze. 

C. 2" and smaller, ground joint type. 

D. With integral socket for soldering to copper tube in copper tube pipe lines. 

E. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions at all piping connections between dissimilar metals and all 

equipment. Union shall be "Devlin" as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator Co. and shall 

have nylon insulation. 

2.10 INSTALLATION OF PIPE: 

A. Ditches - at least 16" wider than pipe diameter. 

B. Pipe barrels and joints bedded on firm soil. 

C. Install pipe in accordance with pipe and fitting manufacturer's published recommendations. 

D. Use no cracked or broken pipe. 

E. Laterals to be turned up at 45 angle. 

F. Backfill to be placed and tamped firmly to half height of pipe in one layer and to top of pipe in next layer; 

ditch backfilled and tamped in successive layers of 12" thickness. 

2.11 SLEEVES 

A. Large enough on interior to permit free passage of bare pipe or pipe and insulation where piping 

passes through walls, floors or ceilings. 

B. Floor sleeves: galvanized steel extending to 1/2" above rough floor. 

C. Wall sleeves: oversize steel pipe. 

D. Calk sleeves installed below grade. 

E. Cast iron pipe passing through concrete slab, wire brushed, wrapped with 15 lb. asphalt saturated 

roofing felt. 

F. Do not install sleeves on pipe supplies through walls to fixtures. 

2.12 JOINTS 

A. In plated brass piping - Screwed joints made with red lead and linseed oil applied to male threads 

only. Parallel screw up to shoulder of fittings; in exposed work no threads are to show beyond fittings. 

B. In copper tubing- Full soldered joints. Pipe joints shall not contain any lead. 

2.13 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES 

A. Supports, hangers, anchors and guides shall be provided for all horizontal and vertical piping. Submit 

shop drawing details, before construction, of all piping 8" diameter and over and all piping in shafts. 

Shop drawings are to show locations and details of anchors, guides, expansion loops and joints, 

hangers, etc. The hanger design shall conform to the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. 

B. All pipe supports shall be of type and arrangement as hereinafter specified. They shall be arranged 

as to prevent excessive deflection and avoid excessive bending stresses between supports. 

C. All bracket clamp and rod sizes indicated in this specification are minimum sizes only. The Contractor 



shall be responsible for structural integrity of all supports. All structural hanging materials except 

variable spring units shall have a safety factor of 5 built in. 

D. Anchor points and pipe guides as shown on drawings or as required, shall be located and 

constructed to permit the piping system to take up its expansion and contraction freely in opposite 

directions away from the anchored points. 

E. Guide points for expansion joints shall be located and constructed wherever required or shown on 

drawings and at each side of an expansion joint or loop, to permit only free axial movement in piping 

systems but shall not be further than 3 pipe diameters on each side of joint. Guides for pipe with 

expansion joints shall be of the four roller heavy duty type securely welded to structural steel. 

F. Variable spring hangers shall be located and constructed for points subject to vertical movement. 

The first four hangers on horizontal piping at the pump suction and discharge and at the air handling 

unit coil connection shall be spring loaded from the building. 

G. Maximum spacing between pipe supports for steel or copper pipe to prevent excessive stress: (This 

does not apply where there are concentrated loads between supports.) 

Pipe Size Max. Span/Ft. Pipe Size Max. Span/Ft. 

1/2" 5 4" 14 

3/4" 6 5" 16 

1" 7 6" 17 

1-1/2" 9 8" 19 

2" 10 10" 22 

2-1/2" 11 12” & Over 23 

3" 12 

H. Maximum weights on hanger rods assuming maximum operating temperature of 450 F shall be such 

that stress in tension shall not exceed 9000 psi, using root area of threaded portion. In no case shall 

hanger size be less than 3/8" for pipe up to 2", 1/2" for pipe 2-1/2" to 3-1/2", 5/8" for pipe 4" to 5", 3/4" 

for pipe 6", 7/8" for pipe 8" to 12". 

I. Double bolt riser clamps shall be F & S, F & M, Grinnel or approved equal. 

J. Back-to-back channel loads shall be limited to the following: 

3" (4.1#) channel 2900 lbs. up to 36" C to C 

3" (4.1#) channel 1700 lbs. over 36" C to C 

4" (5.4#) channel 5100 lbs. up to 36" C to C 

4" (5.4#) channel 3000 lbs. over 36" C to C 

K. Roller type supports shall be used for pipes (larger than 2”) subject to axial movement. They shall be 

braced so that movement occurs in roller rather than support rods. 

L. Hangers for copper pipe, copper or heavily copper plated, Grinnell No.97c 

M. Provide all steel required for support of pipes other than steel shown on structural engineer's 

drawings. 

N. On insulated domestic cold water, storm drain, chilled water, condenser water, etc. hangers are to be 

sized to fit outside insulation and saddle. 

0. In general, all piping shall be supported from only structural building members or approved steel 

inserts imbedded in stone concrete pours. Where revisions require and are approved, piping 3" and 

smaller may be supported at intermediate points by "Phillips" 3/4" expansion bolts with lead shields, 

provided main supports are welded from structural steel and are no less than twenty feet on centers. 

Intermediate supports for pipe 4" and larger on concrete beams or columns shall be attached to by 

means of 4" x 4" x 3/8" clip knee angles with 3/4" expansion bolt in shear and supporting rod at 90o 

from another bolt. Note that an all insert job is permitted only for stone concrete floors. For all other 

types of construction, obtain approval of the Architect. 

P. Hangers for PVC pipe - Grinnell No. 104, for steel pipe, 104c plastic coated. Use rods or hooks 

attached to structural elements. Size rods to pipesizes. 

Q. Anchoring hangers to support weight of vertical risers shall be adequately sized to support loads. 

R. Hangers supporting insulated pipe shall have saddles installed between the hanger and the 

insulation. 

S. Hangers are to be sized and located outside the insulation. 



2.14 INSULATION 

A. Horizontal cold water above ceilings, all hot water piping (except runouts); horizontal storm lines and 

interior condensate drains. Where water piping is installed in an exterior wall or structure, the cold or 

hot water runout shall also be insulated. Tempered water lines need not be insulated. 

B. Molded glass fiber sectional, 1/2" thick (cold water), 1" thick (hot water, condensate piping, and 

storm lines) with factory applied vapor barrier with joints sealed with vapor barrier cement and joint 

sealer strips. 

C. Insulate fittings with mineral wool cement to same thickness as sectional insulation, trowel to smooth 

finish and coat with 1/16" thickness of mineral stabilized asphalt weathering compound. On exposed 

hot water piping, cover fitting insulation with 6 oz. canvas cemented in place with "Arabol" or "Lagfas". 

PVC insulation jackets may be used. 

D. The under side of roof drains shall be 1" thick fiberglass insulation with vapor barrier (3 lb./cu. ft.) 

extending beyond pipe 12" in all directions. All edges of insulation shall be sealed with mastic to 

provide vapor barrier. Secure to under side of roof construction. Vapor barrier shall be complete. 

E. At the contractor's option, Armstrong "Armalok" may be used in thermally equivalent thicknesses 

where codes permit. 

F. All insulation in return air plenums, including jackets, adhesives, coatings, mastics, etc., shall not 

exceed 25 flame spread or 50 smoke developed under ASTM Specification E-84 procedure. 

G. All insulated pipes shall have galvanized sheet metal saddles between the insulation and the hanger. 

H. All pipe insulation shall satisfy the State Energy Code requirements. 

I. Where water lines are installed in an exterior wall or adjacent to an exterior wall, the runouts shall be 

insulated as well. 

J. All Storm drain piping run in the auditorium shall be insulated with 2 layers of insulation, both 

layers sealed vapor tight. The inner layer shall be 1/2” of Armaflex. The outer or second layer 

shall be 1” of fiberglass insulation with a vapor barrier. 

K. Pipes insulated with fiberglass shall have the elbows covered with the pre-molded jackets designed 

for such an application. 

2.15 ESCUTCHEONS 

A. Chrome plated brass at all visible places on pipes passing through walls, ceilings and floors. 

2.16 Water Hammer Arrestors 

A. Installed at ends of each group of fixture connections, both hot and cold water, and elsewhere as 

required to prevent water hammer. 

B. Locate above ceilings. 

2.17 CLEANOUTS 

A. Locate as required by code but not where exposed to public view.. Provide sanitary tees, tapped 

tees, quarter bends and extend pipe to surface as follows: 

In walls: Wade W-8450-R with plug and polished stainless steel cover 

In floors: 

Wade Series W-6034 with nickel bronze cover 

B. Cleanouts shall not be installed in public spaces (except restrooms). Where cleanouts are required, 

and they would land in a public space, extend the cleanout arm back into a storage room or other 

similar, non-public space. 

2.18 ROOF - FLASHING 

A. Vent stack covers etc. coordinate with and as recommended by roofing manufacturer whose materials 

are installed. 

B. Sheet lead weighing not less than 3 lbs per sf. 

C. Base not less than 18" square for vent stacks passing through roof. 



2.19 DRAINS: Refer to schedule on drawings. 

A. Refer to schedule on drawings 

B. All drains to have same size outlet (unless noted otherwise) as connected piping, shall have deep 

seal traps or trap primers as required by the local authorities. Trap primers shall have backflow 

preventers as required by the local authorities. 

C. All drains shall have deep-seal traps and trap primers. Piping from the trap primers to the floor 

drains may be PEX or copper. Trap primers shall be mounted at 12” aff with an access door. 

D. Contractor shall furnish and install Sure Seal Model SS3000 preassembled inline floor drain 

trap sealer. The trap seal shall consist of five pieces: commercial grade ABS housing, keeper 

pin, neoprene rubber diaphragm, (2) soft rubber gaskets. Floor rating ASSE-1072 AF-GW. 

2.20 GRADES 

A. Horizontal, soil, waste and vent piping, drain in direction of flow, a minimum of 1/4" per foot inside 

building, unless otherwise noted on drawings. 

B. Water piping, a minimum of 1/8" per foot in either direction, but if possible, back to main cut-off valve 

and toward fixture outlets. Provide drains at all low points. 

C. Condensate drains at 1/4" per foot toward approved waste receptor. 

2.21 PLUMBING FIXTURES - GENERAL 

A. Provide plumbing fixtures as shown and scheduled on the drawings complete with all equipment, fittings, 

trimmings, etc. , as described. 

B. All fixtures grade "A". Name and trademark of the manufacturer printed or pressed on all fixtures, and a 

label which cannot be removed without destroying it, containing manufacturer's name or trademark and 

quality or class of the fixture affixed to all fixtures and not removed until after work has been accepted. 

C. All exposed metal on each plumbing fixtures shall be chromium plated finish. 

D. Fittings and trim below handicapped accessible lavatories and sinks shall be insulated with Truebro Lav 

Guard or Brocar Trap Wrap. Hot water stop valves and associated lavatory piping shall be insulated. 

E. All tubing and traps shall be chrome plated 17 gauge, except as specifically noted. 

F. American Standard, Kohler, Toto, or Eljer are approved equals. 

G. The maximum flow rates for each fixture type shall not exceed the values listed in the 

fixture specifications on sheet P4.1. 

2.22 GREASE TRAP 

A. Furnish model shown on drawings complete with vents and sampling ports. The installation shall be 

in accordance with all local codes and ordinances. 

B. Cover shall be heavy guage aluminum or as detailed. 

2.23 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERs or DRINKING FOUNTAINS 

A. Refer to schedule on the drawings. 

B. 3/8" IPS Union supply with stop at each EWC. 

C. Install in accordance with ADA requirements. 

2.24 WATER HEATER: 

A. Provide five year written warranty for the tank. Submit written warrantee with equipment submittal. 

Water heater submitted without written warranty will be rejected. 

B. Furnish complete with automatic thermostat. Set at 140 maximum. 



C. Temperature and pressure relief valve, Watts lOXL, with discharge piped as shown on drawings. 

D. Unit shall meet State Energy Code requirements. 

2.25 PROTECTION OF FIXTURES 

A. Against damage until accepted by Architect. 

B. Damaged fixtures are to be replaced with no cost to Owner. 

C. Pipe openings, etc. , against the entrance of foreign materials. 

D. "Acid Resisting" stamp to be left until after final inspection. 

E. Provide stops on supply pipes to all fixtures. 

2.26 GAS PIPING SYSTEM 

A. Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, with black malleable iron screwed fittings for 2-1/2" and smaller. Pipe 

sizes 3" and larger shall be welded. 

B. All gas piping and fittings exposed on exterior of building treated with 2 part epozy paint, yellow (or 

color required by the authorities) prior to installation and all scuff marks touched-up after installation. 

The entire pipe is to be painted (bottom and beneath clamps). 

C. Support pipe with no sags or air pockets. Piping 2" and smaller shall be mounted on treated blocks 

as detailed on the drawings. Pipes larger than 2" shall be mounted on roller supports as follows: up 

to 4": Miro Industries Model 24R. Above 4":Miro Industries Model 48R. 

D. Drain to drip legs 6" long at low points in system and at base of risers and drops. 

E. Install lever handle cock and union at each item of gas burning equipment. Allow 3" clear below the 

cap at the base of the drip leg. 

F. Vents on regulators are to be directed down. 

2.27 TESTS 

A. Storm drainage, soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the contractor and approved 

before acceptance. Underground soil and waste piping shall be tested before backfilling. All 

equipment required for testing shall be furnished by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 

Tests required by the authorities shall be in addition to the tests described herein. 

B. Defective Work: If inspections or tests reveal defects, such defective work or material shall be 

replaced or repaired as necessary and inspections and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall 

be made with new materials. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be acceptable. 

C. Drainage (waste and storm) and venting system piping shall be tested with water or air before the 

fixtures are installed. After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, the 

entire drainage and venting system shall be submitted to a final test with smoke or peppermint. 

1. The water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in 

sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipe shall be tightly closed except 

the highest opening, and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the 

system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under 

test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at 

least 10 foot head of water. In testing successive sections, at least the upper 10 feet of the 

next preceding section shall be tested so that each joint or pipe in the building except the 

uppermost 10 feet of the system has been submitted to a test of at least a 10 foot head of 

water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 15 

minutes before the inspection starts; the system shall then be tight to all joints. 

2. Air Test: If tests are made with air, a pressure of not less than 5 pounds per square inch shall 

be applied with a force pump and maintained at least 15 minutes without leakage. A 

mercury-volume gauge shall be used in making the air test. 

3. Final Test: When the smoke test is employed, the smoke shall be produced by a smoke 

machine, and a pressure equal to 1 inch water column shall be maintained for I5 minutes 

before inspection starts, When the peppermint test is used, 2 ounces of peppermint shall be 



introduced into each line or stack. 

4. The contractor shall rod the waste system just prior to completion. 

D. Domestic Water System 

1. When the roughing-in is completed and before insulation is applied or fixtures are set, each 

pressure zone of the hot and cold water piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic 

pressure of not less than 100 pounds per square inch gauge at the top of the riser, and 

proved tight at this pressure for not less than 30 minutes in order to permit inspection of all 

joints. Where a portion of the water piping system is to be concealed before completion, this 

portion shall be tested separately to the pressure which would be imposed upon it if it were 

tested as part of a zone, as herein before specified. 

2. Cleaning and Adjusting: Equipment, pipes, valves, fittings and fixtures shall be cleaned of 

grease, metal cuttings, and sludge that may have accumulated from operation of the system 

during the test. Any stoppage, discoloration or other damage to the finish, furnishing or parts 

of the building, due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system, shall be 

repaired by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. When the work is complete, the water 

systems shall be adjusted for uniform circulation. flush valves and automatic control devices 

shall be adjusted for proper operation. 

3. Sterilization: After pressure tests have been made, the entire domestic water-distribution 

system shall be thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained dirt and mud have been 

removed, and shall be sterilized by chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be 

either liquid chlorine conforming to Federal Specification BB-C-120 or hypochlorite 

conforming to Federal Specification 0-C-114, Type II, Grade B, or Federal Specification 0-S- 

602, Grade A or B, The chlorinating material shall provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts 

per million and shall be introduced into the system in an approved manner. The treated water 

shall be retained in the pipe long enough to destroy all non-spore forming bacteria. Except 

where a shorter period is approved, the retention time shall be at least 24 hours and shall 

produce not less than 10 ppm of chlorine at the extreme end of the system at the end of the 

retention period. All valves in the system being sterilized shall be opened and closed several 

times during the contact period. The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the 

residual chlorine is reduced to less than 1.0 ppm. During the flushing period all valves and 

faucets shall be opened and closed several times. Samples of water shall be taken from 

several points in the system in properly sterilized containers for bacterial examination. The 

sterilizing shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of pollution for at least two full 

days. The system with not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been 

obtained. The contractor shall submit test results for approval. 

E. Materials and fixtures shall be tested by the manufacturer before shipment. 

F. Tanks and heaters not tight under test shall be replaced with new heaters and tanks. 

G. Furnish to the Architect certificates of tests and final acceptance as issued by the local Plumbing 

Inspector. 

2.28 BACKFLOW PREVENTER 

A. Double check valve assembly consisting of two independently operating, spring loaded check valves, 

two gate valves, and four test cocks for field testing, Febco Model 792, CLA-VAL Model D, Jenkins 

FM Assembly, or approved equal. 

B. Provide indirect drain to indirect waste receptor as required by the governing authorities. 

2.29 Hose Bibs and Yard Hydrants 

A. Exterior Wall : Josam Series 7100 Hydrasan I non-freeze hose bib with vacuum breaker. Satin Finish 

Nikaloy hinged latching cover. Length as required to suit wall thickness, verify wall thickness with 

architectural drawings. 

B. Rooftop: Josam Series 4728 non-freeze hose bib with vacuum breaker (or yard hydrant as detailed) 

Satin Finish Nikaloy finish and plastic handle. Length as required to suit wall thickness, verify wall 

thickness with architectural drawings. 

C. 3/4" HPT outlet, integral vacuum breaker-backflow preventer, pressure relief valve, 3/4" 

female NPT inlet. Furnish control key with faucet. 



D. Yard hydrants shall meet ASSE 1057, equal to Woodford sanitary yard hydrant model s3, freezeless, 

automatic draining, backflow protected. The bury depth shall be 12” below the freeze line. 


A. The sub-contractor shall furnish a written warranty, counter-signed and guaranteed by the General 

Contractor, stating that all work executed under this section will be free from defects of materials and 

workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 

B. The above parties further agree that they will, at their own expense, repair and replace all such defective 

work and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the 





SECTION 15500 

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 




work specified in this Section. 





C. Section 16900 

1.03 SCOPE 

A. Provide a complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems including all air distribution, as 

indicated on the drawings and in these specifications. 

B. Meet or exceed the minimum requirements of local heating, ventilating and air conditioning codes. 

C. Provide shop drawings and submittal data for approval. Refer to Section 15000. No work is to be 

installed without approved shop drawings. 

D. HVAC Contractor must be certified by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) to handle 

refrigerant and maintain records of their certification throughout the duration of the project and during 

the subsequent one year warrantee period. 

E. The HVAC Contractor shall closely coordinate the locations of all roof top equipment with the steel 

erector/fabricator and the structural drawings. The contractor shall verify all roof (and slab) 

penetration sizes and modify the sizes and or the locations of the penetrations such that the ducts 

and the associated duct fittings fit within the structural members. The contractor shall locate the 

openings dimensionally from the closest structural member. These requirements apply to both the 

Owner furnished equipment and the equipment furnished by the HVAC contractor. 

. 

F. The HVAC Contractor shall make the preparation for and corrections necessary for the testing, 

adjusting and balancing of the HVAC systems. 

G. Parts and labor warranty for the Owner furnished equipment is to be furnished by the Owner for a 

period of one year. All other products and the labor associated warranty is the responsibility of the 

contractor. The service calls for the HVAC shall be made on a 24-hour, seven days a week basis. 

H. The contractor shall perform the start-up of the all furnished HVAC equipment. 

I. At the completion of the project, the test and balance contractor shall furnish and install 

(replace) all of the RTU factory variable sheaves with new fixed sheaves. 

1.04 PERMITS - INSPECTIONS 

A. Secure and pay for all permits and inspections by regulating authorities. 

B. Perform work in accordance with all governing regulations. 

1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS 

A. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning work shown on drawings. 

B. Supplementary drawings or details will be furnished if necessary. 

C. Refer also to Architectural interior details, floor plans and elevations, structural and other 

Cinemark 15500 - 1 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 


sub-contract drawings. 

D. Coordinate work to avoid interference with other trades. 

E. Do not scale plans. They are diagrammatic. 

F. Check all dimensions at building. 


A. Cutting and Patching shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. However, this 

Contractor is referred to the General Conditions. 

1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS 

A. Refer to Section 15000 for additional submittal requirements 

B. Sheet Metal Shop Drawings are not required. The contractor is to check all clearances prior to 

fabrication. The routing of the ducts, particularly in the auditorium and projection booth is to be 

followed. 

1. The Contractor is verify all structural and architectural clearances prior to fabrication of the 

duct work. 

2. The design intent must be followed, including the equal friction design of the branch ductwork 

in the auditoriums. 

3. No deviation from the auditorium or projection booth duct work is allowed except for 

coordination with the allowable space and only after RFI. 

C. Cut sheets: 

1. Cut sheets: Submit via email electronic cut sheets in Adobe .PDF format (one PDF file 

per submittal). 

2. Do not submit binders or notebooks. 


2.01 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION - GENERAL 

A. New and first grade; Refer to Article 3 of the General Conditions. 

B. During construction furnish and install a filter medium over all open return air ducts. Cut to size 

and clip on. Just prior to test and balance, remove the filter media and replace unit filters . 

C. The ductwork drawings represent the performance arrangement of the material to convey hot, 

cold, ventilation or exhaust air from one point to another point. 

1. The drawings of the ductwork represent the general routing intended. 

2. The ductwork may be shown as single line or double line. When shown as double line, it 

is for the purpose of conveying concept and it assists the designer in estimating pressure 

drop for the purpose of sizing fans and air handling equipment. The dimensions given on 

the single line or the double line ductwork are given for the purpose of establishing 

velocity, pressure drop, aspect ratio and performance standards. The ductwork size is 

not intended to be absolute or specific. It is intended to give the Contractor a general 

scope from which he can estimate quantities of sheet metal and labor for the work. 

3. The drawings do not and are not intended to show in detail all transitions, elbows or 

turns. It is to be understood that this ductwork shown occupies, along with other trades, 

the void spaces within the building above and below structural work. The exact routing 

location and position of this ductwork is the responsibility of the Contractor. 

4. The Contractor is not to use the drawings for direct fabrication of material. 

D. All exposed elements above or behind return air grilles are to be painted flat black. 



E. Sealants within the building envelope must comply with emission limits outlined in 

Section 01352 IAQ Management." 

2.02 DUCTWORK 

A. METAL 

1. Galvanized steel fabricated and installed in accordance with "HVAC Duct Construction 

Standards - Metal & Flexible, First Edition, 1985", published by SMACNA, and in 

accordance with NFPA Pamphlet #90A . 

2. Low pressure duct work shall be constructed to comply with the requirements for 2" water 

gauge (W.G.) As listed in the SMACNA Narrowscope Duct Construction Table 1-5 EX 

(Copy Attached). “Ductmate ‘25'" with metal cleats is also acceptable. No other duct 

construction standard or method will be approved. Duct guage shall be 24 minimum. 

3. Elbows shall be long radius turns and shall be used only where shown on the drawings. 

Square elbows with turning vanes are not acceptable, unless specifically shown on the 

drawings. Transitions shall be increased or decreased 1" in 7 lineal inches; in no case 

shall transitions be greater than 30 degrees. If square elbows are used (only where 

allowed on the drawings) turning vanes must be installed. The first elbow from the 

rooftop unit or air handling unit shall be long radius with turning vanes. 

4. Spin-in connections equal to Genflex SM-lDEL. 

5. Interior painted dull black inside at all grilles. 

6. Provide suitable access for cleaning. 

7. Transverse duct joints shall be sealed in acordance with SMACNA standards. 

8. All duct dimensions and sizes noted on the drawings are air stream unless specifically 

noted otherwise. 

B. DUCTWORK, FLEXIBLE 

1. Flexible ductwork be installed for supply to single ceiling diffusers. Size as shown for 

round ducts. Avoid 90 degree or greater turns. 

2. Class One as rated by UL-181. 

3. Size to be as shown on drawings, maximum length 7 feet. 

4. 1" thick, 3/4 pound density (R-factor = 4.2) fiberglass insulation with polyethylene vapor 

barrier jacket. 

5. Duct connectors shall be nylon and cinched tight. 

6. Duct collars shall have a 5/8" flange and 3" shaft. 

7. Flex duct shall meet the following minimum requirements: 

Inches Water 

Working Press: 

Positive 6" 

Negative thru 16" dia. 4" 

Neg. 18" & 20" 1" 

Maximum Press: 

Positive 15" 

Negative thru 16" dia. 10" 

Negative 8" & 20" 2.5" 

8. Acceptable Manufacturer and Model: 

Flexmaster Type 8 - insulated 

Thermaflex G-KM 

9. Projector exhaust duct to be Flexmaster NI-45, rated for negative 10”w.c. 

C. DUCTWORK, FIBER GLASS: Not Acceptable, except for the boots over the return air grilles. 

D. Materials, installation, etc., shall conform to NFPA Pamphlet No. 90A as minimum requirements 

and sealants within the building envelope must comply with emission limits outlined in 

Section 01352 IAQ Management." 

E. Interior exposed ductwork shall be metal with 1" internal lining. 



F. Ductwork exposed to the weather (exterior) shall be metal with 2" thick internal lining, with 2" 

wrapped exterior insulation protected by an aluminum jacket. Total 'R' value shall exceed 16. 

Aluminum jacket shall be 24 gauge fastened with sheet metal screws at 6" O.C. and sealed with 

silicon. 

2.03 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 

A. Spin-in connectors: 

1. Spin-in type connector with damper with quadrant. Auditoriums shall have duct taps as 

detailed or noted.. 

2. Seal metal to metal connections air tight with SMACNA approved sealer. 

3. Connector is to have internal insulation guard. 

4. Flexible duct connections are to be cinched tight. 

B. Volume controls 

1. Heavy plate splitters where indicated. 

2. Volume controls on square rod turning axles. 

3. Locking quadrants on exposed duct. 

4. Young Regulator flush operators on concealed duct over inaccessible ceilings. Color to 

match ceiling tile. 

C. Access Doors 

1. Provide access doors at each fire damper, fire/smoke damper, where control devices 

occur within ductwork, and as indicated on the drawings. 

2. Access doors shall be hinged so that the air pressure holds the door in the closed 

position. 

3. Provide hinges and catches and where duct is lined internally, provide collar and double 

thickness door. 

2.04 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS 

A. As scheduled on the Drawings. 

B. Approved Manufacturer's: Titus, Price, Nailor Industries. No other manufacturers will be 

accepted. 

2.05 DUCT INSULATION 

A. Internal ductliner shall have a thickness of 1 (minimum) or two inches as indicated on the 

drawings or as required by the authorities or code. The duct liner shall meet or exceed the 

following Sound Absorption Coefficients (Type 'A' Mounting, ASTM C 423-81 and ASTM E 795 

test methods): 

Sound Absorption 

Octave Band Center Frequencies 

Thickness: 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC 

1" 0.17 0.35 0.59 0.81 0.90 0.94 0.65 

2" 0.34 0.64 0.96 1.03 1.0 1.03 0.90 

(The 1" values are based on Knauf E-M,1.5 lb, 1.5 lb. . The 2" values are based on 

Knauf E-M,1.5 lb..) 

B. All duct dimensions shown on the drawings are air stream dimensions. 

C. Stiklip attachment, “buttered ends”. Use ASTMC type A method of lining attachment. 

D. All rectangular ducts in, to, or from auditoriums shall have internal lining, thickness as noted. 

The auditorium round ducts shall be externally lined with 3/4# density external insulation. This 

applies to all of the RTU or AHU duct work in the projection booth ceiling and in the auditoriums. 

E. In all rooftop unit ducts not in or serving auditoriums, the first 15 feet of supply and return ducts 

to and from rooftop units or air handlers shall be internally lined with 1.5" thick internal lining. 

F. In the non-auditorium, non-projection booth ducts from or to rooftop units, past 15', install external 

duct insulation or internal lining at the contractor’s option.. 



G. External duct insulation shall be 3/4 lb/ft 3 density external insulation with foil facing, galvanized 

wire wrapping, stiklips on bottom on ducts over 24" wide, joints lapped and mastic sealed for 

complete moisture barrier. Over-lap lined duct 6" minimum. Insulation thickness shall be as 

required for an installed minimum R Value = 6 (aged) or as required by code. The duct 

insulation shall have an ASTM Flame Spread rating of 25 or less. 

H. All exhaust ducts are un-insulated.. 

2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS 

A. Flexible connections on inlet and outlet each fan and rooftop unit, 4" long, minimum 1" slack. 

B. Ventglas fire resistant, waterproof, mildew proof fabric or equal. 

C. External unit connections shall not have flex duct connections. 

D. Install additional flex duct connections as indicated on the drawings. 

2.07 FIRESTATS 

A. All fans with capacity of 2000 cfm or less to have fixed temperature firestats. Exhaust fan 

firestats to have a setting of 125 F. Locate in airstream in fan housing. 

B. Rooftop units shall have firestats set at 200° F. above the maximum operation temperature. 

Locate within the unit in the main duct on the downstream side of the filters. 

C. The reset of the thermostatic device to be manual type, easily accessible inside unit. 

D. Firestats shall be Honeywell L4029E or equal by Johnson Control or Barber-Coleman. 

E. The firestat shall be field installed and wired by the mechanical contractor 

2.08 SMOKE DETECTORS 

A. The smoke detection system (SDS) shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the drawings 

in all rooftop units in the supply and return ducts. 

B. SDS, when activated, shall stop fans and sound alarm. 

C. The detector and the entire SDS installation shall conform to NFPA Pamphlet No. 90A, including 

remote test switches and indicating lights. 

D. The mechanical contractor shall cut the hole in the duct for the installation of the detector in fans 

other than rooftop units. 

E. The mechanical contractor shall make the appropriate wiring connections within the fan to stop 

the unit when the smoke detector is activated. 

2.09 DAMPERS 

A. Manual multiblade larger than 8": galvanized steel, heavy gage frames and blades, blade shafts 

in bearings, blades interlocked, accessible quadrant and locking device. 

B. Motor operated multiblade larger than 8": galvanized steel, heavy gage frames and blades, blade 

shafts in bearings, all properly interlocked for accurate modulating control. 

C. Fire dampers, galvanized steel, UL label fire equal to Ruskin DIBD2 Style ‘B’ with the blades out 

of the air stream. 

1. Provide UL approved and labeled fire dampers where shown on the drawings and 

required by NFPA-90A and/or the Fire Marshall. Install damper as required for UL and 

local authorities’ approval. 

2. Provide 160°F fusible links for all dampers plus 10% extra quantity. 

3. Provide an access door at each damper location for resetting the fire damper. 

4. Downstream of all fire dampers in ducts handling velocities of 2000 FPM or greater, 

provide a combination access opening, viewing window, and vacuum relief panel equal to 

United Type AR-W. 

D. Where fire dampers are integral with the diffuser, they shall be furnished with the diffuser. 

E. All motorized dampers not integral with equipment shall be furnished and installed by the 

Mechanical Contractor. 

F. All motorized dampers shall be of extremely low leakage with edge seals. 



G. Combination Fire/Smoke dampers, galvanized steel, UL label fire equal to Ruskin FSD60 with 

TS150. Coordinate the exact power requirements with the electrical contractor. 

1. Provide combination fire and smoke dampers where shown on the drawings. Dampers shall 

meet all requirements of fire dampers and additionally shall include an operating shaft, 

which, when rotated 90° causes the damper to operate between closed and open. 

2. Each damper shall be furnished complete with factory sleeve and damper operator (electric 

to conform to control system) factory installed on exterior of sleeve and properly linked to 

damper operating shaft. Operators shall be UL listed and labeled as Fire Damper 

Operators. 

3. Provide access doors for fire and smoke dampers as specified for fire dampers. 

4. The fire dampers shall be normally closed, held open with 120V power. Upon loss of power, 

the dampers shall shut, upon regaining power, the damper shall open. 

H. Mark all air balancing devices in balanced position with permanent paint. Tie a ribbon around 

the exposed handle. 

I. All duct connections shall have balance dampers whether shown on the drawings or not. 

J. SMOKE DAMPERS 

1. All motorized smoke dampers shall be furnished under this Section and installed per the 

manufacturer's UL installation instructions. 

2. Smoke dampers shall be qualified to and listed under Underwriters' Laboratories Standard 

UL 555S, September 1983 or latest version for Leakage Class II (10 cfm/SF at 1 inch W.G.) 

performance after 30 minute exposure at 350oF. Dampers shall also conform to NFPA 90A 

smoke damper requirements. 

3. Damper frames shall be constructed of minimum #16 gauge galvanized steel channel and 

shall have flanges for duct mounting. All blade to blade linkage on each section shall be 

concealed within the damper frame. In no case shall the section linkage be exposed to the 

air stream. The maximum size of single section not larger than 48 inches or less in width 

and 72 inches or less in height. The blades of multiple section dampers shall be 

interconnected with appropriate jack shafts. 

4. Damper blades shall not exceed 6 inches in width. Larger damper sections shall be of 

multiple blade type construction. Blades shall be constructed of galvanized steel with 

minimum #16 gauge equivalent thickness. Blade pins and linkage shall be zinc-plated steel. 

Bearings shall be stainless steel or oil-impregnated sintered bronze. Blade seals shall be 

silicone rubber, compression type flexible steel or a combination of both. 

5. Operators shall be mounted by the damper manufacturer at the time of damper fabrication 

and shall be provided with the damper as a single unit. Operators shall be qualified and 

labeled under UL 555S, September 1983 or later version. 

6. Operators shall be electric, 120V, rated to 350oF. The operators shall be of sufficient 

demonstrated power to open the dampers from a fully closed position against a 4 inch W.G. 

static pressure differential and to close the dampers from a fully open flow rate of 3000 fpm. 

Operators shall be mounted outside of the air stream and shall be for normally closed 

damper operation. 

7. Approved manufacturers: Ruskin Model SD60 or equivalent. 

K. Motorized/Automatic Control Dampers: 

1. Furnish and install, at locations shown on plans, or in accordance with schedules. Control 

damper shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 accredited manufacturer that meets the 

following minimum construction requirements. 

2. Damper frames (when size permits) shall be constructed using roll-formed structural hat 

channels, reinforced at the corners, formed from a single piece of minimum 16 gauge (1.6) 

galvanized steel. 

3. The roll-formed frames shall be structurally superior to13 gauge U-channel frames. The 

blades shall be opposed blade, single skin, 16 gage (1.6) galvanized steel with three 

longitudinal grooves for reinforcement. Blade edge seals shall be PVC coated polyester 

fabric suitable for -25°F to +180°F (-32°C to +83°C) mechanically locked into the blade 

edge. 

4. Jamb seals shall be flexible stainless steel metal, compression type to prevent leakage 

between end of the blade and the damper frame. Use of the blade end to overlapping frame 

for jamb seal is not acceptable. Adhesive or clip-on type seals for blade and jamb seals are 



not acceptable. 

5. Bearings shall be corrosion resistant, molded synthetic sleeve type turning in an extruded 

hole in the damper frame. Axles shall be ½” (13) plated steel, hexagonal shaped and 

positively locked into the damper blade (round axles are not acceptable). 

6. Linkage shall be concealed out of airstream, within the damper frame to reduce pressure 

drop and noise and lessen the need for maintenance. 

7. Submittals must include leakage, maximum airflow and maximum pressure ratings based on 

AMCA Publication 500. Damper leakage shall not exceed 10 cfm per square foot at 4” sp. 

8. Damper shall be equal to Ruskin model CD36. 

L. Electronic / Electric Damper Actuators: 

1. Manufactured, brand labeled or distributed by BELIMO or equal. 

2. Size for torque required for damper seal at load conditions. 

3. Coupling: V-bolt dual nut clamp with a V-shaped, toothed cradle. 

4. Mounting: Actuators shall be capable of being mechanically and electrically paralleled to 

increase torque if required. 

5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry without the use 

of end switches to prevent any damage to the actuator during a stall condition. 

6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism 

7. Power Requirements (Spring Return): 24 V ac, maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V 

dc. 

8. Temperature Rating: -22 to +122ºF 

9. Housing: Minimum requirement NEMA type 2 / IP54 mounted in any orientation. 

10. Agency Listing: ISO 9001, cULus, and CSA C22.2 No. 24-93. 

11. The manufacturer shall warrant all components for a period of 5 years from the date of 

production, with the first two years unconditional. 

2.10 FANS 

A. Furnish and install the fans as scheduled on drawings. 

B. Rated and labeled by AMCA. 

C. Switched as shown on Electrical drawings. 

D. Equipped with manual reset firestats. 

E. Furnish fans pre-wired thermal disconnect switches and 16" high factory curb or height as 

scheduled. The motorized dampers shall be shipped pre-wired from the factory or field wired by 

the mechanical contractor. 

F. Direct drive fans shall be furnished with SCR variable speed controllers factory wired internal to 

the fan. 

G. Fans to be as manufactured by Cook, Acme, or Greenheck. 

2.11 ROOFTOP UNIT 

A. Units and curbs shall be furnished as specified on the drawings. 

B. Install heating and cooling units as scheduled and detailed. Units shall be factory assembled 

and tested complete and ready for operation, except for the economizer components (and/or 

outside air intakes) which shall be field installed by the mechanical contractor. 

C. Each unit shall be provided with 16" high 14 gauge galvanized steel fabricated roof-mounting 

frame. Curbs formed as detailed with corners riveted or welded as required for strength. Curbs 

shall be self-supporting and shall be sloped to match the roof slope and maintain the units level. 

Curbs shall be the acoustic type shown on the drawings (factory installed acoustic fill) as 

manufactured by ThyBar. 



D. Units shall contain hermetic multi-cylinder compressors, which shall have positive constant 

pressure lubrication. Units shall contain indoor and outdoor coils, of non-ferrous construction with 

aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing with all joints brazed. 

E. The supply fans shall be capable of delivering required cfm of air against external static pressure 

scheduled. The supply fans shall be centrifugal type, belt driven by permanently lubricated 

motors and variable sheaves. 

F. Condenser fans shall be propeller type, direct driven by permanently lubricated motors. 

G. Refrigeration system shall be protected by high and low pressure stats, loss of charge and indoor 

coil freeze-up protection devices, current and temperature sensitive compressor motor protectors, 

and a device which prevents starting of compressor more than once every five minutes. 

H. Rooftop units as scheduled shall be combined heating, electric cooling units with ARI certified 

rating. 

I. Units as scheduled will have economizers, motorized outside air dampers and motorized relief 

dampers. The mechanical contractor shall field install the economizer hood shipped with the unit. 

J. Prior to final acceptance, unit manufacturer shall furnish, in triplicate, certification that rooftop 

units are installed and operating in accordance with plans and specifications and all safety 

controls are functioning satisfactorily. 

K. Certain units shall have a factory installed GFI weather proof convenience receptacle. The 

receptacle shall be powered by the electrical contractor. 

L. The units shall have factory installed filter racks and access doors with one set of filters installed. 

The filters shall 2” pleated media (refer to the filter paragraph below for specification). Refer to the 

schedule for additional options and accessories. 

M. Theatre rooftop units shall be Lennox. The outside air controller (from the CO2) shall be 

proportional, not stepped. 

2.12 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. All equipment with integral heaters, motors and devices which require electrical voltage or phase 

voltage different from primary service voltage to the unit shall be internally equipped with 

transformers so only a single electrical service is required to the unit. 

B. If the electrical characteristics of the equipment actually furnished differs from that scheduled, the 

HVAC contractor is responsible for: 

1. Coordinating the changes with the electrical contractor 

2. The cost incurred by the electrical contractor associated with the change. 

3. Design costs associated with the change required for resubmission to the governing 

authorities. 

2.13 INSTRUCTION AND INSTRUCTION BOOKLETS 

A. Instruct Owner or representative thoroughly in proper operation of systems. 

B. Provide at least two copies of instruction booklets, including simple step instructions for normal 

operation, minor maintenance suggestions and control diagram. 

C. After compliance with above, secure letter from Owner acknowledging same, give letter together 

with two additional instruction booklets to Architect for his permanent file. 

2.14 TESTING AND BALANCING 

A. The Section 15034 Test and Balance (TAB) Contractor shall balance the entire system for proper 

operation. Refer to Section 15034 for additional information. 


that in which the system is first operated and tested. 

D. The HVAC contractor shall make any changes or replacements to the sheaves, belts, dampers, 

valves, etc. required for correct balance as advised by the TAB Contractor, at no additional 

expense to the Owner. 



2.15 START-UP OF OWNER FURNISHED ICE MACHINES AND WALK-IN COOLERS: 

A. The Contractor shall coordinate and assist in the start-up and check out of the owner furnished 

ice machines by the area authorized manufacturer's representative. 

2.16 VIBRATION ISOLATION 

A. The Contractor shall provide a complete, properly adjusted and effective system of vibration 

isolation, vertical piping support, and sound control as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or 

as specified. 

B. The system of vibration isolation, vertical piping support, and sound control shall include, but not 

be limited to, the following: 

1. Support isolation for motor-driven mechanical equipment. 

2. Flexible ductwork connections. 

C. Isolators for equipment suspended from structure: Model SLF free standing and laterally stable 

spring mounts complete with 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pads between the baseplate and 

the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. 

Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8" of compressed height of the spring at rated load. 

Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. 

D. FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS: Laminated flexible sheet of cotton duct and sheet elastomer 

(butyl, neoprene or vinyl), reinforced with steel wire mesh where required for strength to withstand 

duct pressure indicated. Form connectors with full faced flanges and accordion bellows to 

perform as flexible isolation unit, and of manufacturer's standard length for each size unless 

otherwise indicated. Equip each unit with galvanized steel retaining rings for airtight connection 

with ductwork. 

E. Curbs for roof mounted equipment shall be isolated with 1/2" fiberglass pads, Type 'E' density, as 

manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. Fiberglass board to be supplied in 48" long lengths. 

Field cut pads to fit the top of curb (continuous) and adhere to curb with a mastic adhesive. 

Exposed cut edges of pads to be sealed with a 20 year clear silicone caulk. - Note: Lead time is 

4 to 6 weeks. The Kinetics isolation pads are in addition to the fiberglass pad or seal shipped 

with the rooftop unit. 

2.17 RELIEF HOODS 

A. Furnished and installed as indicated on the drawings. 

B. Barometric center pivot dampers with edge seals and adjustable counter balance. 

C. Furnish 16" high curbs with hood. 

2.18 D/X SPLIT SYSTEMS 

A. D/X split systems shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the drawings. 

B. Approved manufacturers are Trane, Carrier, York and Lennox. 

C. “Smart” electronic thermostats shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the drawings. 

Thermostats to be Honeywell T7300 series or approved equal. 

D. The contractor shall furnish and install filter racks and filters for 2" pleated media (Farr 30/30). 

2.19 EQUIPMENT START UP 

A. All HVAC equipment shall be shall be started by the contractor. 


that in which the system is first operated and tested. 

C. Temperature Control (ATCS) start-up and commissioning: 

1. The mechanical contractor shall assign one service technician to assist the ATCS vender 

in the ATCS startup. 

2. The contractor shall assist and coordinate pre-function checklist, startup and 

system functional testing with Commissioning Agent. Coordinate retesting as 

necessary until satisfactory performance is verified. 



D. The Owner’s rooftop unit supplier shall provide an operational checkout of the rooftop units after 

the mechanical contractor has performed the required startup. 

2.20 AIR FILTERS 

A. Filters are to be MERV 13 filtration required for return and supply. Provide product data 

submission for filtration media. 

B. Install filters in all AHUs, FCU’s and RTU’s 

C. If the AHUs, FCU’s or RTU’s are started and operated prior to .4 weeks before opening (or 

substantial completion), the contractor shall protect the evaporator coils from becoming dirty or shall 

be back charged for cleaning the coils. The protection can include filter changes on a weekly or by 

weekly basis. 

D. There shall be a minimum total of two filter changes by the mechanical contractor: one prior to test 

and balance, and one on opening day. If the rooftop units or air handlers are operated during 

construction, the contractor is responsible for covering the return air duct openings with filter media 

and additional filter changes as required to keep the coils clean. 


A.. The subcontractor shall furnish a written warranty, countersigned and guaranteed by the General 

Contractor, stating all work executed under this section shall be free from defects of materials and 

workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. 


defective work, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of 

the Guaranty-Warranty. 

2.22 SMACNA TABLE 1-5 2” RECTANGULAR DUCT REINFORCEMENT IS REPEATED AS FOLLOWS: 








SECTION 15995 

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING 

A. The purpose of this section is to specify Division 15 responsibilities in the commissioning process. 

B. Refer to Division 1 and 16 for other commissioning requirements. 

C. Commissioning requires the participation of Division 15 to ensure all systems are operating in a 

manner consistent with the Contract Drawings. The general commissioning requirements and 

coordination are detailed in Division 1. Division 15 shall be familiar with all parts of Division 1 and 

shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents. 

D. With respect to HVAC commissioning, the Mechanical and Electrical contractors shall: 

1. Include cost for HVAC commissioning requirements, as it pertains to this and other 

Commissioning Agent sections and the Preliminary Commissioning Agent Plan posted in Div. 

1, in the quoted price. 

2. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the Commissioning Agent. 

3. Schedule work so that required installations are completed, and systems verification checks 

and functional performance tests can be carried out on schedule. 

4. Inspect, check and confirm in writing the proper installation and performance of all 

mechanical and electrical systems provided. 

5. Provide mechanical and electrical system technicians to assist during system verification and 

functional performance testing as required by the Commissioning Agent. 

6. Review specification Division 1 and 16 to fully understand their responsibilities as they pertain 

to the commissioning processes. 

1.02 RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Mechanical: The commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of Division 15 are as follows: 

Construction and Acceptance Phases 

1. Include cost of commissioning in the contract price. 

2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, 

commissioning documentation, testing assistance, O&M data and training. 

3. Attend the commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the 

Commissioning Agent process. Commissioning shall be discussed monthly, and minutes 

submitted to Commissioning Agent for review. 

4. Contractors shall provide the Commissioning Agent with normal cut sheets and shop drawing 

submittals of commissioned equipment. 

5. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual submittals, to the 

Commissioning Agent for development of start-up, review and functional testing procedures. 

a. Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, operating, 

troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any Owner-contracted 

test, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty 

information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force 

clearly identified. In addition, the installation, start-up and checkout materials that 

are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms 

to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the 


b. The Commissioning Agent may request further documentation necessary for the 

commissioning process. 

c. This data request may be made prior to normal submittals. 

6. Provide a copy of the O&M manuals and submittals of commissioned equipment, through 

normal channels, to the Commissioning Agent for review and approval. O&M’s are to be 

equipment specific and clearly identified to indicate equipment installed. 

7. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the operation and 

control of commissioned equipment in areas where the Specifications, control drawings or 

equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. 

8. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up procedures. 

Submit to Commissioning Agent for review and approval prior to start-up. Refer to Division 1 

Cinemark 15995 - 1 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING 


for further details on start-up plan preparation. 

9. During the start-up and initial checkout process, execute and document the mechanicalrelated 

portions of the pre-functional checklists for all commissioned equipment. Startup will 

not be considered complete until documentation is complete and approved by the 


10. Perform and clearly document all completed start-up and system operational checkout 

procedures, providing a copy to the Commissioning Agent. 

11. Address current A/E punch and Action list items before functional testing. Air and water TAB 

shall be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied before functional testing of the 

respective air- or water-related systems. 

12. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to assist the functional 

performance tests for all commissioned equipment. Ensure that they are available and 

present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the 

necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving. 

13. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as 

interpreted by the Commissioning Agent and A/E and retest the equipment. 

14. Prepare equipment specific O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including 

clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions. 

15. During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and final CAD asbuilts 

for contractor-generated coordination drawings. Update after completion of 

commissioning (excluding deferred testing). 

16. Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified. 

17. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the 

validity of the warranty. 

Warranty Period 

1. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-build 

drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing. 

B. Mechanical Contractor and TAB: The responsibilities of the HVAC mechanical and TAB contractors, 

during construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed in (A) are: 

1. Provide start-up for all HVAC equipment, and for the building automation control system. 

2. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor and Commissioning Agent by: 

a. Putting all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continuing the operation 

during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as required. 

b. Including cost of sheaves and belts that may be required by TAB. 

3. Prepare a preliminary schedule for Division 15 pipe and duct system testing, flushing and 

cleaning, equipment start-up and TAB start and completion for use by the Commissioning 

Agent. Update the schedule as appropriate. 

4. Notify the CM/GC when pipe and duct system testing, flushing, cleaning, start-up of each 

piece of equipment and TAB will occur. Be responsible to notify the CM/GC ahead of time, 

when commissioning activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction. 

Be proactive in seeing that commissioning processes are executed and that the 

Commissioning Agent has the scheduling information needed to efficiently execute the 


C. Test and Balance (TAB) Contractor: The duties of the TAB contractor, in addition to those listed in 

(A) are: 

1. Submit the outline of the TAB plan and approach for each system and component to the 

Commissioning Agent, CM/GC and the Control Contractor six weeks prior to starting TAB. 

This plan will be developed after the TAB has some familiarity with the control system. 

2. The submitted plan will include: 

3. Certification that the TAB contractor has reviewed the construction documents and the 

systems with the design engineers and contractors to sufficiently understand the design 

intent for each system. 

4. An explanation of the intended use of the building control system. The Controls Contractor 

will comment on feasibility of the plan. 

5. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct drawings during the 

process. 



6. Final test report forms to be used. 

7. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue: terminal flow 

calibration (for each terminal type), diffuser proportioning, branch/sub-main proportioning, 

total flow calculations, rechecking, diversity issues, expected problems and solutions, etc. 

Criteria for using air flow straighteners or relocating flow stations and sensors will be 

discussed. 

8. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to 

be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. 

9. The identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent 

calibration date. 

10. Specific procedures that will ensure that the air side is operating at the lowest possible 

pressures and provide methods to verify this. 

11. Details of how building static and exhaust fan/relief damper capacity will be checked. 

12. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound measurement methods. 

13. Details of all exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room 

pressure differentials. 

14. Plan for hand-written field technician logs or discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by 

others, contractor interpretation requests and lists of completed tests (scope and frequency). 

15. Plan for formal progress reports (scope and frequency). 

16. Plan for formal deficiency reports (scope, frequency and distribution). 

17. The TAB field technicians shall keep a running log of events and issues. Submit hand-written 

reports of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation 

request and lists of complete tests to the Commissioning Agent and CM/GC at least weekly. 

18. Communicate in writing to the Controls Contractor all set points and parameter changes 

made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB, which affect the control system 

setup and operation. 

19. Provide a draft TAB report within two weeks of completion. A copy will be provided to the 

Commissioning Agent. The report will contain a full explanation of the methodology, 

assumptions and the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon 

abbreviations and column headings. The report should follow the latest and most rigorous 

reporting recommendations by AABC, ASHRAE Standard 111. 

20. Provide the Commissioning Agent with any requested data, gathered, but not shown on the 

draft reports. 

21. Provide a final TAB report of the Commissioning Agent with details, as in the draft. 

22. Conduct functional performance tests and checks on the original TAB as specified for TAB in 

Division 1 and 15. 

D. Architect, Owner, Electrician and Mechanical Engineer: Refer to Division 1. 

E. Automatic Temperature Control System (ATCS) Contractor: Refer to Division 1 and 16. 


1. ATC Contractor is responsible to act as a Commissioning Agent team member and issue to 

the Commissioning Agent for review and comment, their pre-functional plan (point to point 

and start-up) and be onsite and available to perform all required system commissioning. 

2. All ATC/BAS graphics and sequences are to be demonstrated to the Commissioning Agent 

prior to functional testing. 

A. Refer to Division 1 for a listing of all sections where commissioning requirements are found. 

B. Refer to Division 1 for sections involving related commissioning work; for functional testing 

requirements, and preliminary Commissioning Agent Plan. 

1.04 COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS 

A. The following systems and equipment (including all integral equipment controls) will be commissioned 

in this project. All general references to equipment in this document refer only to equipment that is to 

be commissioned. 

HVAC System 



Temperature Controls 

Plumbing Reclaimed Water System 


2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT 

A. Division 15 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this Division. 

B. Refer to Division 1 for additional Division 15 requirements. 



A. Division 15 shall provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning as required in this 

Division 1. 

3.02 START-UP 

A. The HVAC mechanical Contractor shall follow the start-up and initial checkout procedures listed in the 

Responsibilities list in this Division 1. Division 15 has start-up responsibility and is required to 

complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully functional, meeting the design objectives of the 

Contract Documents. The commissioning procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen 

this responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the Commissioning Agent or Owner. 

B. Function testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing may proceed 

prior to the completion of systems or sub-systems at the discretion of the Commissioning Agent and 

CM/GC. Beginning system testing before full completion does not relieve the Contractor from fully 

completing the system, including all pre-functional checklists as soon as possible. 

3.03 TEST AND BALANCE (TAB) 

A. Refer to the TAB responsibilities in Part 1 and 2 above. 

3.04 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS 

A. Refer to this section and the Commissioning Agent Plan for a list of systems to be commissioned. 

B. The Commissioning Agent shall create the functional performance procedures and guideline after 

review and comment of the equipment startup documents supplied by the contractor. 

C. The Commissioning Agent is to witness and document the functional performance testing. All hands 

on testing and equipment required by the Commissioning Agent are to be supplied and performed by 

the contractor. The contractor’s fees are to be included in their base bid. 

D. If more than one return visit is required by the Commissioning Agent due to failed systems, the 

contractor is responsible for the Commissioning Agent team hourly rate and expenses. 

3.05 TESTING DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVALS 

A. Refer to Division 1 for issues relating to functional performance tests. 

3.06 SPECIAL TAB DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS 

A. The TAB will compile and submit the following with other documentation that may be specified 

elsewhere in the Specifications. 

1. Final report containing an explanation of the methodology, assumptions, test conditions and 



the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon abbreviations and column 

headings. 

2. The TAB shall mark on the drawings where all traverse and other critical measurements were 

taken and cross reference the location in the TAB report. 

B. Review and Approvals. Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M manuals shall be 

made by the A/E and by the Commissioning Agent. Refer to Division 1 for details. 

3.07 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL 

A. The CM/GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure that 

training is completed. 

B. TAB: The TAB contractor shall meet with facility staff for the number of hours specified in the 

contract documents, and shall instruct them on the following: 

1. After completion of TAB, TAB shall meet with facility staff for the number of hours specified in 

the contract documents, and shall instruct the on the following: 

a. Go over the final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of each data type. 

b. Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that may affect 

the proper delivery of air. 

c. Identify and discuss any duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps that are close to 

or are not meeting their design capacity. 

d. Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas that are not 

finished. 

e. Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations, relative to TAB. 

2. Commissioning Agent does not oversee or document training 

3.08 WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS 

A. Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout plan described in 

Division 1 and the executed start-up, initial checkout and pre-functional checklists. 

END OF SECTION 15995 



SECTION 16000 

GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 



A. The General Conditions, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect are a part of these 

specifications and shall be complied with in every respect; certain paragraphs included in this section 

are supplemental to similar paragraphs in the above documents and are not intended to supersede 

those paragraphs. 

B. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for reading all sections of the specifications and reviewing all 

drawings in order to understand thoroughly the nature of the entire project, the requirements for 

coordination among the several trades, and items in other sections which apply to electrical work. 

1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. All contract documents are on file in the Architect's office and shall be inspected by all bidders. 

B. The scale of each drawing is relatively accurate, but the Contractor is warned to obtain the necessary 

dimensions for any exact takeoffs from the Architect. No additional cost to the Owner will be 

considered for failure to obtain exact dimensions where not clear or in error on the drawings. Any 

device or fixture roughed in improperly and not positioned on implied center-lines or as required by 

good practice must be repositioned at no cost to the Owner. 

C. The mechanical and electrical drawings and specifications are intended to be used together as 

construction documents forming an integral part of the contract documents. They are intended to 

define, not limit the required construction and delivery to the Owner of complete systems, in perfect 

operating condition. Special items required may be shown or mentioned in either the drawings or the 

specifications, or both; however, it is the intent of the Contract that these systems shall be constructed 

completely and correctly and shall include all elements necessary to this end. 

D. Symbols for various elements and systems are shown on the drawings. Should there be any doubt 

regarding the meaning or intent of the symbols used, a written interpretation shall be obtained from 

the Architect. 

E. It shall be the responsibility of each Contractor to examine the Contract Documents carefully before 




immediately to the attention of the Architect for correction, no less than two weeks prior to bid date. 

Should any of these errors, omissions, conflicts, or ambiguities exist, and the Contractor fails to have 

them explained and adjusted in writing less than two weeks prior to bid, otherwise, he shall, at his own 

expense, supply the proper materials and labor to make good any damage or defects in his work or 

the results obtained therefrom, caused by such discrepancy. 

F. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor shall coordinate the work so that 

interferences are avoided. Provide all necessary offsets in conduit, fittings, etc., required to properly 

install the work. Exposed work must be kept as close as possible to walls, ceilings, columns, etc., so 

as to take up the minimum amount of space; all offsets, fittings, etc., required shall be provided 

without additional expense to the Owner. 

G. It shall be the responsibility of each Contractor to examine the Contract Documents carefully before 




immediately to the attention of the Architect for correction. Change Orders will only be accepted for 

changes in scope. A “change in scope” is defined as work other than what was shown or intended. 

Costs for Change Orders will be reviewed and processed based on the standard labor rates for the 

area (either Union or non-Union) and these cost rates shall take precedence over any other 

Cinemark 16000 - 1 General Conditions for Electrical Work 


contractual or agreed upon rates. All Change Order work shall be executed on a straight time basis 

(as opposed to overtime or premium time) unless specifically authorized in writing prior to the start of 

the work. 

H. Should any of these errors, omissions, conflicts, or ambiguities exist, the Contractor shall have them 

explained and adjusted in writing before signing the Contract or proceeding with the work; otherwise, 

he shall, at his own expense, supply the proper materials and labor to make good any damage or 

defects in his work or the results obtained therefrom, caused by such discrepancy. 

I. Wherever conflicts occur between different parts of the Contract Documents, the greater quantity, the 

better quality, or larger size shall prevail unless the Architect informs the Contractor otherwise in 

writing. 

J. When drawing revisions are issued, a written description of the changes will be issued with the 

revisions. The contractor is to provide pricing on a line item basis (with backup) to match the 

description of the written changes. 

1.03 EXAMINATION OF THE SITE 

A. The Contractor shall examine the site and all conditions thereon and/or therein, prior to submitting bid. 

All conditions shall be taken into consideration as they may affect the work. The Contractor shall be 

satisfied as to the existing grades and the actual formation and soil condition. The lack of specific 

information on the drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of taking into account 

all site conditions before bidding. No extras will be allowed for work resulting from conditions 

that would have been evident upon a thorough examination of the site. Notify the engineer 

prior to bid closing date of any discrepancies or points of doubt or contention. Failing this 

action, include in the bid for the most expensive course of action. 

1.04 PERMITS AND FEES 

A. All necessary permits, licenses, and fees required to carry out the work shall be procured by the 

Contractor. Also, all necessary certificates of approval which must be delivered to the Architect 

before final acceptance of the work shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense. 

1.05 CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATIONS 

A. Each individual employed by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor or Contractor's Consultant shall 

be experienced, qualified and competent to correctly perform all work required of him on this project 

and to the satisfaction of the Architect. 

B. Technical, supervisory and administrative personnel shall have knowledge of the engineering 

principles involved in the design of the systems required by the Contract Documents and shall be 

experienced and qualified in the correct interpretation of the requirements of these Documents to the 

satisfaction of the Architect. 

C. Any firm or individual not having the necessary experience and/or qualifications shall not be used on 

this project. 

1.06 CODES AND ORDINANCES 

A. The Contractor is expected to know or to ascertain, in general and in detail, the requirements of all 

Codes and Ordinances applicable to the construction and operation of systems covered by his 

Contract. He shall know or ascertain the rulings and interpretations of Code requirements being 

made by all authorities having jurisdiction over the work to be performed by him. 

B. In preparing his bid, the Contractor shall include the cost of all items and procedures necessary to 


specifically covered by the drawings and specifications. All cases of serious conflict or omission 

between the drawings, specifications and codes shall be brought to the Architect's attention as 

hereinbefore specified. The Contractor shall carry out his work and complete his construction as 

required by applicable Codes and Ordinances and in such manner as to obtain approval of all 

authorities whose approval is required. 

C. The Contractor shall procure all necessary permits or licenses to carry out his work and pay the lawful 



fees required; he shall also obtain all necessary certificates of approval which must be delivered to the 

Architect before final acceptance of the work. 

D. The Contractor shall confine the storage of materials and the operation of his workmen to the limits 

provided by law, ordinances, permits or as directed by the Architect. 

E. The 2008 NEC including all Supplements and Amendments, as well as the City of Napa and 

the State of California codes and amendments are incorporated into the Division 16 

specifications as though the Code was published in its entirety in these specifications. 

1.07 SCOPE 

A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools, machinery, equipment, accessories, hardware, 

fasteners, layout, supervision, hoisting, scaffolding, shop drawings, cleanup, detailing, packaging, 

trucking, freight, delivery, permits, insurance and all services necessary to complete the mechanical 

work under this contract in accordance with all codes. All work shall be coordinated with the work of 

other trades so as to resolve conflicts without impeding job progress. All out of sequence work shall 

be included. 

B. ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM: 

1. A complete electrical distribution system consisting of components indicated on the drawings 

or specified herein, including, but not limited to: 

a. 277/480V,3 PH, 4 wire primary service entrance conduit raceways and conductors. 

b. All miscellaneous equipment coordination and related appurtenances required by 

power company, including CTs and metering. 

c. Motor starters for motors shall be provided by Division 16, however, with the 

following exceptions: 

1) Package equipment with factory mounted starters if specified with factory 

mounted starters. 

d. Feeders, branch wiring, electrical distribution equipment. 

e. All temperature control wiring and installation of control components. 

f. Access panels and access doors where required for access to equipment installed 

by Division 16. Access panels and access doors shall be suitable for the specified 

architectural finishes. 

g. Wiring between system components if equipment is not prewired. 

h. Lighting fixtures, lighting controls and associated wiring. 

I. Telephone raceway system: 

1) Grounding risers for use by telephone company. 

2) Incoming and primary building raceways. 

j. Support system design and supports for electrical raceways. 

k. Code required disconnects. 

l. Power including branch wiring for "heat tracing". 

2. Furnishing of shop drawings and brochures. 

3. Furnishing of record drawings. 

4. Balancing and adjusting of electrical loads. 

5. Furnishing operating and maintenance manuals. 

6. Miscellaneous items as required for complete and functioning systems as indicated on the 

drawings and specified herein. 

7. All systems, equipment, and services specified herein shall be furnished and installed 

complete and ready for use. 

8. Installation of seismic restraints. 

3. The electrical contractor understands and agrees that time is of the essence, and in the event 

overtime is required to maintain pace with the construction schedule due to the electrical contractor’s 

lack of progress, it will be performed at no additional cost. 

4. The work included herein may not be performed in a continuous cycle but in various stages as 

determined by the General Contractor, the Owner, or delivery of Owner furnished items or equipment. 

The electrical contractor shall perform the work out of sequence as directed without any additional 

cost to the Owner or the General Contractor. The electrical contractor shall include any required 

overtime expense at no additional cost to the Owner or General Contractor to meet the milestone 

dates and occupancy dates in accordance with the General Contractor’s schedule. 



5. The electrical contractor is to be responsible for employing the proper tradesmen per union 

jurisdiction, past, present, and future. The subcontractor is also responsible for taking whatever 

measures that may be necessary, including composite crews, to settle any labor disputes and insure 

job continuity at no additional cost to the Owner. Should questions of union jurisdiction arise, the 

contractor shall immediately take steps to settle such disputes and will use such labor as may be 

determined to have jurisdiction at no additional cost to the Owner or General Contractor. Any work 

claimed by the Union(s), including terminations of wiring systems for Owner provided equipment, 

shall be included by this contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or the General contractor. 

Should he fail to take expeditious action, he will be responsible for the time lost and monetary 

damages because of delays arising from such disputes. 

6. The electrical contractor shall provide a journeyman electrician standing by at the project for 

the first three days (and nights) of the project’s opening. 

1.08 ALTERNATES 

A. The Contractor shall determine the scope of each specified alternate proposal by carefully reading all 

Divisions of the Contract Documents. The Bid Form contains information explaining the extent of the 

construction to be performed under a specific alternate. Alternate proposals which are not 

predominantly electrical in scope, are described in other Divisions of the Contract Documents. 

1.09 SUPPORT SYSTEM DESIGN FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

A. The Division 16 Contractor is responsible for design of all electrical support systems, including 

hangers, Unistrut, backing, etc. 

1.10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL MATERIALS 

A. Provide all parts and accessories necessary for equipment and complete installation. 

B. Provide factory applied finish on all exterior surfaces of electrical equipment. Any item which has the 

finish marred shall be refinished to a new condition before final acceptance. 

C. Provide three copies of spare parts lists, and operating and maintenance instructions for all 

distribution apparatus, major equipment, and auxiliary systems. These shall be bound in folders with 

suitable identification on front cover. Deliver to Architect prior to final acceptance. 

D. All materials shall be new and of good quality, and shall bear the stamp of approval of the 

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 

1.11 NOISE 

A. Eliminate any abnormal noises, which are not considered by the Architect to be an inherent part of the 

systems as designed. 

B. Abnormal buzzing in equipment components will not be acceptable. 

1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Substitutions will be considered up to 2 weeks prior to bid. All approvals must be in via email from 

spatton@ediengineers.com. 

B. The names of manufacturers and model numbers have been used in the Contract Documents to 

establish types of equipment and standards of quality. 

1. While it is not the intention of the Architect to discriminate against any manufacturer of 

equipment which may be equivalent to specified equipment, a strict interpretation of such 

equivalency will be exercised in considering any equipment offered as a substitute for 

specified equipment. The Contractor shall submit with each request for approval of substitute 

material or equipment, sufficient data to show conclusively that it is equivalent to that 

specified in the following respects: 

a. Performance: 

1) Energy consumption at the point of rating shall not exceed that of the 

specified equipment. 

2) Vibration and noise production at the point of rating shall not exceed that of 

the specified equipment. 



. Materials of Construction 

c. Gages, weights and sizes of all portions and component parts 

d. Design arrangements, methods of construction, and good workmanship 

e. Coatings, finishes and durability of wearing parts 

f. National reputation of the manufacturer as a producer of first quality equipment of 

the type under consideration. 

g. Availability of prompt, reliable and efficient service facilities franchised by or affiliated 

with the equipment manufacturer. This shall include the maintenance of local stocks 

of critical replacement parts equal to those maintained for the specified equipment. 

C. If only one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment (except lighting fixtures), an 

"equal" by another manufacturer may be acceptable. Approval in writing from the engineer as equal 

must be received prior to bid. 

D. Where more than one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment, only one of the 

specified manufacturers will be considered for approval. 

E. Where only one manufacturer is mentioned with the phrase "or approved equal", Contractor may 

submit an alternate manufacturer as outlined in Supplementary Conditions. 

F. No attempt has been made to determine if each manufacturer listed for a particular item of equipment 

will produce material that will comply with all requirements. 

G. If a submittal contains sufficient information to prove compliance with the Contract Documents, then 

that submittal will be acceptable. 

H. Light Fixtures 

1. Substitute light fixtures may be submitted but a substitute fixture must be equal not only from 

the standpoint of materials, construction, and performance, but for artistic effect as well. 

2. Request for substitution must be accompanied by complete data and descriptive sheets; 

when requested, Contractor must furnish samples of both the specified and substitute 

fixtures for comparison. 

I. Requests for substitution shall include the Contractor's reason for the request. If the engineer does 

not consider the items equivalent to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish those specified. 

1.13 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION 

A. Coordinate work of this Division with that of other Divisions so that various components of the building 

will be installed at the proper time, will fit the available space, and will allow proper service access to 

those items requiring maintenance. This means adequate access to all equipment, not just that 

installed in this Division. 

B. Any components of the Electrical Systems which are installed without regard to the above shall be 

removed and relocated as directed by the Architect at Contractor's expense. 

C. Where various items of equipment and materials are specified and scheduled, the purpose is to 

define the general type and quality level, not to set forth the exact trim required to fit the various types 

of ceiling, wall, or floor finishes. Provide materials which will fit properly the types of finishes actually 

installed. 

D. Where the word verify is used on the documents, the contractor shall field verify the existing 

conditions and modify the scope of the installation as required to meet the verified conditions. 

1.14 DRAWINGS 

A. The drawings indicate approximate locations of the various items of the electrical systems. These 

items are shown approximately to scale and attempt to show how these items should be integrated 

with building construction. Locate all the various items by on-the-job measurements, conformance 

with Contract Documents and cooperation with other trades. 

B. Prior to locating light fixtures, confer with Architect as to desired method of locating fixtures in the 

various areas. In no case should fixture locations be determined by scaling drawings. Relocate 



fixtures and bear cost of redoing work or other trades necessitated by failure to comply with this 

requirement. 

C. CEILING GRID 

1. All light fixtures, vents, etc., shall be located to conform to the ceiling grid system. 

2. Examine all drawings to become familiar with this requirement. 

D. In certain instances, the Architect may require relocation of receptacles, switches, light fixtures or 

other electrical devices, equipment and switches, etc. Where relocation is within ten feet of 

location shown on drawings, and when Contractor is informed of necessary relocation before 

work is begun on this portion of the job, the relocation will be at Contractors' expense. 

E. The drawings are schematic in nature and are not intended to show exact locations of conduit, but 

rather to indicate distribution, circuitry, and control. 

F. Where there is an apparent discrepancy between the architect’s drawings and the electrical drawings, 

such discrepancy shall be called to the attention of the engineer through the form of an Request for 

Information. In general, the engineer’s drawings shall take precedence over the architectural 

drawings. 

1.17 DEVIATIONS 

A. No deviations from plans and specifications made without knowledge and approval of Architect. 


A. Provide: As used herein shall mean "furnish, install and connect complete unless otherwise noted." 

B. Wiring: As used herein shall mean "wire and cable, installed in raceway within all required boxes, 

fittings, connectors, and accessories; completely installed". 

C. Work: As used herein shall be understood to mean the materials completely installed, including the 

labor involved. 

D. Review of Shop Drawings; As used herein shall be understood to be a service by the Architect to 

reduce the possibility of materials being ordered which do not comply with the Contract Documents. 

See also Paragraph 4.2.7 and Article 3.12 of the General Conditions. 

E. ADA: American Disabilities Act. 


2.01 STANDARD PRODUCTS 

A. Each item of equipment furnished under this specification shall be essentially the standard product of 

the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same kind or type of equipment are required, these 

shall be the products of a single manufacturer. All equipment shall be U.L. and NEMA approved and 

shall be made in the U.S.A. 

B. All material and equipment shall be new, and of the best quality used in good commercial practice 

and shall be the product of a reputable manufacturer. Each major component shall bear a name plate 

giving the name and address of the manufacturer and the catalogue number of designation. 

C. Major distribution equipment, such as panelboards, distribution switchboards, motor control centers, 

dry type transformers, busways, fused switches/ disconnects, substations, and switchgear, shall be 

the same manufacturer. 

2.02 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS 

A. All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, 

used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturers, unless herein specified to the 

contrary. 

2.03 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 



A. When the Engineer has reviewed equipment submittals it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor 

to install the equipment to operate properly and in accordance with the intent of the drawings, 

specifications, and codes. 

B. Work and equipment shall be supported plumb, rigid and true to line. The Contractor shall study the 

general, structural, mechanical and electrical drawings, shop drawings and catalog data to determine 

how equipment, fixtures, piping, ductwork, etc., are to be installed, and shall provide foundations, 

bolts, inserts, stands, hangers, rackets and accessories for proper support whether or not shown on 

the drawings. When directed, the Contractor shall submit for review drawings showing foundations 

and supports. 

C. Concrete Equipment Bases: 

1. Concrete pads and bases for switchgear and other equipment will be furnished and installed 

under Division 3 of these specifications. 

2. The Contractor shall establish sizes and location of the various concrete bases required and 

shall provide all necessary anchor bolts together with templates for holding these bolts in 

position. 

3. Anchor bolts shall be placed in galvanized steel pipe sleeves to allow for adjustment, with a 

suitable plate at bottom end of sleeve to hold the bolt. 

4. Concrete housekeeping pads shall be four inches high and shall project three inches on all 

sides beyond the equipment. 

2.04 NAMEPLATES AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 

A. Nameplates: Each major item of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, serial 

number and model number on a plate securely attached to the item. 

B. Equipment Identification: 

1. Unless specified otherwise, all items of equipment, except those in finished areas shall be 

identified as to number, name, function, capacity and other pertinent data with securely 

attached laminated plastic name tags of an appropriate size with white letters and black 

background. 

2. Generally, the number and name shall be at least 1/4" high and other data at least 1/8" high. 



A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the Architect for approval prior to beginning this work. 

One electronic copy of each catalog cut sheet (Adobe PDF Files) on the equipment proposed to be 

furnished and installed, and one electronic (AutoCad 2000 DWG File) of each drawing or diagram. 

B. The Contractor shall, in addition, submit drawings and/or diagrams for review and for job coordination 

in all cases where deviation from the Contract Drawings are contemplated because of job conditions, 

interference or substitution of equipment, or when requested by the Architect for purposes of 

clarification of the Contractor's intent. He shall also submit detailed drawings, rough-in sheets, etc., 

for all special or custom built items or equipment. 

C. These drawings and diagrams shall show all electrical switch and breaker sizes as well as the 

manufacturer's name and catalog number of each piece of equipment used. 

D. All specification sheets (submittals), drawings and diagrams shall be submitted within forty-five days 

from the date the Contractor signs the Contract. 

E. The Architect's review of such drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations 

from the Contract drawings or specifications, unless he has, in writing, called the attention of the 

Architect to such deviations at the time of the submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility 

for errors or omission in such drawings. 

F. Equipment and material submittals must show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with 

Contract Documents as follows: 

1. Proper sizes and capacities. 

2. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service. Provide 



1/4" scale plan view and elevations of all electrical rooms showing equipment layouts and 

clearances. 

3. Construction methods, materials and finishes. 

G. Catalog data must be clearly marked to indicate the item or model number being submitted and must 

include all specified accessories. All information on a catalog sheet not pertaining to the item being 

submitted must be marked out. 

H. Submittal Format: 

All submittal drawings must be submitted electronically. All drawings must also be submitted 

(emailed) in AutoCad DWG format. All cut sheets must be submitted (emailed) in Adobe PDF 

format. Do not submit binders or notebooks. Submit one PDF file per submittal. 

I. For any item to be installed in or on a finished surface (such as tee bar acoustical ceiling, plaster 

wall), Contractor certifies by making the submittal that he has checked all applicable Contract 

Documents and that the item submitted is compatible with the surface finish on which it is to be 

installed, and will fit in the space allocated. 

J. Submit shop drawings and/or brochures for: 

1. Light Fixtures and Lamps 

2. Switchboards 

3. Motor Control Centers 

4. Panelboards 

5. Transformers 

6. Fuses 

7. Motor Controllers 

8. Motor Control Devices 

9. Contactors 

10. Switches 

11. Wiring Devices and Coverplates 

12. All Fire Alarm Equipment 

13. Metering Equipment 

14. All Specially Fabricated Equipment 

15. All Communications Systems 

16. Wire and Cable 

17. Conduit, Boxes, Cabinets 

18. Cable Terminations 

19. Security Systems 

20. Motion Detectors 

3.02 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY 

A. The Contractor shall take proper precautions to protect adjacent property, as provided by law and the 

Contract Documents, with which his work comes in contact, or over which he may have occasion to 

transport, hoist or move materials, equipment debris, etc., and shall satisfactorily repair and make 

good any damages caused by him during construction operations. 

B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable temporary sidewalks, fences or other structures as 

required by law, or as otherwise necessary for the protection of workmen and passersby and as 

necessary to prevent obstruction or interference with traffic in public streets or sidewalks, or private 

right-of-way. He shall leave access to all fire hydrants, provide temporary walkways around any 

obstructions made in any public place on account of his work and maintain sufficient lights and 

barricades to protect passersby at night. All streets, curbs and sidewalks shall be maintained in good 

condition and so left at the completion of the work. The Contractor shall make all necessary 

arrangements and perform all services required in connection with or as occasioned by his work for 

the care, protection and maintenance of all public utilities, including fire hydrants, pipe lines and 

electrical and/or telephone, telegraph and all other items of similar character on or adjacent to the 

site, assuming all responsibility and payment of all cost incidental to such care and protection or 

rectification of damage done for which the Owner might otherwise be liable. 




A. All necessary cutting and patching of walls, floors, partitions, ceilings, etc., required for the proper 

installation of the work under these contracts shall be done at the contractor's expense in a neat, 

careful and workmanlike manner, and as approved by the Architect. 

B. No concrete joists, beams, girders or columns shall be cut by any contractor without first obtaining the 

written permission of the Architect. 

C. All drilling and patching for expansion bolts, hangers and other supports shall be done by the 

contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. 

D. Labor and materials required to replace or rebuild parts cut or injured shall be furnished at the 

contractor's expense subject to the satisfaction of the Architect. 

3.04 CLEANING UP AND REMOVAL OF RUBBISH 

A. The contractor shall be responsible for keeping the premises (including the outside area) free of all 

rubbish, debris and waste materials of every kind at all times during the Contract period. 

B. This requirement is mandatory and shall apply regardless of whether such rubbish, etc., accumulates 

in consequence of his work of his Subcontractors operations. 

C. Specifications covering additional work such as mechanical and electrical trades calls for cleaning 

and removal of rubbish by these trades but this Contractor is charged with the responsibility of 

enforcing and coordinating the clean up and removal services for all trades. 

D. Coordinate with Section 01352 IAQ Management 

3.05 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MATERIAL LIST 

A. At the time of final completion of the work and as a condition to be fulfilled prior to final payment, the 

Contractor shall carefully instruct the Owner's designated representative in the proper operation, 

maintenance and service of all work and equipment provided. 

B. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner a complete list identifying actual materials and devices 

incorporated in the work. The identification shall include source of supply, date of purchase, model 

and serial number, operating and maintenance data, parts list, etc., as required to facilitate future 

repairs and replacements. 


A. The Contractor shall and does hereby guarantee for a period of one year from date of final 

acceptance by the Architect all work as called for in the various Divisions of these specifications. 

When such work is performed by Subcontractors, and where special guarantees are required by 

Subcontractors, the Contractor shall secure warranties from said Subcontractors and deliver copies of 

same to the Owner upon completion of the work. 

B. The Contractor shall replace with new materials and/or equipment by material failing to give 

satisfactory service during the guarantee period. Replacement of materials, equipment, including all 

labor involved, shall be at no cost to the Owner. 

C. Nothing in the above intends or implies that this guarantee shall apply to work which has been abused 

or neglected by the Owner. 

3.07 POWER SERVICE ENTRANCE 

A. GENERAL: The power service entrance from the utility company and all fees required there of are 

furnished by the Owner. 

B. SCOPE: The service entrance included by this contractor shall be as follows: 

1. Underground Primary Service (UGP): 

a. Raceway and Conductors provided and installed by the Contractor. 

2 Transformation: The Power company shall provide the transformer. 

3. Secondary Services: 

a. Provided by Contractor. 

b. Refer to drawings for pertinent information. 

4. Metering: 



a. Provide all metering equipment as required and shown on the drawings. 

b. Meter Location: As indicated on the drawings and per the owner's direction. 

5. Transformer Pad: 

a. Provided by contractor in accordance with the power company's requirements. 

b. Refer to the architectural site plan for the exact location. 

3.08 INSPECTION OF SITE 

A. Site Visit 

1. Before submitting a bid, all bidders shall carefully examine the drawings and specifications, 

and visit the site. 

2. Bidders shall fully inform themselves in detail as to all existing conditions, limitations, 

available clearances; shall thoroughly check all obstructions which are to be removed or 

relocated to permit installation of the new equipment and facilities; and shall include in their 

proposals a sum to cover the cost of all contingencies and work as required under the 

drawings and specifications included in the Contract. 

B. Failure on the part of any bidder and/or Contractor to familiarize himself with all existing conditions as 

may be encountered or enumerated above will not be considered sufficient justification to request or 

obtain any extra compensation over and above the Contract Price. 

3.09 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT 

A. Do not deliver equipment to jobsite until progress of construction has reached the state where 

equipment is actually needed, or until building is closed in enough to protect equipment from the 

weather. Equipment allowed to stand in weather will be rejected, and Contractor is obligated to 

furnish new equipment of a like kind. 

B. Adequately protect equipment (including all Owner-furnished items) from damage after delivery to job. 

Cover with heavy cloth or other suitable material as required to protect from damage. 

C. Equipment which has been marred, bent, etc., by construction activities will be rejected. Replace with 

new equipment as specified. 


A. Obtain, at Contractor's expense, a set of white prints and keep these on jobsite during construction. 

During course of construction, mark on these prints any changes which are made, noting particularly 

locations of those items which will need to be located for servicing. 

B. At completion of job, obtain (at Contractor's expense) a set of "washoff" erasable mylar sepias and 

incorporate all changes noted on the work prints. This must be done by a skilled draftsman. Mark 

each sheet "Record Drawings", with date, and deliver to Architect. 

3.11 FINAL TESTS 

A. Upon completion of the work, test the individual systems, including all feeders, branches, outlets, 

lighting, motors, apparatus, and appliances. 

B. Provide all instruments, labor and materials required by Architect for any essential intermediate and 

final tests. 

C. Tests shall indicate full compliance with specifications, drawings and applicable codes. 

D. The contractor shall assist and coordinate pre-function checklist, startup and system 

functional testing with Commissioning Agent. Coordinate retesting as necessary 

until satisfactory performance is verified. 


A. Entire installation subject to Engineer's inspection, final approval and acceptance. 

B. Any corrections to the installed work shall be at the Contractor's expense. 




SECTION 16050 

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Furnish all required labor, materials and equipment for complete wiring systems for lighting, power, 

burglar alarm system, fire alarm system and P/A system, including all light fixtures and lamps, and 

with all motors and electrically operated equipment (including owner furnished equipment) connected 

and tested. 

B. Provide line voltage power wiring and connection to neon transformers provided by and installed by 

others. 

C. Provide all starters and disconnects for electrically operated equipment. 

1.02 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE: 

A. Quality assurance - See Architectural Notes. 

B. Projection and sound equipment furnished and connected by Owner under separate contract - See 

Architectural Notes. 

C. Temporary service - See Architectural Notes. 

D. Fire protection sprinkler system - Section 15300. 

E. Temperature controls wiring components - Section 16900 (furnished and installed as indicated on the 

drawings). 

1.03 STORAGE OF MATERIALS 

A. Store all materials in building areas designated by General Contractor. 


2.01 SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION AND METERING 

A. Service current characteristics are 277/480 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire for power loads. 

B. Power Company metering and transformer shall be as indicated on drawings, installed in accordance 

with the exact requirements with local power company. 

C. The contractor shall contact the power company, make application for service on the Owner’s behalf, 

and install the secondary conduits and feeders, switchgear, metering, CTs, etc. in accordance with 

the exact requirements of the power company. 

2.02 WIRING METHODS 

A. Feeders and power wiring: Conductors in rigid galvanized steel conduit where exposed and subject to 

damage. EMT may be used where concealed in attic space or not subject to damage. 

B. Branch conduits: Conductors in EMT, except where embedded in concrete, in contact with the earth 

or when in earth, in which case the conductors shall be installed in rigid galvanized conduit or PVC 

(with separate ground). MC cable is acceptable for power branch circuits wire size #8 and 

smaller conductors. MC cable in the auditoriums shall be well secured. MC cable shall not be 

used above hard ceilings. MC cable shall not be used where exposed. In projection booths 

with no ceiling, there shall be no MC cable below 9 ft. 

C. Telephone system: Plenum Cable. Drops in wall, extended runs, and above hard ceilings in conduit. 

D. Temperature controls wiring (ATCS): Plenum Cable (except in conduit from the sensors to the 

projection booth and as noted or detailed on the drawings) 

Cinemark 16050 - 1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 


E. Fire Alarm: EMT or Plenum Cable as allowed by the Governing Authorities (except as specifically 

detailed on the drawings). All cable to be stranded. 

F. Projection and Sound: As indicated on the drawings 

G. Smurf is not acceptable. 

2.03 DIMMERS 

A. Dimmers located in the projection booth serving the auditoriums will be furnished by the Owner, 

installed by the contractor. For installation and wiring, see drawings. 

B. All other dimmers, including wall box dimmers located in the auditoriums, will be furnished and 

installed by the contractor. 

2.04 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 

A. Dry type transformers shall be of rating shown on plan and for 480 volts Delta Primary connection and 

120/208 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire, Wye secondary. 

B. Provide four 2-1/2 % full capacity taps in primary winding, two above and two below normal voltage. 

C. The insulation system shall be for 220 degrees C. and the transformer designed for 150 degrees C. 

above a 40 degree C. ambient temperature. 

D. Transformer shall have steel enclosure with knockouts for conduit connections. 

E. The transformer will be for floor or wall mounting. 

F. The transformer manufacturer will be the same as the approved panelboard manufacture. 

G. Provide 1/2" Neoprene pads below transformers. 

H. Exterior transformers shall have NEMA 3 enclosures. 

I. Maximum impedance shall be as scheduled on the drawings or 5.5% maximum. 

J. Transformers shall be “Energy Star” compliant (TP1) and shall meet the energy code 

requirements for impedance. 

2.05 SERVICE SWITCHBOARD 

A. Provide a service panelboard as scheduled on drawings. 

B. Service panelboard shall have grounded bus, neutral bus, removable tie between grounded bus, 

neutral, and removable link in neutral. 

C. Service panelboard shall have service entrance rating. 

D. Provide fused switches or breakers as scheduled. 

E. Label all circuits. 

F. Circuit Breakers 

1. Group mounted molded case circuit breakers are to be totally front accessible. 

2. The circuit breakers are to be mounted in the switchboard to permit installation, maintenance 

and testing without reaching over any line side bussing. 

3. The circuit breakers are to be removable by the disconnection of only the load side cable 

terminations and all line and load side connections are to be individual to each circuit 

breaker. 

4. No common mounting brackets or electrical bus connectors will be acceptable. 

5. Breakers shall be the over-the counter toggle operating type with the handle going to a 

position between "On" and "Off" to indicate automatic tripping. 



6. Breakers shall be bolt-on. 

7. Each circuit breaker is to be furnished with an externally operable mechanical means to trip 

the circuit breaker, enabling maintenance personnel to verify the ability of the circuit breaker 

trip mechanism to operate, as well as exercise the circuit breaker operating mechanisms. 

8. Panels requiring modular circuit breakers shall not be used. 

9. Any service disconnect switches or breakers 1000 amps and greater shall have GFI 

protection. 

6. The AIC rating of the breakers shall meet or exceed that of the respective panel. 

G. Cabinet shall be of code gauge steel treated with a phosphatized rust inhibitor and finished with grey 

baked enamel. 

1. Front of panel shall have engraved laminate plastic plate with panel name and rating. 

I. Service panelboard shall be UL approved. 

J. Furnish and install the service entrance switchboard as herein specified and shown on the associated 

electrical drawings. 

1. The switchboard shall meet the latest requirements of Underwriters Laboratories standard #891, 

NEMA PB2. 

2. The switchboard shall be furnished with an Underwriters Laboratories label. 

3. The switchboard shall be deadfront with front accessibility required. 

4. The switchboard frame shall be of formed code gauge steel rigidly welded and bolted together to 

support all cover plates, bussing and component devices during shipment and installation. 

5. Steel base channels shall be bolted to the frame to rigidly support the entire shipping section for 

moving on rollers and floor mounting. 

6. Each switchboard section shall have an open bottom and an individually removable top plate for 

installation and termination of conduit. 

7. The switchboard enclosure shall be painted on all exterior and interior surfaces. 

8. The paint finish shall be a medium light gray standard finish applied by the electro-deposition 

process over an iron phosphate pre-treatment. 

9. All front covers shall be hinged and removable and all doors shall be hinged with removable hinge 

pins. 

10. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be clearly indicated on shop drawings. 

11. A NEMA 3R enclosure for the switchboard shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. 

K. Bussing: 

1. The switchboard bussing shall be of sufficient cross-sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 

temperature rise. The buss shall be non-tapered. 

2. Through bus shall be aluminum. The through bus shall have an ampacity as shown on the 

drawings. 

3. The through bus supports, connections and joints are to be bolted with hex-head bolts and 

Belleville washers to minimize maintenance requirements (and shall have provisions for the 

addition of future sections). 

L. Each switchboard, as a complete unit, shall be given a single short circuit current rating by the 

manufacturer. Such ratings shall be established by the actual tests by the manufacturer, in 

accordance with UL specifications, on equipment constructed similarly to the subject switchboard. 

The panel and breakers shall be fully rated, series rated is not allowed. 

M. The service disconnect devices shall be molded case circuit breakers or fused switch totally front 

accessible and front connectable. Disconnect devices to be provided with ground fault protection as 

required by the NEC and UL Listing. Circuit breakers shall have a short circuit rating equal or greater 

than that of the switchboard. 

N. TVSS shall be factory installed. 

2.06 DISTRIBUTION AND LIGHTING PANELS 

A. Provide where indicated on drawings. Such panels shall be of dead front, bolt-in circuit breaker type 

with lugs in mains, unless otherwise shown on drawings. Panels requiring modular or plug-in 

circuit breakers shall not be used. Panels shall be fully rated with a customer specific breaker 

layout. 



B. Panels shall be three-phase, four-wire,solid neutral, voltage specified, with main lugs sized for each 

respective feeder and main bus equal to or greater in capacity than the rating of the respective over 

current protective device serving the panel. The panel board shall by the same manufacturer as the 

switchboard. 

C. Cabinets 

1. Cabinets to be for flush or surface mounting as shown. 

2. Cabinets constructed of code gauge galvanized steel in accordance with NEMA and 

Underwriters' Standards. 

3. Provide trim with hinged doors and combined lock and catch with two keys. All panels keyed 

alike. 

4. All cabinets and trim finished pearl gray or prime coat for field painting as directed. Cabinets 

shall be a maximum of 20" wide. 

5. Provide a typewritten panel directory to indicate circuits controlled, under plastic, with all 

spares marked "SPARE" in pencil. 

6. Front of panel shall have engraved laminate plastic plate with panel name and rating. 

7. Each panel shall bear Underwriters' Label of approval. 

D. Bus to be aluminum or copper. The neutral bus shall be set screw type with screw base clamping 

conductor inside opening of neutral bar. 

E. Circuit Breakers 

1. Circuit breakers to be bolt-on, thermal magnetic type with 20 ampere minimum frame size. 

Trip setting to be as shown. 

2. All multi-pole breakers shall be of the internal common trip type. 

3. Circuit breakers shall meet or exceed the AIC rating of the panel and shall be clearly labeled. 

4. All panelboard breakers shall be listed and marked ASWD for switch duty. 

5. All panelboard breakers serving mechanical equipment shall be marked AHACR 

for heating, air conditioning and refrigeration loads. 

7. Breaker layout shall be as shown on the panel schedules (as close as possible). The breaker 

layout is “customer specific” or “'User Placement'” 

8. The AIC rating of the breakers shall meet or exceed that of the respective panel. 

F. Branch conduits shall be consecutively numbered and sequence phased in accordance with NEMA 

standards. 

G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall be given a single short circuit current rating by the 

manufacturer. Such ratings shall be established by the actual tests by the manufacturer, in 

accordance with UL specifications, on equipment constructed similarly to the subject panelboard. The 

panels and breakers shall be fully rated. 

H. The electrical rooms in the project are laid out using Square D equipment. If the contractor purchases 

equipment of another manufacturer, then he is responsible for verifying (and relocating the equipment 

as required) that all of the equipment of the alternate manufacturer will fit in the space provided. 

I. Two Section panelboards shall have feed through lugs of the same rating as the panel board. 

J. Panels shall be General Electric, Square D, Seimens or Westinghouse. 

N. TVSS shall be factory installed. 

K. At the completion of the project, the contractor shall insert a typed, as-built panel schedule. 

2.07 PHASE IDENTIFICATION AND BALANCE 

A. All branch circuit wiring color coded. Neutrals of 277v systems shall be gray. Neutrals of 120V 

systems shall be white. 

B. Feeder and power cables color coded or provided with approved phase taping or labels at all 

terminals. 

C. Phase connections at all panels identical for all areas. 



D. At the completion of the project, light and power wiring shall connected for best possible phase 

balance and to approach a power factor of one. 

E. Home runs to panels shall contain only conductors of different phases therein. 

2.08 CONDUIT WORK 

A. Install all conductors in rigid steel conduit, electrical metallic tubing conduit as specified under wiring 

methods. 

B. All conduit and electrical metallic tubing shall be of standard dimensions, smooth inside and out, and 

shall be galvanized or sheradized. 

C. Connectors and couplings 

1. For electrical metallic tubing exposed to weather, connectors shall be watertight couplings 

with hexagonal heads or tap-on, multiple point, stainless steel locking ring type, with insulated 

throat. 

2. All conduit shall have threaded couplings with lock nuts and bushings. 

3. Conduits shall enter and be secured to all boxes, etc. in such a manner that each system will 

be electrically continuous from service to all outlets. 

4. All conduit runs from cabinets and junction boxes shall terminate in specified outlet boxes or 

conduit fittings. 

5. Outlet boxes and conduit fittings for exposed work shall be cast iron or galvanized, 

Crouse-Hinds condulets, or Appleton, and of the size and type to fit the location. 

6. Conduit connection to any box which has no threaded hub for its reception shall have double 

lock nuts. 

7. Connections to panel cabinets and pull boxes shall have grounding wedge lugs between the 

bushing and the box, or shall have lock nuts designed to bite into the metal. 

8. Provide an insulated bushing at each end of each conduit run. 

9. Use insulated bushings with separate lock nuts on all conduits entering panel cabinets. 

10. All conduit entering outlet boxes shall be provided with either an insulated throat connector or 

separate lock nut and insulated bushing. Bushing must be installed before any wire is pulled. 

D. Where the word "conduit" is used here in after, it shall mean either thick wall conduit, electrical 

metallic tubing or PVC. 

E. Flexible conduit shall be single strip. 

F. Conduits shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, from outlet to cabinet, junction box and pull box. 

G. Approved conduits are as follows: 

1. Flexible Conduit: 

a. Pittsburgh Wheatland Amerflex Anaconda Sealtite 

Republic Youngstown Electroflex Steelduct 

2. Electric Metallic Tubing: 

a. Allied Republic Carlon Clifton Steelduct PGH Pittsburgh 

Wheatland Barrett Youngstown 

H. All conduit lines left empty for future use and for telephone wire shall be left with a No. 16 gauge wire 

pulled in them and the ends securely corked or capped. 

I. Installation: 

1. No conduit shall be trapped except where so shown on the drawings. 

2. Generally, all conduit shall be concealed unless otherwise directed or indicated on the 

drawings. 

3. No bends permitted with a radius less than six (6) times the diameter of the conduit nor more 

than 90 . 

4. Conduits shall not be installed within six (6) inches of any surface which may be hotter than 

140 F. 

5. Provide junction boxes or pull boxes to avoid excessive runs or too many bends between 

outlets. 

6. The conduit sizes shown on the plans may be increased if desired to facilitate the pulling of 

cables. 



7. Where rigid conduit is laid below ground or below floor slabs on grade, they shall be 

thoroughly coated with one (1) coat of Rustoleum No. 769 and a second coat of asphaltum. 

Touch up all wrench marks. 

8. Run exposed conduit parallel with or at right angles to the building Walls and support from 

walls or ceilings at 5'-0" intervals with galvanized iron clamps or hangers. Devices attached 

to concrete shall be secured with inserts and bolts or lead expansion sleeves. 

9. Home runs shown on plans shall not be combined. 

10. Conduit couplings of the Erickson type shall be used at locations requiring joints in two 

conduit runs with separate origins. 

11. Concealed conduit run above the ceiling shall be supported independent of ceiling 

construction. 

12. Where ceilings of the lay-in type are used, conduits must be installed high enough to permit 

removal of ceiling panels. 

13. In general, the conduit installation shall follow the layout shown on the plans. However, this 

layout is diagrammatic only; and where changes are necessary due to structural conditions, 

other apparatus, or other causes, such changes shall be made without any additional cost to 

the Owner. 

14. Under no circumstances shall conduit penetrate the demising walls between 

auditoriums. 

15. No PVC conduit shall be installed above grade or slab. When the occupied space is above 

another occupied space, No PVC conduit shall be installed below slab. 

J. EMT conduit with steel set screw insulated throat-type fittings or die-cast set screw type fittings will be 

acceptable on interior of building, above grade, where permitted by the National Electrical Code. 

Below slabs on grade and on exterior of building, EMT (steel) set-screw insulated throat-type fittings 

or die-cast set-screw fitting will be acceptable where permitted by the National Electrical Code. 

K. All conduit runs which extend from the interior to the exterior of the building shall be sealed to prevent 

the circulation of air. 

L. Expansion fittings shall be installed on all conduit which passes through expansion joints in the 

building. Install expansion fittings in the conduits across structural joints (including building expansion 

joints) and in long, straight runs of non-metalic conduit (in accordance with National Electric Code). 

The expansion fitting(s) shall be designed to compensate for expansion and contraction and shall be 

sealed to prevent the entrance of water or moisture. Expansion fittings shall be UL listed and 

approved for grounding duty. 

M. Flexible conduit shall be used in making up short flexible connection to rotating or vibrating machinery 

or equipment. It shall be as short as possible but shall have a minimum length of 12". 

N. Flexible steel conduit shall be used in making short flexible connection from outlet boxes to recessed 

lighting fixtures. The conduit at these locations shall be as short as possible, but shall have a 

minimum length of 48". 

O. A bonding jumper shall be installed inside of all flexible conduits. 

P. Emergency circuits shall be run in a separate raceway. 

Q. Conduits mounted on auditorium side walls to be ½” maximum. 

2.09 CONDUCTORS 

A. Install complete system of wiring with all feeders and branches as shown on drawings. 

B. No wires or cables shall be pulled into the conduit until the conduit system is complete. Only listed 

lubricants may be used in pulling the wire. 

C. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlet to junction box or pull box. 

D. All splices and joints shall be made to be mechanically and electrically solid with pressure type 

connectors, T & B "Wire Joints", 3M "Scotch-lok", or Ideal "Wing Nut". 

E. Tape shall be "Scotch" No. 33 for indoor and No. 88 for outdoor. 



F. Where connection is made to any terminal of more than 30 amperes capacity and where connectors 

larger than No. 10 are connected to any terminal , suitable copper terminal lugs shall be bolted to the 

conductors.. 

G. Where multiple connections are made to the same terminal, individual lugs for each conductor shall 

be used. 

H. Each conduit shall have a minimum of two (2) wires pulled in unless that particular conduit is noted or 

specified as being empty. 

I. Conductors for lighting and receptacle circuits shall have color coded jacket. All wires shall be color 

coded (all wire color coded, with same color connected to same ungrounded phase throughout the 

installation) with type, size, make and voltage marked on it. 

J. Branch circuit wiring which supplies more than one fluorescent fixture through the wireway of other 

fixtures shall be rated at 105 C. 

K. Conductors are to be stranded copper.. Conductors No. 6 and smaller shall be type "THHN" or 

"THWN", No. 4 and larger shall be type "THHN" or "THWN". Conductor sizes No. 4 and smaller shall 

be 98% conductivity copper. All conductor sizes shown on plans are copper. Approved conductor 

manufacturers are as follows: General Cable, Essex, Rome, Triangle or Southwire. 

L. All low voltage wiring installed as described herein for connection by other trades or by separate 

contractors shall have 15' of excess wire left at end unless otherwise noted on drawings. All low 

voltage wiring in projection booth wireway shall have 600V insulation. All low voltage wiring not in 

conduit shall be plenum rated. 

M. All conductors are shown on the drawings and sized based on copper. At the contractor’s 

option, aluminum (ampacity equal to or greater than the specified copper, 75 degrees C) may 

be used for main feeders (only): from the transformer to MSB, from MSB to the ‘DH_’ panels. 

All connections for aluminum feeders shall be made with hydraulically pressed crimp lugs or 

sleeves. The contractor shall submit shop drawings showing the proposed feeder changes 

using aluminum showing the over-current protection, the specified copper conduit and 

conduit, the requested aluminum conductors and conduit, and the crimp connectors. 

N. Shared neutrals shall not be used. 

2.10 OUTLET BOXES 

A. At all outlets for lighting fixtures, wall switches, wall receptacles, telephone, etc. , galvanized steel 

boxes as hereinafter specified shall be used. 

B. Outlet boxes for fixtures and devices shall be securely attached to the building construction, using 

wood screws for wood construction, bolts for steel construction, and expansion bolts for masonry or 

concrete construction. 

C. Boxes in tile or masonry constructions shall be secured in place with cement mortar. 

D. Ceiling outlets flush in furred acoustical tile ceiling construction for surface or pendant mounted 

lighting fixtures shall be 4" square or octagonal pressed steel boxes supported from the building 

structure independent of the ceiling construction. 

E. All outlet boxes (EXCEPT IN THE DEMISING (separating walls between two auditoriums) AND 

THE FRONT WALLS IN AUDITORIUMS AND ON THE AUDITORIUM WALL IN THE PROJECTION 

BOOTH) shall be flush mounted within the wall regardless of wall construction, unless they are 

specifically shown as being used with exposed conduit. Boxes on the demising and front walls of 

auditoriums shall be surface mounted. 

F. Where outlet boxes are used to support lighting fixtures, the outlet box shall be firmly anchored to the 

structural members of the building. 

G. Outlet boxes and covers shall be of such form and dimensions as to be adapted to their specific 



usage, location, and size and number of conduits connecting thereto. 

H. Where devices are indicated at same location, mount in combined sectional gang boxes. 

I. Covers shall be installed on all junction boxes, capped outlets and all outlets not indicated as 

containing wiring devices or lighting fixtures. Covers for outlets in walls shall match cover specified 

for wall switches and receptacles. 

J. Outlet boxes in conduit work exposed to the weather and for vapor tight lighting fixtures and devices 

shall be of cast corrosion resistant type. 

K. Stamped steel outlet boxes shall be manufactured by Appleton Electric Company , Raco 

Manufacturing Company, or Steel City Electric Company. 

2.11 LOCATIONS OF OUTLETS AND FIXTURES 

A. Approximate locations of outlets are shown on drawings. Exact locations shall be determined at 

building. Electrical drawings show relative outlet locations only. Determine exact locations by 

Architectural drawings, dimensions and building conditions. All outlets shall be accurately set 

according to Architect's direction. 

B. Center outlets occurring in Architectural features accurately in same. Space wall switch outlets equal 

distance from all door trim. The right is reserved to change the exact location of any outlet, light 

fixture or J-box up to 20 feet in any room before it is permanently installed without additional cost. 

C. Concealed J-Boxes shall have access doors installed. 

2.12 WALL SWITCH 

A. Provide wall switches where shown on drawings. Install 42" above finished floor to center line or as 

required to meet ADA unless otherwise noted. 

B. Switches shall be Hubbell #1121 or equal switches manufactured by Arrow-Hart, Pass and Seymour, 

or Eagle. 

C. See 2.14 for colors. 

D. Where more than one switch is shown, mount in gang under gang type plates, except that emergency 

switches shall not be ganged with normal duty switches. 

E. Screw firmly to box. Do not depend on plates to pull the boxes tight. 

F. Occupancy switches are to be Legrand watt-stopper, model #DW-100 dual technology, white 

color. Occupancy switches are to be installed in all storage rooms, janitor’s closets, and 

offices. 

2.13 WALL RECEPTACLES 

A. Provide receptacles where shown on drawings. Install 18" A.F.F. to center line unless otherwise 

noted. 

B. Receptacles shall be Hubbell #5362 or equal receptacles as manufactured by Arrow-Hart, General 

Electric, or Leviton. 

C. See 2.14 for colors. 

D. Receptacles in each auditorium shall be black (with black cover plates), 20 amp, Hubbell 

#5362BLB or equal. 

2.14 DEVICE PLATES and COLORS: 

A. Install device plates on wall switches and receptacles. 

B. Device plates shall be of standard size and match the color and finish of the switches and 

receptacles. 



C. For areas designated by Architect as unfinished locations or surface mount, install galvanized steel 

plates of design to fit outlets. 

D. Where more than one device is mounted at same location, install gang type plates. 

E. Device covers in the concession or food areas shall be stainless steel. 

F. In public spaces and auditoriums: black devices and black cover plates. 

G. In concession and scullery: gray device and stainless steel cover plates. 

H. In offices and projection booth, ivory or white device and matching cover plate. 

2.15 MOTOR AND APPARATUS WIRING 

A. Other trades will furnish and install all motors indicated on drawings. The electrical Sub-contractor 

shall provide all line voltage wiring to the motors as well as starters and overload protection/safety 

switches. 

B. All motor sizes and locations indicated are approximate; make connections to equipment as actually 

installed. Before installing wire and conduit, check the nameplate data against information shown on 

drawings and call attention of Architect or Engineer to any discrepancies discovered. 

C. Furnish and install all power wiring for heating and air conditioning equipment, according to wiring 

diagrams furnished by heating and air conditioning contractors. 

D. Motor power wiring, for the purpose of this specification, is defined as those conductors necessary 

between the energy source and the motor to conduct the electrical energy. All other wiring, such as 

for remote push button station, firestats or aquastats, for use with magnetic starters, all thermostats 

(low or line voltage), all wiring to or from all heating and air conditioning control panels, except the 

primary power source, pneumatic-electric switches or relays, interlock wiring, etc., is defined as 

control wiring, and is included in this section of the specifications. 

E. Make flexible conduit connection to each motor. 

F. Furnish and install disconnect switches and starters where required. 

G. Wire and connect all electrically operated equipment requiring line voltage connections. 

H. Thermal overload protection provided for single phase motors by manual switches with overload units 

rated as required by specific motor to be served. Manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, 

or Square with NEMA Type 1 enclosure. 

I. Furnish and install local disconnect switches for all signs and equipment, as required by the local 

authorities or as shown on the drawings. 

2.16 FUSES 

A. Fuses for motor and transformer circuits shall be Bussmann "Fusetron". 

B. Fuses for circuits other than motors shall be Bussman class JKS, or as noted on the drawings. 

C. Equal fuses by General Electric, Littlefuse or Chase Shamut will be acceptable. 

D. Provide fuses per manufacturer's recommendations in all fusible disconnects serving mechanical 

equipment. 

E. Provide 3 spare fuses for each size and type of fuse and a fuse cabinet to be mounted in the main 

electrical room. 

2.17 SAFETY SWITCHES (Disconnect Switches) 

A. Provide heavy duty safety switches where indicated on drawings. Switches shall be G. E., Square D, 

Westinghouse or approved equal, and shall have factory applied gray finish. 



B. Provide engraved laminate plastic nameplate giving manufacturer's name, type of switch and 

electrical ratings. 

C. Where switch is installed remote from equipment wired to, provide etched laminate plastic label on 

switch cover. 

D. Provide NEMA-3R enclosures for switches mounted exterior of building exposed to weather. 

E. Safety switches for air conditioning equipment shall be fused. 

2.18 LIGHTING FIXTURES 

A. The light fixtures and lamps shall be furnished and installed according to fixture schedule as indicated 

on the drawings. 

B. All fixtures shall be properly polarized. Connect shell of lamp holder to neutral conductor. 

C. Grounding of light fixtures shall comply fully with National Electrical Code Sections 410-91 through 

410-96. 

D. All fluorescent fixtures to have Osram System 32 (or equal), electronic ballasts and GMF/HLR fusing. 

Ballasts shall be high power factor. Lamps shall be matched with the ballast and shall be high 

efficiency, T-8. 

E. Recessed fixtures shall be coordinated to match the construction into which they are installed, i.e., 

lay-in, gyp board, rated ceilings, insulation, etc. 

F. Each recessed lighting fixture shall have a trim to match the type of ceiling (plaster, grid, exposed 

panel, etc.) in which it is being installed, regardless of catalog number. 

G. The contractor shall be responsible for confirming all ceiling types before ordering lighting fixtures 

shipped to the job. 

H. Each lighting fixture recessed in a plastered ceiling of any type shall have a plaster frame. 

I. Each lighting outlet on the drawings is lettered. The letter indicates the type of fixture on the fixture 

schedule. 

J. The contractor shall provide a lighting fixture at each outlet shown on the drawings. The fixture 

installed shall be the type indicated or specified. Ballast voltage shall match outlet voltage. 

K. All lighting fixtures shall be supported from the building structure. Attach downlight support channels 

and layin fixtures to suspension Tees with clips (4 per fixture). The contractor shall coordinate this 

requirement with the ceiling trades. The number, type, and guage of support wires shall be as 

required by the governing authorities. 

L. Light fixture submittal shall clearly indicate the lamp type and ballast (if applicable.) 

M. Light fixtures in one hour ceilings shall have gyp board enclosures to satisfy U.L. 

N. The locations (and quantities) of the light fixtures in the auditoriums shown on the electrical 

drawings are to be used (as opposed to the architectural reflected ceiling plan). 

O. The lamp supplier will provide 10% spare lamps of each lamp type shortly after the theatre opens. 

P. All lamps are to be either Philips, Oshram, or GE. Submit shop drawings for approval. 

Q. All fixtures adjacent to insulation or within a gyp board tent shall be I.C. rated. 

R. The lamp supplier will provide the lamps with the light fixtures. The contractor shall furnish and install 

all lamps which burn out or fail during the period of construction (until the theatre officially opens for 

business). 



S. The contractor shall furnish the labor warrantee for all Owner supplied light fixtures during 

construction and for a period of one year after the theatre opens. This labor warrantee shall apply to 

the fixture, the fixture installation, and the ballast. The labor and parts warrantee for lamps shall 

apply only during construction and shall not extend past the opening of the theatre. Any 

compensation from the fixture manufacturer to the contractor for the replacement of defective fixtures 

shall be between the contractor and the manufacturer. 

T. The contractor shall receive (and sign), store, inventory the Owner furnished light fixtures and lamps. 

2.19 AISLE LIGHT FIXTURES (TYPE 'T' or ‘TS’, ‘TC’, or ‘TW’) 

A. The aisle lighting system shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the Matrix of Responsibility. 

B. The replaceable light type system shall include all necessary extrusions, transformers, wires, 

fasteners, etc. to form a complete and operating system. 

C. The components of the system shall be as follows: 

1) The extrusion shall be rigid vinyl, architectural bronze color, in 10' increments. The profile 

shall have double wall thickness with weep channels for drainage. The configuration shall 

be "carpet to edge". The extrusion shall satisfy all ADA requirements. 

2) The lens cover shall be polycarbonate with the color (clear,bronze or amber) as specified 

by the architect. 

3) The conductor shall be 2 conductor, 22 gauge stranded wire. 

4) The lamps are to be 1.4 watt, 28 volt, at 12" on center. 

5) The socket is to have a PF 1 fire rating, polycarbonate, self extinguishing. 

6) The transformer shall be a 75 VA Class II transformer (energy limiting with inherent output 

protection), dual tap, mounted in a 10"x10"x4" enclosure with a 2 amp dimmer installed. 

The aisle lights shall be powered from the 12volt taps. 

D. The number of transformers and the number of feeds shall be determined by the contractor based on 

the actual installed length of the track. Each transformer and feed to the track shall serve 80 feet of 

track. 

2.20 LAMPS 

A. The lamp (as indicated on the drawings) supplier shall furnish the initial supply of lamps with the light 

fixtures. The contractor shall furnish and install all replacement lamps which burn out during the 

course of construction (until the completion of the punch list). 

B. Lamps shall be as specified in fixture schedule on plans. 

C. Fluorescent lamps shall be T8 as scheduled. 

D. Fluorescent lamps shall be pre-heat, rapid start, cool white unless otherwise noted, with a rated life of 

18,000 hours at three hours per start. 

E. Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted (except as otherwise noted), extended service with a rated 

life of 2,500 hours. 

F. Reflector lamps (R and PAR) shall have the beam type as called for in the lighting fixture schedule, 

and shall have a rated life of 2,000 hours. 

G. All lamps are to be either Philips, Oshram, or GE. Submit shop drawings for approval. 

I. The lamp supplier shall furnish 10% spare lamps (10% of each lamp type) to the theatre manager 

after the completion of the punch list. 

2.21 GROUND CONNECTIONS 

A. Complete all equipment grounding of all appliances and electrically operated equipment in all areas to 

meet National Electrical Code and local code requirements. 

2.22 SYRUP CHASES 

1. All in-ground syrup chases shall be schedule 40 PVC with radius sweeps. For 6" chase sizes, the 

sweeps shall have an 18" radius. 



2. All syrup chases located on a floor not on grade shall be 16 gauge galvanized metal with long radius 

sweeps. 

1. The joints on the metal syrup chases shall be sealed with Uni-Weather Mastic sealant. 

1. The radius of the 90 degree sweeps shall be 30 inches. 

2. The chases shall be as manufactured by AERO Conveying system or equal. 

3. The metal syrup chases shall be suspended at no less than 4 feet on center with a loop 

hanger or Unistrut. 

4. The ends of the chase shall be finished with a bell mouth fitting. 

2.23 EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL WIRING: 

A. Furnish and install all power and control wiring to the exhaust fan(s) serving the popcorn poppers at 

the concession stand(s) and the toilets. 

B. Air Conditioning unit control components shall be furnished and installed as shown on the drawings. 

C. The electrical contractor shall warranty the installation and wiring of the controls for a period of one 

year. The electrical contractor shall furnish a one year labor warranty for the controls. 

D. Furnish and install all power and control wiring to all equipment. 

F. All line and low voltage control items shall be furnished (other than the temperature controls 

hardware) , installed (all), and connected (all) as part of the work of this section. 

2.24 MOTORS AND STARTERS 

A. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Specifications. 

B. Prime coat and finish coat of gray or black paint at factory. 

C. If not built into equipment at factory, furnish starters and overload protection devices for all motors. 

Overload protection devices shall protect all phases of each motor. 

D. Starters for 3-phase motors 1/2 hp and larger, magnetic type and full overload and under-voltage 

protection and integral mounted push buttons, or remote control interlocks as required, shall be 

furnished for all automatically operated fans, blowers, pumps, etc. 

E. Coordinate with the mechanical drawings for contractor requirements in the applicable starters. 

F. Starters surface or flush mounted as indicated. 

G. Starters located exterior to the building shall have NEMA 3R enclosures. 

2.25 GROUND FAULT SYSTEM REPORT 

A. As required by the national electric code, Article 230-95c, provide a performance test of the ground 

fault protective equipment. 

B. The report should indicate the equipment tested, visual and mechanical inspection, and the results of 

the electrical tests. 

C. The electrical tests should include the following: 

1. System neutral insulation resistance. 

2. Pickup current by primary injector at the sensor. 

3. Time delay at two points above the pickup current level by injecting current into the sensor. 

4. System operation at 55% of rated voltage to verify system trip at this voltage. 

5. Visually inspect the switchboard neutral bus downstream of neutral disconnect link to verify 

absence of ground connections. 

6. Measure the system neutral insulation resistance downstream of neutral disconnect link to 

verify absence of grounds. 

D. Test Result Evaluation: 

1. The system neutral insulation resistance should be above 100 ohms, and preferably 1 

megohm or better. 

2. The maximum pickup setting of the ground fault protection shall be 1200 amperes, and the 



maximum time delay shall be one (1) second for ground fault currents equal to or greater 

than 3000 amperes (NEC 230-95). 

3. The relay pickup current should be within ten percent (10%) of the manufacturer's published 

time current characteristic curves. 

4. The relay timing should be in accordance with the manufacturer's published time current 

characteristic curves. 

E. The report shall include initial and final values. The electrical contractor shall make adjustments and 

repairs to the equipment and the installation in order to meet or exceed the minimum specified test 

results. 

F. The report shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer of the state in which the 

project is constructed. 

2.26 SIGNAGE & EQUIPMENT 

A. Provide disconnecting means in accordance with NEC 600.6. 

B. All circuits for LED, signage, and neon shall be separate neutrals. 


A. The sub-contractor shall furnish a written warranty, countersigned and guaranteed by the General 

Contractor, stating that all work executed under this section will be free from defects of 

workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 


defective work and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of 

the Guaranty-Warranty. 




SECTION 16050 16051 

SITE BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 

2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 

3. Sleeve seals. 

4. Common electrical installation requirements. 

5. Local conditions. 


A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications. 

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 

D. Codes and Standards : 

NFPA 

National Fire Protection Association. 

NEC National Electrical Code NFPA 70. 

Cal-OSHA 

California Occupational Safety Health Act. 

SFM 

California State Fire Marshal. 

CAC 

California Administrative Code. 

ANSI 

American National Standards Institute, Inc. 

ASTM 

American Society for Testing and Materials. 

NEMA 

National Electrical Manufacturers Association. 

UL 

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 

EIA 

Electronic Industries Association. 

NECA 

National Electrical Contractors Association. 

08040 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 

06/21/10: jmy: REV. 05/11 16050 -1 LPAS P ROJECT NO.

CEC 

California Electrical Code 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 


A. Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, "Suitability of Test 

Equipment" and "Test Instrument Calibration." 


A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that 

reduce headroom are indicated. 

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to 

other installations. 

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 

4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear 

of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. 

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place 

concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. 

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind 

finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in 

Division 8 Section “Access Doors and Frames." 

D. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so 

equipment and systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate 

successful interoperability. Coordinate system pre-testing and turnover to the Owner for 

final testing by the independent testing agency. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to 

coordinate the schedule for this agency so as not to interfere with the Contract schedule, 

milestone dates, and project completion. The Contractor shall obtain schedule availability 

and duration information from the testing agency and incorporate these items into t he 

Contract schedule. 

1.07 LOCKS 

A. Locks: Coordinate lock keying with the Owner for type. All panelboards and cabinets shall 

be keyed alike. 




A. The Contractor shall include in his bid the cost for “As-Built” drawings. As-Built drawings 

shall be produced in Auto Cadd 2008 or newer 

1.09 SUBMITTALS/SHOP DRAWINGS 

A. All submittals/shop drawings shall be turned in at one time. Individual sections submitted 

independently are cause for rejection. 

B. Substitutions: 

1. Any substitutions from the specified items shall include the specified item in the 

submittal for cross reference. 

2. No substituted items will be accepted without a copy of the specified item 

submitted along with the substitution. 



A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply 

to product selection: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one 

of the manufacturers specified. 

2.02 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES 

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, 

plain ends. 

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure 

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 

0.138-inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application. 

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping 

specified in Division 7 "Firestopping." 

2.03 SLEEVE SEALS 

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space 

between sleeve and raceway or cable. 

1. Manufacturers: 

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 



. Calpico, Inc. 

c. Metraflex Co. 

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 

2. Sealing Elements: NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. 

Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length 

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each 

sealing element. 


3.01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with NECA 1. 

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center 

of unit for wall-mounting items. 

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, 

arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom 

consistent with these requirements. 

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of 

components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such 

a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in 

the vicinity. 

E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 

3.02 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways 

penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall 

assemblies. 

B. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping 

specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping." 

C. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or 

formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. 

D. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 

E. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 



1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and 

no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). 

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches 

(1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), 

thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm)/ 

F. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall 

assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during 

construction of floor or wall. 

G. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. 

H. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. 

I. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and 

raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 

J. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and 

with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. 

K. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between 

sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location 

of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. 

L. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, 

ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway 

and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with Division 7 Section 

"Firestopping." 

M. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with 

flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. 

N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and 

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear 

space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 

O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size 

sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and 

sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 

3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION 

A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations. 

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or 

cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble 

mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and 

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and 

make watertight seal. 



3.04 FIRESTOPPING 

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to 

restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation 

requirements are specified in Division 7 "Firestopping." 


A. Inspect installed sleeve and sleeve-seal installations and associated firestopping for 

damage and faulty work. 

3.06 TESTING, CERTIFICATION 

A. Testing: The Contractor will retain the services of an independent testing agency that will 

perform final systems testing on all electrical equipment. It is the Contractor’s responsibility 

to pre-test all equipment to ensure it is functional and operational prior to turning it over 

to the Testing Company for final test. The specification Section 26 60 00 “Acceptance 

Testing” spells out the testing requirements for the Contractor and for the testing agency. 

The following are general requirements for the Contractor. 

1. Provide tests specified in other sections. Test all wiring and connections for continuity 

and grounds; where such test indicate faulty insulation or other defects, locate, 

repair and retest. Balance loads at panelboards. Furnish all testing equipment. 

2. Refer to the individual specification sections and Section 26 60 00 “Acceptance 

Testing” of the specifications for test requirements. 

3. Five (5) typewritten copies of the results of tests performed by the Contractor shall 

be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval. Testing does not replace 

the requirement for final inspection of the project work. 

4. All electrical systems shall be tested for compliance with the specifications. 

B. Manufacturers Certifications: 

1. The electrical systems specified herein shall be reviewed for compliance with theses 

specifications, installation in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations 

and system operation by a representative of the manufacturer. The manufacturer 

shall submit certification that the system has been reviewed by the manufacturer 

is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and is 

operating in accordance with the specifications. 

2. Provide manufacturers certification for the following systems: 

a. Fire Alarm System. 

b. Clock System. 

c. Public Address System. 

d. Lighting Control Systems. 



e. Automatic transfer switches. 

END OF SECTION 26 05 00 



SECTION 16060 

SITE GROUNDING AND BONDING 





1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding 

requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of 

systems described in other Sections. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”. 

2. Section “Conductors and Cables” for basic grounding conductors. 

3. Section “Raceways and Boxes”. 

4. Section “Wiring Devices” for grounding provisions and isolated grounding 

receptacle features. 

5. Section “Switchboards” for grounding provisions. 

6. Section “Panelboards” for grounding provisions. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Ground rods. 

2. Chemical rods. 

3. Ground clamps. 

B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. 


A. Testing Agency: The Contractor will retain the services of an independent testing agency 

as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the InterNational 

Electrical Testing Association to perform final testing of the grounding system. The 

11020 GROUNDING AND BONDING 

06/21/10: jmy: REV. 07/11 16060 -1 LPAS PROJECT NO.

Contractor is required to perfume pre-testing of the system to ensure compliance with the 

specifications prior to turning over to the testing agency for final test. 

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 

CEC 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and 

marked for intended use. 

1. Comply with UL 467. 

C. Comply with CEC 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground 

construction, comply with IEEE C2. 

D. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods: 

a. Chance/Hubbell. 

b. Copperweld Corp. 

c. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. 

d. ILSCO. 

e. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. 

f. Lyncole XIT Grounding. 

g. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. 

h. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. 

i. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 

2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS 

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Section "Conductors and Cables." 

B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation. 

C. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. 

On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow 

tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow. 

D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. 



E. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 

2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 

G. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: 

1. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 

2. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated 

with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick. 

3. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, 

terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) 

thick. 

H. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators. 

2.03 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS 

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and 

combinations of conductors and connected items. 

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type. 

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

2.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODES 

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel. 

1. Size: 5/8 by 120 inches (19 by 3000 mm) in diameter. 

B. Chemical Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, filled with nonhazardous chemical 

salts, terminated with a 4/0 bare conductor. Provide backfill material recommended by 

manufacturer. 



A. In raceways, use insulated equipment-grounding conductors. 

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for 

underground connections, except those at test wells. 



C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps. 

D. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two bolts. 

E. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing 

service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 

1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch (25.4 mm) from wall and support from wall 6 

inches (150 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. At doors, route the bus up to the top of the doorframe, across the top of the 

doorway, and down to the specified height above the floor. 

3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS 

A. Comply with CEC 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding 

conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by 

CEC 70 are indicated. 

B. Install equipment-grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. 

C. Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branchcircuit 

runs from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units. 

D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment-grounding 

conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor 

from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment 

grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless 

otherwise indicated. 

E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch 

circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic 

raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and 

install a separate equipment-grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding 

conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at 

equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, 

unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment-grounding conductor in nonmetallic 

raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. 

G. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate equipment 

grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing, and antifrost heating 

cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. 

H. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding electrode in 

addition to installing a separate equipment-grounding conductor with supply branch-circuit 

conductors. 


A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other 

and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes. 



1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final 

grade, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic 

welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without 

exposing steel or damaging copper coating. 

B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless 

otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be 

subjected to strain, impact, or damage. 

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration 

isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use 

exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection 

is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking 

care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for 

maintenance. 

D. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, 

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service 

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes 

by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect 

grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or 

sleeve to conductor at each end. 

E. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water 

meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors. 

F. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding 

conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use 

braided-type bonding straps. 

G. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to CEC 70, 

Paragraph 250-81(c), using a minimum of 40 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor size as 

shown on drawings. If concrete foundation is less than 40 feet (6 m) long, coil excess 

conductor within the base of the foundation. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing 

steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below 

grade and connect to building grounding grid or to a grounding electrode external to 

concrete. 

3.04 CONNECTIONS 

A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. 

Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals 

in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to 

make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. 

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 

3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent 

future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 



B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds 

that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not 

acceptable. 

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressuretype 

grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated 

with winged pressure-type connectors. 

D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal 

housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit 

with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor 

to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at 

entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless 


E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according 

to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are 

not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 

F. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct 

circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended 

by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to 

make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding 

conductor. 

G. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or 

grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration 

of insulation and cable. 


A. Testing: The Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform final field 

quality-control testing. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating the schedule of the 

testing agency to ensure no impact on the construction schedule. The Contractor is 

required to pre-test as follows to ensure the system is ready for final test: 

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been 

energized, test for compliance with requirements. 

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum groundresistance 

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, 

and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days 

after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any 

means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or 

other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the 

fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 

3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other 

grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the 

record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their 

depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena 

that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. 

a. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 



. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 

4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, 

notify the Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground 

resistance. 




SECTION 16075 

SITE ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 





1.02 SUMMARY 


1. Identification for raceway. 

2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 

3. Underground-line warning tape. 

4. Equipment identification labels. 

5. Miscellaneous identification products. 



2. Section “Transient Voltage Suppression”. 

3. Section “Switchboards”. 

4. Section “Fuses”. 

5. Section “Fire Detection System”. 


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting 

provisions, and graphic features of identification products. 


A. Comply with NFPA 70. 

11020 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 


B. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 


A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with 

requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring 

diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, 

standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. 

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of 

surfaces where devices are to be applied. 

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. 

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 


2.01 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of 

color field for each raceway and cable size. 

B. Color for Printed Legend: 

1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field. 

2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable. 

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, 

with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by 

gripping action. 

D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic 

sleeves, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it 

identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 

E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 

mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use. 

2.02 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION 

MATERIALS 

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils 

(0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide. 

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit 

identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 



C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014-inch- (0.35-mm-) thick aluminum 

sheet, with stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots 

for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. 

D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped 

legend, punched for use with self-locking nylon tie fastener. 

E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant 

grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag 

manufacturer. 

2.03 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE 

A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored “yellow”; continuous-printed, polyethylene tape. 

1. Not less than 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.102 mm) thick. 

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 

3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 

4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line. 

2.04 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS 

A. Adhesive Film Label for Use on Outlet Boxes Only: Machine printed, in black, by thermal 

transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 1/4 inch. 

B. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label for Use on All Equipment Except Outlet 

Boxes and Equipment Exposed to Weather: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. 

White letters on a black background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). 

C. Stenciled Legend for Equipment Exposed to Weather: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink 

or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm). 

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS 

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable 

ties. 

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 

2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.6 kg), minimum. 

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 

4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding. 

B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9. 



C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel 

machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 



A. Accessible Raceways More Than 600 V: Identify with "DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE" in 

black letters at least 2 inches (50 mm) high, with snap-around labels. Repeat legend at 

10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals. 

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 2 

AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use colorcoding 

conductor tape aluminum wraparound marker labels. Identify source and circuit 

number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition 

to the above. 

C. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three 

branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape aluminum 

wraparound marker labels. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and 

circuit number. 

D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list 

source and circuit number. 

E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, 

signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. 

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, 

terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system 

used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, 

and Operation and Maintenance Manual. 

F. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, 

lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install undergroundline 

warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. 

G. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: 

Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply metal-backed, butyrate warning signs. Identify 

system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, 

cover, or other access. 

1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of 

equipment including, but not limited to, the following: 

a. Power transfer switches. 

b. Controls with external control power connections. 



2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless 

otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush 

panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. 

H. Instruction Signs: 

1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and 

maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install 

instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system 

or equipment operation. 

2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a 

red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency 

instructions at equipment used for power transfer, emergency power transfer. 

I. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation 

label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance 

Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master 

units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. 

Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm 

systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 

1. Labeling Instructions: 

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless 

otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) 

high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are 

required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. 

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. 

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those 

appropriate for viewing from the floor. 

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: 

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. 

b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. 

c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. 

d. Transformers. 

e. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. 

f. Disconnect switches. 

g. Enclosed circuit breakers. 

h. Motor starters. 

i. Push-button stations. 



j. Contactors. 

k. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. 

l. Voice and data cable terminal equipment. 

m. Master clock and program equipment. 

n. Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations. 

o. Television/audio components, racks, and controls. 

p. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators. 

q. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal 

cabinets, and racks. 

r. Monitoring and control equipment. 

s. Uninterruptible power supply equipment. 

t. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and 

for signal and control functions. 


A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. 

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient 

viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. 

D. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware 

appropriate to the location and substrate. 

E. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall 

completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in 

contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and 

floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) 

maximum intervals in congested areas. 

F. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors 

listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 

1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 6 AWG if authorities 

having jurisdiction permit, field applied. 

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 

a. Phase A: Black. 

b. Phase B: Red. 



c. Phase C: Blue. 

3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 

a. Phase A: Brown. 

b. Phase B: Orange. 

c. Phase C: Yellow. 

4. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a 

minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where 

splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent 

possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. 

G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of 

conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 

H. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous 

underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below 

finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common 

trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall. 

I. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 9. 




SECTION 16120 

SITE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 





1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and 

terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 


1. Section “Electrical Identification” for color-coding and wire markers. 

2. Section “Raceways and Boxes” for conduits, boxes, and cabinets. 



B. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: for Contractor’s pre-testing of equipment and 

systems. 




Electrical Testing Association to perform final testing of equipment and systems. The 

Contractor is required to perfume pre-testing to ensure compliance with the specifications 

prior to turning over to the testing agency for final test. 


NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the Owner, and marked for 

intended use. 

C. Comply with NFPA 70. 

11020 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 




A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following 

requirements apply for product selection: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the 

manufacturers specified. 

2.02 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 

2. General Cable Corporation. 

3. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 

4. Southwire Company. 

B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for usage of insulation type, 

cable construction, and ratings. 

C. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7 stranded conductor. 

D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN and SO complying with NEMA WC 5. 

Conductor rating shall be dual rated THHN-THWN. 

2.03 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES 


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 

2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 

3. Hubbell/Anderson. 

4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 

5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division. 

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, 

type, and class for application and service indicated. 




3.01 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS 

A. Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. 

B. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, NOT ALLOWED. 

C. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, service cord. 

D. Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. Power-limited, fire-protective, 

signaling circuit cable. 

E. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 

F. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, Power-limited cable, concealed 

in accessible building finishes. 


A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound 

used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's 

recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, 

that will not damage cables or raceway. 

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural 

members, and follow surface contours where possible. 

E. Support cables according to Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 

F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section 

"Firestopping." 

G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section "Electrical 

Identification." 


A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening 

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in 

UL 486A and UL 486B. 

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess 

equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of 

slack. 



D. Terminate conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller specified in Division 26 to be stranded, 

with crimp type lug or stud. Direct termination of stranded conductors without crimp 

terminator to terminal screws, lugs, or other points is not permitted even if terminal is rated 

for stranded conductors. Crimp terminal shall be the configuration type suitable for 

terminal point. T&B “Sta-Kon” or equal. 


A. Testing: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform field quality control 

testing. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating the schedule of the testing agency 

to ensure no impact on the construction schedule. The Contractor shall pre-test all 

conductors and cable for opens, shorts, and grounds. 

B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 

1. Each cable and conductor tested. 

2. Test results that comply with requirements. 

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to 

achieve compliance with requirements. 




SECTION 16130 

SITE RACEWAYS AND BOXES 





1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical 

wiring. 



2. Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems”. 

3. Section “Electrical Identification”. 

4. Section “Conductors and Cables”. 

5. Section "Wiring Devices". 

6. Division 7 “Firestopping” for firestopping materials and installation at penetrations 

through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements unless specified in this 

Section. 


A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. 

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. 

C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 

D. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 

E. RMC: Rigid metallic conduit. 

F. FMC: Ferrous metal conduit. 

G. RSC: Rigid steel conduit. 

11020 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 



A. Product Data: For raceways, surface raceways, wireways, fittings, floor boxes, hingedcover 

enclosures, and cabinets. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for enclosures, 

and cabinets. 

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating 

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 

4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, 

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the Owner , and marked for 

intended use. 

B. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and 

suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by 

them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition 

assemblies. 



A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following 

requirements apply for product selection: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the 

manufacturers specified. 

2.02 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING 




1. Alflex Inc. 

2. Electri-Flex Co. 

3. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 

4. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. 

5. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 

6. Wheatland Tube Co. 

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 

C. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1. 

D. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. 

1. Fittings: Steel set screw. 

E. FMC: Flexible steel conduit zinc-coated steel. 

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. 

G. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials. 

H. Die cast fittings “NOT ALLOWED”. 

2.03 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING 


1. American International. 

2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 

3. Arnco Corp. 

4. Cantex Inc. 

5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 

6. Condux International. 

7. ElecSYS, Inc. 

8. Electri-Flex Co. 

9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 

10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 

11. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 



12. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 

13. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC. 

2.04 METAL WIREWAYS 


1. Hoffman. 

2. Square D. 

3. Wiremold. 

B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1. 

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, 

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as 

required for complete system. 

D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to 

comply with NFPA 70. 

E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. 

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 

2.05 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS 


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 

2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. 

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 

4. Hoffman. 

5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 

6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 

7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 

8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 

9. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 



10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

11. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 

12. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary. 

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. 

D. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. 

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

F. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. 

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush 

latch. 

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard 

enamel. 

H. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and 

removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged 

door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match Owner 

standard. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and 

include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 

2.06 FACTORY FINISHES 

A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard 

paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before 

shipping. 


3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION 

A. Outdoors: 

1. Exposed: Rigid steel. 

2. Concealed: Rigid steel. 

3. Underground, Single Run: RNC, RSC, coated or wrapped. 

4. Underground, Grouped: RNC, RSC, coated or wrapped. 

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, 

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 



6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

7. Minimum Raceway size, 3/4" – inch trade size (DN21). 

B. Indoors: 

1. Exposed: EMT. 

2. Concealed: EMT. 

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, 

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use 

LFMC in damp or wet locations. 

4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 

5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows: 

a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic. 

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size (DN 21). 

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 

1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use 

with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing 

conduits. 

3. EMT Conduit: Use only steel set screw type fittings with insulated throat. 


A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or 

hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. 

C. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for 

Electrical Systems." 

D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. 

E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved 

portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. 

F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and 

keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise 

indicated. 



1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical 

distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless 


H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and 

leave at least 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover. 

1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete 

placement. 

2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. 

3. Run conduit parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right 

angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 

4. Change from nonmetallic conduit to, rigid steel conduit, before rising above the 

floor. 

I. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural 

members and follow surface contours as much as possible. 

1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 

2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where 

elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel 

raceways. 

J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. 

1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. 

K. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools. 

L. Terminations: 

1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to 

enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, 

one inside and one outside box. 

2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings 

tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase 

nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple 

so no threads are exposed. 

M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with 

not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack 

at each end of pull wire. 

N. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them 

with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush 

steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or 

surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 



1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of 

refrigerated spaces. 

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. 

O. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to 

freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for 

plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel 

conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. Install screwdriveroperated, 

threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections. 

P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for 

recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise 

transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 

Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. 

Q. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction 

box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals. 

R. Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 

S. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner. 


A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and 

cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by 

manufacturer. 

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating 

recommended by manufacturer. 

3.04 CLEANING 

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect 

exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. 




SECTION 16140 

SITE WIRING DEVICES 





1.02 SUMMARY 


1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters, integral surge 

suppression units, and isolated-ground receptacles. 

2. Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches. 

3. Device wall plates. 

4. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies. 






A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. 

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. 

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. 

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 



11020 WIRING DEVICES 


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for 

premarking wall plates. 

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 

D. Field quality-control test reports. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 


NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, 

and marked for intended use. 

C. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. 




following: No substitution 

1. Wiring Devices: 

a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 

b. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 

c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. 

2. Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: 

a. Crouse-Hinds/Cooper Industries, Inc.; Arrow Hart Wiring Devices. 

b. EGS/Appleton Electric Company. 

c. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co./Hubbell Incorporated. 

3. Poke-Through, Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles: 

a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 



. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. 

c. Square D/Groupe Schneider NA. 

d. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

e. Wiremold Company (The). 

2.02 RECEPTACLES 

A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C- 

596G, and UL 498. 

B. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty specification grade NEMA WD6 5- 

20R grade. 

C. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, non-feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with 

integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and 

UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an 

adapter. 

D. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Straight blade, Heavy-Duty grade, duplex receptacle, with 

equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of 

the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. 

1. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated-ground receptacles. 

2. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on 

removable parts. 

E. Industrial Heavy-Duty Pin and Sleeve Devices: Comply with IEC 309-1. 

F. Hazardous (Classified) Location Receptacles: Comply with NEMA FB 11. 

2.03 CORD AND PLUG SETS 

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements 

of equipment being connected. 

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; 

with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a 

minimum of 30 percent. 

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle 

type for connection. 

2.04 SWITCHES 

A. Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20. 

B. Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type. 



C. Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plaster ears 

and removable tab connector that permit separate or common feed connection. 

1. Switch: 20 A, 120/277-VAC. 

2. Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 

D. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off switches 

and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. 

1. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching to 

suit connections. 

2. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable 

rotary knob, toggle switch, or slider; single pole with soft tap or other quiet switch; 

EMI/RFI filter to eliminate interference; and 5-inch (130-mm) wire connecting 

leads. 

3. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; 

trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable 

of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 10 percent of full brightness. 

2.05 WALL PLATES 

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 

2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch (1mm) thick satin finished stainless steel. 

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 

4. Material for Wet Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed 

and labeled for use in "wet locations." 

2.06 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS 

A. Type: Modular, flap-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used. 

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. 

C. Service Plate: Rectangular with satin finish. 

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2.07 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES 

A. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with 

multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service 

outlet assembly. 



1. Service Outlet Assembly: Flush type with four simplex receptacles and space for 

four RJ-45 jacks. 

2. Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch (100-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to 

floor thickness. 

3. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly. 

4. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch (100-mm) cored openings and 

reestablish fire rating of floor. 

5. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG 

conductors; and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 5 voice and data 

communication cables. 

2.08 FINISHES 

A. Color: 

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, unless otherwise 

indicated or required by NFPA 70. 

2. TVSS Devices: Blue. 

3. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: As specified for wiring devices with orange triangle 

on face. 



A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines. 

B. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging according to 


C. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to 

manufacturers' written instructions. 

D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension 

vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches 

under single, multigang wall plates. 

E. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting. 

F. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions 

and furnishings. 

3.02 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Comply with Section "Electrical Identification." 



1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use 

paste on machine printing with ¼“ high black lettering on face of plate, and durable 

wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 


A. Ground equipment according to Section "Grounding and Bonding." 

B. Connect wiring according to Section "Conductors and Cables." 

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening 

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in 

UL 486A and UL 486B. 


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test 

for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements. 

2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to 


B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. 




SECTION 16400 

AUXILIARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 




Work specified in this Section. 


A. All other sections of Division 16. 



PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS 

2.01 TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM 

A. Provide all empty conduit, outlet boxes, terminal boards, sleeves, etc., as indicated on drawings. 

Provide raceway system as described on the drawings. 

B. TERMINAL BOARDS: Fire treated 3/4" plywood, 8' x 4', unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, 

or as directed otherwise by Telephone Company on jobsite. Provide a six outlet plug strip at the base 

of the plywood. Provide a #10 copper ground bus, bonded to the cold water line. 

C. Telephone service raceway shall be installed underground from property line to building. 

D. Provide service entrance conduit from the main telephone terminal board (located inside) for entrance 

of underground service feeder from the site service. Refer to drawings for additional requirements. 

2.02 THEATER BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM (WITH DOOR AJAR) 

A. Furnished and installed as indicated on the Matrix of Responsibility. 

2.03 AUDITORIUM SOUND SYSTEM 

A. Contractor to furnish and install all wiring and conduit, and speaker brackets. 

B. Speakers are supplied and installed as indicated on the Matrix of Responsibility. 

C. All wiring not in conduit shall satisfy the requirements of the NEC for flame spread and smoke 

generation when used in assembly occupancy, or add conduit/J-boxes as required. 

D. Sound conduits shall be routed to maintain 24” minimum separation from power conduits. If the 

sound conduit crosses power conduit, then the two shall cross at a ninety degree angle. 

2.04 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: 

A. Design, furnish and install, as indicated on the plans and as required by the governing authorities, 

new fire alarm devices, main panel, remote annunciator, amplifier, and zone selector switch. This is 

a performance specification. Layout of devices on the drawings is for minimal conformance. Verify 

local requirements with local authority having jurisdiction and incorporate into the design and bid. 

Acceptable manufacturer is FireLite. No other manufacturers will be considered. The 

installed fire alarm system and components shall meet Factory Mutual requirements and 

approval. 

B. Fire alarm control panel (FACP) shall be a non-coded, addressable, multiple zone unit with 

emergency battery back-up power supply. 

1. System shall be zoned as stated below or as indicated on the drawings. 

2. Panel shall be equipped to accomplish the functions described on the drawings and to meet 

the requirements of the governing authorities. 

3. Panel shall be equipped with telephone dial-out communicator. 

4. Panel shall include an amplifier and tape (or digital) backup system for automatic voice 

evacuation. The amplifier system shall have a single zone (minimum) or the quantity 

Cinemark 16400 - 1 Auxiliary Electrical Systems 


equired by the governing authorities. The pre-recorded message shall meet the 

requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 

5. System shall note have proprietary access or software codes. 

6. The fire alarm vender shall submit all passwords with the project shop drawing 

submittal and shall turn over all passwords to the owner upon completion of the 

installation (part of the closeout documents.). 

7. The contractor shall furnish and install a complete 24 VDC, FireLite MS9200UDL Series 

analog/addressable, multiprocessor-based fire alarm system as specified herein. The 

system shall include, but not be limited to; all control equipment, voice evacuation panel (with 

remote microphone), remote annunciator panel, analog sensors, addressable modules, 

audible and visual notification appliances as appropriate, conduit, wiring, fittings, and all other 

accessories necessary to provide a complete and operable system. 

8. Fire alarm cable is to be copper, stranded, in the wire guage required to meet the voltage 

drop requirements and the AHJ. Minimum wire size to be 14 ga. Jacket to be plenum rated 

and UL listed for fire alarm application. 

C. Peripheral Devices 

1. Manual pull stations shall be FireLite BG12LX Addressable Pull Station double action and 

shall be constructed of high impact, red lexan with raised white lettering. The break glass rod 

station shall have a hinged front with key lock. Stations shall be keyed alike with the fire 

alarm control panel. When the station is operated, the handle shall lock in a protruding 

manner to facilitate quick visual identification of the activated station. All pull stations 

accessible to the public shall be equipped with a Stopper II protective cover (as manufactured 

by Safety Technology International, Inc. 800-888-4784). When the protective cover is lifted, 

it sounds a piercing, self-contained 120 DB. 

2. Area Smoke Detectors 

a. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans, FireLite SD355 series area smoke 

detectors. Detectors shall be listed to U.L. standard 268 and shall be documented 

compatible with the control equipment to which it is connected. The detectors shall 

obtain their operating power from the fire alarm panel supervised detection loop. 

Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory circuit of the fire alarm 

detection loop and cause a trouble signal to be generated at the control panel. 

b. Remote LED alarm indicators and test switches shall be furnished and installed by 

the electrical contractor as required by the governing authorities and NFPA-90A. 

c. The detector to be addressable. 

d. furnish black covers for detectors located in black ceilings. 

3. Automatic Heat Detectors: Automatic heat detectors shall be combination rate-of-rise and 

fixed-temperature type. When the fixed-temperature portion is activated, the units shall be 

non-restorable and give visual evidence of such operation. Heat detectors shall be FIRELITE 

H355 (Addressable thermal sensor, Fixed Temperature or ATD-R, ATD-RL Addressable 

thermal sensor - Rate of Rise (or equal)). In projects with full detection, heat detectors shall 

be used in the concession stand in lieu of area smoke detectors. 

4. Visual Flashing lamps (Speaker / Strobes): Visual indicating appliances shall be Gentex 

SSPK and comprised of a Xenon flashtube and be entirely solid state. Strobes shall be wall 

mounted at 6" below the ceiling or 80" above the floor, which ever is lower. The strobes shall 

be intergral or separate from the speaker. The speaker shall have 8 OHM impedance, rated 

for 7 watts and with tap box for 25 volt or 70 volt system. Candela output shall vary to meet 

ADA and NFPA. Speaker strobes shall be red in color and shall fit on a standard 2-1/8” 

deep junction box. Max conduit size in auditoriums to be ½”. 

7. Door Holders: Magnetic door holders shall have an approximate holding force of 35 pounds. 

The door portion shall have a stainless steel pivotal mounted armature with shock absorbing 

nylon bearing. Unit shall be capable of being either surface, flush, semi-flush or floor 

mounted as required. Door holders shall be UL Listed for their intended purpose. Coordinate 

with the architect’s door hardware and scope. 

8. Duct Smoke Detectors: Furnished and installed as indicated on the drawings contractor in 

the supply and return ducts of all air moving equipment. 

a. Duct smoke detectors shall be non-addressable, analog interface with the solid state 

photoelectric type and shall operate on the light scattering photo diode principle. 



. The detectors shall be designed to ignore invisible airborne particles or smoke 

densities that are below the factory set alarm point. 

c. No radioactive materials shall be used. 

d. The remote indication and test switches shall be furnished and installed by the 

electrical contractor to satisfy all aspects of NFPA90A, including remote LED alarm 

indicators and test switches. 

e. The duct detectors shall be externally powered from the air moving equipment (24V 

from the fire alarm system). 

f. Analog, non-addressable duct smoke detectors shall be located (factory mounted) 

within the rooftop units. 

g. Global shut down of the RTUs upon fire alarm will be hardwired by the electrical 

contractor. 

h. The fire alarm vender shall test and certify the smoke detectors. 

9. Remote alarm digital annunciator shall indicate up to 16 zones. Each zone shall be clearly 

labeled. There shall also be a remote alarm LED indicator/key test switch at the 

annunciator. The annunciator and microphone shall be mounted behind a located cabinet 

(FCRM) with a glass cover. Equal to FIRELITE ANN-80. 

10. Two Line Dialer: The dialer shall automatically transmit to the Owner’s Central Monitoring 

Station any control panel off normal condition, including Alarm, Supervisory or trouble 

conditions. 

11. The fire alarm vender shall furnish and install dry contact shut down relays at each projector 

and at all A/V and multi-media servers. Programmable relay modules shall be FireLite CRF- 

300. Monitoring modules shall be MDF-300. 

12. Voice evac panel to be FireLite ACC2550DA. Contractor shall furnish additional ACCAAM50 

amplifier modules, quantity as required. 

D. The main annunciator panel for the project is proposed to be located as shown on the drawings. 

E. CENTRAL STATION CONNECTION: All fire protection systems in the project including all signaling 

devices will be connected into an approved 24 hour central station service. The dial-out signal shall 

be compatible with the monitoring service or the service designated by the Owner’s representative 

(verify with Theatre Owner prior to release of dial-out communicator). The dial-out communicator 

shall be compatible with the Theatre Owner’s ADT monitoring equipment. 

F. The shop drawing submittal shall include, but is not limited to: 

1. Equipment cut sheets. 

2. Floor plans on 'D' size sheets showing locations of all devices and conduit runs. 

3. Complete sequence of operation in all of the various modes, customized and specific to this 

project. 

4. Battery calculations. 

5. Fire Department approval. 

6. Email with all of the fire alarm shop drawings in AutoCad DWG format and all of the 

equipment cut sheets in PDF format. 

7. One-line riser diagram. 

8. Passwords 

Incomplete submittals shall be rejected. 

G. This performance specification calls for the contractor to provide a complete operating system that 

satisfies all Governing Authority’s (local Fire Marshall, Elevator Inspector, Electrical Inspector, 

Building Inspector, etc.) requirements. The requirements stated herein and on the drawings are the 

minimum requirements. The fire alarm contractor shall ascertain all requirements of the governing 

authorities and include such requirements in his bid. Under this performance specification, there 

will be no change orders for additional costs related to fire alarm issues. 

End of Specifications 



SECTION 16442 

SITE PANELBOARDS 





1.02 SUMMARY 


1. Distribution panelboards. 

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 





4. Section “Fuses”. 


A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. 

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. 

C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. 

D. RMS: Root mean square. 

E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient 

voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions 

and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, 

ratings, and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 

11020 PANELBOARDS 


1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of 

installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: 

a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 

b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 

c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 

C. Field quality-control test reports including the following: 

1. Test procedures used. 

2. Test results that comply with requirements. 

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that 

comply with requirements. 

D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after 

approval by Owner. 

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in 

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in 

Division 1 Section "Closeout Submittals," include the following: 

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective 

devices. 

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent 

protective device. 




Electrical Testing Association to perform final testing of equipment and systems. The 

Contractor is required to perfume pre-testing to ensure compliance with the specifications 

prior to turning over to the testing agency for final test. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and 

accessories through one source from a single manufacturer. 

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of 

panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section 

"Product Requirements." 

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the Owner, and marked for 

intended use. 



E. Comply with NEMA PB 1. 

F. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following 

conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m). 

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities 

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then 

only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements 

indicated: 

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two weeks in advance of proposed 

interruption of electrical service. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction 

Manager's written permission. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction 

that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of 

equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements. 

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for free standing panels. Cast anchor-bolt 

inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in 

Division 3. 




following: 

1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and 

Accessories: 

a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 

b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div. 

c. Square D. 



2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS 

A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1. 

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. 

a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

b. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 

c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 

d. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C. 

2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with door-in-door within 

hinged trim cover. 

3. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard 

front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 

4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment 

or primer coat. 

5. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside 

panelboard door. 

6. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 

B. Phase and Ground Buses: 

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground 

conductors; bonded to box. 

3. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit equipment ground 

conductors; insulated from box. 

C. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material. 

1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 

2. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type. 

3. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. 

Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 

D. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with 

main service disconnect switches. 

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances 

required for future installation of devices. 



2.03 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING 

A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals as shown on 

drawings. 

2.04 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 

A. Doors: Door-in-door, secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 

B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker. 

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt–on circuit breakers. 

2.05 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 

A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without 

disturbing adjacent units. 

B. Doors: Door-in-door with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; 

keyed alike. 

2.06 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault 

currents. 

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level 

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable 

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 

2. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through 

ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 

3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip 

sensitivity. 

B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip 

ratings, and number of poles. 

1. Lugs: Mechanical Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and 

conductor materials. 

2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching 

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and 

refrigerating equipment. 

3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable 

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 

4. Multiple units enclosed in a single housing or factory-assembled to operate as a 

single unit. 



2.07 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES 

A. Furnish accessory set including tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent 

protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. 



A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. 

B. Mount top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts 

uniformly flush with wall finish. 

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers. 

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 

F. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space 

or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty 

conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. 

G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. 

3.02 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide 

warning signs as specified in Section "Electrical Identification." 

B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with laminated-plastic nameplate 

mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. 


A. Ground equipment according to Section "Grounding and Bonding." 

B. Connect wiring according to Section "Conductors and Cables." 


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting 

supply, feeder, and control circuit. 

2. Test continuity of each circuit. 

B. Testing Agency: The Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to 

perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. The Contractor is responsible 



for coordinating the schedule of the testing agency to ensure no impact on the 

construction schedule. 

C. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final 

Acceptance, perform an infrared scanning of each panelboard. Remove panel fronts so 

joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of 

each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or 

to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for 

device. 

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies panelboards 

checked and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, 

remedial action taken and observations after remedial action. 

3.05 CLEANING 

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint 

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in 

cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. 




SECTION 16900 

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SYSTEMS (ATCS) 



A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, apply to the work specified in 

this Section. 





C. Section 15500. 

1.03 SCOPE 

A. The automatic temperature control system (ATCS) shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the 

drawings. 

B. The control components will be as hereinafter specified and scheduled. 

C. Any additional parts necessary to or incidental for a complete and operating system shall be the 

responsibility of the ATCS contractor. 

D. All air conditioning unit controls (except as noted), wiring and wiring terminations will be furnished and 

installed as shown on the drawings. 

E. The control devices internal to the rooftop unit will be installed by the ATCS vendor. 

F. Labor warranty for the temperature controls and wiring is to be furnished by the electrical Contractor 

for a period of one year. 

G. The ATCS vendor shall provide the following minimum services (see sheet MEP0.2 for additional 

information): 

1. The engineering, calibration, and software programming of the ATCS. 

2. The calibration and adjustment of all thermostats (and sensors), CO2 sensors, variable 

speed controllers (as applicable) and all other controlling devices. 

3. The low voltage ATCS wiring terminations. 

4. Place the control systems in satisfactory operating condition. 

5. Instruct the assigned operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of these 

controls. At the completion of the project, the ATCS control vender shall schedule and 

provide a 2 hour instruction period with the theatre manager and assistant manager. 

6. Furnish diagrammatic layouts of automatic control systems and a set of printed instructions to 

the Owner, for both operation and maintenance. 

7. Provide a set of AS-Built control diagrams at the completion of the project clearly showing 

any field changes to the original layout. 

I. All motorized dampers not integral with the rooftop units shall be furnished and installed as 

indicated on the Matrix of Responsibility. 

J. For the D/X split systems, the electrical contractor shall furnish and install the low voltage control 

wiring in accordance with the mechanical contractor’s requirements. The mechanical contractor shall 

furnish a compatible thermostat. 

K. The electrical contractor shall furnish and install all 120V wiring for the ATCS (allow a minimum of 

three circuits at three different locations). 

L. The electrical contractor shall furnish and install all conduits with pull strings. 

M. The ATCS vender shall furnish and install normally closed contactors in an enclosure for the control of 

Cinemark 

16900 - 1 Automatic Temperature Controls Systems (ATCS) 


fans and lights. The contractor is to install. 

N. The ATCS vender shall assist and coordinate pre-function checklist, startup and 

system functional testing with Commissioning Agent. Coordinate retesting as 

necessary until satisfactory performance is verified. 


A. The following data/information shall be submitted by the ATCS vendor for approval: 

1. Cut sheets on all furnished controls. 

2. Sequence of operation. 

3. Control drawings and sequences of operation. 

4. Provide as part of the submittal one reproducible vellum of all data and control drawings. 

5. Email all of the submittal drawings in AutoCAD DWG format. 

6. Email the product cut sheets in Adobe PDF format. 

B. The submittal drawings shall be 24"x36" or 11"x17" format, 1/8” scale. 

C. The submittal shall be project specific. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS : 

2.01 THERMOSTATS (Where Applicable) 

A. Thermostats shall be adjustable with night set back, with system malfunction lights. 

B. The thermostat shall communicate directly with the microprocessor in the rooftop unit and the remote 

sensor in the occupied space. 

C. Thermostats shall have tamper proof cover/controls. 

D. Thermostats for D/X split systems, furnaces, etc. shall be Honeywell T7300 series furnished by the 

mechanical contractor 

2.02 SENSORS 

A. Sensors shall have tamper proof covers when exposed to public access. 

B. Sensors shall not be adjustable. 

C. The sensor shall communicate directly with the thermostat. 

d. Sensor covers in auditoriums shall be black. 

2.03 Contactors 

A. Contactors shall be normally closed. 

B. Contactors shall be Square D L004V02 with 120V or 277v coils. 

C. The ATCS vender shall furnish and install the pilot relay in the contactor. 


3.01 CONTROL SEQUENCES: Refer to sheet MEP0.2. 


A. The subcontractor shall furnish a written warranty, countersigned and guaranteed by the General 

Contractor, stating all work executed under this section shall be free from defects of materials and 

workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. 


defective work, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the 

Cinemark 





Cinemark 



SECTION 16995 

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING 



A. The purpose of this section is to define Division 16 responsibilities in the commissioning process. 

B. Refer to Section 01810 and 15995 for additional commissioning requirements. 

C. Commissioning requires the participation of Division 16 to ensure that all systems are operating in 

a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning requirements and 

coordination are detailed in Division 1. Division 16 shall be familiar with all parts of Division 1 and 

Section 15 and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract 

Documents. 

D. With respect to commissioning, the Electrical contractors shall: 

1. Include cost for the commissioning requirements, as it pertains to this section, in the 

quoted price. 

2. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the Commissioning Agent. 

3. Schedule work so that required installations are completed, and systems verification 

checks and functional performance tests can be carried out on schedule. 

4. Inspect, check and confirm in writing the proper installation and performance of all 

electrical services provided. 

5. Provide electrical system technicians to assist during system verification and functional 

performance testing as required by the Commissioning Agent. 

6. Review specification Division 1 and 15 to fully understand their responsibilities as they 

pertain to the commissioning processes. 

1.02 RESPONSBILITIES 

A. Electrical Contractor: The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the electrical contractor 

are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only): 

Construction and Acceptance Phases 

1. Include the cost of commissioning in the contract price. 

2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, 

commissioning documentation, testing assistance, O&M data, training, etc. 

3. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary meetings to facilitate the 

Commissioning Agent process. Commissioning shall be discussed monthly, as a regular 

agenda item during the normal construction meetings, and minutes submitted to 


4. Contractors shall provide normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals to the 

Commissioning Agent of commissioned equipment. 

5. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual submittals, to 

the Commissioning Agent for development of start-up and functional testing procedures. 

a. Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, 

operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any 

Owner-contracted tests, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty 

information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in 

force clearly identified. In addition, the installation, start-up, and checkout sheet 

forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the 


b. The Commissioning Agent may request further documentation necessary for the 


c. This data request may be prior to normal submittals. 

6. Provide a copy of the O&M manual submittals of commissioned equipment, through 

normal channels, to the Commissioning Agent for review and approval. 

7. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the operation and 

control of commissioned equipment in areas where the Specifications, control drawings or 

equipment documentation are not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. 

8. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up procedures. 

Submit manufacturer’s detailed start-up procedures and the full start-up plan and 

Cinemark 16995 - 1 Electrical Systems Commissioning 


procedures and other requested equipment documentation to Commissioning Agent for 

review. 

9. During the start-up and initial checkout process, execute and documents the electricalrelated 

portions of the pre-functional checklists provided by the Commissioning Agent for 

all commissioned equipment. 

10. Perform and clearly document all completed start-up and system operational checkout 

procedures, providing a copy to the Commissioning Agent. 

11. Address current A/E punch list and Action List items before functional testing. 

12. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to assist in the functional 

performance tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed-upon 

schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and 

problem solving. 

13. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as 

interpreted by the Commissioning Agent and A/E and retest the equipment. 

14. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and 

updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions. 

15. During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and final CAD asbuilts 

for contractor-generated coordination drawings. Update after completion of 

commissioning. 

16. Provide training of the Owner’s operating personnel as specified. 

17. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain 

the validity of the warranty. 

Warranty Period 

1. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built 

drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing. 


A. Refer to Division 1, Part 1 for a listing of all sections where commissioning requirements are found. 

B. Refer to Division 1, Part 1 for systems to be commissioned and for functional testing requirements. 

1.04 COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS 

A. Refer to Commissioning Agent Plan. There are no specific systems which fall under electrical 

systems that are to be commissioned on this project, under LEED NC 2009, Functional 

Commissioning, but the electrical contractor is to be part of the Commissioning Agent team and is to 

assist the mechanical contractor in the total Commissioning Agent process. 


2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT 

A. Division 16 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this Division. 



A. Division 16 shall provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning as required in this 

Section Part 1, Division 1. 

B. The Commissioning Agent shall review all submittals. 

3.02 START-UP PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS AND INITIAL CHECKOUT 

A. The electrical contractors shall follow the start-up and initial checkout procedures listed in the 

Responsibilities list in this section and in Division 1. Divisions 15 and 16 has start-up responsibility 

and is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully functional, meeting the design 

objectives of the Contract Documents. The commissioning procedures and functional testing do not 

relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the Commissioning Agent or 

Owner. 

END OF SECTIOIN 16995 

Cinemark 16995 - 2 Electrical Systems Commissioning 


APPENDIX A – GEOTECH REPORT 



KIP # 165582

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT 

on 

PROPOSED SOUTH RIVER PLACE, PHASE 1 (CINEMARK THEATRE) 

Gasser Drive and Hartle Court 


for 

THE GASSER FOUNDATION 

By 

KC ENGINEERING COMPANY 

Project No. VV3200 

29 December 2010

Geotechnical Investigation South River Place, Gasser Drive, Napa 29 December 2010 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL 


Page No. 

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION...........................................................................................5 

Purpose and Scope ...............................................................................................................5 

Site Location and Description..............................................................................................5 

Proposed Development ........................................................................................................6 

Previous Investigation..........................................................................................................7 

Field Investigation ...............................................................................................................8 

Laboratory Investigation......................................................................................................8 

Subsurface Conditions .........................................................................................................9 

Site Geology.......................................................................................................................10 

Geo-Hazards ......................................................................................................................10 

DISCUSSION, CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS...............................................14 

General...............................................................................................................................14 

Geotechnical Considerations .............................................................................................14 

Grading ..............................................................................................................................16 

Surface Drainage................................................................................................................18 

Foundations........................................................................................................................20 

Slab-on-Grade Construction ..............................................................................................21 

Pavement Areas .................................................................................................................22 

Retaining Walls..................................................................................................................24 

General Construction Requirements..................................................................................24 

LIMITATIONS AND UNIFORMITY OF CONDITIONS ..........................................................26 

APPENDIX A 

Vicinity Map, Figure 1 

Aerial Photo, Figure 2 

Geologic Map, Figure 3 

Site Plan, Figure 4 

Logs of Test Borings, Figures 5 through 11 

Boring Log Legend 

Laboratory Test Results 

APPENDIX B - 2002 INVESTIGATION APPENDIX 

Site Plan 

Conceptual Site Plan 

Logs of Test Borings 1 to 8 

Test Pit Logs 


________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

KC ENGINEERING COMPANY Project No. VV3200 Page 3 of 123


________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

APPENDIX C – 2009 INVESTIGATION APPENDIX 

Site Plan, Figure 2 

Logs of Test Borings, Figures 4 through 11 


________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION 

Purpose and Scope 

The purpose of this geotechnical investigation report for the proposed South River Place Phase 1 

development located on Gasser Drive and Hartle Court in Napa, California, was to determine the 

surface and subsurface soil conditions at the subject site. Based on the results of the 

investigation, geotechnical criteria were established for the grading of the site, the design of 

foundations, pavement sections and the construction of other related facilities on the property. 

In accordance with our proposal dated 11 October 2010, our services included the following 

tasks: 

a. A review of available geotechnical and geologic literature concerning the site and 

vicinity, including the original Geotechnical Investigation Report by our firm 

dated 12 July 2002 and subsequent investigation by our firm in September 2009; 

b. Site reconnaissance by our Geotechnical Engineers to observe and map the 

existing surface conditions; 

c. Drilling of 7 exploratory borings to depths of 28.5 to 50 feet and sampling of the 

subsurface soils; 

d. Laboratory testing of the samples obtained to determine their classification and 

engineering characteristics; 

e. Analysis of the data and formulation of conclusions and recommendations; and 

f. Preparation of this written report. 

Site Location and Description 

The subject site consists of two irregular-shaped parcels of land on the west side of Gasser Drive in 

the City of Napa, California as shown on Figures 1 and 2, Vicinity Map and Aerial Photo in 

Appendix A. The largest parcel is located northwest of the intersection of Imola Avenue and 

Gasser Drive. This main parcel is bounded by Gasser Drive on the east, Imola Avenue and 

retention ponds on the south, a Napa Sanitation District Corporation Yard on the west and Hartle 

Court (new) on the north. The smaller parcel is located north of Hartle Court (new), between the 

animal shelter and the transitional housing project. Immediately north of Hartle Court (new) is a 

fire station, homeless shelter and a transitional housing development which is currently under 

construction. Hartle Court (old) runs through the middle of the parcel. As part of the transitional 

housing project, Hartle Court (new) is being extended to connect to the western segment in front of 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

the animal shelter. Once this is complete, Hartle Court (old) will be abandoned. In addition to the 

road improvements through the site, there are several underground utilities along the road alignment 

and also along the western property boundary. 

With the exception of a stockpile noted below, the topography of the site is relatively flat to gently 

sloping with localized elevation differentials as shown on Figure 4, Site Plan. It is our 

understanding that the site was filled over the years since the early 1950’s with dredge materials 

from the nearby Napa River. The site is currently vacant (except for the street and utility 

improvements noted above) and appears to have never been developed. However, it is noted that 

subsequent to our original investigation in 2002, a soil stockpile was placed on the site between the 

two Hartle Courts. The stockpile materials were imported from the Imola Street Bridge 

embankment material. The stockpile has recently been added to with excess materials from the 

transitional housing project. The stockpile is approximately 465 feet long, 215 feet wide and up to 

15 feet high as shown on Figure 4. Based on testing performed by our firm, the soil materials 

consist of brown to dark brown, moderately expansive sandy clay 1 . The soil materials were 

determined to be acceptable for use as general fill on the Gasser site, but not under proposed 

building foundations where conventional footings are used. The materials were also determined to 

be environmentally acceptable for use on the site. A smaller pile of soil and debris is located 

adjacent to the ponds. Vegetation on the site consists of volunteer grasses and weeds with a few 

trees around the ponds. 

The above description is based on a reconnaissance of the site by a Geotechnical Engineer, on a 

Scheme 17 Site Plan by LPAS Architects dated 14 October 2010 overlaid onto topographic data 

from Foulk, Gomez and Associates, an aerial photo from Google Earth, and the USGS 

Topographic Map of the Napa Quadrangle as obtained from the 3D TopoQuads program by 

DeLorme. The Scheme 17 Site Plan and topographic data are the basis for our Site Plan included 

as Figure 4 in Appendix A. 

Proposed Development 

Based on our review of the referenced site plan, we understand that Phase I of the South River 

Place development includes a new Cinemark Theater building of approximately 41,700 square 

feet, and four additional commercial office, retail or restaurant buildings noted as Retail 1, Retail 

2, Pad 1 and Pad 2 ranging in size from 2,400 to 9,000 square feet. Additional improvements 

will consist of constructing a plaza area, driveways, landscaping, underground utilities, concrete 

flatwork, parking lots and widening of Hartle Court (new). In addition, an overflow parking lot 

will be constructed north of Hartle Court (new). 

1 Letter titled Import Fill Evaluation, prepared by KC Engineering Company, dated 8 March 2005. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Based on our conversations with Mr. Don Harton of Cinemark, the theater building is anticipated 

to be constructed with masonry, concrete tilt-up panels and/or pre-cast exterior cladding. 

Structural steel columns and beams may also be utilized. Wall loads of 4 to 7 kips per square 

foot and column loads of 65 to 160 kips are anticipated. The interior slab floors of each 

auditorium will be placed at two elevations such that near the center of the building, the slabs 

will be at the same elevation of the lobby and then sloped down 3 to 5 feet along the exterior 

walls. 

The four additional structures are anticipated to one-story in height, except for Retail 2 which 

may be two-stories with retail below and office above. These structures will likely be 

constructed of conventional structural steel and wood framing and have slab-on-grade floors. 

Typical wall loads are anticipated. 

An asphalt concrete paved parking lot will be constructed on the southern end of the site and an 

additional parking lot will be added to the west of the transitional housing project. As noted 

above, Hartle Court will also be widened along the northern project frontage. Grading is 

expected to consist primarily of cuts and fills of up to 3 vertical feet or less, to achieve the design 

pad and subgrade levels, not including removal of the approximately 15-feet high stockpile. The 

exception is the southern portion between Hartle Court (old) and the pond which may require 

approximately 7 feet of fill to achieve the design grades. We understand that the existing 

stockpile and any other excess soil materials will be utilized as general fill to level the site. 

Previous Investigation 

We previously investigated the geotechnical conditions of the surface and subsurface soils of the 

entire Gasser South property and Supportive Housing Project, of which the subject site is part, 

and prepared the Reference 1 and 2 reports. We have included the Appendixes from the original 

(2002) and subsequent (2009) investigations within Appendix B and C of this report, 

respectively. Our original field investigation was performed on the 13 th and 14 th of May 2002 

and included a reconnaissance of the site and the drilling of 8 exploratory borings and the 

excavation of 14 test pits (See Appendix B for boring and test pit logs). Furthermore, the 

Supportive Housing field investigation was performed on 11 September 2009 and included a 

reconnaissance of the site and the drilling of 4 exploratory test borings (See Appendix C for 

boring logs). For informational purposes, we have shown the borings and test pits, on the new 

Site Plan, Figure 4 in Appendix A. 

Subsequent to our 2002 investigation, we performed laboratory testing on the imported stockpile 

materials discussed previously. Four samples were collected on 28 February 2005 from test pits 

at the Imola Bridge embankment. Environmental testing was performed by CLS Laboratories on 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

the samples for Benzene, Toluene, Ethylbenzene, and Xylene (BTEX) using EPA Test Method 

8015M and for CAM 17 Metals. The test results indicate all constituents tested are either nondetect 

or are below the Not To Exceed Gasser Site Reuse Criteria. In addition, the four samples 

were transported to our laboratory for classification testing consisting of grain size analysis and 

Atterberg Limits. Based on our testing, the stockpile soils consist of brown to dark brown, 

moderately expansive sandy clay. 

Field Investigation 

Our recent field investigation was performed on 17 and 18 December 2010 and included a 

reconnaissance of the site and the drilling of 7 additional exploratory test borings at the 

approximate locations shown on Figure No. 4, “Site Plan” included in Appendix A. The boring 

logs include approximate elevations based on a FGA Preliminary Grading Plan. 

The borings were drilled to depths of 28.5 to 50 feet below the existing ground surface 

(including stockpile). The drilling was performed with truck-mounted Mobile B24 drill rig using 

power-driven, four-inch diameter, continuous flight augers. Visual classifications were made 

from the auger cuttings and the samples in the field. As the drilling proceeded, relatively 

undisturbed tube samples were obtained by driving a 2.5-inch O.D., California split-tube sampler, 

containing thin brass liners into the boring bottom. Disturbed samples were obtained by driving a 

2-inch O.D., split-barrel sampler into the boring bottom in accordance with ASTM D1586. The 

sampler was driven into the in-situ soils under the impact of a 140 pound hammer having a free fall 

of 30 inches. The number of blows required to advance the sampler 12 inches into the soil were 

adjusted to the standard penetration resistance (N-Value). When the sampler was withdrawn from 

the boring bottom, the brass liners containing the relatively undisturbed samples were removed, 

examined for identification purposes, labeled and sealed to preserve the natural or in-situ moisture 

content. The samples were then transported to our laboratory for testing. Classifications made in 

the field were verified in the laboratory after further examination and testing. The stratification of 

the soils, descriptions, location of undisturbed soil samples and standard penetration resistance 

are shown on the respective “Logs of Test Borings” contained within Appendix A. 

Laboratory Investigation 

The laboratory testing program was directed towards providing sufficient information for the 

determination of the engineering characteristics of the site soils so that the recommendations 

outlined in this report could be formulated. The laboratory test results are presented on the 

respective “Logs of Test Borings” and data sheets in Appendix A. We have also reviewed the 

previous lab test results (included in Appendixes B and C) as part of this report. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Moisture content and dry density tests (ASTM D2937-94) were performed on representative 

relatively undisturbed soil samples in order to determine the consistency of the soil and the 

moisture variation throughout the explored soil profile. 

Ten sieve analysis tests (ASTM D422) and four Atterberg Limits tests (ASTM D4318) were 

performed on selected soil samples to assist in the identification and classification of the subsurface 

soils. In addition, the Atterberg Limits tests were used to estimate the expansion potential of the 

near surface soils. 

Two laboratory consolidation tests (ASTM D2435) were performed on samples of the underlying 

soil deposits to determine their compressibility. The results were used to estimate the potential 

settlement due to the proposed improvements. 

The strength parameters of the foundation soils were determined from four unconfined 

compression (ASTM D2166) and one direct shear (ASTM D3018) tests performed on selected 

relatively undisturbed soil samples. Standard field penetration resistances (N-Values) also assisted 

in the determination of strength and bearing capacity. The standard penetration resistance values 

are recorded on the respective “Logs of Test Borings”. 

Two bulk samples were also collected from the Retail 1 and 2 building pad areas and tested to 

evaluate the presence and concentration of water-soluble sulfate in accordance with California 

Test Method 417. These test results were used to identify the corrosion potential of the soils to 

at or below grade concrete. A discussion is presented in the foundation section of this report. 

Subsurface Soil Conditions 

Based on our field exploration and laboratory investigation, the surface and subsurface soil 

conditions are generally uniform across the site. As previously discussed, the central portion of 

the site between the two Hartle Courts, is covered with a variable-height stockpile of soil 

consisting of brown to red brown sandy clay extending to an elevation of approximately +15.0 to 

+28.5 feet. The soils below the stockpile generally consist of old dredge fill materials that 

extend down to an elevation of approximately +1.0 to +5.0 feet. The dredge fill material 

generally consists of loose to medium dense, fine to medium grained sands and stiff sandy clay 

and silt. Below the fill, the native materials consist of moderately to highly expansive, firm to 

very stiff, grey to grey/brown clay with variable amounts of sand to elevations of approximately 

-18 to -24 feet. The native clays are underlain by medium dense to very dense clayey gravel to 

gravelly sand. The laboratory test results indicate that the native clays encountered below the 

ground water level are over-consolidated to under-consolidated under the current loading 

conditions. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

The groundwater conditions are highly variable at the site. Groundwater was encountered in the 

recent borings at elevations ranging from -6.0 to +11.5 feet at the time of drilling. Groundwater 

levels during previous investigations ranged from elevations of 0 to +9.0. Fluctuations in the 

groundwater table will likely occur with variations in seasonal rainfall and fluctuations in the 

nearby retention basin, and the Napa River. 

A more thorough description and stratification of the soils encountered along with the results of 

the recent laboratory tests are presented on the respective “Logs of Test Borings” in Appendix A. 

The approximate locations of the recent borings are shown on Figure 4, “Site Plan.” 

Site Geology 

According to the Geologic Map of the Napa 7.5’ Quadrangle 2 , a portion of which is included as 

Figure 3 in the Appendix, the geologic deposits underlying the site consist of Holocene-aged 

Stream terraces. These terraces were deposited as point bar and overbank deposits along the 

Napa River. The deposits are composed of moderately-sorted clayey sand and sandy clay with 

gravel. The subsurface deposits encountered during our investigation generally correlate with 

previous mapping. 

Geo-Hazards 

Seismicity 

The site is not located within an Alquist-Priolo Earthquake Fault Zone 3 . There are no known 

active or inactive faults crossing the site as mapped and/or recognized by the State of California. 

Earthquake related ground shaking should be expected during the design life of the structures at 

the site. The California Geological Survey (CGS) has defined an active fault as one that has had 

surface displacement in the last 11,000 years, or has experienced earthquakes in recorded history. 

Based on our review of the Fault Activity Map of California 4 and the USGS Fault Database 5 , the 

nearest active faults are the West Napa, Green Valley, Cordelia, Rodgers Creek and Hunting 

Creek-Berryessa, located approximately 1.4 miles west, 5.1 miles east, 7.0 miles east, 11.8 miles 

southwest and 17.3 miles northeast of the site, respectively. 

2 Clahan, K.B., Wagner, D.L., Saucedo, G.J., Randolph-Loar, C.E., and Sowers, J.M., 2004, Geologic Map of the 

Napa 7.5’ Quadrangle, Napa County, California, California Geological Survey, Version 1.0 

3 Hart, E.W. and Bryant, W.A., 1997, Fault-Rupture Hazard Zones in California, Alquist-Priolo Earthquake Fault 

Zoning Act with Index to Earthquake Fault Zones Maps, California Department of Conservation, Division of Mines 

and Geology, Special Publication 42, Revised 1997, Supplements 1 and 2 added 1999. 

4 Jennings, Charles W., 1994, Fault Activity Map of California and Adjacent Areas, California Division of Mines 

and Geology Geologic Map Data Series, Map No. 6. 

5 U.S. Geological Survey and California Geological Survey, 2006, Quaternary Fault and Fold Database for the 

United States, accessed 9 March 2009, from USGS web site: http://earthquake.usgs.gov/regional/qfaults/. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Based on the Interactive Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Map on the CGS website 6 , the peak 

ground acceleration that has a 10% probability of exceedance in 50 years (475 year return 

period) is 0.46g (alluvium). Using hazard deaggregation as performed on the US Geological 

Survey website, the peak ground acceleration that has a 2% probability of exceedance in 50 years 

(2475 year return period) is 0.74g (firm rock). The major contributing fault for the site is the 

West Napa Fault with a 64% contribution. The next highest individual fault contribution is from 

the Green Valley/Cordelia Fault Zones with a 23% contribution. All other faults contribute 

approximately 2% or less to the seismic contribution. 

Structures at the site should be designed to withstand the anticipated ground accelerations. Based 

on our review of published maps and the probabilistic ground motion parameters from the CGS 

website, the following 2007 California Building Code earthquake design criteria are applicable for 

the site: 

Site Class: D 

Design Spectral Response Accelerations: S DS = 1.12 g; S D1 = 0.60 g 

Fault Rupture 

The site is not located within an Alquist-Priolo Earthquake Fault Zone. Based on our review of 

geologic maps, no known active or inactive faults cross or project toward the subject site. In 

addition, no evidence of active faulting was visible on the site during our site reconnaissance. 

Therefore, it is our opinion that there is no potential for fault-related surface rupture at the 

subject site. 

Landslides 

The subject site and immediate vicinity is relatively flat and therefore not subject to seismicallyinduced 

landslide hazards. 

Liquefaction 

Soil liquefaction is a phenomenon in which loose and saturated cohesionless soils are subject to a 

temporary, but essentially total loss of shear strength, due to pore pressure build-up under the 

reversing cyclic shear stresses associated with earthquakes. Soils typically found most 

susceptible to liquefaction are saturated and loose, fine to medium grained sand having a uniform 

particle range and less than 5% fines passing the No. 200 sieve. However, fine-grained soils 

6 U.S. Geological Survey and California Geological Survey, 2002, Interactive Probabilistic Seismic Hazards Map, 

accessed 9 March 2009, from the CGS website:http://redirect.conservation.ca.gov/cgs/rghm/pshamap/pshamain.html 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

with a liquid limit less than 37%, a plasticity index less than 12, and an in-situ moisture content 

that is greater than 0.85 times the liquid limit, are also vulnerable to liquefaction-like effects. 

According to Special Publication 117 by the Division of Mines and Geology, the assessment of 

hazards associated with potential liquefaction of soil deposits at a site must consider translational 

site instability (i.e. lateral spreading, etc.) and more localized hazards such as bearing failure and 

settlement. 

The data used for evaluating liquefaction potential of the subsurface soils consisted of the in-situ 

Standard Penetration Resistance values (N 1 ) 60 values, the unit weights, gradations, in-situ 

moisture contents, the groundwater level, and the location of the site to the nearest active fault 

and the predicted ground surface acceleration. The near surface fill materials consist of soft to 

stiff sandy clay, firm sandy silt, and loose to medium dense clayey and silty sands. The native 

soils below the fill consist predominately of stiff to very stiff sandy clay underlain by medium 

dense to very dense clayey and sandy gravel. However, discontinuous layers of clayey sand 

were encountered in Boring 3 between depths of 27 to 33 feet and in Boring 6 between depths of 

20 to 33 feet. The native clays beneath the site are generally considered to have a liquid limit 

greater than 37%, a plasticity index greater than 12 and an in-situ moisture content less than 0.85 

times the liquid limit. Therefore, the clayey soils that comprise a majority of the subsurface soils 

are not considered liquefiable. The medium dense to very dense gravels and sands encountered 

below the clays are sufficiently dense to preclude liquefaction. The discontinuous layers of 

medium dense native clayey sand encountered in Borings 3 and 6 have between 36.4 and 49.0 

percent fines. Due to the relative density and high fines content of these materials, it is our 

opinion that the liquefaction potential of the localized layers is low. 

However, loose to medium dense sand and firm silt layers were encountered in the fill in Borings 2 

through 5 that are either currently saturated or could potentially become saturated. A liquefaction 

analysis was performed using the recommended analysis methods of the NCEER report 7 . These 

layers were determined to be potentially liquefiable with factors of safety less than 1. The potential 

liquefaction induced total settlements were calculated for these layers 8 . The results indicate 

between 1.0 to 2.9 inches of total settlement may occur during a seismic event. Since these layers 

are non-uniform across the site, we estimate that the differential settlements may equal the total 

settlement values. In addition, due to the shallow nature of the potentially liquefiable materials, 

sand boils may occur. The identified potential for liquefaction induced settlements and sand boils 

can be mitigated by over-excavation and replacement as engineered fill or by in-situ densification as 

recommended in the following sections of the report. 

7 Youd, T. Leslie and Idriss, Izzat M., 1997, “Summary Report from the Proceedings of the NCEER Workshop on 

Evaluation of Liquefaction Resistance of Soils,” Technical Report NCEER 97-0022, December 31, 1997 

8 Zhang, G., Robertson, P.K., and Brachman, R.W.I., “Estimating Liquefaction Induced Ground Settlements from 

CPT for Level Ground” 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Settlement 

Our investigation of the site included an evaluation of consolidation settlement of the subsurface 

soil materials. The current and previous test borings and pits indicate that settlement of the near 

surface fill materials will occur if not mitigated prior to development. The anticipated settlement 

from the proposed fill material and weight of the structures is considered excessive. Therefore, 

the near-surface fill materials should be mitigated/densified prior to development to minimize 

total and differential settlements. The fill materials can be mitigated by removal and 

recompaction or by in-situ densification. 

In addition to the potential for settlement of the near surface existing fills, we evaluated the 

potential for settlement due to consolidation of the native subsurface clay soils. We performed 

two consolidation tests which revealed that the clayey materials in the vicinity of Borings 2 and 3 

are currently under-consolidated and subject to settlement. Our settlement analysis of the underconsolidated 

materials indicates that 0.5 to 1.2 inches of long-term total settlement may occur 

after the buildings are constructed. Differential settlement can be assumed to be one-half of the 

total settlement, or up to 0.6 inches. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

DISCUSSIONS, CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 

General 

From a geotechnical point of view, the proposed South River Place, Phase 1 (Cinemark Theatre) 

is feasible for construction on the subject site provided the recommendations presented in this 

report are incorporated into the project plans and specifications. 

The grading, foundation and ground improvement plans and calculations for the development 

must be reviewed by the Soil Engineer prior to contract bidding or submittal to governmental 

agencies to ensure that the geotechnical recommendations contained herein are properly 

incorporated and utilized in design. 

KC ENGINEERING CO., should be notified at least two working days prior to site clearing, 

grading, and/or foundation operations on the property. This will give the Soil Engineer ample 

time to discuss the problems that may be encountered in the field and coordinate the work with 

the contractor. 

Field observation and testing during the grading and/or foundation operations must be provided 

by representatives of KC ENGINEERING CO., to enable them to form an opinion regarding the 

adequacy of the site preparation, the acceptability of fill materials, and the extent to which the 

earthwork construction and the degree of compaction comply with the specification 

requirements. Any work related to the grading and/or foundation operations performed without 

the full knowledge and under the direct observation of the Soil Engineer will render the 

recommendations of this report invalid. This does not imply full-time observation. The degree 

of observation and frequency of testing services would depend on the construction methods and 

schedule, and the item of work. 

Geotechnical Considerations 

The primary geotechnical considerations are the potential for settlement of the surficial fills due 

to liquefaction and due to the weight of the proposed structure loading. In addition, the old fills 

were not placed as compacted engineered fill and are highly variable. The potential of 

consolidation and liquefaction induced settlement in the existing fill materials can be adequately 

mitigated by excavation and replacement as engineered fill by conventional earthwork grading 

techniques or by other in-place ground modification methods such as compaction grouting or the 

use of stone columns such as Geopiers. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

It is our opinion that the in-place ground improvement technique most suitable would be to 

construct stone columns or rammed aggregate piers (also known locally as Geopier soil 

reinforcement). Alternative ground improvement methods may be considered but must be 

provided to our firm for review and approval. Rammed aggregate piers are a method of 

densifying the soils by drilling pier holes and mechanically ramming well-graded aggregate into 

the holes in thin lifts. The high impact energy not only densifies the aggregate, but also 

prestrains and prestresses the surrounding soil laterally. This increases the soil’s ability to 

withstand higher vertical and lateral stresses. The rammed aggregate piers must be designed and 

constructed in accordance with the Geopier Foundation Company recommendations. Hole 

casing or alternative methods should be anticipated as was required on the adjacent Homeless 

Shelter site. The Geopier design will provide the project Structural Engineer with an increased 

allowable bearing capacity, a decreased differential settlement potential and the other foundation 

related criteria. If this option is selected, the Foundation Plans and Geopier design documents 

should be provided to us for review prior to construction. 

In addition, another geotechnical concern for the site is the presence of near-surface, low to 

highly expansive clays, the existing stockpile and fill soils beneath the site. The near surface soil 

is prone to heave and shrink movements with changes in moisture content and, consequently, 

must be carefully considered in the design of grading, foundations, drainage, and landscaping. 

The recommendations provided in the following sections will minimize the effects of the noted 

concerns. 

As previously discussed, the central portion of the site is covered by a variable height stockpile 

which is underlain by old dredge fills. Based on the nearby Hartle Court (new), transitional 

housing, homeless shelter and fire station improvement grades, we anticipate that the soils at the 

proposed pad grade (approximately elev. +15 ft.) will be variable ranging from sandy clay to silt 

and sand. Furthermore, portions of the stockpile may remain after cutting to the pad grade. 

Therefore, it is our opinion that commercial building structures may be satisfactorily supported 

on a deepened spread footing foundation system in conjunction with an interior concrete slab-ongrade 

floor provided that the fill materials are mitigated by grading as noted below, or by other 

approved ground densification methods. In addition, any additional import soils should meet the 

requirements as noted below. Specific recommendations for the spread footing foundation 

systems are given later under the heading Foundations. 

Groundwater was encountered at elevations ranging from -6.0 to +11.0 feet. The groundwater 

table is not expected to impact the future performance of the proposed buildings. However, any 

grading near or below these levels and any utilities below these elevations will likely encounter 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

groundwater and/or localized seepage zones. The mass grading and underground contractor 

should be made aware of these conditions so that appropriate dewatering methods can be 

employed. 

Grading 

It is recommended that grading for the proposed site be performed during the drier seasons to 

minimize potential compaction problems resulting from excessive moisture, perched water and 

ground seepage. Should grading be performed during the wetter months, delays may occur due to 

extensive processing and/or chemical modification (lime/cement treatment) may be required. The 

grading recommendations presented herein should be followed during the mass grading operations 

on the subject site. 

We anticipate that the proposed grading will consist of cuts and fills up to 7 vertical feet to achieve 

the design building pad and pavement subgrade elevations. However, as noted above, there will 

still be stockpile soils left at these grades and the soils will be non-uniform. In addition, the existing 

near surface materials consists of firm sandy clays and loose sands which require densification prior 

to foundation construction. The densification can be achieved through conventional grading 

techniques or by in-place methods such as stone columns or compaction grouting. 

The following recommendations are applicable to densification by conventional grading techniques. 

In areas where buildings are proposed and where Hartle Court will be widened, the old fill soils 

identified in the borings should be over-excavated to undisturbed native ground as observed and 

approved by the Soil Engineer. Based on the borings, excavations to elevations ranging from +1 

to +5 feet should be expected resulting in over-excavation depths of 5 to 11 feet (not including 

the stockpile). Localized dewatering of the excavations may be required by the contractor, 

especially near Borings 2 and 3. The excavation should extend a minimum of 5 feet laterally 

beyond the building footprint and the area replaced with engineered fill as noted below. We also 

note that debris may be encountered in the excavated fill that must be removed from the site. 

While we did not encounter any during this investigation, our experience on adjacent projects 

indicates there is a possibility of this condition. 

Based on our experience on the adjacent construction operations for Hartle Court, Transitional 

Housing, Homeless Shelter and Fire Station, the native clay soils that will be exposed will likely 

be soft, wet and unstable. Placement of fill on these materials with conventional earthmoving 

equipment will likely be difficult. Therefore, as we have performed on the adjacent sites, a 

stabilization layer should be anticipated by the contractor at the bottom of the excavations. The 

stabilization layer should consist of Tensar BX1200 (or approved equivalent) geogrid overlain by 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

an 18-inch thick layer of 6-inch minus crushed rock overlain by Mirafi 600x (or approved 

equivalent) geotextile followed by engineered fill placement. The requirement for stabilization 

and the method may be modified in the field by the Soil Engineer at the time of grading. 

In all other areas (non-building or parking lots), the upper 3 feet (minimum) of the subgrade 

should consist of engineered fill. Where over-excavation is required (north half of the site), the 

area should be excavated to a depth of 2 feet, the bottom 12 inches scarified and compacted inplace 

and the area replaced as engineered fill. The south half of the site will require more than 3 

feet of fill to achieve the design grades and therefore does not require over-excavation. 

Prior to site grading, the existing stockpile which covers a portion of the site must be removed. 

After removal of the existing stockpile, the surface of the areas to be graded will require stripping to 

remove vegetation and/or other deleterious materials. It is estimated that stripping depths of about 1 

to 2 inches may be necessary; however, the actual depth of stripping should be determined in the 

field by the Soil Engineer. Stripped material from the site may not be used as engineered fill but 

may be stockpiled and used later for landscaping purposes. Any existing undesirable items which 

do not meet the requirements of engineered fill (wood, concrete, buried pipes, septic tanks, etc…) 

should be excavated and removed from the site. 

As part of the Transitional Housing project currently under construction north of the site, Hartle 

Court (new) is being extended to connect to the western end of the road. Hartle Court (old) will 

then be abandoned. As part of the South River Place project, the abandoned road will be 

demolished. The road improvements (including curb/gutter/sidewalk) and any utilities which will 

not remain in service must be demolished and removed from the site. The exception is that the 

aggregate base, asphalt concrete and portland cement concrete may be crushed and used on the site 

as general fill. 

After stripping and over-excavation of the existing firm/loose fills, and prior to any additional fill 

placement, the upper 12 inches should be scarified, moisture conditioned as necessary and 

compacted to a minimum degree of relative compaction of 90% at 2 or more percent above 

optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557 Laboratory Test Procedure. Mitigation 

of wet/unstable soils is discussed above. After processing and compacting the upper 12 inches (or 

stabilization), the site may be brought to the desired finished grades by placing engineered fill in 

lifts of 8 inches in uncompacted thickness and compacting to a minimum relative compaction of 

90% at 2 or more percent over optimum in accordance with the aforementioned test procedure. 

All fill material should be approved by the Soil Engineer. The material should be a soil or soilrock 

mixture which is free from excessive organic matter or other deleterious substances. The 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

fill material should not contain rocks or lumps over 6 inches in greatest dimension and not more 

than 15% larger than 2-½ inches. All soils encountered during our investigation would be 

suitable for use as engineered fill when placed and compacted as recommended. 

Should import material be used to establish the proper grading for the proposed development, the 

import material should be approved by the Soil Engineer before it is brought to the site. 

Imported soils should meet the following requirements: 

a. Have an R-Value of not less than 25; 

b. Have a Plasticity Index not higher than 20; 

c. Not more than 15% passing the No. 200 sieve; 

d. No rocks larger than 6 inches in maximum size; 

Prior to compaction, each layer should be spread evenly and should be thoroughly blade mixed 

during the spreading to obtain uniformity of material in each layer. The fill should be brought to 

a water content that will permit proper compaction by either (a) aerating the material if it is too 

wet, or (b) spraying the material with water if it is too dry. Compaction should be performed by 

footed rollers or other types of approved compaction equipment and methods. Compaction 

equipment should be of such design that they will be able to compact the fill to the specified 

density. Rolling of each layer should be continuous over its entire area and the equipment 

should make sufficient trips to ensure that the required density has been obtained. No ponding or 

jetting is permitted. 

The standard test used to define maximum densities and optimum moisture content of all 

compaction work shall be the Laboratory Test procedure ASTM D1557 and field tests shall be 

expressed as a relative compaction in terms of the maximum dry density and optimum moisture 

content obtained in the laboratory by the foregoing standard procedure. Field density and 

moisture tests shall be made in each compacted layer by the Soil Engineer in accordance with 

Laboratory Test Procedure ASTM D6938, respectively. When footed rollers are used for 

compaction, the density and moisture tests shall be taken in the compacted material below the 

surface disturbed by the roller. When these tests indicate that the compaction requirements on 

any layer of fill, or portion thereof, has not been met, the particular layer, or portion thereof, shall 

be reworked until the compaction requirements have been met. 

Surface Drainage 

A very important factor affecting the performance of structures is the proper design, 

implementation, and maintenance of surface drainage. Ponded water will cause swelling and/or 

loss of soil strength and may also seep under structures. Should surface water be allowed to seep 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

under the structures, differential foundation movement resulting in structural damage and/or 

standing water under the slab will occur. This may cause dampness to the floor which may result 

in mildew, staining, and/or warping of floor coverings. To minimize the potential for the above 

problems, the following surface drainage measures are recommended and must be maintained by 

the property owner in perpetuity: 

a) Liberal building pad slopes and drainage must be provided by the project Civil Engineer 

to remove all storm water from the pad and to prevent storm and/or irrigation water from 

ponding adjacent to the structure foundation or other improvements. The finished pad 

grade around the structures should be compacted and sloped away from the exterior 

foundations and as required in Section 1803.3 of the 2007 CBC. 

b) Enclosed or trapped planter areas adjacent to the structure foundation should be avoided 

if possible. Where enclosed planter areas are constructed, these areas must be provided 

with adequate measures to drain surface water (irrigation and rainfall) away from the 

foundation. Positive surface gradients and/or controlled drainage area inlets should be 

provided. Care should be taken to adequately slope surface grades away from the 

structure foundation and into area inlets. Drainage area inlets should be piped to a 

suitable discharge facility. 

c) Roof drains should be connected to a closed pipe system to carry storm water away from 

the structures and graded areas. In doing this, the possibility of soil saturation adjacent to 

the foundation and engineered fills is reduced. Downspout water may be allowed to 

discharge directly onto hardscape surfaces provided positive drainage is maintained. 

d) Site drainage should be designed by the project Civil Engineer. Civil engineering, 

hydraulic engineering, and surveying expertise is necessary to design proper surface 

drainage to assure that the flow of water is directed away from the foundations. 

e) Over-irrigation of plants is a common source of water migrating beneath a structure. 

Consequently, the amount of irrigation should not be any more than the amount necessary 

to support growth of the plants. Foliage requiring little irrigation (drip system) is 

recommended for the areas immediately adjacent to the structure. 

f) Landscape mounds or concrete flatwork should not be constructed to block or obstruct 

the surface drainage paths. The Landscape Architect or other landscaper should be made 

aware of these landscaping recommendations and should implement them as designed. 

The surface drainage facilities should be constructed by the contractor as designed by the 

Civil Engineer. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Foundations 

Based on our field and laboratory investigation, the subsurface soils have the potential for 

settlement due to seismically induced liquefaction and consolidation of the subsurface soils as 

identified above. As stated above, the liquefaction and consolidation hazards must be mitigated by 

over-excavation and recompaction of the old fill soils or by in-situ densification. In addition, the 

site’s near surface foundation soils are considered to have a low to high expansion potential and 

susceptible to potential differential movements due to variations in moisture content. Therefore, 

provided the building pads are graded as recommended above, the buildings may be satisfactorily 

supported on a deepened, interconnected spread footing foundation system in conjunction with 

interior slabs-on-grade. Recommendations for the spread footing foundation system where 

densification by conventional grading techniques is performed are presented below. If in-place 

densification is performed, the foundation criteria should be provided by the densification designer. 

Spread footings should extend to a minimum depth of 30 inches below lowest adjacent pad grade 

(i.e., trenching depth). At this depth, the recommended design bearing pressure should not 

exceed 2,000 p.s.f. due to dead plus sustained live loads. The above allowable pressure may be 

increased by 1/3 due to all loads which include wind and seismic. Isolated footings are not 

recommended. All footings must be interconnected with continuous footings or tie-beams. All 

foundations must be adequately reinforced to provide structural continuity and resist the 

anticipated loads as determined by the project Structural Engineer. However, continuous 

footings are to be reinforced with a minimum of 4 No. 5 bars, 2 at the top and 2 near the bottom 

of the footing. Additional reinforcement will be as required by the structural engineer and in 

accordance with structural building code requirements. Foundations designed in accordance 

with the above criteria should be expected to experience a total settlement of 1 inch and a 

differential of ½ inch. 

To accommodate lateral building loads, the passive resistance of the foundation soil can be 

utilized. The passive soil pressures can be assumed to act against the front face of the footing 

below a depth of 1 foot below the ground surface. It is recommended that a passive pressure 

equivalent to that of a fluid weighing 250 p.c.f. be used. For design purposes, an allowable 

friction coefficient of 0.30 can be assumed at the base of the spread footings. 

Two bag samples of the near surface soils on Retail 1 and 2 pads were collected and transported 

to Sunland Analytical in Rancho Cordova for testing of water soluble sulfates in accordance with 

California Test Method 417. The testing indicates a sulfate content ranging from 32.3 to 124.0 

ppm (mg/kg) for the samples collected. Based on exposure conditions as identified in Table 19- 

A-4 of the California Building Code, the building site is classified as “Negligible” which 

requires no special provisions for cement type, concrete strength, or water/cement ratio. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Slab-on-Grade Construction 

Interior slabs utilized in conjunction with spread footings and exterior slabs-on-grade should be 

constructed in accordance with the following recommendations: 

a) All areas to receive slabs should be wetted to seal any desiccation or shrinkage cracks 

prior to placing the underslab components. This work should be done under the 

observation of the Soil Engineer. 

b) Slabs should be underlain by a minimum of 4 inches of ¾” Caltrans Class II 

Aggregate Base placed and compacted between the finished subgrade and the slabs to 

serve as subbase support. 

c) Slabs should be a minimum of 5 inches thick and be reinforced with a minimum of 

No. 4 bars spaced 16 inches center to center, each way. The actual slab thickness and 

reinforcement should be determined by the project structural engineer in accordance 

with the structural requirements. The reinforcement shall be placed in the center of 

the slab unless otherwise designated by the design engineer. Thickened edges should 

also be constructed adjacent to landscape areas such that the slab rests on grade. 

d) A vapor barrier membrane should be installed between the subgrade and the slab to 

minimize moisture condensation under floor coverings and/or upward vapor 

transmission. The vapor barrier membrane should be a minimum 10-mil extruded 

polyolefin plastic that complies with ASTM E1745 Class A and have a permeance of 

less than 0.01 perms per ASTM E96 or ASTM F1249. It is noted that polyethylene 

films (visqueen) do not meet these specifications. The vapor barrier must be 

adequately lapped and taped/sealed at penetrations and seams in accordance with 

ASTM E1643 and the manufacturer’s specifications. The vapor retarder must be 

placed continuously across the slab area, including closure strips. Therefore, the 

membrane must extend beyond the closure strip contact to allow for adequate lapping 

and sealing of the seam. 

To prevent excessive moisture migration through the slab, and minimize the 

occurrence of shrinkage cracking and slab curling, it is recommended that all slab-ongrade 

concrete be placed with a maximum water to cement ratio of 0.5 and be 

appropriately cured. In addition, the slab should not be subjected to rainfall or 

cleaning water prior to placement of the floor coverings. Floor moisture emission 

testing may also be required prior to placement of moisture sensitive floor coverings. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

e) If it is desired to place a granular cushion between the vapor retarder and the slab, it 

should be 2 inches thick and meet the following specifications. The cushion material 

as recommended in ACI 302.1R may be an unwashed size No. 10 material per ASTM 

D 448. This material should meet a gradation of 100% passing 3/8”, 85 to 100% 

passing No. 4, 10 to 30% passing No. 100, and 0 to 5% passing No. 200. It is noted 

that clean sand does not meet the ACI requirements. Alternative materials must be 

approved by the Soils Engineer prior to use. The cushion material should be dry to 

slightly damp at the time of concrete placement. 

f) Interior and exterior slabs should be provided with crack control saw cut joints or tool 

joints to allow for expansion and contraction of the concrete. The type and layout of 

the joints should be determined by the project Structural Engineer and Architect. 

Pavement Areas 

The driveways and parking areas will be paved with asphalt concrete (AC) and/or portland cement 

concrete (PCC) surfaces. Recommendations for both pavement surfaces are presented below. We 

emphasize that the performance of the pavement is critically dependent upon adequate and uniform 

compaction of the subgrade soils, as well as engineered fill and utility trench backfill within the 

limits of pavements. Pavements will typically have poor performance and shorter life where water 

is allowed to migrate into the aggregate base and subgrade soils. The main source of water into 

pavement materials is landscape planters constructed within or adjacent to pavement areas. Where 

this is planned, it is suggested to extend the curbs into the soil subgrade at least 2 inches. The 

construction of all pavements should conform to the requirements set forth by the latest Standard 

Specifications of the Department of Transportation of the State of California (Caltrans) and/or the 

City of Napa. 

R-Value: A bulk sample of the near-surface soils was obtained during our previous investigation 

that is representative of the anticipated subgrade soils. The sample was tested in accordance with 

California Test Method 301 to determine the applicable R-Value for the site. An R-Value of 18 was 

determined for the site. However, to account for some variability in the materials and to ensure 

long-term performance, we recommend a design R-Value of 15. 

Preparation of Subgrade: After underground utilities have been placed in the areas to receive 

pavement and removal of excess material has been completed, the upper 8 inches of the subgrade 

soil shall be scarified, moisture conditioned and compacted to a minimum relative compaction of 

95% at an above optimum moisture content in accordance with the grading recommendations 

specified in this report. Prior to placement of aggregate baserock, it is recommended that the 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

subgrade be proof rolled and observed for deflection by the Soils Engineer. Should 

deflection/pumping conditions be encountered, supplemental recommendations will be provided. 

It is noted that the near surface soils that will comprise the subgrade are considered moderately 

to highly expansive or “active” per the City of Napa Standards (July 2008). According to the 

City Standards, roads within the City right-of-way that have “active” subgrade soils will require 

mitigation. Therefore, we recommended to over-excavate the active soils a depth of 6 inches, a 

stabilization fabric such as a Mirafi 500X or equivalent be placed at the bottom, and the area 

replaced with additional aggregate base rock. As an alternative, if it is desired to mitigate the 

soils by chemical treatment, additional testing will be needed to determine the type of treatment 

(lime and/or cement), depth of treatment and percent of product required. 

Aggregate Base: All aggregate base material placed subsequently should also be compacted to a 

minimum relative compaction of 95% based on the ASTM Test Procedure D1557. The 

recommended aggregate base thicknesses for asphalt pavements are noted in the table below. The 

minimum aggregate base thickness for portland cement concrete pavements is 6 compacted inches. 

Asphalt Concrete: Based on the design R-Value of 15, and a range of traffic indices typical for a 

mixed developments, the recommended pavement sections for asphalt concrete surfaces are 

summarized in the table below. The appropriate traffic index (TI) should be determined by the 

project Civil Engineer or City of Napa Standards. 

Traffic Condition 

Traffic Index 

(TI) 

Asphalt Concrete 

(inches) 

Class II Aggregate Base 1 

(inches) 

On-Site Pavements 

Parking Stalls 4.5 2.5 8.5 

Driveways 6.0 3.0 12.5 

City Pavements 

Hartle Court 7.0 4.0 19.0 2 

NOTES: 

(1) Minimum R-Value = 78 

(2) Includes additional aggregate base for mitigation of active soils 

(3) All layers in compacted thickness to CalTrans Standard Specifications. 

Portland Cement Concrete: Where PCC pavement areas are utilized, the concrete should be poured 

on the compacted aggregate base layer described above. The concrete should be a minimum of 6 

inches thick and reinforced with a minimum of No.4 rebar spaced at 16 inches on center, each way. 

Additional reinforcement may be required by the Structural Engineer. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Retaining Walls 

If retaining walls are required the following design parameters should be utilized in the design 

and construction of the proposed walls. Retaining walls should be founded on spread footings as 

noted above under the Foundation section. It is noted that drainage of any below grade 

structures, such as elevator pits, should be provided. We recommend that all below grade walls 

be water-proofed as recommended by a specialist. The walls should be designed to resist lateral 

pressures of 45 p.c.f. for active conditions and 60 p.c.f. for at-rest conditions, and a passive 

resistance of 250 p.c.f., expressed as an equivalent fluid weight. Active conditions occur when 

the top of the wall is free to move outward. At-rest conditions apply when the top of the wall is 

restrained from any movement. A coefficient of friction for sliding resistance of 0.30 may be 

used. It should be noted that the effects of any surcharge or compaction loads behind the walls 

2 

must be accounted for in the design of the walls. In addition, an earthquake load of 8H applied 

at 0.6H , where H = wall height, from the bottom of the wall is applicable. The design should 

be submitted to the Soil Engineer for review. 

The above criteria are based on fully drained conditions. Where fully drained conditions cannot 

be achieved, the walls should be designed to account for the additional weight of water. In order 

to achieve fully-drained conditions, a drainage filter blanket should be placed behind the wall. 

The blanket should be a minimum of 12 inches thick and should extend the full height of the wall 

to within 12 inches of the surface. If the excavated area behind the wall exceeds 12 inches, the 

entire excavated space behind the 12-inch blanket should consist of compacted engineered fill or 

blanket material. The drainage blanket material may consist of either granular crushed rock with 

drain pipe fully encapsulated in geotextile filter fabric or Class II permeable material that meets 

CalTrans Specification, Section 68, with drainage pipe, and optional fabric. A 4-inch perforated 

drain pipe should be installed in the bottom of the drainage blanket and should be underlain by at 

least 4 inches of filter type material. A 12-inch cap of native soil material should be placed over 

the drainage blanket. Piping with adequate gradient shall be provided to discharge water that 

collects behind the walls to an adequately controlled discharge system away from the structure 

foundations. 

General Construction Requirements 

Utility trenches extending underneath all traffic areas must be backfilled with native or approved 

import material and compacted to relative compaction of 90% to within 6 inches of the subgrade. 

The upper 6 inches should be compacted to 95% relative compaction in accordance with 

Laboratory Test Procedure ASTM D1557-91. Backfilling and compaction of these trenches 

must meet the requirements set forth by the City of Napa, Department of Public Works. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Applicable safety standards require that trenches in excess of 5 feet must be properly shored or 

that the walls of the trench slope back to provide safety for installation of lines. If trench wall 

sloping is performed, the inclination should vary with the soil type and applicable OSHA Safety 

Standards. 

With respect to state-of-the-art construction or local requirements, utility lines are generally 

bedded with granular materials. These materials can convey surface or subsurface water beneath 

the structures. It is, therefore, recommended that all utility trenches which possess the potential 

to transport water be sealed with a compacted impervious cohesive soil material or lean concrete 

where the trench enters/exits the building perimeter. This impervious seal should extend a 

minimum of 2 feet away from the building perimeter. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

LIMITATIONS AND UNIFORMITY OF CONDITIONS 

1. It should be noted that it is the responsibility of the owner or his representative to notify 

KC ENGINEERING CO., in writing, a minimum of two working days before any clearing, 

grading, or foundation excavation operations can commence at the site. 

2. The recommendations of this report are based upon the assumption that the soil 

conditions do not deviate from those disclosed in the borings and from a reconnaissance of the 

site. Should any variations or undesirable conditions be encountered during the development of 

the site, KC ENGINEERING CO., will provide supplemental recommendations as dictated by 

the field conditions. 

3. This report is issued with the understanding that it is the responsibility of the owner, or 

his representative, to ensure that the information and recommendations contained herein are 

brought to the attention of the Architect and Engineer for the project and incorporated into the 

plans and that the necessary steps are taken to see that the Contractor and Subcontractors carry 

out such recommendations in the field. 

4. At the present date, the findings of this report are valid for the property investigated. 

With the passage of time, significant changes in the conditions of a property can occur due to 

natural processes or works of man on this or adjacent properties. In addition, legislation or the 

broadening of knowledge may result in changes in applicable standards. Changes outside of our 

control may render this report invalid, wholly or partially. Therefore, this report should not be 

considered valid after a period of two (2) years without our review, nor should it be used, or is it 

applicable, for any properties other than those investigated. 

5. Not withstanding, all the foregoing applicable codes must be adhered to at all times. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 


APPENDIX A 

Vicinity Map 

Aerial Photo 

Geologic Map 

Site Plan 

Log of Test Borings 

Boring Log Legend 

Laboratory Test Results

N 

Project Site 


865 Cotting Lane, Suite A 

Vacaville, CA 95688 

(707) 447-4025 


South River Place, Phase 1 (Cinemark) 



FIGURE NO. 1 - VICINITY MAP

N 

Project Site Project Site 




(707) 447-4025 





FIGURE NO. 2 – AERIAL PHOTO

N 

Not to Scale 

Project Site 

PARTIAL LEGEND 

Clahan, Kevin B., Wagner, David L., Saucedo, George J., Randolph-Loar, Carolyn E. and Sowers, Janet M., 2004 

Geologic Map of the Napa 7.5’ Quadrangle, Napa County, California: A digital database, California Geological Survey, 

Version 1.0 dated 2004 




(707) 447-4025 





FIGURE NO. 3 – GEOLOGIC MAP

LOG OF TEST BORING 

BORING NO.: 1 

PROJECT: South River Place, Phase 1 

PROJECT NO.: VV3200 

CLIENT: The Gasser Foundation DATE: 17 November 2010 

LOCATION: Gasser Dr and Hartle Ct, Napa ELEVATION: 26.0 

DRILLER: Ram Geotechnical Drilling 

LOGGED BY: JSP 

DRILL RIG: Mobile B-24 

BORING DIAMETER: 4 inch 

DEPTH TO WATER: INITIAL : 32 ft. FINAL : AFTER: hrs. 

ELEVATION (Feet) 

DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 

GEOTECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 

AND 

CLASSIFICATION 

SOIL CLASSIFICATION 

CONVERTED SPT BLOW 

COUNT (BLOWS/FT.) 

DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 

MOISTURE CONTENT 

(PERCENT) 

ADDITIONAL TESTS AND REMARKS 

(LL, PI, UCC, ø&c, Gradation) 

25 

0 

Brown sandy CLAY with gravel; damp (STOCKPILE) 

CL 

5 

20 

10 

15 

Grey Brown fine sandy lean CLAY; moist, stiff (FILL) 

CL 

15 

10 

1-1a 

----concrete fragment in fill 

20 

1-1b 

----with minor organics 

13 

77.7 

41.1 

UCC=1077 psf 

5 

----grades very moist 

Grey CLAY; minor organics; damp, very stiff (NATIVE) 

CH 

25 

1-2 

23 

86.6 

33.8 

0 

This information pertains only to this boring and is not necessarily indicitive of the whole site. 

KC ENGINEERING CO. Figure 5


BORING NO.: 1 









DEPTH TO WATER: INITIAL : 32 ft. FINAL : AFTER: hrs. 


DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



Mottled Grey and Red Brown CLAY; damp, very stiff 

CL 

30 

1-3 

18 

85.2 

35.5 

-5 

----Grades with fine sand 

35 

1-4 

----6 inch lens of gravel and sand 

30 

- 

- 

-10 

40 

1-5 

Mottled Grey with Red sandy CLAY with gravel; wet, stiff 

CL 

9 

- 

- 

%Gravel=3.0 

%Sand=39.2 

%


BORING NO.: 2 









DEPTH TO WATER: INITIAL : 22.5 ft. FINAL : AFTER: hrs. 


DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Red Brown sandy CLAY with gravel; damp (STOCKPILE) 

CL 

25 

5 

20 

10 

15 

15 

2-1 

Red Brown clayey SAND; slightly damp, 

dense(STOCKPILE) 

SC 

42 

110.9 

9.5 

Red Brown clayey fine SAND; dry, medium dense (FILL) 

SC 

10 

20 

2-2 

Dark Grey sandy SILT with organics; wet, firm (FILL) 

ML 

16 

102.1 

14.8 

LL=28%, PI=4 

5 

25 

2-3a 

2-3b 

Dark Grey CLAY; wet, firm (NATIVE) 

CH 

5 

- 

68.8 

- 

47.0 

%Sand=49.1 

%


BORING NO.: 2 











DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

30 

2-4 

CH 

27 

93.5 

30.2 

-5 

2-5 

Dark Red Brown and Grey sandy CLAY; wet, stiff 

CL 

11 

- 

- 

%


BORING NO.: 3 











DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Red Brown sandy CLAY with gravel; slightly damp, very 

stiff (STOCKPILE) 

CL 

15 

5 

3-1 

Dark Grey clayey SAND; damp, loose (FILL) 

SC 

50+ 

119.8 

10.7 

10 

10 

3-2 

8 

108.3 

14.8 

5 

15 

3-3a 

3-3b 

Grey CLAY with sand; wet, firm (NATIVE) 

CH 

5 

- 

72.8 

- 

46.0 

LL=32% 

PI=11 

%Sand=73.0 

%


BORING NO.: 3 











DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



-10 

3-6 

SC 

6 

- 

- 

%


BORING NO.: 4 











DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



15 

0 

Red Brown sandy CLAY; damp, very stiff (FILL) 

CL 

4-1 

21 

93.2 

27.1 

LL=40% 

PI=19 

10 

5 

Red Brown clayey SAND; damp, loose (FILL) 

SC 

4-2 

3 

- 

- 

5 

10 

Dark Grey CLAY; moist to wet, stiff (NATIVE) 

CH 

4-3 

12 

- 

- 

0 

15 

4-4 

Mottled Dark Red and Grey CLAY; wet, stiff 

CL- 

CH 

9 

- 

- 

-5 

20 

4-5 

Red Brown and Grey sandy CLAY; wet, firm 

CL 

6 

- 

- 

%


BORING NO.: 4 











DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



-15 

30 

4-6 

12 

- 

- 

-20 

35 

Red Brown clayey GRAVEL; wet, very dense 

GC 

4-7 

63 

- 

- 

-25 

40 

Boring terminated at 40 feet 

-30 

45 

-35 

50 

-40 

55 




BORING NO.: 5 











DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Dark Brown sandy CLAY with gravel; moist, firm (FILL) 

CL 

Bag A, 1-3' 

Sulfates=124.0ppm 

10 

5-1 

Red Brown clayey SAND with gravel; damp, loose (FILL) 

SC 

8 

89.0 

27.6 

5 

Red Brown sandy CLAY; moist, firm (FILL) 

CL 

5 

5-2a 

5-2b 

Grey sandy lean CLAY; moist, firm (FILL) 

CL 

5 

- 

87.7 

- 

33.2 

UCC=626 psf 

10 

Mottled Grey with Red Brown CLAY; damp, very stiff 

(NATIVE) 

CH 

0 

5-3 

23 

84.1 

36.0 

15 

----Grades with gravel 

-5 

5-4a 

5-4b 

Grey clayey GRAVEL with sand; wet, dense 

GC 

40 

- 

- 

- 

- 

20 

-10 

5-5 

37 

- 

- 

25 

Grey sandy GRAVEL with clay; wet, medium dense 

GP 




BORING NO.: 5 











DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



-15 

30 

5-6 

29 - - 

-20 

35 

-25 


40 

-30 

45 

-35 

50 

-40 

55 




BORING NO.: 6 











DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Dark Brown CLAY with sand; damp, stiff (FILL) 

CL- 

CH 

Bag B, 1-3' 

Sulfates=32.3ppm 

5 

5 

6-1 

Red with Grey sandy CLAY; slightly damp, very stiff 

(FILL) 

CH 

18 

84.8 

25.8 

LL=53% 

PI=27 

UCC=5,850 psf 

0 

6-2 

Mottled Grey with Red CLAY; damp, very stiff (NATIVE) 

CH 

16 

- 

- 

10 

-5 

6-3 

22 

83.9 

34.1 

15 

----Grades with trace fine sand 

-10 

6-4 

18 

90.3 

31.3 

20 

Mottled Grey with Red clayey SAND with some gravel; 

wet, medium dense 

SC 

-15 

6-5 

11 

95.2 

27.3 

%


BORING NO.: 6 











DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



-20 

30 

6-6 

15 

- 

- 

-25 

Grey clayey GRAVEL; wet, dense 

GC 

35 

-30 

6-7 

Red Brown sandy CLAY; wet, stiff 

CL 

15 

- 

- 

40 

Grey sandy GRAVEL with clay; wet, very dense 

GP 

-35 

45 

-40 


50 

-45 

55 




BORING NO.: 7 











DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Mottled Red and Grey sandy lean CLAY; damp, stiff 

(FILL) 

CL 

5 

7-1 

8 

76.5 

35.7 

φ=45° 

c=0 

5 

Dark Grey with Red mottling CLAY; damp, very stiff 

(NATIVE) 

CH 

0 

7-2 

18 

84.3 

37.1 

10 

----As above, wet 

-5 

7-3 

16 

79.0 

39.5 

15 

Dark Grey sandy CLAY; wet, stiff to very stiff 

CL 

-10 

7-4 

15 

84.8 

35.7 

20 

-15 

7-5 

11 

- 

- 

%


BORING NO.: 7 











DEPTH (Feet) 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



-20 

Boring terminated at 28.5 feet 

30 

-25 

35 

-30 

40 

-35 

45 

-40 

50 

-45 

55 



UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM 

MAJOR DIVISIONS SYMBOLS TYPICAL NAMES 

GW 

COARSE GRAINED SOILS 

More than half of material is larger than 

No. 200 Sieve 

FINE GRAINED SOILS 

More than half of material is 

smaller than No. 200 Sieve 

GRAVELS 

More than half 

of coarse 

fraction is 

larger than 

No. 4 sieve 

SANDS 

More than half 

of coarse 

fraction is 

smaller than 

No. 4 sieve 

Clean gravels 

(12% fines) 

Clean sands 

(12% fines) 

SILTS AND CLAYS 

Liquid Limit is less than 50% 

SILTS AND CLAYS 

Liquid Limit is more than 50% 

HIGHLY ORGANIC SOILS 

GP 

GM 

GC 

SW 

SP 

SM 

SC 

ML 

CL 

OL 

MH 

CH 

OH 

Pt 

Well graded gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, little 

or no fines (Cu>4 & 130 

1 – Number of blows of 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches to drive a 2-inch O.D. split spoon sampler (ASTM D1586) 

2 – Unconfined compressive strength in lb/ft 2 as determined by lab testing or approximated by the standard penetration test (ASTM D1586) or pocket penetrometer. 

WEATHERING (Bedrock) 

Fresh 

Slightly 

weathered 

Moderately 

weathered 

Highly 

weathered 

Completely 

weathered 

No visible sign of decomposition or discoloration; rings under 

hammer impact 

Slight discoloration inwards from open fractures; little or no 

effect on normal cementation; otherwise similar to Fresh 

Discoloration throughout; weaker minerals decomposed; 

strength somewhat less than fresh rock but cores can not be 

broken by hand or scraped with knife; texture preserved; 

cementation little to not affected; fractures may contain filling 

Most minerals somewhat decomposed; specimens can be 

broken by hand with effort or shaved with knife; texture 

becoming indistinct but fabric preserved; faint fractures 

Minerals decomposed to soil but fabric and structure 

preserved; specimens can be easily crumbled or penetrated 

STRENGTH (Bedrock) 

Plastic 

Very low strength 

Friable 

Crumbles easily by rubbing with fingers 

Weak 

An unfractured specimen will crumble under light 

hammer blows 

Moderately strong Specimen will withstand a few heavy hammer blows 

before breaking 

Strong 

Specimen will withstand a few heavy ringing blows and 

will yield with difficulty only dust and small flying 

fragments 

Very strong Specimen will resist heavy ringing hammer blows and 

will yield with difficulty only dust and small flying 

fragments 

BEDDING (Bedrock) SPACING (inches) FRACTURING (Bedrock) SPACING (inches) 

Very thickly bedded > 48 Very little fractured > 48 

Thickly bedded 24 to 48 Occasionally fractured 12 to 48 

Thin bedded 2.5 to 24 Moderately fractured 6 to 12 

Very thin bedded 5/8 to 2.5 Closely fractured 1 to 6 

Laminated 1/8 to 5/8 Intensely fractrured 5/8 to 1 

Thinly laminated

Client: Gasser Foundation Client No.: V3200-001 

433 Soscol Avenue, Suite A120 Report No.: 0300-001 

Napa, CA 94559 Date: 12/14/10 

Project: South River Place Phase I Submitted by: KC Engineering 


Date 

11/29/10 

Submitted: 

________________________________________________________________ 

Density of In Place Soil by the Drive Tube Method (ASTM D2937) and 

Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit & Plasticity Index of Soils (ASTM D4318) 

Sample 

# 

Description 

Dry 

Density 

p.c.f. 

Moisture 

Content 

% 

Liquid 

Limit 

Plastic 

Limit 

Plastic 

Index 

1-1b @ 19.0’ Gray Sandy Clay (Visual) 77.7 41.1 --- --- --- 

1-2 @ 24.0’ Dark Brown Clay (Visual) 86.6 33.8 --- --- --- 

1-3 @ 29.0’ Dark Brown Clay (Visual) 85.2 35.5 --- --- --- 

2-1 @ 14.0’ Brown Clayey Sand (Visual) 110.9 9.5 --- --- --- 


2-3a @ 23.0’ Dark Gray Sandy Silt --- --- 28 24 4 

2-3b @ 24.0’ Dark Gray Clay (Visual) 68.8 47.0 --- --- --- 

2-4 @ 29.0’ Brown Clay (Visual) 93.5 30.2 --- --- --- 

3-1 @ 3.5’ Brown Sandy Clay with Trace 119.8 10.7 --- --- --- 

Gravel (Visual) 

3-2 @ 9.0’ Dark Gray Clayey Sand 108.3 14.8 --- --- --- 

(Visual) 

3-3a @ 13.0’ Dark Gray Clayey Sand --- --- 32 21 11 

3-3b @ 14.0’ Gray Sandy Clay (Visual) 72.8 46.0 --- --- --- 


3-5 @ 24.0’ Brown Sandy Clay (Visual) 78.1 35.0 --- --- --- 

4-1 @ 3.0’ Brown Sandy Clay (Visual) 93.2 27.1 40 21 19 


5-2b @ 8.0’ Brown Sandy Clay (Visual) 87.7 33.2 --- --- --- 


6-1 @ 3.0’ Brown Sandy Clay (Visual) 84.8 25.8 53 26 27 




Construction Materials Testing and Quality Control Services 

Soil - Concrete - Asphalt - Steel - Masonry

Sample 

# 

Description 

Dry 

Density 

p.c.f. 

Moisture 

Content 

% 

Liquid 

Limit 

Plastic 

Limit 

Plastic 

Index 


7-2 @ 8.0’ Dark Brown Silty Clay 84.5 37.1 --- --- --- 

(Visual) 

7-3 @ 13.0’ Dark Brown Sandy Clay 79.0 39.5 --- --- --- 

(Visual) 

7-4 @ 18.0’ Dark Brown Sandy Clay 

(Visual) 

84.8 35.7 --- --- ---

120 

110 

100 

90 

80 

70 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 

KEY SYMBOL 

SAMPLE 

NUMBER 

Depth 

NATURAL 

MOISTURE 

CONTENT, % 

PLASTIC 

LIMIT, PL, % 

LIQUID LIMIT, 

LL, % 

PLASTICITY 

INDEX, PI, % 

UNIFIED SOIL 

CLASSIFICATION SYMBOL 

2-3a 23 feet --- 24 28 4 ML 

3-3a 13 feet --- 21 32 11 SC 

4-1 3 feet 27.1 21 40 19 CL 

6-1 3 feet 34.1 26 53 27 CH 




(707) 447-4025 





PLASTICITY CHART AND DATA

Particle Size Distribution Report 

100 

6 in. 

3 in. 

2 in. 

1½ in. 

1 in. 

¾ in. 

½ in. 

3/8 in. 

#4 

#10 

#20 

#30 

#40 

#60 

#100 

#140 

#200 

90 

80 

70 

PERCENT FINER 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

% +3" 

100 

10 

1 

GRAIN SIZE - mm. 

% Gravel 

% Sand 

Coarse Fine Coarse Medium 

Fine 

0.1 

Silt 

0.01 

% Fines 

0.0 0.0 3.0 6.3 10.9 22.0 57.8 

Clay 

0.001 

SIEVE PERCENT SPEC.* PASS? 

SIZE FINER PERCENT (X=NO) 

3/8 

#4 

#8 

#16 

#30 

#50 

#100 

#200 

100.0 

97.0 

92.0 

87.0 

83.0 

76.0 

68.0 

57.8 

Material Description 

Brown Sandy Clay (Visual) 

Atterberg Limits 

PL= --- LL= --- PI= --- 

Coefficients 

D 90 = 1.8242 D 85 = 0.8183 D 60 = 0.0864 

D 50 = D 30 = D 15 = 

D 10 = C u = C c = 

USCS= 

Classification 

CL AASHTO= --- 

Remarks 

* 

(no specification provided) 

Location: South River Place Phase I 

Sample Number: 1-5 Depth: 38.0' Date: 

12/10/10 

Client: Gasser Foundation 

Project: South River Place Phase I 


Project No: VV3200-001 

Figure 

0400-002


100 

6 in. 

3 in. 

2 in. 

1½ in. 

1 in. 

¾ in. 

½ in. 

3/8 in. 

#4 

#10 

#20 

#30 

#40 

#60 

#100 

#140 

#200 

90 

80 

70 

PERCENT FINER 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

% +3" 

100 

10 

1 


% Gravel 

% Sand 


Fine 

0.1 

Silt 

0.01 

% Fines 

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.9 48.2 50.9 

Clay 

0.001 



#4 

#8 

#16 

#30 

#50 

#100 

#200 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

97.0 

84.0 

50.9 


Dark Gray Sandy Silt 


PL= 24 LL= 28 PI= 4 

Coefficients 

D 90 = 0.1854 D 85 = 0.1546 D 60 = 0.0887 

D 50 = D 30 = D 15 = 

D 10 = C u = C c = 

USCS= 

ML 


AASHTO= 

Remarks 

A-4(0) 

* 



Sample Number: 2-3a Depth: 23.0' Date: 

12/10/10 





Figure 

0400-003


100 

6 in. 

3 in. 

2 in. 

1½ in. 

1 in. 

¾ in. 

½ in. 

3/8 in. 

#4 

#10 

#20 

#30 

#40 

#60 

#100 

#140 

#200 

90 

80 

70 

PERCENT FINER 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

100 

10 

1 

0.1 

0.01 

0.001 

% +3" 


% Gravel 

% Sand 


Fine 

Silt 

% Fines 

87.9 

Clay 



#200 87.9 


Dark Brown Sandy Clay (Visual) 


PL= --- LL= --- PI= --- 

Coefficients 

D 90 = D 85 = D 60 = 

D 50 = D 30 = D 15 = 

D 10 = C u = C c = 

USCS= 


CH AASHTO= --- 

Remarks 

* 




12/10/10 





Figure 

0300-004


100 

6 in. 

3 in. 

2 in. 

1½ in. 

1 in. 

¾ in. 

½ in. 

3/8 in. 

#4 

#10 

#20 

#30 

#40 

#60 

#100 

#140 

#200 

90 

80 

70 

PERCENT FINER 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

100 

10 

1 

0.1 

0.01 

0.001 

% +3" 


% Gravel 

% Sand 


Fine 

Silt 

% Fines 

62.3 

Clay 



#200 62.3 




PL= --- LL= --- PI= --- 

Coefficients 

D 90 = D 85 = D 60 = 

D 50 = D 30 = D 15 = 

D 10 = C u = C c = 

USCS= 



Remarks 

* 




12/10/10 





Figure 

0300-005


100 

6 in. 

3 in. 

2 in. 

1½ in. 

1 in. 

¾ in. 

½ in. 

3/8 in. 

#4 

#10 

#20 

#30 

#40 

#60 

#100 

#140 

#200 

90 

80 

70 

PERCENT FINER 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

% +3" 

100 

10 

1 


% Gravel 

% Sand 


Fine 

0.1 

Silt 

0.01 

% Fines 

0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 6.5 65.5 27.0 

Clay 

0.001 



1/2 

3/8 

#4 

#8 

#16 

#30 

#50 

#100 

#200 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

99.0 

99.0 

97.0 

82.0 

46.0 

27.0 


Dark Gray Clayey Sand 


PL= 21 LL= 32 PI= 11 

Coefficients 

50 30 15 

D 10 = C u = C c = 

D 90 = 0.3807 

D = 0.1633 

D 85 = 0.3238 

D = 0.0875 

D 60 = 0.1969 

D = 


USCS= SC 

AASHTO= A-2-6(0) 

Remarks 

* 



Sample Number: 3-3a Depth: 13.0' Date: 

12/10/10 





Figure 

0400-006


100 

6 in. 

3 in. 

2 in. 

1½ in. 

1 in. 

¾ in. 

½ in. 

3/8 in. 

#4 

#10 

#20 

#30 

#40 

#60 

#100 

#140 

#200 

90 

80 

70 

PERCENT FINER 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

100 

10 

1 

0.1 

0.01 

0.001 

% +3" 


% Gravel 

% Sand 


Fine 

Silt 

% Fines 

54.3 

Clay 



#200 54.3 


Gray Sandy Clay (Visual) 


PL= --- LL= --- PI= --- 

Coefficients 

D 90 = D 85 = D 60 = 

D 50 = D 30 = D 15 = 

D 10 = C u = C c = 

USCS= 


CH AASHTO= --- 

Remarks 

* 



Sample Number: 3-3b Depth: 14.0' Date: 

12/10/10 





Figure 

0400-007


100 

6 in. 

3 in. 

2 in. 

1½ in. 

1 in. 

¾ in. 

½ in. 

3/8 in. 

#4 

#10 

#20 

#30 

#40 

#60 

#100 

#140 

#200 

90 

80 

70 

PERCENT FINER 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

100 

10 

1 

0.1 

0.01 

0.001 

% +3" 


% Gravel 

% Sand 


Fine 

Silt 

% Fines 

49.0 

Clay 



#200 49.0 


Brown Clayey Sand (Visual) 


PL= --- LL= --- PI= --- 

Coefficients 

D 90 = D 85 = D 60 = 

D 50 = D 30 = D 15 = 

D 10 = C u = C c = 

USCS= 


SC AASHTO= --- 

Remarks 

* 




12/10/10 





Figure 

0300-008


100 

6 in. 

3 in. 

2 in. 

1½ in. 

1 in. 

¾ in. 

½ in. 

3/8 in. 

#4 

#10 

#20 

#30 

#40 

#60 

#100 

#140 

#200 

90 

80 

70 

PERCENT FINER 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

100 

10 

1 

0.1 

0.01 

0.001 

% +3" 


% Gravel 

% Sand 


Fine 

Silt 

% Fines 

85.1 

Clay 



#200 85.1 




PL= --- LL= --- PI= --- 

Coefficients 

D 90 = D 85 = D 60 = 

D 50 = D 30 = D 15 = 

D 10 = C u = C c = 

USCS= 



Remarks 

* 




12/10/10 





Figure 

0300-009


100 

6 in. 

3 in. 

2 in. 

1½ in. 

1 in. 

¾ in. 

½ in. 

3/8 in. 

#4 

#10 

#20 

#30 

#40 

#60 

#100 

#140 

#200 

90 

80 

70 

PERCENT FINER 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

100 

10 

1 

0.1 

0.01 

0.001 

% +3" 


% Gravel 

% Sand 


Fine 

Silt 

% Fines 

36.4 

Clay 



#200 36.4 


Brown Clayey Sand (Visual) 


PL= --- LL= --- PI= --- 

Coefficients 

D 90 = D 85 = D 60 = 

D 50 = D 30 = D 15 = 

D 10 = C u = C c = 

USCS= 


SC AASHTO= --- 

Remarks 

* 




12/10/10 





Figure 

0300-010


100 

6 in. 

3 in. 

2 in. 

1½ in. 

1 in. 

¾ in. 

½ in. 

3/8 in. 

#4 

#10 

#20 

#30 

#40 

#60 

#100 

#140 

#200 

90 

80 

70 

PERCENT FINER 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

100 

10 

1 

0.1 

0.01 

0.001 

% +3" 


% Gravel 

% Sand 


Fine 

Silt 

% Fines 

75.0 

Clay 



#200 75.0 


Dark Brown Sandy Clay (Visual) 


PL= --- LL= --- PI= --- 

Coefficients 

D 90 = D 85 = D 60 = 

D 50 = D 30 = D 15 = 

D 10 = C u = C c = 

USCS= 



Remarks 

* 




12/10/10 





Figure 

0300-011

APPENDIX B 

2002 INVESTIGATION APPENDIX 

Site Plan 

Conceptual Site Plan 

Logs of Test Borings 

Test Pit Log 


N 




Project No. VV954-02 

Proposed Commercial Development 

Imola Avenue, Napa, California 

Figure No. 1 "VICINITY MAP"


BORING NO.: 1 

PROJECT: Geotechnical Services/Commercial Dev PROJECT NO.: VV954-02 

CLIENT: Gasser Foundation DATE: 5-14-02 

LOCATION: Hartle Court-South Area, Gasser Drive ELEVATION: NA 

DRILLER: RAM Enterprises 

LOGGED BY: PGT 

DRILL RIG: B-24 BORING DIAMETER: 4" 

DEPTH TO WATER: INITIAL : 11' FINAL : AFTER: hrs. 

DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Mottled Brown Silty CLAY, dry to slightly moist, firm (FILL) 

CL- 

CH 

Dark Brown Silty CLAY w/Sands, moist, firm (FILL) 

5 

1-1 

7 

84.0 

32.0 

φ=31 

c=328psf 

10 

Grayish Black Silty CLAY, wet and very stiff (NATIVE) 

CH 

1-2 

17 

84.2 

35.3 

15 

Mottled Brown and Gray Silty CLAY, wet and stiff 

CL- 

CH 

20 

1-3 

13 

82.5 

36.3 

25 




BORING NO.: 1 








DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



30 

1-4 

Brown Sandy GRAVEL, w/few fines, wet and very dense 

GM 

100+ 107.6 14.2 %


BORING NO.: 2 








DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Brown Silty CLAY, dry and firm (FILL) 

CL- 

CH 

Mottled Brown and Gray Silty CLAY, firm, moist (FILL) 

CL- 

CH 

5 

2-1 

Grayish Black Silty CLAY, wet and stiff (NATIVE) 

CH 

15 

81.4 

38.9 

LL=73% 

PI=46 

10 

2-2 

Grayish Black Silty CLAY, wet and stiff 

12 

75.3 

41.7 

UCC=3190psf 

15 

20 

2-3 

Bluish Gray Silty CLAY, wet and stiff 

10 

75.2 

44.7 

Over-Consol 

25 




BORING NO.: 2 








DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



30 

2-4 

Brown Sandy GRAVEL w/few fines, wet and very dense 

Boring Terminated @ 30.5' 

Groundwater Encountered @ 11' 

GM 

100+ Sample in Liner SPT 

35 

40 

45 

50 

55 




BORING NO.: 3 








DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Mottled Brown Silty CLAY mixed w/some debris, moist and very stiff 

(FILL) 

CL- 

CH 

5 

3-1 

23 

96.0 

23.8 

10 

3-2 

Dark Brown and Gray Silty CLAY, moist and stiff (NATIVE) 

CL 

18 

85.7 

33.8 LL=46% 

PI=20 

15 

20 

25 




BORING NO.: 3 








DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



30 

35 

Brown Sandy GRAVEL w/few fines, wet and very dense 

GM- 

GC 

40 

3-3 

56 %


BORING NO.: 4 







DEPTH TO WATER: INITIAL : 9.5' FINAL : AFTER: hrs. 

DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Brown Clayey SAND, moist and medium dense (DREDGE FILL) 

SC 

5 

4-1 

17 

92.0 

10.2 

%


BORING NO.: 4 







DEPTH TO WATER: INITIAL : 9.5' FINAL : AFTER: hrs. 

DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



30 

35 

Brown Sandy Gravel, wet and very dense 

GM 

Boring Terminated @ 36' 

Groundwater Encountered @ 9.5' 

40 

45 

50 

55 




BORING NO.: 5 








DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Dark Brown Silty CLAY, moist and soft to firm (FILL) 

CL- 

CH 

5 

5-1 

Black Silty CLAY, wet very stiff (NATIVE) 

CH 

25 

89.1 

32.9 

LL=63% 

PI=37 

10 

Dark Brown Gravelly CLAY, wet and stiff 

CL- 

CH 

15 

5-2 

11 

91.4 

23.4 

Under-Consol 

20 

25 

----As Above, very stiff 




BORING NO.: 5 








DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



30 

5-3 

Brown Sandy GRAVEL, wet and very dense. 



GM 

100+ SPT 

35 

40 

45 

50 

55 




BORING NO.: 6 








DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Mottled Orange and Gray Clayey SILT, moist and soft (FILL) 

ML 

6-1 

3 

76.9 

33.9 

UCC=371psf 

5 

Dark Brown Silty CLAY, w/few gravels, wet and stiff (NATIVE) 

CH 

10 

6-2 

13 

87.8 

34.0 

15 

Dark Brown Silty CLAY, w/more gravels, wet and stiff 

CL 

20 

25 

6-3 

Brown Gravelly CLAY w/Sand, wet, very stiff 

GM 

23 

No Recovery 

Boring Terminated @ 26.5' 




BORING NO.: 7 








DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Brown Clayey SILT w/gravels, dry and firm (FILL) 

ML 

5 

7-1 

Dark Bluish Silty SAND w/Clay, wet and loose (FILL) 

SM- 

SC 

6 

73.0 

45.6 

%Clay=10.4 

%


BORING NO.: 7 








DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



Sandy GRAVEL, wet and very dense 

GM 

30 



35 

40 

45 

50 

55 




BORING NO.: 8 








DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



0 

Brown Clayey SAND w/ few gravels, moist and medium dense 

(FILL) 

SC 

8-1 

27 

108.2 

11.4 

5 

Dark Bluish Gray Gravelly SAND w/Clay, wet and medium dense 

(FILL) 

SM 

10 

8-2 

12 

99.7 

15.5 %


BORING NO.: 8 








DEPTH 

SAMPLE NO. 

SAMPLER 

GRAPHIC LOG 


AND 





DRY DENSITY 

(PCF) 


(PERCENT) 



30 

35 

Sandy GRAVEL, wet and very dense 

GM 

40 



45 

50 

55 




Vacaville, California 95688 

(707) 447-4025 

8798 Airport Road 

Redding, California 96002 

(530) 222-0832 


A SUBSIDIARY OF MATERIALS TESTING, INC. 

TEST PIT LOG 

Mr. Joseph Peatman 

Hartle Court-South Area, Gasser Drive 

Napa, CA 

Date of Test Pits: 5/13/02 


TEST 

PIT 

NO. 

DEPTH 

(feet) 

USCS 

DESCRIPTION 

1A & 

1B 

0-7’ 

CL/CH 

Mottled Brown, Rust-Stained Silty CLAY, firm, moist w/minor 

Sands and Gravels (CLEAN FILL) 

7’-15’ 

CH 

Black Silty CLAY, wet, firm, alluvium (NATIVE) seepage at 

contact, groundwater encountered at 12’ 

2 0-3.5’ 

3.5’-11’ 

CL/CH 

CL/CH 

Mottled Brown Silty CLAY, moist firm to stiff 

(DREDGE/FILL) 

Grayish Black Silty CLAY, wet, groundwater encountered 

at 10’ seepage (NATIVE?) 

3 0-6’ 

6’-10’ 

10-13’ 

CL/CH 

CH 

CH 

Mottled Brown Sandy Silty CLAY, mixed w/asphalt 

and concrete debris (FILL) 

Brown w/Rust colored seams Silty CLAY, very moist, firm to 

stiff (seepage at base) (DREDGE/FILL) 

Black CLAY, very moist, stiff (NATIVE) 

865 Cotting Lane, Suite A, Vacaville, CA 95688 

1 of 3

TEST 

PIT 

NO. 

DEPTH 

(feet) 

4 0-8’ 

8-12’ 

12-15’ 

5 0-10’ 

10-19’ 

19-21’ 

6 0-10’ 

10-19’ 

19-21’ 

7 0-12’ 

12-15’ 

15-17’ 

8 0-8’ 

8-17’ 

17-19’ 

9 0-12’ 

12-15’ 

15-18’ 

USCS 

SC 

SM/SC 

CH 

SM/SC 

SM/SC 

CH 

SM/SC 

SM 

CH 

SC 

SP 

CH 

SC 

SM 

CH 

SM/SC 

SP 

CH 

DESCRIPTION 


Brown Clayey SAND, w/minor debris, moist, loose (FILL) 

sidewalls caving 

Bluish Gray Clayey SAND, wet, loose (FILL) sidewalls caving 

Black Silty CLAY, very moist, stiff (NATIVE) 

Brown Clayey Silty SAND, loose, moist (FILL) 

Bluish Gray Clayey SAND, wet, loose (SEEPAGE/CAVING) 

Black CLAY (NATIVE) wet, stiff 

Brown Clayey Silty SAND, loose, moist (FILL) 

Bluish Gray SAND, wet, loose (SEEPAGE/CAVING) 

Black CLAY (NATIVE) wet, stiff 

Mottled Brown Clayey SAND w/gravels, very moist (FILL) 

Bluish Gray SAND, wet, loose (FILL) (SEEPAGE/CAVING) 

Black CLAY, wet, firm (NATIVE) 

Medium Brown Clayey SAND, w/Gravels, moist (FILL) 

Bluish Gray Silty Gravelly SAND, wet, loose 

(SEEPAGE/CAVING) (FILL) 

Black Silty CLAY, wet, firm to stiff (NATIVE) 

Brown Clayey Silty SAND, mixed w/Gravels, moist, loose 

(FILL) 

Gray Blue SAND, wet, loose (FILL) (SEEPAGE/CAVING) 

Black and Gray Silty CLAY, wet, firm to stiff (NATIVE) 


2 of 3

TEST 

PIT 

NO. 

DEPTH 

(feet) 

10A 0-4’ 

4-9’ 

9-11’ 

10B 0-4’ 

4-10’ 

10-12’ 

11 0-7’ 

7-10’ 

12 0-5’ 

5-7’ 

13 0-7’ 

7-9’ 

14 0-7’ 

7-9’ 

USCS 

CL 

CL 

CL 

CL 

CL 

CL 

CL/ML 

CH 

CL/CH 

CH 

CL 

CH 

CL 

CH 

DESCRIPTION 


Medium Brown Sandy Silty CLAY, mixed w/Wood, Rebar, AC, 

Concrete, moist, firm (FILL) 

Blue Gray Sandy Silty CLAY, w/minor organics 

(DREDGE/FILL) 

Black Silty CLAY, wet (NATIVE) seepage at 9’ 

Medium Brown Sandy Silty CLAY, mixed w/Wood, Rebar, AC, 

Concrete, moist, firm (FILL) 

Gray and Brown Mottled Sandy CLAY, wet, soft (DREDGE 

FILL) (SEEPAGE) 

Black CLAY, wet, stiff (NATIVE) 

Brown Sandy Silty CLAY/Clayey SILT, very moist to wet, soft, 

hole caving (DREDGE/FILL) seepage at 5’ 

Black to Dark Gray CLAY, wet, firm to stiff (NATIVE) 

Mottled Brown Silty CLAY, moist, firm to stiff (DREDGE/FILL) 

seepage at contact (perched) 

Black Silty CLAY, moist, stiff (NATIVE) 

Mottled Brown Silty CLAY, very moist to set, firm to soft, 

hole caving (DREDGE/FILL) seepage above contact 

Black Silty CLAY, wet, stiff (NATIVE) 

Mottled Brown Silty CLAY, very moist to set, firm to soft, 

hole caving (DREDGE/FILL) seepage above contact 

Black CLAY, wet, stiff (NATIVE) 


3 of 3

APPENDIX C 

2009 INVESTIGATION APPENDIX 

Site Plan 

Logs of Test Borings 


APPENDIX B – STORMWATER 

MANAGEMENT & HYDRAULICS 

REPORT 



KIP # 165582

STORMWATER MANAGEMENT 

AND HYDRAULICS REPORT 

JUNE 24, 2011 

STORMWATER POND 

MODIFICATION 

SOUTH NAPA MARKETPLACE 

(LOCATED AT SOUTH NAPA CENTURY CENTER) 

NAPA, CA 

PROJECT #: 2008005.00 

PREPARED BY 

15 Third Street, Santa Rosa, CA 95401 

Tel: 707 542 6451 Fax: 707 542 5212 

CIVIL ENGINEERS 

• URBAN PLANNERS • LAND SURVEYORS • 

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS

STORMWATER POND MODIFICATION 


JUNE 24, 2011 

PAGE 1 

INTRODUCTION 

This report includes a modified stormwater runoff management plan and a hydraulic design 

report for the proposed modifications to the existing stormwater runoff system for the South 

Napa Marketplace shopping center. The modifications will replace the existing South Pond 

system, which collects runoff from the southern portion of the center, with an upgraded 

stormwater collection and treatment system in an underground structural BMP chamber system. 

This modification structural BMP system is located in the development of part of the planned 

South Napa Century Center project which calls for the construction of a theatre complex and 

related retail on the parcel adjacent to the South Napa Marketplace center. 

EXISTING CONDITIONS 

The South Napa Marketplace site includes separate pond systems that collect drainage from the 

northern and southern portions of the shopping center. The southern portion of the site (25.3 

acres) is served by the South Pond drainage system and the northern portion (5.4 acres) is served 

by the North Pond drainage system. Only the South Pond system will be affected by this 

proposed stormwater system modifications. The South Pond system is located on the parcel 

adjacent to the shopping center on the proposed site for the South Napa Century Center. 

The South Pond stormwater treatment system includes a two-stage vegetated wet pond consisting 

of a smaller settling pond (forebay) and a large retention basin (afterbay), followed by a linear 

riprap channel. Collected runoff from 25.3 acres enters the forebay via a 48” concrete pipe that 

crosses under Gasser Drive from South Napa Marketplace. The forebay has a detention capacity 

of approximately 0.57 acre-feet, and the detention basin has an estimated nominal capacity of 

5.07 acre-feet, with a total system volume of 5.6 acre-feet. Treated stormwater is then 

discharged via the riprap lined channel through two 66” CIP concrete storm drains to the 

remnant Tulocay Creek Channel on the south side of Imola Avenue, and ultimately to the Napa 

River. The riprap lined channel and twin 66” CIP pipes were originally installed by the Napa 

Flood Control District. 

The existing ponds lie at a bottom elevation of 3.5 ft with surrounding ground at approximately 

elevation 10. The forebay and detention ponds are separated by a weir at elevation 7.5 and the 

detention pond has a discharge via a dock weir at elevation 7.5. Hydraulic records for this 

system were not found in City of Napa files, with the best flow information available through the 

stormwater treatment system report by Woodward-Clyde that discusses the 10 and 100 year flow 

rates noted herein. Further refinement of design flows are noted in this report. We estimate the 

existing pond water elevation at approximately elevation 8 at the 100 year storm, backwatering 

into the South Napa Marketplace discharge piping. The proposed structural BMP modification 

hydraulically adheres to the proposed estimated existing condition.



JUNE 24, 2011 

PAGE 2 


The proposed modification seeks to replace the existing South Pond system (forebay and 

afterbay) with an upgraded hybrid water quality management system made up of sequential 

structural BMPs, filtration, and an engineered bioswale for final polishing. The proposed 

modification consists of three stages. 

An updated Report of Waste Discharge for this proposed modification was approved by the San 

Francisco Regional Water Quality Board per an acceptance letter dated May 20, 2011. 

Primary Stage: Kristar Separator 

The first element of the proposed treatment system modification is to consist of a structural 

device, the Kristar FloGard Dual-Vortex hydrodynamic separator (Model DVS-96), to be 

installed in-line with a 48” HDPE storm drain. This structural BMP is designed to act as a 

primary clarifier, removing floatable oils and trash and large particles. 

Secondary Stage: StormTech Chamber System 

The major feature of the proposed pond modification is the subgrade chamber and gravel media 

filtration system to be installed beneath the planned South Napa Century Center parking lot, in 

the area now occupied by the existing pond system. The installation will consist of subsurface 

rows of high-volume StormTech chambers, including the Isolator Row, with an overall capacity 

volume of 1.63 acre-feet, and a detention volume of 1.54 acre-feet. Pre-screened runoff from the 

Kristar Primary Stage will be conveyed to the Isolator Row, transitioning into a large lined 

settling volume and distributed through the chamber and gravel system. The specially designed 

Isolator Row acts as a clarifier and filter for any remaining fine particulate and associated 

contaminants. 

The StormTech chamber system includes an Isolator Row filter to capture and filter the first 

flush and most flow events, followed by three additional gravel chambers for filtration and 

retention. The StormTech Isolator Row consists of a 406 foot long row of arched chambers, 5 

feet in height and 8 feet in width, set over a minimum of 15 inch drain rock base and surrounded 

by additional drain rock. In the Isolator Row, the otherwise open drain rock bottom of the 

chamber rows is lined with woven geotextile filter material. The Isolator Row is designed to 

distribute flow evenly throughout the chamber and gravel system. This system, installed beneath 

the South Napa Century Center parking lot, is designed to prevent short circuiting and enhance 

stormwater filtration. Flow patterns include upflow, down-flow, and lateral transport. 

Tertiary Stage: Bioswale 

The final polishing stage includes the conversion of the existing riprap lined channel that 

currently serves as a discharge channel for the existing pond during overflow conditions to a 

vegetated bioswale. This riprap lined channel is to be enhanced as an engineered bioswale. The 

bioswale will include a vegetated layer of bioswale soil mix over clean filtration gravel and 

divided into linear horizontal cells by rock check dams to add stability during high flows.



JUNE 24, 2011 

PAGE 3 

PROPOSED CONDITIONS 

Refer to the Carlile Macy Stormwater Pond Modification plans on (pages C8 – C11 of the South 

Napa Century Center plans by Foulk Gomez and Associates) for the layout of the proposed 

system, including details and specifications. Modifications to the storm drain system will begin 

at Gasser Drive; existing storm drains and flow controls located on the South Napa Marketplace 

site will not be modified. 

Drainage System 

The existing 18 and 15 inch storm drains that drain into the 30 inch concrete discharge pipe to 

the South Pond will be rerouted to a 60” manhole (MH 405) through a 48 inch pipe (all 

following storm drains will be 48 inches unless specified). MH 404 will connect to another 60” 

manhole (MH 404). The other existing 15 inch storm drain and the 24 inch storm drain will be 

rerouted to MH 404. From here a storm drain will direct stormwater west to a 60” manhole (MH 

402), make a 90-degree turn and enter the 8’x 8’ rectangular Kristar Separator (Sructure 403). 

The flow will make a 90-degree turn through the Kristar unit and enter a 84” manhole, MH 401, 

at the entrance to the StormTech chamber system. (Refer to page C8 for a layout of the proposed 

drainage system and page C10 for details of the Kristar unit). 

StormTech Chamber System 

MH 401 (see detail 2 on page C10) will control the flow into the Isolator Row and gravel 

chambers of the StormTech chamber system (see details on page C9 for the StormTech system). 

Flows up to 7.75 cfs will be directed through the 24 inch inlet stub to the Isolator Row where the 

stormwater will flow through the Isolator filter and subsurface gravel. The stormwater will 

continue to flow through the following three gravel chambers and discharge to a 96 inch 

manhole, MH 400 (see detail 1 on page C10). During high flows over 7.75 cfs, the stormwater 

will fill up the Isolator Row, over top of a weir at elevation 6.35 in MH 401, and bypass the 

Isolator Row by entering the 36 inch gravel chamber manifold. This weir will force most 

stormwaters through all chambers, enhancing filtration treatment and preventing short circuiting 

with a resulting backwater similar to existing hydraulics. The manifold will direct the high flow 

into the three gravel chambers through 30” inlet stubs. All collected and detained stormwater in 

the Isolator Row and the gravel chambers will flow through the subsurface gravel and discharge 

to MH 400 through a 48 inch pipe. The StormTech chambers and surrounding gravel will remain 

full of water controlled by the elevated discharge stormdrains at MH 401. Water surface in the 

structural BMP will vary from elevation 5.73 to approximately 8.0. A 6 inch perforated 

drainpipe will be placed at the bottom the StormTech chambers and will be directed into a 

concrete manhole pump sump. During the dry season an irrigation pump can draw the stored 

treated water from the sump for landscape irrigation, providing a maximum of 501,800 gallons 

of reclaimed water if the StormTech system is full to capacity. 

Bioswale 

The StormTech system will drain into MH 400 and eventually discharge into an engineered 

bioswale (see details page C11). Until the StormTech system has reached its overall retention 

volume 1.54 acre-feet, the stormwater will be stored and treated in the subsurface chambers and



JUNE 24, 2011 

PAGE 4 

gravel. When the subsurface system has reached its volume capacity the water will flow through 

two 30 inch outlet pipes and discharge to the bioswale. The treated stormwater will receive final 

polishing treatment while passing through the biofiltration soil mix and clean gravel bed. The 

225 foot bioswale will discharge treated stormwater outflow to two 66 inch existing CIP pipes 

and discharge to Tulocay Creek. 

DESIGN FLOWS AND STORAGE VOLUME 

The flow rate and volume metrics for the proposed improved stormwater treatment system were 

developed with modifications from the 1995 design report from Woodward-Clyde, “Storm Water 

Treatment Facilities for the South Napa Marketplace” (on file with the City of Napa). The 

original design overestimated storm event volumes using runoff curves from the 1993 California 

Municipal BMP Handbook. Since 1993, the City of Napa has developed hydraulic runoff curves 

specific to the local area, and thus more accurate than the handbook. (Woodward-Clyde runoff 

and hydrology tables are located in Tables 1 and 2 in Appendix A.) 

Updated discharge flow rates for the modified design were calculated using the Napa 

commercial area runoff curves over the 25.3 acre drainage area calculated by Woodward-Clyde 

(see Tables 1 and 2). A site runoff coefficient of 0.91 was used, representing the average 

coefficient used in the Woodward-Clyde design. Results indicate the 2, 10, and 100-year peak 

flows to be 4.59 cfs, 27.84 cfs, and 49.74 cfs, respectively (refer to the runoff curves for the 10 

and 100 year storm in Appendix A). 

The calculations presented in Table 2 establish the volumetric basis for the design of the South 

Pond. The pond was sized based on the mean annual storm volume of 1.15 acre-feet; calculated 

as a 0.2 in/hr storm event over 25.3 acres for 3 hrs. The overall volume of the subsurface 

chamber and gravel filter system is over 1.6 acre-feet, exceeding the mean annual storm volume 

of 1.15 acre-feet. 

HYDRAULIC DESIGN 

The hydraulics of the modified stormwater system were analyzed using StormCAD, with the 

exception of the StormTech chamber system and the bioswale which were designed using 

hydraulic calculations. A layout of the system designed in StormCAD and the resulting data and 

hydraulic profiles are located in Appendix B, as are all other hydraulic calculations. 

Design Assumptions 

Coefficient of Runoff: Tables 1 and 2 list the different runoff coefficients for the areas that drain 

to the existing stormwater pond. An average of these values, 0.91, was used for this project 

modification. 

Design Storm: The proposed modification to the stormwater system was designed for the 100- 

year storm, and also analyzed for the 10-year storm.



JUNE 24, 2011 

PAGE 5 

Mannings n-value: An n-value of 0.014 for HDPE pipe was used for all pipes within the 

stormwater system, except the pipes in the StormTech system which were given an n-value of 

0.012. An n-value of 0.34 for a vegetated roughened channel was used for evaluating the 

bioswale. 

Kristar Separator 

The Kristar DVS-96 unit was selected because it can perform under flows up to 57 cfs. Head 

losses due to friction were accounted for including 0.81 ft during the 10-year storm flow, and 

1.34 ft during the 100-year storm flow. 

Subsurface Stormwater Detention and Treatment System 

The detention and treatment system consisting of a StormTech chamber system includes multiple 

elements that require separate hydraulic analyses. StormTech design spreadsheets and hydraulic 

methodology provided by the manufacturer were followed to design the size of the chambers and 

associated piping. To ensure a detention volume equal to or greater than the mean average storm 

and to ensure sufficient water quality treatment, the system sizing was selected as one Isolator 

Row consisting of 99 chambers (52 inches wide per chamber) and three gravel chambers of 99 

chambers each (see Appendix B for the StormTech sizing spreadsheet). The maximum volume 

capacity of the chamber system is 1.63 acre-feet. The inlet and outlet manifolds were designed to 

pass the 100 year storm modeling existing backflow conditions upstream and to prevent scouring 

in the chambers that could erode the gravel bed. 

The inlet weir into the StormTech chambers was designed at an elevation of 6.35 in MH 401 to 

bypass high flows into the gravel chambers. The 24 inch inlet pipe to the Isolator Row can accept 

flows up to 7.75 cfs (see the Stormtech Isolator Row Capacity results in Appendix B) before 

flow is diverted to the other gravel chamber. The subsurface flow through the gravel flows at a 

maximum rate of 0.24 cfs per chamber. With a total of 99 chambers in the Isolator Row, 

stormwater flows through the gravel at a rate of approximately 24 cfs. The gravel chamber 

manifold (36 inches) and stubs (30 inches) into the three chambers were designed to accept the 

full 100 year flow of 50 cfs. The outlet manifold (48 inchs) and stubs (42 inches) were designed 

to accept the full 100 year flow and discharge to the bioswale through MH 400. 

Bioswale 

The two 30 inch pipes from MH 400 will outfall to the surface of the bioswale at an elevation of 

5.73 feet. The bioswale was designed to have 12 foot base, side slopes of 2:1, a length of 225 

and a slope of 0.24%. The bioswale channel will include a minimum of 10 inches of gravel 

covered by a maximum of 9 inches of biofiltration soil mix. The bioswale was modeled as a 

uniform channel to determine the depth of the water above the bioswale at different storm events 

(see the Bioswale Design Calculations in Appendix B). 

The present rock riprap swale has been encroached on by the recent Imola Avenue Caltrans 

improvements. The rock swale will be modified, staying in South Napa Century Center’s 

property, by adding a topping of biofiltration medium. The existing, minor swale waters from



JUNE 24, 2011 

PAGE 6 

Imola Avenue embankment will enter the bioswale and continue to discharge to the current 

storm drains without disruption. 

Small flows in the bioswale will be subsurface, with increasing larger flows splitting flows 

between surface and subsurface flows. The bioswale will also encourage and utilize infiltration 

to meet stormwater BMP goals. 

Hydraulic Results 

The StormCAD profiles and results for the 10 and 100 years storm are located in Appendix B. 

The proposed design maintains a hydraulic grade line below ground elevation throughout the 

storm drain system and the subsurface StormTech chamber system. During the 100 year storm, 

the hydraulic grade at the inlet to the bioswale will be 7.3 feet, lowering to 6.51 feet at the toe of 

the bioswale. 

The pond modification to a structural underground chamber BMP system will achieve superior 

water treatment with similar hydraulic conditions. The larger storm flows will pass through this 

piping/chamber system while maintaining historic hydraulic conditions. 

STORMWATER TREATMENT 

The proposed stormwater modification system is designed to address water quality requirements, 

in specific the contaminants associated with the land use type and the constituents that are 

contributing to the impairment of the receiving waters, the Napa River 

Characterization of Discharge 

Target contaminants that the stormwater treatment system is intended to mitigate are metals 

(copper and zinc), hydrocarbons associated with parking lots and runoff from some roof and 

building materials, trash and debris, sediment, and turbidity. Other pollutants of concern for this 

site include nutrients and pesticides from landscaped areas. Mitigation of possible nutrient 

discharges of fertilizer and pesticide use at South Napa Marketplace landscaping is covered in 

the maintenance agreement between the property owner, the Gasser Foundation, and the 

shopping center owner and operator, Kimco. Other good housekeeping requirements of this 

operating agreement include regular street sweeping, and a comprehensive list of proscribed 

activities that could result in diminished water quality. Table 3 in Appendix A presents the 

inflow concentration data from runoff entering the existing South and North Pond systems as a 

geometric mean of samples taken from three separate storm events. 

The treated stormwater receiving waters for this site, the Napa River, is listed as a Water Quality 

Limited, or Impaired Water Body. The constituents adding to the impairment of the river, 

according to the 2006 Clean Water Act 303(d) list, are nutrients, pathogens, and sediment. 

Currently, TMDL reports have been completed for pathogens and sediment, but not for nutrients. 

The TMDL for pathogens specifies density-based pollutant wasteload allocations for municipal 

runoff. These wasteload allocations include geometric mean concentrations of the following:



JUNE 24, 2011 

PAGE 7 

• < 113 CFU/100mL of E. coli, 

• < 180 CFU/100mL of fecal coliform, 

• Median concentrations of < 216 CFU/100mL of total coliform. 

It is not anticipated that treated stormwater effluent from the proposed project will exceed these 

maximum limits. The TMDL for sedimentation specifies no new regulations for urban 

stormwater discharges; instead best management practices are required to decrease sedimentation 

at the source, as is the case through the diligent housekeeping practices at South Napa 

Marketplace. Nutrient levels of stormwater runoff were found to be very low (refer to Table 3), 

again a reflection of the operating requirements and proscriptions at this shopping center. The 

BMPs proposed in this application for modification will adequately address any remaining 

nutrient levels that may be present. Thus, nutrient levels in the stormwater effluent are not 

expected to add to the impairment of the Napa River. 

Expected Effluent Water Quality 

Anticipated effluent concentrations were estimated in Table 5 in Appendix A for the proposed 

system using the documented removal rates for the treatment system elements discussed below. 

Since the most current monitoring data for the existing system includes fairly low stormwater 

inflow concentrations which may not be representative of the site’s actual first flush 

concentrations, average national stormwater data for commercial properties was used (obtained 

from the National Stormwater Quality Database, Version 1.1, taken from the report "A 

Compilation and Analysis of NPDES Stormwater Monitoring Information" compiled by the 

University of Alabama). However, actual data from the existing monitoring report was used for 

the initial total petroleum hydrocarbons (TPH) concentration, as this value was higher than the 

national average. This may be accountable to the presence of relatively new asphalt. 

Effluent concentrations were calculated for stormwater exiting the Kristar Separator (Primary 

Stage Treatment) using a conservative total suspended solids (TSS) removal rate of 60% and a 

TPH removal rate of 53%. Effluent concentrations exiting the StormTech sub-grade chamber and 

gravel media filter system (Secondary Stage Treatment) were estimated using removal rates of 

80% TSS, 90% TPH, 53% total zinc (TZn), and 49% total phosphorus (TP). Bioswale removal 

rates included 95% removal of any residual TSS, TPH, and TP, and 55% removal of TZn. 

Refer to Appendix A for a report summary of the documented performance for each treatment 

stage by which the expected effluent water quality was estimated. 

Monitoring and Maintenance 

Monitoring and maintenance of the proposed stormwater system will be greatly simplified, in 

comparison to that of the South Pond. Regular maintenance will include sediment and trash 

removal from the, and trash removal and vegetation management of the bioswale. Removal of 

sediment from the Kristar Separator unit and the Isolator Row will also remove associated 

contaminants.



JUNE 24, 2011 

PAGE 8 

The structural BMPs can be maintained as part of a catch basin-type maintenance schedule. The 

Kristar Separator is maintained by removing the standard manhole cover access lids and 

vacuuming out the accumulated trash, oil, and sediments, at a regular interval and prior to the 

commencement of the rainy season. The system should be inspected by-annually. 

The Isolator Row should also be inspected by-annually. Inspection ports on the ends of the row 

allow access for inspection, and the 30 inch basins in the middle and end of the row allow access 

for cleaning. When sediment build up reaches a height of 3 inches, the row will need to be jetted 

and vacuumed using a vacuum truck; equipment similar to that used for pipeline maintenance.



JUNE 24, 2011 

APPENDIX A 

HYDROLOGY & WATER QUALITY DATA



JUNE 24, 2011 

APPENDIX B 

HYDRAULICS CALCULATIONS & RESULTS

APPENDIX C – LEED CHECKLIST 



KIP # 165582

LEED 2009 New Construction Project Checklist Page 1 7 JULY 2011 

Page 1 

Possible 

Y N ? 

South Napa Century Center XD 12 

Hartle Court & Gasser Drive City of Napa, CA 94559 

B= Building S= Site 

Certified 40-49 points Silver 50-59 points Gold 60-79 points Platinum 80 or more points 

26 13 5 8 RESPONSIBILITY SUPPORT REMARKS 

Y SS Prereq 1 Construction Activity Pollution Prevention S CIVIL ENGINEER 

1 1 SS Credit 1 Site Selection S Cinemark 

GEN 

CONTRACTOR 

5 5 SS Credit 2 Development Density & Community Connectivity S LEED ADMIN Cinemark 

The site does not meet any of the criteria that would qualify it for 

this credit . 

1 1 SS Credit 3 Brownfield Redevelopment S Site is not a brownfield. 

6 6 SS Credit 4.1 Alternative Transportation, Public Transportation Access S LEED ADMIN There are 2 bus routes within 1/4 mile of the building. 

1 1 SS Credit 4.2 Alternative Transportation, Bicycle Storage & Changing Rooms B 

SITE ARCHITECT. 

ARCH 

LEED ADMIN 

3 3 SS Credit 4.3 Alternative Transportation, Low-Emitting and Fuel-Efficient VehS Gasser Foundation Cinemark 

2 2 SS Credit 4.4 Alternative Transportation, Parking Capacity S Gasser Foundation Cinemark 

1 1 * SS Credit 5.1 Site Development, Protect or Restore Habitat S Requires that 50% of site (excluding building footprint) or 20% of 

site (including building) be restored using native or adapted 

1 1 SS Credit 5.2 Site Development, Maximize Open Space S 

1 1 * SS Credit 6.1 Stormwater Design, Quantity Control S CIVIL ENGINEER Gasser Foundation 

Requires implementation of a stormwater management plan that 

results in a 25% decrease in the volume of stormwater runoff 

1 1 SS Credit 6.2 Stormwater Design, Quality Control S CIVIL ENGINEER Gasser Foundation 

Requires plan to remove 80% of avg annual post development 

total suspended solids (TSS) 

1 1 SS Credit 7.1 Heat Island Effect, Non Roof S Requires enough planting to shade 50% of parking lots 

1 1 SS Credit 7.2 Heat Island Effect, Roof B ARCHITECT Cinemark 

1 1 SS Credit 8 Light Pollution Reduction B/S 

SITE ARCHITECT. 

ARCH 

Cinemark 

Must specify light colored roofing with SRI equal to or greater than 

78 for 75% of roof surface. 

Must control interior light fixtures and design exterior light fixtures 

to minimize light trespass. 

Poss 

Regional Priority 

Sustainable Sites 

Yes No ? 

10 8 2 0 

Water Efficiency 

Y WE Prereq 1 Water Use Reduction - 20% Reduction S 

Must reduce potable water use for landscape by 50% and install 

4 2 2 WE Credit 1 Water Efficient Landscaping S LANDSCAPE ARCH CIVIL ENGINEER 

landscaping that doesn't require permanent irrigation system. 

2 2 * WE Credit 2 Innovative Wastewater Technologies B/S MEP ENGINEER Cinemark Requires that potable water use for building sewage conveyance 

be reduced by 50% through the use of water conserving fixtures. 

Requires further reduction in potable water use for flush and flow 

4 4 WE Credit 3 Water Use Reduction - 40% Reduction B MEP ENGINEER 

fixtures.


Page 2 

Poss 

Yes No ? 

Energy & Atmosphere 


Y EA Prereq 1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems B CxA GC, MC,EC 

Y EA Prereq 2 Minimum Energy Performance B MEP ENGINEER 

Y EA Prereq 3 Fundamental Refrigerant Management B MEP ENGINEER 

19 17 2 * EA Credit 1 Optimize Energy Performance B MEP ENGINEER TIFFANY 

7 7 * EA Credit 2 On-Site Renewable Energy B Cinemark Gasser Foundation 

Requires whole building energy modeling to confirm that building 

systems are 20% more efficient than ASHRAE 90.1-2007 

2 2 EA Credit 3 Enhanced Commissioning B CxA GC 

2 2 EA Credit 4 Enhanced Refrigerant Management B MEP ENGINEER 

3 3 EA Credit 5 Measurement & Verification B MEP ENGINEER LEED Admin 

Requires specification of HVAC equipment with proper 

refrigerants. 

Develop and implement a measurement & verification plan per 

IPMVP Volume III 

2 2 EA Credit 6 Green Power B Cinemark LEED Admin Requires 2 year agreement with local utility. 

Poss 

Yes No ? 

14 6 7 1 

Materials & Resources 

Y MR Prereq 1 Storage and Collection of Recyclables B ARCHITECT Cinemark 

3 3 * MR Credit 1.1 Building Reuse, Maintain Existing Walls, Floors & Roof B 

1 1 MR Credit 1.2 Building Reuse, Maintain 50% Interior non-struct elements B 

2 2 MR Credit 2 Construction Waste Management B GC LEED Admin 

2 2 MR Credit 3 Materials Reuse B 

An additional point can be earned if 95% of waste is diverted from 

landfill. 

2 2 MR Credit 4 Recycled Content B ARCHITECT GC Specify materials with high recycled content. 

2 1 1 MR Credit 5 Regional Materials B ARCHITECT GC 

1 1 Credit 6 Rapidly Renewable Resources B 

Specify materials that are manufactured and/or processed 

regionally. 

1 1 Credit 7 Certified Wood B GC ARCHIECT Provide FSC cerified wood products.


Page 3 

Poss 

Yes No ? 

Indoor Environmental Quality 


Y IEQ Prereq 1 Minimum IAQ Performance B MEP ENGINEER LEED Admin 

Y IEQ Prereq 2 Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control B/S Cinemark LEED Admin 

1 1 IEQ Credit 1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring B MEP ENGINEER LEED Admin 

1 1 IEQ Credit 2 Increased Ventilation B MEP ENGINEER TIFFANY 

1 1 IEQ Credit 3.1 Construction IAQ Management Plan - During Construction B GEN CONTRACTOR LEED ADMIN 

Requires that outdoor air ventilation rates exceed minimum 

ASHRAE standards by 30%. 

1 1 IEQ Credit 3.2 Construction IAQ Management Plan - Before Occupancy B GEN CONTRACTOR LEED ADMIN 

1 1 IEQ Credit 4.1 Low-Emitting Materials - Adhesives & Sealants B ARCHITECT LEED ADMIN / GC 

1 1 IEQ Credit 4.2 Low-Emitting Materials - Paints & Coatings B ARCHITECT LEED ADMIN / GC 

1 1 IEQ Credit 4.3 Low-Emitting Materials - Flooring Systems B ARCHITECT LEED ADMIN / GC 

1 1 IEQ Credit 4.4 Low-Emitting Materials - Composite Wood & Agrifiber Products B ARCHITECT LEED ADMIN / GC 

1 1 IEQ Credit 5 Indoor Chemical & Pollutant Source Control B ARCHITECT LEED ADMIN / GC 

1 1 IEQ Credit 6.1 Controllability of Systems - Lighting B 

1 1 IEQ Credit 6.2 Controllability of Systems - Thermal Comfort B 

1 1 IEQ Credit 7.1 Thermal Comfort - Design B MEP ENGINEER LEED Admin Comply with ASHRAE section 55 

1 1 IEQ Credit 7.2 Thermal Comfort - Verification B Cinemark LEED ADMIN 

1 1 IEQ Credit 8.1 Daylight & Views - Daylight B ARCHITECT LEED ADMIN 

1 1 IEQ Credit 8.2 Daylight & Views - Views B 

Requires that 75% of regularly occupied spaces receive daylight 

illuminance levels between 25 and 500 fc. 

Requires a direct line of site to exterior for occupants in 90% of all 

regularly occupied spaces. 

Poss 

Yes No ? ` 

6 5 0 1 

Innovation and Design Process 

5 1 ID Credit 1.1 ID 1 - Transportation Management Plan B/S Gasser Foundation 

1 ID Credit 1.2 ID 2 - Building Envelope Commissioning B CxA GC 

1 ID Credit 1.3 ID 3 - Recycled Content 30% B ARCHITECT GC 

1 ID Credit 1.4 ID 4 - Education of Building Occupants B Cinemark 

1 ID Credit 1.5 ID 5 - Green Cleaning B Cinemark 

1 1 

ID Credit 2 LEED Accredited Professional LEED ADMIN


Page 4 

Poss 

Yes No ? ` 

4 3 2 1 

4 3 2 1 

75 19 18 

Regional Priority 

RP Credit 1 Regional Priority B LEED ADMIN 

The project Is attempting 4 of the credits that can be used to 

achieve potential RP credits 

Project Totals Certified 40-49 points, Silver 50-59 points, Gold 60-79 points, Platinum 80 or more points

specs

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?